W,u- I^^HI In ^H nftwffi aSEfi&i mm iwm KOWfl pi Class EC £ . Bunk. .F"b5 i NEW METHOD OF LEARNING THE FRENCH LANGUAGE; EMBRACING . -TH THE Stnaletic ana ggntyetic ^ohts of Ittatrmtian ; BEING A PLAIN AND PRACTICAL^WAY OP ACQUIRING THE ART OP READING, SPEAKING, AND COMPOSING FRENCH. ON THE PLAN OF WOODBURY'S METHOD WITH GERMAN BY LOUIS FASQUELLE, LL.D. PROFESSOR OP MODERN LANGUAGES IN THE UNIVERSITY OP MICHIGAN TWENTY-SEVENTH EDITION. NEW YOKK: TYISON & PHINNEY, 321 BEOADWAY, (SUCCESSORS OP MARK H. NEWMAN & CO.) CHICAGO: S. C. GRIGGS & Co., Ill LAKE STREET. BUFFALO: PHINNET & CO. auburn: seymour sc alward. cincinnati: moore, wilstach, keys & co. Detroit: morse & selleok. st. louis: keith & woods. 1856. 1C We have published f or the use of Teachers, '•A Kev to the KxKRClflKS jn Fasqielle'sNew FRENpn Method, with occasional Notes and References to the Rules, ly Louis Fasquelle,LLJ >., Ac" Price 7fl cts. The "Key" can be sen bv mail, by Beading the publisher the price in F. O. stamps. \i:\vm.\x & Ivison. 09 FntERKP n.-. - IBM, n v LOO I B r a I Q D i: i. i. B, In the Clork't omc* of lb - i if thfl Doited Plat*-, for ew &jj* £onsi nf iju >nm$ Eangtugt AND LITEKATURK, THROUGHOUT THE- UNITED STATER Sljia bolnme SB JWOST KE8PKCTFULLY DEDICATED. WOODBURY'S GERMAN SERIES. I. NEW METHOD WITH GERMAN. 523 pp. 12mo.— Price, $1 50. II. KEY TO NEW METHOD. 80 pp. 12mo. — Price, 50 cents. III. SHORTER COURSE WITH GERMAN. 230 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. VI. KEY TO SHORTER COURSE. 80 pp. 1 2mo. — Price, 50 cento. V. ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER. 250 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cento. VI. ECLECTIC GERMAN READER. 280 pp. 12mo.— Pri« VD. GEBMAH-EHGLISH AND BIGLISH-GERMAB HEADER, 70 pp. 12mo. — Price, 25 cento. vin. WbvpVfmtp'i 9ttut WlttyvS* j u r 8 r I c r n u n g t c r e iu I i I* cb e n ^ p r a d) e. Prtil $i\ JTaoqucllc's J^rcncl) ©criea. I. FRENCH COURSE. 600 pp. 12ma — Price, $1 25. II. KEY TO FRENCH COURSE. ] |n pp. l'Jiiii..— Pri m. COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER. 260 pp. 18ma — Prioey 7r. cento. IV. TELEMAQUE. #90 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cento, V. NAPOLEON. 274 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. PREFACE The universality of the French language furnishes sufficient proof of its utility. Throughout Europe, in many parts of Asia, Africa, and America, no education is complete without a knowledge of that tongue ; which in more than one country of Europe is emphatically called " the language? Its merits are becoming so well appreciatea in this country, that it is almost unnecessary to particularize them, — to speak of its unsurpassed precision and clear- ness, and of its capability of expressing every idea in the m.jst laconic and in the most ornamental style. The language of France, that happy compound of the Celtic, the Romanic and the Teutonic elements, is equally adapted to the lightest literature and to the most profound diction of science. The rich mines of French literature, too long but imperfectly known here, offer in every department of knowledge treasures equal to those presented by the literature of any other nation. Many works have been published, in this country and in Eng- land, to facilitate the acquisition of the French language ; but. during his more than twenty years' practice in teaching the mod- ern languages, the author of this volume has in vain looked for the appearance of a book which, like several of the French gram- mars published in Germany, should unite in due proportions the- ory and practice. To the high merits of several of the theoretical grammars, he bears his most cheerful testimony ; yet, the student might go through them, and know but little of the idiomatic or practical part of the language. Several of the practical works, though well executed according to the plans which their authors had laid, neglect grammatical rules, if not entirely, at least, far too much ; and the student may, after having devoted a long time to the mere memorizing of sentences, find himself in possession of a Yl PREFACE. number of set phrases, valuable, it is true, but from which, desti- tute of landmarks, the slightest deviation must lead him into unknown regions. A' work which, unit/ng practice with theory, should attempt to avoid the difficulties mentioned above, had been long contem- plated by the author of these pages, when " "Woodbury's New Method with the German" made ha appearance. Finding in that work the two systems, the analytic and the synthetic, beautifully blended and well elaborated, he had no hesitation in adopting the "New Method," so successfully applied by Mr. Woodbury to the German, as the model on w Inch to construct his long intended treatise on the French. The result is the present work. The work commences with a comprehensive treatise on pro- nunciation. The power of the letters, as initials, medials and finals, is fully explained under the different letters. Peculiar care ■. taken to render this part sufficiently full, to provide the student with a satisfactory guide and adviser, in the principal difficulties of the French pronunciation. The words presenting pecuuarities of pronunciation, are placed as exceptions to the rules given in this part In the commencement of the First Part of this grammar, the rules are given in the most simple form, and the idioms are grad- ually introduced and explained; copioi or more theoretical Part, render further information easily attam- after the rules of every lesson, comes a risumi of ex- amples in illustration of them, as also of preceding on tain'mg often new idioms and conversational phrase examples on the rules, the resumes and the French i to be rendered into English consisting almost entirely of ques- tions and answers, combfee, it is thought, all the benefits pre- •ented by the practical grammars, while the rules in the and the ease with which reference may be had to the Part, present all the advantages of the theoretical treats will be easily seen that the teacher and Btudent will find here the practice, with as little or as much of the theory as they maydeaire. The grammatical rules and idioms are introduced gradually, so as not to offer too many difficulties at once. Car.' has been taken not to present the rules as abstract and arbitrary laws, while PREFACE. ffi tlie resemblance or difference of construction between the two languages is carefully pointed out. Exercises to be rendered into French are placed at the end of every lesson. The materials for these are found in the examples to the rules, in the resumes, in the French exercises and in the vocabularies preceding the same. Besides all this, in accordance with an admirable feature of Mr. Woodbury's system, the student ; is furnished with the means of carrying on in connection with the regular course already indicated, a series of exercises in French composition, at once easy, interesting, and profitable in the highest degree. The grouping of the tenses of the verbs and the classification of the h-regularities, will, it is hoped, simplify this part of gram- mar. In the former, the student will see that by learning a tense in one conjugation, he often learns it in the others ; in the latter he will perceive that the deviations of the irregular verbs are often very trifling and confined to particular tenses. An attempt is made in the " Practical Resumes," Lessons 98 and 99, to simplify as much as possible the somewhat complex subject of the past participle. The rules of the Second, or theoretical Part, are deduced from the most reliable sources ; they are nearly all illustrated by short extracts from the best French authors. This will, it is hoped, while giving classical authority to the rules, inspire the student with a desire of becoming more intimately acquainted with the authors from whose works the examples are taken. It will be perceived, also, that the sentiments contained in the extracts, have not been overlooked. In the Second Part, the verbs are given in their fullest form. The irregular, defective, peculiar (See § 49), and unipersonal verbs are placed alphabetically. The author would here respectfully suggest, not with a view of offering advice to experienced teachers, but as a mode which he has found beneficial in practice, that the student commence to learn the verbs from the paradigms in the Second Part as soon as he has acquired some little knowledge of the pronunciation, and this simultaneously with his learning the lessons of the First Part. The verbs in the French, and in the other, so called Romanic viii PRKJAPB. languages, are more complicated and require more study than the verbs in the German and other Teutonic languages. Having in this manner acquired some knowledge of the verbs, the student will, by the time he, in his progress through the first part, reaches the groupings of the tenses mentioned above, be able to recognize the verbs as old friends, and better to appreciate the classification f the irregularities. This course is advised not as indispensable, but as beneficial. The reading lessons, in prose and in verse, extracted from the best sources, and containing grammatical references to both parts of the work, will nut be unacceptable to the student. A vocabu- lary for these lessons is placed immediately after them. Among tho numerous works which have been consulted during the preparation of this grammar, the author would mention with gratitude the labors of the French Academy, Laveaux, Lemare, Bescher, Girault-Duvivier, Boniface, Bescherelle, Landais, etc With a sincere hope that the present volume imy assist the American student in obtaining a knowledge of tie beautiful language of France, it is respectfully submitted. L F. UWIVF.IWTY Off Mil III'lAS - , ) Ann Arbor t Sept. 1661, 1861. f GENERAL INDEX. A, prep. $ 142, (2). Abbreviations, p. 275. Accents, Lesson 2. Acheter, to buy, § 49, (5) ; its gov- ernment, L. 50, 1. Accorder, s', to agree ; said also of watcbes, L. 92, 3. Active verb, () 43, (2), (3.) Active Voice, used in French in cases where the passive is used in English, L. 35, 2 ; L. 46 3-6128, (5.) ; § 113, (1.) Adjectives, § 14, (1). Quaking adjectives, § 14, (2). Degrees of signification, § 14, (2). Gender and number of, § 15. Formation of feminine of, § 16, L. 13. Irregu- lar adjectives, §16, (8). Adjectives baving no feminine, § 16, (9.) Plural of, § 17, L. 14. Agree- ment of adjective with nouns, § 18; §83; L. 13, L. 14. Relate ing to several nouns, § 18, (3); L."l4, 1, 2. Determining adjec- tives, § 19. Demonstrative, § 20 ; § 93. Possessive, § 21 ; § 94 ; Re- marks on, § 95. Agree with ob- ject possessed, § 21, (2) ; L. 9, 3. Numeral adjectives, § 22 ; place of, § 96. Cardinal adjective, § 22, (1), (2), (4); Variations of, § 23; Ob- servation on, § 24. Ordinal num- bers, § 23, (3),(5). Observation on, § 25. Indefinite adjectives, § 30 ; § 97. Verbal adjectives, syn- tax of, 6 65. Remarks on feu, wi, &c. § 84. Adjective used ad- verbially, § 67, (3) ; § 84, (5). Place of, § 85 ; § 86 ; L. 15. Ad- jective preceding noun, § 85, (11). Adjective different in meaning be- fore and after. § 86. Regimen or government of, § 87 ; § 88 ; § 89 ; § 92 ; L. 79. Adjective requiring a different preposition in French and English, § 90. Adverbs, § 67. Formed from adjec- tives, § 68. Degrees of significa- tion, § 69. Adverbs forming a comparison of themselves, § 70. Syntax of, § 136. Place of, § 136 ; L. 34 ; L. 41. Observation on, § 137. Adverts of negation, §138. A droite, to the right, L. 70, 6. A gauche, to the left, L. 70, 6. A fleur de, even with, L. 80, 2. A force de, by dint of, L. 80, 2. A l'egard de, with regard to, L. 80, 2, A raison de, at the rate of, L. 80, 2. Au dehors, outside, L. 80, 2. Au dedans, inside, L. 80, 2. Au dela, beyond, L. 80, 2. Age, avoir used for, L. 20, 6. A la campagne, in the country, L. 34, 8. A la chasse, hunting, L. 34, 8. A la pex .he, fishing, L. 34, 8. A 1'anglaise, a la t ju^aise, after the English, French fashions, L. 69, 3. A l'ecole, at school; a l'eglise, at ■ church, L. 25, 6. A Tendroit, right side out; a l'en- ^ vers, wrong side out, L. 69, 1. A l'insu, unknown to, L. 82. Alphabet, L. 1. Aller, to go, used for proximate fu- ture, L. 26, 1. Aller trouver, to go to, L. 26, 3. S'en aller, to go "away, L. 40 ; 1, 2 ; L. 47, 1. Aller, to fit, to sit, L. 47, 2. Aller a pied a. cheval, en voiture, to walk, ride, go in a carnage, L. 62, Exam- ples. Amis (un de mes), a friend of mine, L. 67, 3. Amuser, (s',) to take pleasure in, etc., L. 38, 6. Analogy between many French and English words, § 147. Answers in French should be ex- plicit, L. 24, 12. Apporter, amener, to bring, carry, L. 44, 6. Approcher, (s\) to drau near, L. 39, 6; Articles, § 13 ; L. 4, 1,2. Elision of, L. 4, 2; §13, (7); §146. Con- traction of; §13, (8) ; L. 5, 1; L. 25, 6. English article, a or an § 14; GENERAL IND1X. (9). Recapitulation of articles. I Cases, §2. & 13. Syntax of. () 77. Use of, Ce, demons, prn. § 87, (6) ; § 108 77. (1), (2), (3), etc. Before words used in partitive sense, 24, 9. of. <> 80. Remarks on c I ■ :nv noun*. L 111. Oombien y a-t-fll how far? mm long sin e? I. 67 i Comparison of adjectives, L. 17. Compound nouns, $ 3,(7). ^9;L. Conditional mode, § 46, 2d, (3). Formation and termination I Irre- gularitii - of L 62 l N - 126. ■I- l. - I Witl :ii i l fcr the day month L. 19 \v,.ir mil I I ■ [eon oh ohand ana •i pom, I. 67 1 Ivoh ds< I tor dimen- • itis.'ly. Ij and 1 B 6 C*riTAi.s Cardinal muni <' after K..r the day of the month, ition, paradigm, $ 60. Third conjugation, parad 61 Peculi u fries of vx i third conjni ( > 62. Fourth conjugation, paradigm $ issive verbs, paradign Rule, ^66, Reflective verbs, para- Itive form of, e torm, <\ 68. Interrogative and negative form, digm ',i.l -J Terminationsofref- nlari rableof irregu- lar verbi with, L. Connaitrc quelqn voi\ ' I. B7, ' Connail know ' etc., L v 7. 6. 8e connail ' U Conjunctions, $ 73. Lists of, $ 7^ GENERAL INDEX. 2). Syntax of, § 143. Govern- ment of, „§ 127 ; § 143. Requir- ing subjunctive, § 143, (2) ; infin- itive, $ 143, (1) ; conditional or indicative, § 143, (3) ; si, if, § 125, (3) ; L. 62, 6. Examples of con- junctions, L. 100. Convenir, to be becoming, L. 49, 2. Coucher (se), to retire, go to bed, L. . 37,5. Dans, prep, in, § 142, (2). Davantage, more, note, L. 16. Day of month, week, not preceded by preposition, L. 26, 10. Degrees of comparison of adjectives L. 16 ; L. 17. Demain, to-morrow, its place, L. 41, 5. Demander, to ask, its government, L. 50, 1. Demettre (se), le bras, &c, to dislo- cate one's arm, &c, L. 93, 1. To resign a place, L. 93, 2. Demonstrative adjective, § 20. See Adjective. Demonstrative pronoun, § 36. See Pronoun. Depecher (se), to make haste, L. 40, 7. Devant, prep, before, § 142, (1). Devenir, to become, L. 85, 5. Devoir, to otce, expressing future, obligation, L. 35, 5. Dimension, etc., L. 68. Diphthongs, sounds of, L. 2, 14. Dont, prn. of whom, of which, L. 31,8. Elision, § 146. Of article L. 4, 2 ; § 13. (7).. Of pronoun je, L. 4, 5. Of preposition de, L. 6, 3. Of ne, L. 7, 3. Of pronouns le, la, L. .9,2. Eloigner (s'), to go from, to leave, L. 39, 6. Emparer (s'), to seize, lay hold of, L. 93, 3. Empecher (s'), to help, to prevent one's self \*. 93, 4. Emporter, Emmener, to lake away, L. 44, 6. En, pronoun, % 39, (17) ; % 95, (5) ; $ 110; % 103, (1); % 104; L. 15, 7 ; L. 22, 3. Before a past participle, % 135, (7) ; L. 42, 11, 12. Used instead of possessive adjective, § 95, (5) ; L. 96, 1, 2. En, prep. % 142, (2) ; L. 34, 5, 6, 7. Endormir (s'), to fall asleep, L. 39, 5. Ennuyer, to weary, L. 38, 4. S'en- nuyer, to become weary, L. 38. 5. Entendre parler, to hear about, of, L. 35,7. Entendre, to understand, L. 96, 3. Se faire entendre, to make one's self understood, L. 96, 4. Followed by another verb, L. 97, 4. Envoyer chercher, to send for, L. „ 26, 5. Epouser, to marry, said only of par- ties, L. 67, 2. Essayer, to try on, L. 47, 4. Est-ce-que, prefixed to the verb, § A 98; L. 25. Etre, conjugation of, § 47, (5). Number of etre after ce, § 116. Used for aller, to go, L. 43, 5. For to belong, L. 47, 5 ; L. 91, 2. Etre riche de, to be worth, L. 49, 5. Etre en retard, to be late, and other idioms with etre, L. 91, 1. Y etre, to be at home, in, L, 91, 3. Euphonw t, L. 4, 6. Eveiller (s'), to awake, L. 39, 5. Every day, tous les jours, L. 26, 8. Facher (se), to be or become angry, L. 40, 4. Faire, before another verb, to cause, to have, L. 32, 3, 4 ; L. 97, 4. Faire faire, to have made, L.32, 4: L. 63, 1. Faire raccommoder, to have mended. Faire la cuisine, faire cuire, to cook. Faire bouillir, to boil, L. 63, 1. Faire peur, to frighten ; faire attention, to pay attention; fkire tort, to injure; faire du mal, to hurt, L. 63, 3. , used unipersonally, in speak- ing of the weather, L. 33, 5. Falloir, to be necessary, L. 48. Feminine terminations, § 6, (2), (3), Feu, adj., hate, § 84, (1). Future absolute, . Terminations • •I" i.. 7"> l - 8. formation of, :. 7"' ■"'. Importer Dtmporte, M matter, qn'tmporte I what • L !. 'J. I i indicative m Indicative present «, I lia Terminal Infinitive modi Important nil' other, put in inlinr In ordei to L - Inqnmter, i i i to I Int«i i' '.' | I. _ I i i l«v J i 1. 1. .' ; t. •''. Laisker. to Ur an«-tiur rerb U Wl I La plupart, most. Number of vert after, L. 85, 3. Le. meaning so, it, &c., L. 46. 4, 5. Le mien, mine, &c, L. 9, G ; L. 12. 0. Lequel, &c, !rA jor m ti many, L. ' ; 7 i. Be marier, /<> c<-( morr Etre marii, to k- 7/i/;; • 1, 1.7. 2 Measure, weight, price by. I Mener, porter, to toXr, to carrv, L. M 6. Mettie. to put on L 82, 1. Mettre le convert, /<> lay tkt Mettre a men mettre pied a tcrre, to alight; mettre a i.l |M.[te. /,. turn OtU tre an t'.iit, to or., ' ■ l Be mettre I. Mettre a I'heure, to art . (,4). (5) ; L. 56, 1 ; L. 6. 4. Of adjec- tive. L. 8, 5 ; L. 15 ; <> 85 ; $ 86. Of pronoun subject or nominative, ty 98. Of regimen pronoun, L. 9, 1 ; L. 27; L. 28; () 101; { 1"2. Place of M aixl y, (> 104 ; L. 67. Of adverb. <> 186; L. 34 ; L. 41. 4,5. Ofverb, 4144. Plaire - pklM to, L. in i,. [JaednnJpersaaaJl]y,oonime il vous plaira, B;L.ll. I pound Doom Nouns Daring ii" I'liirul. <) n». Noam baring do nngnlar, $11. Plural ofadiectives $17; L M or pnyeica] properties of man, single in tlie individual, do! put in tin' plural L I Plus .1.' man than, before a number, L. SO 7. Plusieui L.18,7 Poor, I 1 . 88 1 1 • . I. 1 1 Lion < } 71. Table of princi- pal men! i. ut another prepoaitioii r.y meam i • rnmiiit l in. Repetition ol 1 I j Promi • for pi- an I . Prendre government, L 60,1. Prendre garde, to tab caret prendre le 35. Demonstrative pronouns, <) 36. Remarks on, ft 87. ( '■ . demonstrative pronoun, \) 37, (6); ft 108; ft 116; L. 81. Used L. 82. C'lui. celle, ce- lui-ci. ,-. •-". $ 20; L. in l. In 6. Relative pronouns, ft 38. Remarks on, <\ 89. En, 110 1 Place •>! /: >,ft 104. J 2). Place off, 4104 : \ 111. Donl, L 81, 8. Syntax ol pronouns, <\ 98. Place of subject or nominative § 88 Repetition of. t) ■■ tee of regimen pronouns, ft 100; L. 8, 1 ; L 27. Respective place of regimen pro- noiins v, 101 ; L.28. Rule on tliis subject, ft 102. Repetition of regi- iiii-n pronoun, <> 106 L Uulfs on possessive pronouns, v> 108 On demonstrative pronouns, & 107. 0d relative pronouns. 45. Formation of, (<)61). See Different Tenses. Terminations of regular verbs, $ 60. Of indicative, L. 23, 5. Of imper- fect of indicative, L. 53, 6. Of past definite, L. 51. Of future. L. GO. Of conditional, L. 62. Of imperative, L. 70. Of subjunc- tive. L 72. Of imperfect of Bub- junctive, L. ~'y. Of infinitive, L. 21, l. Of present participle, L. 28, :; Of past participle, L. 28, 1. Times, number of, in a given space, i. 68,1 Tmit,aU, etc, $80, (15V (16) j $97, (4), (6), (G). Tout, every, I. 26, 8. T..111. the whale, b. 26, 9. Tout. ' nftnhi. ipnk, variable by euphony, L. '88,4. Tromper, to deceive, L. 38, 1. Sc feromper, /" be mistaken, etc., L. IK one, a, an, one, 6 l" 1 .. (4); (11); I. >'., 2. Not osed before norma placed In apposition, L, 80 I Unipersooal vet Para- digm Of *', 81 - Auxiliary of nupersona] verbs, L 16, B I l. ; I I. I'.', 6. Whir, i ■< < - m , used to indicatepasl just elapsed, L 26 2 Venlr tronver, /•> com 1 1 I. 26 8. Verbal adject I ''7. Subject or nominative men or object of, v '- (»)■ DiflJBrenl sort of rerb (::,: L 48. Passive s i I. 10, Neuter > 48 (5); L. 43. Reflective, § 43, (6); § 56; L. 86 2. Unipersonal, $ 43, 7 ; § 61-2. Auxiliary verbs, § 43, (8). Use of, § 46 ; L, 43. 45. Modes and tenses of, § 45. See Different Modes and Tenses. Irregular verbs, L. 24, Table of, $62. Syn- tax of the verb, () 114. Agreement of the verb with subject, § 114; L. 83 ; L. 84 ; L. 85. Verb after a collective noun, <) 115 ; L. 85, 1, 2, 3. Number of verb after ce, <\ 116. Verb after nouns indifferent persons, 104; $111: L. 21 II NEW FRENCH COURSE PART FIRST. LESSON I. LEgOff I. THE LETTERS. The Frinch alphabet contains twenty-five letters : — Old names. New names. A a B b C c D d E e F f G H 8 I i J .1 K k L 1 M m N n o P P Q q R r S s T t u u V V X X Y y z z ah ah bay be || barre. say ke ) cas, ciL day de 5 dard. a a u effet. eff fe frere. jay* ghe grele., ash he haie. e e idee, jee * je jais. kah ke kali, ell le lit. me mat. enn ne natte. o o orge. pay pe pere. ku ke | quadre. err f re rat. ess se soie. tay te tort. u % u urne. vay v vase. eeks xe T rixe. e grec e grec yeux. zed ze ** zele. W, caOed in French double V, might be added, as many for- eign words which have that letter have been adopted into the French language. * Like s in pleasure. f Nearly like err in error. 1 No corresponding sound in English. || Nearly like be in globe. § Nearly like ke and de in cake and grade. The e of the ether let- ters has the same sound. Tf kse ** seia rose. 1 18 LESSON II. LESSON n. LECON IL THE VOWELS. Vowels ar« rendered long or short by certain marks placed over them These marks, which are three in number, are called accents. The acute accent (' ) is placed over the e to give it a sharp or close 8onnd. (See 4, i.) The grave accent ( * ) is placed over a, e, u, to give to those vowels a grave or open sound. (See 5, e.) The circumflex accent ( » ) is placed over a, e, t, o, u, to give to those letters :i long and broad sound.* 1. a like a in mass. Ex. face, face ; bateau, boat; tableau, picture; p«tte, paic ; malfluj . 2. a like a in bar, far. Ex. Age, age; chateau, castle; pU\ summer; amitic, friendship , 6\ev£, rais',1 ; » ]<■ e, ?in>rd. 5. e like fli in ;viir. Ex. \>iro, father ; fr«/>«'/. 6. e nearly lit Bx. rive, drram ; extr/me, extreme ; crone. erWMI ; cr/pe, rm,.- ; font. / 7. i ii. irly like i in ; i/i. Ex. midi, mid-day ; ici, here ; fini, finished; i. i like - ■ In iee. Ex. tie, island} gite, lodging } < pitre, epistle; dime, fitM; aliime, oigfM, 9. o nearly like oin nofc Ex. robe, rooe; globe, giofte ; cachot, dun- geon; haricot, faat 10. 6 like o in wonr. Ex. ikp6% deposit ; pnvot, proi»st , bientot, soon; supp.'-t, suppart'-r. 1. u. The exact French sound of this letter is not found in Eng- lish. The position of the lips in whistling, is very nearly the portion which they should have in emitting the French I i/rne, urn; h/ne, moon ; but, aim ; tribw, tribe; tribi/t, tribute ; i\u, elected. • This accent Indicate! the ropp re a rion of the letter B after the vowel on which it is pieced, thus: were formerly written, fnu, Ustt. bfstc, the 8 was not sounded, but gave to the preceding rowel that prolonged bound now represented by the circumflex accent. LESSON II. 19 12. u s the u with a prolonged sound. Ex. mure, mulberry; du, due ; cru, growth ; bruler, to burn. 13. y See 28, y. THE DIPHTHONGS. 14. A vowel surmounted By an accent cannot form a dipththong with another vowel, it must be pronounced separately. Ex obeir, to obey; deite, deity ; reussite, success. Exceptions, ou, where — pronounced oo ; i and e accented (if e follow i), form a diphthong. - • 15. A vowel surmounted by a diaeresis ("') follows the above rule. Ex. hai, hated; pa'ien, pagan ; mats, maize. Excep- tions ; u followed by e at the end of a few words, as in cigue,- hemlock, is pronounced like u alone. 16. ai is like a in fate. Ex. j'at, I have ; je ferat, I will make; bate, bay; mai, May; balat, broom. When the diphthong ai is followed by s, d, or i, it assumes a broader sound, resembling the French e, or ai in the English word_patr. Ex. j'avais, Ihad; je ferats, I should make; lait, milk ; laid, ugly. 17. au nearly like oh! in English. Ex. taux, rate; chaud, warm. e preceding au is blended with that diphthong without chang- ing its sound. Ex. ~beau, handsome; chateau, castle; tableau, picture ; eau, water. 18. ei nearly like a in fate. Ex. heige, serge; nez'ge, snow; setgle, rye ; retne, queen ; petgne, comb. 19. eu approaches the sound of u in tub. Ex. ]eu,play; lieu, place; pew, little; pew, fear ; chalewr, heat. Exceptions, in eu, had; j'eus, &c, Ihad; j'ettsse, etc., I might have; eu is pronounced like u alone. 20. ia nearly like ia in medial. Ex. il \ia, he bound ; il crta, he cried dialogue, dialogue. 21. ie like ee in bee. Ex. il lie, he binds; il etudte, he studies; harpte, harpy ; mie, the soft part of bread. 22. oi nearly like wa in was. Ex. crotx, cross ; il bott, he drinks ; rot, king. 23 on like oo in cool. Ex. dowx, soft ; coup, blow : nous, we • vous, you; aou,neck. LESSON II. 24, 25 36. 27. ua a ■g| ue C ~-C P 8^ Ul o S ; I HO fl t II salua, he saluted; il remuo, he moved; H contribua, he contributed. II salue, he salutes; il remue, he moves; il contribue, Tie contributes. produit, produce ; cond u ite, conduct ; \ut, htm; bruit, noise; il rtduj't, he reduces, duo, duet. f when initial, when coming between two ccnsonants, or when forming a syllable of itself, has the sound of the French t. Ex. style, style; type, type ; yeux, eyes ; Vpres, Ypres ; y, there , between two vowels y has the power of two fs, one of which forms a diphthong with the preceding, and the other with the following vowel ; the syllabic division taking place between the f s. Ex. moyen, means ; essayer, to try ; nettoyer, to clean ; citoyen, citizen ; abbaye, abbey ; these words are pronounced as if they were written timi-irn, cssai-icr, iwttoi-ier, citouieiu, abbai-ie. The words pays, country ; paysage, landscape ; pay- san, peasant, are pronounced /.<-t>, p&Wftge, | tiii: nasai. BOUBD8. The combination of the vowels with the consonant morn, - what the French call //' ton nasal, the nasal sound. When the consonant m or n is doubled, or is immediately fol- lowed by a vowel 4 the oaetJ sound doei not tike place. Ex. mnoeeat, mnocml; ieuoobQe, i mm ovable; imitile, useless ; inoui, unheard tf. Tlie syllables t";i and im in the words in- . we pronounced as in English ; the syl- labic divi.M.-n of i-mi-ti-le and i-nou-i will explain the reason of the | .! sound in those words. ample, ample ; chambre, chamber ; lampe, lamp. *: an, year ; banc, bench ; dans, in , man- 2, ion, ci>ck. § nK7/ibre, limb ; rmporter, to carry away; W trembler, to tremble. en, in; dent, Coofl ; prendre, to take; rend re, to render. 29 M 31 pronounced anhj nearly like an in pant. • The words *mm\ ennuyer, emmn\. the g giving as unpleasant twang not existing in the French nasal syllables. LESSON III. 21 in somewhat like an in crank. 32. en final is sometimes pronounced like en in then. Ex. Eden, Eden. 33. en in the third person plural of verbs is silent. Ex. ils lisent, ils portent, ils donnent ; pronounce ils Hz, ils port, ils donn. 34. im 1 , . r timbre, stamp ; impossible, impossible ; im- portant, important. 1 lin, flax ; pin, pine ; crin. horse-hair ; \in wine. 35. om] pronounced f tombe, tomb; comble, height; sombre, dark onh, nearly J tomber, to fall. on like on in 1 mon, my ; ton, thy ; son, his ; bond, bound song. pont, bridge. 86 um"j somewhat ( hnmble, humble; parfnm, perfume. I like un in 1 un, one ; chaenn, each one ; importwn, im- un j hunting. | portunate. LESSON EI. LEgoN m THE CONSONANTS. 1. A final consonant is generally silent. 2. The letters c, f, 1, r, however, when final, are generally pro- nounced. 3. The final consonant of a word is generally carried to the next word, when that word begins with a vowel or an h mute. (See 11, h.) 4. For illustrations and exceptions, see the several letters. 5. B initial is pronounced as in English. In the middle of words, and at the end of proper names, b is sounded. Ex. aodiquer to abdicate, Job, Caleb, Sic. B is also pronounced in radoufr, refitting of a vessel, and rumo, (pronounced romb,) point of th compass. It is silent in plomo, lead; aplomo, perpendicular. When b is doubled, only one of these letters is pronounced. Ex. a66e, abbot ; saooat. 6. C has its proper sound (k) before a, o, u, 1, n, r. Ex. cabane, cottage; con, neck; ecu, crown; enclin, inclined; Cneius, Cneius ; croire, to believe. c before e and i, and with the cedilla (9) before a, 0, or u, has the sound of s; ceci,this; cendres, ashes; facade, front; fa- $on fashion; recu, received. 22 LESSON III. ch js pronounced like sh in she. Ex. char, car; cfiarl on, coa J ,• cfaingement, change. o in the words vermicelle and violoncelle, is pronounced like c7u ch is pronounced like k in a few words derived from the Greek. Ex. c7iaos, anac7ironisme, cfcronique, patriarc7iat, orc/iestre, &c. In patriarc7ie, arcfieveque, Acheron, ch is pronounced like sh. In Michel- Ange, Michael-Angelo, it sounds like k. c final is sounded, except when preceded by n. Ex. avec, with ; arc, bow; sac, bag; sue, juice; Turc, Turk. Exceptions: it is silent inaccroc, rent; broc,jug; clerc, clerk, estomac, stomach ; lacs, snares ; marc, mark ; yore, pork ; tabac. tobacco — ch is silent in almanack. c preceded by n is silent. Ex. banc, bench ; flanc, flank. c is pronounced like g in second, second, and fecond, fruitful. c final is seldom pronounced upon the next word. 7. D has the same sound as in English. Ex. (fame, lady. D is pro nounced in the middle of words. Ex. aiverbe, adverb ; ad- mirer, to admire. a is silent at the end of words, except in proper names : as in David, David ; also in the word surf, south, and in a few for- eign words, as le Cid, the Cid; le Talmurf, the Talmud, &c. d final, coming before a word commencing with a vowel or an h mute, assumes the sound of t — un grand homme, is pro- nounced grand tomme ; courf-il, does he sew f vend-il, does he sdU are pronounced cou-til, ven-til. 8. F is pronounced as in English. Ex.fi&vre,fever; fiacre, hackney- coach. f final is generally sounded. Ex. soi/, thirst ; chef, chief; sui/, taUoxo. Exceptions: c\ef, key; che/-d'oeuvre, master-piece; ceu/-dur, hard egg ; ceuj-frais, fresh egg ; boeu/-frais, fresh beef; boeu/- r:i]c, salt beef. In the plural of the words ceu/ and toeu/,/ is always silent. The f of neu/, nine, is silent before a consonant, and sounda like v before a vowel or h mute; neu/ livres, pronounce neu litres — neu/ hommes, neu/ enfants, pronounce neu-vomme, neu-venfanls. 9. G is always hard (that is like g in game) before a, o, u. Ex. /?arde, guard ; gond, hinge ; UgV, acute. g before e and i lias always the soft sound, (that of s in pleasure). Ex. ^erbe, sheaf; prendre, son-in-law ; gihicr, game ; £p'let, vest. grin, guo, gue, gui, are pronounced gha, gho ghe, ghi, L f - **^' LESSON III. 2S u is silent. Ex. il legua, he bequeathed; liguons, let us bequeath; guerre, war, guitare, guitar. Exceptions : In aiguille, needle, Guise, &c, the two vowels are sounded. Theue ofgue final is mute, unless a diaeresis is on the e, as in cigue, hemlock. 10 gi is pronounced like ni in union. Ex. regne, reign ; peigne, comb ; dahjner, to deign ; saigner, to bleed. Exceptions : Gnide, Progne, stagnant, ignee, &c. g final takes the sound of k before a vowel or an h mute; — sang humain, human blood, is pronounced san Ttumain. 1 1 . H is mute or aspirate — h mute (having of itself no sound) when preceded by a word subject to elision, ($ 146) is treated as a vowel — h aspirate is always initial, the breathing or aspi- ration is very sligh* but not entirely absent, as is advanced by some grammarians. As it is important, on account of elision and of the pro- nunciation of the last consonant of a word preceding h, to know when it is aspirate or not, we will give a list of the words which commence with h aspirate, omitting however the derivatives and a few words seldom used. Hableur Haras Have Hors Hache Harasser Havre Hotte Hagard Harceler Havresac Hottentot Haie Hardes Heler Houblon Haillons Hardi Hennir Houille Haine Harem Henri Houlette Hair Hareng Heraut Houppe Eaire Hargneux Herisson Houri Halage Haricot Herisser Houppelande Hile Haridelle Heron Housse Halle Harnais Heros* Houx Hallebarde Harpe Herse Euche Hallier Harpie Heurter Huee Halte Harpon Hibou Hnguenol Hamac Hasard Hideux Huit Hameau Hater Hierarchie Humer Hanche Hausser Hollandef Huppe Hangar Haut Homard Hure Hanneton Haut-bois Honte Hurler Hanter Hautesse Horde Hussard Harangue 12. J is pronounced like s in pleasure. Ex.^our, day ; jamais, never. * The h of the other words having the same derivation, heroine, hero- xsme, heroique, &c, is not aspirated. f We say, however, du fromage d'Hollande, Dutch cheese; de la toile d'Hollande. Dutch linen. 24 LESSON III. K sounds like k in English. Ex. km, khan; kilogramme, a French weight. 13. L in the combinations il, ill, not initial, but in the middle or at the end of words, has the liquid sound found in the English word brilliant. Ex. paiZZe, straw ; fille, daughter ; ha.il, lease • travaiZ, labor. Exceptions: fiZ, thread; BresiZ, Brazil ; Nil, Nile; mtZ, mtZie thousand; civil, civil; profit, profile ; vt'ZZe, town, and its deriv atives; tranqui/Ze, tranquiZZite, &c., quiet, quietness, <$/-c. I is silent in bariZ, barrel ; cheniZ, kennel ; coutiZ, ticking ; fiZs son ; fourniZ, bakehouse ; fusiZ, gun ; griZ, gridiron ; outiZ, tool persiZ, parsley. II in SuZZy has the liquid sound — 1 is silent in pouZs, pulse ; and gentiZshommes, noblemen. The 1 marked as silent in the words above, is never carried to the next word. 14. M ) initial are pronounced as in English. For these letters in 15. N S combination with the vowels, see nasal sounds, (page 20.) Final consonants after m and n are generally silent. Ex. temps weather ; je romps, je prenrfs, / break, I take. m is silent in condamner, to condemn ; automne, autumn. n final, and not belonging to a noun, is carried to the next word, when this word begins with a vowel or an h mute, if the two words arc closely connected. Ex. un bon enfant, a good child mon ami, my friend; pronounce bun nmfant, mon nami. 16. P » generally sounded as in English. P is however silent in baptcmc, baptism; bnptiser, to baptize; compte, account; dompter, to subdue; exempt, exempt; sept, seven; septieme, seventh. p final is silent. Ex. coup, blow ; drap, cloth. Exceptions: cap, cape; and proper names generally, p final is not carried to the next word. 7. Q qu is pronounced like k. Ex. f/westion, question ; qui, wk) qud\iu\ quality: — ue final is silent after q. Ex. pratique, pra /tee. Exceptions: qu is pronounced as in English in antique* ('•u>, aim ; mot, u Exceptions: t is sounded in l>ru/, chur, correc/, dot, direct, defici', fa/, exact, ne/, pr.'-t.'ri', BOSpeef, stric.', &e. t in sept, huit, vingt, is soundeil except when it comes before a consonant. t is seldom carried to the next word ; t in et (and) is always silent. 21: V is a little softer than the English v. Ex. i iande, meat ; voile, veil. 2'2. W which is found onV in foreign word-, is pronounced like v. Ex. U'urtemborg, IVcstphalie. In a few other words it has the pronunciation of the English w. Ex. whig, tehist. 23. X initial, which in Trench is only found in a few words is pro. nounced likeg* Ex. xylon, cotton-plant ; A'avier, ,V A'ante, A'antippe. Xerxes is pronounced gzrrcss. X following an initial e. and i "wel or an h, is also Rounded like gt. Ex. exil, exile ; examiner, to examine ; ex. hiber, to exhibit. X not following an initial e, but coming between two vowels, sounds like k^. Ex. arc, axis; loxe, luxury; Alexandre, Alexander; maxime, maxim; sexe, &X f Bonnds like sb in tho following words : 6ix, tix dix, ten. LESSON III. 27 soixante, sixty; Bruselles, Brussels; Au-ronne, Auxerre, Ai.z-en-Provence. In sitfieme, diarieme, deua;ieme, di.r-sept, diavhuit, dix-neuf, it is pronounced like z in zone. x final is generally silent. Ex. pri.r, price ; croiw, cross ; vote, voice. Exceptions : x is sounded like ks at the end of names of Greek and Latin origin. Ex. Ajaar, Stya?, etc. In Aia?-la-Cha- pelle it has the same sound. The x of deua;, si#, dia:, coming before a consonant is silent, except in the cases mentioned above ; i. e., in diar-sept, dix- huit, dix-neuf. x when carried to the next word, sounds like z. 34. Z sounds as in the English words zinc, zone. Ex. zele, zeal. zenith, zenith. z final is generally silent. Ex. nez, nose; chez, with, <$-c. , allez, go. Exceptions : gaz, gas. In Metz, Suez, &c. it sounds like ss. z final is generally carried to the next word when that word commences with a vowel, or an h mute. Exercise 1. — The Vowels. (a) Table, table ; fable, fable ; chat, cat ; eclat, splendor ; arbre, tree ; tard, late ; balle, ball. (&) ame, soul; blame, blame; batir, to build; pate, paste; age, age ; mat, mast. (e) me, me; de, of; que, that; elle, she; malle, mail; parle, speak; fourche, fork ; salle, hall. (e) pre, meadow ; alle,gone; donne, given ; passe, passee, past, eleve, raised ; armee, army. (e) tres, very ; apres, after ; achete, buy ; mere, mother ; espere, hope; leve, raise; chere, fare; chevre, goat. (6) meme, same ; careme, Lent ; arret, arrest ; tempete, tempest ; tete, head; bete, beast. (i) lit, bed; dit, said; dire, to say; lire, to read; lime, file; cire, wax ; rite, rite. (i) diner, to dine; ile, isle; dime, tithe; abime, abyss; epitre, epistle ; gite, lodging. (o) mot, word ; cachot, dungeon ; repos, rest ; trot, trot ; globe, globe ; carrosse, coach. (6) t6t, soon; plut6t, rather; r6ti, roast meat; dep6t, deposit; prevdt, provost. 21 LESSON III. (n) bu, drank; cru, believed; dii, of the; elu, elected; menu, minute; pnjm, foreseen ; ecu, crown. (u) chute, fall; bn'.lot, fireship ; mur, ripe; dument, duly ; il fiit, he mighj be ; nous fumes, we were. Ttie Diphthongs. (ai) je donnai, I gave ; je p:\rlerai, 7 tn'/Z s/vafc ; j'allai, I went ; je eherehai, I taught ; je menu, I ied ; j'irai, I trill go. (ais) je donnais, / teas gi\ ino- ; je parlerais, 7 would speak ; j'allais, I was going ; je cheichajf •<"# i" je menais, / u-as leading; j'irai*, I would go. (.m, eau) maux, mZt; chameau, camel; ehevaux, horses; beau, handsome; nouveau, new ; troupcau, flock. (ei) neig-e, snow; veinc, pern; nine, queen; Seine, Si'i'.v ; je peigne, / nT7i/' ; Mill, bosom. (eu) pcu, little ; peur, /Var; leur, //ifir ; il meurt, /k r<7i/s ; il lie, /i« &ind5 ; il rie /ic mny laugh ; il nie, /i^ ua, he contributed. (ue) nue, cloud ; lae,£readj nfOB,t rece iv ed; il salue, he to. lutes ; il remuc, M (ui) lui, him ; luisant, shming ; euire, to bake ; cuit, baked ; nuire, to injure ; produire, to product. (j) tliyrse, thyrsus ; type, type ; style, style ; yeux, eyes ; Vvetot, Yietot ; payer, to ;>ay; envoyer, /o spiuf ; abbaye, abbey, essayer, to try; pays, country ; pay sage, landscape ; paytwin, peasant. Exercise 2. — The Nasal Sounds. Ml 30. Innocent, innocent ; inutile, xseless ; diner, dinner; immortal, immortal; une, one; lune, moon; dunes, downs. LESSON III. ?9 Bu 31. am ambre, amber; chambre, chamber; Adam, Adam ; ramper, to creep ; ample, ample ; lampe, lamp. an tante, aunt; manteau, cloak; plan, plan; plancher, floor; rang, rank ; sang, bloud ; enfant, child. em remplir, to Jill ; temple, temple; temps, weather; assemblee, assembly ; trembler, to tremble ; membre, limb. . en sentir, to feel ; tente, tent ; pente, declivity ; je rends, J ren- der; je prends, I take; je sens, I feel. 32. en amen, amen ; specimen, specimen ; examen, examination. 33. en ils donnent, they give; ils parlent, they speak; ils ecrivent, they write ; ils cherchent, they seek. 34. im simple, simple; timbre, stamp; daim, deer; faim, hunger; imposteur, impostor ; important, important. in fin, fine ; pain, bread ; demain, to-morrow ; crin, horse-hair ; vin, wine ; bain, bath ; teindre, to die ; peindre, to paint. 35. om sombre, dark; nora, name; ombre, shadow; tombe, tomb, nombre, number ; comble, height. on pont, bridge ; honte, shame ; montre, watch ; raison, reason ; maison, house ; fondre, to melt ; non, no. 36. um tumble, humble; parfum, perfume ; humblement, humbly. un lundi, Monday; brun, brown; alun, alum; emprunter, to borrow ; importun, importunate ; un, one. Exercise 3. — The Consonants. • (b) baume, balsam; blessure, wound; brun, brown; absolution, absolution ; abstrait, abstract ; abbaye, abbey ; Jacob, Jacob. (c) cacher, to conceal; coin, corner; decuple, decuple; cire, wax; cinq, five; chercher, to seek; je cache, i" conceal; pa- triarche, patriarch ; patriarchat, patriarchate ; chambre, cham- ber ; arche, arch; changer, to change; orchestre, orchestra; charbon, coal ; sac, bag ; sue, juice ; clerc, clerk ; banc, bench ; Hone, flank ; second, second; feeond, fruitful ; facon, fashion ; recu, received. (d) daim, deer ; don, gift ; admirer, to admire ; bord, border; nord, north; sud, south; Obed, Obed; Talmud, Talmud; grand &ge,adcancedage ; rend-il, does he render? i prexid-i],doeshetakei (f) foin, hay; faim, hunger; froid, cold; bref, short; soif, thirst; suif, tallow; clef, key ; chef, chief; chef-d'oeuvre, master- piece; ceuf, egg; ceufs, eggs; oeuf frsas,freshegg ; boeuf, ox, beef; boeufs, oxen ; neuf maisons, nine houses ; neuf chevaux, nine horses; neuf amis, nine friends. (g) gager, to bet; gosier, throat; gibier, game; guide, guide; ■ • LESSON III ligue, league; il ligua, he leagKed ; nous liguons, toe league, aiguille, needle; aiguillon, goad; cigui. 1 , hemlock: digne, worthy; regne, reign; Espagne, Spain; Pologne, Poland ; brugnon, nectarine ; soignant, taking care ; jo'ignani, joining ; stagnant, stagnant ; rang honorable, honorable rank. (k) hate, haste; honte, shame; haut, high ; herbe, Jierbage ; al- manach, almanac. ( j) jujube, jujube ; jeune, young ; juger, to judge; jurer, to swear jonc, rush ; joindre, to join ; dejeuner, to breakfast ; Juif, Jew, jeu, play. (1) lame, blade; loi, law; illegal, illegal; illieite, unlawful, paille, straw ; soloil, sun; pareil, similar; bail, lease ; railler, to rail ; souiller, to soil; caille, quail; canaille, rabble; ville, town ; vii -■:iul; peri], peril; pointilleux, punctilious; baril, barm; l'usil, gU*i gentil- homme, nobleman; gcntilahonimes, noblemen; bouleille, bottle. I iOMTUIDEP, (m n) mon, my; marge, margin ; noin, name; champ, field; moine, monk; prompt, quick; condamner, to condemn ; fain, At son argent, his money; bon appetit, goodapp lite; lien itroit, CU)S' (p) partir, roup, blow; i r; drap, cloth; . bapU me, ba t (q) qu< rir, to fetch; quitter, to leave; mu&ique, musie ; logiqae, rank-, firty ; ijuoi, what; aijuatitjiif, aquatic ; Quin- tilifn, Quintilian; cinq,jfi ; cinq livn ft) ranger, to arrange; error, to err; arriv< tu pour; je courrai, I will run ; je COUraia, /tOOJ rir. joui ptikr ?o sj>eak ; changer, to change; IV r, bum," hiver, m (■) silence. v,base; rose, -f, thing ; ol>-' sol. vjjo Barras, Harms; Romolua, C noii- (♦) tiers, third; tiare, it'ara; tort, wrong; portion,* portion; * T. in tlu> English words corresponding to the French words In which this letter Is pronounced like c iu cedar, has general'; the sound of eh; as in motion, i>ai tiul, dec. LESSON IV. 31 sanction, sanction ; essentiel, essential; partialite, pa^iality ; section, section ; question, question ; bastion, bastion ; obser- vation, observation ; minutie, minutia ; democratic, democracy; amitie, friendship ; initiation, initiation ; mot, word; lot, lot; sept, seven; sept livres, seven books; et, and; vingt livies, twenty books. voir, to see; va,go; leve, raise; lever, to raise; \is&ge,face vive, f. lively. Westphalie, Weimar, Wurms, Wurtemberg. xylon, cotton plant; Xenophon; exiler, to exile; excuser, to excuse ; luxe, luxury ; Alexandre, Alexander ; maxime, maxim; soixantieme, sixtieth; six, six; sixieme, sixth; six livres, six books ; Bruxelles, Brussels ; Aix-la-Chapelle ; dix, ten ; Phinix ; Ajax ; deux hommes, two men ; dix amis, ten friends. zele, zeal; zone, zone; zoologie, zoology; vous lisez, you read; nez, nose; Metz; allez-y, go there; venez ici, come here. LESSON IV. LEQON IV. 1. [n French the article [J 13, (2.)] has, in the singular, a dis- tinct brm for each gender. Ex. Le fils, the son; ' La fille, the daughter, the girt ; Le frerej the brother; ' La soaur, the sister. 2. l.efore a word commencing with a vowel or an h mute, [L. 3, 11,] the article is the same for both genders. [§ 13, (7.)] Ex. L'aieul, the grandfather; L'aiicule, the grandmollier ; , L'hote, the landlord; L'hotesse, the landlady. 3. There are in French only two genders, the masculine and the feminine. [§ 4.] Every noun, whether denoting an animate or an inanimate object, belongs to one of these two genders. Masc. L'bomme, the man; Le lion, the lion ; ' Le livre, the book; Le papier, the paper; L'arbre, the tree; Le bois, the wood; Feu. La femme, the woman; La lionne, the lioness t La table, the table; La feuille. the leaf; La plume, the pen; La porte, the daw. 8B0S IV. 4. AVUR, TO HAVE, IX THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE. -b Affirmatively. Interrogatively. Jai, Tu as, ft 33.(1.) (2.)] Ha, Elle a, ons, <:Z, 111. t, f. 1 ■ Ai-je 1 As-tu 1 A-t-fl J A-t-clle 1 Avons nous 1 Ave.: \ Ontils '. m. Hast thou 7 Has he ? Have ire? : 5. The e of the pronoun je is elided when that pronoun come* i or an h mute. [] 146.] 6. In interro i lien i!ie third person singular of a -erb ends with ly followed by a pronoun, a t, called euphonic, must be placed between the verb and the pronoun. A-t-fl 1 he? Artel Has she? . vous avez lc The father has the rural, you have IM wattr. child hoi I !hc pepper. ' Qui . Tab ^t f. pen ; Vinaigre, m. vinegar. . I. Qui ale: 3. A-t-il la farine? 4. • teunier a la farine. 8. Le i plume I i .-.la fille a ! I le Bel. 17. Atja levin! ilement le \ 19. Avei vous 1:>. table.' 90. Oui, Madame, jV la table. LESSON V. 33 f'X. Have you the wheat? a.""Te"S," T5ir, I have the wheat. 3. Who has the meat ? 4. The butcher has the meat and the salt. * 5. Haa he the oats ? 6. No, Madam, the horse has the oats. 7, Have we the wheat ? 8. You have the wheat and the flour. 9. Who has the Bait? 10. I have the salt and the meat. 11. Have we the vinegar the tea and the coffee ? 12. No, Sir, the brother has the vinegar- 13. Who has the horse? 14. The baker has the horse. M5. Have we the book and the pen ? 16. No, Miss, the girl has the pen, and the miller has the book. 17. Have you the table, Sir ? 18. No, Sir, I have only the book. 19. Who has the table? 20. We have the table, the pen, and the book. , LESSON V. LEQON V. 1. The article le, with the preposition de preceding, must be con- tracted into du, when it comes before a word in the masculine singu- lar, commencing with a consonant or an h aspirated. [L. 3, 11. § 13, (8.) (9.) Du frere, of the brother ; Du chateau, of the castle ; Du heros, of the hero ; Du chemin, of the way. 2. Before feminine words, and before masculine words' commencing with a vowel, or an h mute, the article is not blended with the pre- position. ela dame, f. of live lady, De l'amie, f. of the female friend ; e l'argent, m. of the money; De l'honneur, m. of the honor. 3. In French, the name of the possessor follows the name of the object possessed. [§ 76, (10.)] La mai-son du medecin, The physician's house ; L'arbre du jardin, The tree of the garden ; La lettre de la soeur, The sister's letter. t 4. The name of the material of whic 1 . an object is composed follows always the name of the object; the two words being connected by the preposition de. (d' before a vo el or an h mute.) [§ 76. (11.)] L'habit de drap, Wp cloth coat ; La robe de soie, '' K. 'he silk dress ; La montre d'or, ., The geld watch. 34 57 ; ft LESSON V. Resume of Examples. Le tailfcurS 1' habit de drap du I The tailor has the physician's cloth A-Mut Mvr. dc to dame J | Bi, »« * «V« «' EXERCISE 7. Ar-cnt m. lOwr, money ; Coutoau, m. ia ifc ; Poite-crayon, m. pencil- BaLm. stocking; Cuir, m. leather; ™ sc; e ,„„ SS Dame, £ J- Robo, 1. «/««; ghapJau.m.A^; Dra,,, .a. doth; BatfcL. m.£»j .'' «.«//*»; t>r',,n. Tailleur, in. /aitor. 1 \vez vous la montre d'or 1 2. Oui, Madame, j'« la montre d'or et le chapeau de aoie. 3. Monaieur, avez vous le livre du tadleur. 4 Noil Monsieur, j'ai lelivre du medecin. 6. Out Ua le pain du - o„t le pain du boulanger et la farine du meunier. rte-crayond' Oui, Monaieur, nooi .avons kporte-crayon d'argent 9. Atom uoua I'avoiue du chevall 10. eetlefoindu oheval. 11. Qui a ThaU dc drap du charpentierl If onnier a le chapeau de bow du tailleur. 13 LetaUli cuir du cordonnier. 11. Avez vous la nr.j'ai la table de boia du eharpentier. M | q a la montre d'argent 19. La aoeurtlu .nieralar- Soulier de cuir? 21. , llle .,[ loa |,. n. 22. Avona nuns le las de lame? ..,;,. du tadleur. 24 Qui ade colon. 26. La dan. a le Soulier de satin de la BOBOI du boi Exeuci 1 Have voulhe tailor's book? ' have the pi' ch. l8 ..Who haa tie gold watch? 4. The lady has the gold watch andmesmerpe; Have you the tailor* ah oe 1 altaji thetad,,-sel.„nsi 7.11 ooden table 1 8 Y, oe,S* ble. .9.Havetheythe 8 dverkn.feJ10They h:u , ,-ne sdv.r knife. II. The lady has the ailver kmfe and Utt gold pencils. 12. H« she the satin Ml *?£*»* •tatarhaath. aatin dre«. 14. Who ha* th. wood? 15. The car. \ < ( LESSON VI. 36 penter's brother has the wood. 16. Have you the woollen stock- ing? 17. No, Sir. but I have the cotton stocking. 18. Who has the baker's bread? 19. We have the baker's bread and the miller's flour, 20. Have we the horse's hay? 21. You have the horse's oats. 22. Have we the tailor's silk hat? 23. Yes, St, you have the tailor's silk hat and the shoemaker's leather shoe. 24. Have you the ciotir^oe of the physician's sister? 25. No, Madam, I hava the lady's Bilk a/ess. LESSON VI. LEgON VI. 1. The article, preceded by or contracted with the preposition de, according to Rules 1 and 2 of Lesson 5, is placed in French before words used in a partitive sense. Such words may generally bo known in English when some or any is or may be prefixed to them, [$ 13, (10.) § 78, (1.)] Du pain, Bread, or some bread; De la viande, Meat, or some meat; De l'argent, Money, or some money. 2. The French numeral adjective, un, m. une, /., answers to the English indefinite article, a or an. [§ 13, (4.) (11).] Un homme, A man ; Une femme, A woman. 3. The e of the preposition de is elided before un and une. [§ 146.1 D'un livre, m. Of or from a book; D'une niaison, f. Of or from a nouse. 4. When the nominative or subject of an interrogative sentence is ji noun, it should be placed before the verb ; and immediately after the verb in simple tenses, ard after the auxiliary in comp<^d tenses, a pronoun must be placed, agreeing with the nominative in gender, number and person. [§ 76, (4.) (5.)] Le medecin a-t-il de l'argent 1 Has the physician money ? Le boucher a-t-il de la viande ? Has the butcher meat ? Le libraire a-t-il du papier 1 Has the bookseller paper ? La dame a-t-elie de la soie ? Has the lady silk ? Resume of Examples. Aves vous du pain ? Vous avez du paiu, du beurre, et du fromage. Vbtre froie a-t-il une livre de beurre'] Have you bread ? You have bread, butter, and cheese. Has your br oilier a pound of butter 9 36 LE880KVL Avez vous le livre d'un libraire 7 I Have you a bookseller's book? Non j'ai le livre dune dame. | No, J have a lady's tnak. an a-t-elle du yncians sister paper ,4 papier et do l'encre'? o. It will be seen by some of the above examples, that the ar tide most be repeated before every noun used in a partitive sense 9. O : ra. maAogar.-- Livn Moroeau, m.pie» j rd'hui, to-day i "'* r "• Plume, : arj i Livre, in. book ; i I. Avezvous dc laviandel % Oui, Monsieur, ftl one livre de vian,: ilsa-t-ilun morceau de painl 4. Oui, Madame, il B , : pain. «6. Le librairea-t.il un livre 1 6. 11 a de M.ur a-t-elle une montre dor? 8. - t-il du 11. . a du fromage et du b ! U. La dame a une ctiill. r u her a-t-il 17. J ir . Q ,iun0 ir du a un livre, ir, die a une plume .. ■ " . 10. I If :lVl pound of tea 3. W ,!i. 7 i meat to-day, Su? lt>. YeaJ^I have a piece of beef 17. lias your LESSOR TIL 37 carpenter a mahogany table? 18. Yes, Sir, he has a mahogany table. 19. Has your sister a glove ? 20. No, Sir, your sister has a silk glove. 21. Has the bookseller's son a gold pencil ease? 22. Yes, Sir, he has a gold pencil case and a steel pen. 23. Who has your sister's watch? 24. Your brother has the gold watch and the silk hat. 25. We have gold, silver, and steel. (See Rule 5.) LESSON" vn. LEgON vn. 1. To render a sentence negative, ne is placed before the verb, and pas after it. Je n'ai pas le cheval. J have not the horse. Vous n'avez pas la maison. You have not the house. 2. When the verb is in a compound tense [§ 45, (8.)] the first negative ne is placed before the auxiliary, and the second between the auxiliary and the participle. Je n'ai pas eu le cheval. J have not had the horse. Vous n'avez pas eu la maison. You have not had the house. 3. K will be seen in the above examples that the e of ne is elided, when the verb begins with a vowel. [§ 146.] 4. When the words ni, neither ; rien, nothing ; jamais, never ; per- Bonne, no one, nobody, occur, the word ne only is used, and those words take the place of pas. [§ 41, (6.)] Je n'ai ni le livre ni le papier. I have neither the book nor the paper. Avez vous quelque chose 1 Have you any thing ? Nous n'avons rien. We have nothing, or not any thing. Personne n'a le livre. No one has the book. Vous n'avez jamais le couteau. You never have the knife. 5. A noun used in a partitive sense (Lesson 6, Rule 1)', and being the object of a verb, conjugated negatively, should not be preceded by the article, but by the preposition de only. \_\ 78, (7.)] Nous n'avons pas d'argent. We have no money. Vous n'avez pas de viande. You have no meat, 6. ' -^lqu'un, some one, any one; [§ 41, (7.)] quelque chose, srme- zldr- ' : ncr ; should only be used in an affirmative or interroga- te - n a sentence which is negative and interrogative at ^uelqu'itn ? Have we any one ? quelque chose 1 Have you any thing ? uqus pas quelque chose 1 Have we not something 1 38 LESSON VII. 7. In a negative sentence, ne — personne, signifies nobody, not anj body; and ne — ricn, nothing, not any thing. Je n'ai personne, / have no me. no! any one. Vous n'avez rien. Youha\ ,>t any thing. 8. Avoir, to have, in the Present of the Indicative. vchi. N - vcly. Je n'ai J have not; , hast not; N'aa tu pas ! li H il pasl li She has Nousn' i \ l m. not t ; llrcc I hey f. not/ Le tnilUur at il le boatOO 1 Lap ni le cuir. Unior the kutkm ? II h "id neither the cloth nor tkt n /+■ \ I '. noi any thing. Nous n JV..M-* jamais de cafS, (R. 6.) I Winner hot ^ 11. Ami. m ' * '■' no>>ody; ■■ Quelqo'un, m. some out, I ' L neighbor. it n-t-il tie la Boie ! -. Le chapelier n'a paa do aoie : \-:-il iiu veloui bicur. i! ■ i, il a i ! 17. Non, Moiuieur LESSON VIII. 39 II a le coeval de votre ami, 18. Avez vous l'histoire de France? 19. Non, Madame, je n'ai ni l'histoire de France ni l'histoire d'Angle- terre. 20. N'avez vous ni le livre ni le papier? 21. Non, Mademoi- selle, je n'ai ni l'un ni l'autre. 22. Qui a du papier? 23. Le libraire n'a pas de papier. 24. Quelqu'un a-t-il un livre ? 25. Personne n'a de livre. Exercise 12. 1. Has the baker velvet ? 2. No, Sir, the baker has no velvet. 3. Who has silk velvet? 4. The hatter has silk velvet and a silk hat. /6. Have you two silver buttons ? 6. No, Sir, I have a cloth coat, a silk hat, and a velvet shoe. 7. Has your neighbor a wooden^ table ? 8. Yes, Sir, he has a mahogany table. / 9. Has your cousin a history of England? 10. No, Sir, he has a history of France. 11. I have neither the cloth nor the velvet. 12. We have neither the meat nor the coffee. 13. Has any one a book ? 14. Your cousin has a book, a velvet coat, and a silk hat. 15. Have you the physician's book ? 1 6. Yes, Madam, I have the physician's book, and the lady's gold pen. 17. Has the merchant cloth? 18. The merchant has no cloth, but he has money. 19. Who has your neighbor's dog? 20. Nobody has my neighbor's dog. 21. Has^ any one my book? 22. No one has your bjioJk 23. Has your cousin's brother any thing? 24. No, Sir, he has nothing 25. Who has your friend's book ? 26. Your brother has my cousin's book. 27. Has he the tailor's coat? 28. He has not the tailor's coat. 29. We have neither the cloth nor the silk. LESSON VIII. LEgON/ VHL ' 1. The verb avoir is used idiomatically in French, with the words tpielque chose, chaud, froid, faim, honte,peur, raison, tort, soif, som- tneil. J'ai quel que chose. Something is the matter with me. I] a chaud. He is viarm. Elle a faim. She is hungry. Nous avons honte. We are ashamed. Vous avez peur. You are afraid. lis ont tort. They are wrong. Avez vous raison 1 Are you right ? J'ai sommeil. / am sleepy. 2. A noun, whether taken in a general or in a particular sense, Is, in French, commonly preceded by the article le, in its different forms. [} 77, (1.) (2.)] 40 LESBOS VIIL Le pain est ngcessaire. Bread is necessaty. II a le pain. He has the bread. 3. A noun, preceded by the article U, retains that article aftr ni, nor, neither ; but a noun taken in a partitive sense, [L. 6, 1,] takea after ni, neither article nor preposition. Je n'ai ni l'arbre ni le jardin. ' ous n'avons ni arbre ni jardin. / hare neither the tree mrthe ear dent Wt have neither tree ncr garden. 4. A noun, taken in a partitive sense, and preceded by an adjee- tive, takes merely the preposition de. [} 78, (3.)] 5. The following adjectives are generally placed before the noua . Beau, Handsome; Cher, dear ; Jeune, yotmgt Meilleur, better; •id; Gnu nJoto, pretty } Petit, small; Mauvais. /'.?'/; Yieux, old; Vilain ii'LES. !n frere a faim, maia il i i tort I i. Pai raiaon,je n'ai pas t.>rt. vous le bon faai] y. m r^ My rol f. letter? ■ — - — // Hm win au i, C u feminine noun in the singular, commencing with a vow^Lor m h uiuie, theAiasculine form, mon, ton, son is used 3.)] J hair my m , it«lntml«. f. ..ee. f. wi his army. re used without TtQiotidn before a noun Qf either gender, in the singular. J. 6. The ' 'nine; lo dan, in. : ■• '• h,s " r r of the i mien. ' - : / ' mine. - mouton 1 ■ I on le mien! mien, ■ Elle I. .. ! i //' / // cue ■SV has tu yours. Zf(^S*JM LESSON IX. 43 Ne l'avez vous pas 1 Have you it not? Votre frere ne l'a-t-il pas 1 I Has not your brother it ? Exercise 15. Assiette, f. plate ; Crayon, m. pencil ; . Parent, m. relation ; Biscuit, m. biscuit; Cuisinier, m. cook ; Plat, m. disk; Boeuf. m. beef; Pourchette, f. fork; Poisson, m. fish ; Boucher, m butcher ; Matelot, m. sailor; Porcelaine, f. china; Commode, f. chest of Mouton, m. mutton, Sofa, m. sofa ; drawers; sheep; Tout, all; Couteau, m. knife; Miroir,m. looking-glass; Veau, m. veal, calf 1. Avez vous la fourchette d'argent? 2. Oui, Monsieur, je l'ai. 3. Le cuisinier a-t-il le boeuf ? 4. Non, Monsieur, il ne l'a pas. 5. Quel mouton avez vous? 6. J'ai le bon mouton et le bon veau du boucher. 7. Votre parent a-t-il la commode ? 8. Non, Monsieur, il ne Pa pas. 9. A-t-il mon poisson ? 1G Qui a tout le biscuit du boulanger? 11. Le matelot n'a ni son pain ni son biscuit. 12. A-t-il son couteau et sa fourchette? 13. II n'a ni son couteau ni sa fourchette, il a son assiette [R. 4]. 14. Quel plat a-t-il? 15. II a lejoli plat de porcelaine. 16. Avez vous le mien oulesien? IX Je n'ai ni le votre ni le sien, j'ai le notre. 18. Avez vou? peur, Monsieur? 1.9. Non, Madame, je n'ai pas peur, j'ai faim. 20. Quelqu'un a-t-il ma montre d'or ? 21. Non, Monsieur, personne ne l'a. 22. Qu'avez vous, Monsieur ? 23. Je n'ai rien. 24. Avez vous le sofa d'acajou de mon menuisier? 25. Non, Monsieur, je ne l'ai pas. 26. J'ai son joli miroir et son bon crayon. Exercise 16. 1. Have you the silver pencil case? 2. No, Sir, I have it not. 3. Have you my brother's plate ? 4. Yes, Madam, I have it. / 5. Ha3 the butcher the good biscuit ? 6. He has it not, he has the good beef the good mutton, and the good veali 7. Have you my knife and my fork ?* 8. I have neither your knife nor your fork. 9, Who has the good sailor's biscuit ? 10. The baker has it, and I have mine. 11. Have you mine also?. 12. I have neither yours nor his, |13. Are you hungry ? 14. I am not hungry, I am thirsty and sleepy.? 15. Are you not ashamed? 16. No, Sir, I am not ashamed, but I am cold. 17. Is your relation right or wrong ? 18. My relation is right, Sir. 19. Has he my china dish or my silver knife ? 20. He has neither your china dish nor your silver knife, he has your china V>!ate. 21. Has any one my silver pencil-case? 22. No one has it, * The possessive adjective must in French be repeated before every nmn. [§ 21, (4.)] 44 LESSON I. but your brother has your cloth coat. 23. Have you mine or his 1 24. I have yours. 25. Has the baker the mahogany cnest of d^w. ers? 26. He has it not, he has the mahogany sofa. 27. Ha* the tinman my plate ? 28. He has not your plate, he has mine. 29. Which sofa have you? 30. I have my brother's sofa. 31. i havn neither his nor yours, I have mine. LESSON X. LECON X. 1. The demonstrative adjectives ce, m. cette, f. this or that are al- Wmya placed before nouns; they agree in gender with these nouns. H*,(i.>] Av.z vmis ce parapluie 1 m. // ami this or that umbrella ? Vous n'avcz pas cctte boutdlle, f. You have not this or thai txMle. fore a word QMSCnline singular, commencing with a vowel, or an h m | the place of 0ft [\ -20, (1.)] • argent 1 Have you m>t this or that money? :nK'ur. I )',:re had this or that .'. 3. When it is deemed nocesssry to express in French, the differ- 10 between tin- words i : iis and that, the adverbs ci and Li may l.c plaeed after the Boons. ['; 20, (2.)] I I parasi'l, I have that rasol-ld, pan: >ve pronouns, celoi, m. cclle, f. this or that, are me, but arc never joined with tbem like adjec- l.)] J'ai mOO I stnl de votro / have my umbrella and vnur Mother's, I ma robe et i my sister's, i. e., sceur, titter, 5. The pronouns celui, eelle, with the addition of the words ci and i'. are i.- , the I'flrr, the former. [) 37, (i.)] They agree in gender with the word which they n-pre- ci mais vous d ). but you hii-lo. , cr ). 6. The pronouns ceci and ecla. are used absolutely, that is, without a noun, in pointing out objects. Nona n'avona pas ceci, nous avons We have not t\is, we have that c»la. Ceci ou cola, Tfti or that 1 ESSON X. Resume of Examples. Avez vous le lirre de cet homme % Je n'ai pas son livre, j'ai le mien. Le cuisinier a-t-il ce parapluie 1 II n'a pas ce parapluie-ci, il a ce parapluie-la, (R. 3.) Avez vous celui de votre frere 1 Je n'ai pas celui de mon frere, j'ai celui de ma sceur, (R. 4.) Avez vous celui-ci ou celui-la 1 Je n'ai ni celui-ci ni celui-la. Quelle robe avez vous ? f. J 'ai celle-ci. Avez vous ceci ou cela? (R. 6,) Have you that marts book ? I have not his book, I have mine. Has the cook that umbrella ? He has not this umbrella, he has that umbrella. Have you your brother's? that afyom brother. I have not my brother's, I have my sister's; i. e., that of my brother, that of my sister. Have you this one or that one ? J have neither the latter nor the former. Which dress have you ? J have this (one.) Have you this or that ? Exercise 17. Lettre, f. letter ; Malle, f. trunk; Parasol, m. parasol ; Poulet, m. chicken ; Plomb, m. lead; Plus, no longer ; Encrier, m. inkstand; Etranger, m. stranger, foreigner ; Lait, m. milk ; Parapluie, m. umbrella ; Volaille, f. poultry. Ardoise, f. slate; Balai, m. broom ; Bois, m. wood ; Bouteille, f. bottle ; Dame, f. lady; Fromage, m. cheese; Jardinier, m. gardener ; Saliere, f. salt stand ; 1. Votre frere a-t-il son encrier d'argent? 2. II ne l'a plus il a un encrier de plomb. 3. Avons nous la lettre de Petranger ? 4. Oui, S|onsieur, nous avons celle de l'etranger [R. 4.]. 5. Votre soeur n'a pas son ardoise, mais elle a son chapeau de satin. 6. Le menuisier a-t-il votre bois ou le sien ? 7. II n'a ni le mien ni le sien, il a celui du jardinier. 8. Avez vous mon bon parapluie de soie? 9. J'ai votre parapluie de soie et votre parasol de satin. 10. Avez vous ma bouteille? 11. Je n'ai pas votre bouteille, j'ai la malle de votre sceur. 12. Le domestique a-t-il cette saliere? 13. II n'a pas cette salierc-ei, il a celle-la. 14. Avez vous le bon ou le mauvais poulet ? 15. Je n'ai m celui-ci ni celui-la. 16. Quel poulet avez vous? 17. J'ai calui du cuisinier. 18. Le boulanger a-t-il de la volaille? [L. 6 R. 1.] 19. Le boulanger n'a pas de volaille, il a du lait [L. 7. R. 5.] 30. Avez vous votre fromage ou le mien ? 21. Je n'ai ni le v6tre ni le mien, j'ai celui du matelot. 22. Quelqu'un a-t-il faim ? 23. Per- sonne n'a faim. 24. Avez vous quelque chose ? 25. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai rien. Exercise 18. 1. Has your brother that lady's litnbrella? 2. My brother has that lady's umbrella. 3. Have you this parasol or that one? 4. I have 49 LESSON XI. neither this (one) nor that (one).', 5. Have you the stranger's gold watch? 6. No, Sir, I have the baker's. 7. Who has my slate! * 8. 1 have your slate and your brother'*. 9. Has the cook a silver salt stand? 10. The cook has a silver salt stand, and a silver dish. 11. Has the cook this poultry or that? 12. He has neither this nor that. 13. Has he this bread or that? 14. He has neither this nor that, he has the baker's good bread. 15. Have you my cotton para- eol ? 16. I have not your cotton parasol, I have your silk parasol. 17. Has the gardener a leather trunk ? IS. The gardener has a leather trunk. 19. Who has my good ch Nobody has your . but some one has your brother's. 21. Have you mine or ^ i _\ [ have neither yours nor his, I have the stranger's. 23. Has ook this bottle or that broom 1 24. He has this bottle. 25. Have lead inkstand 1 26. No, Sir, Hiave a china inkstand 27. Has the stranger poultry 1 28. The stranger has no poultry but he has '. Vniir brother is hungry and thirsty, afraid and sleepy. 30. Is anyone ashamed? 31. No, Sir, nobody is ashamed. 32. Is your brother right or wrong? 33. My brother is right, and yours is wrong. 31. Your Mater haa neither her satin hat nor her velvet hat. LESSON XI. LErnX XI. Il.lKAl. \ 8.) 1. The plural in French is generally formed, as in English, by the addition of l to die singular. mine, one femme, -1 man, a wommnj I1Z fcinmcs, ten. The form /•• of the article becomes plural by the addition of $. and may be placed before plural nouns of either gender. The men, the women. 2. l>t Ban not to Rule 1. Nouns ending in 5, x, * remain ■unhanged for the plural. Lc 1 'i»£*r La voix lea \<>ix, 3. 2d Exception. Nouns ending with au, and eu, take x for thl plur;.l. :iux, The boat, the boats ; Le lieu, lea lieux, Tie place, tie plact+ LESSON XI. 47 4. 3d Exception. The following nouns ending in ou, take x for the plural, bijou, jewel; caillou, pebble; chou, cabbage ; genou, knee, hibou, owl; joujou, plaything. Les bijoux, les cailloux, les choiix, The jewels, the pebbles, the cabbages; Les hiboux, les genoux, les joujoux, The owls, the knees, the playthings. 5. 4th Exception. The following nouns ending in ail change thai termination into aux for the plural; bail, lease; corail, coral; email enamel; soupirail, air-hole; sous-bail, under-lease ; travail, labor. Los banx, les coraux, les emaux, The leases, the corals, the enamels; Lrs soupiraux, les travaux, les sous- The air-holes, the labors, the under- baux, leases. 6. 5th Exception. Nouns ending in al form their plural in aux. Le cheval, les chevaux, The horse, the horses ; Le general, les generaux, The general, the generals. Bal, ball; carnaval, carnival; chacal, Jackal; regal, treat, follow the general rule. 7. 6th Exception. Ciel, heaven; ceil, eye; and ai'eul, ancestor, form their plural irregularly. Les cieux, les yeux, les aieux. Tlie heavens, the eyes, the ancestors. For further rules see \ 8, \ 9, and § 10 of the Second Part. Resume of Examples. Les Anglais ont ils les chevaux du general 1 Les generaux n'ont pas les bijoux. Les enfants ont ils les cailloux 1 Les yeux de l'enfant. Les tableaux de cette eglise. Avez vous les oiseaux de ce bois 1 Avez vous les encriers d'argent de ma sceur 1 J'ai les bijoux d'argent et d'or de Petranger. Les rois n'ont ils pas les palais de marbre 1 Have the English the general's horses? The generals have not the jewels. Have the children the pebbles ? The child's eyes. 2 J he pictures of that church. Have yon the' birds of. that wood ? Have you my sister's silver inkstands? I have the gold and silver jewels of tlie foreigner. Have not the kings the marble pal- aces? Baril m. barrel ; Bas. m. stocking ; Chocolat, m. chocolate; Bijou, m. jewel; Chou, in. cabbage; Dans, in ; Enfant, m. child; Fer, m. iron; JTils, m. son; Exercise 19. General, m. general ; Gilet, m. waistcoat; Grand, adj. large, great; Jardin, m. garden; Joujou, m. plaything; Legume, m. vegetable ; March and, m. merchant ; a. b ln.( bad; Meunier, m. miller; Morceau, m. piece; Oiseau, m. bird; Petit, adj. small; Paire, f. pair ; Poivre, m. pepper; Qu', que, what; Etien, nothing. 1. Avez ^ous les marteaux du charpentier ? 2. Nous avonn lea mar 48 LESSON XI. teaux du marechal ? 3. Lcs marechaux ont ils deux marteaux de bois? 4. Ils ont deux marteaux de fer. 5. Les generaux ont ils les chapeaux de soie de l'enfant ? 6. Ils ont les bijoux et les joujoux de l'enfant. 7. Les enfants ont ils les oiseaux de votre bois ? 8. Ha n'onl pas les oiseaux de mon bois, mais ils ont les clievaux de mon general. 9. Ix> marechal a-t-il une paire de bas de laine? 1C. Le marechal a deux paires de bas de laine. 11. Monsieur, n'avez vous pas froid ? 12. Nun, Monsieur, j'ai chaud. 13. Avez vous du cafe ou du choeolat ? 11. Je n'ai ni cafe ni chocolat. 15. N'avez vous • lioux demon grand jardin ? 16. J'ai les legumes de votre petit jardin. 17. Votre ills, qu'a-t-il ? 18. Mon tils n'a rien. 19. Avez vous deux morceaux/k> pain ? 20. Le meunier a un mor- ceau de pain et deux barils de furine. 31. L'epieier a-t-il du cafe, du the, du chocolat, et du poivrv ? 22. II a da the et du cafe, et le cho- colat et le poivre de votre Ekaichsnd. 23. Qui a Jc l'argent ? 24. Jo n'ai pas d'argent, majs j'ai du papier. 20. Avez vous de bon papier! 26. J'ai de mauvais papier. ROI81 20. 1. Have you my brother's horses? 2. I have not your brother's horses, I have your C 3. Have the blacksmiths good iron? 4. The blacksmith hi - of iron. 6. Have you two i of stockings and two pairs our deter the gold jewels 1 8. .My sister has the gold jewels .-mil the paper pl.i\ things. '.'. 1 lam you the cabbages In your garden 1 10. We have two cabbages moor garden. 11. Hera you the silk hats? 12. The generals have the silk hats. 13. Have you BOfl rl 14. We have neither coffee nor sugar. 16. 1< your brother ashamed? 18. My brother is neither ashamed nor afraid. 17. Who baa two barrels of Hour ? 18. The miller has two barrels of lloiir. ]!'. Have the birds bread 1 20. The birds have no bread. 21 . Has the merchant tea, chocolate, sugar and pepper? 22. It r and pepper, bat he has neither BBOeolata. 23. Whnt hasyoar sister 1 94 She has nothing. 25. What is the matter wiih your brother 1 26. Nothing is the matter with him. 27. Is he not cold? 28. He is not cold, he is warm. 29. Is he wrong ? 80. He is not wrong, he is right. 31. J i | two cloth coats? 32. I have only one cloth coat, but I hi aatin waistcoats. 33. Who has my brother's letter ? 34 Your sis* Ur bas it. 35. Your sister has it not LESSON XI J. "LESSON XII. LEgON XII. 1. The plural form of the pronouns le, him or it ; la, her or it, is Jes, them, for both genders. Its place is also before the verb . Vous les avez. Les avez^vous 1 You have them. Have you them ? Nous ue les avons pas. We have them not. 2. The plural of the article, preceded by the preposition de, of, or from, is des for both genders. Des livres, des plumes, Of or from the books, of the pens ; Des freres, des sceurs, Of ox from the brothers, of the sisters. 3. The same form of the article is placed before plural nouns used in a partitive sense. [L. 6, R. 1.] J'ai des habits. J have clothes. Vous-avez des maisons. You have houses. 4. Rule 5, Lesson 7, and Rule 4, Lesson 8, apply also to plural nouns used partitively. Nous n'avons pas de livres. We have no books. Vous avez de bons crayons. You have good pencils. 5. The plural form of the possessive adjectives, mon, ton, son, notre, votre, leur, is mes, my; tes, thy; ses, his, her; nos, our; vos, your ; leurs, their, for both genders. Mes freres, mes soeurs, My brothers, my sisters; Nos livres, nos plumes, Our books, our pens. 6. The possessive pronouns, le mien, la mienne, etc. [L. 9, R. 6,] form their plural as follows : Mas. Fern. - Mas. Fern. Les miens, Les miennes, mine ; Les tiens, Les tiennes, thine ; Les siens, Les siennes, his or hers; Les notres, Les notres, ours; Les votres, Les votres, ' yours ; Les leurs, Les leurs, theirs. Vos maisons et les miennes, Your houses and mine; Vos champs et les siens, Your fields and his; Les siens, les votres et les notres. His, yours and ours. 7. The demonstrative adjectives, ce, cet, cette, have ces for thei plural. Ces hommes, ces femmes. These men, these women. 8. The demonstrative pronoun, celui, m. this, or that, makes ceux in the plural. The feminine form, celle, merely takes the s in the plural. Mes chandeliers (m.) et ceux de vos My candlesticks and those of your freres. brothers. Vos chandelles (f.) et celles de nos Your candles and those ofow neigh- voisins. bors. 3 LKSSOH XII. RESUME OF EXAMPLES. Yotre frere a-t il mes chevaux 1 | Has your brother my hitrsei? II n'a ni lcs votres ni lea siens. lie has neither yours wr his. A-t-il ceux de nos voLsins ? <, Has he those of our n:ighbor$ f 11 no lea a pee 1 11 Uu them hot. Ma soeur a-t-ellc vos plumes ou celles de ma cousine ? Elle n'a ni les miciines ni celles de ma cousine, elk- a les siennes. Avons nuus des martcaux ? Vous n'avc/ pee de marteaux. Vous avez de j«»!is crayons. Avez vons lcs habits dea enfantl 1 Je n'ai pas lcs habits dee infants. Vous avez les cliapeaux dee damee, Avez vous ccux-ci ou ceux la 1 Has my sister your pens or my aux- in's, f. ? (or those of my cousin). She has neither mine nor my cousin 1 ! she has her oicn . Have ice hammers? You have no hammers. You have pretty pencils. Hive you the children s ciothes? 1 have not the children's dothes. You have the ladies' hats. Ha vc you these or those ? EXEKCISE 21. Acajou, m. mahogany; Chand.lk. f candle ; Fusil, m. gun ; Aubergiste, in. innkcep- Cousine, f. cousin; Laine, f. inml ; er; Crfa, m. horse-hair; Marbre, m. marble / Blanc, lie, while; Bbteiate, m. cabinet- Matelas. m. mattress; Chaise, t ctatr ; vm MeiHeure, adj. f better i Chandelier, m. candle- Fcrblano. ni. tin; Onvricr, m. trnrkman ; stiek ; Fcrblautier. m. tinman ; Voyageur. m. traveller. 1. Avez vous les marteaux dea man 'cliaux I 'J. Oui, Monsieur, jo le3 ai. 3. No les avez \..us pas.' -\. Nun, Monsieur, nous ne lea avons pas. 5. I/ouvricr lea a, 6. L'aubergiete a-t-il vos elievaux ? 7. L'aubergiete n'a ni mea chevaux ni leavetree,!! • Ix- in. decin a-t-il des li\res ? ;>. Oui, Monsieur, il a de boM litres. mea meilleuree plumes.' il, Oui, Moaaieai j'ai VOS Illeilkures pinnies, les iiiiemies et eelles de voire cuiisine 12. Le voyafreur a-t-il de bone fnana ? 13. 11 n'a paa da bona fusil*, il a des fusils de fcr. 11. l.e matt-lot n'a-t-il pas mea matelas de crin ? 15. II ne les a pas. 16. Qu'a-t-il 1 17. II a les matelas de laine de I'd* niste. 18. L'ebeniate a-t-il des lablaa d'aeajou' iy. Oui, Madame, il a des tabic d'aeajou et dea tables de marbre hl.inc. vous mea enaieea i>u lea \. irc^.' 21. Je n'ai ni les rotitaj ti les miannna. j'ai eelles de l'ebeniate. 33. N'avea vous par son> Uk Non, Monsieur, je n'ai ni sommeil ni faim. 34, le far* blantie: a-t-il voa chandeliers de far .' 25. Non, Monsieur, il a ceux du nurechal. Exercise 22. 1. Hare yon my tables or youra? 2. I have neither youra nor nine* I have the innkeeper's. 3. Have you them ? 4. No, Sir, I hart LESSON XII I. 51 them not. 5. Has your sister my horses ? 6. Yes, Sir, she has your two horses and your brother's. 7. Are you right or wrong ? 8. I am right, I am not wrong.) 9. Has the tinman my silver can- dlesticks or yours? 10. He has neither your silver candlesticks nor mine. 11. What has he? 12. He has the cabinet-maker's wooden tables. 13. Has he your mahogany chairs ? 14. No, Sir, he has my white marble tables. 15. Have you these tables or those? 16. I have neither these nor those, I have the cabinet-maker's. 17. Have you good pencil-cases ? 18. No, Sir, but I have good pencils. 19. Has the traveller iron guns ? 20. Yes, Sir, he has mine, yours, and his. 21. Has he not your brother's ? 22. He has not my brother's. 23. Has the workman my iron hammers ? 24. Yes, Sir, he has them. 25. Has my brother your pens or my cousin's ? 26. He has mine and yours. 27. Have you the children's clothes? 28. Yes, Madam, I have them. 29. Have you your sister's hat? 30. I have my cousin's, f. 31. Is any thing the matter with your brother? 32. He is cold and hungry. 33. Have you horses ? 34. Yes, Sir, I have two horses. 35. I have two horse-hair mattresses and one wool mattress. lesson xm. LEgON xni. AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 1. The adjective in French, whatever may be its place,* agrees in gender and number with the noun which it qualifies [§ 15,(1.) (2.)]. 2. Adjectives ending with e mute, i. e. not accented, retain th"\t termination for the feminine. Un gar^on aimable, An amiable boy; Une fille aimable. An amiable girl, 3. Adjectives not ending in e mute, take e for the feminine. Un gar^on diligent, A diligent boy ; Une fille diligente, A diligent girl. 4. Exceptions. Adjectives ending in el, eil, en, et, on, as, and q* double the last consonant and take e for the feminine. t Mas. Fern. Mas. Fern. Essentiel, essentielle, essential; Sujet, sujette,* subject; Vermeil, vermeille, vermilion; Bon, bonne, good; Ancien, ancienne, ancient; Bas, basse, low; _ r-^JL * For the place of adjectives see L. 15, and Rule 5, L. 8. 52 L E S 6 N XIII. 5. Adjectives ending in /change the /into re; those ending in a change that letter into se for the feminine. Un habit neuf, Une robe neuve, A new coat; dress ; Un homme hcureux, Une femme heureuse, A happy man ; A happy woman ; 6. The adjectives beau, handsome ; fou, foolish; m ou, soft; nouveau MOB ; vieux, old, become bel, fol, mol, nouvel, and vieil, before a noun masculine commencing with a vowel or an h mute; the last conso nant of the latter form is doubled, and e added for the feminine, Ex, belle, folle, nouvelle, vieille. 7. Additional rules and exceptions will be found, } 15 of th« Second Part of this grammar. 8. Conjugation of the Pbxssnt of the Indicative of Ktke, to Be Affirmatively Interrogatively Je suis, Tu es, Kile est, J am ; art; It Bob-jel Kst-il 1 ■ lie I Am I? Art thou 7 Is he 7 Isshe7 mines, •. m. nt f. SniniiU'S nous! roui l 8ont ils ? Sont ellcs 1 Are we 7 if% MM f Are they 7 Are they 7 OF El \MTLES. Avez vons un pardon diligent et une Mile diliir.t:' r«,Mii <-. They are 80. Are you often wrong? 31. or agreeable ? 33. yea, Sir, agreeable and useful. 84. We have them and you have not xv. :;v. 1. The Q French, follows the noun much more fire. ', (1.)] btct$. '!..• nouns, hi I ent; EL 5.], and will be found [;■ 85, (11.)] I :— lst,Allpaiw njunction ore nevi r undi ry noun, pronoun ■ ezt L. LESSON XV. flY Nous avons une histoire interessante. We have an interesting history. Vous avez des enfants polis. You have polite children. 4. 2d, All such as express form, color, taste ; such as relate to hearing and touching ; such as denote the matter of which an object is composed ; as also such as refer to nationality, or to any defects of the body. [j 85, (4.) (5.) (6.) (7.)] Nos parents out des chapeaux noirs. Owr relations have black hats, Vous avez des pommes douces. You have sweet apples. Voila de la cire molle. There is soft wax. Cette dame espagnole a un enfant That Spanish lady has a lame child. boiteux. 5. 3d, Almost all adjectives ending in al, able, ible, ique and if. Ces hommes liberaux sont aimes. Those liberal men are loved. Voila un esprit raisonnable. That is a reasonable mind. Voila un esclave fugitif. That is a fugitive slave. J 6. Some adjectives have a different meaning according to theii position before or after the noun. [$ 86.] Un brave homme, a worthy man. Un homme brave, a brave man. 7. En is used for the English words some or any, expressed or understood, but not followed by a noun ; en has also the sense of of it, of them, thereof, generally understood in English sentences, particularly in answers to questions. [§ 39, (17.) 5 104, j 110, (2.) (3.)] Avez vous des souliers de cuir 1 Have you leather shoes? J'en ai. I have some, I have {of them). Votre fils en-a-t-il 1 Has your son any ? 8. An adjective used substantively, and having a partitive significa- tion (in a sentence containing the pronoun en), must be preceded by the preposition de in the same manner as if the noun were expressed. [See R. 4. Lesson 8.] Avez vous de bonnes plumes 1 Have you good pens? Non, mais j'en ai de mauvaises. No, but I have bad ones. Besume of Examples. Avez vous de beaux jardins 1 Oui, j'en ai de beaux. [R. 7.] Votre frere n'a-t-il pas des souliers noirs 1 II n'en a pas, mais ma sceur en a. N'a-t-elle pas aussi une robe blanche 1 Oui, elle en a une. Non, elle n'en a pas. Qui en a une "? Qui n'«n a pas 1 Have you fine gardens ? Yes, I have fine ones. Has not your brother black shoes ? He has none, but my .vster has son Has s/ie not also a whue dress ? Yes, she has one. No, she has none. Who has one ? Who has none ? 3* 58 LESSON XV. Le bnucher n a-Ml pas de la viande fraiche 1 II en a, il n'cn a pas. II en a beaucoup. II n'en a guure. II en a deux, livres. Has not the butcher frtsk meat? He has sorre, he has none. He has vmcA (»f'U). He has bul Utile {of il). He has two pounds {of il). Exercise 27. Amusant, e, amusing; Bijou, m. jewel; Laine, f. irool; Amcricain, e. American ; Blanc, he, white; Mademoiselle, f. JWss, Anglais, e, English; Brave, brave, worthy; Monsieur, m. Sir, Mi ^ Arabian; Chile, m. shawl; Gentleman; Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Conicau, m. knife ; Parent, m. relation; cr ; Francais, e, French; Soldat, m. soldier; Beaucoup, much, many ;Gucre, tittle, but little; Terra, f. land. Beige, 13 Guitare, f. guitar ; I. Avez vous une bonne guitare? 2. Oui, Monsieur, j'ai une guitare excellence. 3. Avez vous de bons habits ? 4. Oui, Madame, j'ai de bons habits noirs et de belles robes blanches. 5. Votre mere n'a-t-elle pas mi elude de soie ? 6. Oui, Mademoiselle, ellc en a un at on de laine. 7. L'aubergiste a-t-il de bons chevaux anglais! 8. L'aubergiste a des ehevaux anglais, francais et arabes. [». II en a de supcrbes. 10. l.'aini de votre fro re a-t-il des bijoux d'or? 11. Oui, Monsieur, il en a. VI. A-t-il auaai des bijoux 13. II en ■ ausai. 14. En a-t-il beaucoup? 15. Non, Monsieur, il n'en a gut'-rc. 16. Votre ami a-t-il des parents } 17. ( >ui. Monajfinr. il n a. 18, Ce Monsieur a-t-il une bonne plume d'aeier on une belle plume d'<>r I 19. I! en a une d'aeier et nous en avons une dor. 80. Le genera] n'a-t-il jms de bona solda' Ii en a de Me bravi Vmoricsini n'ont ils pas do bonne hml -'3. Ils en ont d'exeellente. 2 J. Ix- marchand a-t-il des cuu- ttaux anglais on ftuftcaial 25. Lcs couteaux du marchand ne sont ni anglais ni francais, ils sont beiges. Exeucise 28. l. Haa your brother Arabian boraeal 2. Ves, Sir, he has some. 3. Has he handsome Ones! 1. Yea, Sir, be has handsome ones. 6. Are the good Americans wrong? 6. No. Mi-*, the J are not wrong, they are right 7. Have you a French shawl 1 8. \ 1 have one, I have a handsome French shawl. *.». Has your innkeeper jour aflver knift or mine? 10. He has neither yours nor mine, he ha* his sister's handsome steel knife. 11. Has the Belgian a good guitar? 12. lie has an excellent French guitar. 13. He has an ex- cellent one. 14. Has the gentleman amusing books? 15. Yes, Sir ha has two. 16. Has the general Franch or Arabian horses ? 17 LESSON XVI. 69 He has neither French nor Arabian horses, he has English horses. 18. Who has Arabian horses? 19. The Arabian has aome. 20. Has the Englishman any ? 21. The Englishman has some. 22. Has your friend's sister a good steel pen? 23. My friend's sister has one, but my relations have none. 24. Are you not wrong, Sir ? 25. Yes, Madam, I am wrong. 26. Are those knives English 1 ? 27. No, Sir, they are Belgian. 28. Have you relations ? 29. I have two, and they are here O'ci). 30. Has the English butcher meat? 31. Yes, Sir, he has much. 32. Has he much money ? 33. He has but little. 34. Has the Belgian general brave soldiers ? 35. Yes, Sir he has good ones. LESSON XVI. LECOST XVI. PLAN OF THE EXERCISES IN COMPOSING FRENCH. Hitherto the student has been occupied exclusively in acquiring facts, forms and principles, and in translating, by the aid of these, French into English and again English into French. Following still the plan of the work, let him now undertake the higher business of endeavoring to compose in French. With this intent, let him take some of the words, given for this purpose, in the lists at page 267, and seek to incorporate them in sentences entirely his own. The words taken from the lists, are to be used merely as things suggest- ive of thought. The form which, in any given case, the sentence may assume, should be determined by the models found in the Lea- sons preceding ; for, every sentence which the pupil has once mas- tered in the regular course of the Lessons, is or should be to him a model, on which he may at pleasure build other constructions of his own. Indeed, this constructing sentences according to models, that is, shaping one's thoughts according to the forms and idioms pecu- liar to a foreign tongue, is the true and only secret of speaking and writing that language well. The pupil, therefore, as he passes along in the ordinary course of the Lessons, should frequently be found applying his knowledge in the way of actually composing independ- ent sentences. In this way, he will soon acquire a facility and ac- curacy in the language, which are hardly otherwise attainable at all* 60 LH8SON XVI. Comparison. 1. Adjectives and adverbs are always compared in French, as they often are in English, by means of adverbs. Plus beau, plus souvent, More beautiful, oftener. 2. The first part of the comparison for the degree in quality is . or as much; ") _ , . . . . These adverbs como almost always be- ,rre '> L. •• i j . . > fore an adjective, a participle, or an ad- Pas aussi, pas si, not so, not as; \ ( J ' r * Moins, less; I verb. Aussi grand, as tall grand, ^Jkr. Pas aussi grand, not as tall. Moins grand, Us* toll, not as tall ich, as many; "| Coming almost always before a tiore; I noun, an adjective used -sub* Tas autant de, not as much or as many ; f stantivd ve or do- , fewer; J monatratlve pronoun. oka. Antanl >dones. 4. T: ! by : Qne, as, .' l quantity •i. the word following the llrst adverb 14' the. com; Autan- utter. it sister. ■■ part | m much sugar 0$ i: ; . books at hooks r ■ >:-ci quo do coux |ei que de of Ohm as of those. He is as happy as you. Have you more plate* than dishett LESS05 X Y I. ' CI J'ai plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. Est-il plus complaisant que ses freres 1 Le Franfais a-t-il moius de legumes que de fruits 1 II a moins de livres que de manu- scrits. U n'a pas autant de ceux-ci que de ceux-la 1 En a-t-il moins que votre frere 1 II en a tout autant. J have more of these than of those. Is he more obliging than his brothers 1 Has the Frenchman fewer vegetables than fruits? He has fewer books than manuscripts. He has not so many of these as of those. Has he less {of them) than your brother ? He has quite as many. Exercise 29. Bleu, e, blue ; Courage, m. courage ; Davantage,* more ; Drap, m. cloth; Ennemi, m. enemy; Espagnol, e, Spaniard ; Jardin, m. garden Estampe, f. engraving ; Manteau, m. cloak ; m. manu- Fer, m. iron ; Manuscrit, Fromage, m. cheese ; script ; Hollandais, m. ZftifcA- Marechal, m. blacksmith; man ; Modestie, f. modesty ; Italien, ne, Italian ; Soie, f. silk ; Tres, very; Verre, m. glass. 1. Etes vous aussi content que votre frere ? 2. Je suis aussi con- tent que votre frere. 3. Votre pere a-t-il autant de courage que de modestie ? 4. II a moins de modestie que de courage. 5. Le libraire a-t-il autant de manuscrits que d'estampes ? 6. II a plus de celles-ci que de ceux-la. 7. A-t-il autant d'amis que d'ennemis? 8. II a plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 9. A-t-il autant de pain que de fromage? 10. II a tout autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 11. Le marechal a-t-il plus de chevaux que votre frere? 12. II en a plus que mon pere et plus que mon frere. 13. N'avez vous paa froid? 14. Non, Monsieur, je n'ai pas froid, j'ai tres chaud. 15. Avez vous deux manteaux de drap? 16. J'en ai un de drap et un de ve- lours bleu. 17. N'avez vous pas plus de verres que d'assiettes? 18. Nous en avons davantage.* 19. Le marechal a-t-il plus de fer que d'acier? 20. II n'a pas autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 21. II a moins de celui-ci que de celui-la. 22. Les Hollandais ont ils de beaux jardins? 23. Leursjardins sont tres beaux. 24. Lea jardins des Italiens sont plus beaux que ceux des Espagnols. Exercise 30. » 1. Are you more attentive than your sister? 2. I am not so atten- tive as your brother. 3. Have you more courage than my brother ? 4. 1 have quite as much. 5. Has the blacksmith as much money as iron ? 6. He has more of the latter than of the former. |L. 10, R. 5.] * Davantage means more. It can never be placed before a xioun ; it : lie used instead of plus, at the end of a sentence. 62 J,KSSON XVII. 7. Has he more modosty than the Spaniard ? 8. He has more. 9. He has more than your friend's sister. 10. Are you not cold, Sir! 11. No, Sir, hut I am afraid and sleepy. 12. Has the Dutchman more cheese than the Italian? 13. He has more cheese and more money. 14. Have you as much English silk as Italian silk? 15. I have more of this than of that. 1G. Who has more friends than the Spaniard? 17. Your friend has more. 18. Has the Spaniard as mik.h of your money as of his? 19. He has less of mine than of his. 20. Have we more silk cloaks than cloth cloaks ? 21. We have more of these than of those. 22. Have you good cloaks? 23. Yes, Sir, I have good cloaks, good hats, and good leather shoes. 24. Have you more plates than dishes? 25. I have not more plates than dishes; but I have more glasses than plates. 20. Are you not very cold? 27. No, Sir, I am neither cold nor warm. 28. Has your carpenter wood ? 29. Yes, Sir, he has wood, money, cheese and meat. 30. Who has more money than the carpenter? 31. The Dutchman has more. 32. Who has more engravings than books? 33. The bookseller has more of these than of those. 31. An- you as attentive as your friend ? 35. I am more attentive than my friend. LESS « xvii. >n xvn. COMPARISON, — ENCORE, AC. 1. The superlative absolute i* formed by placing tres, fort, or bien, very, before the adjective. [} 14, 11.] Oes chandelbra sont treVntQea, T%e$ecandL v useful. Notre tailleur Btl I'ieti obligeaDt Our tir.lor is very oMiginf, 2. The superlative relative is formed by adding the article le, la, lea, to a comparative. [J 14, (9.)] Votre neveu <-^t !•• pftu savant need in French in the sense of m<h paper. 11. Who has still paper? 12. I have no more, but my brother has some more. 13. Have you any news, Sir? 14. No, Madam, I have none to-day. 15. Have you as much wood as my brother's son I ]t\. 1 have more than you or he. 17. Are you still wrong? 18. No, Sir, I am no longer (plus) D I I am right 19. Are your sisters still hungry 1 30. They are neither hungry nor thirsty, but they are still sleepy. 91. Is your niece as learned as he ? '22. She is more learned than he and (u have much kindntu. Elle a Li«u dm amis. • \at many friends. LESSON XVIII. 65 3. Quelque chose, something, any thing [L. 7, 6.] and rien, nothing, not any thing, take de before an adjective. Votre ami a quelque chose d'agre- Your friend has someth'Mg pleasant. able. Avez vous quelque chose de bon 1 Have you any thing good ? Je n'ai rien de bon. / have nothing {not any thing) good. 4. Quel, m., quelle,/, quels, m. p., quelles,/.^., are used interro- gatively for which or what before a noun. Quelle serviette avez vous 1 What or which napkin have you ? Quelles bourses votre ami a-t-il 1 What purses has your friend ? 5. Que is used for what before a verb. Qu'avez vous 1 What is the matter with you ? 6. Lequel, m., laquelle, /, lesquels, m. p., lesquelles, /. p., are used absolutely for the word which, not followed by a noun, and equivalent to which one, which ones. Lequel votre fils a-t-il 1 Which (one) has your son ? Lesquelles avons nous 1 ' Which (ones) have we ? 7. Quel ques is used before a plural noun for a few, some; quelquea uns, m., quel ques unes,/, are used absolutely, with the same mean, ing — Plusieurs means several, and is invariable. Le Danois a-t-il quelques pommes'? Has the Dane a few apples? II en a quelques unes. He has a few. II en a plusieurs. He has several. Resume of Examples. Combien de poires avez vous ? Nous avons beaucoup de poires. Nous en avons beaucoup. Nous avons assez de cerises. Nous n'en avons pas assez. Vous n'avez guere de peches. " Votre jardinier a bien des peches. N'avez vous pas de peches 1 J'ai beaucoup de peches et d'abri- cots. Le boucher a-t-il quelque chose de bon. H a quelque chose de bon et de mauvais. II n'a rien de bon. Quelles poires /. avez vous 1 Nous avons celles de votre soeur. Quel habit m. avez vous 1 Nous avons celui du tailleur. Qu'avez vous de bon 1 Lequel avez vous 1 Lesquels votre frere a-t-il 1 J'ai du fruit mur 1 How many pears have you ? We have many pears. We have many (of them). We have cherries enough. We have not enough (of them). You have but few peaches. Your gardener has many peaches. Have you no peaches ? I have many peaches and apricots. Has the butcher any thing good ? He has something good and bad. He has not any thing (nothing) good What or which pears have you ? We have your sister's. Which or what coat have you ? We have the tailor's. What have you good ? Which (one) have you ? Which (ones) has your brother ? t I have ripe fruit. LISBON XVIIL Exercise 33. Abricot, m. cpncot ; Fleur, f. flower; Pommes, f apple; Anuna, m. pineapple; Legume, m. vegetable; Pomme-de- terre, f. p+ Bcurre, m. bvtUr; Magasin, m. warehouse; talv ; Cerise, f. cherry; Oncle, m. uncle; Prune, f plum; Spicier, m. grocer; Poire, f. par; Sucre, m. sugar; Stranger, e, foreign ; Poivre, ni. pepper ; 'Die, ui. lea. Jardin, m. garden ; 1. Combien do poromea-de-terre votre frere a-t-il ? 2. II n'en a pas beaucoup. 3. L'epteier a-t-il beaueoup de suerc dans son mo- gasin ? 4. 11 n'en a guere, mais il a beaucoup de beurre et de poivre. 5. Votre jardinier a-t-il beaucoup de cerises ? 6. II a plus de cerises que de prune.-*. 7. Les prunes sont ellea meiUeures que lea cerises ? 8. Les cerises sunt ineillcures que lea prunes. 9. Avez vous quel- ques poires mures? 10. Nous en avons quclques unes, nous avons aussi beaucoup d'ananas et d'abricots. 11. Votre oncle a-t-il quel- que chose de DOD dans son jardin? 12. II a quclquc chose de l>on et de beau. 13. II a de beaux legumes et de belles lleurs. 11. A\cz vous des Beura etfangeres 1 15. Pen ai quelques unes. 16. Lee- quelle.* avez vous 1 17. raicellesde votre frere et cellee de votre jardinier. IS. N'avez vous 19. Nun, Mon- sieur, je ne les ai pas. 20. C^ui en a beaucoup? 31. l'ersonne n'en a beaueoup. 22. J'en ai qnelqnes ones. S3. Avez vous Rl the.' 24. J'en ai a»r... 2& JYn ai plus que lui. 34. I, Has your gardener many \> getable r, he has many. 3. I low many gardens has he ' 4. He has several gardens ami seve- ral houses, 5. Haw you manybooksl <>. I have but few, but my friend has many. 7. What coat has your brother ? 8. He hsi cloth coat. 9. Has your uncle many peaches 1 10. He has but fcw peaches, but he has many cherries. 11. How many plums has '.he tailor? 12. The tailor has no plums, he has cloth. «nd silk. 13. What Bilk has your friend the merchant? 14. He has a great deal [beau* coup) of silk, and a great deal of money. 15. Has the gardener any ■od ; n (dans) his garden 1 16. He has many pincafpU-s. tables than fruit .' 1* He has more of this than of those. 19. Has your uncle m. 9 '. He has a few, and be has many apples and plum-. 21. H. '22. I have still many, but my brother lias no more. 23. Which I He has large (grost t) peaches. 25. Which (ones) luivc you? 26. I havj the best peaches. 27. Has the mcr» LESSON XXX. 67 «*ant any thin* good in his warehouse ? 28. He has nothing good in his warehouse, but he has something good m his garden. 29. How many potatoes has the foreigner? 30. He has not many. 31. Has he good vegetables ? 32. He has good vegetables. 33. Is he right or wrong ? 34. He is right, but you are wrong. 35. He has neither this book nor that, he has the bookseller's. LESSON XIX. LEQON XIX. 1. The relative pronoun, que, whom, which, that, and the conjunc- tion, que, that, are never omitted in French, a*id must be repeated be- fore every verb depending on them. [$ 109.j Les crayons que j'ai sont meilleurs The pencils {which) I have, are better que ceux que vous avez. than those {which) you have. 2. Ne, before the verb, and que after it, are used in the sense of only, but. Je n'ai qu'un ami. I have but otic friend. 3. L'un et l'autre, means both ; les uns et les autres, these and those, the latter and the former. [§ 41, (11.)] Vous avez l'un et l'autre. You have both. 4. Cardinal and ordinal numbers as ear as twenty. [§ 22, 23.} Cardin al. Ordinal Un, m. uie, f. One, Premier, m. e,f. Second, m. e,/. First, Deux, Two, Second, Deuxicme, Trois, Three, Troisicme, Third, Quatre, Four, Quatrienie, Fourth, Cinq, Five, Cinquieme, Fifth, Six, Six, Sixieme, Sixth, Sept, Seven, Septieme, Seventh, Huit, Eight, Huitieme, Eighth, Neuf, Nine, Neuvieme, Ninth, Dix, Ten, Dixieme, Tenth, Onze, Eleven, Onzieme, Eleventh, Douzc, Twelve, Do\izieme, Twelfth, Treize, Thirteen, Treizicme, Thirteenth, Quatorze Fourteen, Quatorzieme, Fourteenth, Quinze, Fifteen, Quinzieme, Fifteenth, Seize, Sixteen, Seiziemc, Sixteenth, Dix-sept, Seventeen, Dix-septieme, Seventeenth, Dix-huit. Eighteen, Dix-huitieme, Eighteenth, Dix-neuf, Nineteen, Dix-neuvieme, Nineteenth, Vin S fc ' Twenty. Vingtieme, Twentieth. 68 LESSON XII. 5. The cardinal numbers are used, in French, for the day of the month, except the first, for which the ordinal number premier is substituted : — Le dix aout, le cinq juillet. The tenth of August, the fifth of July. Le premier an moifl prochain, The first of next »u»ith. 6. The verb avoir, to liave, is used actively, [} 26, (1.)] for the day of the month. The verb etre may also be used : — Qrtil jour du mois avons nous 1 Waat day of the month have we ? r "Us le vin^t. We have the twentieth. .uijounl hui le dix. To-day is the tenth. 7. Before the word onze, the article le or la is not elided. [} 1 46.] :— Nous avons 1c onze de decembre. We hare (it is) the Wth of December. KPUM. Ifonvrfer a-t-il les outils que vous Has the workman the tools which you avez 1 have? I tons qaej'al BOOt elke aud Are the houses which I have as good bonnet que ceuea qne roaa avcz ] as those which you have ? ComUen de franca »▼«■ n B m many francs have you? Jen'aJ qne us n'avona que la I le oea denz volumes avcz Wiich of those two volumes have you? J'ai Inn c-t la / M both. 01 la [inmUro place ;i // you the first or the second !nliien, Aoiff much, hoie grammt — about two Septembre, m. Bifttte* f. cravat ; afennlaier, m. joiner} Volume, ni. volume, alf; Monaaebne, f. muslin; I. I* cheval que vous avez est il Inn? 3. II o-t mcilleur que crlui que vons avez et que celuidenotre ami. 3. Comhien d'enf.r D ai qu'un, rnnis l'ltalien en a plus que moi. 5. Avona nous le dix eeptembrc? 6. Non, Monsieur, nous avona le ncuf LESSON XIX. 69 fevrier. 7. Avez vous ma cravate de soie on ma cravate de mousse- line? 8. J'af l'une et l'autre. 9. Avez vous huit kilogrammes de canelle? 10 Non, Monsieur, je n'en ai qu'un demi kilogramme. 11. Combien de francs avez vous, Monsieur? 12. Je n'ai qu'un demi franc, mais mon ami a un franc et demi 13. Votre soeur a-t-elle vingt cinq centimes? 14. Oui, Monsieur, elle a un quart de franc. 15. N'avons nous pas le premier aout? 16. Non, Monsieur, nous avons le six sep tembre. 17. Est-ce aujourd'hui le dix ? 18. Non, Monsieur, c'est le onze. 19. Votre frere a-t-il la premiere place? 20. Non, Monsieur, il a la dixieme. 21. Votre menuisier a-t-il beaucoup d'outils? 22. Oui, Monsieur, il en a beaucoup. 23. Cet ouvrage a-t-il dix volumes ? 24. Non, Monsieur, il n'en a que neuf. 25. J'ai le sixieme volume des oeuvres de Moliere et le premier volume de l'histoire de France de Michelet. Exercise 36. 1. Is that cinnamon good ? 2. That cinnamon is better than yours and your brother's. [R. 1.] 3. What day of the month is it to-day? 4. It is the sixth. 5. Has your father twenty francs ? 6. No, Sir, he has only six francs fifty centimes. 7. How many volumes has your work ? 8. It has many, it has fifteen. 9. Has the joiner read (lu) the second volume of Michelet's history of France? 10. Yes, Sir, he has read the second volume (of it). 1 1. Has your friend,Moliere's works? 12. He has only two volumes of them. 13. Have you my cloth coat or my velvet coat? 14. We have both. 15. We have this and that. 16. How much cinnamon have you? 17. We have two kilogrammes. 18. How many centimes has the merchant? 19. He has twenty-six. 20. Have you the third or the fourth place? 21. I have neither the third nor the fourth, I have the tenth. 22. Are you not ashamed to- day? 23. No, Sir, I am not ashamed, but I am afraid. 24. Have you a quarter of a franc ? 25. No, Sir, but I have half a franc. 26. Have we the sixth of July ? 27. No, Sir, we have the fourth of March. 28. Has your uncle six children? 29. No, Sir, he has only one 30. Have you ten kilogrammes of meat ? 31. I have only five kilo grammes. 32. -Is the butcher's meat good? 33. It (elle) is not verj good. 34. How many kilogrammes have you (of it) ? 35 1 have only two, but my brother has four. 70 LEESOX IX. LESSON XX. LEgON XX. 1. For the time of the day, the verb etre, is used unipersonally m French, in the same manner as the verb to be is used in English fot the same object. The word heure, sing, heures, plur. represent* the English expressions, 6 'clock, or time, and must always be ex pressed. Quelle hcure est il 7 What o'clock (time) is it? 11 eat une hemfe // it one o'clock. II est dix heures. It is ten, it is ten o'clock. 2. Midi is used for twelve o'clock in the day, and minuit, for mid- night, or ticehe at night. Douze heures is never used except in the sense of twelve h/wrs. Est il midi 1 Est il iuinuit 1 Is it noon ? Is it midnight ? 3. Et quart, ft demie, [\ 84, ('2.)] answer to the English expres- sions, a quarter, half-y 11 est MBf heures et quart // is a quarter after nine. II est mi
  • ins un quart. It wants a quarter of ten. 11 <\st leuf luures nioins dix mi- // it (en minutes be/ore nine. 5. The w..ril d.-mi, preceding the word heure, does not vary : after it, il ifl variable. [| 84, (2.)] Une demi heure. Half an hour. ire it demie. An hour and a half. 6. The verb avoir, is used actively [}43, (2,) (3,)] in French in peaking of age, and the word an, year, is always expressed. Quel Igc avcz vous 1 //"'c old are you? i.e., What. Ag* have yon ? J'ai plus do vingt ans. more than twenty. 7. Plus de, moins de, are used for more than, less than, before a number. A»ons nous plus de dix metres de Have wemorrfhan tenmetres of this toiled Ilollande I Holland (Holland linen) T Vous en avvz moius de six aunes. You have less than nx tits of it. I ESSON XX. 11 Resume of Examples. II n'est pas encore deux heures. Est il une heure et deinie 1 II est raidi et quart ou midi et demi. II est huit heures moins un quart. Quel age votre flls a-t-u"? II n'a que dix-huit ans. Votre beau-frere n'a-t-il pas plus de dix-neuf ans 1 Ma belle soeur n'a pas moins de dix- huit ans et demi. Est il plus de dix heures d votre montre 1 II n'est que neuf heures a. mon horloge. Votre tils est il plus age que le mien 1 II est plus jeune que le votre. It is not yet two o'clock. Is it half-past one 1 It is a quarter or half-past twelve. It wants a quarter of eight. How old is your son ? He is only eighteen years old. Is not your brother-in-law more than nineteen years old ? My sister-in-law is not less tlurn eigh- teen years and a half. Is it more than ten o'clock by your watch ? It is only nine by my clock. Is your son older than mine ? He is younger than yours. Exercise 37. AgS, e, old; Cela, that; Jour, m. day; Aune, f. ell; Cinquante^/ity; Maintenant, now ; Beau-frcre, m. brother- Cousin-germain, m. first Mars, m. March ; in-law; cousin; Metre, m. met/re, a Beau-fils, x^pn-in-law; Enfant, m. child; French measivre about Beau-pere, m. father-in- Fevrier, m. February; three French feet; law; Horloge, f. clock; Mois, m. month" ; Belle-mere, f. mother-in- Indienne, f. printed cat- Ruban, m. ribbon ; law ; ico ; Tard, late ; Belle-sceur, f. sister-in- Jeune, young ; Verge, f. yard. 1. "Vd^Tbeau-frere est il plus age que le mien? 2. Le v6tre est plus jeune que le mien. 3. Quel age a votre belle-mere ? 4. Elle a pres de cinquante ans. 5. Quelle heure est il maintenant 1 6. II est six heures passees. 7. fites vous certain de cela? 8. Oui, Monsieur, j'en suis certain. 9. Est il plus de deux heures a votre montre? 10. II n'est que midi a. ma montre. 11. Avez vous plus de cinq ans, mon enfant? l^,Je n'ai pas encore quatre ans. 13. Av^fiBfej^yj ^^s is^Mi^ffes d'indienne ? 14. J'enai moins de trois metres. 15. dombie*na1iuriesdej:uban votre beau-pere a-t-il? 16. II n'a guere de ruban, il n'en a qu'une demi-aune. 17. Est il midi moins un quart ? 1 8. II est plus tard, Monsieur, il est midi et quart. 19 Quel jour du mois avons nous? 20. Nous avons le six octobre. 21 N'est-ce pas le huit fevrier que . . . ? 22. Non, Madame, e'est le huit mars. 23. Combien de jardins a votre cousin-germain ? 24. II n'ea a qu'un, mais il est tres beau. 25. II en a plus de dix. V2 1SSB0N XXI. Exercise 38. I. How old is your brother-in-law? 2. He is fifty years old. S. Is your sister-in-law older than mine ? 4. No, Sir, my sister-in-law is younger than yours. 5. Is your son twenty-five years old ? 6. No, Madam, he is only sixteen. 7. What day of the month have we to-day? 8. We have the eleventh. 9. Have you the twentieth vol- ume of Chateaubriand's works? 10. No, Madam, we have the eleventh. 11. What o'clock is it. Sir? 12. It is only twelve o'clock. 13. Is it not later? 14. It wants a quarter of one. 15. It is a quar- ter after five. 16. How many yards of this holland (toile cTHoU lande, f.) have you ? 17. I have ten ells and a half. 18. I have six f it, and sixteen yards of Italian silk. 19. Is your mother- in-law younger than your father-in-law? 20. She is younger than ho. SI. An yon twenty years old? 22. No, Sir, I am only nine- teen and a half. 23. Are yon sure (itr) that it is ten o'clock. 24. lam, 1 am sure of it. 25. Is it twenty minutes of ten? 26. it is a quarter before twelve (mutt). 27. How many houses have yon ? 28. I have only one. but my sister-in-law has f Have you mine (f.) or yours ? 30. I have neither yours nor mine, I have your son-in-law'.-. 31. Has your mother-in-law fire yards of that priii!' She has only two yards of if* 33. What o'clock is it by (a) your watch? 34. It is half-past four by my watch. 35. It is more than seven o'clock by mine ( y<>nr sister right to buy a »iK. 11 ri-ht t<> buy one. 18. Docs that child want to sleep? IB, No, Sir, that child does not want to Bleep, he is not tired. 20. Has your brother's gardener a wish to work in my garden? 21. He baa a wish to work in (drat) mirjo. 22. How old is that child? 23. That child is ter. _t What istheday of the month 1 25. It is the ninth of March. 26. Are you afraid to walk ? 27. 1 am not afraid to walk, but I am tired. 9& Have you time to read my brother's book? 29. I have tin;.- to read his book. 30. Has the joiner a wi-h to speak? 31. He has a wish to work and to read. M >0 afraid of falling? 33. 1 1 afraid of fulling, but he is afraid of working. 34. What oVlock is it 1 35. It is twelve. LESSOK XXII. 75 LESSON xxn. LEgON xxn. 1. The expressions avoir besoin, to want ; avoir soin, to take care ; avoir honte, to be ashamed ; avoir peur, to be afraid, require also tha preposition de before a noun. Those idioms mean literally, to have rued, to have care, &c. Avez vous besoin de votre frere 1 Do you want your brother ? J'ai soin de mes effets. I lake care of my things. II a honte de sa conduite. He is ashamed of his conduct. Elle a peur du chien. She is afraid of the dog. 2. As these expressions require the preposition de before their ob- ject, they will, of course, require the same preposition before the pronoun representing that object. J'ai besoin de vous. I want you. J'ai soin de lui. / take care of him. De qui avez vous besoin'? Whom do you want ? De quoi a-t-elle besoin 1 What does she want? 3. When the object is not a person, and has been mentioned before the pronoun en takes the place of the preposition de, and that of the pronoun representing the object. Avez vous besoin de votre cheval ? Do you want your horse 7 J'en ai besoin. / want it. 4. The expressions etre fache, to be sorry ; etre etonne, to be as- tonished ; etre content, to be satisfied, require the preposition de be- fore a noun or pronoun. [$ 88.] Je suis fache de son malheur. J am sorry for his misfortune. Je suis etonne de sa conduite. lam astonished at his conduct. Je suis content de lui. J am pleased with him. 5. Etre fache, in the sense of to be angry, requires the preposition eontre. Vous etes fache eontre moi. You are angry with me. 6. For rules on the government of adjectives, see } 87, and fol- lowing Sections. R^sumS of Examples. Avez vous besoin d'argent 1 J'ai besoin d'argent. Je n'en ai pas besoin. [R. 3.] En avez vous besoin 1 J'en ai besoin, et mon frere en a besoin aussi. Avez vous besoin de votre frere 1 Do you want money ? I want money. I do not want any. Do you want any 7i I want some, and my brother wants some too. Do you want your brother ? LISBON XXII. J'ai besoin de lui * De quoi avez vous besoin'? J'ai besoin d'un dictionnaire. Avez vous soin de votre livre 1 J'en ai soin. Avez vous soin de votre pere 1 J'ai soin de lui.* Votre fWre est il fachd eonrre moi ? II est fiohe eontre votre scuur. Avix. v.ms pen de M ehien ? J 'en ai j>eur. De qui avez vous hontel Je n'ai hoiite de personne. Avez vous besoin de quelqne chose"? Je n'ai besoin de ricn. I want him. What do you want ? I want a dictionary. Do nou take cart of your bock ? I take care of it. Do you take' care of your father? wt of him. Is your brother tmgff irith me T Be is a mcry with your sister. Arc you afraid of this dag? I am afraid of him. Ofvohom arc you ashamed? J am ashamed of nobody. Do you want any thing ? I want nothing. Exercise 41. Besoin, m. want, need ; Fatigud. e, weary, tired ; Parler, to speak; Condnito, f. conduct \ Garcon, m.boy; Keposer, to rest; PofttqPP, m. srrrayit ; J vimv homme, m. wown^Soin, m. care ; Ktl.ts, in. things rlothrs; man ; Travailler, to work; Etoiitic, e, astonishci! ; Lire . to read ; Yieux, old. Fich6, e, sorry, angry, 1. Qui a besoin de pain? 2. Pcrsonne n'en a besoin. 3. N'avea vous pns besoin de votre doinestiijiie ? 4. Oni, Monsieur, j'ai besoin de lui.* 6. Voire jardinier a-t-il soin de voire jardin ? 6. Qui, M.id.iiin-. i! ra ■ -..in. 7. A-t-il bien soin de son vicux pere? 8. Oui, 12. Je n'ai peur ni de celui-ci ni do celui-l.i. 18. NotM domestic|iie a-t-il soin de vos etl'ets ? 1-J. II en a bwn soin. 15. Avez vous peur de parler on de lire? 16. Je n'ai peur ni de parler ni de lire. 17. P.tes vous etonne de eette at! 18. Je n'en siii-* pM ei..nn.'-. 10. Bu i'tes vous faehe ? 20. Oui, Monsieur, j'en nil bien tVu-lie. 9 1 . Avei vous besoin de ce garcon 1 22. Oui, Madame, j'ai besoin de lui. 23. N'avez vous pas besoin de son livre ? 94 Je n'en ai pas besoin. 25. Avez vous envie de travailler ou de lire ? 26. Je n'ai envie ni de travailler ni de lire, j'ai envie de ine repotat tar je mil fatigu6. Buioin 42. 1. Do you want your servant ? 2. Yes, Sir, I wnnt him. 3. Doe* your brother-in-law want you ? 4. He wants me and my brother. f * The word en should be avoided aa much aa possible In relation t* persons, f Repeat the preposition de. LESSON XXIII. *l*l 5. Docs he not want money ? 6. He does not want money, he has enough. 7. Is your brother sorry for his conduct? 8. He is very sorry for his conduct and very angry against you. 9. Does lie take good (Men) care of his books? 10. He takes good care of them. 11. How many volumes has he? 12. He has more than you, he has more than twenty. 13. What does the young man want? 14. He wants his clothes. 15. Do you want to rest (vous reposer) ? 16. [s not your brother astonished at this ? 17. He is astonished at it. 18. Have you a wish to read your brother's books? 19. I have a wish to read them, but I have no time. 20. Have you time to work ? 21. I have time to work, but I have no time to read. 22. Does the young brother take care of his things ? 23. He takes good care of them. 24. Is that little boy afraid of the dog? 25. He is not afraid of the dog, he is afraid of the horse. 26. Do you want bread ? 27. I do not want any. 28. Are you pleased with your brother's con- duct ? 29. I am pleased with it. 30. Has your brother a wish to read my book? 31. He has no desire to read your book, he Is weary. 32. Is that young man angry with you or with his friends? 33. He is neither angry with me nor with his friends. 34. Do you want my dictionary ? 35. I want your dictionary and your b> »tiier's. lesson xxin. LEgoN xxni. 1. If the ending or distinguishing characteristic of the conjugation of a verb, in the present of the infinitive, be removed, the part re- maining will be the stem of the verb: — Chant-er Fin-ir Rec-ercir Rend-re 2. To that stem are added, in the different simple tenses of a reg- ular verb, the terminations proper to the conjugation to which it be* ongs [$ 60.] 3. Participle Present. Ch&nt-ant Fin-issant Rec-evant Rend-ant Singing Finishing Receiving Rendering 4. Participle Past. Chant-6 Fin-i R ef -u Rend-u Sung Finished Received Rendered 79 LESSON XXIII. 5. TKKMISAriOS OF THE PRESENT OF THE IXDICATTvTI. Je Tu II Nous Vooi Eta chant -e sing pari -es sjtaktst donri -e girt* cherch -ons seek port -ez carry aim -ent levcjik. finish clier -is fourn -it furnishes pun -issons pi/nuA sais -issez scut un -bsent unite rcf -ois apcr? -ois prreeivest per^ -oit gathers couc -cvons conc«'r« d -cvez MM de$ -oivcnt rend render vend -a »<•//«» tend tends entend -oni hear pct-d -ez UN mord -ent Mi 6 The present of the in.ii.-ative baa but one form in French, there- fore Je chante, may be rendered in English by, / sing, / do stng, or I am si ■:.. , , . 7 The plural of the present of the indicative may be formed from the participle present by changing ant into ons, « ent. Ex: chantant, MM clmnJons; linissant, nous fuussons ; reccvant, MM I UMUHIj rendant, Ml mulons. 8. This rule holds good not only in all the regular, but la almost all the irregular verbs. 9 Verbs ma y be conjugated interrogatively in * rench (except in th e fir . ruler of the present of the indicative,) [J 98 (4.) (5.),] by placing the pronoun after the verb in all the simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and the participle in the compound tenses. Chanter, vonn bienT •** *#*2 Av ,., tantel " tyammmgwMl p„ bten chant* 1 Have you not sung xcell ? Jos pa* hicn 1 p* «* «*J* h*" 7 , ,,, pwle-Cl bicn 1 [L.4, R. Doa your father speak teeti? :..g. EL 1 ] 10 The verb porter means to carry. It means also to »rrar, in speaking of jennenU ; appoiter means to bring, and emporter to carr^ auay, aimer .mans (o !mr, CO 10*. to 6e/bnd o/, and takes the prepo- sition a before another verb. Quel habit portal < "' t^SSL* Je porta un habit de drop noir. / wto* * coat of bine k cloth frere 4 u' apporteXu ! [L. 4, Pa* *w ww * ra ttrr on.*? Q LppOfta dc Urgent I son ami. He brings money to his / 11. A noun used in a general sense [} 77 (1.)] takes the article le, la, 1', or lea. Alroc* MM le bcenf ou le mouton 1 Do you like beef or ""*>»? Je n'aimo ni le becuf ni le uiouton. 1 UU neUher 6etf nor «* LESSON XXIII. 19 Resume of Examples. Chantez vous une chanson ita- lienne ? Nous chantons des chansons alle- mandes. Portez vous ce livre a 1'honame 1 Non, je le porte a mon frere. Emportez vous tout votre argent 1 J 'en emporte seulement une partie. Finissez vous votre le^on aujour- d'hui "? Nous la finissons ce matin. N'aimez vous pas les enfants atten- tifs? Je les aime beaucoup. Ne recevez vous pas beaucoup de lettres 1 Nous en recevons beaucoup. Vendez vous beaucoup de marchan- dises 1 Nous en vendons beaucoup. Votre frere aime le bceuf et le mou- ton. Do you sing an Italian song ? We sing German songs. Do you carry this book to ike man 7 No, I carry it to my brother. Do you carry away all your money ? J carry aivay only a part of it. Do you finish your lesson to-day? J We finish it this morning. Do you not like attentive children ? I like them much. Do you not receive many letters ? We receive many letters. Do you sell many goods ? We sell many. Your brother likes beef and mutton, Exercise 43. [ We shall hereafter put a hyphen between tKe stem and the termination oj the verbs placed in the vocabularies. Tile nWmber indicates the conjugation.] Non seulement, not only ; Lecture, f. reading ; Paille, f. straw ; Perd-re, 4. to lose ; Port-er, 1. to carry, to wear ; Rec-evoir, 3. to receive ; Souvent, often ; Toujours Aim-er, 1. to love, \ like, to be fond of; Autre, other ; Assez, enough; Chapeau, m. hat; Cher-ir, 2. to cherish ; Donn-er, 1. to give; Fin-ir, 2. to finish; Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish; Gard-er, 1. to keep ; Guere, but little ; Habits, m. p. clothes, Cherch-er, 1. to seek, to garments; look for ; Mais, but ; Conipagnon, m. compan- Maison. f. house ion ; Marchand, m. merchant ; Travail, m. labor ; Dame, f. lady; Marchandises, f.p. goods; Trouv-er, 1. to find; De bonne heure, early ; Neveu, m. nepliew ; Vend-re, 4. to sell. D-evoir, 3. to owe ; 1. Votre mere aime-t-elle la lecture ? [R. 11.] 2. Oui, Mademot 6elle, elle l'aime beaucoup plus que sa soeur. 3. Quel chapeau votre neveu porte-t-il ? 4. II porte un chapeau de soie, et je porte un cha- peau de paille. 5. Cette dame aime-t-elle ses enfants? 6. Oui, Monsieur, elle les cherit. 7. Fournissez vous des marchandises a ces marchands ? 8. Je fournis des marchandises a ces marchands, et ils me donnent de l'argent. 9. Vos compagnons aiment ils les beaux habits? [R. 11.] 10. Nos compagnons aiment les beaux habits et les bons livies. 11. Cherchez vous mon frere ? 12. Oui, Monsieur, je le cherche mais je ne le trouve pas. 13. Votre frere perd-il son 80 LE88 S XX^II. temps. 14. II perd son temps et son nrgetiL 15. Perdons nous toujours notre temps? 16. Nous le perdons treP*§ouvent. 17. De- vez vous beaucoup d'argent ? 18. J'en dois assez, mais jcn'en dois pas beaucoup. 19. Yendez vous vos deux maisons a notre mcde- cin ? 20. Je n'en vends qu'une, je garde l'autre pour ma bellevsceur. 21. Recevez vous de I'argent aujourd'liui ? 22. Nous n'en reeevons gucie. 23. Yotre menui>ier Unit il son travail de bonne heure ? •J\. II le iinit tard. 25. A quelle heure le unit il ? 26. II le finit \ niidi et demi. 27. Nous finissona le notre a due lieures moins vingt minutes. CIS! 4 1. 1. Does your companion like reading! 2. My companion does not like reading. 3. Does your father like good books? [R. 11.] 4. He likes good books and good clothes.* 5. Do you owe more than twenty dollar ten, bat my brother owes more than fifteen. 7. Are yon iah your work early 1 8.1am right to finish mine early, and you are v. long not to (■ ' DOt only his 04 lost to- day ? 2). H ore than ten i finish \ niir 27. I* : I le i-« twelvo your brother like meat? 2. 1 i i: goods at .lock.' ji them at half after twelve. 35. We them ten m ♦ Repeat the article. LESSON ZZIV. 81 LESSON XXIV. LEgON XXIV. 1. There are in French, as in other languages, verbs which are called irregular, because they are not conjugated according to the rule, or model verb of the conjugation to which they belong. [§ 62.] 2. Many irregular verbs have tenses which are conjugated regu- larly. 3. The singular of the present of the indicative of the irregular verbs, is almost always irregular. 4. In verbs ending in yer, the y is changed into i before an e mute. \\ 49.] 5. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs. Aller, 1. to go; Envoyer, ] . to send ; Venir, 2. to come ; Je vais, I go, do go, or J'envoie [R. 4.] I send, do Je viens, J come, do come, am going ; send, or am sending ; or am coming ; Tu vas, Tu envoies, Tu viens, II va, II envoie, II vient, Nous allons, Nous envoyons, Nous venons, Vous allez, Vous envoyez, Vous venez, lis vont, lis envoient [R. 4.] lis viennent. 6. All verbs ending in enir are conjugated like venir. 7. The student will find in § 62 the irregular verbs alphabetically arranged. He should always consult that table, when meeting with an irregular verb. 8. The expression, a la maison, is used for the English at home, at his or her house, &c. Le chirurgien est il a la maison 1 Is the surgeon at home ? Mon frere est a la maison. My brother is at home. 9. The preposition chez, placed before «» noun or pronoun, answers to the English, at the house of, with (meaning at the residence of), among, etc. [§ 142, (3.)] Chez moi, chez lui, chez elle, At my house, at his house, at her house. Chez nous, chez vous, chez eux, m. At our house, at your house, at their chez elles, f. house. That is literally, at the house of me, at the house of him, &c. Chez mon pere, chez ma soeur, At my father's, at my sister's. 10. The word avec answers to the English with, meaning merely in the company of • Venez avec nous, ou avec lui. Come with us, or with Mm. 11. The word y means ie it, at it, at that place, there. It is 4* 82 LESSON XXIV, ally placed before the verb, and refers always to something men tioned. [j 39, { 103, } 104.] Votre sceur est elle chez vous ? Is your sister at your house ? Oui, Monsieur, elle y est. Yes, Sir, she is there. 12. In French, an answer cannot, as in English, consist merely of an auxiliary or a verb preceded by a nominative pronoun ; as, Do you come to my house to-day? / do. Have you books? J havt. The sentence in French must be complete; as, / go there; I have some. The words oui or non, without a verb would however suffice. Yencz vous chez moi aujourd hui 1 Do you come to my house to-day? Oui, Monsieur, j irai. Sir, I will. Ave/, row ■ rail paa,Je n'al j>as k tempi d'y aller aujourd'hui. Where is the colonel J He is at his eldest brother's. Js he not at our house ? . he is not. Is your mother at home ? Ms, Madam, she is not. Do you go to our house, or to his house? H the captain 's. ! /.« he not at your brother's 7 he is at our house. u>t send your clothes to your •inn to their house. Do you not go to that gentleman's ? I [R. 12. J / have not time to go there to-day. Exercise 45. All-er. 1. ir, r<> g$ ; Hoiioger, ra. wakh-ma- Rclicur, m. book-binder ; Ami m. I -ur, 1. to remain, Associ6,m. partner ; Hoik I ; lite; Gapitaine, m captain i Magasin, m. warehouse s Rusv Deineur tr. 1. to VUM; Ven-ir, 2. Ir, to come; Matin, m. morning ; A -hbor. Qilet. in wmttiMl ; lVintiv i. allei vous mon ami .' 2. Je vais chez Monsieur tot est il I la DEUdaon .' 3. 11 v est ee matin. 4. D "us? 6. Nous venous de chez vous et de chez voire sfrur. 6. Qui • * The French in speaking to a person whom they respect, prefix thur han dkerchiefs ? tjou? 3. The form i sf-CS que is always allowable, and sometimes prefer- able, when the first person singular of the present of the indicative of a verb baa BeversJ syllables, [\ 96, (6.)] D I 4 i y, [n Bunill nsed with all the >njugated InterrogB, Itead of, que hsei I rIVE PliKSKNT CJ ■ ■'■ 1° come. je vieUil d* i <>vumlc4*.ing1 tu 7 Vi.nt-il] doojsI at ilsl G. The article le, | llrJ int « au before a noun masculine commencing with a consonant, or an • enpbat pln**l I1 " im - i\ 13 > ( 8 -)] Allez vous au V.il on an n.:'. 1. I D 7. A Pegbec alluns ul 'Igfl ,! 8. Quelque part, means somewhere, anywhere; nulle part, no- whtrt LESBO JT XIT, 85 Vjtre neveu ou est il 1 n est quelque part. II n'est nulle part. Where is your nephew 7 He is somewhere. He is nowhere. Resume or Examples. Est-ce que je vais a, l'ecole 1 Vous "Uez a l'eglise aujourd'hui. Est-ce que je commence mon tra- vail? Est-ce que je parle anglais 1 Est-ce que j'envoie ce livre a mon frere? Allez vous au marche demain 1 J'y vais apres-demain. Envoyez vous vos enfants a. l'ecole 1 Je les envoie chez le professeur. Je les y envoie cette apres-midi. Vos habits ou sont ils 1 lis sont quelque part. Ils ne sont nulle part. Est-ce que je demeure chez vous 1 Est-ce que je mange trop ? Do I go to school ? t You go to church to-day. Do I begin my work ? Do I speak English ? Do I send this book to my brother? Do you go to market to-morrow 7 I go there the day after to-morrow. Do you send your children to school 7 I send them to the professor's. I send them there this afternoon. Where are your clothes ? They are somewhere. They are nowhere. Do I live at your house ? Do I eat too much 7 Absent, e, absent ; Cuir, m. jgather ; Perruquier, m. Aair-dres- Adresse, f. address; Depuis, since; ser; Banque, f. bank; Ecole, f. school; Point, not; Banquier, m. banker ; Ecolier, m. scholar ; Poste, f. post-office ; Billet, m. note ; ticket ; Eglise, f. church ; Kouge, red ; Chapelier, m. hatter; Marche, m. market; Village, m. village; Concert, m. concert ; Noir, e, black ; Vert, e, green. Coup-er, 1. to cut; 1. Ou est-ce que je vais? 2. Vous allez chez le chapelier. 3. Est-ce que je vais a. la banque ? 4. Vous allez a. la banque et au concert. 5. Est-ce que je coupe votre bois? 6. Vous ne coupez ni mon bois ni mon habit. 7. Est-ce que je porte un chapeau vert ? 8. Vous ne portez pas un chapeau vert, vous en portez un noir. 9. Votre ecolier va-t-il quelque part? 10. II va a. l'eglise, a l'ecole et au marche. 11. Ne va-t-il pas chez le perruquier? 12. II ne va nulle part. 13. Ne portez vous point des bottes de cuir rouge? 14. J'en porte de cuir noir. 15. N'allez vous pas chez le banquier? 16. Je ne vais pas chez lui, il est absent depuis hier. 17. Vient il a la banque ce matin? 18. II a l'mtention d'y venir, s'il a le temps.* 19. A-t-il envie d'aller au concert ? 20. II a grande envie d'y aller, mais il n'a pas de billet. 21. Demeurez vous dans ce village? 22. Oui, * The i of « is elided before il, ils, but in no other case, •nly instance of the elision of i. This is the Monsieur, j'y demeure. 24. Envoyez vous ce billet a la poste? 25. Je l'envoie a son adresse. Exercise 4S. 1. Do I wear my large black hat 1 2. You wear a handsome grefln hat 3. Does the banker go to the hair-dresser's this morning? 4. He goes there this morning. 5. Does he intend to go to the bank this morning? 6. He does not intend to go there, he has no time. 7. Do you send your letters to the post-olliee ? 8. I do not send them, they are not yet written (icriles). 9. Do I send you a note ? 10. You send me a ticket, but I have no wish to go to the concert - your brother go to school to-morrow ? 12. He goes (there) to-day, and remains at home to-morrow. 13 Do I go there ? 14. You do not go anywhere. 15. Where do you go? 1G. I am going to your brother'?-, is he at home ? 17. He is not at home, lie If iterday. 18. Does your brother live in this village? 19. He does nut, [L, 24. IS.] lie lives at my nephew's, - JU. Are you wrong to go to school! 21. No, Sir, 1 :.m light to go to church ami to school. 22. Do you wish to come to my house I 23. I like to go to your house, and to your brother's. 24. When are you coming to our hou* -morrOW, if I have time. 26. Does the banker like to come ben I 87. H" likes to conn- to your house. 28. Is the bab>4reeter coming 1 29. He it net yet coming. 30. What are you sending to the scholar I 31. I am sending books, paper, and clothes, re is he ? 33. He is at school. 84. Is the school in the vil- lage ? 35. It is there. LESSON XXVI. X XXVI. 1. The verb aller, is need, in French, in the same manner as the verb to go, in Rngtishj t«> indicate a proximate future. Allez v. Uin! Are yen ■..'<• this morning? I 2. The verb venir is used idiomatically, in French, to indicate a past just elapsed It requires, in this signification, the pr. de before another verb. Je Ticns d'6crire met l'-ttros. J ha i my Utleit. Nous venons de reccvoir des lettrcs. Wc have just rtcnixJ I 8. Aller treuver, venir trouvor, are used in the sense sf it go to, IE SS ON XXVI. 87 to come to, in connection with nouns or pronouns representing per- sons •— Allez trouver le ferblantier. Go to the tinman. J'ai envie d'aller le trouver. / have a desire to go to him. Venez mo trouver a dix heures. Come to me at ten o'clock. 4. Aller chercher, means to go for, to go and fetch : — Allez chercher le medecin. Go and fetch the physician. Je vais chercher du sucre et du cafe. / am going for coffee and sugar 5. Envoyer chercher, means to send for, to send and fetch :— Envoyez chercher le marchand. Send for the merchant. J'envoie chercher des legumes. I send for vegetables. 6. The first and second persons of the plural of the imperative are, with few exceptions, the same as the corresponding persons of the present of the indicative. The pronouns nous, vous, are not used with the imperative. I. Plural of the Imperative of Aller, Envoyer, and Venir. Allons, let us go ; Envoyons, let us send ; Venons, let us come ; Allez, go ; Envoyez, send ; Venez, come. 8. Tous, m. t jutes, f. followed by the article les and a plural noun, are used in French in the same sense as the word every in English. Votre frero vient tous les jours. Your brother comes every day. Vous allez a l'ecole tous les matins. You go to school every morning. 9. Tout, m. toute, f. followed by le or la and the noun in the singular, are used for the English expression the whole coming before a noun. II reste ici toute la journee. He remains here the whole day. 10. A day of the week or of the month, pointed out as the time of an appointment or of an occurrence, is not preceded by a preposi- tion in French. Venez lundi ou mardi. Come on Monday or Tuesday. Venez le quinze ou le seize avril. Come on the fifteenth or sixteenth of April. II. When the occurrence is a periodical or customary one, the article le is prefixed to the day of the week or the time of the day. II vient nous trouver le lundi. He comes to us Mondays. U va trouver votre pere l'apres-midi. He goes to your father in the afternoon. Resume of Examples. ;re pere. I J am going t irdel'argent. We have just Que venez vous de faire 1 | What have you just done? Je vais parler a. M. votre pere. I J am going to speak to your father. Nous venons de recevoir de l'argent. We have just received money. LXSSO XXVL Je vieua de d6chirer mon habit. Votre frere va-t-il trouver son ami 1 II va le trouver tous les jours. II vient me trouver tous les lundis. Allez vous chercher de l'argcut 1 Je n'en vais pas chercher. Envoyez vous chercher des livrcs arabes ? Allcz vous chcz cette dame lundi 1 J'ai l'intention d'y aller mardi. J'y vais ordinaircnient le mercredi. 11 va a l'6glise le dimauclie. I have just torn my coat. r brother go to his friend ? I to him every day. He comes to me every Mon*\ny. Do vo u go and fetch money ? I do not. [L 24. 12.1 Do you said for Arabic books 7 Do you go to thai lady's hous* 0% ay J / intend to go there on Tuesday. ■ ,il>/ go there Wednesdays. He goes to chmch Sundays. Mardi, m. Tuesday; Mercredi, m. Wednes- day ; Musique, f. music ; Prochain. e. Vendredi. iu. Friday ; Kcst-cr, 1. to remain, S.imedi. Saturday ; Teinturicr. m. dyer. Exercise 49. Annee, f. year; Pll— I Jill, III S A{>prend-re. 4. ir. tolcarn; K Apres-midi, f. afternoon ; ficri-re, 4. ir. to write ; Commenc-cr, 1. /<> case- Eoeelgn-er, 1. 1" teach; mence ; Compagne, f. compan- Jeudi. ni. Thurstiay ; ion ; Jnurnee, f. day ; f. ac- Irian. luis a quoin' Lundi. in .1/ Deniain. to ■WW J Malade. sick; 1. Qu'allcx vuiit faire ? 'J. Je vais apprendre mes lecons 3. N'al!.-z rove pas eerire .'» roa eonnaiaaanoesl 4. Je mti .:ic. 5. Qui vient dfl \<>us parh-r '. 8. l-'Irlandais vient da nous parlrr. 7. Quand l! Ucllf fOUI BBMigMf la mu- riqne ? s. Bile \a me I'enseigner I'annee proehaiae. ;». Ya-t-clle commencer mardi ou metered] ? 10. Elk M W 0(MHMMa ni DMfdl ni metered!, tUt ■ ^intention de eommencer jeudi, al eUe ■ It temps. 11. Yotrc OOmiUfllMl va-t-clle ■ lY^ii-c U>BJ les dimaiiclies ? 1J. Kilo y va ton* les dimanches et tous 1. s inercrcdis. 13. Qui allez v.uis trouver? 11. le M nil tn.mer per-Minc. IV \'a\e/. vous pas l'intention de venir me trouver demainl 16. J'ai l'intention d'aller trouver vi'tre teinturicr. 17. F.n heithei It D> decin ? 18. Quami je soil inalade, ji- I'envoie chercher. 19. keste-t-il avee vous loose la jonrtJtt .' 80. II ne reete chex moi que qvtJqatt minutes. 21. Allez fi le matin! ie matin ■I Wtprtt mldl 28. Yalta vote toot lee jewel 84. J'y vais tous les jours except.'- Ic lundict le diinanclie. 25. Le samedi je reste chit nous, et le dimanche je vais .\ lY^lise. ;;ci8E 50. 1. What is the Irishman going to do? 2. He is going to teach music. 3. lias he just commenced his work 1 4. He has just com LESSON XXVII. 89 menced it. 5, Who has just written to you ? 6. The dyer has just written to me. 7. Does your little boy go to church every day? 8. No, Sir, he goes to church Sundays and he goes to school every day. 9. Do you go for the physician? 10. I send for him because (parceque) my sister is sick. 11. Do you go to my physician or to yours? 12. I go to mine, yours is not at home. 13 Where is he? 14. He is at your father's or at your brother's. 15. Do you inten to send for the physician ? 16. I intend to send for him. 17. Am I rignt to send for the Scotchman? 18. You are wrong to send for him. 19. Do you go to your father in the afternoon? 20. I go to nim in the morning. 21. Does your brother go to your uncle's every Monday ? 22. He goes there every Sunday. 23. Are you going to learn music ? 24. My niece is going to learn it, if she has time. 25. Am I going to read or to write ? 26. You are going to read to morrow. 27. Does he go to your house every day? 28. He comes to us every Wednesday. 29. At what hour? 30. At a quarter before nine. 31. Does he come early or late? 32. He comes at a quarter after nine. 33. What do you send for? 34. We send for wine, bread, butter and cheese. 35. What do you go fpr? 36. We go for vegetables, meat and sugar. 37. We want sugar every morning. LESSON XXVIL LEgON XXVII. PLACE OP THE PRONOUNS. 1. The personal pronoun used as the direct regimen [} 2, (2.) $ 42, (4.)] or object of a verb,* is in French placed before the verb, except in the second person singular or in the first and second persons plural of the imperative used affirmatively. II me voit, il l'aime. He sees me, he loves him. II nous aime, il vous aime. He loves us, he loves you. 2. The personal pronoun representing the indirect regimen of the verb, [§ 2, (3.) \ 42, (5.)] answering to the dative of the Latin, and to the indirect object of the English with the preposition to expressed or understood, is also in French placed before the verb:— <• * The young student will easily distinguish the personal pronoun used as the direct regimen of a verb, by the fact that there is in English no preposition between the verb and this pronoun. 90 LESSON XXVII. II me parle, il lui parle. He speaks to me, he speaks to kirn II nous donne une fleur. Be gives us a flower* II vous parle, il leur parle. He speaks to you, he speaks to them. 3. The personal pronoun is generally placed after the following rerbs: aller, to go; aceourir, to run to; courir, to run; venir, to come; penser a, songer a, to think q/\-— II vieiit a iuoi. * He comes to me. II peQM a vous, a eux. Ma of you, of them. 4 In the imperative used affirmatively, the pronouns follow the verb : — Aimez les, parley lour. Love them, speak to them. ' 5. The words en and \j follow the above rules, except the 3d. / '. of it, 1 think of it. 6. The pronoun used as indirect regimen, answering to the geni- tive or ablative of the Latin, and to the indirect object which in English is separated from the verb by a preposition other than to, is in French always placed after the verb : — Jo pttfa <]■■ lui. .1.-11.'. Tarlez leur,— ne leur parle/. pi-.. ■',— do not speak to tkem. 51. AnVro, f. affair i Arlue. m Poirier, m I CoHiinuiii-iu-er. I. tea ./)i- Example, m out '" respect. muu * The preposition to is understood. He gimt a /lover to us. LESSON XXVII. 01 1. Allez vous lui ecrire ? 2. Je vais lui ecrire et lui communiquer cette nouvelie. 3. Allez vous lui parler de moi ? 4. Je vais lui par- ler de vous et de votre compagnon. 5. Leur envoyez vous de beaux arbres ? 6. Je leur envoie des pommiers, des poiriers, et des cerisiers ? 7. Ne m'envoyez vous pas des cerisiers ? 8. Je ne vous en envoie pas, vous en avez deja. 9. Avez vous raison de leur parler de cette affaire? 10. Je n'ai pas tort de leur parler de cette affaire. 11. Ve- nez a nous demain matin. 12. Venez nous trouver, cette apres-midi. 13. Ailez vous les trouver tous les jours ? 14. Je vais les trouver tous les soirs. 15. Leur donnez vous de bons avis? 16. Je leur donne de bons avis et de bons exemples. 17. Nous parlez vous de vossoeurs? 18. Je vous parle d'elles. 19. Ne nous parlez vous pas de nos freres? 20. Je vous parle d'eux. 21. Ne les aimez vous pas ? 22. Nous les aimons et nous les respe.;;i,ons. 23. Pensez vous •a ce livre ou n'y pensez vous pas? 24. Nuus y pensons et nous en parlons. 25. Nous n'y pensons pas. Exercise 52. 1. When are you going to write to your brother ? 2. I am going to write to him to-morrow morning. 3. Do you intend to write to him every Monday ? 4. I intend to write to him every Sunday. 5. Have you a wish to speak to hira to-day ? 6. I have a wish to speak to him, but he is not here. 7. Where is he ? 8. He is at his house. 9. Do you speak to them ? 10. Yes, Sir, I speak to them about (de) this affair. 11. Do they give you good advice? 12. They give me good advice and good examples. 13. Do you go to your sister every day? 14. I go to her every morning at a quarter before nine. 15. Does she like to see (voir) you? 16. She likes to see me and she receives me well. 17. Do you think of this affair? 18. I think of it the whole day. 19. Do you speak of it with (avec) your brother? 20. We speak of it often. 21. Do you send your companion to my house ? 22. I send him every day. 23\ Are you at home every day? 24. I am there every morning at ten o'clock. 25. Do yculike' to go to church? 26: I like to go there every Sunday and every Wednesday. 27. Do you speak of your houses ? 28. I speak of them (en). 29. Does your brother speak of his friends ? 30. Yes, Sir, he speaks of them (d'eux). 31. Does he think of them ? 32. Yes, Sir, he thinks of them (d eux). 33. Does he think of this news ? 14. Yes, Sir, he thinks of it (y). 35. I love and honor them. 02 LKSSOIf XXVIII. LESSON XXVIH. LECON XXVIE. RESPECTIVE PLACE OF THE PROXOUXS. See $ 101 1. When two pronouns occur, one used as a direct regimen or ob. jcct (accusative), the other used as the indirect regimen or object ("dative), the indirect object, if not in the third person singular or plu- ral, must precede the direct object. [} 101, (1.)] Je vous le donne. N il to you. II me le AoflM. « K*** il ^ me - 11 nuib le douue. 11 ..ires it to us. 2. When the pronoun used as an indirect object [dative, Rule 2 - in the third person lingular or plural, it must be placed after the direct object [| 101, (£.)] lui .li.nnons. re it to kirn. Rons le leor doonons. FF - I I ' them. 3. Tlie above rules of precedence apply also to the imperative used ■y : — \.- • paa |R. 1 ] Do not give it to us. lui donna pea, [R. - J £>« «"< f»w «'< **■« 4. Willi the imperative used aflirmatively, the direct object pre. Cedes i;. •' inuiri-ct objc 1 . [| 101, (.5.)} to us. icur. SAw rt to them. 6. En and y always follow tlie other pronouns : — J give him some. !s us thither. 6. Pm - : icativb or thb Irregular Vbkm, otte; m, to will, be vil- Pouvom, to be ablet I *•<•, do see, or i<- vux. 1 will or am Jo puis. I can, I may, I ■ible ; Tn \ Tu pens," II v,.it. u v.i.t il peal) Notu v..r.: Nous ponvons, Voai Vow poarea, il.nt, Mv.nt. 7. The above verbs take no preposition before another verb. 8. The preposition, pour, is used to render the preposition to, wh«* the latter means tn order to. Je Tais chez vous pour parlor a vo- I go to your house to speak U ym tro frire et pour vous voir. brother and to see you. • After the verbs pouvoir, to be able ; o»er, to dart aavolr, to bw» the negative pas may be omitted. LESSON XXVIII. 93 J'ai besoin d'argent pour acheter / want money to {in ordei to) bup des marchandises. goods. Resume of Examples. Voulez vous nous le donner 1 Je veux vous le preter. Pouvez vous me les donner 1 Je ne puis vous les donner. Votre frere peut il le lui envoyer 1 II ne veut pas le lui envoyer. Qui veut le leur preter ? Personne ne veut le leur preter. Envoyez les nous. Ne nous les envoyez pa*. Donnez nous en. Ne leur en envoyez pas. Envoyez le leur, pour les conJenter. Je puis vous l'y envoyer. Will you give it to us? I will lend it to you. Can you give them tome? I cannot give them to you. Can your brother send it to him? He will not send it to him. Who will lend it to them ? No one will lend it to them. Send them to us. Do not send them to us. Give us some (of if). Do not send them any. Send it to them (in order) to satisfy them. I can send it to you there. Exercise 53. Commis, m. clerk ; Guere, but little ; Poisson, m. fish; Counaissance, f. acquain- Marchande de modes, f, Pologne, f. Poland; tance; milliner; Preter, 1. to lend; Croi-re, 4. ir. to believe; Montr-er, 1. to show; Semaine,/. week; Dette, f. debt ; Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; Souvent, often ; D-evoir, 3. to owe ; Pay-er, 1. to pay ; Voyage, m. journey. 1. Voulez vous donner ce livre a mon frere ? 2. Je puis le lui preter, mais je ne puis le lui donner. 3. Voulez vous nous les en- voyer ? 4. La marchande de modes peut vous les envoyer. 5. Les lui montrez vous ? 6. Je les vois et je les lui montre. 7. Avez vous peur de nous les preter? " 8. Je n'ai pas peur de vous les preter. 9 Ne pouvez vous nous envoyer du poisson? 10. Je ne puis vous en envoyer, je n'en ai guere. 11. Voulez vous leur en parler? 12. Je veux leur en parler, si je ne l'oublie pas. 13. Venez vous souvent les voir ? 14. Je viens les voir tous les matins, et tous les soirs. 15. Ne leur parlez vous point de votre voyage en Pologne? 16. Je leur en parle, mais ils ne veulent pas me croire. 17. Est-ce que je vois mes connaissances, le lundi? 18. Vous les voyez tous les jours de la eemaine. 19. Vous envoient elles plus d'argent que le commis de notre marchand? 20. Elles m'en envoient plus que lui. 21. En envoyez vous au libraire? 22. Je lui en envoie quand je lui en dois. 23. N'avez vous pas tort de lui en envoyer ? 24. Je ne puis avoir tort de payer mes dettes. 25. Ils vous en donnent, et ils Youe en pretent quand vous en avez besoin. 04 Exercise 54. I. Will you send us that letter? 2. I will send it to you, if you will read it. 3. I will read it if (si) I can. 4. Can you ltnd me your pen ? 5. I can lend it to you, if you will take eare of it [L. 22, (3.)] & May I speak to your father? 7. You may speak to him, he is here. 8. Are you afraid of forgetting it? [L. 21, (4.)] 9. I nm not afraid of forgetting it. 10. Will y >u send them to him? 11. I intend to send them to him, if I have ume. 12. Do you speak to him of your journey? 13. I speak to him of my journey. 14. I speak to them of it. 15. Can you communicate it to him? 16. I have a wish to communicate it to him. 17. Do you see your ac- quaintances every Monday ? IX. I see them every Monday and every Thursday. 19. Where do you intend to see them .' 20. I intend to see them at y>ur brother's and at your sister-. 81. Can you send him there every day ? 22. I can send him there every Sunday, if he wishes (>Y j.i. Can you give them to mel -1. lean give them to you. 36. Who will lend them books. I 86. No one will lend then any. 'J7. Your bookseller is willing to sell them good books and good paper. 88, Is be at home I 89, He is at his broth' arong to pay your debts? 31. lam right d it to 01 ? 33. 1 am willing to send it to ] them to us? 35. We are willing to give them to your acquaintances. LESSON* XXIX. LECON XXIX. U8K OF THE ARTICLE ("» 77.) 1. The nrticlc le, la, lee, ei already stated, is used in French before nouns taken in a general MB Leu janlins sont lot ornemonti del Gardens art the ornaments of vil villas agnca. .:-\d of rural 2. The article is also used in French, as in English, before nouni taken in a particular sense : — Lea janlins do cc village sont su- Tie gardens of this villagt art su- perb. 3. It is also used before abstract nouns, before verbs and adjcctivM ased substantively : — LESSON XXIX. 95 La paresse est odieuse. Idleness is odious. La jeunesse n'est pas toujours do- Youth, is not always tractable. cile. Le Loire et le manger sont neces- Eating and drinking are necessary to saires a la vie. life. 4. The article is used before the names of countries, provinces, rivers, winds and mountains : — [§ 77, (3.) (4.)] La Francs est plus grande que France is larger than Italy. l'ltalie. La Normandie est tres fertile. Normandy is very fertile. 5. The article is used before titles : — Le general Cavaignac. Le marechal Ney. General Cavaignac. Marshal Ney. 6. In respectful address or discourse, the words, Monsieur, Ma- dame, Mademoiselle are placed before titles and designations of relationship : — Monsieur le president. Madame la comtesse. Mademoiselle votre soeur. {Mr.) President. {Madam) Countess. {Miss) your sister. 7. The plural of Monsieur, Madame and Mademoiselle, is Messieurs, Mesdames, and Mesdemoiselles. 8. The student should be careful to distinguish a noun' taken in a general or in a particular sense from one taken in a partitive sense. [J 78.] General or particular sense. Partitive sense. Nous aimons les livres, Nous avons des livres, Wc like books. We have books i. e. some books. Nous avons les livres, Vous avez ecrit des lettres. We have the books. You have written letters, i. e. some letters. Resume of Examples. La modestie est aimable. Le courage est indispensable au general. Les fleurs sont 1'ornement des jar- dins. Les fleurs des jardins de ce chateau. Avez vous l'intention de visiter la France 1 J'ai l'intention de visiter l'ltalie. Le capitaine Dumont est il ici "? Le major Guillanme est chez lui. Voyez vous Madame votre mere? Je vois Monsieur votre frere. Men frere n'aime pas les louanges. Modesty is amiable. Courage is indispensable to the gent' ral. Flowers are the ornament of gardens* The flowers of the gardens of this villa. Do you intend visiting F-ance f I intend visiting Italy. Is captain Dumcnit here ? Major William is at home. Do you see your motliei ? I see yowr ir other. My brother is not fond of LISSOX XXIX. Exercise 55. Aim-er, 1. to be fond of, Demeur-er, 1. to dwell, Legume, m. vegetable t to like ; lire ; Loin, far ; Apportrer, 1. to bring ; £tudi-er, 1. U> study; Lundi, m. Monday; Bois ra. wood, forest ; Flcur, f. ji Pcche, f. peach; Capitainc, m. captain ; Fraiso. f. strawberru ; Prune, f. plum. Caporal. m. corporal; Framboise, f. raspberry; 1. Aimez vous le pain ou la viande ? 2. J'aime le pain, la via et le fruit- 3. Avons nous de9 peches dans notre jardin? 4. Nous y avons des peches, des fr. ,'t.oises ct des cerises. 5. Mon- sieur votre Mm airue-t-il les cerises ? 6. II n'aime guere les cerises, il pre fere les prunes. 7. Avez vous des legumes? 8. Je n'aime point les legumes. 9. Nous n'avons ni legUIMO ni fruit*. [L.8. 3, 4.] 10. Nous n'aimons ni les legumes nj lea fruita. 11. Allez vous tous les jours dans le bois de Monsieur TOtre frfere ? 12. Je n'y vuis pas tous les jours. 13. Voire mrur npporle-t-elle les llcurs ? 14 Elle les appoite. Uk Hftiam rotre meqe appo rt a> t o U o dea ileurs? 16. Elle en apporte tons les lun.lis. 17. VoyM vous le general Ber- tnind ? 18. Je ne le vois pas, je vuis le caporal Duchri;. demoiselles vos I i so?urs sont fatiguecs d't'tudier. 21 lo president est-il chez lui? irleeoloMl Dumont 23. De- • -:-il loin li'i.i .' 2». II ne demenra pas lob) •d'ici. 25. OH deme . run. icise 56. 1. Dow your !»ixtor like flowers? . likes flowers, and my brother is fond of hooks. 3. Is he wrong t<> like Looks .' i Sir, he is right to like booka and (lowers. 6. Have you many flowers in your gardens ' (i. \\Y i, a \e many flowon and much fruit 7. Is yourcousin (bad of raapberrieal 8. My cousin ia fond o( and *straw':.. -(he captain fond of praiOMl 10. He is not fond of praiaofl. IL Has the gardener brought you vegetables* 12. He has brought me vegetables and fruit.* 13. Is he ashamed to bring you ra ; II. [a itbef ashamed nor afraid to sell Tegetables. 15. Is your mother tiro- 1 other is not tired. 17 Is your brother at colonel D's! 18. He lives at colonel D's, but he is not at home at present (d prlsent). If*. How many peachea have you! 20.*! have not many peaches, but I have many plums. 21. Does CapL B. like peaches! 22. He likes peaches,* plums, Tho student moat not forget that the article is repeated beJbre erarf USiON XXX. 91 raspberries, and strawberrie?. 23. Are you going into (dans) your brother's wood? 24. I go there every morning. 25. Is general L, here? 26. No, Sir, he is not here, he is at your cousin's. 27. Does your friend, General H. live far from here ? 28. He does not live far from here, he lives at his brother's. 29. Have you fine flowers in your garden? 30. We have very fine flowers; we are fond of flowers. 31. Do you give them to him? 32. I give them to you. 33. I give you some. 34. I give them some. 35. Give us some. 86. Do not give us any. LESSON XXX. LEQON XXX. USE OF THE ARTICLE CONTINUED. 1. Adjectives of nation will, according to R. 3 of the last lesson, be preceded by the article : — II apprend le fran^ais, l'anglais, He learns French, English, German l'allemand et l'italieu. and Italian. 2. After the verb parler, the article may be omitted before an ad- jective of nation, taken substantively : — Votre frere parle espagnol et portu- Your brotJier speaks Spanish and gais. Portuguese. 3. The article is not used in French before the number which fol- lows the name of a sovereign. This number, (unless it be first and second) must be the cardinal, and not the ordinal: — [§ 26, (3.)] Vous avez l'histoire de Henri qua- You have the history of Henry the ■ tre. Fourth. 4. A word placed in apposition with a noun or pronoun is not in French preceded by un, une, a or an, unless it be qualified by an ad- jective or determined by the following part of the sentence. Votre ami est medecin. Your friend is a physician. Notre frere est avocat. Our brollier is a barrister. Votre ami est un bon medecin. Your friend is a good physician. Notre frere est un avocat celebre. Our brother is a celebrated advocate. 5. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs; Apprendre, to learn; ConnaItre, to know ; Savoir, to know; J'apprends, J learn, do Je connais, / know, or Je sais, / know., or do learn, or am learning ; do know ; know ; Tu apprends, Tu connais Tu sais, II apprend. II connaifr, II sait, Nous apprenons, Nous connaissons, Nous savons, Vous apprenez, Vous connaissez, "Vous savez, lis apprennent. Us connaissent. Us savent. qq IESSOS IXX. 6. Connaitre means to be acquainted with ; savoir, to know, is said ouly of things. \' Oonnaissez vous ce Francis, cet Anglais, cct Alleniaud, ct cct Espagnoll . Savcz vous le fran^ais, 1 anglais, Valk-uiand, ct l'espagnol 1 Do you know that Frenchman, thai Englishman, thai German, ani that Spaniard ? Do you. know French, English, Ger- man, and Spanish? Resume of Examples. Maine G. bbH to ftaneaia I] m te sail pat, mala D I'appread. Docteur L. 1 je ne le oonaafa paa,maiaj< il demenre. Ce monsieur ost il pefeatn I Non, il est architecte. Oc monsieur eat un arcbifc lingua. .M.ais parle grcc Bt arabo. 11 parle lo BjlM I'axabfl ft 1 italiin. Avrz vous vr. I B*M ,1( ' LoBBI ' ■ * m. upholsterer. I < —r? 2. o„i, Madame, je leeoaaafa fcrtbien. • ,"<•! pays U eatl 4. Death* 6 Park-t-U lUemand I 6. 11 parle allemand, polonato, dois , ■ Qpaa med - Non, Monatonr, awnt I* revolution, iletail eapitaine, 9. Vvez voaa envie ffapptandii le , • i, gree modern* IL Conn:. « q«" Ptrtonl ''•' »-• Jo ne lea connais pas. ,3. S.,v./. v. .us .„> ik d.-mnirvnt ? 14 Ha da- meurent cbe/. to at) leader de voir, frera. 16. tfav« vous P a« 1 m»- toire de Louis r.r.a^r/..-. dans Notre bibliottteqH l« * cello do Louis qnatone, ni eelto da Henri qnati ' voua tort d'apprendre to chinoia ! is. Je n'ai pas tort d»appnodr« to .-In- nois. 19. Voa compagnona apprennent ih 20 lis aavent ptaaianra languea anci< Toua anglaial 23. Je saia l'anglaia ct je le parle. 23. Connaieaai LESSON XXXI. 99 vous l'Anglais que nous voyons ? 24. Je ne le connais pas. 25, II ne me connait pas et je ne le connais pas. Exercise 58. 1. Does our physician know French ? 2. He knows French, Eng- lish, and German. 3. Does he know the French physician? 4. He knows him very well. 5. Are you acquainted with that lady ? 6. I am not acquainted with her. 7. Is she a German or a Swede ? 8. She is neither a German nor a Swede, she is a Russian. 9. Do you intend to speak to her ? 10. I intend to speak to her in (en) English. 11. Does she know English? 12. She knows several languages; she speaks English, Danish, Swedish, and Hungarian. 13. Is your brother a colonel ? 14. No, Sir, he is a captain. 15. Is your up- holsterer a Dane ? 16. He is not a Dane, he is a Swede. 17. Are you a Frenchman? 18. No, Sir, I am a Hungarian. 19. Do you know Chinese ? 20. I know Chinese, Russian, and modern Greek. 21. Are you wrong to learn languages ? 22. I am not wrong to learn languages. 23. Do you know the Englishman who lives at your brother's ? 24. I am acquainted with him. 25. I am not ac- quainted with him. 26. Do you like books? 27. I am fond of books. 28. Have you a desire to learn Russian ? 29. I have jio de- sire to learn Russian. 30. Have you no time ? 31. I have but little time. 32. What do you learn? 33. We learn Latin, Greek, French, and German. 34. Do you not learn Spanish? 35. We do not learn it. LESSON XXXI. LEQON XX* I. RELATIVE PRONOUNS, (§ 38). 1. Qui, used as nominative, may relate to persons or to things: — Les fleurs qui sont dans votre jardin. The flowers which are in your garden. 2. Qui, used as the object of a verb, can only be said of persons. It is used interrogatively with or without a preposition : — Qui votre frere voit il "? Whom does your brother see ? De qui parlez vous ce matin 1 Of whom do you speak this morning ? 3. Que may be said of persons or things. It can never be under- stood, and must be repeated before every verb. [L. 19. 1.] Les personnes que nous voyons. The persons whom we see. Les langues que nous apprenons. The languages which we learn. 4. Ce que is employed for that which, or its equivalent what: — Ce que vous apprenez est utile. That which you learn is useful. Trouvez vous ce que vous cherchez. Do you find what you seek? 100 LESSON IXIL 5. Que answers to the English pronoun what, used absolutely be- fore a verb: — Que penscz vous dfl ccla I ' ] l " * °f that ? 6. Quoi, when not used as an exclamation, is generally preceded ky a preposition, and relates only to tin: De ,, n ,,i Tonka row parler 1 O/VW rfo ivu ?r/.«A to speak ? A ,,' .,which, oi trhi'c/i 0M • 1- I s 8.] or irhich anM, relate to persons or things. They may be p r eceded by a prepoeitioii: — IC ■■ hnr< V >u brought? oal V" 7 8. Dont, of which, or tf whom, whose, may relate to persons or things, in the maaeoUne or feminine, singular or plural. It can never be naed abeolaielj and must always be preoeded by ai eofteeedea*. It is preferable to da qui or dnqnel, fee. young ladm of whom your sislt* speaks I \ KRB8, Dim:, 4. to urn. Fai-hf:. 4. fa MaTT-aa, 4. to put. | I ■'■ ■ ' ' /"«'. dojntt,ot am *•' II .lit. Nona •' ammo. am p*tmg. Tu neta, II met, Nona mettona, Vous mettea, Us mettent !, Oonnafaaea rooi le monsieur «u>i pari . I L'AngU ptol dont la M itinl usdttes. Ponrqai fait«H voui i Nous parlous do ccdontvousparlez. tkt gtnlltmm v>h, | | (0 Aim. / In you? I njfair? ■[■ ) whom you speak her*. II ■;.// ll qMeJttafewaraitarf II ■■ rrtn. He speak oftXat of v>\k\ you speak. I LESSON XXXI. 101 Exercise 59. Arriv-er, 1. to anive; Habillement, m. dress, Plaisir, rx. pleasure: Avec, with; clot/ies; Presquo, almost; Coffre, m. trunk; Hollandais, e, Dutcli; Rien, nothing; Command-er, 1. to order; Linge, m. linen; Soulier, m. shoe; Ecossais, e, Scotch; Monsieur, m. gentleman ; Vvai, e, true. Enfant, m. child; Nom, m. name; 1. Qui connaissez vous? 2. Nous connaissons les Hollandais dont vous nous parlez. 3. Quelles lecons apprenez vous ? 4. Nous ap- prenons les lecons que vous nous recommandez. 5. Ce que je vous dis est il vrai ? 6. Ce que vous nous dites est vrai. 7. De qui nous parlez vous ? 8. Nous vous parlons des Ecossais qui viennent d'arri- ver. 9. Savez vous qui vient d'arriver ? 10. Je sais que le monsieur que votre frere connait vient d'arriver. 11. Vos soeurs que font elles? 12. Elles ne font presque rien, elles n'ontpresque rien a. faire. 13. Que mettez vous dans votre coffre? 14. Nous y mettons ce que nous avons, nos habillements et notre linge. 15. N'y mettez vous pas vos souliers? 16. Nous y mettons les souliers dont nous avons besoin. 17. De quoi avez vous besoin? 18. Nous avons besoin de ce que nous avons. 19. Cet enfant sait il ce qu'il fait? 20. II sait ce qu'il fait et ce qu'il dit. 21. Ne voulez vous pas le leur dire? 22. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. 23. Faites vous ce que le marchand vous commande ? 24. Nous faisons ce qu'il nous dit. 25. II parle de ce dont vous parlez. Exercise 60. 1 . Have you what (ce dont) you want ? 2. We have what we want. 3. Is the gentleman whom you know, here ? 4. The lady of whom you speak is here. 5. Is she just arrived? [L. 26. 2.] 6. She is just arrived. 7. Do you know that gentleman ? 8. I know the gentleman who is speaking with your father. 9. Do you know his name ? 10. 1 do not know his name, but I know where he lives (demeure). 11. What do you do every morning? 12. We do almost nothing; we have very little to do. 13. Does the tailor make your clothes? 14. He makes toy clothes, my brother's, and my cousin's. 15. Do you know what you say? 16. I know what I say, and what I do. 17. Do you know the Scotchman of whom your brother speaks? 18. I know him well. 19 What does he put into his trunk? 20. He puts his clothes. 21. Is that which you say, true? 22. What I say is true. 23. Do you understand that which I say to you? 24. I understand all that you say. 25. Of whom does your brother speak ? 26. He speaks of the gentleman whose sister is here. 27. Is your brother wrong to 102 LESSON XXXII. do what he do.'s? 28. He cannot be wrong to do it. 29. What are youlin^ 30. I am doing that which you do. 31. Where do you 'pu my bocks ! 32. Into (dans) your brother, trnnk 3. Is you Mother here « 34. Me is not here. 35. He ie at my brother s, or at my father's. LESSON XXXII. LE0ON XXXLL 1 The verb nu-ttre i- used in the MM MM as the English to put on, "in speaking rf geiMflM. Mettre le convert, means to lay the cloth, 0T M M Uibb-:— 2. 6t.-r in. ' — ^ledinerl H ^**M-rf 3 . The rerh bin :lll " lh,r wb » '" the 8en9e of '° llt i! bi.ir une MbOfl 1 £« ^ Jnjttjf have £*«« *«« ? fait Wtlr plus d B *"'"• , IV be need in the name sense before ita -wn InnnHhreH- •"^ L«.e.]fbUoMdbydirei8Med in the sense of to mean : — \es? ! . ,.r black coalM^ ll „ij your rloakl , 1 am afraid to take* Ehyou have ymr shoes mended? j.ii penr de l« DOtr I j,- ]<■ m POWQUOJ D fttl I WWI 1 - man - ;, tv..i«l. j'ai peer de leeer. ■ HTomin...l.r von sou Booermeehablta. Ihave ***%£*** [hire une rmre ' , of boots mm*. LESSON XXXII. 103 Je fain abuser un puits. Votre frere que veut il dire 1 Que veut dir^. cela 1 Cela ne veut rien dire. Otez vous vos souliers et vos bas 1 Je n'ote ni les uas ni les autres. Le diner est pret ; le domestique va mettre le couvert. Voulez vous oter le couvert 1 Je vais mettre le couvert. Je vais oter le couvert. J have a well dug. What does your brother mean ? What does that mean ? That means nothing. Do you take off your shoes and stock- ings ? I take off neither these nor those. Dinner is ready; the servant is going to lay the cloth. Will you take away the things ft on the table ? I am going to lay the cloth. I am going to take away the things. drm Exercise 61. Gat-er, 1, to spoil ; Gilet, m. waistcoat ; Grand, e, large, very ; Manteau, m. cloak ; Noir, e, black; Pantoufle, f. slipper; Pourquoi, why; 1. to Pret, e, ready ; Raccommod-er, mend ; Tout-a-l'heure, ately ; Uniforme, m. uniform; Velours, m. velvet. Apothicaire, gist; Apres, after; Cave, f. cellar; Creus-er, 1. to dig ; Dimanche, m. Sunday i Diner, m. dinner; Fache, e, sorry, angry ; 1. Le general N. met il son uniforme? 2. H ne le met point. 3. Pourquoi ne portez vous point votre manteau noir ? 4. J'ai peur de le gater. 5. Mettez vous vos souliers de satin tous les matins? 6. Je ne les mets que les dimanehes. 7. II est midi ; le domestique met il le couvert ? 8. II ne le met pas encore ; il va le mettre tout-a- l'heure. 9. Le diner n'est il pas pret? 10. Le domestique 6te-t-il le couvert? 11. II ne l'ote pas encore, il n'a pas le temps de l'oter. 12. Otez vous votre habit quand vous avez chaud? 13. Je l'ote quand j'ai trop chaud. 14. Faites vous faire un habit de drap? 15. Je fais faire un habit de drap et un gilet de~satin noir. 16.' Ne faites vousj^int -raccommoder vos pantoufles de velours ? 17. Ne faites \£]^PP creuser une cave? 18. Je fais creuser une grande cave. 19. L'apothicaire que veut il dire? 20. II veut dire qu'il a besoin d'argent. 21. Savez vous ce que cela veut dire? 22. Cela veut dire que votre frere est fache contre vous. 23. Avez vous envie de met- tre votre manteau ? 24. J'ai l'intention de le mettre, car j'ai grand froid. 25. Je vais l'oter, car j'ai chaud. Exercise 62. 1. Do you take off your coat ? 2. I do not take off my coat, I put it on. S. Do you take off your cloak when you are cold ? 4. When I am cold I put it on. 5. Does your little boy take off his shoes and stockings ? [j 21, (4.)] 6. He takes them off, but he is going to put them on again (remeitre). 7. Does that little giH lay the cloth? 8. 104 LESSON XXXIII. She lavs the cloth every day at noon (midi). 9. Do. s she take awaj the things after dinner? 10. She takes away the talnga every iay. 11. Do yoa intend to have a coat made ? 12. I intend to have a coal mad- *13 I am going to have a co.it and a vest made. 14. Does your "brother have hifl boots mended! 15. He has them mended. 16 W i 17. I do not know what he means. ]8 ; Is ; , r With my brother? 19. He is neither ur brother. 20. Is he afraid to spoil his H. He is not oil it- 22. Doee tke droggiat want 24. Has yuiir sisier taken 36. Why do you i i off becauee they hart I to have a house built? 29. I in- tailor sju.il your e 33. No person .. 1 wear a black hat. ill. XXXIII. ■ 1 '; :! . v in tlie tllird P ,-rs " n euta fro nou the termination of the el : .und In the personal form in the some j 62. 3. J':::.-:.-.: Of N nnB *» I. • SHOW, it u G«k . i !Aaw - '. 4 U . may be fol.owed oy a lingular U y »«lu rlbler an m II y « .arc appks in your £«rdM%. X X X 1 1 1. 105 5. In relation to the weather, the verb faire is used unipersonally in the same manner as the English verb to he. II fait beau temps aujourd'hui. II fait chaud, il fait iroid. It is fine weather to-day. It is warm, it is cold. Resume of Examples. Pleut il ce matin *? II ne pleut pas, il neige. II va pleuvoir ce matin. Ne gcle-t-il pas ce matin 1 II ne gele pas, il fait du brouillard. Y a-t-il du sucre chez vous 1 II y en a beaucoup chez mon frere. Y a-t-il plusieurs personnes chez moi 1 ? II y a plus de cent personnes. N'y a-t-il personne a. 1'eglise ? II n'y a encore personne. Est il trop tot 1 Au contraire, il est trop tard. Fait il froid ou chaud aujourd'hui 1 II fait chaud et humide. Fait il du vent ou du brouillard 1 II fait un temps bien desagreable. Does it rain this morning ? It does not rain, it snows. It is going to rain this morning. Does it not freeze this morning ? It does not freeze, it is foggy. Is there any sugar at your house ? There is a great deal at my brother's. Are there several persons at my house ? There are more than one hundred persons. Is there nobody at church ? Tliere is as yet no one tliere. Is it too soon ? N On the contrary, it is too late. Is it cold or warm to-day ? It is warm and damp. Is it windy or foggy ? It is very disagreeable weather. Exercise 63. Assemblee, f. assembly, Convert, e, cloudy; Manuscrit, m. maniu- party; Ecurie, f. stable'; script; Bibliotheque, f .library ; Epais, se, thick ; Veau, m. veal ; ' Brouillard, m./og - ; Foin, m. hai/; Vent. m. wind ; Chambre, f. room; Gibier, m. game; _ Volaille, f. poultry. Cinquante, fifty ; Humide, damp ; 1. Quel temps fait il aujourd'hui? 2. II fait un temps superbe. 3. Fa'\ il tres beau temps aujourd'hui? 4. II fait un temps couvert et humide. 5. Pleut il beaucoup ce matin? 6. II ne pleut pas en- core, mais il va pleuvoir. 7. Fait il du vent ou du brouillard ? 8. II ne fait pas de vent. 9. Le brouillard est tres epais. 1C, Combien de personnes y a-t-il a l'assemblee? 11. II y a plus de deux cents [L. 20. 7.] personnes. 12. N'y a-t-il pas beaucoup de manuscrits dans votre bibliotheque? 13. II n'y en a pas beaucoup, il n'y en a que cinquante-cinq. 14. Fait il trop froid pour vous dans cette chambre? 15. II n'y fait ni trop froid ni trop chaud. 16. Y a-t-il beaucoup de foin dans votre ecurie? 17. II y en a assez pour mon cheval. 18. Restez vous a ia maison quand il pleut? 19. Quandil pleut je reste a la maison, mais quand il fait beau temps je vais choz mon cousin. 20. Y a-t-il de la viande au march© ? 21. II y en a 6* 106 LESSON XXXIV. beaut o up. il y a aussi du gibier. 22. II y a du venu, du mouton et de la volaille. 23. N'y a-t-il pas aussi des legumes et des fruita! 24. II n'y en a pas. 25. II y en a aussi. Exercise G4. 1. Are you cold this morning? 2. I am not cold, it is warm this morning. 3. Is it foggy or windy ! 4. it is neither foggy nor windy, it rains in toireute ( r.id rien, should be fit ' \ — JVpaii parlcr, no pas lire. S'ot to tpeal, not to read. LESSON XXXIV. 107 3. The adverb assez, enough, tolerably, precedes generally the other adverbs. It precedes also adjectives and nouns : — Vous ecrivez assez correctement. You write pretty correctly. Vous avez assez de livres. You have books enough. Cet enfant est assez attentif. That child is attentive enough. 4. Voici means, here is ; voila, there is : — Voici le livi-e que vous aimez. Here is the book which you like. Voila le monsieur dont vous parlez. There is the gentleman of whom yov, ■ speak. 5. Dans is used for in or into, when the noun which follows it is preceded by an article, or by a possessive, demonstrative, or numeral adjective. [§ 142, (2.)] : — Le crayon est dans le pupitre. The pencil is in the desk. Mettez cette lettre dans votre malle. Put this letter into your trunk. 6. En renders to, in, or into, coming after the verbs to be, to go, to reside, followed by the name of a^ part of the earth, a country, or province : — Notre ami est en France. Our friend is in France. Vous allez en Italie. You go to Italy. 7. The preposition a. is used for the words at or to, in or into, be- fore the name of a town, city, or village, preceded by the verbs men- tioned above : — ^ II va a. Paris le mois prochain. He is going to Paris next month. 8. The same preposition is used in the expressions, a la campagne, a la ville, a la chasse, a la peche, &c. Nous allous a la campagne. We go into the country. Vous n 'allez pas a la ville. You do not go to the city. Je vais a la chasse et a la peche. I go hunting and fishing. 9. Indicative Present of the Irregular Verbs, Condui-re, 4. to conduct. Ecri-re, 4. to write. Li-re, 4. to read. Je conduis, I co'/iduct. do J'ecris, I write, do write, Je lis, I read, do read or conduct, or am con- or am writing ; am reading; ducting ; Tu conduis, Tu ecris, Tu lis, II conduit, II ecrit, II lit, Nous conduisons, Nons ecrivons, Nous lisons, Vous conduisez, Vous ecrivez, Vous lisez, lis conduisent. lis ecrivent. Us lisent. Kesume of Examples. Votre parent ecrit il bien 1 II ecrit assez bien et assez vite. Nous avons assez de livres. Does your relation write weU ? He writes well enough and rapidly enough. We have books enough. 108 LESS03 XXXIV. Nous sommes assez attentifs a nos lerOTlS. Voila la demoiselle dont vous parlez. Votre cheval n'est il pas dans le champ 1 II n'y est pas, il est dans le jardin. All'-/, vi • Oucoii.i m.-mmc'? Jo lo conduis en Allem Demeoi ■ illc ? Nona daaneurona ft la ■ . pftcne. attentive enough to our let- the younc lady of whom yon speak. Is not your horse in the field ? i the garden. C . ' vet this year? Paris and to I. I i/ouiig man? I take hn: G Wc lire in the country. ' Bnbae, f. Switzerland i ate i Couxmis, in. clerk; .irney. at encore U l - plus la mime, jVn ; , ut .' I. 11 d'argent pour acbi mt, fnaia j'ai h\ re, en avez • vous i vous I i villa .' 19. II ne '. r-t-il i allcr ' 11 va i I'intention da .. ' Dm Milan ni I BaJajnl 23. II ne dement Votre domes: I eat ft 1* cole. 00. I, Does;, - :i 7 3. He write* toler- a\».y well, but not 8. Have j enottflfa in TOOI lil ■• it I intend to buy aomc more. 5. V. I 6. I intend to read it 7. Does your son like to go flailing? 8. He liken LESSON XXXV. 109 to go fishing and hunting. 9. When does he like to go fishing 1 10. When I am in the country. 11. What do you do when you are in the city ? 12. When I am in the city, I read and learn my lesson. 13. Do you intend to go to France this year? 14. I intend to go to Germany. 15. Will you go to the city if it (s'iZ) rains? 16. When it rains I always remain at home. [R. 1.] 17. How many friends have you in the city? 18. I have many friends there. 19. Are there many English in France? 20. There are many English in France and in Italy (Italie). 21. Are there more English in Germany than in Italy? 22. There are more English in Italy than in Germany. 23. Is it fine weather in Italy ? 24. It is very fine weather there. 25. Does it often freeze there ? 26. It freezes sometimes there, but not often. 27. Does that young lady read as well as her sister? 28. She reads better than her sister, hut her sister reads better than I. 29^ Is there anyone at your house? 30. My father is at home. 31. Is your brother-in-law absent? 32. My brother-in-law is at your house. 33. There is no one at home to-day. LESSON XXXV. LEgON XXXV. 1. The indefinite pronoun on has no exact equivalent in Englisn. It may be rendered by one, we, they, people, &c, according to the context. On has, of course, no antecedent, and seldom refers to a particular person, [J 41, (4.) (5.) § 113.] : — On doit honorer la vertu. We should honor virtue. On nous apporte de l'argent. Money is brought to us, 2. As may be seen in the last example, on is often the nominative of an active verb, which is best rendered in English by the passive [5113,(1.)]:- On dit que votre epouse est ici. It is said that your wife is here. On raconte des histoires singulieres. Singular histories are related. On recolte beaucoup de ble en Much wheat is harvested {grown) in France. France. 3. Avoir lieu, answers to the English expression, to take place : — Cela a lieu tous les jours. That takes place every day. 4. Au lieu de, answers to the English, instead of. The verb which follows it must, according to Rule 2, L. 21, be put in the infinitive: — Au lieu d'etudier, il jouo. Instead of studying, he plays. 110 LESSON XXXV. 5. Devoir, to nice, is used before an infinitive, like tbe English Terb, lo be, to express obligation :— Je dois lui eciire demain. / Ml to writ* to Aim to-morrow. Noi devons y alkr demain. W *g* *m to-morrow. 6 Reeevoir des nouvelles, means, to hear from :— Devcz vous recevoir da nouvclles Are you to hoar from your sister? de votre sceur. .ndr, r-rkr, answers to the English phrase, to hear of ol ^ntenda vous souveut parler do Do you often hear ofyourfrwnds? vos amis 1 Bt > mpi , m . m cUy 7 : \ Que di- vill ° ^ jours 1 ie cHose do i ami I UdoUw BOB Tcre. 11 dame au lieu dc IBM \ i heard of hi "i Mm. j fUtet tits even- (Ml morning. I U . f tnstead of walking. 1 Voiuappo MMMta Pas tOUS ., : .....mdon la 7. demon fibl ...d.t U.Quaod do.t DjoapMHTM vovag«- ' 12. On dit quil doit b MnnMNI lc mo.s prochain. IS. LESSON XXXVI. Ill Ce mariage a-t-il lieu aujourd'hui ou demain? 14. On nous dit qu'i] doit avoir lieu cette apres-midi. 15. II aura lieu a cinq heures et demie. 16. Avez vous envie de venir au lieu de votre frere? 17. Mon frere doit venir au lieu de notre cousin. 18. Avez vous l'in- tention de lui dire ce qu'il doit faire? 19. II sait ce qui. doit faire. 20. Savez vous ce qu'on dit de nouveau? 21. On ne dit rien de nouveau. 22. Trouve-t-on beaucoup d'or en Califomie ? 23. On y en trouve beaucoup. 24. Y trouve-t-on aussi des diamants? 25. On n'y en trouve point, on n'y trouve que de' l'or. Exercise 68. 1. What do people say of me? 2. People say that you are not very attentive to your lessons. 3. Is it said that much gold is found in Africa ? 4. It is said that much gold is found in California. 5. Do they bring you books everyday? 6. Books are brought to me [R. 2.] every day, but I have no time to read them. 7. What should one do (doit on faire) when one is sick ? 8. One should send for a physician. 9. Do you send for my brother ? 10. I am to send for him this morning. 11. Do you hear from your son every day? 12.^1 hear from him every time that your brother comes. 13. Does the sale (yente, f.) take place to-day ? 14. It takes place this afternoon. 15, At what time Qieure) does it take place ? 16. It takes place at half after three. 17. I have a wish to go there, but my brother is sick. 18. What am I to do ? 19. You are to write to your brother, who, it is said (dit on), is very sick. 20. Is he to leave for Africa? 21. He is to leave for Algiers. 22. Do you come instead of your father 1 23. I am to write instead of him. 24. Does the concert take place this morning ? 25. It is to take place this afternoon. 26. Do you know at what hour? 27. At a quarter before five. 28. Is your brother coming ? 29. My brother is not coming, he has no time 30. Are you angry with your brother ? 31.1 am not angry with him. 32. Is any thing new said? (Is there any thing new?) 33 There is nothing new. 34. What is said of him ? 35. Nothing i said of him. LESSON XXXVI. LEQON XXXVI. REFLECTIVE VERBS. (§ 43, (6.) § 56.) 1. A verb is called reflective or pronominal, when it is conjugated with two pronouns of the same person, i. e., the usual nominative 112 LESSON XXX YL pronoun and the pronouns me, te, se, &c. [\ 56.] la these verbs tat subject is represented as acting upon itself: — Je m'applique d 1 etude. I apply (myself) to study. Je uie propose de voyager. I propose ^ .ravel, i. e. tl is my inUnlion to travel. In these verbs, the second pronoun is in fact only the objective pronoun direct or indirect, which, according to Rules 1 and 2, Lesson . before the verb. 1. The reflective form of the verb, which is much more frequently n French than in English, often answers to the passive form so common in the latter language : — „ , . . ( That is u.uk. t<> rrd. . && for pleasure, or health : — I Je DM I 6. Marcher, all. r 'iify to tralk or to ride, when m the manner of progressing a— ■u tcalk mus't I V on horseback and in a carrift. 7. i '■■..:.. \ . : r or thk la v thb 0c ro»T-E«, 1. to be or!? B'j ft o nl parte, J i \s, IsU down. : down) Tn M i Tu {>■ pr \..iis nuiis as :..nt. lis s'a 8. The reflective pronouns in the imperative of .'eflcctive LESSON XXXVI. 113 follow Rule 4, of L. 27 and Rules 3, 4, of Lesson 28 and also, } 100. (30(3.):- Asseyons nous, asseyez vous. Let us sit down, sit down. Ne nous asseyons pas. Let us not sit down. Besum£ of Examples. A quoi vous appliquez vous 1 Je m'occupe de mes affaires. Je m'adresse a mes amis. Vous adressez vous a votre pere. Je m'adresse alui [§ 100, (4.)] Comment se porte Monsieur votre pere 1 II se porte passablement bien. Pourquoi ne vous asseyez vous pas 1 Je m'assieds quand je suis fatigue. Je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir. Vous promenez vous tous les jours 1 Je me promene en voiture au- jourd'hui. Vos amis se promenent ils a. cheval "? N'aimez vous pas a marcher 1 J'aime beaucoup a aller a cheval. Aimez vous a vous prom ener'? Asseyons nous, s'il vous plait. Ne nous asseyons nous pas 1 Ne nous asseyons pas, il est trop tard. Combien ce drap se vend il la* verge ? II se vend vingt-cinq francs le metre. Comment cela s'appelle-t-il 1 Comment vous appelez [§ 49, (4.)] vous"? To what do you apply y „ I occupy myielfwith my ajfavi I apply to my friends. Do you apply to your father? I apply to him. How is your father ? He is tolerably well. Why do you not sit down, ? I sit down when I am weary. I have no time to sit down. Do you take a walk every day ? I lake a ride to-day (in a carriage). Do your friends take a ride? Do you not like walking ? I like riding much. Do you like walking {for pleasure) ? Let us sit down, if you please. Do we not sit down ? Let us not sit down, it is too late. How much is that cloth sold a yard ? It is sold twenty-Jive francs the metre. How is that called? What is the name of that ? What is your name ? How do you call yourself? Exercise 69. Banquier, m. banker ; Magnifique, magnificent; Pied, m. foot ; Comment, liow ; Matin, m. morning ; Port-er, to carry, wear ; Cheval, m. horse ; Mieux, better ; Quelquefois, sometimes; Drap, m. cloth; Oblige, e, obliged; Quitt-er, 1. to leave; Fatigue, e, weary, tired ; Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out ; Voiture, f. carriage. 1. Comment ce monsieur s'appelle-t-il? 2. Je ne sais comment . s'appelle. 3. Cette dame ne s'appelle-t-elle pas L. ? 4. Non, Madame, elle s'appelle M. 5. Monsieur votre pere se porte-t-il bien ce matin ? 6. II se porte beaucoup mieux. 7. Fait il beau temps aujourd'hui? 8. II fait un temps magnifique, n'allez vous pas vous * The English a or an before a measure is rendered into French by the article le, or la, &c. 114 LESSON XXXVII. promener ? 9. Nous n'avons ni cheval ni voiture. 10. Xe pouvez vous marcher? 11. Je suis trop fatigue pour marchei. IS. N'allez vous pas a cheval tous les matins? 13. Je me promcne tons lea matins. 14. Comment vous promenez vous ? 15. Quelquefois a pied et qnelquefoifl en voiture. 16. A qui vous adressez vousquand vous avcz besoin d'argeut ? 17. Je m'adreese a mon banquier' 18. Nt voulez vous pas vous aaeeoir! 19. Nous vous soinmes bien obliges. 20. Ce drap >e vend il fort bien ! 21. II se vend fort eher. 22. Ne devcz vous pas aller a la campagne, a'il fait beau temps? doit il quitter la villa aujourd'hui? 24. 11 doit partir Ma MBUr se prom.' ne tons Irs matins. sro. 1. Does your sister walk every day 1 '2. She takes a walk every morning. 3. Sin- Like* riding 0D horseback and in a carriage. 4. What is that link- girl railed .' 5. She is called L <>. Is not that gentleman called 1...' 7. No, Sir, he ia called (Land his cousin is called il. 8. How iayonr brother 1 '.'. fcty brother ia very well, bat well. 10. How are your two daaghtera 1 II. They day. 12. Will you not ait down, gentlemen 1 It, \\ . art- much obliged to you. Madam, we have Dot time. •V Well. Ift II, .w is . (Tame) I 17. II Bneweatbet to>day1 19. I: hi very fine weather, will yon not take I walk I U<>. 1 |,a\.- no time to walk. 81. To whom doea your brother apply 1 brother. 88. fa his brother at horn.'' •_• I \... S:r. !>•• :- Bl I'.in- 86. When | Intend 1 intenda to go tO France in ono month. °7. Is your ftiater to Leave to-morrow mon I w hat >'.o people II. Are you too much htigned to wa ted, but I have to walk. 33. Do you like walking or riding 1 .''.J. I like riding, when 1 have a good bora* I not like walking. xxxvn. i. iv' a xxxvir. l. The reflective p ronoun poeaeaafea, lav live. In si;. .rliclo takea the place of this adjeotfvt 7, (9.)] LESSON XXXVII. 115 Vol J chauffez vous les pieds 1 Do you warm your feet ? Je me chauffe les mains et les pieds. / warm my hands and feet. 2. Se souvenir [2. ir. See § 62.], se rappeler [§ 49, (4.)], correspond to ihe English verb to remember. Se rappeler takes a direct object, that is, no preposition intervenes between the verb and its object, if the same be a noun or a pronoun : — Vous rappelez vous ces demoisellesl Do you remember those young ladies ? Je ne me les rappelle pas. / do not remember them. 3. Custom seems, however, to sanction the use of the preposition de between the verb se rappeler and an infinitive : — Nous ne nous rappelons pas d'en We do not remember having been de- avoir ete prives (Condillac). prived of it. 4. Se souvenir, takes the preposition de before a noun or pronoun as well as before an infinitive : — Vous souvenez vous de cette affaire 1 Do you remember that affair ? Je ne m'en souviens pas. J do not remember it. Je me souviens de lui avoir ecrit. J remember having written to him. 5. Se coucher, corresponds to the English verbs to retire, to go to bed :— Je me couche de bonne heure. I retire early. 6. Se lever [§ 49, (6.)] means to rise, to get up : — Je me leve au point du jour. / rise at the break of day. Resume of Examples. Vous coupez vous les ongles 1 Je me coupe les ongles et les che- veux. Vous coupez vous les doigts 1 Je me coupe souvent les doigts, quand je taille ma plume. Vous rappelez [ty 49, (4.)] vous les malheurs du frere de votre ami 1 Je me rappelle ses malheurs. Je me les rappelle distinctement. Je me rappelle de l'avoir vu. Vous souvenez vous de cela 1 Je ne m'en souviens pas du tout. A quelle heure vous couchez vous 1 Nous nous couchons tous les jours au coucher du soleil. Nous nous levons de meilleure heure que vous, — au lever du soleil. fl se leve a cinq heures du matin, et il se couche a dix hemes et de- nue du soir. Do you cut your nails ? I cut my nails and hair. Do you cut your fingers 7 I often cut my fingers, when I merit* my pen. Do you remember the misfortunes of your friend's brother ? I remember his misfortunes. I recollect them distinctly. I remember having seen htm. Do you remember that ? I do not remember it at all. At what hour do you retire ? We go to bed every day at sunset. We rise earlier than you, — at sun- rise. He rises at five o'clock in the morn- ing, and goes to bed at half after ten in the evening. 116 LESSON" XXXVII. Exercise 71. Associe, m. partner ; De meilleure heurc, rerruquier, m. .tan* J3ois, ru. wood; earlier; dm Boucher m. butcher ; Doigt m. finger; Pocle. m. I 8e briil-er. 1. ref. to Per, m. iron; Poucc, in. thumb; burn one's self. W\\.\n. fire ; Promesse, f. promise: Charpentier, in. carpers Main, f. hand ; souvenir, to rcmem- ter. S'occuper, 1. to occupy bcr (see Venir, ^62.); IS:; chauffer, l. ref fo o;isicurs. 7. De quoi vous occupc/. voua .' 8. Nuns nous OOCUpOM de nos af- - dee fusils qu*a votre para ? 10. Je ne in'en suuvions point da tout 1 I. Cette petite Bile ne M briilc-t- elle pas.' 12. Elle ne se bru'.e pas, il n'y a p:is de leu dan-, le | 13. Poutquoi le boucher do se chauffe-t-il pas.' 14 Parcequ'fl n'a pas froid. 16. Cea ent'ants ae h'-vent ilfl de mrillcurc heure que Boil 1G. lis se eouehent de bonne heure, ( leg matins a. six heurea 17. \ -coir.' IS. 11 n'a pas le tempi I <>s promes- p.irfaiteincnl. 81, Ne VOW cliaufTcz pea quad vow avw freed I --. Je ne me chaafle presqw j.i- imeil I 1 1. On ae couche quad on ■ eeameil, et on mange quad on ■ bint, i2j. Quai. ; de bonne h< «iuand On se portc bum, on doit (should) se lever de bonne heure. I, Do you rise early when you are well? 2. When I :im well, I rery morning at §ve o'clock. 3. Do you remember your eowin J . i. I remember bim perfectly well. 5. Do you go to bed early? 6. We u r o to bed al ton o'clock. 7. Does not the tailor burn his fingers? 8. He does not burn liis lingers, his iron la not warm. 9. '■penter cut bia thumb ? 10. He cuts neither his thumb nor his hand. 11. Why do you not warm yourself 1 12. I do not warm myself, because 1 am not cold. 13. Is it not very cold to-day? 14. It is not cold to-day, it rains. 15. Does your hair-dr aunrise I 16. The carpenter rises at nnnrJM bed at sun- aeL 17. Do you rise earlier than P 18. We riot ffrarj morning at LESSON XXXVIII. 117 the break of day. 19. Do you cut your hair often 1 ? 20. I cut my nair and my nails evory month. 21. Do you remember that gentle- man ? 22. I remember him very well. 23. I do not remember him. 24. Do you jut your fingers when you mend a pen ? 25. I cut my hand when I work. 26. Do you remember what you learn ? 27. I do not remember all that {tout ce que) I learn. 28. Do you know if your father is well ? 29. He is very well to-day. 30. Is not your mother well? 31. She is not very well. 32. Do you remember your friend's misfortunes 1 33. I remember them. 34. I remember that. lesson xxxvm. LEgcw xxxvm. 1. The verb tromper, conjugated actively, corresponds to the Eng- lish verb to deceive : — II trompe tout le monde. He deceives every body. 2. Conjugated reflectively, se tromper means to be mistaken ; lite- rally, to deceive one's self: — On se trompe bien souvent. One is often mistaken. 3. Ennuyer, [5 49, (2.)] used actively, means to weary the mind, tc lease, to bore : — Cet homrae ennuie ses auditeurs. That man wearies his hearers. Vous nous ennuyez par vos de- You tease, or weary us by your ques- tions. 4. S'ennuyer has no exact correspondent in English. It signifies generally, to be or to become mentally weary of any thing or place : — Nous nous ennuyons ici. We are weary of being here. Vous ennuyez vous a la campagne "? Are you weary of being in the country ? Je m' ennuie partout. I find no amusement anywhere. 5. Je m'ennuie means in fact, lam mentally weary, I want change, amusement, occupation, &c. : — 6. S'amuser, answers to the English expressions, to amuse one's self to take pleasure in, to spend one's lime in, to find amusement in, to enjoy one's self: — Nous nous amusons a. la campagne. We enjoy oursaves in the country. Vous vous amusez a des bagatelles. You spend youi time in trifles. Resume of Examples. On se trompe souvent soi-meme en cherchant a tromper les autres. Votre commis ne se trompe-t-il pas 1 U so trompe bien rarement. We often deceive ourselves while seek- ing to deceive others. Is not your clerk mistaken 1 He is very rarely mistake*. 118 LESSON XXXVIII. Ne vous trompez vous pas frequein- mont 1 Tout le monde est sujet a se trom- per. Ce marchandtrompetoutle monde. Sa conversation nous ennuie. Vous ennuyez vos amis par vos plaint< >. Est-ce que je ne vous ennuie pas 1 Are you not ft tquently mistaken? Every one is cpt to be mistaken. That merchant deceives every body. His conversation wearies us. You weary your friends by your am plaints. Do I not wean/ uou ? Vous ennuyez vous cues nous ? weary of remaining with us? Je lu'cnuuica la ville et je m'amuse I become iceanj of the city and Jiud a. la eampagne. ] amusement in the country. A quoi TOM amuses vous? / ■),/! do you amuse ymaself? Je m'amuse a lire l'allemand. • I amuse myself m reading German. Exercise 7'^. Apprond-re. 4. ir. to Entond-re, 4. to heir ; Quand learn ; Ennuyer, 1. See $ 49. (2.) Quelquefoia, sometimes ; Baoqmier, m. banker; Lant;r EUo-evoil, 3. to receive; Client, m. client, cus- Maude, sick ; Rev-enir, 2. ir. to come tomer ; Klemoire, in. bill; baek ; Demenr-er, 1.1 I or, 1. to prefer; Tromp-er, 1. to deceive. 1. Aimez vous ademcurer ;i la eampagne .' 3. .!<• pretere la cam- la ville. 3. Vous ennuyez vous souvent a la eampagne ? 4. Quand je in'ennuii' : .\ la eampagne, je reviens a la ville. 6. Recoit mveUes da General L .' <;. On o'entend pu parler dfi lui. IS quelquefois? 8. Tout le monde se trompe quelquefoia, 9. Le benqnier Lrompe-t-il sea clients'? 10. II ne trompe in at* ■ - amia, il m trompe paanonaa. II. Ne vouatrompai roue pea dans <■«• memoirel 12. Je ne mc trompe pas. 13. Voua amuaes Torn a lire on .1 satire 1 14. Je m'amuse a ap- prendre l'allemand et le t"r.in<;:iis. 15. Aval TOO! tort d'apprendre lee languea-1 i«J. J'ai paiaoa da lee apprendre. 17. Vous ennuyez .'. «-nt .' 1H. Je m'ennuic quand je n'ai Hen a faire. 19. A quoi vuns smuaes roue quand vous fetes .1 la eampagne ! 20. Nous nous promenons le matin, et nous travail Ions le reate de la journee 21. Vous portez vous toujoura bien? 22. Nous sommes quelque- fois malades. 23. Envoyez vous chcrcher le medecin ? 24. Nous Penroyona eherrher. 26. Je vaia le onaronar. Exercise 71. 1. Are you not mistaken? 2. I am not mistaken. 3. Is not the banker mistaken ? 4. He is not mistaken, but his clerk is certainly (cerlainemenl) mistaken. 5. Does lie not deceive you? 6. He does not deceive me, he deceives nobody. 7. Are you not wrong to de- ceive your father? 8. I do not intend to deceive him. 9. Does not LESSON XXXIX. 119 tne merchant make a mistake? 10. He makes a mistake in the bill which he writes. 11. Do you like the country or the city? 12. I prefer the city ; I soon become weary of the country. 13. Does not that child weary you by his questions ? 14. Does not that long story (recit, m.) weary you? 15. It does not weary me, it amuses mo. 16. Do you amuse yourself when you are in the country? 17. I amuse myself, I learn French and Italian. 18. Are you not weary of remaining at your uncle's? 19. I am never weary of remaining there. 20. Is your brother often mistaken? 21. Every body is sometimes mistaken. 22. Does his conversation weary you? 23. On the contrary, it amuses us. 24. Is your brother heard from ? 25. Nothing is heard of him. [L. 35.] 26. Is your sister well ? 27. No, Sir, she is sick. 28. Do I weary you ? 29. You do not weary me. 30. Ami mistaken? 31. You are not mistaken. 32. Is he often mistaken ? 33. He is often mistaken. 34. Do ycu not rise late ? 35. No, Sir, I rise early. LESSON XXXIX. LEgON XXXIX. 1. The reflective verb, se passer, is used idiomatically in the sen 99 of to do without. It is followed by the preposition de, when it comes before a noun or a verb : — Vous passez vous de ce livre 1 Do you do without that book ? Je ne puis m'en passer. p / cannot do without, it. 2. Se servir [2. ir. see § 62.], to use, also requires the preposition de before its object :-r— Je me sers de votre canif. J use your penknife. Je ne m'en sers pas. J do not use it. 3. The second example of the two rules above, shows that, when the object of those verbs is a thing, it is represented in the sentence by the pronoun en*: — Je m'en sers, je m'en passe. J use it, I do without it. 4. The pronoun* used as indirect object of a reflective verb, if rep- lesenting a person, follows the" verb \_\ 100, (4.)] : — Je puis me passar de lui. I can do without hipi. " Je m'adresse a vous et 5 elle. I apply to you and to Iter. 5. S'endormir [2\ ir. see \ 62.] ; to fall asleep, an 1 s'eveiller, to awake, are also reflective. * The rule does not apply to the reflect' ve pronoun, which is some- times an indirect object. 120 LESSON XXXIX. Je m'endors aussitot que je me I fall asleep as soon as I go to bed. couche. Je m'oveille a six heures du matin. / awake at six o'clock in the morning, 6. S'approcher, to come near, to approach ; s'eloigner, to draw back, to leave, take the preposition de before a noun. Their object, when a pronoun, is subject to Rules 3 and 4 above : — Votre fils s'approche-t-il du feu 7 Docs your son draw near the fire? II ne s'eu approehe pas. He does not come near it. II s'eloigne de moi et de vous. He goes from mc and from you. B of Examples. Vous servez vous de ce coutcau ? Je ne m'en sers pas, il ne coupe pas. De quels coutcaux vous sen . Nous nous servons de OOOtoMU d'acier. Pouvez vous vous passer d'argentl Nona ne poavona notm en pernor Vous pa-.se/. vous ilr voire ln.'iit r<- ? Nona nous pu.s.Miiis de lui. VoUMl'Iresv/. Volls;.. • Nous imiis a.lre.ssotis a eux et a. fkefletneat Je in i'Vi -ill.' d .lire. Pourquol vous approchea vous du feu I •i approeh* parcequo j'ai froi.l. Nous nous tloifDOOl ilu f> ii. Nolls ; -Lis. Nous nous uppioehons do notre Nous nous approchons de lui. Do you use that knife 7 I do not use it, it does not cut nircs do you use? We use sir, I knives. Con you do without money? lot do without it. • Do yon do without your teacher ? ■thout him. Do you apply to those gentlemen? We apply t" them and to you. I tatUff. J air ale v< -y early. Why do you come near the fire 1 1 or it because J am cold. 'm the fire. om it. We go near aur father. We go near him. Exercise 75. ■ Aussi. also; Encre, f. ink ; Ordinaircment, —que, as soonFentlrc. f. window* ally; as; Pen m.firr; Plume, f. pen ; | Canif. m. penknife ; Pourchette, f. fork i I'mirquoi. why; lie, young lady, Hi-ure. !* hour, o'clock; Pr6t-er, 1. to tend { Domestique, m. .vr-Moins, lea, btftrti Quart, m. quarter ; rani; Oblige, o. oiUgedi Taill-er, 1. to mend. 1. Ponvez vous rov 'ere I 2. Nous pouvons nous en :ous n'avons lien a tain. 3. Vous senez vous de votre plume ? 4. Je M m'en sers pas ; en avez VOU8 besoin I 5. No voulez vous pas vous approcher ilu leu ? 6. Je vou- suifl bien oblige, je n'ai pas froid 7. Pourquoi ces demoiselles B'eloigMOt ellcs de la fen»V tre! 8. Elles e'en eloignent parcequ'il y fait trop froid. 9. Ce« enfant* ne s'adreasent ils paa i vous? 10. He s'adreaeent a mol IES80N XL. 121 et a mon frere. 11. A quelle heun vous eveillez vous le matin? 12. Je in'evcille ordinairemcnt a. si 1 : hcures nioins un quart. 13. Vous levez vous aussitot que vous vous eveillez ? 14. Je me leve aussitot que je m'tsveille. 15. De quels livres vous servez vous ? 16. Je me sers des miens et des votres. 17. Ne vous servez voua pas de ceux de votre frere? 18. Je m'en sers aussi. 19. Les plumes dent [L. 31. R. 8,] vous vous servez sont elles bonnes ? 20. Pour- quoi votre ami s'eloigne-t-il du feu? 21. II s'en eloigne parcequ'il a trop chaud. 22. Pourquoi votre domestique s'en approche-t-il ? 23. II s'en approche pour se chauffer. 24. Vous ennuyez vous ici ? 85. Je ne m'ennuie pas. Exercise 76. 1. Will you lend me your penknife ? 2. I cannot do without >t, I want it to mend my pen. 3. Do you want to use my book ? 4. I want to use it, will you lend it to me ? 5. What knife does, your brother use ? 6. He uses my father's knife and my brother's fork. 7. Will you not draw near the fire ? 8. We are much obliged to you, we are warm. 9. Is that young lady warm enough? [L. 34, 3.] 10. She is very cold. 11. Tell her (diles lui) to come near the fire? 12. Why do you go from the fire? 13. We are too warm. 14. Does your brother leave the window? 15. He leaves the win- dow because he is cold. 16. To whom does that gentleman apply ? 17. He applies to me and to my brother. 18. Why does he not ap- ply to me? 19. Because he is ashamed to speak to you. 20. Do you awake early every morning? 21. I awake early, when I go to bed early. 22. Why do you go to sle,ep ? 23. I go to sleep because I am tired. 24. Are you afraid to go near your father? 25. I am not afraid to approach him. 26. Can you do without us? 27. We cannot do without you> but we can do without your brother. 28. Do you want my brother's horse? 29. No, Sir, we can do without it. 30. Do you intend to do without money? 31. You know very well that we cannot do without it. 32. Is your brother weary of being here ? 33. He is not weary of being here. 34. Come near the fire, mv child. LESSON XL. LEQON XL. 1. The verb aller (1. ir. \ 62.), conjugated reflectively, and pre- ceded by the word en, i. e. s'en aller, corresponds to the English ex- pTew»ion8 to go away, to leave: — 6 122 LESSON XL 2. Indicative Present of the Verb s'en Aller, to Go awat Je m'en vais, / sv away j Nous nous en al- We go away; Tu t'en vas, Thau art going Ions. away; Vous vous en allez, Yon are going H s'en ra, He goes away ; a way .• lis s'en vont. T/4cy go awuy. 3. Thi same Tense Conjugated Interrogatively. Est-ce que jc m'en Z>o I go away 7 Nous en allons Do we go away? vais 7 nous 7 T'en vas tu7 .Art f«W ^y/'/i^ Vous en allez Do you go away? away? v«>us 7 Are they going S'en va-t-in Is he going away ? S'en vont ils? away) 4. Se facher, /o be or become angry, requires the preposition contre or de before the noun or pronoun following it : — Se fichc-t-il contre votrc fnirc 7 Does he become angry against jomt brother 7 He him. : angry al nothing. 6. Se rtjouir, to rejoice, is followed by the p-vposition d«: — Je me rtjoui- de retro l"iilicnr. / rejoiet at your kapptmtu. pbire [4. ir. in \ 88,] to take pleasure, to delight in anything to like to be in a place, |*Ju I object : — Je me plais a la earapagne. / like to be in the e/mntiy. Je DM plais a ctudier, a 1 i r i ■ . I take pleasure in st inlying, in reading, 7. Se depecher, se hater, to make haste, take de before their or> >ct:— Dfipeehez TOM tie finir von lemons. Matt haste to finish yo Pourquoi no vous depiche;'. v<>us j>as7 Why tin you iu4 make haste 1 H se ficlie contro lui. Vous vous ffiehez dun rien. to mart-hand s'en va-t-il aujour- d'hui I Nous nous en allons dentin Je m'en vais qnaodje sob Pottranoi row Achea vona oootra lui! II se plait d jouer, il D'ttodk j.v niais. Tom plaisez vous cbe* ffM parents I De quoi vous rekmiaaes \«>nsl Nous nous rejooJsBons de rotre succes. ns m rMotnaMOS. Pourqvol row depochez vous 7 Nous nous dgpdchous d'ecrtro. Nous notM plaisons en Angleterro. Nona do nous plaisons pas d Taxis. vierrhant go away let-dam? ■ tnth him 7 treasure inpuiying, \* nevm '■'.e to be at your relations' f At what I ^ess. i! II MV n-.aki We like to be in England. Wt do not, like U> bt in Paris. LESSON XI* 123 Nous ne nous y plaisons pas. Vous plaisez vous a. New York? Nous iious y plaisons. We do not like to be there. Do yon like to be in New Y01 k ? We like to be there. Exercise 77. Ambassacleur, m. am- Jouer, 1. to play, Prochain, e, next ; bassador; Malheur, m. misfortune; Retourn-er, 1. to return; Anivce, f. arrival; Mieux, belter t - Semaine, f. week; Autrui, m. others; Midi, noon; Tante, f. aunt; Cour-ir, 2. ir. to run ; Parceque, because; Turc, turque, Turkish. Jamais, never; 1. Vous en allez vous bientdt? 2. Je m'en vais la semaine pro- chaine. 3. Pourquoi vous en allez vous ? 4. Parceque je ne me plais pas ici. 5. Vous plaisez vous mieux chez votre tante qu'ici ? 6. Je m'y plais mieux. 7. N'avez vous pas tort de vous en aller si tot ? 8. J'ai raison de m'en aller. 9. Ne vous rejouissez vous pas des mal- heurs d'autrui? 10. Nous ne nous en rejouissons point. 11. Cet homme se fache-t-il contre le jardinier? 12. II se fache contre lui parce qu'il ne veut pas se depecher. 13. Se fache-t-il bien souvent? 14.11 se fiche a. tout moment, il se fache d'un rien. 15. Ne vous depechez vous jamais? 16. Je me depeche toujours quand j'ai quelque chose a faire. 17. Ne vous plaisez vous pas a. courir et a. joue*r? 18. Je me plais a jouer et mon frere se plait a lire. 19. Vous rejouissez vous de Parrivee de l'ambassadeur turc? 20. Je m'en rejouis. *21. Ne vous plaisez vous pas en Amerique ? 22. Je m'y plais beaucoup mieux qu'en France. 23. Votre ecolier ne se plait il pas chez vous ? 24. II se plait chez moi, mais il desire retourner chez son pere. 25. Depe- chez vous, il est deja midi. Exercise 78. 1. At what hour does your friend go away? 2. He goes away every morning at nine o'clock. 3. Do you go away with (avec) him ? 4. I go away with him when I have time. 5. Will you make haste to finish your letter? 6. I make haste to finish it. 7. Does the gar- dener get angry with his brother? 8. He gets angry against him when he does not make haste. 9. Make haste, my friend, it is ten o'clock; 10. Why do you not make haste? 11. 1 like to play, but I do not like to study. 12. Do you like to stay at my house ? 13. I like to stay there. 14. Are you rejoiced at the arrival of your mother? 15. I rejoice at it. 16. Is not your brother wrong to go away so soon ? 17. He is right to go away, he has much to do at home. 18. Do you rejoice at other people's misfortunes? 19. I do not rejoice at them. 20. I rejoice at your success. 21. Does not your brother draw near the fire? 22. He goes from the fire, he is too warm. 23. Does that 124 LESSON XL I. young lady get angry against you? 24. She gets angry at trirles (da rlni). 25. Do you like to be in Paris? 26. I like to be there. 27. Can you do without me to-day ? 28. We cannot do without you — make haste to finish your work (overage). 29. Do you want your penknife? 30. I want to use it. 31. Make haste to rise.it is six o'clock. 32. Is it line weather? 33. No, Sir, it rains. 34. Is your father well this morning? 35. Yes, Sir, he is very well. LESSON XLL LECON XLL THE l'AST INDEFINITE. \ij 121.] 1. The past indefinite is composed of the present of the indicative of one of the auxiliary verbs, avoir and itre [\ 45, (8.)], and the par- ticiple past of a verb. See the different paradigms of verbs, } 47 and following sections: — J'ai parlc, Je Miis aniv6. 1 t spoken, I am arrived. 2. The past Indefinite is used to express an action entirely com- pleted, but performed tl I time of which a part is not yet elapsed, or at ■ time entirely peat, but not specified. [) 121, (1.) (2.)]: — J'ai vii vntre pen OB matin. I hair fin vnur father this warning. Je tie vuii-. ii u 16. / hare met yet spoken to you. 3. The past Indefinite may also be used, when the time is sped- Je lui ai terrl la Bemetne dernlere. / wr et e to him last ireek. Je lui ai cuviiVl uiir Litre k' mois / sent him. a Utter last month. dernier. 4. In this tense and in other compound tenses, the adverb is gene- rally placed between the auxiliary and the participle [} 13(i, (30]*— Vous nous avez smivent parld. You hair often spoken to us. Je ne l'el pee encore yu. I ha him. 5. The adverbs aujourd'hui, tit-day; demain, tu-morrow ; hier, yester- day; polysyllabic adverbs of manner ending in merit, and long ndverba generally, do not come between the auxiliary and the participle, but follow Rule 1. L 34. See | 136, (5.):— Vous avc7. hi deniiereiiH nt. Yem read lately. 6. The udpenonaJ verb y avoir, [L. 33. II. 3. 4,] placed before a word expressing time, eorreeponda with the Englieh word, eve; — ii line lcttrc. il y ■ huit jours. / received a letter eight days ago. \ '..us ,i\ez taheM uuc mauiou, il y a You ln/ug/U a House a year ago. uo an. LESSON XLI. 125 Resume of Examples. Vos neveux nous ont parle. Nous avons parle a votre pore. Le tailleur a-t-il fait raon habit 1 Le boulanger a mis son chapeau. Le cordonnier a ote ses souliers. Votre f'rcre a dit quelqne chose. Votre soeur qu'a-t-ellc dit 1 N'avez vous rien dit a mon cousin ' Je ne lui ai rien dit. Je ne l'ai jamais rencontre. Je ne leur ai jamais parle. Qu'avez vous fait aujourd'hui? Hier, nous n'avons pas travaille. [$130.] Leur en avez vous souvent parle 1 Je leur en ai souvent parle. Je ne le leur ai pas encore dit. N'avez vous pas assez ecrit 1 II m'a ecrit, il y a longtemps. II nous a repondu, il y a un mois. Your nephews ipok: to us. We spoke 10 your fallter. Has the tailor viacL? my coat ? Tiie baker has put on his hat. Tiie shoemaker has taken his shots off. Your brother said something. What did your sister say? Have you told my cousin nothing 7 I have told him nothing. I have nevx.. "*t him. I never spoke to l/iem. Wlial have you done to-day ? We did not work yesterday. Have you often spoken to Uicvi about it? I have often spoken to them about it. I have not yet said any thing to them about it. Have you not written enough ? He uvole to vie a long time ago. He replied to us a month ago. Avocat, m. barrister; Cela. ceci. thai, this ; Dit, from dire, said; Etudi-er, 1. to study; Gant, m. glove; Exercise 79. Garcon, m. boy ; Hier, yesterday ; Journee, f. day; Lu. from lire, read ; Ministre, m. minister ; Mis,/?w/i mettre, put on Plant-er, 1. to plant; Poirier, m. pear-tree ; Soulier, m. shoe ; Vu, from voir, seen. 1. Qui vous a dit cela? 2. L'avocat me l'a dit. 3. Lui avez vous parle de cette affaire? 4. Je ne lui en ai pas encore parle. 5. L'avez vous vu dernierement ? 6. Jel'ai vu il y a quelques jours. 7. N'avez vous pas ecrit hier? 8. Nous avons lu et ecrit toute la journee. [L. 26, (9.)] 9. N'avez vous pas ote vos gants et vos souliers? 10. Je n'ai pas ote mes gants, mais j'ai ote mon chapeau. 11. Le tailleur n'a-t-il pas mis son chapeau? 12. Oui, Monsieur, il a mis son cha- peau. 13. Qu'avez vous fait a. ce petit garcon ? 14. Je ne lui ai rien fait. 15. Ne lui avez vous point dit que je suis ici ? 16. Je ne le lui ai pas encore dit. 17. Qu'avez vous etudie ce matin ? 1 8. Nous avons etudienosleconset nous avons lu nos livres. 19. Le jardinier du mi- nistre a-t-il plante le poirier ? 20. II l'a plante :1 y a plus de huit jours. 21 Avez vous achete un habit de drap noir? 22. J'en ai achete un. 23. L'avez vous porte aujourd'hui ? 24. Je ne l'ai pus encore porte. 25. Nous avons mis nos souliers et nos bas ce matin. Exercise 80. 1. Have you studied to-day? 2. We have no time to study, we 126 LESSON XL II. have read a page. 3. Have you not written to my brother ? 4. 1 have not yet written to him. 5. Has not the German written to my mother? 6. He has not yet written to her. 7. Have you told (.1) my mother that I have taken (pris) this book ? 8. I have not yet Been your mother. 9. What have yon done this morning 1 10. We have done nothing. 11. Have you taken off your coat .' 12. I have not taken off my coat, it is too cold. 13. Has the bookseller ivriU ten to your brother ? 14. He wrote to him a long time ago. 15. Did he write to him a month ago ? 10. He wrote to him more than a year ago. 17. II..,e you planted a pear-tree . ? IS. We have planted several. 19. Is it too cold to (jxrnr) plant tree* I 20. It is too warm. 21. What has the gardener done to your little boy 1 513. He has done nothing to him. 23. Has any one done any thing to him? 24. No one lias done any thing to him. 25. Is any thing the matter with him ? 20. Nothing is the matter with him. 27. Has your father put on his black ball 38, No, Sir, he has not put on hia black hat. 39. What has yum brother said 1 80. Ho has said nothing. 31. Has your sit- ter told you lh.it ! :*2. She told it me. 33. Did you not work yes- terday .' 34. We did not work yesterday, we had nothing to do. 35. Your little boy has done nothing to-day. LESSEN XLII. LE0ON XLII. TIIK TAST rAHTICHU.K. [$ 134.] 1. The past participle, which in French forms a pnrt of every COBS* pound t. |] i^ susceptible <>f changes In its termination. 2. The student will find in the table of the terminatioi regular r< '.rent changes which the past participle of those verbs undergoes. The feminine terminations of the past partii iple of the irregular verbs, will be found in the alphabetical table, 3. The teal letter of the feminine termination is always an i mute. 4. The plura. of i p.i^t participle not ending with nn r, i- formed by the addition of that letter t<> the singular, masculine or femi- nine. "). Tin' participle past, arooropi luxiliary avoir, Bevel agrees with the nominative or subject [ij 134, (3.)]: — Let demolacuea out i ;"i- r l*dtn ■ Ces messieurs ont lu toute la journcc. Those gentlemen read Uu tckoU day. LESSON XIII. 127 6. The participle past, having etre as its auxiliary, assumes in its termination the gender and number of the subject [§ 134, (2.)] * — Ma fille est arrivee ce matin. My daughter arrived this morning Nos freres ne sont pas venus. Our brothers are not come, 7. The participle, accompanied by the auxiliary avoir, agrees in gendei and number with its direct object or regime direct, [5 2, (2.) J 42, (4 )] when that object precedes it [§ 134, (4.)] :— Les dames que nous avons vues. The ladies whom we have seen. Les lettres que nous avons lues. The letters which we have read. 8. When the regime direct or objective (accusative) follows the participle, no agreement takes place [§ 134, (5.)] : — Avez vous vu les dames 1 Have you seen the ladies ? Avons nous lu les lettres 1 Have we read the letters ? 9. A participle past never agrees with its regime indirect, or indi- rect object (dative or ablative) [§ 2, (3.) § 42, (5.)] : — Les dames a. qui nous avons parle. The ladies to whom we have spoken. 10. The participle past used adjectively, that is, without an aux iliary follows the rule of the adjective, [{ 66, (3.) § 134, (1) | :— Des livres bien imprimes. Well printed books. 11. The participle, preceded by the relative pronoun en, remains invariable, although the en should relate to a feminine or plural noun [j 135, (7.)] :— Avez vous apporte des plumes 1 J'en ai apporte. Have you brought pens 1 I have brought some. 12. The presence of en does not, however, prevent the agreement of the participle, when it is preceded by a direct regimen [§ 135, (7-)] :- Les plumes que j'en ai apportees. The pens which I have brought from it. Resume of Examples. Vos soeurs ont elles ecrit 1 Elles n'ont pas encore ecrit. Les lettres que nous avons ecrites. Avez vous ecrit vos lettres 1 Je les ai lues, je les ai ecrites. Les avez vous apportees 1 Jc ne les ai pas apportees. Avez vous appele ces dames 1 Je ne les ai pas appelees. Qui avez vous vu ce matin ? Nous avons vu ces demoiselles. Nous les avons vues. Nous ne leur avons pas parle. ^vez vous des livros relies 1 Have your sisters written ? T/iey have not yet written. Tlie letters which we have written. Have you written your letters ? I have read them, I liave written [hem. Have you brought them ? I have not brought tliem. Have you called those ladies ? I have not called them. Whom have you seen this morning? We have seen those young ladies. We have seen them. We have not spoken to them. Have you bound book: ? 128 LESSON LZIL J'ai des livres brocMs. Avez vons achcte des pommes ~ J'en ai achcte. Nous en avona achcte. Nous les en avoas persuades. / have unbound (stitched, in papa covers.) bunks. Have y<>u bought apples? I have bought stime. bought some. persuaded them of it. Exercise 81. Atliet-er, 1. to buy. [49, Entendre. 4. to hear ; Itcc-cvoir, 3. to receives (1 ] Examin-cr, 1. to exam- Reli-er. 1. to Hud ; 1 Kvrims, m. p. incomet 7 031 ; '1 1. to break; Xu./rom voir. 3. ir. seen. Commission, f. errand; vousapporte nos habits ! -2. Nous ne les avons paa encore >] i. Nona ne les avoni pas ouLlies, mais nous n'avons pas en le tempa Je les apportar. 6 Pourquoi - marchands? G. Je lesai appcles, mais its ne m' ndo cette uiu- ajgne ? v que j'ai I voua don- one, jo les ai .-. ires? 13. Je les ni bien cx.-unin '<■-«. 11 ! s ai point . 16 a-t-clle W— 6 ccs tasses? Llle ii'i ; '.ivres re« B 1. Nous avez vous dil . ■ . :.. £g vous lea avez onbtieea. mmission. icise 82. I. Have you seen • 2. I have nol tbjOB, 3. Have you bfOl Q them, I have left ' r mother called :' :n. 7. 1 lold it me. 1 rand ? 1 1. We • .ten it, we b IS. Where We left it at the merchant** 14. i i bought the beautiful (beUes) engrcringa which I sav/ at LESSON XLIII. 129 your bookseller's? 15. 1 have not seen them. 16. Has your mother bought them ? 17. She has bought booKs, but she has bought no engravings. 18. Has that little girl broken my cups? 19. She has broken them on purpose. 20. Does that lady receive her income every month? 21. She receives it every six months. 22. Is the house which you have bought large? 23. I have bought no house. 24. Did you receive a letter from your father yesterday ? 25. I re- ceived a letter from him four days ago. 26. Have you spoken to those ladies? 27. I have spoken to them. 28. Have you given them flowers? 29. I have given them some (en). 30. Are the books which you have bought bound? 31. No, Sir, they are in paper covers. 32. Have you examined that house ? 33. I have not examined it. 34. Your brother (en) has examined several (plusieurs) LESSON XLHL LECON XLHI. USE OF THE AUXILIARIES (§ 46). 1. The active verb [9 43, (2.) (3.)] that is, the verb which has or may have a direct regimen or object, always takes avoir, as its auxiliary [(§ 46, (1.)] :— Nous avons ecrit a notre banquier. We have written to our banker. 2. Almost all neuter verbs, i. e. verbs which cannot have a direct object, take the auxiliary avoir, when they express action : — Nous avons couru, marche, parle. We have run, walked, spoken. 3. The compound tenses of a few neuter verbs, expressing action, are, however, conjugated with tire — aller, to go; arriver, to arrive; choir, tomber, to fall ; deceder, mourir, to die ; naitre, to he born ; venir, to come ; parvenir, to succeed ; devenir, to become ; revenir, to return : — A quelle heure etes vous venu 1 At ivhat hour did you come ? Je suis * ne en France. J was bom in France. 4. A few neuter verbs [§ 46, (3.)] take avoir, when they express action, and etre, when they express situation : — * Observe that when the person spoken of is living, the French use the present and not the past of the auxiliary with the past participle of naitre, to be bom : — Cette dame est nee en Angleterre. That luly (is) was bom in England : — Mon frere est ne en France. My brot/ie° («) was torn in France. 6* ISO LESSON XLIII. //(i5 your brother gone out this img 1 Is your brother gone out? Votre frerc a-t-il sorti ce matin ? Votre frere est il sorti 1 5 The past indefinite of the verb ctre, [4. ir.] (J'ai ete, &c) ia used instead of the preterite indefinite of aller (Je suisalle;) when speaking of a place where one has been : — Lc medecin a etc a Paris. T.hc physician has been at Paris. J'ai ute a. leglise cc matin. I ■. at to church this viorning. C. When, however, we are still in a given place or on the road towards it, the expression, Je suis allc, &.c. is used: — Le mddecin est alio a Londres. T,\c physician is gone to London Votre seen i _;lise. ter is gone to diurcA. uft of Examples. Avez vous 6t6 an bal liier an soir ] Nous n'y avoiis pu ele. On cette demoiselle a-t-clle 6t6? Elle a etc elicz son frerc et chcz nous. Ou vutro soeur est cllc all6c cc matin | Elk- est sllee tr on ver n oa — Ina . ..us pu sorti sojoord'hoJ 1 nrtL on est blonsii or Is general ? il est Ou ce monslenr eat il no 7 niece a-t-clle etc voir son I v lc voir liicr. Elle eat all6e le roil hier. Did you go to the ball last evening ? I : I '/• gO. Whither did thai young lady go? I to her brothers and to our house. your sister gone this morn- gont to her cousin. not go <>u! to-day? I N out. Where is the general? J do not kmnr, Sir, he is gone out. U fttgei flenutn born ? or Lyons. Did your niece goto visit her brother? She went to see him yesterday {and is back). ! to see him yesterday {and is not back.) [SB 83. PlWultillo, f. jncdry ; Ma. on, m. mason : m. goldsmith ; Qhapelier, m. hoi i - In m. warehouse ; l'art-ir, 'J. ir. to set ou*; £td. {from utn-, 4. Ir.) Maude Ketonrn-er, 1. to «• been ; Merchandise, f. merchan- turn ; 7 in; r:. to go out ; Ji r, m. walch-m utre, 1. ir.Yeim. from vciiir, 2. ker ; to bi ir. . "inc. idle lieure voire BCBUr eel elle venue ? 'J. Kile est f cnue A huit UeuiQa BOine un (juart. 3. Ces demoiselles sunt BjIsM Rouen ou \ Caen.' 4. Elles ne sont nees ni a Kouen ni elles sont ik-cs a Strasbourg. 5. L'horlugcr est il ohn lui ? 6. Non, Monsieur, il est alii I son magasin. 7. A-t-il wtw A Paris cette LESSON XL 1 1 1. 131 an nee? 8. Oui, Madame, il y a ete. 9. Y a-t-il aehete des marchan- dises ? 10. II y a aehete de la bijouterie. 1 1. Avez vous ete trouver mon pere? 12. J'ai ete le trouver. 13. Votre chapelier a-t-il sorti aujourd'hui ? 14. II n'a pas sorti, il est malade. 15. Le macon es>t il a lamaison? 16. Non, Madame, il est sorti. 17. Quand est il sorti ? 18. II est sorti il y a une heure. 19. Votre chapelier est il arrive aujourd'hui ou hier? " 20. II est arrive hier a quatre heures du matin. 21. Notre taitleur a-t-il ete voir son pere aujourd'hui? 22. II est parti pour Lyon. 23. L'orfevre de mon cousin n'est il pas parti pour l'Espagne ? 24. Non, Monsieur, il est retourne en Allemagne. 25. Ma soeur a ete a. l'eglise ce matin, et elle est allee a. l'ecole, il y a une demi-heure. 1. Is the physician at home? 2. No, Sir, he is not at home; he is out. 3. Have you been out this morning ? 4. No, Sir, I have not been out; I am sick. 5. Is your sister's little girl out? 6. Yes, Sir, she is out, she is at my brother's. 7. At what hour did the hatter arrive ? 8. He arrived last evening at nine. 9. Did the jeweller go to Paris or to Lyons this year? 10. He went to Paris six months ago, but he is back (de retour). 11. Did you go to my brother or to my sister? 12. I have not had time to go to them. 13. Where was that gentleman born? 14. He was born in England, in Exeter or in Ports- mouth. 15. Was not your sister born in Paris? 16. No, Sir, she was born in Madrid, in Spain. 17. Did you tell me that your brother has bought a good house ? 18. He has bought a very good house in London. 19. Do you know at what time the watchmaker arrived? 20. He arrived this morning at a quarter before five. 21. Has he brought much jewelry ? 22. He has not brought much jewelry, but he has brought many watches (montre, f.). 23. Has he been in France or in Germany ? 24. He has been in France, in Germany, and in Swit- zerland (Suisse). 25. Is your sister in (d, la maison), Sir? 26. No, Sir, she is out ; she is gone to church. 27. Did she go to school yesterday ? 28. She went to school and to church. 29. Is she there now? 30. No, Sir, she is back. 31. Is the hatter arrived? 32. Yes, Sir, he is arrived. 33. When did he arrive U 34. He arrived yester- day at nine o'clock in the morning. iss LISBON XLIY, LESSON XLIV. LECON XLIV. 1. Combien de temps corresponds with the English expression kow long. Combien de temps avcz vous dc- ILnc long did you live in Italy? meuri en Italic ? 2. C'jcabicn de fois answers to the English, how often, how man) t imps Cambifnde fois y area TOllfl etc I Hov many times have you, been Lien? 3. Jusqu'o'i i< oaed for how far, what distance, &a Juqu'oik aw ll ■ r- ■■ a been? 4. Jnaqu'a quelle benre {till what hour,) means also, how late. J oaqn'a queue benre area vous at- How late did you trait ? 5. LVoft means tpaenee; par on, which way, in what di rec t io n . u' my friend w H 6. Mener[{ 19. ,porl r, to '.'../, carry ,'amener, apporter, to (ring mporter, to : ' We use I • •. in the Porter apporter, . to bear, to carry away, &c. '■hoot. .?. cc livrc u . foot .'*> wiir sister. ' oa moo ami ? 11 allc I 1 Jl v.i y recti r jusqu'au prlnl 1 dcmeuif Bix nns. Jnaqn l Ho beurc avcz voh.9 a'a niinuit. . ■•lie. rona oaUe petite lillo u l'ecolel - zone? i to stay there? in London? Champs Elf- I/fie late did i ru write? -nan Ifldiex? ■me? i •id) that little girl U LS8SOH X1IV. 183 Je ne l'y mene pas, je 1'y porte, elle est trop petite pour marcher. Amenez vous vos enfants ? Portez vois une lettre a la pcste ? J'emmene mon cheval, j'emporte ma mont.'e. I do not lead her there, I carry kei there; she is too imall to walk. Do you bring your children ? Do you take a letter to the post-office ? I bring away my horse, I bring awau my watch! Exercise 85. Bruit, m. noise; Ici, here; Pied, m. foot ; Drap, m. cloth; Loin, far; Quitt-er, 1. to leave; Eleve, m. pupil; Magnifique, magnificent; Soieries, f. p. silk goods; Fils, m. son; Midi, noon; Voiture, f. carriage; Fin, e,fine; Nouvelle, f. news; Voyageur, m. traveller. 1. Le jeune homme est il alle loin ? 2. II n'est pas alle bien loin, il n'est alle que jusqu'a Paris. 3. Vos enfants font trop de bruit, pourquoi ne les emmenez vous pas ? 4. lis sont malades, ils ne peu- vent marcher. 5. Comment les avez vous amenes ici ? 6. Je les ai amenes en voiture. 7. A quelle heure amenez vous le medecin ? 8. Je l'amene tous les jours a. midi. 9. Combien de fois par jour menez vous vos eleves a. l'eglise? 10. Je les mene a l'eglise deux fois par jour. 11. Combien de fois y avez vous ete? 12. J'y ai ete plusieurs fois. 13. Par ou ces voyageurs sont ils venus ? 14. Ils sont venus par Amiens et par Rouen. 15. D'ou apportez vous cette nou- velle? 16. Je l'apporte de Cologne. 17. D'ou avez vous amene ces superbes chevaux ? 18. Je les ai amenes d'Angleterre. 19. Si vous quittez la France, avez vous l'intention d'emmener votre fils? 20. J'ai Vintention de l'emmener. 21. Qu'avez vous apporte de France? 22. Nous avons apporte de magnifiques soieries, des draps fins et des cha- peaux de Lyon. 23. Avez vous amene votre fille a pied ou a. cheval? 24. Je l'ai amenee en voiture. 25. Vos freres nous ont apporte des livres. Exercise 86. 1. How long did your son live in London? 2. He lived there ten years. 3. How far is the physician gone ? 4. The physician is gone as far as Cologne. 5. Has he taken his son with him ? 6. He has not taken him. 7. How have you brought your two little girls ? 8. I brought one in a carriage, and I carried the other. 9. Is ehe too little to walk? 10. She is not too small to walk, but she is sick. 11. Have you brought your horse ? 12. We have brought two horses. 13. Have you brought the books which you have pro- mised me (jpromis)1 14. I have forgotten to bring them. 15. Has that lady brought her eldest (aine) son? 16. She has brought all her children. 17. How did they come? 18. They came in a carriage. 19. Which way did your brother come from Germany! 134 LESSON XLV. 20. He cama by Aix-la-Chapelle and Brussels. 21. Do you intend to take your son to school this afternoon ? 22. I do not intend to take him there, it is too cold. 23. Is that child too sick to walk ? 24. He is too sick to walk, and I intend to carry him. 25. Why do you not take him in a carriage? 26. My brother has taken my horse away. -7. Have you brought the physician ? 28. I have not brought him, no one is sick at our house. 29. Will you take this book to church ? 30. I have another, I do not want it. 31. Have you taken my letter to the post-offiee ? 3:2. I have forgotten it. 33. How late did you write? 34. I wrote until midnight (minuW). 85. Whence do your sisters come ? 36. They come from Paris. LESSON XLV. LE£ON XLV. (See Lesson 36.) 1. The reflective or pronominal verb always takes etre as its auxiliary [} 46] : — Viiir.' oonsfaa I'est promenft. Y.'ur eousm\ ha.< takm a umOt, Nos amis M BOOl U Our friends have fluttered themselves. 2. Although the past participle of a reflective verb be conjugated with .'tre, it agreea with its direct regimen, when that ragjfflea pre- mvariable when the regimen follows it. The student ■boald he earet'ul to tee, if the reflective proDoan be a direct or an indirect regimen [\ 135.]: — Voiis VOUI 6te^ : >moi- You have faltered yourselves, young selles. I atlies. Elles as sont donnc la main. tM given (to) each otter the hand. It will be easily perceived that K in the first sentence is a direct regimen, and that the same word in the second represents an indi- rect objeet. 3. Verba essentially unipersonal, i. v.. vrrhs which cannot be con- jugated Otherwise, take avoir U an auxiliary: — II a plu, il a ncige, il a gi It rained, it snowed, it froze. 4. Verbs occasionally iini|>er.sonal, take itre as :in auxiliary: — II lui est arrive un mallicur. A misfortune has hap/Kited to him. ft. Faire [4. ir.] used unipersonally, and V avoir, to be there, Ukc the auxiliary avoir: — A-t-il fait beau temps 1c mois passe 1 Was it fine iceaiher last month ? Y a-t-U M beaucoup de moode 1 W*r* thtn many ptopU then? LESSON XLV. 136 6. The participle past of a unipersonal verb is always invariable [{135,(6.)]:- Les pluies qu'il yaeu cet ete. The rains which we have had this Resume of Examples. Les Italiennes se sont elles prome- nees ? Oui, Monsieur, elles se sont prome- nees. Nous nous sommes apercus de cela. Votre mere s'est elle bien portee 1 Vos soeurs se sont elles assises 1 Cette marchandise s'est elle bien vendue 1 Vos enfants se sont ils appliques a. l'etude 7 Ils s'y sont appliques. Nous nous sommes donne de la peine. [§ 135, (1.)] Quel temps a-t-il fait ce matin 1 N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps 1 Quel malheur vous est il arrive 1 Vous est il arrive quelque cbose 7 II ne m'est rien arrive. Did the Italian ladies walk ? Yes, Sir, they have taken a walk. We perceived that, or we took notice of that. Has your mother been well ? Did your sisters sit down ? Did that merchandise sell well ? Did your children apply to study ? T/iey applied to it. We gave (to) ourselves much trouble. What weather was it this morning ? Was it not fine weather? Wliat misfortune has happened to you? Has any thing happened to you ? Nothing has happened to me. Exercise 87. Acier, m. steel; Grel-er, 1. pec. to hail; Se tromp-er, 1. ref. to be S'adress-er, 1. ref. to ap- Hollandais, e. Dutch; mistaken; ply; Neig-er, 1. pec. to snow; Se serv-ir, 2. ir. ref. to S'aperc-evoir, 3. ref. to Peine, f. trouble ; use; perceive; Plu, from pleuvoir, rain- Se vend-re, 4. ref. to sell. S'asse-oir, 3. ir. ref. to ed; sit down ; Plume, f. pen ; S'ennuy-er, l.pec.[§49.] Se port-er, 1. ref. to be to grow weary ; or do ; 1. A qui vos soeurs se sont elles adressees? 2. Elles se sont adressees a moi. 3. Ne se sont elles pas trompees? [L. 38. 1.] 4. Elles se sont trompees. 5. Vous etes vous apercu de votre erreur? 6. Je ne m'en suis pas apercu. 7. Vous etes vous ennuyes a la cainpagne ? 8. Nous nous y sommes ennuyes. [L. 38. 4.] 9. Ces demoiselles se sont elles ennuyees chez vous] 10. Elles s'y sont ennuyees. 11. De quoi vous etes vous servie pour ecrire, Mademoi- selle? [L. 39.2.] 12. Je me suis servie d'une plumfc d'or. 13. Ces ecolieres ne se sont elles pas servies de plumes d'acier? 14. Elles se sont servies de plumes d'argent. 1 5. La Hollandaise s'est elle assise ? 16. Elle ne s'est point assise. 17. Lui est i' arrive un 136 LESSOW XLVL malheur? 18. II na lui est rien arrive, elle ne se porte p:\s bjcn. 19 Ne s'est elle pas donne [} 135, (1.)] de la peine pour rien? 20. Cctte soie ne s'est elle pas bien vendue ? 21. Elle s\st tres Lien '.endue. 22. N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps toute la joumec ? 23. Nod, Monsieur, il a phi, il a neige et il a grele. 24. N'est-il rien arrive aux deux dames que nous avons vues ee matin ? 25. Non, Ifadame, il ne leoi est rien arrive. Exkkcise 88. 1. Has it rained to-day? 2. It has not rained, but it lias hailed and snowed. 3. Has any thing happened to your little buy .' 4. Nothing has happened to him, but he is siek to-day. 5. Did youi I down at your house I 6. She did not sit down, she was siek. 7. Did that cloth seil well .' 8. It Bold very well, we have sold it all. 9. Did yon perceive your error (errevr) 1 10. Wo perceived it. 11. Wire not your sisters, mistaken in this affair 1 12. They Were not mistaken. 18. Were not your eousins weary of being in the country .' 14. They were weary of being at my brother's. 15. What have you u-.d to write your exercises? 16. 1 DSed a gold pen. and my brother DSed a silver pen. 17. Have you DSed my pen- i used it 19. What has happened to yon 1 > happened to me. 91. Has your mother neon well 1 22. Bhehasnol beenwi apply to their studies, They applied to their studies and have finished their i tins morning 1 26. It was very :. r. 87. I las j our sister taken much trouble In this affair ? baa taken much trouble for nothing. 29. Did the Dutch ik? 30. They walked thia morning. 81. How far did they walk.' 3J. They w., 01 your brother's. 33. Have you cfa other the hand I 84 We -hook hands. 35. Those ladies nattered them much (beaucoup). LESSON XLVL i >N XLVI. mi. 5 1 1. 1. The passive verb is conjugated by adding to the verb lire iii all its tense-, the peal participle of an active verb. See model) 2. This participle musl agree in gender and number with the sub- joet [| 131, (SO L - *-■ K - ••]*— ON X L V I. 187 Ces vieillards sont respectes. Those old men are respected. Ces enfants sont aimes de tout le Those children are loved by every body. nionde. 3. The genius of the French language seems to prefer the active to the passive voice. Many expressions which are in the passive ir» English, are accordingly rendered into French by the active or re flective [$ 128, (5.) } 113, (1.)] :— Cctte maison est a. louer ou a vendre. Ma sceur est a plaindre. Cet homme est a craindre. Cet homme s'appelle H. [L. 36. R. 2.] Cet homme se trompe. [L. 38. R. 2.] On dit que cela est ainsi. [L. 35. R. 2.] On nous a dit cela. [L. 35. R. 2.] That house is to be let or sold. My sister is to be pitied. That man is to be feared. That man is called H. That man is mistaken. It is said that it is so. We have been told that. 4. In an answer to a question [see L. 24. R. 12.], the pronoun le corresponds in signification with the English word so, or it, expressed or understood. Le refers then to a noun not determined (not pre- ceded by an article or a possessive adjective), to an adjective, to a verb or even to a whole sentence : — Ces enfants sont ils aimes 1 lis ne le sont pas. Ces demoiselles sont elles sceurs ? Elles ne le sont pas. Are those chilaren loved ? They are not (so). Are tlwse young ladies sisters? They are not. 5. When le refers to a determined noun, it often corresponds in signification to the pronoun he, she, or they, which may or may not be expressed in the English sentence. Le must then assume the gender and number of the noun to which it refers. Etes vous la sceur de mon ami 1 Je la suis. Are you the sister of my friend ? I am (she). Resume of Examples. Leur conduite est elle approuvfie 1 Elle n'est approuvee de personne. Cette dame est elle estimee et res- pectce 1 Elle n'est ni estimee ni respectee. Ces marchandises sont a vendre. Ces enfants sont bien a plaindre. A-t-on dit quelque chose a mon frere? On ne lui a rien dit. Savez vous comment cela s'appelle 1 Madame, etes vous maitresse ici 1 Je ne le suis pas, Monsieur. Etes vous la maitresse de la mai- son'? Je la suis. Is their conduct approved ? It is approved by nobody. Is thai lady esteemed and respected ? She is neither esteemed nor respected. Those goods are to be sold (for sale). Those children are to be pitied. Has any thing been said to my brothe-? Nothing has been said to him. Do yott, know how that is called ? Madame, are yon mistress here ? I am not (so), Sir. Are you tlie mispress oftfe hmtse ? I am (she). 138 LESSON LXVL Exercise 89. B'appel-er, 1. pec to icCroi-re, 4. ir. to believe ; Pun-ir, 2. to punish; called [() 49, (4.)] i Ecolier, m. scholar ,- Rarcment, seldom ; A'ltour. m. author ; Jardin. ni. garden ; Rulieor, m. bookbinder . Blam-er. 1. to blame; L"ii-er. 1. In Id, to praise; Souveot Car. for; Mere. f. m Us-er, 1. /« mar out; Couduitc, f. conduct ; Pan ; Vend-re, 4. to sell. 1. Votre mere est elle aimee de sa soeur? 2. Elle est aimee de •on frere et de sa soeur. 3. Lesltaliens sont ils aimes desFraneais? ■ofiata ne sont ils pas blames ? 5. Ils sont blames quelque. fois. 6. Sont ils souvent punis I 7. lis .sont raremeat punis. 8. Par qui ttes vous puni quand vous t'-tes paresseux ? 9. Je ne suis jamaifl puni. 10. Sa conduite a-t-elle i'-te approuvee .' 11. Elle a Otv approuvee de tout le monde. 12. Bile a et6 approuvee par* sea amis. 13. Cet auteur e>t il estime .' 14. II est e-time de tout le monde. 15. Le jardin du relieur e.>t il a vendre < • 1 1 a louer .' ]t" my brother 1 <>. id of bim. 7. Do you know if your brother's to be let .' B. I bave been told 1 that it Is to be told. 1'. Is not an Idl The idle man is to 1J Mo ■ always punished woen be i- idle. 18. Are your acholara praJaed when they are diligent (diligent ! 1 1. They are praised when lloy arc diligent, and they are blamed when they are idle. 15. Is that seined and respected 1 16. She is loved, esteemed and re- by everybody. 17. What baa been told you? 18. We have been to! 1 that your brother is respected by every body. 19. Madam, are you Mr. S.'s sister.' SO. No. Sir. I 11. Madam, are • The prepositions de and par are used Indifferently afU-r many passive LESSON XLVII. 139 you pleased with your son's conduct? 22. No, S:r, I am not, for he is blamed by every body. 23. How is that large (gros) man called ? 24. It is said that k e is called H. 25. What is your brother's name ? 26. He is called James. 27. Have you been told that my brother is arrived? 28. We have been told so. 29. Are the goods which your brother has brought, for sale? 30. They are not for sale. 31. Has the bookbinder had a coat made ? 32. He has had a coat made. 33. Is his other coat worn out ? 34. The coat which he bought last year is worn out. LESSON XLVH. LE£ON XLVII. 1. In the compound tenses of the verb s'en aller, to go away [L. 40. 1, 2.], the pronoun en will of coursa keep its general place, after the other pronouns and before the auxiliary. It must never come between the auxiliary and the participle : — Je m'en suis alle, I went away; Nous nous en We went avjay ; .sommes alles, Tu t'en es alle, Tlwu wentest Vous vous en etes You went away ; away ; alles, II s'en est alle, He went away ; lis s'en sont alles, They went away Les dames s'en sont allees. The ladies are gone away. Les messieurs s'en sont alles. The gentlemen are gone away. 2. The verb aller when referring to articles of dress answers to the English to fit, to sit : — Mon habit va bien. My coat fits or sits well. ' 3. Seoir [3. ir. see table § 62.] answers to the English to suit, to become : — Ce chapeau ne vous sied point. That hat does not become you. 4. Essayer (5 49.) corresponds in signification to the English to try on : — J'ai essayc mon gilet, il me va bien. / have tried my waistcoat, it fits me well. 5. £tre is often used in French for appartenir, to belong [{ 106, (3.)]:- » . . M ^ „.s„™ o S To whom does thr-ihouze belong? A qui est cctte maison? j ^^ w & mi ? EUe est a. mon cousin. It is my cousin's. 140 LESSON XL VI I. Resume of Examples. A quelle bcure vous en etes vous alio] Je rn'en suis alio a. ncuf hoims. vous allocs Hop tot, us em sonimes alle.s trap Obo TOM va-trlk' 1 ■'. I pa* biii-n 7 Jo I'aJ bien. II lui va bun (regime indirect). i pu l > i • • n . I a raoi 1 At what hour did ijm go away? I went away at nine » clock. Did you ^o away too soon, ladies? We went away too late. Does that dresf fit you icell ? i 'fit rue welt. -.' c,xiL become you veni well? I ied u on. Out it Joes not fit J; fits Urn It hurts me. it presses vie too much. Are those books ynns or mine? me nor to you. II then? H '..< liiite yonbi I have brought BW brother'*. 81. Beau f; N, ' lf ve ' neWt r boot; ] r'rss. about. , v ,, : I me vont pas j. EUea '■ •"'■ Le cordonniei ',; alio ? 6. II ne a'en eat paa encore alle. ~ A quelle nenre 8. Klles s'en BOIj[ ,.;];. beurea da laprea-midi. 9. [/habit que voaa re | io. II o'eet ni ft In! ni ft not, .,,„ bean iV.-p-. II. Lui va-t-il bien I IS, II Inlra fort Men, et il lui iied Lion. 18. Oa I'a Uil fait fnire ' 14 H P« Wl Cure en ip ie lit llade- 17. Yutro pilot va-t-ii ii de votre b< eaueonp aUenc .■ habit ne toun -• ■-i.--t.il paal laurait (cmncl) r, il eat de beancoup trap large. 31. ' nff 23. Je I'ai eaaayi , mai« la coulenr ne ma allfl trop elaire ? 34. Kile eat I • 1& Le« couleura fonc« . i nt {anuria. lesson xlviil 141 Exercise 92. 1. Are 5 our fries ids gone away 1 2. They are not yet gone away, they are still here. 3. At what hour did your mother go away ? 4 She went away early this morning. 5. Did your little sister go away late? 6. She went away too soon. 7. Does your sister's new dress become her ? 8. It does not become her. 9. Why does it not bo come her? 10. Dark colors never become her. 11. Do light colors become your brother's wife ? 12. They become her very well. 13. Are your new boots too narrow or too wide ? 14. They are neither too narrow nor too wide, they fit very well. 15. Does your brother's waistcoat fit him ? 16. It fits him, but it does not become him. 17. Light colors never become him. 18. Does your coat press you? 19. It does not press me, it is by far too wide. 20. Whose house is that? 21. It is my father's and brother's. 22. Whose books have you brought this morning ? 23. I have brought my brother's and my sister's. 24. Whose dresses are those ? 25. They are my mo- ther's, my sister's, and my cousin's. 26. Are not those German books yours ? 27. They are not mine, they are my friend's. 28. Are those pens yours or mine ? 29. They are neither yours nor mine, they are my brother's. 30. Does this hat fit you? 31. Yes, Sir, it fits me, but it does not become me. 32. Is your hat too small? 33. It is too large {grand). 34. Are your gloves too large ? 35. They are too small, I cannot put them on. LESSON XLVm. LECON XLVHI. 1. The verb falloir [3. ir.], to be necessary, is always conjugated unipersonally. See table, { 62. II faut, il a fallu. It is necessary, it was or has been we- ll faut etudier tous les jours. It is necessary to study every day. 2. As falloir has always a unipersonal pronoun for its nominative or subject, a pronoun in the indirect regimen (dative — me, te, lui, nous, vous, leur), placed before the verb, will be equivalent to the •wonoun used as nominative to the English verbs must, to be iliiged) &c. : — II me faut ecrire un thSme. I must write an exercise. Ou nous faut il aller 1 Where must mm go ? 142 LESSON XLVIII. 3. Falloir i 3 used in the signification of to icant, to nad, to 1 1 undc (lie necessity of having: — II me faut un livre. / need a book. II lui faut de l'argent. He is in want ofmo'uy. 4. When must is used in the last acceptation, and lias a noun as its nominative, the noun in the corresponding French sentence should be in the indirect regimen preceded by a : — II faut un livre d ma soeur. M>i sister viust have a bcok {needs a book). vA of Examples. Pour nppremlre une langue il faut fttadier. 11 faut aUet a. llflg^fBe ct a lccolc. 1 1 faut r.-stcr a la in: ]! mo faut lire un boo livre.* 11 lol faut aller voir tt mere. Que linns fan! il lain 1 (jm- leurflrat-il lire • Que 1-ur faut il! 11 (ear bntde l'argent on dn credit. : ait il dnqUAnte francs 1 To learn a language it is to study. It is necessary to go to church and to sehooL V is iiecess.ni/ to remain at home. I must raid a good book. i -/ sm her mother. IT' ■ | . ■ What vi u si they rend ? What do they irant or need 7 urn st have money of • >r mutt yo:t ha c fifty 11 nn- faut einqnante-dnq franca i ■"< m «r / need fifty-five francs Combien d'argent faut-il u votre // money docs your father Il lui hi ftnt beauconp. n wamta much (of it). lfoasaTODSoeqn11[E.8.]noasika& n ■ ■■■ vhatwe w am. Bxkkoibb 93. Aller trouvcr, to go to .. Port, very, very much ; . ,.,- ModtBtS, milliner; Cliirut^i.-irm . Quand faut il i'crirc a notre ami .' . 11 lui font lies livres, desplumca et de l'enere. 1 1. Ne lui faut il pas anssi de l'argent ! 1-'. 11 lui en • Another conatructiun of these wntencea will Ui fouiil Le-uwo 22, 1. 1 LESSON XLJX. 143 faut beaucoup pour payer ses dettes. 13. Vous faut-il encore quelque chose? 14. II ne me faut plus rien, j'ai tout ee qu'il tne faut. 15. Ne faut il pas du papier a votre sceur? 16. II ne ]ui en faut pas da- vantage.* 17. Que faut il envoyer au chirurgien? 18. II faut lui envoyer de 1'argent, il en a grand besoin. 19. La modiste a-t-elle tout ce qu'il lui faut? 20. Elle n'a pas tout ce qu'il lui faut. 21. Combian vons faut il? 22. II me faut cinq francs. 23. Ne vous faut il pas davantage ? 24. II ne me faut pas davantage. 25. Que lui faut il pour sa peine ? 26. II deinande un franc vingt-cinq centimes. Exercise 94. 1. What must we do ? 2. You must bring your book and learn your lesson. 3. Is it necessary to write to your brother to-day ? 4. It is not necessary to write to him. 5. Has it been necessary to speak to your father? 6. It has been necessary to speak to him. 7. Is it necessary to go to D. to-day ? 8. It is necessary to go there (y). 9. Must I go to your sister? 10. You must go to her, she wishes to speak to you. 11. How much money must your. brother have? 12. He must have ten francs fifty centimes. 13. How many books does your sister want? 14. She must have many books, she reads (lit) much. 15. What will you send to the surgeon ? 16. We must send him our horse; his own (le sieri) is sick. 17. Must he not have paper? 18. He must have some; he has letters to write. 19. Must he have much? 20. He must have a quire (main, f.). 21. Do you want any thing more? (See No. 13, in the French exercise above.) 22. I need something more. 23. I need nothing more. 24. Must you have one hundred francs? 25. I must have ten dol- lars. 26. What does the surgeon want? 27. He must have money to (pour) pay his debts. 28. Has the tailor all that he wants? 29. He has not ah that he wants. 30. The milliner has received all that she wants. 31. What must you have for your trouble? 32. How much do you want? 33. How much do we want? 34. What must Id;? 35. You must write a letter. 36. What must she write? 37. She must write four pages. 38. She must go to church. LESSON XLIX. LEgON XLIX. 1. The verb seoir [3. ir. Lesson 47, R. 3.], is also used uniper* Bonally : — U ne vous sied pas de parler ainsi. M does not becoiie you to speak thus. * This adverb can never be placed before a substantive. 144 LESSON XLIX. 2. The verb convenir [2. ir. see \ 62.], to suit, is at times used uni. personally. It then signifies to be suitable, advisable, cce. : — II convient de lui ecrire. It is advisable to write to him. 3. The irregular verb valoir [see table, J 62.] corresponds in sig- nification to the English expression, to be worth : — Cettemaisonvaut cinq mille francs. That house is worth five thousand francs. 4. Ne rien valoir means to be good for nothing; ne pas valoir grand'ehose, to be worth little, not to be good for much. Ce drap ne rant rien. That cloth is good for nothing. Notre maison ne rant pas grand'ehose. Our House is nut good for much. 5. Etre riche de . . . amoBto be worthy to possess; when a person is the nominative of the verb, valoir is never used in this sense. Cette pris. nine est riche de cinq T%at person is worth five thousand mili' do! 6. Valoir miens, conjugated unipersonally, means to be better; valoir la peine, to be worth the uliile : — 11 rant mieiix travailler que '1 etre D it bt tier to labor than to be idle. oiaif 11 m rant paa la peine de parier /.' is not worth the while to speak vhe% quand on n'a rien ii dire. one \ 1 1 say. IPUS. // does not become you to reproach us. It is not suitable for you to speak so. II M vous sied paa de nous fl repfo II ne v.ms oonvient paade parier de la Rorle. II ne nana oonrienl paa dy aller. Combieo voire jardin rant il ' II raut beancoup ]>ius que li It ae rant |as antanl que b Notre maiaon ne rant rien. Tchoso. Cela ne vaut DBA la | Co chit, an pent valoir cent milk franca De combieo rotrc onclc est il riche 1 11 est richede deux cent mflk ' suit HI to go there. •en worth 7 It is much more valuable than yours / it worth so much as mine. Our house is good for nothing. i ■ much. toktk. be worth one hundred ■ :nd I runes. How mush is your uncle worth 7 He is worth two hundred thousand francs. Is it not better to read than to plan f Nc vaut il pas mieux lire qnejoner 1 Exercise 05. Assurer, 1. to assure % Caas-cr, 1. to break ; Coutcau, m. knife; Au jiiHte, precisely \ Centaine, f. about a hun- March*, m. market ; AiHre chose, something dred ; MArit-cr, I. to else i Ohaino, f. chain i m*Ht / IKES ON XL IX. 145 Montre. f. watch ; Pouvoir, 3. ir. to be able ; Tout au plus, at most; Negligence, f. neglect ; Reproch-er, 1. to re- Va. from allov, to go ; Negoeiant, merchant; f roach ; VingtainCjf. about twenty. 1. Vous sied-il do nous reprocher notre negligence? 2. II me Bied de vous faire des reproches quand vons le meritez. 3. Vous convient il d'aller trouver mon frere? 4. II ne me convient pas d'aller le trouver, j'ai autre chose a faire. 5. Combien ce champ peut il yaloir? 6. II peut valoir une vingtaine \_\ 27, (2.)] de mille francs. 7. Valez vous mieux que votre frere. 8. Mon frere vaut beaucoup mieux que moi. 9. Ce couteau ne vaut il pas plus que le vfitre? 10. Le mien est meilleur, il vaut davantage. 11. Combien votre montre vaut elle? 12. Elle ne vaut pas grand'chose, elle no va pas bien. 13. De combien le negotiant, est il riche ? 14. Je ne puis vous le dire au juste, il est riche d'une centaine de mille francs. 15. Ne vaut il pas mieux rester ici que d'aller au marche? 16. II vaut mieux aller au marche. 17. Votre chaine d'or vaut elle plus que la mienne ? 18. Elle vaut tout autant. 19. Elle ne vaut pas grand'chose, elle est cassee. 20. Cela vaut il cinquante francs? 21. Cela vaut tout au plus deux francs? 22. Avez vous demande au marchand ce que cela vaut ? 23. Je ne le lui ai pas demande 24. II m'assure que cela vaut une centaine de francs. Exeecise 96. 1. How much is my house worth ? 2. It is worth about twenty thousand francs. 3. Is that horse worth as much as this one ? 4. This horse is worth two hundred dollars, and that one three hundred. 5. Is it worth the while to write to your brother? 6. It is not worth the while. 7. Is it worth the while to go out when one does not wish to walk ? 8. It is not (n'en) worth the while. 9. Does it suit you to write to my brother to-morrow ? 10. It does not suit me to write to him. 11. Does it become you to reproach me with my neg- lect? 12. It becomes me to blame (blamer) you when you deserve it. 13. What is that man worth? 14. I cannot tell you exactly, about fifty thousand francs. 15. Is that cloth good? 16. No, Sir, it is good for nothing. 17. Is your gun worth as much as mine? 18. Yes, Sir, it is worth more. 19. Will you go to my father's ? 20. No, Sir, I have something else to do. 21. Is it better to go to market early than late ? 22. It is better to go early. 23. How much may your ho^se be worth ? 24. It is not worth much, it is very old. 25. Is your watch better than mine ? 26. It is not worth much, it does not go. 27. Is that book worth two francs? 28. It is worth one, at 7 146 LESS ON L. most. 29. Have you asked your sister what th;it book is worth * 30. I have not. [L. 24, R. 12. L. 46, R. 4.] 31. What must I do? 32. You must speak to your father. 33. .Must he have money ? 34. He must have some. 35. Has he net sold his horse? 36. He has sold it, but it was not worth much. LESSON L. LECON L. 1. When the verbs prendre [4. ir. >r '; 68.], to take; voler, to rob to steal; aeheter, to buy ; demander, to ask for ; paver, to j>n'>. art' f'o!- lowed by one regimen only, f the indirect regimen : lui, to him, t> h> r ; leor, to Hum : — .I'.ii pris |fl | .I.ii payl le livri- SO. liluiiiro. Jo Is lui ai pSJS, A 3. Demander is used also in the K ■ ;uirr foT , to for:- J'ai d.-mandu ce monsieur. I far that gentleman. I ■ tm inn brother. 1 Ike book. I ■ .,.' htm Jot it. Vous a-t-on vole vos Uvrce 7 On me km I ' 2). A-t on payl lei soolien so oorden- nier 1 On ne le* lui s pea enoore pay6s. Qu'a-Uon prll ii votro pore 7 On lui a prll KM nr. I rien pay! 7 On in a psyl j>resut. J ai ach>.-t6 dvs livres au libraire. B > ar books ft TV'/ haif hen ylolen from me. i : uh maker been paid fir ' yet t>rn pni preceded by uas. J'alJai a 1 eglise hier matin. / tmit, or did go to church yesierdaf morning. 4. Tekmin I I Of Tin: Past DBPUrm Koru Cohj Bee I- 28, and ^ CO. Jc chant -ai fin -is -us rend -is Matin Jin,.>l,rd rendered ru pan -as -is ■ni Vell.l -is (ionn -a chrritkedtt ; rreeivedtt lotdttl ii -it perf -ut tend -it girt furmifitd gathered tended Nous clierch -inics pan umes elltelld -inns Maj*l puni.'ktd tnnetired heard Vous port -atcs «1 perd -ites tarried str.td lis aim un -ircnt -ureiit mord -ircnt Uced, lihed united dectired M 5. It will be seen that the terminations of the second and fourtk conjugations axe alike LESSON LL 149 Resume of Examples. On nous parla de vons hier. Le banquier nous donna de l'argent l'annee dernicre. Le banquier nous a donne de l'ar- gent. Le professeur nous parla de vous l'annee dernicre. II nous a parle de ses amis et des notres. Pendant notre voyage, il nous ra- conta ses aventures. II nous a raconte l'histoire de sa vie. They spoke to us of you yesterday. The banker gave ws money last year. The banker has given us money. The professor spoke to us about yon last year. He spoke to us of his friends and of ours. During our journey he related to us his adventures. He related to us the history of Ms life. Exercise 99. Aine, e, elder, eldest; Se lev-er, 1. ref. to rise; Remerci-er, 1. to thank; Avec, with; Lorsque, when ; Sejour, m. slay; Se couch-er, 1. ref. to go^eut ve, new; Semaine, f. week; to bed ; Ordinairement, general- Soldat, m. soldier ; Dernier, e, last ; ly ; Tard. late ; S'echapp-er, 1. ref. to Pendant, during; Trop tot, too soon. escape; Pri-er, 1. to beg ; Habillenient, m. dress ; Proprietes, f. p. properly; 1. Le banquier recut il beaucoup d'argent la semaine derniere ? 2. II en recut beaucoup. 3. Aussitot que vous apercfites votre frere, ne lui parlates vous pas? 4. Des que je l'apercus, je lui parlai. 5. Avez vous deja porte vos habillements neufs? 6. Je ne les ai pas encore portes. 7. Quand il vous donna de l'argent, hier, le remer- ciates vous? 8. Je le remerciai et je le priai de vous l-emercier. 9. Avez vous trouve vos livres? 10. Je ne les ai pas encore trouves. 11. Lorsque vous vintes nous voir ne finites vous pas vos aflaires avec mon pere ? 12. Je les finis alors et je le payai. 13. N'avez vous pas vu votre soeur ainee pendant votre sejour a. Lyon ? 14. Je ne I'ai pas vue. 15. Ne vous couehates vous pas trop tot hier au oir? 16. Je me couchai tard. 17. A quelle heure vous 6tes vous eve ce matin? 18. Je me suis leve a cinq heures; je me leve ordi- nairement de bonne heure. 19. Ne cherchates vous pas a vous echapper de votre prison l'annee derniere ? 20. Je n'ai jamais cherche & m'echapper. 21. Avez vous vendu vos proprietes? 22. Je ne les ai pas vendues. 23. Qu'avez vous donne au soldat. 24. Je ne lui ai rien donne. 25. Pendant son sejour a B., nous lui donnamea tout ce qu'il voulut. 160 LESSON LIL Exercise 100. 1. What did you leceive last week ? 2. We received fifty francs from your friend, and twenty-five from your brother. 3. Did you take your son to church with you yesterday ? 4. I did not take hire there (y). 5. What did you lose last year ? 6. We lost our money, our clothes and our horses. 7. Have you looked (cherclus) for them ? 8. I looked for them, but did not find them. 9. Did they speak of your brother yesterday? 10. They spoke of him and of you. 11. What did the physician give you 1 12. He pave me nothing. 13. At what hour did your sister rise yesterday? 14. She rose at fivt o'clock. 15. Did you rise early this morning I 16. We rose at half-past six. 17. Has your cousin sold all his property 1 18. Ho has not sold it, he has given it to his eldest sister. 19. Has the trav- eller related his adventures to you 1 ~o. He related them tome. 11, Did that man i: . o ■peak to your father .' 23. lie tried to speak to him. ^;S. Did the professor speak of your brother during his stay at your house ? 24. He spoke of him. -J j. I las your friend worn his oeWCOal .' 86. He has not worn it yet. 'J7. Have you thanked your brother I 28. 1 have thanked him. 29. What have you given to your eldest sistir .' 80. I have given her nothing,! have nothing to give her. 31. When your brother gave you a book last year, did you thank him .' 82. 1 did not thank him. 33. Is it I. It is not late, it is only six. li.'j. I, it tine weather or bad weather .' 3'j. It is very line weather. LBBSOK LI I. LEpON LIT. 1. The terminations of the past definite of irregular verbs, are sel- dom arbitrary,* but an Irregular verb of one conjugation will some- times, in tliis tense, assume the terminations of another conjugation. In a few instances the • of the verb is entirely changed. 1 '. J' o -na f -us Tu 11 f -ut •nines f -nones -atea f -utes lb e -urcnt f -urcnt ■ I,! | V -IS 1 -US V -M 1 -US v -it 1 -lit 1 -Ames v -ttcs 1 -uruut • This termination is arbitrary only in rerba ending in rasr in which an r, comes after the i of the termination : vinnus, tinmes, Ac LESSON LII. 151 2. Avoir and $tre, t will be perceived, take in (his tense a new stem, c us, /-us ; etre and lire, though belonging to the 4th conjugation, take the terminations of the 3d, and voir, a verb of the 3d, takes the ter- minations of the 4th. 3. In other instances, the stem of the verb drops some of its letters, and sometimes adopts others. This may be seen in the verbs Venik, Prendre, Craindre, Connaitre, Conduire, to come ; to take ; to fear ; to know ; to conduct. Je v -ins pr -is craign -is conn -us conduis -is Tu v -ins pr -is craign -is conn -us conduis -is . 11 v -hit pr -it craign -it conn -ut conduis -it Nous v -intnes pr -imes craign -imes conn -umes conduis -imes Vous v -intes pr -ites craign -ites conn -utes conduis -ites lis v -inrent pr -irent craign -irent conn -urent conduis -irent 4. Like venir, are conjugated all verbs ending in enir ; like crain- dre, connaitre, and conduire, those ending in indre, aitre and uire , and like prendre, those composed of this verb and a prefix : as, com- prendre, surprendre, &c. 5. We would at all times refer the student to the table of irregu . lar verbs. \ 62, for those tenses of the irregular verbs with which he is not familiar. Resume of Examples. Ne conrluisites vous point votre ills. en Espagne Panose dernicre 1 Je l'y conduisis et je l'y laissai. Aussitot que vous vites votre frere, ne le reconnutes vous pas 1 Je le reconnus aussitot que je I'aperfiis. Le pharmacien ne vint-il pas vous voir 1 D vint me voir ; il fut bien etonne de trouver chez moi, un de ses anciens amis. Ne prites-vous pas conge de vos amis, hier? Je pris conge d'eux, et je les priai de m'ecrire. Did you not take your son to Spam last year ? I took him thither and left kirn. As soon as you saw your brother, did you not recognize him ? I recognized him as soon as I per- ceived him. Did not the apothecary come to see you? He came to see me; he was muck astonished to find one of his old friends at my house. Did you not take leave of your friends yesterday ? I took leave of them, and begged them to write to vie. Exercise 101. Accompagn-er, 1. to ac-De mon mieux, as well Histoire, f. history; company ; as I could; Inform-er, 1. to infor; & la fin, at last; Se depech-er, 1. ref. foNotaire, m. notary; Amicalement. kindly; make haste; Lu, from lire, 4. ir. Arrivee, f. arrival; Dcs que, as soon as; read; Attend-rc, 4. to wait for ; Ecolier, m. scholar ; Peintre, m. painter ; Au secours, to the assis- S'ennuy-er, 1. pec. to be- Sans, without ; tance ; come iveary ; Secour-ir, 2. ir. to * Conge, m. leave; Se hat-er, 1. ref. to cour. fjour-ir, 2. ir. to run ; fiasten ; 152 LESSON LIZ. 1. Nos ecoliers s'ennuverent-ils hier, d'attcndro si longteuipal 2. lis furent obliges d'attendre si longtemps, qu'a la fin ils perdireni patience. 3. Ne rceutes-vous point votre parent amicalement iors- qu'il vi:it vous voir '.- 4. Je le rccii9 do mon mieux. J. Ne lutes-vous pas !:i lettre de votre frere avanthier? G. Je la his et je i'envoyaj a inon onule. 7. Ne courates-voua pas au secours de votre frere it que vous le vltea ea danger 1 8. Je me hatai de leeecourir. lesdevenirl 10. Nous nous sommes rcu mon frere ne m'in- format n informai. 13. A quelle benre • He venue anjoard'hail 14. Ello est as prior do rent me voir, maia ils mo quitterent me parler de lent ma pas on i l'annee deraiere - un tableau d'histoire. Le peintre italien :•- - 2 I. 11 le linit hier. til. II Pa V'.::\ ee m iti i. 22. e nouvelle jeune homme a-t-il pria conge 24. II a pria conge do lui 25. II prit conge do hi! 1. DM;' :.. Ho accompanied J. Did your companion tuki' I . me this morning, G. I i tii the i -pael nine. 1 day ! rtm .' 12. 1 ha ■ 17. Did yon . i bo my ■ 1 last ipanj ■ \ for t for I, He took ■. Wore VOU not LESSON LIII. 153 astonishod yesterday to see that lady? 30. I was not astonished to eee her. 31. Did you make haste to read your book last night {hier au soir) 1 32. I made haste to read it. 33. Have you finished it ? 34. I have not yet finished it LESSON LIH. LEgON LIH. THE IMPERFECT. (§ 119.) 1. The imperfect or simultaneous past tense may be called the descriptive tense of the French. The action which it represents, or the situation which it describes, is imperfect of itself. This tense leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undetermined. It may often be rendered in English by the auxiliary was, &c. and tho participle present of the verb [§ 119, 120.] : — J'ecrivais ce matin quand vous etes I was writing this morning when you entre. came in. Je passais hier quand vous m'ap- J was passing yesterday when you pelates. called, me. 2. The imperfect is also used to express an action which is cus- tomary or often repeated. It may then be rendered in English by the word, used to, placed before the verb : — L'annee derniere, j'allais tous les Last year, I went {used to go) every jours a l'ecole. day to school. Quand nous demeurions a la Wlien we were {used to be) in the campagne, nous nous couchions country, use used to go to bed at nine ordinairement a neuf heures. o'clock. 3. The imperfect can seldom be rendered in English by the past tense which takes did* as an auxiliary. The past definite never corresponds in meaning to the English imperfect composed of the auxiliary " was," and the participle present. It cannot be rendered by the verb preceded by " used to." J'allais a la cliasse hier matin / zoas going hunting yesterday morn- quand nous nous rencontrames. ing "when we met {did meet). J'allai a la chasse hier matin. / went {did go) hunting yesterday morning. 4. The imperfect is formed from the participle present, by changing ant into ais, &c. § 61. It may also be formed by adding ais, etc. to the * Except when, in interrogative sentences; did is used as an auxiliary to used to expressed or understood. 7* 164 lesson l: stem of the ve?b for the 1st and 4th conjugations, issais, etc. foi the 2d, and roots, etc. for the 3d. 5. Terminations of the Imperfect of the four Coxjuga* Je chant -ais / was singing Tu pari -ais Thou wist ipc.ikmg 11 donu -ait He was giving Nous cherch -ions We were licking Vous port -iea You were carrying lis aim -atent Tktf were loving fin -'; was finishing cher watt cherishing r.iiini -iaaatt teas furnishing pan were punishing :-ais were seizing u:i were uniting rec -evais was receiving aperc -evais Md perceiving^ perc -eras iroj gathering OODC -evioiis »(r( conceiving d -eviez ■ n it;-,' L-rrf deceiving rend -ais too* rendering vend -ais trait selling tend -ait teas tending entend -ions trrr* hearing pard -iez trrre losing moid -aient u-fre biting. :i-LES. Je chantais quand on m'appotta rotre latere. J'aimai> autreftne a lire l< • an^l dana votre chambre loreejne it re. Comment voire pare ae portahVfl, loraqoeToosdemeorieienJ oe anemia InJ ■ ii bier tOOtfl la ma: loraqne rotre ami nooa rencontre. i are. / ir^w sinking when they brought mi you i I used to like formerly to read the poets. I room when you came in. II ■■< you r father when you lived I ' ,1 u paid my father what you . i you had prome' ised J spoke • '•■'''• mornipg: I was sp vr father w.ien I brother. I - formerly 1 '"Vim; Cfhambre Crayon : Betroar-er 1. to find Bcolier, m. a Is'cir. 8, Mi lit i : pper ; ■cue; ■in ; l. De qoJ pariiex-voua ee matin quand je - ! ns vena voua trouvcr* :>iiif parlait de BOD I rlaia du miei - aajeui le huMif que le mouton, antrefoial 4 Painuia le boaafj mais je n'ai jamais aime le mouton. b. Ne vendiex-vooa paa beaaeonp ternary one. The past anterior is often preceded - que,ausaiUM ength, the direct should precede the indirect [§ 76, (7.)] : — Avez-vous donne les jouets a Ten- Have you given tlie child the play- fant 1 tilings ? Avez-vous donne cette lettre a. Have you given the man that letter ? l'homme 1 3, The regime indirect precedes the direct, when the latter is fol- lowed by a relative pronoun, or by other words qualifying it, and rendering it much longer than the indirect [§ 76, (8.)]. The indirect regimen should also precede the direct, when the sentence would otherwise be equivocal [§ 76, (9.)] : — Avez-vous donne a l'enfant, les jouets Have you given the child, the play- que vous lui aviez promis 1 things which yon had promised him ? Resume of Examples. Quel age a cette demoiselle 1 Que veulent dire ces messieurs 1 Ou sont alles messieurs vos freres 1 Combien d'enfants a ce monsieur 1 Avez vous paye cet argent au mar- chand 1 J'ai paye mon habit au tailleur. Vous avez paye au tailleur, le gilet que vous avez achete. N'aviez-vous pas demande cela a l'enfant ? How old is that young lady? What do those gentlemen mean ? Where are your brothers gone ? How many children has that gentle- man ? Have you paid the merchant that money ? I paid the tailor for my coat. You have paid the tailor for the coat which you have bought. Had you not asked the child for that ? Exercise 109. Accompagn-er, 1. to oc-Chaine, f. chain; Dernier, e, last; company; Chapeau, m. hat, bon-Frcs, near, nearly; Aine, e, eldest ; net ; Rend-re, 4. to return Associe, m, partner ; Cinquante, f. fifty ; Serrurier, m. locks?nith ; Aubergiste, m landlord ; Clef, f. key ; ' Serviette, f. napkin. Bouteille, f. bottle ; Commis, m. clerk ; 1. Ou etaient vos parents Pannee derniere? 2. lis etaient en An- gleterre. 3. Oii sont restes les messieurs qui vous accompagnaient ce matin ] 4. Us sont restes chez leur3 associes. 5. Que lisaient vos amies lorsque vous les avez quittees ? 6. Elles lisaient les nou- velles qu'elles venaient de recevoir. 7. Que dit monsieur voire pere ? 8. II ne dit rien. 9. Quel age a ce monsieur? 10. II a pres do cinquante ans. 11. Quel age o-nt vos enfants? 12. L'aine a dix ans, el le plus jeune a six ans. 13. Avez-vous demande votrechaine d'or a ce monsieur? 14. Je la lui ai demandee. 15. Avez-vous rendu au commis, 1'argent qu'il vous avait prete ? 16. Je le lui ai rendu. 17. Aviez-vous envie d'envoyer vos clefs au serru?ier? 18. J'avais envi8 de les lui envoyer, car elles sont cassees. 19. Aviez- 162 LESSON LVII. vous oublia de payer votre habit au tailleur? 20. J'avais oublie de Ic lui payer 21. Valait-il la peine d'envoyer cea plumes a l'eeolier? 22. II ne valait pas la peine de les lui envoyer, il en avait d'aulres. 23. Valait-il la peine d'envoyer ees bouteilles a l'aubergiste ! 24 11 valait la peine de les lui envoyer, ear il n'en avait pas. 25. Avez- vous demande des serviettes a votre pere .' 2G. Je n'ai pas voulu Jui er demander. Exercise 110. 1. What does the lailor mean .' 2. I do not know what he means. 3. Where [a your eldest sister? -1. She is at my brother's, or at my sifter's, b. What mi the locksmith Baying to you .' G. He was saying that he has brought my key. 7. How many tetters have you carried to the post-office 1 B. I have carried Beven, three for you, and four for my father! !>. Have you given my sister tlie letter Which I have written I 10. I have not given it to her, I left il upon my table. 11. Where is the gentleman who has brought that pen- IS. He lives at my father's, do you wish to speak to him? 13. I wished to send him a letter which 1 brought from England. 14. Have you returned to that man the money which he had lent you I \b. I have returned it to hii your mother paid the milliner (modish < for her bonnet I 17. She has not yet paid her for i:. ]s. How old ia the shoemaker's eldest son 1 19. He is twenty- yon s uMi to send your brother the key of your 21. I had a' it to him. -jj. Was it worth the while to give your bn I was worth the while to give it to him. for ear) lie wanted it. 'J I. Was it worth the while - to the druggist (apolhi >. It was worth the while to send them to him. 26. Where is the landlord? 27. He is in England 28. Is your Bister al home! 29 ■he is gone out. 30. How many children has the locksmith 1 31. He has ten. 83, How many books has the physician 1 83, He has five hundred volumes. 84. Have you given the gentleman that let- ■ ,o. I have forgotten to give it to him. SON I. VII. ON LVil. I. The French avoid placing the verb a: atencM lowing, when the nominative is .. noun: — ire M 11. T If il hm. i est mon i" re. J trU. I -ua oil est Georgu 1 Do you know vkere Qtw. LESSON LVII. 163 2. In speaking ot a state, condition or action, commenced in the past, but still continuing, the French use the picsent of the indica- tive. The past is commonly used in English in similar cases : — Combien de tea ps y-a-t-il qu'il est How long has he been here,? ici 1 II y a deux heures qu'il ecrit. He has been loriling these two hovjrs. 11 y a uu mois qu'il demeure a Paris. He has lived in Paris one month. II y a deux ans qu'il est mort. He has been dead tliese two years. 3. When however the state no longer continues, the past may be used in French, in the same manner as it is used in English : — Combien de temps avez-vous de- How long did you live in L. ? meure aLI Combien de mois avez-vous appris How many months did you learn l'allcmand % German ? II y un mois que je ne l'ai vu. J have not seen him this month. 4. Combien y a-t-il . . . Combien de mil'es y a-t-il . . . Quelle distance y a-t-il ? answer to the English expressions How far . . . How many miles is it . . . What is the distance, &c. Combien y a-t-il de Paris a. Londres 1 How far is it from Paris to London ? Resume op Examples. Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous avez cette niaison 1 II y a deux ans que nous l'avons. Combien de temps avez-vous eu cette niaison 1 Nous l'avons eue dix ans. Combien de temps y a-t-il que votre frcre apprend le grec 1 II y a six ans qu'ill' apprend. Quelle distance y a-t-il de Calais a. Boulogne 1 II y a huit lieues de Calais a Bou- logne. How long have you had that house ? We have had it these two years. How long did you have that house! We had it ten years. How long has your brot/ier been learning Greek ? He has been learning it six years. How far is it from Calais to Bou- logne ? It is eight leagues from Calais to Boulogne. Exercise 111. Affiche, f. bill ; Demi, e, half; Morceau, m. piece ; An, m. annee f. year ; Fatigue, e, tired; Ne, from naitre. 4. to be Attend-re, 4. to expect, to Imprimeur, m. printer ; born ; wait for ; Lieue, f. league; Verger, m. orchard ; Compagnie, f. company ; Maintenant, now ; Vienne, Vienna. Copenbague, Copenha- Mois, m. month ; gen; 1. Combien de temps y a-t-il que M. L. demeure a. Paris? 2. Il-y- & dix ans qu'il y demeure. 3. N'a-t-il pas demeure a Lyon ? 4 II y a demeure autrefois. 5. Pouvez-vous me dire ou est le fils du eapitaine. 6. II y a un an qu'il est en Angleterre. 7. Savez-vous ou 164 LESSON LVII. demeure M. B. ? 8. II demeurait autrefois a Rouen ; je ne sais pas oil il demeure maintenant. 9. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous etes ici ! 10. II y a plus de deux moisque nous sommes ici. 11. Combicn de temps v a-t-il que vous avez ce verger ? 12. II yauuan que noua Savons. 13. Oh cet imprimeur est-il nc .' 1-1. II est no & Falaise. 15. Savez-vous combien il y a de Paris a Yienne ? 16. II y a trois cent six lieues de Paris a Yienne et deux cents lieues de Vienne a Copenhague. 17. Y a-t-il longtemps que la compagnie est venue? 18. II y a plus de deux heures qu'elle est ici. 19. Y a-t-il long- temps que vous avez hi cctte affiche. 20. 11 y a plus de trois heures que je l'ai hie. 21. N'y a-t-il pas plus d'une demi-lieure quo ;:■ lit I SSL 11 y :: >i Longtemps qu'elle lit, qu'elle en est 23. V a-t-il longtempa que vous atteiidez ce moreeau do musique. 'J 1. 11 y a plus d'un an que je l'attends. 1 L2. 1. HOW long has the printer been lure.' 2. He has been hero more than a year. 3. Do you not know where my father lives? 4. 1 . but 1 have no time to go to his house to-day. 5. I low long has the physician lived in Paris ? 6. He has lived thero 7. 1 1 -.v | ; .' did he live ii; fa lived in mii tell me where the lock- Btnilh live* 1 10. 11' 11. Have you been ' r this book? 12. I have been waiting lor it more n been learning Greek .' 14. He has been learning it these two years. 15. Was not your sister bom in F was born at Paris. 17. How long has your brother had this orchard 1 i^. lie has had it more than Bis months. 19. How fir i> it from Pai Iris one hundred ami rbtteen leagues from P 21. N it farther (plus U» rurin ' -_'. It is farther from Lyons to Turin than from Lyons to Geneva. 23. '..\r in Germany 1 34. He lived in Gesw many two 26. We have been here six montha '27. How long • M yon live In ■ > yean. 31. Have you been learnii g Giiiimii moil than one B9L I have been learning i: m->re than four cat*. 33. Yoiu Mister has been learning music one year and a naif. LKSSON LVIII. 16JJ LESSON LVIII. LEQON LVIII. 1. Clianger [1. see § 49, (l.')],used in the sense of to change, to leave one thing for another, is followed by the preposition de : changer d'habit, de chapeau, etc., to put on another coat, hat, 7 *So nromen-cr, 1. ref. ■ arc : ,. Menerez-vous to* enfiu* "^ J march.' IU J T- 6 Jc le mineral a I'ecurie. 7. Lui , tfcjaidonneraidufoinetdera •"* Veau! 10. J, It B U°jl ccquovousdevez. 12. Nevoulcr-v« mepromener-ucetteapr^nia, 14 ' J ouLhevaP 16. Jt me prom nera on voiturc. 16. Marcucre^vou. Icaueuup d^u, vulr* voyage ■ U you speak U> thai gatUf ;•■ ." visum? \i v fid .-.,.' a, *ur pn/ertqt set? nod 1 H LESSON LXI. 171 a Paris? 17. Nous ne raarcherons pas du tout. 18. N'appellerez. [{ 49, (4.)] vous pas, le colporteur? 19. Je ne l'appellerai pas. 20. N'aeheterez-[§ 49, (5.)] vous pas ce chateau. 21. Nous l'ache- terons si nous pouvons. 22. Ne gelera-t-il pas [H 9 ' ( 5 -)j cette nuit? 23. Je no le crois pas, il fait trop chaud. 24. Ne seineroz- [J 49, (G.)] vous pas tout le ble que vous recolterez? 25. Jc n'en eemerai qu'une partie, je vendrai le reste. 26. Je cachetterai uie3 lettres et je les porterai a. la poste. ,. Exercise 118. 1. Will not the gentleman call his children? 2. He will call his children and his sister's. 3. Will you not bring your children? 4. I cannot bring them. 5. Will you not take a ride this afternoon ? 6. We will ride in a carriage to-morrow. 7. Will you not buy my father's horses ? 8. I shall not buy them ; I have no money. 9. Will you not call the pedlar ? 10. I do not wish to call him ; I do not wish to buy any thing. 11. Will you pay the tailor? 12. I will pay him for my coat. 13. Will it not freeze to-morrow? 14. It will freeze to-morrow; it is very cold. 15. Will you not sow oats in this field (champ)' 1 . 16. I will not sow oats ; I will sow wheat there. 17. Will you take your sister to school ? 18. I will take her there this after- noon. 19. Will you not take your son to market? 20. I will not take him there. 21. Will not the gardener take his horse to the watering place? 22. He will take him there. 23. Will you give oats to your horse ? 24. I will give him hay. 25. Will you bring your son with you? 26. I will bring him to-morrow. 27. Will he bring his horse? 28. He will bring his horse and carriage. 29. Why do you carry that little child? 30. He* is too sick to (pour) walk. 31. Will your brother sell his property? 32. He will only sell part of it. 33. Will not your servant carry the letter to the post-office ? 34. I will seal it and give it to him. 35. Will you feed my horse? 36. I will feed him and give him some water. LESSON LXI. LEgON LXI. IRREGULARITIES OF THE FUTURE. 1. The two irregular verbs of the first conjugation aller, logo, and envoyer, to send, make in the future firai,fenverrai [see § 62.] : — 2. All the verbs of the second conjugation, which end in enir, change that termination into iendrai t &c, for the future : as, tenir, to Ibdld, 172 LESSON LX1. renir, to come;je tiendraije viendrai. Acquerir, to acquire ; conquerir w conquer ; reqm rir, to require ; mourir, to die ; and courir, to run, and .ts compounds, doutti the r in the future .-faequerrm^je mourrai, je cour'rai. Cueillir, to gather, and its compounds, change the i pre- ceding the r into e : —je cucilleral 3. In the third conjugation, s'asseoir, to sit down, and seoir, to sti, make/0 m'assitrai and je siirai. Falloir, to be necessary, vouloii, to be willing, and valoir, to be worth, make ii faudraje voudrai, and je vaudrai. Voir, to see, and revoir, to see again, make /« terra/, >e reverrai. Pouvoir, to 6c aWe, makes je pourrai, and pourvoir, to pro- ride, /> peurwwoi Savoir, to know, and avoir, to hare, make>e saurai, 4. Etre, to 6<\ faire, to make, and its compounds, are the only verbs of the fourth conjugation, which arc irregular in the future :—je serai, jeferai, Su. 6, The futures simple and anterior, arc used in French after an adverb of time, in C8SM similar to tln.se in which the English use the present and perfect of the indicative, with ix/ufurc meaning:— toad tow wrrw ow mmtem , . When wn tee *".&**?* y, :.. gS one row aun , reon ottte 4 ««. oj p* »■•" '«*'«••«< < Au lettre ... I Nuns trout en Fraaoe el •» • Hotu row eeverrow chon N,- viettdrea vows pas dow trouver. Quand Di v ten dr o n l jautai m lettre. Q la peine I Cel halnt ira-t il Men 1 11 hudra tour envoyor de largest goto France this year? and Italy. ii Tot you. M'/// you not '•"'»■' to h>2 «, / sA/j// have tny let- be worth the whiU? Will thai coat fit well? It will be necessary to send then money. ir. to CISE 110. Lenten* Mar. Ii I Ho) m- : l'ait-ir. 1. ir. to set out, to It Tcrmctt-rc, 4. ir. to per. mil ; rinisir, m. pleasure; Bort-ir, '2. ir. to £» «**• Hi.ntot. toon ; Commit re, i. know i Demenre, f dwelling ■'/. try ,• tart L V\icnuV ions voir demainl 2. J'irai vous voir, si ie team le uennet 3. N'cnverrcz-vous pas chereher Ic m votre tils est unlade ' 4. Je firai chereher moi-D* me. 6. Quand je MBJ MljWJ|Jl uiarcucrai plue lentenienU 7. Quand you* connaiuer LESSON LXI. 17$ «a demeure irez-vous le voir ? 8. J'irai le voir aussit6t que jo saurai oh il demeure. 9. Ne le verrez-vous pas aujourd'hui? 10. Je le verrai eette apres-midi. 11. Ne pourrez-vous point nous accoin- pagner? 12. Je le ferai avec beaueoup de plaisir. 13. Ne leur en- verrez-vous point des fraises? 14. Je leur en enverrai quand les miennes seront mures. 15. Ne faudra-kil pas leur ecrire bientot? 16. Quand nous aurons recu des nouvelles d' -i»l i- -iez would lure mordr aient should bile 4. The irregnlaritii iitional appear not in the tennina- tfaras, but in the tUm of the verb. They are precisely the same as : the future. Those [rregulsrttiee will be found In the last kted !■' re. The conditional of any irreg- ular \erh may Ik.- fonni d by plneing after the last r of the future, the terminations of the imperfect of the indk formed from the conditional present of one of the auxiliaries amir, tin; and the past participle of the verb ..(2.)]:- J'aurais i / / '"iild have j self. 6. The two futures and the two conditionals should not be use* after the conjunction Bol -.-.the present end thi jet of the indicative should be used;— S'il ponvalt quitter son pore, il vlen- / %ve kit falktr, hx wouU di.iit. Bi j'olaU a votrc place, j irai.s. / / ytmr SSSCS, / W S Sl s T gt\ iHUi*tg iftm h/uiti$m ■nps. 1 Jo lirais, si j'avais des livres Id. I / would read if I had books hert. LESSON LXII. 175 JT aimerais in ieux aller a pied qu'a. cheval. Votre mere se porteraifc rnieux a. Paris. Nous nous passerions facileinent dc ce livre. Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux lui ecrire 1 Nc faudiait-il pas lui ecrire 1 Je nvassierais si j'etais fatigue. Cct habit m'irait bien, sll etait assez large. I would prefer walking to riding. Your mother would be better in Paris. We might easily do witlwut that book. Would il not be better to write to him f Would it not be necessary to write to him > I would sit doicn if I were tired. That coat would Jit me well if it were broad enough. Exercise 121. S'amus-er, 1. ref. to Inter romp-re, 4. ir. to Se tromp-er, 1. ref. to be amuse one's self ; interrupt} mistaken; S'approch-er, 1. ref. folnvit-er, 1. to invite ; Se por-ter, 1. ref. to be come near ; Mett-re, 4. ir. to put on; or do; S'eloign-er, 1. ref. to go Mouill-er, 1. to wet ; Voyage, m. journey. from; Ot-er, 1. to take off; S'ennuy-er, 1. ref. [§ 49.] Peut-ctre, perhaps; to be or become weary; Sech-er, 1. to dry ; 1. Quel habit mettriez-vous si vous alliez a la chasse? 2. Je inettrais un habit vert. 3. N'oteriez-vous pas vos bottes, si elles etaient mouillees ? 4. Je les oterais, et je les ferais secher. 5. Si vous aviez froid. ne vous approcheriez- vous pas du feu? 6. Je m'en approcherais certainement. 7. Votre petit garcon ne s'en eloigne- rait-il pas, s'il avait trop chaud? 8. II s'en eloignerait bien vite. 9. Vous ennuieriez-vous ici? 10. Je ne m'ennuierais pas, je m'amuse- rais u lire. 11. Ne vous tromperiez-vous pas, si vous faisiez ce cal- cul ? 12. Je me tromperais peut-etre, si j'etais interrompu. 13. Viendriez-vous si on vous invitait? 14. Je viendrais avec beaucoup de plaisir. 15. Ne vous porteriez-vous pas mieux, si vous lisiez moms? 16. Je me porterais beaucoup mieux. 17. Ne faudrait-il pas lui parler de votre affaire? 18. II faudrait lui en parler. 19. Combien d'argent vous faudrait-il ? 20. II me faudrait mille francs, si je faisais ce voyage. 21. Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux lui parler que lui ecrire ? 22. II vaudrait mieux lui ecrire. 23. Si vous etiez a. ma place, que feriez-vous 1 24. Si j'etais a. votre place, je lui paierais fi que je lui dois. 25. Si j'avais le temps, je porterais volontiers vos lettres a. la poste. Exercise 122. 1. Would you not read if you had time? 2. I would read two hours every day if I had time. 3. What coat would your brother put on if he went to church ? 4. He would put on a black coat. 5. Would you put on a black ha.. 6. I would put on a straw hat 176 LESSON LXIXL (chapeau de vaille) if it was warm. 7. Would you not draw [L. 39, 6.] near the fire if you were cold? 8. We would draw near it. 9. Would you not take oil' your coat? 10. I would take it off, if it were wet 11. Would you go to my father's if he invited yon 1 12 [would go to bis house and to your brother's, if they invited mo. 13. Would you put on your boots, if they were wet ? 14. If Ihey were wet, I would not put them on. 15. How much money wculd you want, if you went to England? 1G. We won'.d want th/ce thousand franca 17. Would you not be better if you lived {de~ mcurer) in the country? 18. I should not be better. 19. Would it not be better to write to your brother ? '20. It would be better to Vote to him. 21. Would you read the book if I lent it to you ! 22. I would certainly read it. 23. IT you were in his place, would you go to school! 2\. It' I were in his place, I would go. 2o. If you my place, would yon write to him? 26. I would write to him every day. 27. ir sister be mistaken? 28. She would not be :.. attentive. '29. If you rose every at live, would you be better? 30. I should not be better. 31. Would yon .-on foot? 32. I would prefer going on !:. 33. Would you uot sit down ? 31. I would sit down it' I were tired. Xm. LE£ON LXILL '. Ir.) ia u*cd in the formation of a number of I, Fairo fa ire, to have made, er, to have mended; (aire la cnieine, to : laire bouillir, re rGtir chauffer, to warm (in speaking of food); laire bonne • ititeV. Yous av amended. 2. Tii fiure never varies, when it precedes an Infinitive — 3. Faire peur, to frighten; f.iire attention, ' %; faire faire du mal, to hurt, take A before a noon: — ...-.:.. IT ■.■-.•/ '-. \gtemed thou children* Vous leur avcz (kit mal. You Ur'c hurt them. LESSON LXIIL, 177 4. The last example will show that, when a noun preceded by a, expiessed or understood, is replaced by a pronoun, that pronoun will takt the form of the indirect regimen (dative). By an exception to the rules for the place of personal pronouns, when faire attention has for its indirect object a pronoun representing a person, that pro- noun follows the verb: — Nous ferons attention a lui. We will pay attention to Turn. 5. In speaking of the parts of the body, the French use the article ie, la, les, &c, instead of the possessive adjective [§ 77, (9.)] when the possession is expressed by a reflective (L. 37. R. 1.) or other per- sonal pronoun or by some other word in the sentence : — Vous ru'avez fait mal a la main. You have hurt my hand. Lc bras lui fait mal. His arm hurls or pains him. Resume of Examples. Ferez-vous raccommoder vos sou- liers. Je ferais faire un habit si j'avais de l'argent 1 II ne sait pas faire la cuisine. Avez-vous fait cuire votre viande 1 Ferez-vous chauffer votre bouillon 1 Vous lui avez fait mal au coude. Vous m'avez fait mal au pied. Vous avez fait peindre votre mai- son. Will you have your shoes mended ? I would bespeak a new coat if I had money. He does not understand cooking. Have you cooked your meal ?' Will you warm your broth ? You have hurt his elbow. You have hurt my fool. You have had your house painted. Exercise 123 Gravure, f. engj-av-Voignet, m. wrist; ing ; Tete, f. head ; Ma<;,on, m. mason; Tout-a-l'heure, by-and- March-er, lo step, tread; by; Ou. where; Travail, m. work, la- Bat-ir, 2. to build; Bouillon, ra. broth; Bras, m. ami; Cuisinier, m. cook; Epaule, f. shoulder; Gigot-de-mouton, rn. fe°-Pied, m.foot; bor. of mutton ; 1. Quand ferez-vous batir une maison? 2. J'en ferai batir une Pannee prochaine, si je regois mon argent. 3. Avez-vous fait bouil- lir ce gigot de mouton? 4. Je l'ai fait rotir. 5. Le cuisinier a-t-il fait chauffer votre bouillon 1 6. II ne l'a pas encore fait chauffer, mais il le fera tout-a.-1'heure. 7. N'avez-vous pas fait venir des livres? 8. Nous n'en avons pas fait venir, mais nous avous fait venir des gravures. 9. N'avez-vous pas fait peur a ces petites iilles? 10. Nous leur avons fait peur. 11. Ferez-vous attention a votre travail ? 12. J'y ferai attention. 13. Avez-vous fait mal a cette petite fille? 14. Je ne lui ai pas fait mal. 15. N'avez-vous pas fait mal a cq ehien? 16. Je lui ai fait mal. 17. Ou avez-vous fait mal a votre fils! 8* 178 LESSON LXIV. 18. Je lui ai iait rnal an bras et a la main. 19. No lui avez-vous pas fait mal an pied? 20. Je lui ai fait raal a Tepaulo. 21. A qui ce macon a-t-il fait mal ? 22. II n'a fait mal a personns. 23. Vousai-je t'ait mal au pied. 24. Vous m'avez marche sur le DMS! '-i vous m'avez fait mal. 25. La tete, l'epaule, le bras, le poignet et la main me font mal. [R. j.) Exercise 121. 1. Will you have your coat mended? 2. I will not have it mended. 3. \^ill your brother have his house painted? 4. He will have it painted next year. 5. Will you not have a coat made? 6. I would have one made if I had money. 7. Have you hurt your brother? 8. I have hurt him, I have stepped npon his foot. 9. Does his arm pain him? 10. Yes, Sir, his shoulder, arm and wrist pain him. 11. Will not your son pay attention to his work? 12. He will pay attention to it, lie has nothing else (rim autre chose) to do. 13. Have I hurt your hand or your elbow 1 14. You have hurt my fingers (daigls). 15. Does your cook understand cooking? 16. He understands cooking. 17. Has the cook roasted that leg of mutton? 18. IK' has boiled it. 19. Has he nut warmed it? 20. He has nut had time to warm it. 21. Has the physician sent for en- gravingsl 23. He h Have yon hurt his J l. I have not hurt his elbow, but his hand. 25. I lave I r.ot hurt your You have hurt my wrist. 27. Where have you hart your - I hurt him. 2!'. Would the • I that meat if he had time ? 3d. He would not boil it, he 31. When will he warm your brothl 88. He will warm it hv-and-hy, if lie has time. 88. If you had stepped upon would you not have hurt me? 31. I should certainly have hurt you, if 1 had stepped upon your foot LESSON LXIV. >N I. XIV. 1 Faire conn -come or get acquainted, takes the rrepo. •Jtlon avc before its < ro an mille, die, faire no faire un tour de promenade, mean mtfa, &c., toga on ajnurnn. in take . [would . pleasure, if I had time. 7. Have you become acquainted with the physician? 8. I have not yet be- I with him. 9. How many questions have yi I (ri) the child ? 10. I asked him many questions. 1 1. Have you asked him if be 12. 1 did not ash him. 13. Will not that little girl do 11. She will do .' what food do !:en you ,*id and rice. 17. Have you for- gotten to bid farewell to your mother? 18. I had not forgotten it; 1 intended to go to her hoi 1". Willi whom have 21. Do you not Dg ! -2. I di Biting, they are i nol make Have you left your children in your room ? 2f>. I have not don- Have you sent them out .' 28. I bare them on 29. Have you made purchases this morning? 30. 1 have made none, I have no a fire in my room \ 32. He has made one. 33. Will you do your best to come to-morrow? 31. I will do my best to < .;i. Wo travelled yesterday forty leagues in sixteen hours. LEBSOU 1XT. 181 LESSON LXV. LEgON IXV. 1. Faire is also used in the sense of playing the part of, or preteruL ing to be : — II fait le grand seigneur.' He plays the great lord. 2. Faire also means to matter, to concern, to help: — Cela ne fait rien. That is no matter. Cela ne vous fait rien. That is nothing to you, does not concern you. Qu'est-ce-que cela nous fait 1 What is that to us ? Je ne puis qu'y faire. J cannot help it. 3. Se faire mal conjugated reflectively, means to liurt one's self. Se faire is used reflectively in the sense of the English verbs, to be- come, to turn. It is, also, used .with the signification of the words cause, have, get, <%c. Se faire takes ttre as its auxiliary. [} 46. L. 45.] :— I have become a physician. I have had a pair of boots made for I have had my beard shaved. We have had our hair cut. Je me suis fait medecin. Je me suis fait faire une paire de bottes. Je me suis fait raser. Nous nous sommes fait couper les cheveux. Je me suis fait mal au doigt. / have hurt my finger. 4. Besides the instances mentioned, [L. 33. R. 5.], faire is used unipersonally in many idiomatic expressions : — II fait jour, il fait nuit. It is daylight, it is night. II fait de la boue, il fait de la It is muddy, it is dusty. poussiere. II fait clair de lune, il fait ohscur. It is moonlight, il is dark. II fait bon ici, il fait cher ici. It is comfortable here, it is dear here. Resume of Examples. Ce jc-une homme fait ie savant. Cela ne me fait rien. Que pouvons-nous y faire 1 Mon frere s'est fait orfevre. Pcurquoi vous faites-vous raser? Je me ferai couper les cheveux. Je me suis fait batir une maison. Nous nous sommes fait mal a la tete. II commence a. se faire tard. Fait-il cher vivre k Paris 1 II fait beaucoup de boue. That young man plays the teamed man. That is nothing to me. What can we do to it ? My brother has turned goldsmith. Why do you get shaved ? I will have my hair cut. I have had a house built for me. We have hurt our heads. It is beginning to groio late. Is it dear living in Paris ? It is very muddy. 182 LESSON I- XV. Exercise 127. Absolnment abstMUly ; fcturliant. m. student ; Peintre, m. pavrter; {Sm.^«« Fou.folle,/^, sfe/fe- Personnc, m «^; Artisan, m. i«c« . Tanneur, m. tenner; RS^* m^Ainent, e, inper- Vigneron.m. ™~*ra rino-rine o vexed; , B ,t p. prwuwiwjOttvrfBT, m. woriman ; Vitrier, m. *te««r. 1 Pourquoi cet ouvricr fait-il le malade ! 2. II fait le nialade ravailler. 3. Cet fetudiant no fiuU savant ? 4. 11 no fait pas le savant, il fait lo foil. 5. biod-il ;in „ homme de lair, lo mattre ici ! 6. 11 no tied a pereonne dc faire Timportinont. 7. Cela fait-il quelque chose ! [R. ».] 8. Cola no fait abaolument rien. 9. Cela peuOl Sure quelque oho ,erons1 LO. Cela ne lent fait rien da tout. 11. N ctos-vous - 12. Nous en Bommee bien ftehes, nuus ;-,l pas lait i i. Non, Monsieur, il B'eat fait peintre. 16. Cet artisan ritrierl l& Us'est fait taiineur.et eon frcre a'cat f ul .„l.lit it. I • pas fait couper lee chereuxl vouspaa a, bonne bear* ,l.,ir do lunel 22. 11 f '-^ '' n « [UU bon vivre en Ameriqoel 24 D l0 maroho. 1 Doei not Ihtf gentleman pUj ' ^' Ho plays Um lord and fool* : D w not that boy .. Biek I i. n.- pretends to be »ick, he dooa not wish to wish to work do you pi* 7. i it muddy to- o1 muddy, it is dusty. 9. Will it be moonlight tins eroningl 10. ttwl - ht, it will be very dark, II. la it comfortable hen I 12. It is very comfortable, 18. It il too warm neither too warm nor too cold here, 15. w .urhaircutl 16. 1 had my haircut yesterday morn- 17 Will von nut go home, it U li„h, 90 ll,s not the g azier tur i ' 21. Ho! turned goidemlth, be has turned Ujk-h that co brother! 23. That does not concern him. m Arc y .orrv for that I 25. I MB sorry for it, but 1 cannot help it. 20. VI hy LESSON LX VI. 183 do you get shaved? 27. Because I cannot shave myself. 28. Have you not hurt those children'? 29. I have not hurt them. 30. Have you hurt your arm? 31. No, Sir, but I have hurt my head. 32. Has not your sister hart her hand ? 33. She has hurt her hand, and my mother has hurt her elbow. 34. Have you not hurt your head? 35 I have not hurt my head, but I have hurt my hand. lesson: lxvi. leqon lxvi. 1. Avoir mal, means to have a pain or ache, a sore. When used in relation to one of the limbs, it means generally, to have a sore, a bruise, a cut, &c. The name of the part of the body is preceded by the preposition a and the article [See L. 63, R. 5. § 77, (9.)] : — N'avez-vous pas mal air doigt 1 Have you not a we finger? Je n'ai pas mal a la tete. My head does not ache. 2. Avoir une douleur, or des douleurs, corresponds to the English to have a pain or pains : — J'ai une dou 1 3iir au bras. I have a pain in my arm. 3. The construction mentioned in R. 1, is used aflcr avoir, taken in the sense of tenir, to hold, and after avoir froid, and avoir chaud [L. 63, R. 5.] :— Vous avez les armes a la main. You have your arms in your hands. J'ai chaud aux mains etaux pieds. My hands' and feet are warm. 4. The article le, &c, is used before words indicating moral and physical properties, in Cases where the English use a or an, or omit the article. When, however, an adjective precedes the noun, un, une, or de, des, are at times used : — Cette dame a l'esprit juste. That lady has a correct mind. Votre soeur a les yeux noirs. Your sister has black eyes. 5. A moral or physical property, which, in the individual is single, is not put in the plural in French, though the reference be to a num ber of individuals : — Ces dames ont l'esprit juste. Those ladk >ave correct minds. Ces gallons se sont fait mal a la tete. Those boys u- ■ ce hurl then heads. Resume of Examples. N'avcz-vous pas mal au pied 1 Ccttc demoiselle a le mal de tete. N 'avez- vous pas mal aux dents 1 Mon frere a le mal de dents. Mon cousin a mal au cote. Have you not a sore foot ? That young lady has the headache. Do not your teelh aclie ? My brother has the toothache. My cousin has a pain in kit side, 184 LESSON L X V I. II a des douleurs de poitrine. Qu'avez-vous a la niain 1 Je n'ai rien a la main. J'ai chaud atix mains et froid aux i-urs ont le gout dclicat. Ces messieurs out le aea aquilin. He has pains in his chest. ■u in your hand? ■he mailer with you* I g in my hand. itm »»« V hands are warm and my feel '■rs have a delicate taste. T.wse gentlemen have Roman noses. Exeiicise 129. Bleu, e. blue ; Mai da ::■• Bonche, C mouth ; [W, almost; Dent I. Mai < i . •:-( ill" in. cur- Tcint, in. complexion; ache; f. throat ; tm ceil, cues. ire, f. memory ,■ 1. Ce ji-une boOMM a-t-il ni.il .'i la gorge! 3. Ooi, Monsieur, ii y a deux jours «|u"il a le m is SOUVeat m:il i. J'ai le inal de tete presqai -. j. N'aves* J';ii ni.il :.n bras et a la main. HBOC a-Lellc le inal ti'orciUe. S. Oui, Madame, elle a le inal d'oreille le. i". Noo, ': N 1 .voua point froid eor,je n'y ai point froid. 13. 4 aieor a-- |oilin1 14. 11 a le nei aquiUn et la lie a-t-elle de belles deal a-t-il lea 19. Vo- Non, Ifonaienr, elle a leayeu -Ha fail mal au visage! 2± Ilea une lionno 9A. I • - kaliennea n'ont pas le teint i. Exercise 130. 1. What la the matter with your hand ? '2. I have bad a soro hand ■ : our brother In hi M a pen in his hand. 7. Has your little boy a aore throat ? 8. He has a sore throat. 9. OUT eldest sister the tooth- ache? 10. She has not the toothache, but ahe Has a sore linger. 11. Why doe* uot tin* BOldiu walk ! 13. Hi cannot walk, he has a EBSON LXVII. 186 sore foot. 13. Have you not sore feet? 14. My feet are not sore. 15. If your fingers were sore would you write? 16. If T had sore fingers I should not write. 17. If your brother had th'e headache would he study his lesson? 18. He could not study his lesson if he had the headache. 19. Has not that gentleman pains in his chest? 20. He has pains in his chest and in his side. 21. Has your little girl black eyes or blue eyes? 22. She has black eyes and a fresh complexion. 23. Has not your daughter the tooth-ache ? 24. She has the looth-ache and the ear-ache. 25. Are not your hands and feet cold? 26. My hands are cold, but my feet are warm. 27. Have not those ladies aquiline noses? 28. They have aquiline noses and a fair complexion (le leint beau). 29. Has your sister large hands ? 30. No, Sir, my sister has small hands. 31. Have not those little girls hurt their heads ? 32. They have not hurt their heads, they have hurt their faces. 33. That little boy has black hair (cheveux). LESSON LXVIL LEQON LXVIL 1. Avoir beau — Vous avez beau, corresponds in signification to the English expression, it is in vain for you to. It must be followed by the infinitive : — Vous avez beau dire, il ne viendra It is in vain for you to speak, he wiU pas. not come. 2. Epouser, marier, to marry, have, in French, a different mean- ing. Marier, conjugated actively, can only have as its nominative the person performing the ceremony, or giving one or both of the parties in marriage ; epouser takes, as its nominative, the contracting parties only, and must always be followed by a direct regimen. Se marier, to get married, and marier, conjugated passively, take the same nominative as epouser. M. L. a marie sa fillc avec M. Q. Mr. L. has married his daughter to Mr. G. M. Q. a epouse la fille de M. L. Mr. G. has married Mr. L.'s daugh- ter. M. G. et Ml'e. L. sont marics. Mr. G. and Miss L. are married. Mon frfire va se marier. My brother is going to be vMrried. 3. Un de mes amis, is equivalent to the English, a friend of mine : — Votre ami a epouse une de mes Your friend has married Jt friend of amies. mine. 186 LESSON LXVIL Resume of Examples. 11b ont lit.au dire ct beau fairc, ils ) Whatever they may say or do, lk>vf nc L'empecheroat pea de Be ma ricr. Tons avez beau lui faire des re- montrancea. L'evOque de B. a marie ma sceur. Le capitaine G. a epousS m sine. Quail 1 il so mariera. il nous invitcra a la rice avec mon cousin. de nu-s - •' prevent his marrying. vain for you to remonstrate Ufith Mm. lop of D. has married my Captain G. has married my cousin. When he marries, he will invite us V ■■■sin is married to my cousin, y sin has married a cousin of 7uine. d has mar. LSI. Aind, e, elder, eldest ; Devoir. 8. ir. !„,■•■ to Parent, 0, ".'ation; |ue, in. arch- I Princesac, f. prim Proc! oir, •". ir. to /,.■ ; : I. V< va-t-illr pas B6 marior .' 9. Kile se mariera proehaine. B. < Elle epoojeera le ftia is qui a marie' its deux epoui I - -t-il pa* aoasi aerie' 'l domoiaelle a-t- 1. L. capitaine au 25* n,< i d'inunterie. II. Ce \ llard n'a-t-il pi mnrierl 19. Ii tort de se marier. mais il a tori emoiaelle. ! ii EHea rieronl le moia prochaia. ! rii :.:. it. Qai doivent- ' 18. L'aiaoa doit epo ( ;. n'a.i-il I •J 1. J'.'M do de v«s Uvrea et n . parler a una I. la y.nir brother v g r , it is in vain lor us to speak to Lum, he will marry her. 3. Will not your LESSON LXVIII. 187 father marry your sister to Mr. G? 4. No, Sir, he will marry her to Mr. L. 5. Is Captain H. married'? 6. No, Sir, he is not yet mar- ried, hut he will be married next year. 7. Whom does he intend to marry ? 8. He intends to marry a cousin of mine, who is at my brother's. 9 Who will marry them ? 10. My eldest brother intends to marry them. 11. Is your youngest sister married? 12. No, Sir, Bhe is not married. 13. Is she going to be married? 14. She will marry when she is [L. 61. 5.] old enough (assez agee). 15. Whom did Colonel J. marry? 16. He married a sister of mine. 17. How long have they been married [L. 57. 2.] ? 18. They have been mar- ried two years. 19. Is not that young lady wrong to get married? 20. She is wrong to marry, she is too young. 21. Who married General S. and Miss N. ? 22. The bishop of Arras married them. 23. Did not the archbishop of York marry that couple? 24. The, archbishop of Paris married them. 25. Will not your aunt marry? 26. She will not marry. 27. Is not your sister at home? 28. No, Sir, she is with (chez) an aunt of mine. 29. Is your brother at your house? 30. No, Sir, he is with one of my relations. 31. Is he married? 32. He is not married. 33. Is Captain H. married? 34 He was married last week. 35. He married Miss H. LESSON LXVIII. LECON LXVIII. DIMENSION, WEIGHT, ETC. 1. The verb avoir is used in expressing the size of an object. The preposition de precedes the noun of dimension. When there is no verb in the sentence, the preposition must be placed before the num ber, and again before the noun of dimension : — Cette muraille a dix pieds de That walk is ten feet high. hauteur. Ce puits a cent pieds de profondeur. That well is one hundred feet deep Une table de quatre pieds de Ion- A table four feci long. gucur. 2. In sentences, where sizes are compared, and the verb etro ia Urfed, the preposition de is placed before the number expressing the excess : — Vous etes plus grand que moi de You are taller than I by two inches. deux pouces. 3. When the price of an article is mentioned, the article le is used before the noun expressing the measure, weight, &c. When the 188 LBSBON LXVIII. remuneration, or rent, &e. for a definite space of time is mentioned the preposition par (per) is used: — Le beurre Be vend an fhmc la livre. Butter is sold a franc a pound, 11 gagne six franca par jour. He cams six francs per dan. 4. The same preposition is used, when we speak of the number of times any occurrence takes place in a given space of time : — Jc vaU a la poste deux fob par I go to the post-office twice a day. jour. Rtsoxfl of Examples. Cin namon is sold two francs a pound, 1k sir francs a metre. l'!c is five hundred fa L high. La candle se vend dvux francs la livre. Cette Boie rant six francs le metre. cinq cents pieds de hantenr. Cet etang u huit pieds de profuii- dour. ambre •!«• quhute i ■■:< ur. sur dix-huit d • largcur, ct huit de hantenr. :■• taille est voire t": 8a taille est da cinq pieds huit :ni est-il grand on i ll ■ - 1 ii>> >ti eat plus haute one la ini'iiii'', il>- CUM pi : ur Jour. That pond is eight feel deep. %g uii eighteen .'feet high. I • /■ 7 igki inches. Is our friend tall or short? H V higher than mine bf I :'(l'J. II pi'is us • ; U fir ma a iccck. ; Prorbndeur, f. depth; POUCC, in •ird, rod. Bon march6 .hi-op; Qrandenr, f. riztt i S I I re inaison cst-elle grande ? 2. Elle a cinquante | I l .;r \otre jarilin '. II a rineft-cinq verges o • lie est cet officicrl 13. II e taille. ll. Do coinbieu . grand de toutc la ttte. 1»: de beaueonp pi que moi ! 17. Je suis plus grand quo vous de trois poucea. LESSON LXII. 189 18. Combien cette 6tofle se vend-elle la verge? 19. Elle so vend trois francs b metre. 20. La cassonade ne se vend-elle pascher? 21. Elle se vend a bon marche. 22. Combien delettreseerivez-vous par semaine ? 23. Je n'en ecris que six par semaine. 24. Ccmbien payez-vous par semaine pour votre loyer? 25. Je ne paie que dix francs par semaine. Exercise 134. 1. How large is your father's garden? 2. It is twenty -five rods fongand ten broad. 3. Is your cousin's house large ? 4. It is fifty- six feet long and forty broad. 5. Is your house larger than mine ? 6. It is larger than yours by ten feet. 7. Do you know how deep that well is? 8. It is twenty-five feet deep and six feet broad. 9. How is that cloth sold a metre? 10. It is sold forty-five francs a metre. 1 1. How much do you receive a week for your work ? 12. I receive fifty francs a week for my work. 13. How much does your friend pay a month for his board (pension, f.) ? 14. He pays seventy francs a month. 15. Are you taller than your cousin? 16. I am taller than he by the whole head. 17. Is not your nephew taller than your son ? 18. He is taller than my son, by three inches. 19. How large is this room? 20. It is sixty feet long by forty. 21. What size is your brother ? 22. He is tall, he is taller than I. 23. How many books do you read a week ? 24. I read ten volumes a week. 25. How is butter sold a pound ? 26. Butter is sold two francs a pound. 27. Do you know how much your son earns a day ? 28. He earns as much as yours, he earns ten francs a day. 29. How much is that silk worth a metre ? 30. It is worth six francs a metre. 31. Our friend's stature is middling. 32. Do you go to church twice a day? 33. I go to church once a day. 34. Does your son go to the post-office every day ? 35. He goes thither six times a day. LESSON LXIX. LEgON LXIX. 1. Mettre (4. ir.) forms, in French, many idiomatic expressions. Mettre a meme de, to enable ; mettre pied a terre, to alight, to land; mettre le pied, to set one's foot ; mettre a la porte, to turn out of doors; mettre au fait de, to acquaint with; mettre a. l'abri, to shelter, mettre a l'ombie, to put in the shade; mettre un habit a l'endroit, a 'envers, to put on a coat right side out, wrong side out, &c. :— 190 LESSON LXIX. Nous l'avons mis a meme de con naitre la vcritS. 11 a mis cut iusolent ii la portc. We enabled him (o '-enow the truth. He turned that ins doit person out of dt 2. Mettre conjugated reflectively, i. e. sc mettrA, means /.> plac* one's self, to dress one's self; se mettre a table, In sit down to table, so mettre en colerc, to became angry, to put one's self into a passion. II se nut a ['ombre, an BOleiL He places himself in Hie shade, in Iht 3. Se mettre. followed by an infinitive, means to cemmence, to le- gin :— lis se mircnt ii plcurer. ;'<>>£■ A I'anglaiae, a la Iran raise, are used elliptieally for i la mode franeaise, a la mode anglaise, after the French, after the English fashion. Ii. Ed '•:.': OV I AAMPLES. Cc cavalier a aria pied a terra. Vona a'osea mettre le pied cbei lui I'.mts a I'abrl '!<• l.i ploie. Voua ..■ Pourqu i I'om- nta Be min Dl i Ponrqnol ne • a I'oui i Je vala in.- mettre i d pi naion. That horseman is come down from his horse. You dan not set \wur foot inside his house. from the rain. ) i put iiour cloak inside out. llieman always dresses after i: \ N to table at ten li ■ .n to the shade? Ulren commenced hi t Stt yourself to icorkl I U> commence our jcrur- ■',• fitudl-er, 1. to study ; I i alise, f. mettre, dressed, &. merveiue, exceedingly Enttv l Pluie, f. ram; well; Etourdi, e. giddy Ir. to laugh; Couvert, See L. 82 l.j sent Tablier, an 1. A\ mme de mettre le pied eliez vous 1 9, Je le lui ai defend a. 3. Avez-vous mia cea tf]\ts a l'alm de la pluie. 4. Je lea ai mia a I'abri de la ploie et du vent. .'>. Avcz-voua tuis votre 1'ri.re au fldt de eette affaire .' G. Jo ue l'eu ai paa mia an LESSON LXIX 191 fait 7. Ne l'avcz-vous pas mis a meme d'etuaier? 8. Jo l'ai mia a. indme de s'instruire, s'il desire le faire. 9. Vuiilez-vous mettro cela de cote? 10. Je vais le mettre au soleil. 11. Votre ami n'a-t-il pas voulu entrer? 12. II n'a point voulu mettre pied a tefre. 13. Votre teinturier n'a-t-il pas mis son tablier a l'envers? 14. Non, Monsieur, il l'a mis a l'endroit. 15. N'avez-vous pas mis cet etourdi a la porte? 16. Nous lui avons ferme la porte au nez (in his face). 17. A quelle heure vous mettez-vous a table? 18. Aussitdt que le couvert sera mis [L. 61, (5.)]. 19. Cet homme se met-il bien? 20. II se met toujours a l'anglaise ou a l'italienne. 21. Ces enfauts ne se mirent-ils pas a pleurer ? 22. Au lieu de se mettre a pleurer, ils se mirent a rire. 23. Pourquoi ne vous mettez-vous pas a ecrire ? 24. II est temps de se mettre a table. 25. Ces Siciliennes sont-elles bien raises? 26. Elles sont raises a merveille. Exercise 136. 1. Did the gentleman alight this morning? 2. No, Sir, he would not alight, he had no time. 3. Have you put that insolent person out of doors ? 4. No, Sir, but I forbade him to set his foot in my house. 5. Did you shelter those little children from the rain? 6. I sheltered them from the rain and the wind. 7. Have you enabled your son to study medicine (la medecine)? 8. I enabled him to study medicine, if he wishes to do so. 9. Have you put on your coat inside out? 10. I have not put it on inside out, but right side out. 11. Did you put yourself in a passion? 12. No, Sir, I did not become angry. 13. Did you sit down to table at four o'clock yesterday? 14. We sat down to table at six o'clock. 15. Do you intend to commence boarding? 16. I intend to board with Mr. L. (chez M. L.) 17. When do you commence your journey ? 18. We commence our journey to-morrow morning. 19. Did your son com- mence laughing ? 20. No, Sir. he commenced weeping. 21. Why do you not commence working ? 22. Because I am going to com- mence reading. 23. Does that lady dress after the English fashion 24. She dresses after the Italian fashion. 25. Are those ladies wel. dressed? 26. They are extremely well dressed. 27. Will you not place yourself in the shade ? 28. I will place myself in the sun, I am very cold. 29. Is your coat inside out? 30. No, Sir, it is right side out. 31. Is this the right side of this cloth (l'endroit) ? 32. It is the wrong side (Venvers). 33. Are you not dressed after the Eng- lish fashion? 34. I am dressed after the Italian fashion. 35. Yon are well dressed. 192 LBS SO LXX. LESSON LXX. LEgON LXX the imperative. 1. Conjugation of the Imperative of the Regular Verbs : — Chant -e fin -is re9 -ois rend -s ting fnish receive render Qu'il DM -e cbcr -i*se aperg -oive vend -o let him speak let him cherish let him perceive /<■« him tell Donn -ons (burn pore -evons tend -ons let us give let us furniik let us gather M us tend Clicrch -cz pun -issez cone -evcz entend -ez seek ;)Uii.c\ cniciivc hear Qu'ils port -cnt s&is -issent d -oivent nerd -ent let them carry let them seize Ut tliem owe /«£ iA*m /ojki 2. The second person singular, and the first and seeond persons plural of the imperative, are the same as the first person singular, and the first and second persons plural, of the present of the indica- tive. The pronouns are dropped. Je parte, park; je inns, finis. J speak, speak ; I finish, finish. 3. Exceptions — Avoir, t ■ hate, makes in those persons of the im- perative, aie, ai/oiis, aijtz; ctre, to be, sais, snynns, soyez ; savoir, to know, sache, sachons, sachez ; and aller, M, and xas before y not fol- lowed by an intiii. 4. Vouloir has only the Becond person plural, veuillez, liave the gixjdnrss to. . , . 5. A third penon singular and plural is given in the imperative by most of the French grammarians. These parts, however, belong properly to the BUbjOBCtive, u tii< y exprees rather a strong wish than a command. Hie English ax p rCSe ioM, UL him speak, that he may sj*afc, are rendered in French by qu'il parle. 6. A droite, B gauche, corrre.-pond in signification to the English t: Ihc rig!*/, to the l»fl. .r.cho. Go to the right, to the left, 7. For the place of the pronouns in connection with tho impera- tive, see L. 27. R. 1,4 ; L. 28, R. 1, 2, 3, 4. :.': of Examples. 1st in take thr first street to the right. F>ek net longer to deceive him. 1st HI know how to amlenl ourulvet with necessaries. Pay great attention to what you sty. Prcnons la premiere rne a droite. Ne cherehez phis a le tromper. Bariums nou; contentor do sain-. Faites bicn attention a ce que tous ditea DitaS toqioori la vciite. Allans! Messieurs, d6p6chez-Yous. Tema, Monsieur, voila votre ar^tvit. Veuillez accepter c* prtsent v,7 the truth. Ci>me ! gentlemen, male haste. here is your money. B* ar> kvmi am to mooept this prmtmt LESSON I. XX. 193 Exercise 137. Clef, f. key ; Promett-re, 4. ir. to p w- Renvoy-er, 1 to send Crayon, m. pencil; mise; back; Institutrice, f. teacher ; Rapport^er, 1. to bring Sans faute, without fail ; Obe-ir, 1 . to obey ; back ; Se serv-ir, 2. ref. to use ; Partie, f. part ; Remett-re, 4. ir. to de- Tiers, m. third ; Precepteur, m. instruc- liver ; Verrez, 3. ir. // c/m voir, tor ; to see. 1. Envoyez chercher le medecin, votre petit garcon est malade. 2, Nous Pavons deja envoye chercher. 3. Vous n'avez pas besoin do votre crayon, pretez-le-moi [L. 27. R. 4; L. 28. R. 4]. 4. Je ne saurais vous le preter, je m'en sers. 5. Donnez-le-nioi ou me le pretez [§ 100, (6.)]. 6. Je l'ai promis a votre institutrice. 7. Si vous ne le lui avez pas dit, dites-le-lui aussitot que possible. 8. Ne le lui dites pas encore. 9. Parlez-lui-en [§ 39, 17.] la prochaine fois que vous le verrez. 10. Ayez patience, mon ami, votre pere ne tar- dera pas a venir. 11. Obeissez a votre precepteur. 12. Je lui obeis toujours. — Donnez-lui-en une bonne partie. 13. Je lui en ai deja donne plus des deux tiers. 14. Avez vous porte cette clef au serrurier? 15. J'ai oublie de la lui remettre. 16. Portez-la-lui sans faute cette apres-midi. 17. Veuillez me dire ou demeure M. G. 18. Prenez la premiere rue a gauche, il demeure dans la deuxieme maison a droite. 19. Allons, Mesdemoiselles, depechons-nous. 20. Menez-les-y le plus tot possible. 21. Ne me les rapportez pas. 22. Renvoyez-les-moi demain. 23. Portons-les-y. 24. Ne les y portons pas. 25. Pretez-les-lui, mais ne les lui donnez pas. Exercise 138. 1. Give a book to the young man. 2. I have already given hini one, and he does not read it. 3. Lend it to him, if you will not givo it to him. 4. I will not lend it to him. 5. Make haste, young la- dies, it is ten o'clock. 6. Have the goodness to give me a pen. 7. I have given one to your brother. 8. Obey your father, and speak io your sister. 9. Will you not send for the letter? 10. I will send /o:" it. 11. Send for it as soon as you can. 12. Do not do so (le), but write to my cousin. 13. Come, children (mes enfants), learn your lesson. 14. Give him some [j 39, 17], or lend him some [§ 100, (6.)]. 15. Do not make haste, we have (le) time. 16. Have pa- tience, my child, the merchant will soon come. 17. Send it to him, /f you cannot give it to him. 18. Write to him this afternoon with- »ut fail. 19. I would write to him if I had time. 20. Let us take the first itreet to the left. 21. Take the second street to the right. 9 19 4 LESSON LXXI. 22. Pay attention to what your brother says. 23. Let us tell the truth 24 Let us read that hook to-day. 25. Pay your debt* aa soon as possible. 26. Let us obey our instructor. 27. Carry the kev to him 28. Bring me back the books which I have lent you. 29 Do not bring them back to me, read them. 30. Let us have patience, we shall soon have money. 31. Let us speak to them, they are at my father's. 32. Tell them that 1 intend to write to them to- morrow morning. 33. Go to church this afternoon. 34. Bring me back my letters. 35. Do not carry them there, but bring then to rn»> as soon as possible. -*—- •- LISSOM LXXI. LBGON LXXL 1 A verb following another verb in the imperative, is put in tne infinite, (according to general Rule L 21. 2.) The conjunction which often cornea between the Iwo ferba in Bnghab, is not used in ^Stapnrieraunw A C7 i o. I>roni!r fear* to to* heed; when followed by m- other teife In the Infinit ' '"■'— abet. ! "f a!l - 3 Prendre le deniL mtomoumngi |«iidieUpetoe,li ,,„•,,„ re un prendre dn cafe, dn the, ft*, to tofa ■nvova ch« oUtnr. N'av ;ul '■ Preoee hi peine ae • . dU the OU dU Qael I>.»rti av«/.-v,.\-.s pris 1 Attends. 4. to - J?, 1 to» , r,;/^ ; ChrcoUU.m.cWa*; or; ./ lo \^n,U Courricr, in ■ . r ' l " ' Troi-re 4 ir. U> I- , ; , A, W2-W. Wch^cr; 1 ' toioti ; faire, ..Her, ils ailknt ; vouloir Us rtuill'itt ; valoir, ils vaiOent. 5. The subjunctive may. I I from the participle pre sent, by changing ant into ,,- chantey .. iiant, je sache ; craj- 6. The verbs presenting ■ this last rule are the fob lowing, which the student will find conjugated in the Second Pail of this grammar, j (J2 : — LESSON LXXII. 197 Acq lie fir Concevoir Mourir Prendre, Savoir Venir Aller Dccevoir Mouvoir (and Tenir (and _ (and Apercevoir Devoir Percevoir its com- its com- its corn- Avoir Etrc Pouvoir pounds) pounds) pounds) Boire Faire Pourvoir Recevoir Valoir Vouloir 7. The past of the subjunctive is formed from the subjunctive present of one of the auxiliaries, avoir, tire, and the past participle of a verb [{ 45.] : — Que j'aie parle, que je sois venu. That I may have spoken, that I may have come. 8. A verb is put in the subjunctive, when it is preceded by the conjunction que, and another verb expressing consent, command, doubt, desire, surprise, want, duty, necessity, regret, fear, apprehen- sion, &c. [{ 127, (2.)] :— Je veux que vous lui parliez. I wish you to speak to him. Je desire que vous arrivicz a temps. / wish you to arrive in time. 9. When the first verb expresses fear or apprehension, the verb preceded by que, must also be preceded by ne, which, however, has no negative sense [} 127, (3.) $ 138, (4.) (5.) (8.)] :— Je crams qu'il ne tombe. I am afraid lest he fall. 10. After craindre, to fear ; apprehender, to apprehend; avoir peur, to be afraid; trembler, to tremble, pas is used in connection with the ne, when we wish for the accomplishment of the action or occur- rence expressed by the second verb [} 138, (7.)] : — Je tremble qu'il n'arrive pas a / trevible that he may not arrive in temps. time. Resume of Examples. Le me deem veut-il que je boive de l'eau 1 Je consens que vous alliez le voir. Nous doutons que vous arriviez a temps. Je crains que votre maitre ne vous punisse. J 3 crains que votre maitre ne vous punisse pas. Je m'etonne qu'il ne saclie pas cela. J'exige que vous lui donr.iez cela. Voulez-vous qu'il aille a la ehasse! Que voulez-vous que je dise? J'aime mieux que vous me payiez. Does the physician wish me to drink water ? I consent that you go to see him. We doubt your arriving in lime. I fear lest your master may punish yon. I fear that your master may not punish you. I am astonished that he does not know that. I require von to give him that.. Do you wish him to go hunting. What do yon wish me to (that 1 should) say ? I would rather liave you U\ pay me. 198 LESSON LXXII. Exercise 141. Artisan, m. mechanic; Empech-cr, 1. to prevent: Moulin-a-scie, raw-mili Atelier, m. icorkshop; Forteracnt, very much; Obe-ir, 2. to obey ; An deasua, above-. Force, f. strength; Rempl-ir, 2. to fulfil; Bracelet, m. bracelet ; Magasin. m. warehouse; Rue. f. street} Deja, already >.; Malsain. c. unhealthy; Tomb-er. 1. to fall. 1. Que voulez-vous que nous fassions? 2. Je desire que vous fassiez attention a vos etudes. 3. Ne craignez-vous pas que la pluio no vous empeehe de sortir ? 4. Nous craignons fortement que la pluie ne nous empeehe de remplir nos engagements? 5. Doutez-voua qu'il soit chez lui maiutenant ? 6. Je doute qu'il y soit, il est dej.'i dix beures. 7. Exigez-vous qu'il parte de bonne heure? 8. Je m'ctonnc qu*il ne soit -pas dej.'i parti. 9. Aimez-vous mieux que je vous rende oea brareleta .' 10. Pause mieux que vous me lea payiea. 11. Votrc f oi-in craint-il que sun enfant ne SOrte .' 12. 11 eraint qu'il ne tomb." dans la rue. 13. Ne deairez-vous paa que v< obeiaaenl .' 14. Je souliaite qu'ila m'obeiasent et qu'ils obeissent a lean pn 15. Ne cmignez-voua pas que cet artisan ne tombc malade .' 1G. Je crains qu'il ne toinbe malade, ear son atelier est trea malaain. 17. Ne r paa qu'il suit oblige^ de tra- vailler? IS. Je regrette qu'il soit oblige de travailler an dessus de sea ton''-. 19. N a paa qu'on lui apprenne cette nouvelle? 20. Je di aire qn'on la lui apprenne le plus tot possible. 21. Votro pen ne raut-i tea an magasin 1 22. II vent (pie j'acln'te un moulin- Ueoie. j:: 1) -!r, . -vous que je T0O8 quitte.' 24. : >i. 2.;. Je veux que vous partiez ce matin. LOisa l 12. 1. Do you wish me to speak to the mechanic ? 2. I wish you to tell him to (de) some lure to-morrow morning. 3. What do you wish me to do ! 4. I wish you to bring me a book. 5. Do you not wish me to read your letter 1 6. I wish you to read it and ( my work 12. I wish you tu do y.mr work before going out sortir). 13. Do you not regret your !.. work.' 11. I do not regret my being obliged to work. 16. Are you not astonished that be knows that: 16. I am astonished that be knowa all LESSON LXXIII. 199 17. Do you require me to pay him to-day? 18. I wish you to pay him to-morrow. 19. What would you have me do (See No. 1, of the ab ne exercise) ? 20. I will have you pay him immediately. l l\. Do you fear lest the master punish your son? 22. I fear that he may not punish him. 23. What would you have me say? 24. I would have you say the truth. 25. Does not your father wish you to buy a house ? 26. He wishes me to buy a storehouse. 27. Do ycu wish us to leave you ? 28. I wish you to go away to-morrow 29. Do you wish me to stay with you ? 30. I wish you to stay here. 31. Do you wish me to tell him that news? 32. I wish you to tell it to him. 33. Do you wish your children to obey their teacher ? 34. I wish them to obey him. LESSON LXXTTI. LECCXN" LXXIII. USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE CONTINUED. 1. A verb preceded by the conjunction que and one of the uni- personal verbs, il faut, it is necessary; il importe, it matters, it is important ; il convient, it is proper, becoming ; il vaut mieux, it is better ; il plait, it pleases, suits ; il se peut, il peut se faire, it may be, il est juste, it is just; il est bon, it is proper; il est neeessaire, it is necessary ; il est important, it is important ; il est temps, it is time ; il est indispensable, it is indispensable ; il est a propos, it is proper ; il est facheux, it is sad, it is a, pity ; il est urgent, it is urgent, or by another verb or expression implying necessity, will, or propriety, must be put in the subjunctive [§ 127, (4.)] : — II faut que vous restiez ici. You must remain here. II est juste que vous soyez recom- It is just you be rewarded. pense. 2. The unipersonal verb, il est, governs the indicative present or the future, when it is used affirmatively, and followed by que, coming after one of the adjectives, sur, sure; certain, certain; vrai, true; demontre, proved ; incontestable, incontestable ; evident, evident, and others having a positive and affirmative sense: — II est cortain qu'il vient ou qu'il It is certain that he comes or will come. viendra. . 3. When however the verb, il est, used in the above connection ia negative or interrogative, it is followed by the subjunctive : — n'est nullement certain qu'il His by no means certain that he will '200 LESSON LXilll 4. After certain conjunctions, afin que, in order that; quoiqua although, <%c. [see full list, 5 143, (2.)] the subjunctive is always used Quoiquc vous fassiez, quoique vous Whatever you may do, whatever //<>*• disiez. >ay. 5. Other important rules on the government of conjunctions will be found in said \ 143. MPLB8. Que feul Faut-il lire qne vous lui ies. I . rd .' : 1 . /• sister do 7 ■ itc to him ? I ssaryfor you to xcrite to htm. ■ Mm hit ' ■ arrivti so late * :.rt him- lime. ASalre, f I : :. . : I I I 1. Qne iez ce qua voua .• .' 4. II QpruDt6! I i an bel poiatl I qu'il so - : . : udrn mienx q l LESSON LXXIV. 201 '.ui en pretions. 20. Que .faut-il que nous fassions? 21. II faut qua vous portiez ce linge chez moi. 22. N'est-il pas temps que je me eouche ? 23. II est temps que vous vous couchiez. 24. Faut-il que je me leve ? 25. II faut que vous vous leviez. Exercise 144. 1. What must our friend do? 2. He must remain at our house untL I come. 3. What must our neighbor do ? 4. He must put his affairs in order. 5. Is it not right that you should pay your credi- tors? 6. It is right that I should pay them. 7. Is it time for your little boy to go to school ? 8. It is time for him to go to school, it is ten o'clock. 9. Must I write to your correspondent to-day or to- morrow? 10. You must write to him to-morrow morning. 11. Is it not a pity that your brother has torn his cap (casquette) ? 12. It is a pity that he has torn it. 13. Is it necessary for your mother to finish her letter? 14. It is not necessary that she finish it. 15. Is it certain that your son has forgotten his money ? 16. It is certain that he has forgotten it. 17. It is by no means certain that he has for- gotten it. 18. Must you furnish money to that mechanic? 19. I must furnish him some, he has none. 20. Whatever you may do you will not succeed (reussir). 21. Whatever your brother may say, nobody will believe him (croire, ir.). 22. Must I write to you? 23. You must write to me. 24. Do you wish me to be sick ? 25. I do not wish you to be sick. 26. Do you require me to tell you that ? 27. It is necessary that you tell me all. 28. Do you wish me to go to your house? 29. I wish you to go there. 30. Must I get up? 31. You must rise immediately (d Tinstant). 32. Must your brother retire ? 33. He must go to bed immediately. 34. It is time for him to go to bed, it is twelve o'clock. LESSON LXXIV. LE£ON LXXIV. USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. CONTINUED. 1. The verbs croire, to believe ; dare, to say; esperer, to hope ; gager and parier, to bet; penser, to think ; sentir, to feel; voir, to see; and others expressing affirmation or something certain and positive, are (when they are conjugated affirmatively, and have que after them) followed by the indicative present or future [§ 127, (2.) Note] : — Je pense, je crois, je dis qu'il J think, I believe, I say iliat he will viendra. come. 9* 202 2. The above verbs, when used in the same connection and conju gated negatively or interrogatively, are followed by the subjunctive [| 127, (2.)] :- Je ne crois pas qu'il vienne. J do not believe he will come. 3. A verb, preceded by another verb and by a relative pronoun, is put in the subjunctive, while there is an idea of uncertainty, aud in the indicative, when the idea is certain [) 127, (2.) Note] :— J'ai un liommc qui me rendra scr- I have a man who iciU oblige me. qui mc / want a man who will (may) oblige vie. 4. A verb, preceded by a superlative relative, or by the words, le seul, le premier, le dernier, is put in the subjunctive [{ 127.] : Voilo le seul chapem qae j'aie. r , ; it tke ,»,/„ hot i have. \ oila le meillear homme que je There is the best man I know. vice. J'ai besoin dun bommo rende » que le concert a hi lieu. pease pas que ootre ami one, \i>us apprendi par < icur. Je ne pease pa* qu'fl putoe dre tMit cela pax i band B'enrlchit mix dipeu d uutrui. qu'il B'enri* Jr De crou pas qne vous rtossisslcz qui conaent un litre. Je eherche an atienne un litre. !•• rm-ilK-nr i que j'aie, a cooditionqae vous mo. le rei d i took place. I ilo not think that OUT friend trill come. 1 that you will learn that by heart. I t'tink that he can learn all I "klI this merchant grows rich M «f others. UV him- 1 will surccd I hare ,: \ held* a litre. * holds a litre. 1 Und you the bat hat I have, on cx>n~ ■ t \at you will rctturn it to mt lo-m< Litre, in. i tre, about a 1 Deboal i Portier, m. Bfl que ee drap dare lo I, Je crois qu'il durera bieii, car il e.-t fort oua que OOtTO portier tarde ft rentrer ' J. Je crois qu'il ne tardera pas. 5. Desirez- vous que noua K.ntr-er, 1. to -..-me in Suffl-re, J. ir. to stifficti Tann( in- in. /, LESSON LXXIV. 203 restlons deboul? 6. Je desire au contraire, que vous vous as- seyiez. 7. Croyez-vous que ces etudiants puissent apprendre cinq pages par cosur en deux heures ? 8. Je crois que e'est impossible. 9. Esperez-vous que noire ami arrive de bonne heure? 10. J'espere qu'il arnvera bientot. 1 1. Quelle sorte de carafe vous faut-il ? 12. Il m'en fau', une qui contienne un litre. 13. J'en ai une de cristal, qui eositkrat deux litres. 14. Pensez-vous que ce negociant s'enrichisse a vos depens ? 15. Je sais qu'il s'enrichit aux depens d'autrui. 16. Quel parasol pensez-vous me prefer? 17. Je pense vous preter le meilleur que j'aie. 18. Le tanneur reussira-t-il a gagner sa vie ? 19. Je ne crois pas qu'il y reussisse. 20. Pensez-vous que cet argent Buffise avotrepere? 21. Je crois qu'il 1 ui suffira. 22. Croyez-vous que ces messieurs comptent sur moi ? 23. Je sais qu'ils comptent sur vous. 24. Pensez-vous que le concert ait lieu aujourd'hui ? 25. Je crois qu'il n'aura pas lieu. Exercise 146. 1. Do you believe that the concert has taken place? 2. I believe that it has taken place. 3. Do you believe that your sister's dress will wear well ? 4. I think that it will wear well, for the silk is very good. 5. Do you believe that our friend will succeed in earning a livelihood? 6. I believe he will succeed in it (y), for he is very dili- gent. 7. Do you think that the tanner grows rich at my expense ? 8. I think that he enriches himself at the expense of others. 9. Does the merchant grow rich at my father's expense? 10. He grows rich at your expense. 11. What kind of a house must you have (cous faut-il) ? 12. I must have a house which has ten rooms. 13. I have a good house which has twelve rooms. 14. What kind of a decanter do you seek? 15. I seek one which holds three litres. 16. I have one which holds two litres, I will lend it to you. 17. What coat will you send me ? 18. I will send you the best I have, take care not to stain it. 19. Do you think that the student will learn all that by heart? 20. I do not think that he will learn it. 21. Do you believe (that) he will come? 22. I believe that he will come soon. 23. Do you think that your father depends upon me! 24. I kno v that he depends upon you. 25. Does not that gentle- man depend upon me ? 26. I think that he depends upon your bro- ther. 27. Will the porter soon come in again? 28. I hope that he will not tarry long- 29. Will you not lend me your umbrella? 30. I will lend it to you with pleasure. 31. Does my brother remain standing? 32. He does not wish to sit down. 33. Do you wish me to sit down? 34. T wish you to remain standing. 35. I wish that he may come. 204 LESSON LiXV, LESSON LXXV. >N LXXV. THE IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF THE Sl'BJlTNCTl YE. 1. The terminations of the imperfect of the subjunctive are in aU the verbs, regular and irregular, gatione, tse, sses, t, . ! preceding the / of the third person singular always takes the circuni .r OF THE SOBJUNOnVB OF Til!. B read -tea • ng lish might rtctice migU- Qui! ' ; 1 -it That lie migh' . might gather stem That trc mifht feck .m.-h nigh; ■ I tarry might teize might '■< lose That dug might loot ...' bitt •1. 1 I from the past definite [h. 61.] by I Mll- ■ Thie rule baa no cm-' ; 11 : ! 1 of the tally to the rmed from the imperfect nd the past ; Qtt3J 7. .' tfcvM and |-lupcrlVct of ! Future of the indicative na under the aboviMnenl Of the sub- LESSON LXXV. 205 junctive ; so the imperfect and other past tenses of the indicative, and the two conditionals, govern the verb in the second part of the proposition, in the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive. Ne fallaifc-il pas que je lui parlasse 1 11 faudrait que je lui donnasse ce li- vre. Was it not necessary that I shoidd speak to him ? It would be necessary for me to give him that book. Resume of Examples. Vourlriez-vous que je donnasse un coup de baton a cet enfant 1 Je voudrais que vous tirassiez un coup de fusil sur cet oiseau. Exigeriez-vous que nous revinssi- ons de bonne beure 1 Que voudriez-vous que ces bommes Que vouliez-vous que je fisse 1 11 faudrait que j'eusse mon argent. Je ne voulais pas que vous mourus- siez de froid. Elle craignait que vous ne mourus- siez de misere et de faim. Voudriez-vous que je jetasse un coup-d'oeil sur ces papiers % Would you wish me to give that child a blow with a stick ? I would vjish you to fire your gun upon that bird. Would you require us to return early ? What would you wish those men to do? What did you toish me to do? It would be necessary for me to have my money. I did not wish you to die with the cold. She feared lest you might die with want and hunger. Would you wish me to cast a glance upon tliese papers ? Exercise 147. Ivrogne, m. drunkard; Ressembl-er, 1. to i Mer, f. sea; semble ; Lievre, m. hare; Retablissement, m. j Perdrix, f. partridge ; covery ; Poste. xa.. post; Sante, f. health; Se rend-re, 4. ref. to re- Tir-er, 1. to fire, shoot, pair ; 3, f. woodcock; Bord, in. shore; Charg-er, 1. to load; Coup, m. blow; Coup-de-fusil, m. shot; Coup-d'ceil, m. glance; Demi-use, half-worn ; Fouet, m. whip; 1. Voudriez-vous que j'achetasse un habit a demi-use 1 ? 2. Je vou- drais que vous en achetassiez un neuf. 3. Voulait-on que ce soldat malade se rendit a son poste ? 4. On voulait qu'il se rendit a son regiment. 5. Faudrait-il que je demeurasse aubord de la mer ? 6. II faiidrait pour le retablissement de votre sante, que vous vous ren- dissiez en Suisse 1 7. Ne pensez-vous pas que cet enfant ressemble a. sa mere ? 8. Je ne pense pas qu'il lui ressemble. 9. A qui ressemble- t-il ? 10. II ressemble a sa soeur ainee. 11. Consentiriez-vous que voire fille epousat cet ivrogne. 12. Voudriez-vous que nous mou russions de misere? 13. Je eraignais que ces dames ne mourussent [5 127, (3.) L. 72. 9.] de froid. 14. Ne voulez vout. pas tirer sur ce lievre? 15. Je tirerais sur cette becasse si mon fusil etait charge. 206 LESSON LXXVI. 16. Uombien de coups de fusil voudriez-vous que jc tira?se? 17. Si vous aviez de la poudre, je voudrais que vous tirassicz sur cetto per- drix. 18. Voulez-vous que je jette un coup d'oeil sur cette Icttrel 19. Je voudrais que vous la lussiez. 20. Que vouiriez-vous que je 21. Je voudrais que vous fissiez attention a ros etudes, 22. Faudrait-il que je so; D i'audrait que vous restasaitt a. la maison. 24. Que voudriez-vous que je 6sse a ce chevai I 25. Je voudrais que vous lui donnassiez dcs coups de fouet. 1-iS. 1. What would you have me dol 2. I would have yon cast a glance upon this tetter. 3. Would you wish me to give that dog ive that horse Mows with a whip. 00 require us t<> return at return early. 7. Do you think that your brother r .1 do not think he resembles my father. 9. Whom do you think that In- i 10. I think he a my mother. 11. How many shots have you fire* have fired five shots at thai woodcock. 13. Would you not have mo ; It. I would have you fire at that pari for me to dwell .' 16. It v i to dwell on the - me die with hunger? 18. I would not have you die of hunger. 19. V have your 1 rith cold? him die with you have your son do ! have him learn his lessona, 23. we him learn l 24. I would have him learn German and Spanish. I I It would be out 29. Would it ho .It would be necessary for you to go to church 1 you to writo to me. 33. Did you wish me to buy a coat half worn out? 3 \. I you to buy a good ha.t. LXXVI. \ l.X XVI. 129.) ether in French without preposltlona, which are in English joined by them. Many others ai French by prepositions different from I ng the corres. LESSON LXXVI. 207 ponding verbs in English. No satisfactory general rule3 can be give: 1 on this point. We have given in the Second Part of this gram- mar [^ 130, 131, 132.] copious lists of the verbs in general use, with the prepositions which follow them, when they come before other verbs. We have also hitherto noted the prepositions usually placed after the verbs introduced in our lessons. 2. The student will recollect, that a verb following another verb (not avoir or tire) or a preposition (not en) must be in the infinitive, - 3. The following verbs, extracted from the list, \ 130, although they, in English, take a preposition before another verb, do not take one in French : — Aller, 1. ir. to go Compter, 1. to intend Courir, 2. ir. to run Daigner, 1. to deign Desirer, 1. to desire Devoir, 3. to owe Envoyer, 1. ir. to send Esperer, 1. to hope Falloir, 3. ir. to be ne- cessary Mener, 1. to lead, take Penser. 1. to think Pouvoir, 3. ir. to be able Savoir, 3. ir. to know Souhaiter, 1. to wish Valoir mieux 3. ir. to be better Venir, 2. ir. to come Pretendre, 4. to pretend Vouloir, 3. ir. to wish, Preferer, 1. to prefer will. Besume of Examples. Comptez-vous diner avec nous 1 Je vais diner chez mon pore. Ne voulez-vous pas donner a man- ger a ce chien 1 Desirez vous monter dans ma cham- bre? Je pre fere descendre chez votre pere. Demeurc-t-il en haut ou en bas 7 Preferez-vous demeurer au rez-de- chaussce 1 Je desire demeurer au premier etage. Nous pre ferons louer le second etage. Nous esperons louer une chambre au second. Do you intend to dine with us ? I am going to dine at my father's. Will you not feed that dog ? Do yoib wish to go up to my room ? I prefer to go down to your fatlier's. Does he live above or below ? Do you prefer to live on the ground floor? I wish to live in the first story. We prefer to take the second story. We hope to rent a room in the second story. Exercise 149. Cabinet, m. closet ; En haut, up stairs, above; Salle, f. parlor ; Compt-er, 1. to cipher; Eaisan, m. pheasant ; Touch-er, 1. to touch, Demain, to-morrow ; Jou-er, 1. to play; play; Dejeun-er, 1. to break- Lou-er, 1. to rent, to let ; Troisieme, third story ; fast; Pinc-er, 1. to play ; Violon, m. violin. En bas, down stairs, 6e-Plaisir, m. favor, plea- low ; sure ; 1. Combien de chambres comptez-vous louer? 2. Nous comp- tons louer une salle au rez-de-chaussee et deux cabinets au troisieme. 3. Ne preferez-vous pas louer une chambre-a-coucher au second ? 4. Nous preferons demeurer au rez-de-ch"ussee. 5. Ne pouvez-vous 208 LE88 0N LXITI. rester a diner avec nous aujourd'hui ? 6. Je vous remercie, je pre- fere vonir domain. 7. M. votre pere viendra-t-il domain dejeuner avec nous? 8. II compte venir demain, de bonne heure. 9. Que voulez-vous leur dire ? 10. Je veux lcs prier de me faire ce plaitdr. 11. Comptez-vous faire ce plaisir a mon frere? l± J'espire le lui faire. 13. Pr ferez-voua demeurer en haut ouenbas? 14. Nous demeurer en bas. 15. Que pensez-voua faire de ce jeune penaona I'envoyer a M. votre beau-frere, 17. Ne savez-vous pas jouer du violon '. 18. Je Bala en jouer. 10. lit-elle toucher le j Bile b»H toucher le piano etpinoer la harpe. 91. Ne t pas ecrirel 23. None a jouer de la guitarel Nous Bouhaitona trouver un appartem 150. r brother-in4aw intend to rent the ground floor .' -2 He intend o rooma in the Becond Btory. :t. I low many ;r -"ii intend to take.' 4. Ho intends to : rooma in prefer to live on the the ground floor. 7. D< father n inerwithua to-morrow 1 8. He intenda I »i> you prefer to live up I prefer to 1 11. D 12. She knows how to play i intend to I er)l 14. ip to my room f 16. 1 to your father's. 17. I><> you wtafa to 18. I •«•• i*h md floor. r to ataj ak1 88. I think of OU wish me to • you wish I your mother? 36. I \n i - * . it to her. r play on the 'J8. She ■ i play on the wish to live • prefers liu'og ! \V;il you not d ■ I M ill dfl it and dine wiih ih to- day f 31. He I dine with him 3.Y Our t'rv nd know i .jilier. LESSON LXXVII. 209 LESSON LXXVII. LEgON LXXVII. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS CONTINUED. 1. Many verbs, in French, are joined with other verbs follow. ng, vy means of the preposition de, of, where the corresponding verbs n English either take no preposition, or one other than of. Besides avoir besoin, &c. [L. 21. R. 4.], the following verbs extracted from list, 5 132, belong to this class : — Dispenser, to dispense Negliger, to neglect Ernpecher. to prevent Prier, to beg Eviter, to avoid Promettre, to promise Se flatter, to flatter one's Proposer, to propose self Refuser, to refuse Jurer, to swear Supplier, to entreat Manquer, to fail Trembler, to tremble Menacer, to threaten Achever, to finish Bruler, to burn, to long Cesser, to cease Commander, to com- mand Conseiller, to advise Defendre, to forbid Dire, iu say Resume of Examples. Pourquoi n'achevez-vous pas d'ap- prendre ce metier'? Nous brulons de contimier nos etu- des. II ne cesse de nous tourmenter. Me defendez-vous de faire du bien a cet homme 1 Ne negligez pas de lui faire une visite. Me promettez-vous de faire une visite a mon ami 1 Je vous prie d'aller tout droit chez vous. Je vous conseille de venir par le chemin-de-fer. Ne manquez pas de lui faire mes compliments. L'avez-vous menace de le frapper 1 J'ai refuse de lui faire credit. Me proposez-vous de lui confler cet argent % Je vous conseille de le lui confler. J 'evite de lui reprocher ses fautes. Why do you not finish learning that trade? We burn to continue our studies. He does not cease tormenting us. Do you forbid my doing good to that man? Do not neglect paying him a visit. Do you promise me to pay a visit to my friend? I beg you will go straight Iwme. I advise you to come by the railroad. Do not fail to present my compli- ments to Mm. Have you threatened to strike him ? I refused to give him credit. Do you propose to me to trust Mm with this money ? I advise you to trust Mm with it. I avoid to reproach him with his faults. Exercise 151. A'rros-er, 1. to water ; Gard-er, 1. to keep ; Tout droit, straight ; Arrosoir, m.watering-pot; Jardinier, m. gardener ; Rend-re, 4. to do, to ren- Au contraire, on the Lendemain, m. next der ; contrary; day; Veille, f. eve, day before; Corrig-er, 1. to correct ; Oubli-er, 1. to forget; Voie, f. conveyance, way, Faire part, to communi- Se rend-re, 4. ref. to or mode of travelling. ' cote ; repair ; 210 LESSON" L XXVI I. 1. Pourquoi ne eessez-vous pas dc lire? 2. Jamais tort de cesser de lire avant de savoir ma lecon. 3. Avez-vous defeodu a votre jardinier a'arroser ees Hours ? 4. Au contraire, je lui avais com- mande de lea arroser. 5. Pourquoi a-t-il neglige de is faire ? 6. Parcequ'il a oublie d*apporter l'arrosoir. 7. Que desire fain M. F. ? 8. 11 brole de container L'etude de la medecine. 0. N'avez-voua pas tort de faire des visiles a ce monsieur? 10. J'aurais tort de \ gliger. 11. I fuse de rendre ce service a. votre en- nemi ? 12. Faurais eu I de le lui rendre, 13. Quelle ?0 ien de prendre? 14. Je vous ai conseille de prendre la voie du 1 I menace de r cet enfant? 16. Je I'ai mei it. Avez- devendre dee marchandises a mon frere ? 18. J'ai re- , rediL 19. Avez-vous dit a mon Blade M ren d r ,. 20. Je I'ai] d'y aller tont droit 21. Vous renirla veille ia nous prop" air le lendemain. 28. Votre compagnon ae propoae-tril de de faire part de cela a tout lo monde. 162. l. II. .v yn'i forbidden mj cousin I ' nei I 2. 1 .I,, him. 3. Has your mother ordered lered him to neglected to e will yon take to go to P " 1 "' - N " u told • ' h: ' vt ' I " 1 ' 1 I. It ■ your brother ■•-. - brother-in-law! 12. Hi i ;h:il letter? Do you propose lo trust him with tfa - 1 llim wil1 ' ''• '"• 1)c> him with hi- I [avoid to rejvoMh him with them, i Lehim. 21. plime ; do you ardener ! 80. I have not fcilod to pay LESSON LXXVIi: 211 liu. 31. I have forgotten to pay you. 32. Do not neglect to write to me. 33. Tell him to go to my father. 34. Do not cease to work. 35. Tell him to come Christmas Eve. 36. I have told him to come 'he dav after. LESSON LXXVIH. LEQON LXXVIH. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS CONTINUED. 1. Many French verbs reach their object by means of prepositions, while the corresponding English verbs govern their object directly, that is, without intervening prepositions. Other French verbs reach their object through prepositions different from those used in English. We give here a few verbs coming under those two classes, commen- cing with the first : — 2. Verbs which have a preposition before a noun,, in French, but have none in English : — Abuser de, to abuse Jouir de, to enjoy Plaire a, to please S'approcher de, to ap- Manquer a, to offend, to Se souvenir de, to re~ proach fail member Convenir a, to suit Medire de, to slander Se servir de, to use Deplaire a, to displease Se mefierde, to mistrust Ressembler a, to resem- Desobeir a, to disobey Obeir a, to obey ble Douter de, to doubt Pardonner a, to forgive Survivre a. to survive Echapper a, to escape 3. Verbs reaching their object through different prepositions in the two languages. S'affliger de, to grieve for Louer de, to praise for Remercier de, to thank Feliciter de, txfeongrat- Profiter de, to profit by for ulaie Penser a. to think of Pure de, to laugh at Gemir de, to grieve for Se passer de, to do with- Rougir de, to blush ct S'informer de, to inquire out Songer a, to think of about Resume of Examples. N'aves-vous pas abuse de notre pa- tience 1 Nous en avons abuse. Vous avez desobei a vos parents. Vous pardonnerez a vos ennemis. Vous penserez constamment a vos devoirs. Vous y penserez constamment. Ne riez-vous pas de nos erreurs 1 Nous n'en rions point. Ne ressemble-t-il pas a son pere 1 Have you not abused our patience? We have abused it. You have disobeyed your parents. You will forgive your enemie?. Yon will think constantly of ymw duties-. You will think of them constantly. Do not laugh at our mistakes. We do not laugh at them. Does he not resemble Ms father ? 212 LESSON LXXVIII. Exercise 153. Arrangement, m. or- Cceur. m. J S e ~ P uf "" ™* clU; Devoir, m..dut 9 ; Now ;clto, f. mn i Circonstancc, f. zircxim- Faute. f. fault ; . Pointre, m. jwm^- 8 informer, 1. ref to in- Procbain, m. ,,'«d; S SelHer, ■ : dheur, in. vusfor- Buocas, m. n ; {MHfi I. Cot arrangement voua convient-il ? 2. 11 ne meconnent pas, mt a aotre parent. 3. Cola ne deplait-il pas au peintre 1 Ini J 'plait beaucoup. 5. No craignes-vous pas ience de votre ami? 6. Je crains d'en abuser. 7. ,.us jamais a \ 8. J\ pons,- loua lea jours. re aujourd'hui? 10. Pai pense a lui, ^jg , n. A-t-il eu Boin de son pare, et Ini a-t-il obei? 12. 11 luiul.it constamment 13. Ne lui a-t-il i i. II lui a desobei plusieurs Fois, maia il gemit de leur complaisance! 16. • ,ut mon creur. 17. Le Bellier voua a-t-il : is. li m'en a felicite. 19. N^vea-voua re malheurl - ''• nouaneriona ooa pas dee Je ne m'en aouviena pins. fendu de medire de votre pro. [♦ ft defcnda aoua aommoe informea da • 154. , Hay* v,.i not abused your friend's kindness? 2. I have Mt ■a. Does n..t your .nducl does nol please them. . r >. Why haa> you not obeyed your father 1 6. Ihaveobeyed him iluih 7. Have you i ol Ian fhed al n „, i onr mistakea. 9. Has the young man lau| 1 al his in - II. H nes! 13. Ha , t bis misforl i ea. 13 Do you aver laugh at tho •■ mis. rot yea. , qoI remem 17. ] ia1 young lady bat motharl 18. She does not l e aa s abl a hr ■■*" LESSON LXXIX. 213 19. Have you thanked ycur friend for his kindness? 20. I have thanked him for it. 21. Has your mother forbidden you to read that book? 22. She has forbidden it (me Ta). 23. Why do you not forgive your enemies? 24. I forgive them with all my heart. 25. Bo you not think of your duties ? 26. I think of them (y) every day. 27. Have you congratulated your friend ? 28. I have congratu- lated him on his success. 29. Have you not slandered those gen tlemcn? 30. I never slander my neighbor. 31. Does that house suit you ? 32. It suits me, but it does not suit my father. 33. Does that house suit the painter ? 34. It suits him very well, but it is too small for me. 35. My father has forbidden my speaking to that gentleman. LESSON LXXIX. LEgON LXXIX. REGIMEN OP ADJECTIVES. (5 87.) 1. The regimen or complement of an adjective is generally a noun or a verb completing its signification. This regimen is usually connected with the adjective, by means of a preposition. 2. That preposition is often different in French from that connecting the corresponding English adjective with its regimen [§ 87, (1.) (3.)]. 3. When an adjective follows the verb etre, used unipersonally, the preposition de connects that adjective with its regimen [§ 87, (4-)] :- II est necessaire de travailler pour It is necessary to labor in order to vivre. live. 4. The following adjectives, extracted from lists, § 88, 89, 90, reach their regimen through prepositions, different in French and Eng lish:— Amoureux de, in love Mecontent de, displeased Propre a, fit for with with Rebel] e a, rebellious toio- Cheri de, beloved by Reconnaissant de, grate- ards Content de, pleased luith ful for Bon pour, kind towards Desole de, grieved for Rempli de, filled with Insolent avec, insolent Fache de, sorry for Bon a, good for towards Inquietde, w?ieas?/ about Cruel a, cruel towards Poli envers, polite to Ivre de, intoxicated with Exact a, exact in Resume of Examples. N'6tes-vous pas content de vos pr : gres 1 J'en eais fort content. Votre domestique est-il exact remplir ses devoirs 1 j his duties? Are you not pleased with your pro* gress ? I am very much pleased with it. Is your servant exact in fulfilling 214 LESSON LXXIX. Avez-vous rcmpli dc vin cctte boa- teille 1 Avez-vous rempli d'argeut votrc be v. - Je I'en ai rempfie. II est trfes facile de blamor les ac- tion* d'autrui. lorienx de moarir ; patrio. II ot plus agrtable do voyager en . i 'en liiver. Have you filled that bottle iritnitine^ ■ filled your purse icilA I have filled it irith it. to blame L'^e actions one's e o u mtif . I! is more agreeable to travel in sum- mer than in winter. 153. Abatt-re, 4. ir. to cut Bois-a-brQler, in. ^re-Nettoy-er, 1. 1 People, in. . chase; Chi Pommier, m. ap pl e t rm j I to pull Encie. f. ink ; Prunicr. in plum Fein!; | l; ■■.!.: Bci ' Liberie, f. liberty; Tonnean, cask. t de la gloire ? 2. II en t-iaii amoureux. 8. Ce r..i n'e'tait-il pas chferi d peuplel -i. 11 en 6tai1 ohen. 5. C its ne Bont-ila pas ■• Qta. 7. Yctes- ;. r .' S. J\n ulna ampli ce tonneaa ? 10. II l'a rempli de vin, 11. mplii cette Bill BSl drj.'l r I'ait ahattre . car ila n'< taierU km ft W. IT. K-t-il possible 18. ll eel j — ible de le fmdre. 19. i. 81, D 32. .!«• l"ai reinplie irolerl 24, i; is pas reeoniu des sir ■ I that I hare teal my pi r H tint .ry to r fire- wood tawed. 7. Your garden is tou small, is it not necessary to have eome LESSON LXXX. 215 plum-trees pulled out ? 8. It is necessary to have some plum-treea cut down. 9. Have you filled your friend's purse with silver? 10. I have filled it with gold. 11. Are all your bottles filled with -vine? 12. Thpy arc all filled with ink. 13. Are you sorry to have filled your bottles with ink ? 14. I am glad to have filled them with ink, for I want ink. 15. Are you pleased with this book? 16. I am pleased with it. 17. Is that land good for any thing ? 18. It is good for nothing. 19. Is that lady beloved by her children? 20. She is beloved by her friends and by her children. 21. Are you grateful for those services ? 22. I am> grateful for them. 23. Is it not possi- ble to split that piece of wood? 24. It is not possible to split it. 25. Is it agreeable to travel in winter ? 26. It is not so agreeable to travel in winter as in summer. 27. It is easy to blame others. 28. Is it not glorious to die for one's country ? 29. It is glorious to live and to die for one's country. 30. Have you filled the inkstand (encrier) with it? 31. I have filled it with it. 32. Would it not be necessary to pull up ail those trees ? 33. It would not be necessary to pull them all up, for my garden is very large. 34. Henry the fourth (quatre) was beloved by his people. LESSON LXXX. LEgON LXXX. GOVERNMENT OF PREPOSITIONS, ETC. (5 139.) 1. Some prepositions govern the nouns which follow them, without the aid of other prepositions. Avant, before (at an earlier period), [§ 142, (1.)] devant, before (opposite place), [§ 142, (1.)] derriere, behind; chez, at the house of; concernant, touching ; excepte, except; outre, besides ; selon, according to ; voici, here is ; voila., there is, etc [} 139, (1.)]. 2. Others, being rather prepositional phrases, govern their objeci by means of the preposition de : — hors de, out of; loin de, far from, a flour de, even with ; a force de, by dint of; a l'egard de, with regard to ; a l'insu de, without the knowledge of, unknown to ; a raison de, at (he rale of; au dega de, this way of; au dela de, thai way of [§ 139, 2.]. 3. Others take a — quant a, as far ; jusqu'a, as far as, etc. [§ 139, 3.]. 4. Two or more verbs, adjectives, or prepositions may in French nave a regimen in common, provided they govern in the same manner or case [{ 92, (1.) (2.) J 140, and $ 133.] :— 216 LESSON LUX. Nous aimons et nous louons nos Wc love and praise our children. enfants. , . , , ,, Ce jardin est utile et agreable a That garden is useful and agrcecM* notrepere. to our father. Au dedans ou au dehors du roy- Withtn or without the kingdom. auuie. 5. When, however, two or more verbs, adjectives or prepositions coming together in the same sentence, do not govern their regimen n the same manner, they cannot have a regimen in common. The regimen must be repealed, or replaced by a pronoun, or another turn must be given to the sentence. The following sentences could not, fore, be translated literally into French : — That man is useful to and loved by his famUf—I writt to and letters from my brothers— To be exposed f from the rain. We must say : — Cet homme • :■■ fimily, and aim6. i -. and re- ■'■ ' lui - , * to the rain, or to bt bit *'k ;? cpose and a l'abri, take dif- ferent : U'LES. , s arrives avant la ba- I» !*■ hattlf. . . . 51/ or/ore im-i. \i mil sons la chaise ou des- crc notre mai- ' them upon the table 1 I hit re . ''" - t&mk or Ik hi nd our home. ■■ une chambre ' ro f m - • Jront of the house. son. , , • , i fcl rencontres derrisre ■ ■ I i.-hmd your garden. Vous area achett oette tern- a I 1 Inso ill- v. >i . . J'ai i avc ce janlinier a raisou de d"»« franca par jour. > your father. j n'xer ai the robe of two francs per day. Buutuui L57. •e. f. plate; vn ' kr > und " . re, m. back ; Dedans,' insuie, unthin , DOT Dwsoa, above, upon U , LESSON LXXX 217 S'enrich-ir. 2. to become Hors, out ; Pomme-de-terre, f. po- rick; Plat, m. dish ; tato; Hectolitre, m 100 litres; Sur, upon, aboiit. 1. N'ave'z-vous pas ferme la porte de devant? 2. Nous l'avona fermee, roais nous n'avons pas ferme la porte de derriere. 3. Qui est arrive avant moi? 4. Le monsieur qui est assis de vant la fen£tre. 6. Qui demeure derriere votre maison ? 6. II n'y a point do maison derriere la notre. 7. Ne pensez-vous pas qu'a force de travailler, il e'enriehira?, 8. Je ne crois pas qu'il s'enriehisse, s'il vend ses mar- chandises a si bon marche. 9. Apprend-il la musique a. Tinsu de ses parents? 10. II l'apprend a leur insu. 11. Vous etes vous marie a l'insu de votre soeur? 12. Je me suis marie a son insu. 13. Notre ami n'est pas dans la maison, il est dehors. 14. II n'est pas hors de la ville, il est dedans. 15. Avez-vous de l'argent sur vous.' 16. Je n'ai pas d'argent sur moi. 17. Demeurez-vous sur le der- riere on sur le devant de la maison? 18. Nous demeurons sur le de- vant. 19. La euisiniere a-t-elle mis les assiettes sur la table ou dessous ? 20. Elies a mis les assiettes, les plats, les cuilleres et les fourchettes sui la table. 21. Combien ces po tnmes-de-terre vous coutent-elles ? 22. Je les ai achetees a raison de cinq francs l'hecto- litre. 23. Avez vous fait reparer le dedans ou le dehors de la mai- son ? 24. J'ai fait reparer l'interieur et l'exterieur. Exercise 158. 1. Have you bought that house without your father's knowledge? 2. I have bought it without his knowledge. 3. Have you forgotten to shut the front door ? 4, I have shut the front door and the back door. 5. I have brought all my books except two or three. 6. Does your brother occupy the front of your house ? 7. He occupies the back. 8. Whom have you met behind that house ? 9. I met nobody behind the house. 10. Does that gentleman live behind your house ? 11. Nobody lives behind our house. 12. There is no house behind yours. 13. Have you a knife about you ? 14. I have no knife about me. 15. Do you carry a knife about you? 16. I never cairy a knife about me. 17. Has not your brother money about him ? 18. He has no money about him. 19. Will you put these pencils upon the table, or under it? 20. I will put them in the drawer (tiroir). 21. How much have you given for that wheat? 22. I bought it at the rate of twenty-five francs the hectolitre. 23. Is that 1 ady's house out of the city ? 24. It is not out of the city ; it is within. 25. Has not your sister placed the plates upon the table ? 26. She has put the plates upon the table, and the spoons under it. 27. Have you 10 218 LISBON LXXX1. had your house repaired ? 28. I have had the inside repaired, but not the outside. 29. How much does that silk cost you ? 30. 1 have bought it at the rate of rive francs the metre. 31. Did you marry without your fathers knowledge? 32. I married without his knowledge. 33. Have you sold my books without my knowledge! 34. I sold them without your knowledge. 35. I sold them without my sister's knowledge. LESSON LXXXI. THi: DEMONSTRATIVE PROXOl'N, OH. ($ 108.) 1. The pronoun ce answers to the English pronoun it, used before the verb to be, in such sentences as, it is 1, it is thou, &c. The latter pronouns (/, thou, &C.) are rendered byoioi,toi, lui, die, nous, vous, eux, in., dies, f The veil, remains in the singular, except when tho pronoun following it is in the third person plural; in which ease it Bay I"- nut in the plural or in the singular [; 1 10, (2.)]. If the pronoun is followed by gut, the verb is better in the plural, and, if followed by que, in the singular : — C'c-' • He. // tl I it it he, it is she. - qui |>arlcnt. / > fpcak. 1 // •> 2. If thfl relative pronoun qui and another verb follow lire, thia second verb mu-t agfM in number and jktsou with the pronoun • "-' : — :> qui &vo7. f.i • that. C'est nous qui avona dechire cetto Jt is ice icho hare torn thai silk. Boie. 3. Ce also renders the English pronoun it, used absolutely, but not unipersonallv before the verb to be [\ 108, (5.)] : — Co fut en AUuuin.Tio qnH trouva I <• nuny that he found \u sou ami. 4. Celui qui, celle qui, ceux qui, in., celkfl qui, f, arc equivalent t( the English pronouns, Ac who, she who, they who— celui que, cclie que ceux que, cellos que, render he whom, .. Celui ou cello qui chante. He or she vho sings. :i'LES. Est-cc vous qui nous avea averti do I Is il you v\o have vunuil us of this 7 celal lesso: 219 C'est nous qui vous en avons averti. Est-ce vous, mesdames, que nous avons rouconti ces ? Co n'est pas nous, c'est eux que vous avez vus. Ce n'est pas vous, ce sont eux qui ont fait cela. C'est en Angle terre que jc vous ai vu. Connaisscz-vous ces deux Portu- gais? Je connais celui qui parle a M. L. It is vie who havt warned yon of it. Is it you, ladies, whom we have met? It is not we; it is they whom yon have seen. It is not you; it is they who have doix that. It is in England that I saw you, \ Do you knoio those two Portuguese ? I know him who speaks to Mr. L. \ Exercise 159. Connaissance, f. acquain-De temps en temps,/'/-OT7» lance; time to lime; Expl iqu-er, 1 . to explain ; No- number ; Guerre, f. war; Phrase, f. sentence; De-jour cn-jour,/fo??i now in Germany. 30. 1- it you ; ' 31. We have written no letter. I 33. 1 live there ,,•".>/ vu,i). 34. Is it we whom you have seen? 35. It was not you whom I saw. LEBSOH l-xxxii. LBgON :.xxxn. ]. The ptVBOOna and not the pronouns must be u „.,l ,-,, r - before the verb CO /><•. whoa that verb ia Bd Mil.siantivrly, ]■■■■■ of 0*9 understood, or by ■ or itm m< \\ ben the word need in apposition with as m plural, and in the third pOMon, the verb IS put in the plural, although ce re- B >J:— " '' ''• , . r i- ■ ■■»■ Be dame qui m'a pari* dV I '.'•■*' ic mrofytm. i as the nominative of the verb < tre. iu sentences li.e wing, and the conjunction que i- need idiomatically after \L The verh in I "' l'»t '» ,! "' P ,,lr:i1 :_ Qu'.-t-c-.' m"- H "*"' ren? yuV.st-.-.-.|ii.- I'll I '■'. ce-que lojard H rntng? 3. Que is aaed idiomatically in ■ nnmber <»f sentence*. In tht following it ghrea greater force to the expression: — • ,ie bona Uvrea qut lea vol I - ••Ijooki. it dia que oui ; je crois que uon. I y yes ; I belter* net LESS ON LXXXII. 221 Resume of Examples. Qui sont ces m essieurs qui parlent a. M.L.I Ce sont mes cousins, qui viennent d'arriver. De quel pays sont ces marchands 1 Ce sont des Polonais ; ils viennent d'arriver. Ils ne sont pas polonais; us sont russes. Ce ne sont pas des Polonais ; ce sont des Russes. Qu'e'st-ce que la Touraine 1 C'est le jardin de la France. Votre fenetre ne donne-t-elle pas sur la rue 1 Non, c'est sur la cour qu'elle donne. Je crois que oui ; je crois que non. Who are the gentlemen whi speak to Mr. L. ? They are my cousins, who are just arrived. Of what country are those mo chants? They are Poles; they are just ar- rived. Tliey are not Poles ; they are Rus- sians. They are not Poles ; they are Rus- sians. What is Touraine? It is the garden of France. Does not your window look on the street ? No, it looks on the yard. I believe w ; / believe not. Exercise 161. Bris-er, 1. to break; Etranger, e, foreign; Soieries, f. p. silk stuffs; Charron, m. wheehorighi; Fenetre, f. window; Sucre, m. sugar ; Confitures, f. p. pre- Lyon, Dyons; Suisse, Swiss; serves ; Mouchoir, m. handker- Surprend-re, 4. ir. to Donn-er, 1. to give, look; chief; catch, surprise ; Ecossais, e, Scotch ; Roue, f. wheel ; Vol-er, 1, to steal. 1. Connaissez-vous ces etrangers? 2. Oui, Monsieur, ce sont les freres de notre voisin. 3. Ne sont-il pas ecossais ? 4. Non, Mon- sieur, ils sont suisses. 5. Ne sont-ce point des Ecossais qui vous ont fait present de cette casquette ? 6. Non, Monsieur, ce sont des Suisses. 7. N'est-ce pas votre domestique qui vous a vole du vin ? 8. Ce n'est pas lui, c'est son frere. 9. N'est-ce pas lui qui a pris vos confitures? 10. Ce n'est pas lui; ce sont ses enfants. 11. Ne sont-ce pas la. les enfants que vous avez surpris a voler votre sucre ? 12. Ce sont leurs freres.. 13. Ne sont-ils pas cousins ? 14. Ils ne sont pas cousins; ils sont freres. 15. Qu'est-ce-que ces soieries? 16. Ce sont des marchandises qu'on vient de nous envoyer. 17. N'est-ce pas une belle ville que Lyon? 18. C'est une grande et clle ville. 19. N'est-ce pas la le mouchoir que vous avez perdu? 20. Je crois que oui. 21. N'est-ce pas sur le jardin que donnent vcs fenetres ? 22. Oui, Monsieur, c'est sur le jardin qu'elles donnent. 23. N'est-ce pas notre charron qui a fait cette roue ? 24. Ce n'est pas lui qui l'a faite. 25. Ce sont nos amis qui l'ont brisee et c'est le menuisier qui l'a faite. Exercise 162. 1. Is that lady your friend's sister? 2. No, Sir, she is a btranger 8. Who are the two gentlemen who are speaking to your sister ? 4. 222 LESSON L X X X I 1 1. They :ire Swiss gentlemen. 5. Are those the gentlemen whom vou have invited? j. It is they (eux). 7. Do you not knew that man 1 8. I know him very well; he is the man who has stolen my wine. 9. What is Italy? 10. It is the garden of Europe. 11. Is not that the letter which you intended to carry to the post-o'.hce ? 12. No, Sir, it is another. 13. Is the city of Havre line? 14. Ves, Sir Havre is truly a large and beautiful citv. 15. Is not that the ma whom you have caught stealing your fruit? 1G. It is not, it is an other. 17. Is not this the cap that you have bought? 18. Vcs, Sir. I believe so. 19. Do not the windows of your room look on the street? 20. No, Madam, they look on the garden. 21. Do not the windows of your dining-room look on the yard (eour) '. 22. No, Sir, they look on the lake (lac). 23. Is it that litli child who has taken your pre- serve .' 2-1. It is his brother or his sister. 25. What are those en- gravings? 2<>. They are engravings which I bought in Germany. 27. Arc thOM gentlemen Scotch? 2S. They arc not Scotch; they are IlalLn. 29. Are those ladies Scotch? 30. No; they are the Italian ladies who came yesterday. 31. What is Marseille? 32. It is one of tin- finest cities in (r third, and the termination of the second in preference to that of the third : — V..r.sit mol irons domain a la chaasc. Ymt ami I mil go hunting te^mrrew, Vuus et lui ircz domain 1 b-swmtsr. / written Hud CcttO lcltre. 3. The above examples will show, that, when a verb has I, sil of them pronouns, or partly pronouns and partly nouns, the words moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead ofje, to, il, lis. A pro- noun recapitulating the other-, may, as in the last example, be placed immediately before the verb [\ 33, (10.) (11.)]. LESSON L XXXI 1 1. 223 4 For further rules on this subject, see § 114 and 115, and also Hjj next lesson. 5. Gener corresponds in signification to the English to trouble, to incommode, to disturb, to be in the way, and to hurt (in speaking of shoes and garments), Se gener means to constrain, or trouble onJs self:— Est-ce-que je vous gene 1 Am I in your way? Resume of Examples. Oil irez-vous, votre frere et vous 1 Lui et moi irons en Angleterre. Vous, elle et lui, vous aclietorez du ble. Eux et moi, nous sommcs fait mal a la tote. Vous et lui. vous devriez vous pre- ter aux cireonstances (se preter). Lui et moi, vous generous sans doute. Ma cousine et moi, nous craignons de vous gener. Je ne me gene jamais chez nes amis. Ne vous genez pas ; mettez-vous a votre aise. Nous n'airuons pas a gener les au- tres. Nous n'aimons pas a. nous gener. Wliere will you go, your brother and you ? He and I will go to England. You, she and he will buy They and I have hurt our heads. You and he should adapt yourselves to circumstances. He and I will without doubt incom^ mode you. My cousin and I fear to be in your way. I am never under constraint with my friends. Be under no constraint ; place your- self comfortably. We do not like to incommode others. We do not like to incommode our- Exercise 103. A perte, at a loss; Nullcment, by no means; Prodigue, prodigal, lav- A profit, with a profit ; Pardon, excuse me ; ish ; Bras, arm; Persist-er, 1. to persist ; Societe, f. company, so- Derang-er, 1. to disturb; Place, f. room ; ciety ; Econome, economical; Tous deux, both. 1. Si nous restions plus longtemps ici, nous craindrions de vous gener. 2. Vous ne nous genez nullement ; votre societe nous est tris agreable. 3. N'avez-vous pas ete trop prodigues, vous et votre fike? 4 Lui et moi aii contraire, nous avons ete tres economes. 5. N'avez-vous pas tort de gener ce monsieur? 6. Nous n'avons nullement envie de le gener. 7. Est-ce-que mon bras vous gene, Monsieur? 8. Non, Monsieur; nous avons assez de place, vous ne me genez pas. 9. Ne devriez-vous pas vous preter aux circon- Btances'? 10. Nous faisons, elle et moi, notre possible pour nous y preter. 11. Ce jeune homme persiste-t-il dans sa resolution 7 12. Nous y persistons, lui et moi. 13. Persistez-vous tous deux a res. ■2- i LESS O N LXX X I V. ier ici .- 14. Nous y persistans tous deux. 15. Cet homme est-i gene dans ses affaires {uncomfortably silua'eJ, badly off)"*. 16. X. Btait gene dans ses affaires il y a un an. 17. Ne vous gonez pas. Monsieur. 18. Je ne me gvna jamais, Monsieur. 19. Est-ce-quo mon frere vous derange ? 20. Non, Monsieur, il ne me derange pas. 21. Je ne voudrais pas vous deranger. 22. Pardon, si je vous de- range. 23. Vous et voire associe avez vendu vos mareliandises a • t moi nous vendons toujours a profit. 25. Votre rotre frere et moi nous avons aehete des mareliandises. 104. I. Di> we incommode you, my brother and I.' 2. No, Sir; you do not incommod .1 to Bee you. 3. Are you not afraid to disturb your friend .' 4. We are afraid to disturb him; lie ur way, Sir .' 6. .No, Sir ; your 1. Will yon and your brother go to Ger- i there, he and I. 9. lie. you [, should write < .10. Should you not, you and your nces ' 1 1. We should do so, if it \. 13. You do . ] ■ J my little boy disturb nrba nobody. 17. -. Be never sells at il at a profit, 90. Do you persj i r r. ralution. Be under do ; i i\ wrong to in- itend to Incommode tWo, M. Wo I out of the I will, perha] . v>. Sir ; wi Do I dia*orb . 1 disturb your ffetherl disturb no i use me, Sir, If I iitiurb mi. Sir j I uoure ou, that your ■ inieal. . . .;v. I. Wbe • boojm eted by ./, >me way la, or the l LESSON L X X X 1 V. 225 Son amour, sa tendresse pour ses His love, his tenderness for his chiir enfants est connue de tout le dren, are known to every bcdy. monde. Vos amis, vos parents, Dieu vous Your friends, your relatives, God recompensera. will reward you. 2. When two or more nouns are united by the conjunction ou, the rerb agrees with the last only : — Charles ou George ecrira a votre Charles or George will write to your ami, friend. 3. When a noun and a pronoun, or two or more pronouns (not be- ing all in the third person), are joined by ou, the verb is put in the plural : — Vous ou moi partirons demain. You or I will go to-morrow. Votre sceur ou vous irez a l'eglise. Your sister or you will go to church Vous ou lui avez pu seuls commettre You or he alone have probably com- cette action. mitted this act. 4. When two nouns are joined by ni repeated, or when ni Vun ni I' 'autre is used as nominative to a verb, the verb is put in the plural, if the two nouns, or the two persons represented by ni fun ni Vaulre, perform or may perform the action together : — Ni l'un ni l'autre ne liront. Neither the one nor the other will read. 5. When, however, only one at a time can perform the action, the verb is put in the singular : — Ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera nomme Neither the one nor the other will be av~ prefet de ce department. ' pointed prefect of that < " Resume of Examples. Ni l'un ni l'autre n'ont trouve le vin bon. L'un et l'autre ont trouve le diner mauvais. Comment se trouvent Messieurs vos freres 1 Ni l'un ni l'autre ne se trouvent bien. L'un et l'autre se trouverent au ren- dezvous. Ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera elu presi- dent. L'un ou l'autre y trouvera a redire. Lui ou vous avez trouve quelque chose a redire a notre conduite. Ni lui ni moi n'avons trouve a redire a la conduite de vos enfants. Neither the one nor tlie other found the wine good. Both found the dinner bad. How do your brothers find themselves ? Neitlier find themselves well. They both found tliemselves at the ren- dezvous. Neither will be elected president. One or the other will find fault with it. He or you have found something to blame in our conduct. Neither he nor I have found any fauti with your children's conduct. Auteur, m. author; Devoir, m. duty ; tScriiure, f. writing ; Exercise 165. Eli-re, 4. ir. to elect; Espos-er, 1. to expose; Iateret, m. interest; 10* Plutot, rather ; Rempl-ir, 2. to fulfil Roti, m. roast meat ; 2!20 LESSON LXXXIV. Secretaire, ra. secretary ; Se trouv-er, l.ref. to find Yciller, 1. to watch; Trouv-er, 1. to find, U ones self; to be prcs-Yic, f. life, like, to fancy; ent. 1. Remplissez-vousbien votre devoir? 2. Nous ne le rcmplissons ni Tun ni 1 'autre. 3. Cherchent*Hs I'un et l'autre a s'exposerl 4. Ni Tun ir l'autre ne cherehent a exposcr leur vie (La Bruyeke). 5. M. votre pere et M"* votre more, se trouvent-ils mieux aujourd'hui ? 6. Ni Fun ni l'autre ne se trouvent mieux. 7. Avez-vous trouve k re* dire a mon eeriture ou a celle do mon secretaire? 8. Je n'ai trouv6 •i redire ni a l'une ni a l'autre. 9. Cot auteur ne trouve-t-il pas a redire a tout? 10. II trouve a redire a tons les livres. 11. Y trouvez-vousquelque chose a redire ? 12. Ni lui ni moi n'y trouvons rien a redire. 13. Lui ou moi, nous veillcrons a vos interets. 14. Ni lui ni moi ne cesserons dc veiller a la conduite de votre fils. 15. Nous y veillerona plutol que d'y trouver ;i redire. 16. Lui et moi nous trouvaines ensemble an rendezvous. 17. Vous y trouverez i'un ou l'autre? 18. Nous nous y trouverons 1'un ou l'autre. 19. L'un ou l'autre sera-t-il ihi president ? 20. Ni I'un ni l'autre ;.i i'lu. 21. Comment trouvez-vous ce rOti 1 22. Je le trouve excellent. 23. Je trouve 00 livrc bon. 2!. Je ne le trouve pas bon 25. Je trouve cela bien fait. 1GC. 1. Bow do you like that book ? 2. Neither my sister nor I like it. 3. Did your brother* find the dinner goodl -1. Both found it or find fault with your conduct! 6. II QOl find fault with it. 7. Neither lie nor my father find fault with my eonduet. 8. Do they both watch over your conduct? '.' They both watch over my conduct and over my interests. io. Mil both fulfilled your duty.' 11. We have fulfilled it. 12. Have you not both criticised my writing .' 13. Neither has criticised it. L4 Do not your two sisters find themselves better to-day 1 15. One finds herself better. Hi. The other does no' find beraalf so well. 17. Do not those ladies find fault with every thing? 18. They find fault with nothing. 19. Will either ! Tret of the Department 1 20. Neither will be elected. 31. How do you like thia bread 1 22. I find it very l: I. r two friendaar* in time at the appointed place ? 24. Neither was there I time. 28. I'" vnii find fault with : 26 I do not find fault wiili it (y). 27. Will you both > Kpose yourselves to this dan- 28. We will not expose o 29. Do you find fault with my secretary's conduct ? 30. I do not find fault with it 81. LESSON LXXXV. 227 Do you fini fault with his writing? 32. I find fault with it; for it is very bad. 33. Will you not watch over my interests ? 34. Mv brother and I will watch over them. 35. We will not cease to watch over vour interests. ! LESSOR LXXXV. LEgON LXXXV. 1. A verb having, as its subject, a general collective noun [§ 3, (6.)] |Teceded by the article, agrees with the noun [§ 115, (1.)] : — La foule des pauvres est grande. The crcncd of the poor is great. 2. A verb preceded by a partitive collective [§ 3, (6.)] takes the number of the noun following the collective, unless attention be par- ticularly directed to the collective itself \_\ 115, (2.)] : — Une foule de pauvres ref oivent A crowd of poor people receive assist- des secours. ance. 3. The words, la plupart, most ; un nombre, a number, &c., and the adverbs of quantity, peu, assez, beaucoup, plus, moins, trop, tant, combien, belong to this class. 4. Rester is often used unipersonally in the sense of to have left. The adverbial expression de reste is often used in the same manner as the English word left: — Ii me reste deux francs. I have two francs left — or literally There remains to me tvjo francs. Nous avons cinquante ecus de reste. We have fifty crowns left. 5. Devenir (2. ir.) to become, with etre as an auxiliary, corresponds in signification to the English to become, followed by of. It is also Englished by to become, or simply to turn : — Qu'est devenu votrc frcre 1 What has become of your brother ? II est en France, ct est devenu He is in France, and has turned laje- avocat. yer. Resume of Examples. Most of my hours are devoted to labor. La plupart de mes heures sont consacrees au travail. La foule des humains est vouee au malheur. La plus grande partie des voyageurs le diseut, et le repctent. Ne vous reste-t>il que cela 1 Voila tout ce qu : il me reste. Je ne sais ce qu'ils sont devenus. Je ne sais ce que vous deviendrez. The mass of mankind is devoted to misfortune. The greatest number of travellers say it, and repeat it. Have you only that left ? That is all that I have left. I do not know what has become of them. J do not know what will become of you 223 LESSON LXXXV. Exercise 167. S'appliqu-er, 1. rcf. to Chcmin, m. way, road; Habile, skilful i r apply; Desol-er, 1. to desolate; Maigre, thin, lean; Apprei.t'i m. apprentice ; Egar-er. 1. to mislay; Naissance, f. birth ; AvouHc Emplettes, f. p. purcha- Rue, f. street ; Bagatelle, f. trifle; , Savant, e, learned. Boiteux, se, lame ; Etat, m. trade ; 1. La plupart de vos parents ne sont-ils pas venus vous voir? 2. Beaucoup sont venus. 3. Que sent devenus les autres ? 4. Je n« Kiurais vous .lire 06 qu'ilB sont devenus. 5. Que deviendra ee jeune homme s'il ne B'applique pasal'etudel 6. Je ne sals pas ee qu'il deviendra, 7. Je Baia qn'il ne deviendra jamais savant. 8. Coinbien ,] t . tV: 9- 11 Qe me reste qu'un franc. 10. Lea vous restera-t-il qtiand VOUSaurez fait vos emplettes? 11. 11 ne me restera qn'nne bagatelle, vi. Cet apprenti est-il devenu habfle dans son .'tat? 13. 11 y est devenn habile. 14. Ce monsieur I'est-U devenu '. 15. II Test devenu. Hi. Savez-vouB ee qne sent devenna cea jea 17. Da Bont , e que Bont devenus mea - »na paa boitevx si I maigre, 22, La ■■.;. La foule s\ eat One nu e de berbarea | • oio \ ens ruinrs, w.z.) ,; jronr friend - 3. Moat of (hem tome learned? ' ' the Amen- i:, but 7. Can you : | ", voa w j ml r brother blind by birth '• n - ya). 13. Are. not most of your I. ■'»•)* DOfa Of your 17. I 21. I shall only ' LESSON LXXXVI. £29 I have made my purchat.-es. 22. What has become of your grami mar 1 23. I have mislaid it. 24. Do you know what has become of my hat ? 25. You have left (laisse) it upon the table. 26. Will not that gentleman become blind? 27. He will not become blind, but lame. 28. Has your son become skilful in his trade ? 29. He has not become skilful in it. 30. What has become of him ? 31. He has lost his way in the wood. 32. Did the crowd lose its way ? 33. Most of the soldiers lost their way. 34. A cloud of locusts (sautereUes) desolated our country. LESSON LXXXVI. LECON LXXXVI. 1. The article, the demonstrative and the possessive adjectives, must be repeated, as before said, before every noun or adjective used substantively, which they determine [§ 80, 93, 21]. 2. The prepositions &, de, and en, are repeated before every word which they govern [§ 141]. 3. The verb quitter, to leave (to quit), is said of persons and places, and also of things in the sense of to abandon, to give up : — Vons avez quitte vos parents et vos You have left your relations ana amis. friends. Nous avons quitte nos etudes. We have discontinued our studies. 4. Laisser, to leave, to let, is generally said of things. It is, how ever said of persons in the sense of to suffer to remain : — Vous avez laisse votre livre sur la You left your book upon tlie table, table. The examples below will illustrate the use of those two verbs. Resume of Examples. Have you not left your house ? N'avez vous pas quitted votre mai- son'? J'ai quitte mon pays et mes parents. J'ai laisse ma biblotheque en Eu- rope. Ne voulez-vous pas laisser votre fils ici 1 3e n'aime pas a le quitter. J'ai laisse votre lettre a son domes- tique. Mon pere m'a laisse cinquante mille francs. Le» avez- vous laisses tranquilles 1 I have left my country and ? iuation I left my library in Europe. Will you not leave your son he?e? I do not like to quit him. I left your letter with his servant. My father left me fifty thousand francs. Have you let them alone ? 230 LESSON L XXX VI. Jc leur a» lausc le cliamp libre. Ce malade a quitt>; le lit. Votre frere a quitte le barrcau. Je vous laisserai ce cbapeau a ce piix. / ha ve left them a free choice {fret Tiiat sick man has left his bed. Your brother has left the bar. I will let you hare that hat at thai price. Exercise 1C9. A bon compte, cheap ; Mauvais, e, bud ; Pension, f. boarding' Carte, P. card ; Afoina, less; fipee, f SWOrd, army (fig- Noyau, m. fruit-stone ; Portier, in. porter ; uratively). Pounpioi. why; Prix, m. price ; Habitude, € habit; Pavie, m. clingstone- Robe, t.g oton ,• Jugc, m. peach; Service, in.; service, army. 1. Vos oncles, vos cousins ct vos ncveuw ont-ila quitte le coin. Dense) 2. Da ont quitte le commerce, ct Boot devenua medecina. 3. Le capitaine (I. n'a-t-il pas quitte le Bcrvice .' i. II a quitte la France, mais il n'a pas quitte le Berviee, 5. OH avez-voua laiase voire Rial 6. Je I'ai laiase dana one pension. 7. Est-il tropjeune pour quitter leal 8. II est trop jeune j il n'a que douze ana. 9. Aquiaveic- vous laiase votre carte de vieitel 10. .Ic I'ai laiaaee chez le portier. 11. Poarquoi ce le lai - parler? 12. Parce qu'il eat temps gne noua voua quittions. 13. BdEe permettez-voua de lui communiquer L Je roue laiase le champ libre .1 eel egard, 15. Ce jeune homme n'a-t-il pas quitte aea mauvaisea habitudes? ig. 11 lea ■ 17. ML L u'a-:-iI pas quitte la robe pour I'ep'c? 18. Oui. '! r: il n'est pi : ■• eapitaine. 19. < tea p.'ehes cjuit- tent-ellea facilement le 10. -Non, Monsieur; cc aont dee pa. ir cinquante franca. 83. A quel pri.v me le Je voua le laiaaerai pour dix francs. 24 J'' \ous le laiaae a b< a compte; j'' ne aauraia vuus le laiaaer a BOIBR 1 TO. l. The BOB,daughti Paria 2, My father, and sister, |ave left me here. 3. I>o you like to leave your country.' 4. I do Dot like to leave my frienda and country. parents do not like to here; I am too young. & Why your brother let his son Bpei '. I. ''7. I.,.' 7. Becauae he haa nothing to aay. B. Have you let him alone.' 9, I have let him 10. Why do you not let me alone ! II. 1 will let them alone. 19 Rat your friend lefl his bed! 13. He has not ye! left his bed he is yet very siek. 14 Has Captain G. left the army? 15. He has not left the army. 16. Has not that gentleman left the army for the bar! 17. He has n;>t left the army. 18. My friend has left the bar. 19. A*. LESSON LXXXVI I. 231 What price will you let me have this silk ? 20. 1 will let you have it at two francs a yard. 21. Can you not let me have it for less? 22. I let you have it cheap. 23. Will you let me have that book for twenty franqs. 24. I will let you have it for twenty-two. 25. I could not let you have it for less. 26. With whom (d qui) have you left my book] 27. I left it with your sister. 28. Why did you not leave it w th my servant ? 29. Because he had left your house. 30. Do you like to leave your friends? 31. I do not like to leave them. 32. Where , have you left your book ? 33. I left it at my father's. 34. Has that merchant given up commerce ? 35. He has not given it up. 36. These peaches do not part easily from the stone ; they are clingstone peaches. LESSON LXXXVIL LEgON LXXXVII. 1. The nominative pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, elles, must be repeated, when the first verb of the sentence is negative and the second affirmative, when the verbs are in different tenses, and when the different propositions are connected by conjunctions other than et, ou ni, mais [§ 99. 2.] : — II ne lit pas ; il ecrit. He does not read; lie writes. Ellc ne viendra pas ; elle est partie. She will not come ; she is gone. 2. The pronouns of the third person are often omitted before the second verb in cases not coming within the above rule. The other nominative pronouns are also, sometimes, omitted. We should, however, not advise the student to omit the latter pronouns. It is always correct to repeat the nominative pronouns. 3. The student will bear in mind, that the objective pronouns must always be repeated. 4. Connaitre a answers to the English expression, to know by : — Je le connais a. sa demarche. I know him by his walk (carriage). 5. Connaitre de nom, de visage, de vue, mean, to know by name, by sigh'., 6. Se connaitre a. quelque chose, or en quelque chose, corresponds in signification to the English expression; to be a judge of something. Vous vous eonnaissez en pierreries. You are a judge of precious stones. Resume of Examples. Je le connais, je l'aime, et je lui rends justice. Gresset. tl s'ecoute, il se plait, il s'adonise, il s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. / knmo him, love him, and do justice to him. He listens to himself, is pleased with himself, adorns himself, loves him- 232 LESSON' LXXXVII. A qnoi connaissez-vous cc mor sieur 1 Je le connais a son habit noir. Je le connais de roe. J'ai reconnu ma mure a la voix. A qnoi vous eonnaissez-vous ? Je me connais en merchandises. Je ne my ootmais pas. II ne s'y commit point du tout. matt mieux que moi. Jo my esamala anal Men qua lui. By what do you know that genlne* man ? J know him by his black coat, m by si? hi. ij mother by her voice. lame I (of t'len). II ~ it (of them). 'vttcr judge of it (of them,), than I. I am as good a judge of it (of them) as he. " Exercise 171. ''is of alt kinds; Grain, m. gram; Blond, e int, m. manufac-Orftvtt,m.geldmit*, turer ; O.-uvre. f. Oherelnre, t hen ; Poaaie, £ jm*#jh hair ; Chevenx, m. p. hair; Qra l. Ne recoi - point voire amiel 2. Je la reoonnak a aaehevelnre blonde, B. I qnoi r ona eette demoiselle 1 4. Je la i i di marohe graciense. 5. Yaurie/.-vous point connii vnire ami a la i inn, 7. ft L'omvtc LaF ■ : mn s . Ne le reconnaltrex-vooe point Itrai i". Ci I oi-f ne i . oonnah point ilu tout I ; qne leforgeron! 18, J<- aVyoonnaia a qne lai 11 Ne voua connaiasez-vona point en 15. I M eoiinait- q .' it. II se connait beaueonp -... qu'a celolei 18. Ne connaic ■ ee mon- si.-nr a aea geetea veiiementa 1 19. Je le connais & -os ohevetu ,'./ your name | ' a (ait connall oua ferona-noua p naltrel _:'•. Vqub vGus ferez connnitre, 24. lis se (eront eoajiattvi par leura rertua I i 72. I. |>0 yon no! !;•'■ tl tmai _'. Jf< -. N r; [ 1 now him bv his large (grand) hat. 3. ; by your walk. 5. my Friend by I \ . - : [ j ttize him by his b know him well I s. I know bim by sight, bn( I r spoUan LESSON LXXXVI1I. 233 to hira. 9. Are you a judge of iron ? 10 No, Sir; the blacksmith is a judge of iron. 11. By what will you ^now your book ? 12. 1 shall know it by those marks. 13. Have you not known your friend by her voice? 14. No, Madam; I knew her by her light hair. 15. Have you told your name? 16. I have not told my name. 17. Did you know your sister's friend by her curled hair? 18. I knew her by it. 19. Is the merchant a good judge of cloth ? 20. Heis-abet ter judge than I. 21. Is he a better judge of it than the manufac tu er ? 22. He is quite as good a judge as he. 23. Is not the gold- smith as good a judge of precious stones as you? 24. He is a better judge of them than I. 25. Of what are you a judge? 26. I am a judge of nothing. 27. Are not your sisters good judges of poetry ? 28. They are not the least judges of it. 29. Do you not know that young .ady by her dress (robe) ? 30. I know her by her graceful carriage. 31. Have they made themselves known ? 32. They have made themselves known by their merit (merite). 33. Is not the workman known by his work ? 34. The workman is known by his work 35. He is a judge of it. LESSON LXXXVllI. LEQON LXXXVIH. 1. Quelque, whatsoever, however, some, any, followed by a noun tanes the form of the plural. It is invariable, when it is followed by an adjective or an adverb [§ 97, (1.) 2. 3.] : — Quelques livres que vous ayez. Whatever books you may have. Quelque bons qu'ils soient. However good they may be. 2. Quel que, followed by a verb, is written as two words, the first {quel) agreeing in gender and number with the nominative of that verb [§ 97, (1.) 1.] :— Quelles que soient vos vertus. Whatever your virtues may be. 3. The above examples show that quelque — que and quel — que govern the subjunctive. 4. Tout meaning entirely, quite, nothing but, though an adverb, varies through euphony before a feminine word commencing with a consonant or an h aspirate : L'esperance, toute trompeusc qu'elle Hope, deceitful as it is, serves at least est, sert au moins a nous mener a to conduct us to the termination of la fin de la vie par un chemin life by an agreeable road. agreable. (La Bruyere.) 234 LESSON LXXXVIII. 5. The \ntrd gre signifying consent, will, meaning, cf-c. forms 4 number of idioms : — Jehii sais [savoir, 3. ir.] bon gre de / am thankful to him (i. c. owe him cette action. good-will) for thai action. D uous suit mauvais gre de cela. He is displeased ictlJi tusfor thai. Resume of Examim.es. Ne lc fcrez-vons p.os dc bon gro 1 II sVsi marie OODtTO le gre de ses parents. 8a cli .-velure voltige au grede vent. Je sals mauvais grf ; \ votre frerede vouloir bo 1 affaires, Jc lui en saia be me Banrex pas mauvais grt, bJ je ne rotu ecria pas. C'est a 1110:1 gre le meilleur enfant du luonde. 117// you tint do it willingly? If married against the will of his parents. His hair flutters at the will of the wind. I am displeased with your brother for with mil affairs. I am thankful to him, for it. I h<> i>c thnl 11. hi will not Ik displeased with vie, if Ida ujiI write to ijou. my (Minting, tlic Lest chila in the : Exercise it.:. Bon gre. mal gre, willing Men-er, 1 . ; . m. srerr/ ; or not : - lenoe, m. silence ; Chambrc, I Suite, f. consequent! 1 1. to keep; Ofl Voler, 1. tojlij. Lit, 111. bed 1 . i • re- in spite ofi 06 < 1 n'il a ilit ? 2. Je no lui en nil aucun mauvais gre (VOLTAIRE). 3. Ne me saurioz- l.oii gre si je voiis men. lis avec nidi .' I. Je VOW en saurais lemeilleu 1a pas bon gre laira. As you II ne me plait pea d'y aller. I or plea* me to go then. Que vow plait-fl ? What would you pUosj to 4 ■1. Aii plaisir de vous revoir, au revoir, adieu, josqrfaa revoir, mean till I have (he pleasure of seeing you again, till I see you again, &c. Mi Of KXAMI'LES. Qu'aurai-je le ptaWrda vou- demandera] uumorceau de mbon. Vous oflrirai-je un morcM • "r; Je prendrai de preference una aue •[<• volatile. Je \..ii> aonhail . trer. To irhat shall I have the pleasure of hflping you ? ■i <>r / 'rill trouble you ft hiim. S / .a slice of this roust meat ? I 8 ■ ; I would prefer a wing of that fowl. Is not the dinner yet on the table ? J irish you go I have wished the lady a good tnorn- II tn to sit dawn. idncss to walk Prt-er I •i in. hnm; aerciment,m Att.n.l • i: Bonilli, m. boUt sti 4 S-.it : ;v. suf. r. rdrix, f. pari be, f. slice. i. MuM-iiMir, c|u':nir:ii.jf !<• plaiair de Tooa aervirl -. Je tone do* manderai one tranche «!»• oejambon. .'5. Je voni prie de aetvir eea i je vi. us demander an moroeea de oe boafllil ".iTrirai-ie line tranche de ce rotil t;. Jevonawdi 1 irj j'en ai roffiaamment 7. M near da vous tervir ane alle de cette perdrix .' 8. J'' vona ■ ir; jeprendraidepreferenei B Monsieur, vous i-nverrai-je de la aonpel 10. Madame, je v. .us pria i MadameieaHaj, II. 1 lemanderai aprea. IB. Jean, prA- i Monsieur. rumei ftont di LESSON XC. 237 14. Monsieur, je suis bien aise que vous les trouviez bons. 15. Mon- sieur, ne voulezwous pas vous asseoir? 16. Mille remerciments, Monsieur, mon pere m'attend a la maison. 17. Ne leur avez-vous pas souhaite le bonjour? 18. Je leur ai souhaite le bon soir. 19. Leur avez-vous dit adieu ? 20. J'aidit adieu a mon frere. 21. J'ai pris conge d'eux. 22. Les avez-vous pries d'entrer ? 23. Je les en ai pries. 24. Messieurs, on a servi. 25. Ayez la complaisance de vous mettre ici. Exercise 1*76. 1 . Madam, to what shall I help you ? 2. I will trouble you for a slice of that ham. 3. Shall I send you a wing of this fowl ? 4. No, Sir, I thank you. 5. I thank you, Sir (sHl vous plait, Monsieur). 6. Sir, shall I have the pleasure of helping you to a slice of this ham ? 7. I thank you, Sir, I would prefer a slice of the partridge. 8. Shall I offer you a little of this boiled meat ? 9. I thank you, Sir ; I have some. 10. Madam, shall I send you a little of this soup? 11. Much obliged to you, Sir [see No. 16, in the above exercise]. 12. Sir, will you have the goodness to help this young lady? 13. With much pleasure, Sir. 14. John, take this soup to the gentleman. 15. These ortolans are delicious. 16. I am very glad that you like them. 17 Is the dinner on the table ? 18. No, Sir; it is not yet on the table. 19. It is too early. 20. Does it please you to go there ? 21. It does not please me to go to his house ; but I will go, if you wish it. 22. Shall I go with you ? 23. As you please. 24. Will not your friend sit down ? 25. He is much obliged to you ; he has not time to-day. 26. Have you wished your friend a good morning ? 27. I wished him a good evening. 28. Have you not bid him farewell ? 29. I have bid him farewell. 30. Have the goodness to sit down here. 31. I have taken leave of them. 32. I have taken leave of all my friends. 33. Madam, have the goodness to walk in. 34. We are much obliged to you, Sir. 35. Our father is waiting for us at home. LESSON XC. LEQON XO. 1. The verb tenir [2. ir.], to hold, often corresponds in signification to the English verb to keep ; tenir un hotel, to keep a hotel ; tenir table ouverte, to keep opt,i table ; tenir sa chambre propre, &c, to keep one's room clean ; tenir la porte, les fenetres ouvertes, to keep the door, the windows open ; tenir les yeux ouverts, femes, to keep one's eyes opened, 238 LESSON X C. shut ; tenir la t£te droite, &c., to keep one's head upr'.ght ; tenir sa parole, to keep one's word ; tenir conipagnie a quclqu'un, to stay 01 remain with some or any one. 2. Tenir un langage singulier, tenir des propos . . ., des discours . . ., would be rendered in English by to make use of singular language to use peculiar expressions, to advance things, tiic. Ce jei.ne liommc tient des propos That young man says foolish things. inst-:.- 3. Tenir is also used in the sense of being attached to, to le tena- cious of: — Je tiens a mon argent, a la vie. / value (i. e. hold to) viy money, in* Jc tiens a mon opinion. 1 am tenacious of my opinion. 4. Tenir is also used ofa color which 16 fast or not: — Cotte conlent tiendra on ne tiendra This color is fast (i. e. holds) or not. pas. 5. Fain tenir is used in the sense of to foncard, to send: — Failes-liii tenir cet argent, cettc Forward him (his money, this ktlcr. kllre. lenir, or sVn tenir, conjugated reflectively, may often be rendered by to remain, to abide by, to be satisfied with : — II bo tienl debonl U it mains standing, seated. Je n'en tiena a rotre opii I am satisfied with your opinion. MPLK8. iri un hob 1 superb©. ; lite fill.- lie liellt J«13 Sa ebambri Wen propra Pourqnol tesca-vona lee portcs ou- 11 i.iit si chaud epic n«us tenona toutea lea fenotrea ouvertea. Tenez In hate droits et lea yens CUVelts. Ponrqaoi ne tenes-Tona pa parole ! Tene/. compngnic a votre sour; elle eat malade. 1 ami tient <}>rrb hotel. Yiiu r lit . I /.rip her room 1 1 i iii i u keep the doors open ? It is so warm that ire keep all the win- i loir} . r head upright and your pen. H you not b tp your word? sister ; she is sick. Your fiit ml makes use of very single You use very light Inmrua^e. Lui avea-vona (kit tenir ce livrcl A quo! voua en tiendrez-vona \ Je in en dendral ;i cc que j'ai dit. ponrqno) M bVant-U tonjoun de- bout 1 H ' '.;?i that look? 1 1 teisiemt 1 shall abide bit ir'iat I halt said. Why ■lots he always remain LESSON zc. 239 L'incredule s'en tiendra-t-il au pre- | Will tlie unbeliever be satisfied with sent, qui doit fiuir demain 1 the present, whuh is to end to-mor- Massillon. I row? Exercise 177. Cocher. ra. coachman; Gens, pi. people; Recommand-er, 1 to Pebout standing; Indispose, e, indisposed ; recommend; Defend- re, 4. to forbid; Insolent, e, insolent; Regard-er, 1. io look; De pres, closely ; Lieu, place ; Rue, street -, En dehors, out, outside; Malade, sick ; Sav-oir, 3. ir. to know; S'enrhumer, 1. ref. to get Parfaitement, perfectly ; Vie, life. a cold; Prcfer-er, 1. to prefer ; 1. Quel hotel votre frere tient-il? 2. II tient l'hotel de l'Europe, rue de . . . 3. Votre petit garcon se tient-il bien propre ? 4. II se tient bion propre. 5. A quoi vous en tiendrez-vous ? 6. Je nren tiendrai a ce que je vous ai dit. 7. Ne savez-vous pas a quoi vous en tenir? 8. Je sais parfaitement a. quoi m'en tenir. 9. Pourquoi vous tenez- vous debout? 10. Parceque nous n'avons pas le temps de nous asseoir. 11. N'avez-vous point defendu a ces jeunes gens de tenir de tela propos? 12. Je le leur ai defendu. 13. Votre cocher n'a-t-il pas tenu un langage bien insolent? 14. N'avez-vous pas peur de vous enrhumer, en tenant les portes ouvertes? 15. Nous prefererions les tenir fermees. 16. Votre maitre vous recommande-t-il de tenir la tetedroite? 17. II me recommande de tenir les pieds en dehors. 18. Pourquoi votre ami ne vous tient-il pas compagnie? 19. Sa soeur est indisposee; il est oblige de rester avec elle. 20. Votre oncle ne vous a-kil pas tenu lieu de pere? 21. II m'a tenu lieu de pere et de mere. 22. Regarderez-vous de plus pres a cette affaire? 23. Non, Monsieur; je m'en tiendrai a ce que j'en sais. 24. Ce medecin ne tient-il pas a son opinion ? 25. II y tient plus qu'il ne tient a. la vie de ses malades. Exercise 178. 1. Does that gentleman keep open table? 2. He keeps a hotel in Paris. 3. Why do you keep the windows open ? 4. We keep them oper. because we are too warm. 5. Has not your friend kept his word, 6. He has kept his word; he always keeps his word. 7. Have you :iot told your scholar to keep his head upright? 8. I have toll him to keep his head upright and his eyes open. 9. Why do you not stay with your sister? 10. Because I have promised to go to my cousin's this morning. 11. Have you forbidden your little boy to make use of these expressions? 12. I have forbidden him. 13. Does he make use of insolent language? 14. He does not. 15. What cviU be your decision? 16. I will abide by what I told your father. 17 240 LESSON XCI. Have you forwarded that money to your friend ! 18. 1 have not yet forwarded it to him. 19. Will you forward it to him to-morrow? 20. I will forward it to him, if I have an opportunity. 21. Why do you not keep standing ! 22. Because I am weary. 23. Do you think that the color of your eout is fast .' 24. I think that it is fast; it {elk) appears very good. 25. Will you not look closely into your brother's affairs ? 96. I shall not look closely into them. 27. I will be satisfied with vour opinion. 18. Are you n"t tenacious of your opinion J n,, j ' am ,,„, | , s L) f it. 30. Docs not your physician ad- here too tenaciously to his opinion .' 31. He adheres to it. 32. Does that lady hold your mother's place ! 33. She is a mother to me. 34. Our cou-in is a father to us. 35. That physician does not value the life of his patient. LESSON KCL LEgON XCL 1. The v.-rb .'ire forms a gnat many idioms be s ides those which already raeatioaed : tea en retard, to !»• brie, /« fcrrj ; etre trees peine de, toes uneasy about ; :.inin pour, to U M ihc way ■ ■irant TVftWt, quarrel or I,. .17. ;,. . is used in the sense of appar- tenir, t» behng. It is alao employed in the aense of to aahefl caw . tnthe v th'' prrpositioiw/e before another verb: — Est-ce a ' 'rast (male) re proi ' I BJWB him ? C'est a. vous d parler. // U fOW turn to speak. 3. V etre H often Bead for to be at home, to be in: — Votrc pi re y I I ur father at home ? WLK8. Nft sommes-nous pas do trop id 7 Nous m Hmmea pea U tn-nts. N»us Bommee au coorant de tout ccU. I - 4 in thr wiy here? II ftti terms with Cadran, to., face, dial; Regl-er, 1. to regulate; clock; Cass-er, 1. to break; Repetition, (montre a) Vite, quick, quickly. Double, double; f. repeater; 1. N'avez-vous pas une montre a. repetition? 2. J'ai une montre cTor, a double boite. 3. Va-t-elle mieux que la mienne 1 4. Elle ne va pas bien, elle retardo d'une heure par jour. 5. Est-ce une montre a. secondes ? 6. C'est une montre a. secondes et a cadran d'or. ?. Votre horloge ne sonne-t-elle pas'? 8. Elle np. sonne plus, le timbre en est casse. 9. Pourquoi ces pendules ne s'accordent-elles paa? 244 LESSON XOIL 10. Pareequ'j Tune avance et l'aulre retarde. 11. PJTavez vous point Basse It- grand ressort dc votrc montre ? 12. Je I'ai easel en lu re- montant. 13. Votre pendule est elle juste 1 14. Oui, Monsieur ello est juste; je viens de la faire regler. 15. La sonuerie de «.otte pendule est-eile deranged 1 16. La Bonnerie en est derangeeet lo timbre en est ft-1 '-. 17. La petite aiguille de ma montre plate est 18. Le balancierde votre horloge n'est pas droit? 19. Do combien votre pendule avanee-t-elle ? 20. El!e avanee de Otnq mi- nutes par jour. 91. La perfection dune pendule n'est pasd'aller vitc, :rc regies (DbulLB). 22. Votre montre s'arrete-t-clle souvent? 26. Eile s'arrctc tous les matins. 2-1. Votre pendule b'est arretee. Eurcui 1S2. 1. Does your watch gain or lose? 9. It does not lose; it goes very well. 3. It loeefl twenty-live minutes a day. 4. Dees vmir clotk gain mueli ? 5. It gains one hour a week. 6, How much does your ton's gold watch lose? 7. It loses much ; it loses one boor in (en) twenty-four (ASttnet). B. I have put it forward one hour. 9. I will put it hack half an hour. 10. Dott not your clock strike the half hour '. 11. No, Sir; it only strikes the hour. 12. Have vou (0fg9tt6fl to wind up your repeater 1 13. I have forgot- ten tu wind it up, and it has stopped. 1 I. Il your silver watch out ;t of order, and it will be necessary to have it cleaned. |& What o'clock is it by you.- watch .' 17. It is three O'clock by my watch; hut it gains. 18. How much docs it gain a week? 19. It gains more than five minutes a day. 90. layottf watch ritfht ? 91. No, Sir; il is not right; it is nut of order. 22. u r clock strike right 1 98. It does not strike rij,'lit ; tho striking part is out of order. 94 Have you broken the band* of your clock ? 25. I have broken the hour hand and the dial. 26. lias the clock strnek three? 27. It has struck twelve. 28. It has ■topped. 99. Does' it stop every morning 1 30. It does not stop every morning ; it stops every OTOning. 31. Vour watch does not cgree with mine. 32. Have you not broken the main-spring of your Mother's Watch 1 33. He has broken il iii winding it up. 31. M? brollii r's watch is right ; he has had it cleaned and regulated- LESSON XCIII. 245 LESSOR xcm. lecon xcm 1. Se demettre [-1. ir.] le bras, le poignet, corresponds to Die English expression to dislocate one's arm, wrist, to put ones arm, wrist out of joint. In this sense se demettre takes no preposition before its object: — Je me suis doinis l'epaule. I have dislocated my shoulder. 2. Se demettre, used in the sense of to resign, to give up, takes the preposition de before its object : — 11 s'est demis dc sa place. lie has resigned his place. 3. S'emparer, to seize, to lay hold of, takes de before its object : — II s'est empare de ce cliapean. He seized upon this hat. 4. S'empecher, to prevent one's self, to forbear, to help, takes de be- fore another verb : — Je ne puis m'empecher de rire. Je ne puis m'en empecher. 5. S'inquieter answers to the English expression, to be or become uneasy, to trouble one's self; it takes de before its object, be this ob- ject noun, pronoun or verb : — Je ne m'inquicte pas de cela. lam not uneasy about that. 6. Se comporter answers to the expressions to behave, to deport one's self. 7. S'attendre means to await, to expect. It takes d before its ob- ject - Je ne m'attendais pas a. cela. / did wl expect thai. Je ne ra'y attendais pas. 1 did not expect, it. Resume of Examples. I cannot help laughing 1 cannot help doing so. Vcni.s etcs-vous demis l'epaule 1 Je me la suis demise [L. 45. 2. § 135]. Cette demoiselle s'est demis le poi- gnet. Qui le lui a rcmis 1 Le Dr. L. a rcmis lepaule a ma soeur. Vous etes-vous demis de votrc place 1 Je men suis demis [(> 135. 7]. Nous ne pouvions nous empecher de souiire pendant ce veeit. Vous etes-vous empare de ce livre'? Je m'en suis empare. De quoi vous intpiietez-vous 1 Have you dislocated your shoidikr? I dislocated it. That young lady dislocated her tens' , Wlio set it for Iter? Dr. L. set my sister's shoulder. Have you resigned your situation? I have resigned it. We could not help smiling during that narration. Have you seized that book? I laid hold of it. Why do yon trouble y out self? 246 LKSSON X C 1 1 T. Jc no m'inqui&te i means. 188. A l'avenir, in future t Ganche, Paysan, m. peasant i Pruase, P. Prussia ; Monde (tout le 8 ur m. .-'"//,• body; Traitemeat, in. trrat- auch ; Villa, i E l. \, oua pas demis 2. Je •■ me I'etaia pal demis; je me l 1 Ami rique, voua dfV : i'en demottre I d< mis de la aienne ? 6. II v a mi moia qu'il L\ anemi B'est-il empare de la vilk- ? 6. II >Vn eat empare. comportera-t41 in parvil tr titemenl de aa • omme il Pant 15. PourqnoJ .a empe- i empare- i ]•> \ otre i remia le pi 89. Le Dr. (i. le Id l« btaa : atin I 24. 1 I li j .11 . 6. 1 rm .' 7. I le i d DV n. I I. Will not some one lay hold of your tot, it' you leavi LESSON XOIV. 247 one will lay hold of it. 16. How has your son behaved this morning! 17. He behaved very well. 18. He always behaves properly. 19. Do you not trouble yourself uselessly (inutilement) ? 20. I do not trouble myself at all (du lout). 21. Did you expect such treat- ment from (de la part de) your son 1 22. I did not expect such treatment from him (de sa part). 23. Does that young lady behave well towards her mother? 24. She behaves well towards every body. 25. Will you behave better in future ? 26. We will behave well. 27. Have you broken your fmger (doigl) ? 28. I have broken my thumb (pouce). 29. Could you help going to sleep (de dormir) 1 30. We could not help smiling. 31. My sisters could not help laughing. 32. Why are you uneasy? 33. Because (parceque) my son does not behave well. 34. Did your father expect to be well treated ? 35. He expected to be treated properly. 36. We did not expect such an answer. LESSON XCIV. LEQON XC1V. 1. N'importe, an ellipsis of il rCimporte, answers to the English expression " no matter" it does not matter, never mind : — Donnez-moi un livre, n'importe le Give me a book, no matter which. quel. 2. Qu'importe ? answers to the English phrase what matter ? What does it mailer 1 When that expression is followed by a plural subject the verb importer is put in the plural : — Que nous important leurs mur- What do we care for their murmurs 7 mures 1 3. N'est-ee pas ? corresponds to the English expressions, is it not < is lie not, n board; 9* S*h*t LESSON XCV. 251 Perd-re. 4. to lose • Reven-ir, l.ir. to return; Voyager, 1. [§ 49.] ?o Easseiubl-er. 1. to 5/-J% Salon, m. drawing-room; travel; together; ' Serv-ir, 2. ir. to serve; Terre, £. land, sliore. 1. Avez-vous rasseinble beaucoup de monde chez vous? 2. II n'est venu que peu de monde. 3. A quelle heure servira-t-on le diner au- j o u ra 'h ui ? 4. On le servira des que notre monde sera venu. 5. Le ( apitaine a-t-il tout son equipage a bord? 6. Non, Monsieur, il a en- roye du monde a. terre. 7. Vos gens se lcvent-ils de bonne heure *■ 8, II faut que tous les jours j'eveille tout mon monde (Moliere). 9 Lcs Moscovites perdirent trois fois plus de monde que les Sueclois (Voltaire). 10. Ou est Madame votre mere? 11. Elle est dans le salon, il y a du monde avec elle (company). 12. Tout le monde peut voyager com me moi (X. de Maistre). 13. Ainsi va le monde. 14. Elle attend pour quitter le monde, que le monde l'ait quittee (Flechier). 15. Vos gens sont-ils revenus de la campagne? 16. Nous attendons nos gens aujourd'hui. 17. Y a-t-il iciune societe de gens de lettres ? 18. Non, Monsieur; il n'y a qu'une societe de gens de robe. 19. Connaissez-vous ces bi'aves gens'? 20. Je crois que ce sont des gens d'epee. 21. Tels sont les gens aujourd'hui. 22. Telles gens, tels patrons (La Bruyere). 23. Tous mes gens sont malades. 24. II faut savoir s'accommoder de toutes gens (L'Academie). 25. Q,ue pouvez-vous avoir a. demeler avec de telles gens ? Exercise 183. 1. Are there many people at your brother's? 2. There are not many people there. 3. Does that young man slander every body ? 4. He slanders nobody. 5. Have you brought many people with you ? 6. We have brought but few people with us. 7. Is there com- pany with your mother? 8. There is no company with her. 9. Who has told you that ? 10. Every body says so. 11. Is the company come ? 12. The company is not yet come. 13. Has your mother discharged twc servants (domesliques) ? 14. She has discharged all her people. 15. Do you know those people? 16. I know them very well; they are very worthy people. 17. When he travels, he stops always with good people. 18. Are there foolish people here? 19. There are foolish people everywhere (partout'). 20. Do you awake your people every morning ? 21. Yes, Sir; I must awake them everyday. 22. What can your brother have to settle with those people ? 23. They are the best people in the world. 24. Were there many people at church this morning? 25. There were not many people there. 26. Are your people sick? 27. Yes, Sir; all my people are sick. 28. 259 J.ESSON XCTT. There is here a society of learned men. 29. There are in Paris Kfrera] societies of lawyers. 30. What worthy people ! Si. What good people ! 3J. 1> . . 33. We ox peet them this • 3j. lias your cap- . his crew o;; I XCVL LE£ON XCVI. - inanimate, . halve pronoun .:- V a fin* tree; its fruit is excel- vlvit, the inanimate possessor \- the subject of the 1 I.)] : — .-.'-nil/. It -- . rtmeaoa i before pronoun f/:— J ' 1 .^.h, to make one's self - '■'■ one's self. So Udre. ref, .' -nous. '.".gue). Let us I U iacs. ic.hv • 'at j mill. Cent. :!j trees '■ ulitstr LESSON XCTI. 253 Entendez-vous bien le latin 1 Cet avouc n'entend rien aux affaires. II ne s'y entend pas. Je lui ai donnc a entendre, qu'il etait dc trop ici. Qu'ente.idez-vous par la.1 II y avait tant de bruit, que nous n'avons pu nous faire entendre. Taisezle premier, ce quo vous vou- lez qu'on taise. Latin Maxim. Pourquoi nevous taisez- vous pas'? Nous l'avons fait taire. Do you understand Latin well ? That attorney has no knoiclcdge of business. He is not expert in this. I gave him, to understand thai he was in the way here. What do you mean by that ? There was so much noise, that we could not make ourselves heard. -Keep to yourself that which you would wish to have kepi secret. Why are you not silent? We made him hold his tongue (si- lenced him). Exercise 189. Agrement, m. pleasure; Chirurgien, m. surgeon; Mancbe, f. sleeve ; Avantage, na. advan- Consent-ir, 2. ir. to con- Mel-er, 1. to mix ; tage ; sent ; Muet, te, dumb, mute ; Basque, f. skirt of a Court, e, short; Pays, m. country, coat ; Force, f. force, power ; Raison, f. reason ; Brave, worthy, Fort, very, Reuss-ir, 2. to succeed. 1. Est-ce un habit neuf que votre fils porte? 2. C'est un habit neuf, le drap en est tres fin. 3. Les manches n'en sont elles pas trop courtes ? 4. Je crois que les manches en sont trop courtes et les basques troplongues. 5. La campagne n'a-t-elle pas ses avantages? 6. J'aime la campagne ; j'en connais les avantages. 7. Paris a ses agrements. 8. J'aime Paris; j'en connais les agrements. 9. Ce chi- rurgien s'entend-il a. la medecine? 10. II n'y entend rien du tout. 11. Entendez-vous la medecine. 12. Je ne m'y entends pas. 13. Je ne l'entends pas. 14. Je n'y entends rien. 15. Avez-vous reussi a vous faire entendre ? 16. Nous n'y avons pas reussi. 17. Mon voi- sin est un brave homme et je m'entends fort bien avec lui. 18. Fahe taire certaines gens est un plus grand miracle que de faire parler les muets (Balzac). 19. Savez-vous de quel pays est cet homme? 20. II tait son pays et sa naissance. 21. Par la force de la raison, elle apprit l'art de parler et de se taire (Flechier). 22. Voulez- vous vous taire impertinente, vous venez toujours meler vos imper tinerces a toutes choses (MoliEee). 23. Qui se tait consen (Proverb). Exercise 190. 1. Have you a very good garden ? 2. We have a very large one, but its soil (tsrre, f.) is not good. 3. Is your brother's coat new? 4. He has a new coat, but its sleeves are too short. 5. Are not ita ekirts too long? 6. No, Sir; its skirts are too short. 7. Have you Hot heard that preacher (predicateur) ? 8. There was so much noise, 254 LESSON X C VI I. that I could not hear him. 9. Docs not the country have its plea Bores'! 10. The country has its pleasures. 11. Does not your bro. ther like the city ! 12. He likes the country : he know s i;s pleasures. 13. What does your brother mean by that .' 14. lb means what lie jrour father expert in business ? 16. My father has no je of business man understand Engp lish well? 18. lie understands French i rery well. 19. ler is an honest i well with him. 21. Does that young man conceal hii and his country. '23. licine ! 24. He does not under- ilent, my child. that child I Will you '■ What hai him to under- ■ him to undi its charm*, silenced him. 31. T.-'.l hio ) told him lent lent VII. I VII. nir. - I M.lcre.l int" ■ rendered by the | r bj the , ' pronoun. T ! 84.] i . ■ | qualities, a verbal and number of ■ R 4. The verbs entendre, to hear ; (aire, to cause, (•> make ; laisser, to let.. LESSON XCVII. 255 &c, followed by another verb completing their meaning, are not in French separated from that verb. In the corresponding sentences in English, the two verbs are usually separated by other words: — J'ai laisse tomber mou couteau. J'ai entendu dire cela. I have let my knife fall {dropped). I have heard that said. Resume of Examples. Je connais cles personnes dormant d'un sommeil si profond, que le bruit de la foudre ne les reveille- rait pas. Beschee. Les eaux dormantes sontmeilleures pour les chevaux que les eaux vives. Buffon. Nous avons trouve cette femme mourante. Cette femme mourant dans la crainte de Dieu, ne craignait point la mort. On est heureux en se contentant de peu. Avez-vous laisse passer ce voleur 1 Je l'ai laisse passer. Pourquoi avez-vr»u3 fait faire un habit 1 Je n'ai pas fait faire d'habit. J'ai lasse tomber quelque chose. Lui avez-vous entendu dire cela 1 Je le lui ai entendu dire. Je l'ai entendu dire. Je l'ai entendu dire a ma scenr. Iknoio persons, sleeping (who sleep so profoundly, that the noise ofthun* der would not awake them. Sleeping (still) waters are better for horses than living vjaters. We found that woman dying. That woman dying in tlie fear of God, did not fear death. One is happy in contenting one's self with little. Have you let that thief pass? I let him pass. Why have yon had a coat made ? I have had no coat made. I let something foil. Have you heard him say that ? I heard him say it. I heard it said. I heard my sister say it. Exercise 191. Appliqu-er, (s') 1. ref. Hat-er (se), 1. ref. to Prevenant, e. obliging ; to apply ; hasten ; Preven-ir, 2. ir. to an- Besoin, m. want; Lecture, dreading; ticipate; Changeruent. m. altera- Obligeant. e. obliging ; Repet-er, 1. to repeat; _ lion ; Plai-re, 4. ir. to please ; Suivant, e, following; Emouss-er, 1. to blunt; Pointe, f. point; Suiv-re, 4. ir. tc follow ; Empecher,l. to prevent; Pleuv-oir, 3.ir.fo rain; Voyant, e, bright, sh-jisy. Essayer, 1. to try; 1. Ma cousine est-elle aussi obligeante que la votre ? 2. Elle est aussi obligeante, et bien plus charmante que la mienne. 3. Vos en- fants sont-ils prevenants 1 4. Mes enfants, prevenant tous mes be- Boins. ne me laissent rien a desirer. 5. Lisez bien attentivement los pages suivantes. 6. Ces demoiselles, suivant l'exemple de leur mere, s'appliquent a la lecture. 7. Les couleurs voyantes ne me plaisent point. 8. Mes scaurs voyant qu'il allait pleuvoir, se haterent de re- venir. 9. Qu'avez-vous laisse tomber? 10. J'ai laisse tomber ma 256 LESSON XCVIIL plume; la pointc on est emonasee. 11. Les avez-vottt fait pari er! li.'. Je les ai fail parler, mais avec difficulte. 13. Avez-vous fait faire des rhangements dana voire maisonl 14. Jyen ai fait faire. 15. A quoi en avez-vous fait faire ? 16. Pen ai fait faire '. la salle a man- gcr et au sal* 17. A er cet homoie ? 18. Je n'ai p .-. 19. A qui (idiom avez-voua cn> lenda d i re eelal 20. Je l*ai entendudire .\ mon pere. 21. Je le lui 22. D vona i'a entenda dire. 23. II vous a vu faire eclx 21. II vous i'a vu I'airc. 25. Jc l'ai vu p l. Bujfoo say-', tliat they are better for horses than living waters. 3. Are your sisters cautions 1 4. They art' not wry cautious. 6. My Bisters, foreseeing that it was going to rain, brought their umbrellas, <>". What have you let fall? 7. I have let my knife and book fall. s. Do very bright colors please your brothei Be him. !<>. Have yon read the following pagesl 11. II re you Been the dying wo- man ' IS. Yum- - I, was very happy. . pplir herself to study. 14 Have yon made them read? 16. I made Ihem read and write, 10, [ made my brother write, it. [ have had a 1 k bound (r ide in his house ! 19. He lias had soma n '■ - he hi d some made? •j I. I i Whom have . ; Have yon Have you i have 81 Do not let it fall. 82. What has your 1 i 83 He has dropped nothing. 3t. Whom have you beard say lhati 86. I hoard brother say it. 86. rd you repeat it. 37. We ban you do tliat. LESSON X« viii. \' XCVUL ri'.ACTH ■ "'«-K. L The paitieiple past ia vabiablb under any of the following con. ditions: — 1. When en | i which casfi it agrees to gender and number with the noun which it qualifies : — tsssow xotiii. 257 Des livres iroprimes. Printed books. Ces femmes paraissent bien abat- Those women appear very dejected. tues. 2. When used in the formation of the tenses of passive verbs; when it always agrees with the subject of the proposition : — Elles sont bien rccues de tout le They are well received by every monde. body. 3. When employed in forming the compound tenses of neuter verbs having tire as an auxiliary ; in which place, as in the preced- ing case, it agrees with the subject or nominative : — Votre soeur est partie ce matin. Your sister went away this morning. 4. When employed in forming the tenses of active verbs having avoir as an auxiliary; in which connection it agrees not with the subject, but with the direct object or regimen, provided that object precedes it : — Lcs maisons que ncus avons ache- The houses which we have bought. tees. 5. When used along with tire in the formation of the compound tenses of reflective verbs, wherein the reflective pronoun is the direct object; in which position it agrees with that pronoun or direct object : — Ces dames se sont flattees. Tiwse ladies have jlallcred tlwvisches. 6. When used along with tire (as in Rule 5.) in the formation of the compound tenses of those reflective verbs, in which the reflective pronoun is not the direct, but the indirect object of the proposition; in which event it agrees with the direct object, provided (as in Rule 4.) that object precedes it : — Les histoires qu'elles se sont racon- T/i£ stories which they related to each tecs. other. 7. When forming part of a compound tense of a verb governing a Bucceeding infinitive, it is at the same time preceded by a direct ob ject which is represented as performing the action denoted by the in Cnilive ; in which condition it agrees with that direct object: — Les dames que j'ai entendues ch'an- The ladies whom I heard sing fusing- tcr. ing). 8. When in a sentence containing the pronoun en, the participle is preceded by another object or regimen which is direct ; in which case it agrees with that direct object: — Je les en ai avertis. / have warned them of it. Vous les en avez informes. You /tave informed them of it. 258 LESSON X C V 1 1 1. OF Examples. v.-z drs lirres bien relies. at bien labourites. Bies roisines Bont tomb6es d'ac tret, que doub avoi lata quoj'ai ■ as som- books Your da . n- ii ploughed, ibart have come to an u%- to us. ^,'iited. The fields which you have ploughed. | you) of ijohi fault. S / / heari which I bro:. I I h I | ;• 2. EU« est fiatigi Bile e-t ■ q tmuveei | LESSON XCIX. 259 rous vus rire? 2L Je les ai vus sourire. 22. Les avez-vous vus voler des fruits? 23. Je les ai vus voler des pomrnes. 24. Les avez- vous avertis de lturs fautes ? 25. Je les en ai avertis. 26. Je ne les en ai pas avertis. Exercise 194. 1. Are your books well bound? 2. They are well bound, and well printed. 3. Did not your little girl find herself discouraged ? 4. She found herself tired, but not discouraged. 5. Have your sis- ters come to an understanding ? 6. They have not come to an un- derstanding. 7. My brothers have come to an understanding. 8. Who came to you ? 9. Your friends came to us. 10. Is not your sister gone to church? 11. My sister is gone to church as usual. 12. Did your sister return sooner than usud ? 13. My sister re- turned later than usual. 14. Are the fields which you have ploughed large? 15. The fields which I have bought are very large. 16. Where are the gentlemen whom you saw pass? 17. The ladies whom I heard sing are in their room. 18. Did your poor sister fall? 19. Did that poor sick woman fall in the mud? 20. Did your sister succeed in reading that book? 21. She succeeded in reading it. 22. Have you warned your sisters of their danger? 23. I have warned them of it. 24. I have not warned them of it. 25. What pen has your mother used? 26. She has used mine. 27. Have not those young ladies used my book? 28. They have not used it. 29. Has your mother been well? 30. She has been perfectly well. 31. Has she remembered her promise? 32. She has remembered it. 33. Have you seen those boys laugh? 34. I have seen them smile. 35. Have you seen them play ? 36. I have heard them play. LESSON XCIX. LEgON XCIX. PRACTICAL RESUME OE THE RULES ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE.— -IL The participle past is invariable .: — 1. In active verbs, when the direct regimen follows the participle : — Mes nieces out etudie leurs lecons. My nieces nave studied 'heir lessons. Ellcs out neglige leuvs etudes. They have neglected their studies. ■ 2. In neuter verbs conjugated with avoir : — ■ Mes cousines ont disparu. My cousins have disappeared. I»es cinq heures qu'elles ont dormi. The five hours which tliey have slept. 200 LXSSOX XC IX. In the latter sentence, the word pendant is tmderstood nftci heures : — Lcs cinq heures petulant ks qucllcs The five hours during which th elles on: donm. 3. In anipersonal verbs, whether conjugated with etre or \vi avoir : — ■ teura qui] a fait ectto anuee. 71« heal there has Ixen this war arrive' blendes maQienn. Many misfortuna have haj>pcne 4. In reflective or pronominal verbs, of which the second pronou is an iodireet regimen, when no direct regimen precedes: — Ellc lo partir. She proposed ta kersdf ia kmet. 5. When the participle precedes an infinitive, and is preceded by a gimen, and this direct regimen ctor, but the <>b- cd upon, In t - generally rendered in Q : — L [ue j'ai entendn chan> I -,/ (Icing) en the direct regimen preceding a participle is not the object of this participle, but of a verb following: — I / d by an infinitive, is always Is: — j. : / • in, at, when no direct regimen precsdi I ' [tem ) of then I; si :,'.vicf. £ do hons con- 1 i c|u ii a conru. n£cs quo a - La belle Journee qu'il ■ (ail l.ii t ' - se i>oiit nui. . hr ran. T i hart I thai there hat ' ietutt, cil on* The A Uies have motif the e.luccium d'ait da ledii' . .ant a kind if art. pliant. Bliiun. , LESSON XCIX. 261 Elle s'est imagine l'idee de pouvoir | She conceived the idea, that she might reussir. i succeed. Les fruits que j'ai vu volcr. Les soldats blesses quo j'ai vu por- ter. La chanson que j'ai entendu chan- ter. Les pomracs que je vous ai defendu de manger. Je les ai fait partir. Elles m'ont apporte des oranges. Elles m'en out apporte. The fruits which I snu being stolen. The wounded soldiers w.'iom I saw {being) carried. Tlie song which I heard sung. The apples which I forbade yov, to eat. I obliged them to leave. They have brought me oranges. Tliey have brought me {some) of them. Exercise 195. Auberge, f. inn; Jou-er, 1. to play ,• Piece, f. piece: Bien. m. good; Habill-er, 1. to dress; Racont-cr, 1. to relate; Dernier, e, last; Donn-ir, 2. to sleep; Reven-ir, 2. ir. to re- Disparait-re, 4. ir. to dis-IAon d'Or, m. Golden turn; appear ; Lion ; Soieries, silk goods. Euterr-er, 1. to bury; Mort, e, dead; 1. Quelle auberge vous a-t-on recommandee ? 2. On m'a recora- mande l'auberge du Lion-d'Or. 3. Quelles nouvelles avez-vous apportees ! 4. J'ai apporte des nouvelles agreables. o. Vos voisines sont-elles habillees ? 6. Elles ne sont pas encore habillees. 7. Ont- elles bien dormi la nuit derniere? 8. Elles n'ont pas bien dormi. 9. Quand sont-elles arrivees? 10. Elles sont arrivees a quatre heures et demie. 11. Ont-elles dormi plus de cinq heures? 12. Les six heures qu'elles ont dorrai leur ont fait beaucoup de bien. 13. Vos soeurs se sont-elles amusees ? 14. En jouant elles se sont fait raal au bras. 15. Se sont-elles raconte notre conversation? 16. Elles se la sont racontee. 17. Vos amies ont-elles disparu] 18. Elles n'ont pas disparu ; elles sont revenues chez elles. 19. Les soldats que vous avez vus partir; sonl^ils revenus? 20. Us sont morts; je les ai vu enterrer. 21. Ne les avez-vous pas fait etudier? 22. Je les ai fait lire. 23. Avez-vous apporte des soieries ? 24. Je n'en ai pas apporte. 25. Les soieries que j'en ai apportees sont superbes. Exercise 196. 1. Have you not recommended my nieces ? 2. I have recommendev. them. 3. Have you brought me good oranges ? 4. I have brought you some. 5. Have you given any to my two daughters .' 6. I have given them some. 7 I would have given them some, if I had had many. 8. Have you not neglected your studies? 9. I have not neglected them; I never neglect them. 10. The years which that church has lasted, speak in favor {en faveur) of the architect. 11. The ten miles which he has run, have fatigued him. 12. Have 262 LESSON c. iters Injured each other ? 13. They have flattered themselves 15. There came three of 7. They conceived the Have you seen them (m., I your peat 23. The our room . ; L 31. H I have broogtt from tf>«* ph«i LEgON C. ■ ; it IESSON C. Voila les perils, voici le moyen de les eviter ; car entin, le bras de Dieu n'est pas raccourci. Massillon. Le peuple se figure une felicite imaginaire dans les situations ele- vees, ou il ne peut atteindre, et il croit (car tel est l'homme) que tout ce qu'il ne pent avoir, -c'est cela mcme qui est le bonheur qu'il cherche. Massillon. comme- Comme l'ambition n'a pas de frein, et que la soif des richesses nous consume tous, il en resulte, que le bonheur nous fuit a mesure que nous le cberchons. Th. Corneille. La reconnaissance est le plus doux, comme le plus saint des de- voirs. Thomas. Comme il sonna la charge, il sonne la retraite. La Fontaine. Those are the davgers, thin is the way of avoiding them ; for finally, the influence of God ir. not less powerful. The people picture to themselves an imaginary happiness in elevated stations which they cannot reach, and they believe (for such is man) that all that which they cannot ob- tain, forms that very happiness which they seek. —QUE. As ambition has no limits, and as the thirst of riches devours us all, the result is, that happiness avoids us, as we proceed in our search after it. Gratitude is the siveetest as well as the holiest of duties. As he sounded the charge, so he sounds the retreat. Votre maitre vous aime ; done, vous devez l'aimer. Je suis, done, un temoin de leur peu de puissance. Racine. Et dou peut done venir ce changement extreme ? Voltaire. Si ce n'est toi, c'est done ton frere. — Je n'en ai pas. — C'est done, quelqu'un des tiens. La Fontaine. Allons done! repondit on, et la transaction n'eut pas lieu. De Cussy. Your master loves you ; therefore, you should love him. I am, therefore, a ivitness of their want of power. Whence, therefore, can this extreme change proceed? If it is not you, th;n it is your brother. I have none. Then it must be some one of your family. " Well done!" replied they, and the affair did not take place. DE MEME QUE. De m£me que le soleil brille sur I As the sun shines upon the earth, la te'rre, de meme le juste brillera so will the just shine in heaven. dans les cieux. L'academie. C'est etrs faible et timide que d'etre inaccessible et tier. Massillon. Une famille vertueuse est un vais- eeau tenu pendant la tempete par deux ancres, la religion et les mceurs. Chateaubriand. Quel carnage de toutes parts ! On egorge a la fois les enfants, les viefllards, To be inaccessible and proud, is to be weak and timid. A virtuous family is a vessel strengthened during the tempest by twp anchors, religion and morals. What carnage on all sides ! They murder at once the children, the old men, the sister and the broth- 264 LEEBON C. Et la prrur ct le frere, | er, (he daughter and the mother, ih* Et la tille et la mere, | son in (he arms of his father. Le fils dan^ 1 . I *tc. for. RJI — Qf.WP. Lorsquc l'ininKonec habUait la When innocence inJiabited iht tore. Qnand /.. ji- ne m'en (f nwa you hated me, I \coula so. plaindra '-.in. |u'au If lered merely the n tee had i |M.int cTaatre interet i>-i- nootker inter** here than to yrc- ' i lit, t<> jirereut ■ taut • y violent i tmiimtk -iLLO.V. I impe*- n vat a'r rialc ai. • teen Mr M n/ if the. j (AM r'>i/r/ strike 'A* rni-nt 1 1 ear, but the mind. t it a wt ma I.\ I:. II i : 'it it not :h» iiant. Thrrr it HO ' but' in the | I my daughter to a mute. HraiVai r.-lui qt.i ■ ni par h hilJS III meUtetm ni plus bal On d'< ! Li K'" in Wtt in ii. be, ni noble, ni i ni mam- Mwmli.'i.v. If,ij i content him- , \itth ' J! f by ii. r-,*r. i! <>r by thr shameful deeiret ofmewrim, ■i the eonJU l ■ We are tirrrr M /< IMgf nor so tin- l.lCIJ. That holy /fir ibioir* HO nous k lou»n»g« A, l- (fen, M us go to vork LESSON C. 265 O 9a, Gil Bias, me dit il ua jour, le tnmp3 de ton enfance est passe. Le Sage. " New, then, Gil Bias," said he to me one day, " the time of your child- la, fortune, soit bonne ou mau- vaise, soit passagere ou constante, ne peut rien sur Tame du sage. Haemontel. La liberte de publier ses pensees, ou la liberte de la presse, doit etre regle"e sur la liberte meme d'agir.. B. de St. Pieeee. Fortune, be it good or bad, be it transient or constant, has no power over the soul of the wise. The liberty of publishing one's thoughts, or the liberty of the press, should be regulated upon the liberty of action itself. Les grands hommes entreprennent de grandes choses parcequ'elles Bont grandes, et les fdus parcequ'ils les croient faciles. Vauvenaegues. La tout est beau, parceque tout est vrai J. J. Rousseau. Great men undertake great things because they are great; and fools, " '.y believe them easy. Le style le tant sa noblesse. Every thing there is beautiful, be- cause every thing is true. POUETANT. noble a pour- 1 The least elevated style lias, never- Boileau. J theless, its elevation. PUISQUE. Pourquoi le demander, puisque vous le savez ? Racine. Ne vous lassez jamais d' examiner les causes des grands changements ; puisque rien ne servira jamais tant a votre instruction. Bossuet. Puisque vous le voulez, je vais changer de style. Boileau. Why ask about it, since you know it ?' Never be weary of examining into the causes of great changes; for nothing will ever be of so much ser- vice to your instruction. Since you will have it so, I will change my style. Jamais on ne vit un si grand exem- | Never was such a striking exam- ple, que le corn-age n'est point in- compatible avec la. mollesse. Voltaiee. Nous n'avons que peu de temps a vivre, et loin d'en profiter, nou3 ne cberchons qu'a le perdre. Laveaux. A quoi vous servira d'avoir de l'esprit, si vous ne l'employez pas, et que vous ne vous appliquiez pas ? Toutefois que sert-il de me justi- fier ? Racine. Qu'il fasse ce qu'il lui plaira. Que le raonde est grand ! Qu'il est maguifique ! Massillon. Que de beaux jours n'ont pas de beaux soirs 1 Boiste. Sais tu quelque chose de plus ? Oh ! que oui. Beuets, 12 pie seen, that courage is not incom- patible with effeminacy. We have but little time to live, and instead of improving it, we only seek to waste it. Of what use will be your wit, if you do not employ it, and do not ap- ply yourselves ? However, what is the use of justi- fying myself? Let him, do what he pleases. How great is the world! How magnificent ! How many fine days have not beautiful evenings ! Do you know any thing more f That Idol 26« LESSON C. Cest une maladie d' esprit, que de aoubaiter des choses impossibles. Fknf.lon. II n'y aura jamais de meilleur di- recteur que l'Evangile. GaNCASELLI. La veritable conversion du cceur fait autant aimer Dieu qu'on a aime Pascal - tu que dans son ccrur, il ait mart f Ofl nfatl mm qpe y m \ MilE. DE Si . : II a f.iilu OM DM lnu'iluui instruit. j«>ur n'apprandn M que je n« voulaia pas aon Wishing for impossible things, is a disease of the mind. There will never be any better guide than tlu Gospel. The true conversion of the heart makes us love God as much as w* luive loved the creatures. Do you believe that he has sworn mth in his heart.' It is not that 1 might havi don* Utter tli ■• It was tucessary that my misfor- tunes should instruct me, to teach me what I would not believe. qp a us c a — yi'oi . . . qnc Quoique Dion ct la nature aient i Again en Lm formant dTOM BktaDC bcoa, b WKOHi humaine nc peut eouft'rir I lite. vitez la hMMMfc LU ■ Quoi que co noit quelle di-e, ill.- oe me pcrsuadera paa, GliALLT-Dl'VIVUPL :.,h :; I'amillo, t f a mily . Fern rue, f. woman, trife. Fianijaillcs, f. p. betrothing. FiiiinV-, m., naneiV, {., betrothed. Futur, ra. bridegroom. III.— Le roars humain. Arterc, f. artery. Bubo, t beard Moissonneur, m. reaper. Musicien, m. musician. Naturaliste, in. naturalist. Orateur, in. orator. Orfevre, in. gold and silver smith. Pape, m. pope. l'atre, in. shephera, herdsman. Perruquier, in. hairdresser. Philoeophe, in. philosopher. Poiaaoiioier, in., l'uissonniere, UfisK monger. IViuicatiur, ra. preacher. Pre! re, m. priest. Raffioeur da sucre, de sel, sugar salt r Raini«neur dc cherainecs, m.chimney Kelieur. in. bookbinder. Savitur, m. cobbler. Sculpteor, m. sculptor. Bellier, in. saddler. Somirier, in. locksmith. Tapaner, in. upholsterer. 'IVinturier, m.dger. TSaMnod) ul m Tonnalier, ra. cooper. Yitrier, in. glazier. Max. Future, f. bride. Qaocbre, DL sun in-law. Gland pare, DL grandfather. (irand'mere, f. grandjuother. Jama homma, in. young man. :11c, f. young tcoman, girL 8, I*. youth. DX, juinclle. (., twin. M.irraine. I ij-ihr.'Ahtr. Mari, in. hvtbmd, •', f. birtk Nouirioe, f. nurse. . iiKUH'. bridegroom. Noiivt-lle iiiarnc, briU. Orphelin, to, orphelkia, f., orphan. Pariain. in. g<*lf'athcr. IVtn iil«. qrandfin. i; grand daughter. V'uf. in. vid"wrr. idoW. <•, f old age. Tick ihmax vodx Boucho, f. Bras, m. a LIST OF WORDS. 260 Cervelle, £ brain. Chair, t flesh. Cils, in. p. eyelashJS, Ccfiur, m. heart. Corps, ra. body. C6te, m. side. Cftte, f. rib. Cou, m. neck. Coude, m. elbow. Crane, m. skull. Cuisse, f. thigh. Doigt, m. finger. Dos, m. back. fipaule, £ shoulder. 6pine (du dos), f. spine. Favoris, m. p. whiskers. Foie, m. liver. Front, m. fovehead. Gencives,/. p. gums. Genou, m. knee. Gorge, f. throat. Hanche, f. hip. Jambe, f. leg. Joue, f. cheek. Langue, f. tongue. Levre, £ lip. Membre, m. limb. IV. — Maladies, infiemitks, etc. Attaque, f. attack, fit. Baunie, m. balsam. Begaiemeut, m. stammering. Blessure, f. wound. Cecite", f. blindness. Chancre, m. cancer. Cicatrice, f. scar. Colique, £ colic. Contusion, £ bruise. Crampe, £ cramp. Dislocation, f. dislocation. Eme"tique, m. emetic. Enflure, f. swelling. Enrollment, m. hoarseness. Entorse,. f. sprain. Epilepsie, f. epilepsie. Evanouissemcnt, m. fainting. Fievre, f. fever. Fievre nerveuse, f. nervous fever. V. — Habillements. Agrafe, f. clasp. Aiguille, f. needle. Aiguille de chevcux, f. hair-pin. Bague, £ ring. Baa, m. stocking. Menton, m. chin. Moelle, f. marrow. Moustache, f. moustache, moustachia. Muscle, m. muscle. Nerf, m. nerve. Nez, m. nose. Ongle, m. nail. Orteil, m. toe. Os, m. bone. Palais, m. palate. Paupiere, f. eyelid. Peau, f. skin. Pouce, m. thumb. Poumon, m. lungs. Prunelle, f. pupil of the eye Rate, £ spleen. Reins, m. p. loins. Sang, m. blood. Sein, bosom. Sourcils, m. p. eyebrows. Squelette, m. skeleton. Talon, m. heel. Teint, m. complexion. Tempes, £ p. temples. Trait, m. feature. Veine, £ vein. Visage, m.face. Maladies, Infiemhtes, etc. Fievre scarlatine, £ scarlet fever Gudrison, £ cure. Goutte, £ gout. Hydropisie, £ dropsy. Indisposition, f. indisposition. Louche, adj. squinting. Malaise, m. indisposition. Mutisme,m. dumbness. Ordonnance, £ prescription. Onguent, m., pommade, £, salve, Petite-ve>ole, £ small-pox. Pulmonie, £ consumption. Remcde, m. remedy. Rhume, m. cold. Rougeole, f. measles. Surdite, £ deafness. Toux, £ cough. Ulcere, m. ulcer. Vertigo, m. dizziness. Articles of Basin, m. dimity. Batiste, £ cambric. Bijouterie, £ jewelry. Bonnet, m. cap. Boucle, £ buckle. LIST OF WORDS. Bouclc, f. lock of hair curl. Boucles d'oieille.?, f. p. ear-rings. Bourse, £ purse. Bracelet, in. bracelet. Bretelle-, f- p- braces, suspenders. Brosse, f. brink. Brossea-dents, f. tooth-brush. OaleoOBk m. 8. dratcers. Ceinture, £ sash, belt, band. -. hi. p. socks. in. blacking. Ciseaux, DL p. I r. hea d dr am in. collar. in. necklace. "un. rat. Orepe, in. ■ Diamant, m, diamond. I". lace. ire, f. lining. ::.. r.id-!. jewel -box. *icord .-. no. p. spurt. Epingle, Coin. ]■ l.-ir. n. m. am. fling-bottle. ■ <'ur. ... dress-coat. VI.- MAIRO*. ETC. Anlichamlin-. f. antechamber. ■ | bench, scat. BibUc ""V. r,ttu/h, anal I town. (. exchange. • . f. capital dtp mttnpoUM. :.. in. r/.iW v/ bells, rrack. OftTB, I Obambre, f. eAamJsr, room. Ohambrc •*> concher, f. bnlroom. lie, f. rAopc/. n. in. emnilry-house, villa. icre, f. Aerf, cyrta?*'. I". /|W. ("In inin^e, f. chimney. DDL burying-ground, eJhtrt ClncLe. C J*// (large), cAur cA ktf, d*. France, {.fringe. Garniture, £ trimming. Gilft, in. pest, icau^coat Grenat, ru. garnet. Qaetree, f. p. gaiters. Habit, in. coat. [voire, E ivory. Linge, m. linen. Lunettes, f. n. spectacle*. Blanche, f. hmm nfousaeline. f. muslin. Pantolon, in. sing, pantaloon*. Parapluie, m. umbrella. Parasol, m. |iiiinarf Peigne, in. camtL Pendants-d'oteiBfliL nx p. dants. Perle, f. /i^r/. Poche, i | Potnmade, f. pomatum. Redingote, C yrea ta aa t Robe, t stress, reea Robe de chambra, f. dressing-gown. Satin, in. satin. Bote, f. ai/fc Tablier.m, apron. Taffetas, m taffeta. . in. sweat C stat i. soil Town, House, to CWlirr, m. church steeple. . f. moil /*//. scrA t, III. e,,tirent. CutStne, f. kltelten. em! urn- house, Ecurie, t Environs, m. p. environ*. hood. j, floor. r, in. Horn. -. m. suburb. , /'.n-m. u/aift, veil Oouttiere, C ontfsn ~ , « [ m. AiaAtse* Orand route, \ ■ * Orange, f earn. i Irenwr, in. garret Hale, f. Wuf, i:. Bouilli, nx ioiVrJ 6^, 6oi7«f meat. Bouillon, m. broth. p. preserves. !'tj of mutton. D .'.'OJk, IX. — . yarlic . rajus. a i I rot I 1 • >r. Crc*«< • X. — Arches raurnzM, mm Amandier, m. alt I tree ion. Tableau, m. picture. Tablette, f. shelf. Tapis, m. carpeL Tire-bouchon, m. corlt Tiroir, m. drawer. Travertin, m. bolster. cuisine, m p. kitchen utensils. Verre, in. glass. Disiies, Era Rafraichissemcnts, m. p. refnsJ* tnents. . roast meat. -.sage. I -i>Up. ■ . L vegetable soup. ■ tart. Hi. in. vermicelli. VuLnlle, (.f^wl. Vkgltablks, Giud, era Millet, m. millet. in. turnip. ;.). onion. '•tip. CO. yirsley. pUmL ■ft (turnip), i.'otig). : tag*. tU. TTTT Owm I", ar/. : »Dn. ni. salmon. kle, f- ioIil Tiindio, f. fcu*t in. serpent ■ Tools. Uncho, f rtf. in. fish-hook. irrow. /toe. ■ line. I file. Motile, ('. nrindiion*. i. BL ie«r"#r PoUe, f. BL '.rici/i, I /■ul lei/. I Jane. BL r. «//«■. . f. M* f /orJt. f. ]>. />i« Truellc, f. trowel Vu,f. Y*! ABRtfVIATIONS. A. P. A protester. A. S. P. Accepte sous protfit. A. S. P. C. Accepte sous protfit pour a-compte. B DD - Baron. C er - Chevalier C te - Comte. Qiesse. Comtesse. D r Docteur. D r - M n - Docteur-medecin, E. Est. J.-C. Jesus- Christ. LL. AA. II. Leurs Altesses Impe*- riales. LL. AA. RR. Leurs Altesses Roy- ales. LL. AA. SS. Leurs Altesses Sere- nissimes. LL. Em. Leurs Eminences. LL. Ex. Leurs Excellences. LL. HH. Leurs Hautesses. LL. MM. Leurs Majesty's. LL. MM II. Leurs Majesty's Impe*- riales. LL. MM. RR. Leurs Majestes Roy- ales. M. ou M r - Monsieur. M' ,re - Maitre. M. A. Maison assuree. M. A. C. I. Maison assuree contre l'incendie. M a - Marchand. M ,,c - Marcliande. M lle - Mademoiselle. M= r - Monseigneur. M is- Marquis. M ise - Marquise. MM. Messieurs. jjme. Madame. Mst. Manuscrit. N. B. Nota bene. N.-D. Notre-Dame. N.-N.-E. Nord-nord-est. N.-N.-O. Nord-nord-ouest N l - Negociant. jfie. Negociante. N°- Numero. N. S. Notre-Seigneur. N. S. J.-C. Notre-Seigneur J6sus- Christ. ABBREVIATIONS. To be protested. Accepted under protest. Accepted under protest on account. Baron. Chevalier, knight, sir. Count. Countess. Doctor. Doctor of medicine. Bast. Jesus Christ. Their Imperial High Their Royal Highnesses. Their Most Serene Highnesses. Their Eminences. Their Excellencies. Their Highnesses. Their Majesties. Their Imperial Majesties. Their Royal Majesties. Sir, Mr. Master. House insured. House insured against fire. Dealer, shopkeeper, m. Dealer, shopkeeper, t Miss. My lord. Marquis. Marchioness. Messrs. Gentlemen. Madam. Mrs. Manuscript. Nota Bene. Our Lady. North-north-east. North-north-west. Merchant, m. Merchant, £ Number. Our Lord. Our Lord Jesus GhnU. Q76 ABBREVIATIONS. O. Ouest •/o Poor cent O.-N. Onest-norA O.-S. Ouest-suiL P. S. Post-ecriptum. R. P. Re"vt:rcnd pcre. L Son Altcsse Imperiale. S. A. U. Son Altcsse Roy ale 9L Son Altease Sereoiseime. .1-esL - .n Eminence. I Grarvk'iir. 9a Hauteeae. que. S. M. B. Sa Ma TreaFiJcle. Sainta Pete*. .•I -eat i. Sud-aud- Wett. Per cent. West-north. West-south. Post scriptwn. . \ittur. His or Her Imperial Highness. i! Highness. His Most Serene Highness. tst. •nee. irncy. His Grace (to* a Bishop). Wis Highness (the Turkish Empet His or Her Majesty. • Htr Britannic Majesty. His lm, Majesty. His M^t Faithful Majesty. rst. flier. her ». His Holiness. S«u!h-soMth-tasL iy>\Uh south-vest. NEW FRENCH COURSE, PART SECOND. § 1.— -Parts of Speech. (1.) There are, in French, ten sorts of words or parts of speech . Nouns or Substantives, Participles, Articles, Adverbs, Adjectives, Prepositions, Pronouns, Conjunctions, Verbs, Interjections. (2.) These are divided into variable, and invariable words. (3.) The variable words are those the termination of which ad- mits of various changes ; by these changes various modifications of meaning are expressed. The variable words are of six kinds : The Noun, The Pronoun, The Article, The Verb, The Adjective, The Participle. (4.) The invariable words are those the termination of which never changes : The Adverb, The Conjunction, The Preposition, The Interjection. (5.) All variable parts of speech have two numbers : the singular, which denotes but one, and the plural, which denotes more than one. (6.) All variable parts of speech, except the verb, have two gen ders: the masculine and the feminine. § 2.— Cases. The cases adopted by French grammarians are : (1.) The nominalif or sujet : answering to the nominative or sub- ject of the English, and to the nominative of the Latin. (2.) The regime direct, or direct object of the English, accusative of the Latin. (3.) The regime indirect, indirect object of the English, answers to the oblique cases of the Latin, the genitive, dative, and ablative. 278 OEXDER. § 3, 4, 5. § 3. — The Nocn or Scbstantive. (1.) The noun or substantive is a word which serves to person or a thing; as, Jean, John; maison, house. (2.) There are two Hurts of nouns: proper and common. (3.) A proper noun is applied to a particular person, or thing; as, Napoleon, yapoleon ; Paris, Paris. (4.) A common noun belongs to a whole class of objects; as, livre, book ; homme, man. (5.) Some common nouns, although singular in number, present mind the idea of several perattM «>r things, forming a collec- tion : they arc for this reason denominated colUctiie nouns ; as, troupe, (6.) Collective i or partitive: genera^ wllen tne y represent an entire c«>l ';■ nnee dee FVaneaia, the army of B partial collection; as, one troupe de eoldsi I i -h toldiert. (7.) A common noon com . ~, chcf-d'a'uvre, master}! - ailed a compound noun. (8.) Of the two propertil and number, we shall oomntea (1.) There arc, in PO genders: the minine. men, and animals of the male kind . (3.) T. : belonge to women, and animals of the kind ; a-, B S "•««. (4.) Through imi: eosnt of derivath ;t any real i ine and feminine genders have Sett, to (lie nanus of inanimate objects: thus, pa- ne, and phi: . ..nine. \MNQ. (1.) Male beings; as, homme, TTKTi ,• lion, {ton. ■2.) ' ich male «jtia- re attributed : (3.) The name* • i lc printemps, the tpn of the months, Janvier, January; terrier, r>'jruary, &,c. (4.) The days of the week: (I.) I -:as,femme, ; lionne, Honest. ts to which ferns e qualities are attributed : t\e,/airy; lone, ' (3.) Virtues: la charlts, Jew to : except courage, courage ,• nurite, mrrxt, whieh an (4.) Vieee: la mechancete, wxtkf tdni.ts: except l'orgucil, pria^ GENDER. — § 5, 219 Masculine. .undi, Monday; mardi, Tuesday, (5.) The names of the cardinal points and the winds : as, Test, the East; l'ouest,/7ie West,&c. [See exceptions opposite.] (6.) The names used in the v French decimal system : as, cen- time (hundredth part of a franc) ; kilogramme (1000 grammes, about two founds) ; metre, &c. (7.) Metals : le fer, iron ; l'acier, steel, &c. (8.) Colors: le vert, green ; le jaune, yellow. (9.) The names of empires and kingdoms when ending with a con- Bonant: le Danemarc, Denmark; e Bresil, Brazil. (10.) Mountains : le Jma,Mou7it Jura , le Puy-de-Dome, (*) the Puy de Dome ; le Cenis, le St. Ber- nard, MountCenis, Mount St. Ber- nard. (11.) The names of rivers when ending with a consonant : le Rhin, the Rhine; le Nil, the Nile. (12.) Trees, shrubs: le chene, the oak ; le frene, the ash ; le rosier, the rose-bush. [Exceptions op- posite.] (13.) The name of a language : as, le francais, French ; l'alle- mand, German, &c. (14.) The letters of the alpha- bet : un a, an a ; un z, a %. (15.) Compound words formed of a verb and of a noun, either masculine or feminine, or of a pronoun and a verb : porte-feuille, pocket-book ; rendez-vous, rendez- Feminine. (5.) Festivals : la Saint Jean, i.e. la fete de St. Jean, St. John's day; la Chandeleur, Candlemas. except Noel, Christmas, masc. Bise, a 'poetical term for North wind. Tramontane, a term applied on the Mediterranean to the North wind. Brise, breeze; moussons, trade-winds. (5.) The names of countries when ending in e mute : la France ; l'Espagne, l'Amerique, &c. Exc. Bengale, Hanovre, Me- xique, Peloponese. (6.) Chains of mountains in the plural: les Alpes, the Alps; les Pyrenees, the Pyrenees; les Vo- ges, les Cevennes, &c. (7.) The names of rivers when ending with e mute : la Seine, the Seine ; la Loire, the Loire. Exc. Le Rhone, the Rhone; le Danube, le Tibre, le Coeyte, masc. (8.) Aubepine, hawthorn ; bour- daine, black alder; epine, thorn; hieble, dwarf-elder ; ronce, brier ; yeuse, ilex. (9.) Garde-robe, wardrobe; perce-neige, spring-crocus ; perce- feuille, hare^s-ear. • The word Puy, from the Celtic puech, mountain, is applied to a number of placet In France: Puy-en-Velay ; Puy-notre-Dame, &c. 280 GENDER BT TH B TSRMISATIOJ. § ft. (10.) Moitie, half; and all num- bers ending with aine : douzaico, dozen; centaine, hundred, Sic Masculine. Feminint (16.) Nouns, pronouns, verbs, Sic, used substantively : le boire et le manger, fating and drinking. (17.) Numbers— cardinal, ordi- nal, and proportional — used sub- stantively : le dix, the tenth ; lo neuvieme, the ninth; le tiers, the third. [Exceptions opposite.] § 6. — Gender, by the termination-. (1.) The exceptions t<> the masculine will be found opposite the termination, in toe feminine column; and the exceptions to the fem- inine, in the masculine column, also opp (2.) Consonants. B Masculine Terminations. Feminine TermiiuUions. sr ■-•** r\|fffi Trrmim- alien. Kiamfit. Englui. n Horeb, MoUHi Iforrb. vn nuloiih, e a ihip. MB plumb, lead. ( AC MC, beak. ic m putty. oc hoc. . I hare. KC tr trunk. rc el clerk. sc fisc, P4MMM I ) ed pied, foot . ID nid, nrst. od tripod, tripod. ud Talmud, Talmud. KD marchand, merchant. rd bord, border. ] P ir chef, Chirf. Exc— clef, key ; nef, stop, IT snif, tallow. nave ; soif, thirst ur oeuf, bf cerf, stag. c J no rang rank. ! CK arack. arrack. GEXDER BY THE TERMINATION. — § 0. 281 Masculine Terminations. Feminine Terminations. AL bal, ball. EL sel, salt. IL soleil, sun. OL sol, soil. TIL calcul, calculation. AM Adam, Adam. EM harem, harem. IM dahn, deer. OM nom, name. UM parfum, perfume. AN cadran, dial. EN examen, examination. m l ,'->in, grape. ON not preceded by is or gi, si, ti, xi baton, stick. gazon, turf. blason, blazon. M bison, bison; horizon, ho- rizon; oison, gosling; poison, poison ; tison, firebrand ; bastion, bastion; bestion, figure-head of a ship. Exc. — faim, hunger; male- dim, excessive hunger. Exc. — -fin, end ; main, hand. Exc. — chanson, song; cuis- son, baking ; contre- facon. counterfeiting ; facon. mode; moisson, harvest; moussons, trade- winds ; rancon, ransom ison maison, house. Exceptions opposite. gion region, region. sion pension, pension. tion question, question. xion reflexion, reflection. ap drap, cloth. op galop, gallop. up coup, blow. oq coq-d'Inde, turkey. ar char, £R fer, car. iron. ir plaisir, pleasure. or or, gold. or not preceded by e, azur, azure. bonheur, happiness ; coeur, heart; choeur, chorus; de- nominateur, denominator ; deshonneur,dishonor; equa- teur, equator ; exterieur, Exc. — cuiller, spoon , me^ sea. chair, flesh. Exc. — tour, tower. eur chaleur, heat. hauteur, height. Exceptions opposite. 282 GENDER BY TttE TERMINATION. — § 6. Masculine Terminations, exterior; honneur, honor; intOrieur, interior; labour, labor; malheur, misfor- tune; multiplicateur, mul- tiplier; pleura, tears; re- gulateur, regulator ; venti- lateur, ventilator. R — Continued. Feminine Terminations. eur — Continued. Exceptions opposite. AS bras, arm- LS gres, sandstone. ■ souris, n 09, n bloen0| blockade. rs KS AT climat, climate. R arret, IT lit, or rai-liot, i VT built, end. NT pout, bridge. it tort, tcrong. AX elimnx, climax. IX stV-r. IX prix, price. TX courroux, anger. NX lynx, lynx. AZ P™. gas. u nose. B rix, rice. (3.) amaryllis, amaryllis ; bre bis s'heep ; foia, time : sou- ris, mousr ; vis., screw ; oa. sis, oasis. foivt, nuit, dot, forest. night, dower. A a nencia, dent, tooth i gent, people, jnment, mare. port, >!u:re; la plupnrt, the most. Exc. — croix, cross ; noix, nut ; paix, ycic- ; roix, , 1'inlrix, partridge, poix, pitch. Exc. — diaux, /i'm« ; faux, $ry/A« ; toux, cough. ' inula, a sort of cat- irpiliar ; m-pia, sepia. A complete classification of noona ending in « inuto (a mnjority of «Wcfa are feminine would be, from it.-, length, of little practi. the student, who would timl it easier to apply to his dictionary than to GENDERS BY THE TERMINATION. § G. 283 eucli a list. We will give here the principal terminations, classing them according to their gender, and placing the exceptions under the examples given for the terminations, instead of putting them, as hitherto, in the opposite column. Masculine Terminations. aee astrolabe, astrolab. Exc. — Souabe, Suabia ; ; syllabe, syllable. acle miracle, miracle. Exc. — debacle, breaking up of the ice ; made, a mineral. acre sacre, consecration. Exc. — nacre, mother of pearl. age courage, courage. Exc. — \mage,image ; rage, rage; page, page of a book ; cage, cage ; nage, swimming; plage, beach. at»e salaire, salary. Exc. — affaire, affair ; aire, floor; glaire, white of egg ; grammaire, gram- mar ; paire, pair ; jugu- \alrefugular-vein;ha.ire, hair-clolh; chaire, pul- pit; serpentaire, snake- root; parietaire, pelli- tory, and a few other names of plants. are hectare, hectare (a measure). Astre cadastre, register. aume chaume, thatch. Exc. — paume, tennis. e . not immediately preceded by t or ti: abrege, abridgment. ege college," college. Exc. — Norvege, Norway. eme careme, lent. Exc. — creme, cream ; breme, bream ; bireme, trireme, galley loiih two or three rows of oars. etre pretre, priest. Exc. — fenetre, window ; guetre, gaiter. jurre beurre, butler. ibre cidre, cider. ADE AIE ANCE ANSE IEEE INE IQUE ive ISSE LLE Feminine Terminations. ace grace, grace. Exc. — espace, space. parade, parade. Exc. — stade, stadium grade, grade. haie, hedge. importance, importance. danse, dance. asse masse, mass. Exc. — Parnasse, Par' nassus. ee nuee, cloud. Exc. — apogee, apogee ; athee, atheist ; camee, cameo ; colisee, coli- seum; coryphee, cory- pheus ; empyree, highest heaven; lycee, lyceum; mausolee, mausoleum ; musee, museum; hy- menee, marriage; pe- rigee, perigee ; pygmee, pygmy; trochee, trochee ; trophee, trophy; spon- dee, spondee; scarabee, scarabee. eike baleine, whale. ence cadence, cadence. Exc. — silence, silence. enne antienne, anthem. Exc. — renne, reindeer. ense offense, offence. esse tristesse, sadness. ie charpie, lint. Exc. — genie, genius; peri- helie, perihelion ; incen- die, conflagration ; para- pluie, umbrella; pavie, clingstone peach. chaudiere., boiler. doctrine, doctrine. pratique, rive, coulisse, paille, practice, shore, sliding-shutler. straw. Exc. — intervalle, interval j 264 SKSD1R. g 1. Masculine Terminations. ISME ISQUE UGE ffaxs prism, risk. pnsme, risque, Exc. — bisque, soup. ebtniste, cabinet-maker. Exc. — batiste, cambric ; liste, list; piste, track. refuge, refuge. arbuste, shrub. Feminine Terminations. libelle, libel; verraicelle. vermicelli ; violoncello, violoncello ; clievre- feuille, honey-suckle; portefeuille, pocket-book; vaudeville, vaudeville, bunch. Exc. — colosse, colossus ; carrosse, coach. nappe, table-cloth. not preceded by u. terre, land. Exc. — lieixe, ivy , parterre, flower-garden ; tonnerre, lh u ndcr ; pa rato n n t rro, lightniruj-rod ; verre, ami tie, friendship. Eat to, jiaw. 'JOB, — amniotic, amulet; Bqnelettei skeleton. URE nature, nature. use excuse, excuse uve cuve, tub. osse bosse, tpe KRE Tl4 TTE midi, noon. Exc— foi, faith ; fourmi, atU ; aiir^H-iiuili, af.er- noon ; loi, law ; merci, merry. U revenu, rw -bru, daughter-in- law ; vertu, virtue ; glu, bird-lime; cau, water; pcau, sii/i ; tribu, /rite. \*l. — Nouns Masculine is one acceptation, and FxMiNiira IN THE OTHER. Masculine. Aigle, Auno, Baft* Curtouche, Couple, Dcbco (ting.), taqle. alder. U.irhar;/ horse, tcrist (au ornaments {sculp- ture). male and female, crape. deliglU. Feminine. Aigle, Anne, Barb*, Ohm Cartouche, dxijilc, Crepe, Delicc (pi), r.tn.Ltrd ell. beard. carp. cartridge. a pair, a '/roc*, two. pin cake. delight*. FLURA1 OW HOUNB. — § 8. 285 Masculine. feminine. Espace, space. Espace, leading (in pri ing). writing-copy. Exemple, example. Exemple, Faux, forgery. Faux, scythe. Foret, drill. Foret, forest. Greffe, office of clerk of a court. Greffe, graft. Heliotrope, sunflower. Heliotrope, a mineral Hymne, classical chant. Hymn, Christian hymn. Line, book. Livre, pound. Manche handle. Manche, sleeve. M^moire, memoir, bill. Memoire, memory. Mode, mode,(grammar,) system, mould, model. Mode, fashion. Moule, Moule, shell-fish. CEuvre, (m. &• f.) work. GSuvres, literary works Office, divine service. Office, pantry. Ombre, a game. Ombre, shadow, spectre Orgue (smg.), organ. Orgues (pL), Palme, organ. Palme, hand, a measure. the advantage. Panache, plume. Panache, pea-hen. Parallele, comparison. Parallele, parallel line. Pendule, pendulum. Pendule, clock. Periode, acme, height. Periode, period, epoch. Pivoine, a bird. Pivoine, aflower. Plane, plane-tree. Plane, joiner's tool. Platine, platina. Platines, small: metallic plates, frying-pan. Poele, stove, pall. Poele, Poste, place, office. Poste, post-office. Pretexte, pretence. Pretexte, a Roman robe. R6gale, organ-pipe. Regale, right of receiving the ret enues of a vacant bishopric. Remise, hackney-coach. Remise, carriage-house. Serpentaire, Solde, constellation. Serpentaire, Solde, dragon-wort. balance of account. pay. Somme, nap, sleep. Somme, sum. Souris, smile. Souris, mouse. Tour, tour, turn, trick. Tour, tower. Vague, space, emptiness. Vague, wave. Vase, vase, vessel. Vase, mire, slime VoUe, veil. Voile, sail. § 8. — Formation of the Plural Nouns. (1.) The plural in French, as in English, is formed by the addition of s to the singular : Singular. Plural. maison, house ; maisons, houses. ville, town ; villes, towns. (2 ) First exception. — Nouns ending in the singular with s, *, or *, have the same form in the plural : 286 PLURAL Or SOU5S. — § 8. Singular. Plural fils, son ; fib. *()>»«. voix, voice ; voix, voices. nez, nose ; nez, »o5rt. (3.) Second exception.— Xouns ending in the singular with au and cu, take x in the plural: Singular. Plural. :, hat ; chapeaux, hats. k\L,jire ; feux. /re* (4) Third exception. — The following nouns ending in ou take* in the plural: Singular. PhtraL 'u*l ; Ujonx., jncel*. cailluu. jxOble ; caiUoux, /W»A/e* choux, cabbages. genou penmix, knee*. .. ami; utboux, <>*•/* joujou, plaything ; joujoux, playthings. (5.) Fourth exception. — The following nouns ending in ail, change th it termination into oux in the plural : u'ar. Plural. bail, I '.«*•#. :x, corals. \. enamel i. aoup;? sotipirnux, airholes. am; i4*; sous baux, under-leases travail, la '■ travmux, labors. (6.) Fifth excrpt ion.— The follr.u nn their plural irreg. Ularlv : Singular. Plural ail. garlic ; nnx. beta*!, cattle. boatiaux. baa no p'ural. (7.) Sixth MHtption. — Nouns ending in tlie. singular with al, ch&nga that termination into mix in the pi . ■ilmr. mat I il, gmeral ; • i-ix, generals, ' liorte ; .uix, horses. mal, rrt'/ ; maux, ur-U>ire, coachman's fees. § 10. — Nbum which have no Plural. (1.) The nouns <>f metals considered in themselves: as, or, gold, ardent, filter; plomb, lead; etain, pewter; fer, iron; cuivre, copper ; -ueh a- baume, balsam ; encens, incense, &.c. (3.) The names of virtues and vices, and MOM names relating to pinsieal ;md DOffll man : is, la jetuesss, youth; la beaute, beauty ; ia : : substantively : as, lc beau, the beautiful ; l'utile. 'he useji § 11. — HToUm WHICH IIAVK M> SlVOCLAB IN Tire 6ENSE HERB 1 Jit I.. Piancsfllse, FonsraiDsSj Appaa, arr Arr*t* (etre tux), to be under arrest. earnest money, an n al m. charms. ASBWSSj ■ bviroos, SSBMSa brushuood. confnrs. rows I Yitrnux, difficulties, betrothing, funrral. erpenses, costs, wages. wits manners, snuffers, jetrels, diamond*. tears. ■ tim*. darkness, jiincers. vindov-glau. § 12. — PbOPZB Nam (1.) Proper names, wbsn DOl iis,d liirurative'y, are invariable, even when preceded by the plural article, 1oh.(*) papne j'honore d'nvoir DVS> atari lc- deux S ItAT*ouAan. Sj>ain priiles itself on havinf givm Kris to the tvo Senecas. • Oft*n u*ed by the French bsfiM Ihi i of celebrated indmduaU THE ARTICLE. — § 13. 289 Locke, Montesquieu, J. J. lions- seau, as they arose in Europe, called upon modem nations to claim their liberty. Les Locke, les Montesquieu, les J. J. Rousseau en se levant en Europe, appelerent le3 peuples modernes a la libertc. Chateaubriand. (2.) When proper names are used figuratively, they take the form of the plural. t La France a eu ses Cesars et ses I France has had its Ccesars and Pompies. Noel et Chai'SAL. j Pompeys. \ That is, generals like Pompey and Cajsar. Un coup d'oeil de Louis enfan- I A glance from Louis produced taits des Gomeilles. Delille. | Comedies. That is, poets like Corneille. § 13. — The Article. (1.) The article is a word prefixed to a noun, or to a word used substantively, to determine the extent of its signification. (2.) Modern French grammarians recognize only one article, le. (3.) This article, contracted with the preposition de, is often used before a word in a partitive sense. [§ 78.] (4.) The words an, masc, one, fern., answering to the indefinite article a or an in English, are now very properly* classed with the numeral adjectives. We shall, however, for the sake of conven- ience, devote a few lines to them under this head. (5.) The article le, the, is la for the feminine, and les for the plural. (6.) The article is subject to two kinds of changes: elision [§ 146] and contraction. (7.) Elision is the suppression of the letters e, a, which are replaced by an apostrophe [ ' ] before a vowel, or an h mute [seeL.3 (11)] : thus, l'esprit, the mind, instead of lc esprit, l'amitic, the friendship, " la amitie\ l'homme, the man, " le homme. l'humanite, humanity, " la humanitc". (8.) Contraction is the union of the article le, les, with one of the prepositions, a, de. Thus, we say by contraction : J au livre, to the book, instead of a le livre. aux fruits, to the fruits, " a les fruits. . du livre, of the book, u de le livre. des flruits, of the fruits, " do les fruits. (9.) The contractions au, du, are not used before masculine words commencing with a vowel, or an h mute, nor before feminine words : * No difference can be made in rendering English into French, between a and one, so that in French un homme means a mail, or one man. Tha crtbjcr numeral adjectives might with as much propi iety have be? n called irtirlee as this, wofd un. 13 £90 Tni ARTICLE. S 13. ii l'liomme, to the man, a l'anji, to the friend. de rimiumc, of the man, de l'aini, of the friend (10.; Tre nrtk le used before words taken in ■ partitive sense [) 78 (1)], comes in connection or contraction with the preposition de; it ia rendered in E <\c or any, expressed or understood: i. m. some, bread or of the bread (a part rf\ :it, m. moneij, some money, of the money (a part of) i !i\ f. -\ tome meat, if the meat (a ;xir/ o/'^ .;■ ri< , f. tt/ver vimte, mnmw/i er^plate, o/* books, some books, of the books (a part of ). (11.) T indefinite article, at or on* is rendered in French i"r tiic feminine; when those tronhi are connected with the utepositioo da, the e of the preposition ia elided. Masculine. nn liiiinmo, a man. d'un hoiniuc, of or from a man, X Dfl li-mnuc, at or to a man. Feminine. tine fetUDttj «i wowan d'una famine, of or from « ami , ..: go t» a •*»*/«*. ObtervafiofM. re n ma.«culine word, commencing teith la, befi re -i fi minine word) commruehit) teith ml or h i-iute, mmnuinp vith' de Ia, betel :i I imiihik- erard, ( » a// ra»<«. re a masculine *JSSa\ a-mmencina *v7A " 'UN/, a 1'. \- '. I either commteneiHo with i'-r, J a voir*/ or h mute, aux, far the plural, in all m noun, ; re a i minine noun, d'un, I dine iimm, i a on, 1 aline noun, a uue, beeVa ■ fti— iiiiiaai noma, I.e prnparison of superiority expresses a quality ji a higher degree in one object than in another; this comparison ia formed by placing plus, mure, before the adjective, and que, than, after it : Lcs notions sont plus sinc6res que Actions arc more sincere than ies paroles. Mlls. »s Soobsst. vorJ*. Lepssdds serf sat s*ieM*£sitqoa The foot of '.he staff is better ctlui du boeuf. BofVSOL formed than that uf the "jr. (fi.) The comparison of inferiority expresses a quality in a lower degref in one object than in another; it is formed by placing moins, re the adjective, and que, than, after it : Shipwreck and death are teat fatal titan those pleasures which attack virtue. Le nanfrsge el Is mart not mojna :i atta- quciit la vertu. l'V\> l on. 7 We have only three sdjectives which are comparatives of them- | Meillcur, instead of plus bon, which is never OSed in the sense of helter : II a'sat meil/eur ami ni parent I We ham M better ftiemd, no bet- La 1'r'MMM. I tor relation than •> J'ire, instead of jlus mmuais, whicli may however he nasd: [OS k I Tit' remedy is at times tmrse than m.il. \ the evil. Ifoindre, Instead of phu petit, an expression also i • DM MlS jxtit OSS d'iMrc I Bains Us* than great is not being i grand. Dots is. | small. . or third degree of qualification, exprs quality carried to a very high, or t (l the highest degree; thence there are tw.. sorts, of superlatives: the relative and the ah* * Mi<-nx. better; pi-, irr.rie ; moin«. fete. The English words ratter, pons, lass, :>r.- snmetimss adverbs, and when they ar.- so, thooid !»• r.>n- dsrsd bj the serersJ words placed at the commencement of this note. A r determining the nature of those words m Englisti i- \ 1. To change the word better into the expression "is a better manner." If tins ehange may !><• mads without changing the *en.«c, the word better if an adverb and inu-t bfl r . 1 1 I • n- 1 t>\ I ,• He r<;«i/ .- He read" worse (in a worse man- I II lit pis (plus mal) quo sor tier than his brother. r. Winn you may substitute "a smaller amount or quantity" for the Void Kssf, it Khould he rep I He reads /«•** (a smal'er amount) I II lit moine quo »M frare. f forming the feminine: rived from tin- participle present of a French \erb by dropping an!, and substituting >ur, change the fmai ■ PpK Part, n'.ine. Feminine. dansarif, whence d*Mfvr; and thence dsMMMfc tninip.nif, " llOBUCHf; " trompcusr. H.rc, however, note that chan!>-ur, when signifying a ;>/v kes for the feminine container. Like anomalies appear in the following: make in the feminine follow the general rule onj 7/iake in the- ftni nine make in tin feminine " complete. concrete. discrete, itxpiictc. Mi i.-te. k replete. tnauvaiso. niaise. r douco. prctixe. roQBMi t ierce. 1 !cur, ambassador, bailleur, lessor, hunter, demandeur, ylaintiff, defcndeur, defendant, make in the adrice. 1 aiilcresse. dirnanderesee. , ili'fendereaee. devineur, gursser, enchanteur, tnek feminine '■levinereflM. enchai guuTenx jxcliiur, tinner, a, st riant, unto. I'< i li.n»»e. ner\ ante. •2J. Those ending infruraud derived from the Latin, and, consequent* FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES.; — § 16. 205 y, not falling under the rule (Isl) just given, form the feminine by changing teur into trice; as, Masculine. Feminine. acteur, actor, actrice, actress. admirateur, admirer, admiratrice, admirer Exceptions to this, however, are the following: debiteur, debtor, *j f de"bitrice. executeur, executor, I . . ., executrice. inspecteur, inspector, > . . . < inspectrice. inventeur, inventor, I * j inventrice. persecuteur, persecutor, J \ persecutrice. 3d. Those ending in erieur. also majeur, mineur, meilleur, follow the general rule, that is, add e to form the feminine ; as, exterieur, exterior, ~\ f exterieure, superior superior, k {n ^ supeneure majeur, of age, major, V feminine ^ m ?J eure - mineur, minor, I J J mineure. meilleur, better, J {meilleure. (6.) Adjectives, as also nouns, indicating occupation chiefly exer- cised by men, are alike in the masculine and the feminine ; as, auteur, author ; litterateur, literary person. (7.) The following adjectives having two forms for the masculine form their feminine as follows: Masculine before Masculine before a consonant. a vowel or h mate. Feminine. beau, bel, belle, handsome. fou, fol, folle, foolish. mou, mol, molle, soft. nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, new. vieux, vieil, vieille, old. Irregular Adjectives. (8.) The following adjectives form their feminine ii regularly . Masctdine. Feminine. absous, absolved, absoute. benin, benign, benigne. blanc, white, blanche. caduc, decrepit, infirm, caduque. coi, quiet, coite. dissous, dissolved, dissoute. favori, favorite, favorite. frais, fresh. fraiche. franc, free, frank, franche. gentil, pretty, genteel, gentille. grec, Grecian, Greek, grecque. hebrew, Hebrew, hebrai'que, used only of ths Hebrew tougue. jouveuceau (obsolete), a stripling, jouvenceile 296 IBREGCLAR ADJECTIVES. §17. Masculine. Feminine. {'nrucau, twin, iumclle. oog, long, *' ow < Tongue, malt re, matter, tn i mattresso. malin, cunning, malignant, maligne mulatre. mi lmihitre or mulati muscat, nm muacade. nul, null, w»ir t nullc. obi' a _• public, puUiqua • 7, changed, lvsolue. 4m, barren, tvcho. sot, till;/, potto. traitor, treacherous, trar.r rkish, tarqua vkillot, oldish, vieiilotte. r> . The foUowia \ ' ire no :'"ninine : ■piu*. partitan, partisan. chetata, eh'snut color. timoin, witm i Hum, § 17 N 01 Tin: Pukai I YES. (1.) (7. B .— The plural of adjectives is formal by the ad- dition of i to the MolinO|Or to the feminine termination: : online bj Plural. lib-Vault. nation n.itmnaaz. rural, rural, ruraux. AQREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. — 8 18. 297 We quote from Bescherelle's Grammaire nalionale. the adjectives which form their plural in als: Singular. Plural, amic&l, friendly, amicala. bancal, bandy-legged, bancals. fatal, fatal, fatal.?, final, final, finals, frugal, frugal, frugals. filial, filial, filials. glacial, frozen, icy, glacials, initial, initial, initials, labial, labial, labials, matinal, early, matinals. medial, medial, medials. naval, naval, navals. pascal, paschal, pascals, penal, penal, penals. theatral, theatrical, theatrals. § 18. — Agreement of Adjectives witii Nouns. (1.) The adjective must agree, in gender and number, with the noun or pronoun which it qualifies : Masculine. Feminine. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. le beau jardin, les beaux jardins; la belle maison, les belles maisons. the fine garden, the fine gardens ; the fine house, the fine houses. le grand livre, les grands livres ; la grande carte, les grandes cartes. the large book, the large books ; the large map, the largetnaps. (2.) This agreement must take place, not only when the adjective immediately precedes or follows the noun or pronoun, but also when it i3 separated by other words : Feminine. Singular. — L'honneur de passer pour bonne l'empechait de se mon- trer mauvaise. Marivaux. The honor of passing for good pre- vented her showing herself bad. Plural. — Loin de nous raidir con- tre les inclinations qui sont bonnes, il faut les suivre pour servir Dieu. Mme. de Maintenon. Far from resisting our good incli- nations, we should follow than in order to serve God. Masculine. Singular. — Plaise a. Dieu de te rendre assez bon pour me'riter la vie heureuse ! Fenelon. May God render thee siifficiently good to deserve the blessed life. Plural. — Jamais, en quoi que ce puisse etre les mediants ne sont bons h. rien dc bon. J. J. Rousseau. The wicked are never, in any cir- cumstances, fitted {good) to perform any thing good. (3.) When an adjective relates to two or more substantives, whether in the singular or the plural, and all of the same gender, it must agree with the nouns in gender, and be put in the plural : Leriche et X indigent, l'imprudent et I The rich and the poor, the twt- Ut «age, prudent and tht -oise, bring 13* 298 adjectives.— § 19, 20. Sujets a ni#me lot, subi-sent ra«me ' Sul-jeet to the same law, itper%enet sort. J. B BoCBBSifl, | the same /ale. (4.) When the words which the adjective qualities are of different genders, the adjective must be put in the masculine plural: he de rcndrc Ararat?, ma / try to render happy, my wife, •. mime mon my child, and even my eat and m« chat i- dog. !'ii:rre. .it.'- publics ne ft '.:- Public order and ut'lity cannot be le fruit du crime. the fruits of crime. Massillon. - special rules on tills point, see { 83. § 19. — Determining or Di.tiuminative Adjectives. There tennining adjectivea — the demonstrative! the possessive, the numeral, and the indefinite. (1.) The demonstrative adjective* IN used, when nn object is to be particularly specified -t pointed "ut. They are never, in French, ..it is, without the nouns which they determine: !ar. Maseutine — O, (Ml or (I . mencing with a commencing with a • : .irsi <r that woman. cet ami. that or this friend. ' ct U«- crw'-e, that or this orord. Cct liummr, this or that man. this or that harp. Plural. dn torn- ■ fut un sommeil, , tusttm J— m phut* en vase dis- There tha' ..' prepared as a :he dew \n it* Daw aa coupe elegante acrucillc la elegant cup. ra»«v iTiiaaaxa.) POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. — § 21. 299 *7« honneurs que le vulgaire ad- mire, ReVeiilent-ils les morts au sein de monuments ? Soulie. Do these honors, admired by the vulgar, awake the dead from their sepulchres ? (2.) When it is necessary to make, in French, a difference similar to that existing between the English words this and that, the adverbs ci and la must be placed after the nouns: ce livre-ci, this book (here), ces livres-ci, these books, ce livre-la, that book (there), ces livres-la, those books. § 21. — Possessive Adjectives. (1.) The possessive adjectives, which are always joined -to a noun, relate to possession or property; they are: Singular. Plural Masculine. Feminine. for both genders. ma, mes, my. ta, tes, thy. ea, ses, his, her, its. notre, nos, our. votre, vos, your. leur, leurs, their. (2.) In French, these adjectives take the gender and number of the object possessed, and not, as in English, those of the possessor* Masc. sing. Fern. sing. PI. both genders. mon frere, my brother, ma soeur, my sister, mes cousins, my cousins. ton livre, thy book, ta plume, thy pen, tes maisons, thy houses. son papier, his or her sa table, his or her ta- ses habits, his or her paper. ble. clothes. notre cheval, our horse, notre vache, our cow, nos prairies, our meadows. votre lit, your bed, votre chaise, your chair, vos crayons, your pencils. leur foin, their hay, leur paille, their straw, leurs fermes, their farms. mon, ton, son, notre, votre, leur. Sobri6te dans toute chose, Mon ami, c'est l'art de jouir. Du Tremblay. Ma main de quelque fleur es- qnisse la peinture. Castel. Mes sens sont glaces d'effroi. J. B. Rousseau. De son propre artifice on est sou- vent victime. Colin d'Harleville. A sa vocation chaque etre doit repondre. Fr. de Neufchateau. II faut de ses amis enrlurer quel- que chose. Moliere. Notre vie est une maison, Y mettre le feu c'est folie. KlVKUNAIS. Sobriety in all things, is, my friend, the true enjoyment. My hand sketches the picture oj some flower. My senses are frozen with fear. One is often the victim of his own artifice. Every being should fulfil his vo- cation. We must bear something from our friends. Our life is a house; to set it on fire is folly. 300 HUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 22. Yos maOles se rompront sous la I Tour meshes will break under tht clinrye pe=p.nte. CasTO. hear;/ burden. fleure suimmt i n will follow my slept t6cvi ant rca vuo. (Thk same.) | andpletue my tight. (3.) The adjectives mon, my; ton, thy; bob, his or her, are used m. linine words commencing with a vowel or an h mute, in order to prevent the meeting of two vowels, or of a Vowel «.nd an h mute; thus we say: ruon dper, my sword, and never ma e'pce. . i |K>use. mee, hi) arm;/, bv.t Ml i r s.i ariuee. Ccn est (kit, »ion hcurc est venue. I All is over, my hour is evme. BODJUB. (4.) The po9scsaivo adjectives must be repeated before evert noun: Mon fn're. ma 8o?ur et mes cou- ! My brother, sister, and cousin* art tjhm sont 4 I'.\ri.~. I a* Paris. .:. .\!>.inCTTVES. (1.) T. of numeral adjectives: the cardinal and rial. Una! numlu ; iply tho number or quantity, without (3.) The ordinal munben marl. I r rank which persons and things oecopy: • Ac. the cardinal and ordinal inimi teJ Xumbers. (5.) Orlinal Xumbrr*. xxn./eininint une, OHf. uint re, first ■ d,/.secondo, 2d. ' quntrc, 4 quatrii 4 th. 6 Kfc, •IT, 8 Cth. halt, 7 7 th. 8 lib ■ 9 90s, d.r, loth, 11 11th. IS 12th. ' 1 8th. 11 14th. 15 16th. Ifth, n '•mo, 17th, dix-hmt. 18 diz-buil 18th. ilix iieuf, 1 1 Ifth, ■Otk Tinjft-et-un, 21 .i nit me, tlst 1CUMERAL ADJECTIVES. — § 28. 301 Cardinal Numhei s. Ordinal Numltrt. vingt-deux, &c, 22 vingt:deuxieme, <&c, 22d. trente, SO trentieme, 30th. trente-et un, &c, 31 trente-et-unieme, 31st. trente-de ux, 32 trente-deuxidme, 32d. quaraate, 40 quarantieme, 40th. quarante-et-un, As, 41 quarante-et-unienae, 41st. quarante-deux, 42 quarante-deuxieme, 42d. cinquante, 50 chiquantieme, 50th. cinquante-et-un, 51 cinquante-e t-unieme, 51st. cinquantc-deux, 52 cinquante-deuxienie, 52d. soixante, 60 soixan tieme, 60th. Boixante-et-un, 61 soixante-et-unieme, 61st. soixante-deux, ::a chci in<>i, duuze J. J. 1. Mon Lies eighty years, the dog on/;/ tin. They brought me, at my house, ticeli'e hundred francs. (4.) Vingt and . ait, however, when multiplied by one number, and . by another, <>r, it" not followed by a number, used to indi- te the form of the plural. quatre i /n^-cinq h o mmea, eighty-five men. .x hommea, tdrsd and two men. Cb;u .iiit, lc jour d V.iLTAIUL. Char' in*-/ 'limed em- f the West, Christmas-day, in the year sight hundred. Mille — (thousand.) I of the year, reckoned from the coiui: tan era to the year two thousand of the ■ !, mil. L'an mil huit cent cinquanto, The >rar one thousand eight kun- I f ' r ' ■ • which have preceded our era, and deh will follow our present thousand, we write the full form, mille. ■ The first irruption of the (.'mils I of l'\r- OKin, ab-ut the year of the world (7.) Million, billion take the plural form. II TO C VKDINAL i.na. (1.) In French, in computing from twenty to thirty, thirty to forty - number unM always pn In. We mat not aay, as often in Bngliah, one and twenty, but always vingt-et-un, • nly used Wforo tin: thus, we say vingt-et-un, tvrtnty (and; one, and simply vinyt-deUA, twenty-!' - in Eugliflfl tne words hun- dred and ikoutand; it mual i red in Prencn. We aay: mille hommea, on' thousand ma cci.t : one hu.iirrd francs. (4) When the words cent and mille nre Uaed Bubotaotivelj the name l by the hoi !. in num >er or in weight, the word un may be placed before theni ; the name of the object being preceded by the prcpow- tion it : NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. — § 25. 303 Un cent, un mille (millier) de briques, One hundred, one thousand (of) bricks. Un cent (un quintal) de sucre, One hundred (weight) of sugar. (5.) The words septante, seventy; octante, eighty; and nonante, finely, are now nearly obsolete, being used only in a few provinces of France. They are, as may be seen in the preceding table, replaced by awkward expressions soixante-dix, sixty-ten ; quatre-vingts, four- twenties (four score) ; quatre-vingl-dix, four-score-ten, &c. (6.) Before the words onze, eleven, and onzieme, eleventh, the arti- cle is not elided. We say le onze, le onzieme, la onzieme. In pro- nunciation, the s of the plural article les is silent when this artieJe pre- cedes onze or onzieme. § 25. — Observations on the Ordinal Numbers. (1.) It will be seen that the ordinal numbers, with the exception of premier and second, are formed from the cardinal — 1. By the change off into vieme in neuf; 2. By the change of e into vieme in those ending with that vowel ; 3. By the addition of vieme in those ending with a consonant : 4. Cinq requires uieme to make cinquieme, fifth. (2.) All ordinal adjectives may take the form of the plural. (3.) Premier and second alone vary for the feminine, and make premiere, seconde, &c. (4.) Unieme (first) is only used in composition with vingt, trente, &c. (5.) Second, deuxieme, (second) — Deuxieme supposes a series, a con- tinuation ; second merely indicates the order : 1st. We may say of a work which has four or more volumes : J'ai le deuxieme (or le second) to- I / have the second volume of that lume de cet ouvrage. | work. 2d. In speaking of a work which has only two volumes, we should say • J*ai le second (not le deuxieme) I I have the second volume of Bes- rolume du dictionnaire de Bescher- cherclle's dictionary. elle. I 3d. Under the ordinal numbers may be placed the following words, vhick are often used substantively : Trentenaire, thirty, of thirty years' duration ; Quarantenaire, forty, of forty " " Cinquantenaire, fifty years old, of fifty " Sexagenaire, sexagenarian, of sixty " " Septuagenaire, septuagenarian, of seventy " " Octogenaire, octogenarian, of eighty " " Nonagenaire, nonogenarian, of ninety " " Centenaire, centenarian, of one hundred 4th. Trentenaire and quarantenaire are law terms : Possession trentenaire, quar ante- ] Thirty, forty -years' posieition. 304 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 8 26, j.1. 5th. Of the others, sexagenairc, scptuagenaire, and octogenairo only «r« in frequent use : Un octog&iaire plantait, Aw A man eight jy years oid u is plant La 1'oxTAixr. I inp trees. (1.) In speaking of the days of the month, the French use the car- le Jnix man, le £t-*ept aviil. L'ouvorture ■ !■•- EtaU g£neraux cat lii-u le etng mai, I (2.) We must, however, lu premier (not fun) juin. f/ir second of ,\far(h. (he aeeentaenth of April. The opening <■/" the $latr*-o with the French arc: unit*. unit ; , I'.iiro, trio. •'■ ittaaine, dooaaino, fifteen,/ ▼ .. '1.-LW. sere, ;.. thirty; qnaraal ore ; cmqaant ' tared ; Hand; licm, lvr-> (!. 1 mi i . a myriad ; 1 iiiiliiun. m milUa$h IKDBFIHITE ADJECTIVES. — § 28, 29, 30. 303 (2.) The termination aine signifies nearly, and when added to words ©f number i3 equivalent to the English some, in cases like the follow- ing : I have some twenty hooks, i. e. about twenty books. J'ai une vingtaine de livres. § 28. — Fractional Numerals. un quart, deux quarts, trois quarts, le tiers, deux tiers, la moi tie, one quarter ; two quarters; three quarters ; the third; two thirds; the half; un cinqaidme, deux cinquifcmes, un sixifcme, etc., un dixieme, etc., un centifcme, un millieme, one fifth ; two fifths; one sixth, etc. ; one tenth, etc. ; one hundredth ; one thousandth. (1.) It will be seen that, with the exception of tiers, quart and moi- tie, these numbers take the form of the ordinal numerals. They may, therefore, take the form of the plural when necessary. (2.) The word demi, when used adjectively and preceding the noun, is invariable : tine cfoni'-heure f., half an hoar; une demi-anne f., half an ell. (3.) When coming after the noun to denote an additional half, it agrees in gender with the noun : une heure et demie, one hour and a half; une aune et demie, one ell and a half. (4.) When used substantively, demi may take the form of the plural: Cette horloge sonne les heures et I This clock strikes the hours and lea demies. | the half hours. (1.) Premifcrement, Deuxiernement, Secondement, Troisiemcinent, § 29. — Ordinal Adverts. first ; in the first place ; Quatriomcmcnt, Cinquiemement, Sixieraemcnt, Scptiemenient, Dixiemement, fourthly ; fifthly; sixthly ; seventhly; tenthly. secondly ; thirdly ; (2.) These, like adverbs of manner, are formed by the addition of ment to the feminine form of the adjective § 30. — Indefinite Adjectives. (1.) The indefinite adjectives are used when any thing is to be represented or referred to in a general or indefinite manner. They are, — what : aucun, not any, not one, cbaque, every, each; memo, same; nul, no ; plusieurs, several; quel, quelconque, quelque, teL tout, whatever ; some; such; all 306 INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE S. § 30. (J) Auct;s is crcnerally followed by ■ noun, with which it must agree. It is followed by M when it comes before ;i verb: ctucun honinie, no nan ; aucune feinine, no \coman. N chemin do Bean ne conduit •i:v. Li Poxtaimk I I f.'ullt Xojloicery path leads to glory All tkote vl,o have no virtue ar* They can bear ,w leyiti,,, minion, tet ho bounds to'tlieir crimes. MKMMTertu L\ RooasvouoAULa J •. (3.) 1mm is by the Preach authors sometimes used in the plural Trir nucun eni- ElUCUIICf ornc* a law I I and RHl should be put in the plural only before such words BMd in the alllgelar, or have in fa lingular ft dilVerent iion. BAfljOT h ■ •!' . and Is used only la tho atnjwHn It always preeedea the noun, and cannot be separated from it by aa ■ prepo-ition. ever be aaod without i noun: its pleasures every Hat ■ ( 5 of mm . in . ::.n be rendered by the word ■mm* m an ke the form of the plural, but does i. . i, r : vertli; v.-rtu vihne ; it i- ue. 1 ' ' B'oOt ni The pmplt and the qreat ha, , * c **" i/asai aaraWaaaw Vaotbbaboi i v U ///«• t.f- 7.i/,/r* (| in ' tks Puree (fi.) It is at times difficult todistin , f rom mime an adverb, which ia invariable. ■ (3.)] i . re< i In gendet umber with tl ; , ii qualifies. Llk< i ■ - Pfbj If" Imipi.-; .1 '■■ iwpwns; hemit ■ ■■ fuit. RaOUCU , it, it asjoitUkim. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. § 30. 307 (8.) Nul is sometimes used alo.ie, in the sense of no one: Nul n'est content de sa fortune, | No one is pleased with his fortune, ni mecontent ile son esprit. | nor displeased with his own wit. Mme. Deshoulieres. (9.) Plusieurs is, of course, always in the plural. It does not vary its form : T ! faut bien qu'il y ait plusieurs "aisons d'ennui, quand tout le monde «?st d'accord pour bailler. Florian. Tliere must necessarily be several reasons for ennui, when all agree in yawning. (10.) Quel takes the gender and number of the noun to which it I -dates. It is sometimes immediately followed by its noun, from which it may be separated by one or several words : What a delightful picture the Quel tableau ravlssant presentent les campagnes I Delille. Quelle invisible force a sounds I'univers ? L. Racine. Quels sons harmonieux, quels efforts ravissants, De la reconnaissance egalent les accents ? country offer' ! What invisible hand lias con- quered the universe? What harmonious sounds, what ravishing strains, equal the voice of gratitude i (11.) Quelconque is always placed after the noun, and varies only for the plural : Toutes les jouissances sont pre- Cedees d'un travail quelconque. Mme. Campan. Deux points quelconques etant doanes The Academy. (12.) Quelque in the sense of. agrees in number with the noun: II y a du merite sans elevation, mais il n'y a point d'elevation sans quelque merite. La Rochefoucauld. Quelques vains lauriers que pro- mette la guerre, On peut etre heros sans ravager la terre. Boileau. All enjoyments are preceded by some sort of exertion. Two points of some kind being given me (a certain numher), or whatever, There is merit without elevation, but there is no elevation without some merit. Whatever vain laurels war may promise, one may be a hero without ravaging the earth. (13.) Quelque having the sense of about or some or however, is in- variable : Quel age avez-vous ? Vous avez bon visage ! Eh ! quelque soixante ans. Racine, les Plaideurs. Alexandre perdit quelque trois cents Luiiimes, quaud il vainquit I'orus. D'Ablaxcourt. Quelque mediants que soient les homines, ils n'oseraient paraitre ennemis de la vertu. La Rochefoucauld. How old are you ? You look well. Oh ! some sixty years. Alexander lost some three hundred men when he vanquished J-'orus. However' wicked men may be, they do not dire to appear ennnies of virtue. S08 THE PRO.VOCK.- § 31, 32. (14.) Tel makes in the feminine telle; in the plural m.wuliro, le!s ; in tlio plural feminine, telle*. It agrees with the noun which it qualities: td livre, man book ; telle httre, mdl let!>r ; tel* livrcs, such books', ttuh lifters. (15.) TOOT meaning every, is of course always in the singular, but varies for the feminine: Tout ritoyen doil Mrvir km pays; '.re ile Bon zele. \.\ Ifom, Kn toute chose, il faut BOOtideter U tia .funk. Aery citizen should serve his country ; the toldUf with his blood, the prittt irith his zeal. In every tiling tee must consider the end. (16.) Tou' % in the - . . greea in gender and number with in to which i: re!al tout Pargeoij '»'.' Urn m ■ la tofla, a'l the cloth. 11 <'tnit BBHiaaana d« t<»r all thotr rain ol>ject4 ' I i-!t irhirh form al! the ilcsircs and all tk* I CM. ! if leant hit 97 (5). (1.) The pronoun, In French, aa i;i other I k a word i rder t<> prevent Ita tuo frequent the parta which each j part ia called | (3.) There arc three pen '■ Or that which speaks; the r thai apokan o£ (3.) T The p i The demonstrative ; TllC J HI.1..C • The iu !i unite. ■ . (1.) Tl pronouna are so called because they seem to lly than the other pronouna. DOOna are : inative Form. Relative i'orwi. ■-. \r. Plural. rVarat 1 3 je, ' tl t u, ' I il. he, it, m. 1 cUe, she, it, L ; cllct, t tliey. me, i [him HrMraafj N, "temulves. PERSONAL PRONOUNS,— § S3. 809 (2.) Direct regimen, or Accusative. When pi iced before the verb. When placed after a verb. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 1. mo, vie, nous, its; moi, me ; nous, us; 2. te, thee ; vous, you ; toi, thee ; vous, you ; (le, him.it.ra.;, .-, (both le, him, it, m. ; . , ; m \ both. 3 '|la, her, iil-; les ' ihem '\ gend. la, her, it, I ; le3 ' < /tew ' } gender*. (3.) Indirect regimen, or Dative. When placed before the verb. Singular. Plural. 1. me, tome; nous, to us ; 2. te, - (both genders). When placed after the verb. Singular. Plurals tooi, a moi, to me ; nous, a nous, to us , toi, a toi, to thee ; vous, a vous, to you ; (4.) Indirect regimen ; Genitive and Ablative. Always placed after the verb. Singular. Plural. de moi, of or from me ; de nous, of or from us; de toi, " thee ; de vous, " you ; de lui, " him ; d'eux, " them, m. , d'elle, " her ; d'elles, " them, i. § 33. — Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. (1.) The French, as well as the English, use the second person plural for the second person singular, in addressing one person. (2.) The second person, however, is used, as in English, in address- ing the Supreme Being: Grand Pieu! tes jugements sont I Great God! thy judgments are remplis d'6quite. Des Bahreaux. | full of equity. (3.) It is also used in poetry, or to give more energy to the diction. my sovereign king ! Here I am, trembling and atom before thee. (4.) It is used by parents to children, and also among intimate friends. (5.) The pronoun il is used unipersonally, in the same manner as the English pre noun it, il pleut, it rains; il gele, it freezes. (5.) Observe that the personal pronouns of the third person are not need for the indirect regimen to represent inanimate objects, O mon souverain roi ! Me voici done tremblante et seule devant toi. Racine, Esther. 310 personal rnoKOrxs. — § 83. The relative pronouns E*, of or from il [) 39 (17)], T, to it [) 39 (18)] are Used instead of the personal pronouns. Thus, in speaking of u house, we ilo n<>t say, Je tui ajouterai une aile, / trill add a wing U- U. We inn-' J'v iijouterai une aile ; / trill add a wing to it {thereto). In spe&king Of SO author, we may say : Que peosearsoaa de lui i Who' do you think of himf But in Speaking of hi-* iOOk, we should say : What do >iou think of it (th'rtnf)! (6.) Tin- word mime, plural mimes, may be u-eil after the pronoun le r>i lui -.it- the kin : / himself l.i r. : the q !• - : net, the ),rinr,s thniiselvrs. UN prinOSSSSS *Ht* ■ the yrincettet themselves. (7 The prOnOUM una. toi, lui, ru.r, are often used after the verb, greater feme to ■ nominative pronoun of the mum person, where the emphasis is placed on the nominative in English, or where the Auxiliary do is used. y le d "i, or / do *a;i so. lit, l*i, he tayy M, or JM dors SSJf *o. (8.) T. . »ioi, tm, /hi, r;/.r, are BMJ instead of tho nominati\e pr. \-\\ pronouns, J, thou, he, they, when r | I , rl> in an \heii they are used by ' li.i\r a \erb under- stood after then : vin» M.>L Who arrived thit morning f I. lie and I. >'■•« tud thei/. VotU lui. r.ie letter than he. Tom ri id at well a* I. me pronouns are need in exclamationo, and in thone tab pronouns, /. 1 1 d by tno relative pronoon H Eur allsr I Lob hi ' ndont Is.. ■ OM *irk . . . i'niiT. lie tr/„, it an officer. Kn fits. The,/ irhn are learned I ; it {• he. It il the,/. r#n61opc, w» f e rn s, at mc* q«J P sndapt kit wife, and I n\o mm *aw »nti hi*, boos svona perdu 1 i .,.<• j f>nvnce de le rSToir. flu. ne pronouns sad of the natives,/*! tUf dui, when the verb km several aubjocts vnfal ore all Your father tnd I were a long time enemies. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. — § 34. 31] pronouns, or partly nouns and partly pronouns. The vert may then be immediately preceded by a pronoun in the plural, representing in one word all the preceding subjects. Votre pfcre et moi, nous avons 6te longtemps ennemis l'un de l'autre. Fenelon. Rica et moi sommes peut-etre les Rica and I are, perhaps, tJie first. premiers. Montesquieu. (11.) The recapitulating pronoun and the verb sometimes come tirst in the sentence. Nous avons, vous et moi, besoin I You and I have need of tolerance. de tolerance. Voltaire. (12.) The reflective pronoun se, himself, &c, is used for botli genders, and for both numbers; for persons and for things; and always accompanies a verb. Les yeux de l'arnitie se trompent I The eyes of friendship are seldom rarement. Voltaire. | deceiued {deceive themselves). (13.) The same pronoun has sometimes a reciprocal and sometimes a reflective meaning, according to the context : ils se flattent, they flatter themselves. ils se flattent, they flatter one another, each oilier. (14.) Soi, himself, itself, &c, is of both genders and numbers, and is applied to persons and things. It is used in general and inde- terminate sentences; having commonly an indefinite pronoun for the nominative : We have often need of one more humble than ourselves. It is always in our power to act honorably. On a souvent besoin d'un plus petit que soi. La Fontaine. II depend toujours de soi d'agir honorablement. Girault-Duvivier. Etre trop me*content de soi est une faiblesse. Mme. de Sable. To be too much displeased with one's self is a weakness. For additional rules on the personal pronouns, see Syntax, $ 98, and following. § 34. — Possessive Pronouns. (1.) The possessive pronouns, which are formed from the personal pronoui:&, represent, in the radical part, the possessor, while in termina- tion they always agree with the thing possessed. Some relate to one person, some to several. (2.) POSSESSIVES RELATING TO ONE PERSON : The object possessed being in the — Singular. Plural. Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. 1. le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, mine; 2. le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine; 8. le sien, la siennc, les siens, les siennes, his, hers, iit 312 POSSESSIVE PBOK0rK6. § 35. (3.) Two or more Persons: 77i* object possessed being in the— Singular. Plural. Masculine. Frminint. M:s. and Fern le n6tre, la rnttrc, lai nOtiee, ours; le v6tre, la v«">tro, lcs v6trea, yours; le lcur, la leur, le* lcurs, theirs. § U. — l: -tvE Pronouns. (1.) It may be Men from the above table that, as before said, the termination of the poeooenWe pronoun agrees in gender and numbe* with the re plume- et el la mienne. I t/IIM<\ BUI ct lee miennes. •- sisters and mine. i 'fortunes of other* tnut*r$ of the king feel that ry, lit* his own, is in na- j'iness. pttd b nl/ le and mine. Vos ! I rvthers and mine. On voit I.- maox d'autnu, lite do, I your letter dated, de. (3.) T itely when we or intimate friends ; : let miens, la r.nir. I pit- .i oootentar. I Halaonreni .... qni porte ches lee tin\s le glaive et lei flambeaux. rrimc." del notre*. I have my family or friends, th$ court, .'.. • leaea Wretched is he who carries among his fel lo w e itiamt the sicord and th* II > mult bear the penalty of th crime* of our family or j (4.) /. need ebeolntely as the words mint and thine in Bngtieh, in the eenee of posaeeaion, ptoyeitF ! And mine and thine, t%H> punctilio ous brothm. Y.\ le mien at U tieu, dens fi>rr« pointillcux. I'.'Ii.iai. /.<• lien _ this, ceux-ci, celles-ci, that, ceux-la, celles-la, ce. it, they. 111?' Absolute Demonstrative Pronouns. ceci, cela this, ) not used in the that, ) plural. § 3*7. — Remarks on the Demonstrative Pronouns. (1.) The demonstrative pronouns celui, celle, &c, assume the gen- der and number of the nouns which they represent : Je ne connais d'avarice permise que celle du temps. Stanislas Leczinsky. Les seules louanges que le coeur donne, sont celles que la bonte s'at- tire. Massillon. Methinks no avarice is allowable unless it be that of time. The only -praises which the heart gives are those tohich goodness de- serves. (2.) These pronouns are sometimes used absolutely before qui, que dont, etc., in the same manner as the English personal pronouns he, they, &c, before who, whom, &c. : Celui qui rend un service doit 1'oublier, celui qui le recoit, s'en sou- venir. Barthelemy. Aimer ceux qui vous haissent ceux r" vous persecutent, c'est la charite chretien, c'est l'esprit de la reli- gion. BOURDALOUE. He who renders a service should forget it ; he who receives it sltould remember it. To love those who hate you, those who persecute you, is the charity of the Christian ; it is the spirit of re- ligion. (3.) Celui-ci, celle-ci, etc. ; celui-la, celle-la, are used when it is de- sirable to denote the comparative proximity or remoteness expressed tn English by the words this and that : celui-ci, i'iis one. celui-la, that one. (4.) Celui-ci, celui-la, etc., are often used to express contrast or comparison. They are then equivalent to the English expressions the former, the latter ; this one, that one : Un magistrat integre et un brave ofiicier, sont eeralement estimables : celui-la fait la guerre aux ennemis domestiques, celui-ci nous protege contre les ennemis exteYieurs. GlRAULT-DuVXVIER. Tel est l'avantage ordinaire Qu'ont sur la beaute" les talent3 : Ceux-ci plaisent dans tous les temps ; (JtUe-ld n'a qu'un temps pour plaire. VOLTAIRE. An upright magistrate and a brave officer are equally estimable: the former makes war against domestic enemies, the latter protects usagaintt foreign enemies. Such is the ordinary advantage which talents possess over beauty: the former phase at all times ; th» latter has but one time to pleant. 314 RELATIVE I'RONOCNS. £ 38, 39. (5.) Oct, ccla, have no plural, ami are u^ed only of things. They do not refer to a w on! expressed before, but serve to point out objects: prenez c».-i, take thi*. donnez-moi eela, en seal that. J'ai deja (lit cc qu'il faut tVire, 1 have already said vfiat should b* ■Mad cu eiif:uit veut avoir fri it done tcheii a child trill have '.hit and tela. J. J. 'hat. (6.) O, a pronoun, must n<>t bo confounded with the demonstra- tive cc. The pn>un OS is often used without an antece- dent, as the nominatr. rb i:rc in the same manner M the pronoun ii ■ moi. It k I. roe*, •'/ it you. . um> flamroc | // is n-> h ngm the tfm unteorthi/ flame. Um; II b fA« son and rival d'Achille. tt. i the rival of Achillet. For particular rules on this pronoun. § 38. — BfJ (J.) The relative pronouns are so named on account of the inti- itkm whieh they have to a noun or pronoun whieh precedes, and of whi.-h :' Idee. The nOOJ) or pronoun so pteeOoV inj,' the n latrre aroooen la celled the antecedent T.\n: I Of Tiir Kri tiff] 1 qui, *Jk/», ■Hal / '■"*' ,n,B que,«*<" .n»A«ii;V ^'alfcX? wAirA ; ) a qui, to vhrrm ; (regime indirect, , which, should only bo used b the nominative, and in the direct regimen, in order to avoid am- biguity. They may relate to pereona or things: < ". -t mi iiTit dfl la dirins Prori- It is an act of divine Providence, denes, fag WSJ attire radmiration ;■■'. preeeded by a preposition — that is, duqwi, auquri, dans Uquel, &<•., must always !»■ osed for things in the indirect regimen, TIM word qui, as has been mentioned above, cannot relate to things in the oblique cases: That would l>e a curious book in which nor a falsehood if- re fntinL I'll ! ' li dSMI in men- Nai • Li Seine, dana !■■ lit d riennsot as Jeter [Tonne, Is Hams, n theoodofwkieA the Tonne, the Mowme, and the (hie empttj themselves. I ..•quel, in all its moditi. 1 absolutely or toterrogairvely: leqnel \ which onct dnqnel ? of whieh onet (S0SMJ voyez-VOUS I whieh one do you see t (17.) En, of U, of ikon. This pronoun is of both genders and numbers, and relates almost always to animals and things, II is often need t"..r the English words, some, any, when employed absolutely, ..r e\.n when understood. It is alao nsed as an indirect regimen in relation to things, and sometimes, hut not often, in relation to persons [} 92 (2)], instead of the personal pronouns lui, ellcs, eux, [\ 103, Rule 1.] >t speak of it. Ten ni, / have some of it. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 40, 41. 317 La fortune a son prix : l'imprudent en abuse, K L'hypocrite en medit, et l'honnfite hoinrne en use. Delille. Les limites des sciences sont com- me l'horizon ; plus on en approche, plus elles reculent. Mme. JNecker. La vie est un dep6t confie par le ciel ; }ser en disposer, c'est 6tre crimineL Gbesset. Fortune has its worth : the im- prudent abuses it; the hypocrite speaks evil of it, and the worthy man uses it. The limits of science are like the horizon, the more we approach (them), the more they recede. Life is a trust confided by heaven : to dare to dispose of it, is a crime. (18.) Y, to it, to them, thereto, of it, &c. This relative pronoun, of both genders and numbers, is used instead of a lui, a elle, en lui, &c. It is used of things, and also adverbially in the sense of there. J'y pense, / think of it. J'ai connu le malheur, et j'y sais compatir. Guichabd, N'y songeons plus, cher Paulin ; plus j'y pense, Plus je sens chanceler ma cruelle Constance. Racinc Vous avez peu de Hen ; joignez y ma fortune. Doeat. En quelque pays que j'aie 6te, j'y ai vecu comme si j'eusse dfr y passer ma vie. Montesquieu. J'y donne mes soins, I devote my care to it. I have known misfortune, and J can sympathize with it. Let us think no more of this, dear Paulin ; the longer I think of it, the more I feel my cruel constancy waver. You have but little property ; join my fortune to it. In whatever country I have been, I lived (there) as if I was to spend my life in it. (19.) Although numerous instances may be found in which French authors have used y with regard to persons, these are licenses which it is not desirable to imitate. § 40. — Indefinite Pronouns. (1.) The indefinite pronouns indicate persons and things witl »ut particularizing them : they are — autrui, others. chacun, every one. on, one, people, they. personne, no one, nobody. quelqu'un, some one, somebody. quiconque, l'un l'autre, l'un et l'autre, tel, tout. whoever. one another. loth. such. every thing, \Aol« § 41. — Remarks on the Indefinite Pronouns. (1.) Autrui, others. This pronoun is applied only to persons. It has no change of form for gender or number, and is used only as an indirect regimen. L'honnfite homme est discret ; il remarque les defauts d! autrui, mais il n'en parle jamais. St. Evremond. Ne fais point a autrui ce que tu ne roudrais pas qu'on te fit. The gentleman is discreet ; he ob- serves the defects cf others, but never alludes to them. Do not unto others that which thou wouldst noftike to be done unto thee. 318 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 41. (2.; Chacus, every one, each one. When this pronoun is absolute, and means err ry one, everybody, it is invariable : Common sense is no common believe* he Le sens commun nest pas chose commune, Chocun pourtant, croit en avoir Valaincoubt. Ckanm est prostenie dcvant les gens heureux. -ithes. (3.) When chacun is used relatively it may take the form of the feminine: thing, though every one hat enough of iL Every one bows be/ore the for tunaie. Cluieune de noua (des ferames) se pret.ruliut nperieurfl aux;. . Movtssqdisd. Every one of us (women) thought herself superior in beauty to the others. (4.) Os (one, pc ways in the nominative ; and although always construed with a verb in the third person singular, it conveys most penerally the idea of plurality. It is commonly need in indefinite 8enU?i:» On dit, people say, they say, it is said. DBOffdi ce qu'on acquiert .'ana crime. OOUOTUA On relit toot RadM : M dans Voltaire Delillk. On no Burmontc lo riciTqu'en le fujant. 1». On parle, somebody speaks, think use- less render us, in our need, valuable es. (13.) Tel, in connection with Monsieur, Madame, &c, a.s Monsieur vn t'l, Madame une .'•:•, Mr.. Mr-. BUch-a-one, it used substantively. (14.) Tout) • 'hing. This word, employed absolutely, I is Invariable. A la tenia vertu, mhi *ur quo tout ]>r N ! V>' ii a 1 1 u\ I L'i I Tout D'esl paa Oaumart Bon grand genie embraaaall tout. Bmh i.r. 1 _S *«.— VsUfl wured that it it with virtus alone that every thing prospers. one is not Caumartin, Bmncn, nor d'^lguesscaH. Hi* great gmius embraced every pari "f Bpeech which n lotion simply indieatea the condition oJ (1. done 01 tile Mb • r nominative of a verb is the person or thiOg doing tin- action, or being in tin- condition expre wed by the verb. It replies : 'lis; and (jursl- cr qmi I I and the t. is that which eom- i a direct in:: that without the aid of any other int< i L Ir answei in '/«i.' whom? for | what .' tor thll (5.) Tl that which complete* ification of ; ; tiate word, nah as the prepoail . —a qui I to whom ! ile ipii? ■.V! t pour qui ! for ■ oi ' 8lc, for : ' 8 .. fori (6.) Verbs, are regular, irregular, or d 1 1 (2). VERBS. § 43. *^^^ 321 ilH ^Reflective § 43. — Different Sorts of (1.) There are five sorts of verbs: active, pas' or pronominal, and unipersonal. (2.) The active verb is that which expresses an action performed by the subject, and having some person or thing for its object. This ob- ject is the direct regimen of the verb. (3.) Every French verb after which quelqifun* some one, quelque- chose, something, may be placed, is an active verb. Thus, in the fol- lowing sentences, proteger, changer, chanter, &c, are active verbs, be- cause we may say proteger quelquhm, to protect some ono ; changer (uelquechose, to change something : Dieu protege l'innocence. — Racine. L'habit change lea mceurs. Voltaire. Les cygnes ne chantent pas leur toort. Boston. God protects innocence. Dress changes the manners. Swans do not sing their death. (4.) The passive verb is the contrary of the active verb. The active verb presents the subject as performing an action immediately directed towards an object; whereas the passive verb presents the subject as suffering or receiving an action. The passive verb i3 composed of the T^St participle of an active verb and the auxiliary etre, to be. (See § 54.) Nos cainpagnes sont fertilisees par la pluie. L'academie. II etait guide par la force de son genie. Massillon. Les petits esprits sont trop blesses des petites choses. La Rochefoucauld. Our Jields are fertilized by the rain. He was guided by the force of his genius. Little .minds are too much vexed with trifles. (5.) The neuter verb marks, like the active verb, an action per formed by the subject ; but this action can only reach the object in- directly ; that is, by means of a preposition. Hence it is that the neu- ter verb never has a direct regimen, and that the words quelqu'un and quelquechose cannot be placed after it. A neuter verb can never be used in the passive voice. Socrate passa le dernier jour de sa vie a discourir de l'inimortalite de Tame. L'Academie. Le feu qui semble eteint, dort eouvent souk sa cendre. — Corne^lle. Les Plateens citerent les Jijtcode- tnoniens a comparative devant les Amphyctions. xj^ Gendre. Socrates spent the last day of hit life in discoursing upon the immor- tality of the soul. The fire which seems extinct sleeps often under its ashes. The Plateaus cited the Lacedemo- nians to appear before the Ampkye- tions. (6.) The reflective or pronominal verb is conjugated with two pro- 14* 322 nouns aft (8 Je me ^^j^^L a atio: fl In ■-■■:>■ ^ w CATIONS OF VERBS. § 44, 45. erson; je me, tu te, il sc, nous nous, vous vous, Hi H ne faut pas sr falter, lcs plus pxperimentea <>nt fait dee Grates oa- Bo.— Lea people* te/Uieiteroni d'aroir mi roi qui lnl i ■ MI.OX. 11 no fact pas p*»rmettrea Illumine de te mipriter Bo—ma. Vow vow fclicitez, you congratu late yotm We should not flatter ourselves : the h rieneed hare committed cap- ital err' The nations will congratulate them- selves upon having a king who re- I MM. We thould not allow a man to de self entirely. ! verb can only be need in the third person sin- gular: II pleat, U rains; u . »; il tonne, it (Atmofer*. ]'.>i:r bin jugea lea grand*, il faut let approcher. b\obbk ■ rendre meuleur te pauvrc qu*on eoulage. Saint-Lajhikkt. To judge properly of the great, it is tMceuary to approach them. We ehoutd(U is necessary to) im- ],r->v tfu poor whom we rei: • verba called auxiliary, because they They axe — avoir, to have; and etre, to be. ■fj w (1.) The French verba are divided Into four I or conju- ■ at of the infinitive end* in aa; aa parlerj to speak- .• aimer, Id. The too I" which the infinitive cn fa e verba are again divided into regular, irregular, and defec- tive : l.-t. The regular vari jch, in all their teneee, nre conjugated lili*' thi :..n tu which they hnlong 2d The irregular verba arc those which ere not conjugated liko the Sd. The defective verb* are those which wont certain tenses or persons £ •!.-). — Modi (1.) There an i: the indicative, the conditional, prrntivr. the subjunctive, the infinitive, and llia^articiplc : 1st. The indicative, whatever may be the ten*., indii in a positive, absolute manner: j'ahand.mne, I abandon ; j'ai abaodonne, I hate c.hn~doncd; j'abandonueraJ, I will abandon. MODES AND TENSES. § 45. 323 2d. The conditional indicates a condition or a supposition : j'abandon- nerais si ... . I would abandon if ... . 3d. The imperative js used to express a command, prayer, or exhorta- tion : abandonnez cet enfant, abandon that child. 4th. The subjunctive is used after propositions expressing doubt, con- tingency, or necessity : ii est douteux que je l'abandonne : it is not certain that I may abandon him. 5 tli. The infinitive presents the signification of the verb in an unlimited manner : abandonner ses enfants, to abandon one's children. 6th. The participle', while retaining the power of the verb, at the same time partakes of the nature of an adjective : abandonnant ses parents, abandoning his relatives; abandonne de ses enfants, abandoned by hi* ■thildren. i (2.) The indicative has eight tenses : 1st. The presea: : je parle, I speak ; je donne, I give. 2d. The simultaneous past, or imperfec^: je parlais, I%as speaking. 3d. The past definite: je parlai, I spoke, I did speak. 4th. The past indefinite : j'ai parle, I have spoken ; j'ai donne\ Ihave given. 5th. The past anterior. 6th. The pluperfect, *7th. The future absolute. 8th. The future anterior, or future perfect, (3.) The conditional has two tenses : j'eus parle, j'avais parle", je parlerai, j'aurai parle", 1st. The present or future, 2d. The past, je parlerais, j'aurais parle, / had spoken. I had been speaking. I shall, will speak. I shall have spoken. I should, would speak. I should have spoken. (4.) The imperative has one tense : parle, (5.) The subjunctive has four tenses : que je paflfe, que je parlasse. que j'aie parle, que j'eusse parle 1 , that Imight have sp jken, (6.) The infinitive has two tenses 1st. The present relative, 2d. The past, (7.) The participle has three tenses 1st. The present or future. 2d. The imperfect, 3d. The paj| indefinite, 4th. The pluperfect, parler, avoir parle, speak. that I may speak. that Imight speak. that I may have spoken. • to speak. to have spoken, 1st. The present relative, 2d. The past active, 8d. The past or passive, parlant, ayant parlS, speaking, having spoken, spoken. (8.) Tenses are simple or compound. 1. Simple, wien they are expressed in a single word: je parle, 1 tpeak. * 2. Compound, when they require the assistance of the verb avoir or fetre: j'ai parle, Lhave spoken; je suis arrive, lam arrivsJ. 324 CSS OF THE AUXILIARY VKRBS. § 46. g 40. — Use of the Auxiliary Verbs avoir and etre. (1.) The auxiliary avoir is used : 1. In the conjugation of its own compound* ten.>cs : j'ai eu, I havt had. 2. In the conjugation of the compound teases of the verb etre: / have be&u 3. In the compound tenses of the active verbs : j'ai aimo, / liavc . 1. In the compound tenses of most neuter verbs expressing an : : j'..i marche, Hunt walked. [See exceptions to this rule (3) below.] 6. k [a ilao Deed is the conjugation of verbs which are always il a phi, it has rawed; il a grele, it has hailed, &.c. I | ligation of: l. All the tenses of past - aime, I dm I ■j. Th oompoond tenses of all reflective oj pronominal verbs: jeme Mii.^ flatte, / ftioe, - promen6, I have ma 3. The compound tenses nf the following neuter verba, though tha same, 61 1 to be born ; to fail; t<> come ; to MiM to become; 4. A few udpenona] verbs, which are not alway* bnl occasionally such: il loi eat arrive un malhcur, a misfortune has harmed to him. (3.) A certain number of in 'iter verbs: SS — nccourir, to r<,- t<> rutit ; !■• i"iW; irt ; jrfrir. riek: vicillir, to g ro w oidi r. /■■ ,'■■ .Ire, to no down ; nn, to duell, I Bomettmea i * I. They tab <• have in view the action expn rbj i iire when situation or condition is the principal idea which 1" x \v, H'/fA avoir, riir. Kilo a di.-paru MlbttV - quint* She disappeared ttiddmlii. Shi alhr, . ■ ■.11; vniir. panrenir, to die ; diviiiir, ■urn. USE OF THE AUXILIARY VER] -§46. 325 La fi&vre a cesse" hier. 77ie fever ceased yesterday. Le barometre a descendu de plusieurs degres en peu d'foeures. The barometer went down several degrees in a few hours. II a passe" en Amerique en tel temps. He went to America at such a time. Le trait a parti avec impetuosite. L'academie. 77ie dart went with impetuosity. Le sang avail cesse de couler. Boiste. The blood had ceased to flow. La fievre est cesse"e depuis quel- que temps. It is some time since i'xe fever ceased. • II est descendu depuis une heure. He has been down one hour. Les clialeurs sont passees. The heat is past. Les troupes sont parties depuis six mois. L'academie. The troops have been gone six months. Ce grand bruit est cesse. Mme. de Setigne. That great noise is over (has ceased). (4.) Rester and demeurer, meaning to dwell, to reside, take the auxiliary avoir; when they me^an to remain, to be left, they take elre: ETEE. Elle donnerait pour vous sa vie, le seul bien qui lui soit reste. Maemontel. She would give, for you, her life, the only possession which remains to her. Deux cents hommes sont de- meures sur le champ de bataille. L'academie. He lived (dweltf two years in the Two hundred men remained on tountry. the field of battle. (5.) ilchapper, to escape, to pass unnoticed, to be forgotten, takes the auxiliary avoir. In the sense of, to say inadvertently, it takes etre. AVOIE. • ETEE. avoir. J'ai reste" plus d'un an en Italie. - . . . Mostesquieu. I resided more than a year in Italy. II a demeure" deux ans a la cam- L'academte. Cette difference ne m'a pas 6chap- pe. . Rousseau. TJiat difference has not escaped me. ^ J'ai retenu le chant, les vers VQLont echappe. Voltaiee. / retained the tune, but the verses }>ave escaped my memory. Ce mot m'est echappe ; pardoiinez ma franchise. Voltaiee. That word escaped my lips ; excuse my frankness. Excusez les fautes qui pourront m'etre echapp6es. Boileau. Excuse the faults which I may have committed inadvertently. (6.) Oonvenir, to become, to suit, takes avoir. When it is used in the sense of agreeing, or, settling upon a price for an article it takes itre. Cette maison m'a convenu. Nous som vies convenus du prix. That house suited me. L'acadbmie. * .^ We agreed upon the price. ,\s~*~^jt 126 AUXILIARY VER $ 47. &. § 47. — Paradigms of the Auxiliart Verbs. To familiarize the s^jdent with the frequent use made by the French, of the indefinite pronoun on [} 41, (4.)j, we have introduced It in our conjugation of the verbs. (1.) AVOIR, TO //.41'^,-AFFIRMATltELY. Ixdicative Mode. simple tenses. compound ten8e8. / PRESENT. PAST INDEFINITE. J'al, / Am J'ai eu. I Have had Tu as, (Im Im Tu ft- 1 thou hast had Ha. he has 11 a en. hehashad On a, one has, people hare On ft <-u. one has had ivona, ice have i...ns cu, ire have had mm, you hair Vou ■ i t. Mi have had Da out, 1 lis out en, they have nod • • IMPERFECT. ri.UPERFECT. I had , vas hr.i ■ 1 J'avais eu, lhadhtui to hare • Tn avaU thou hadst Tu avais eu, than hadst had 11 avait. he had 11 avail ni, he had hail On avait. one had, people had t eu, one had had 11 inn!', wehad , we had had ■M w :•/. eu, vou had had llfl ava theyhad ills avaient eu, hey had had • past definite, past ANTE«IO«. J'cus. I had, or did hare Ij'cus cu, Jhadhad Hum hadst had thou hadst, etc. Tu lu- 11 eat, he had\ ll rat'eu, he had had <>n tut. one hail, etc On 'lit eu. one V lmcr i/y he! ; ' ire had \a*l vou hail vou \ad had Us eureiit. they had, lis eurelit ell, Ud hat m FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Taural, I shut I or w J'anrai cu, / shall, trill \ Tu auras, th/>u in It have Tu auras eu, thou shaft hare had 11 aura, he in// hui-f 11 aura 00, he trill hare had On aura, one mil hair On aura ML, one will hare had l ! rons, we shall hare N'i.ns urOM r\\ will hare had Votis aur«?x, you will hare Vuus mom u n'a pas, one has not On n'a pas eu, one has * Nous n'avons pas, we have not Nous n'avons pas cu, trc have 8 Vous n'avez | you have not Vous n'avez pas eu, you have lis n'ont pas, they have not lis n'uiit DM BO, they have^ IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Jo n'avais pas, 1 Je n'avais pas eu, Ihad" Tu n'ava - thou hadst not To a'ATaJa p. is cu, thou hadst 11 n'ava he had not II n'avait pas eu, he had .3 On n'avait DM, one had not • in n'avait pas eu, one had Nmis n'OYiOM pas, we had not Nuns n'ariona pas ou ire had l Vous n'avi./ |>as, you hod not Vous n'avio/. pas BO, you had lis n'avaicnt pas, May had not ILsn'avaieiit pas BO, they had. PAST UUIIIH PAST ANTERIOR. Jo B'ena pM, I Lid not Jo n'eOI I>as eu, Tu n'< I. ■ Tu n'eus pas eu, thonhailU 11 n'lii: he had not II n'-'iit | hehad 3 1 On nVut pas, one had not as, Dm trill not 11 n'aui.i he will not «»n n'aura ; M will not Nous n'rarooa paa, i •-• shidt not Vous n'aure/. pa\ BOM shall not 11* n'auront pas, thm mil Mi FUTURE ANTERIOR. Je n'aurai DM cu, I shall Tu n'auras juia eu, thou shall II n'aura pa-, u hi trill On n'aura pas eu, Nous n aurons DM BO, Ml trill Nous n 'aur-v. pas cu, you, will lis n'auront pas eu, they will. Conditional Mode. Je n'anr.i Tu r.'aii! I II n'aurait pas. On n'aurait pas, Nous n'aurions pas Vous n'auriez pas, Us n'auraient pas, / thou trou Ids' he tr one wm ire. H you would ttev tmtU Je n'aurnis DM BO, I should' Tu n'ourais DM eu, thou shouldst II n'aurait |>as eu, he \rouLl <»n n'aui : Wt trould Voiisn'auri.z pa lis n'auraient pa; eu they wonid j AUXILIARY V: § 47. 329 Imperative Mode. N'aie pas have not Qu'il n'ait pas, let him not have Qu'on n'ait pas, let one not have N'ayons pas let us not have N'ayez pas have not ye or you Qu'ils u'aient pas, let them not have Subjunctive Mode. compound tenses. SIMFLE TENSES. PRESENT. Que je n'aie pas, that I may ""j Que tu n'aies pas, that thou mayest Qu'il n'ait pas, that he may Qu'on n'ai-t pas, that one may Que nous n'ayons pas, that we )■■<■ may I g Que vous n'ayez pas, that you \ ' may I Qu'ils n'aient pas, that they may IMPERFECT. Que je n'eusse pas, that I might' Que tu n'eusses pas, that thou mightest Qu'il n'eiit pas, that lie might Qu'on n'eiit pas, that one might Que nous n'eussions pas, that we might Que vous n'eussiez pas, that you might Qu'ils n'eussent pas, that they might Infinitive Mode. present. past. Na pas avoir, not to liave | N'avoir pas eu, not to have Participle, present. compound. N'ayant pas, not having | N'ayant pas eu, not having Past or Passive. Pas eu, Not had Que je n'aie pas eu, that I may Que tu n'aies pas eu, tliat thou mayest Qu'il n'ait pas eu, that he may Qu'on n'ait pas eu, that one may Que nous n'ayons pas eu, that we may Que vous n'ayez pas eu, that you may Qu'ils n'aient pas eu, that they may PLUPERFECT Que je n'eusse pas eu, that 1 might Que tu n'eusses pas eu, that thou mightest Qu'il n'eut pas eu, that he might Qu'on n'eut pas eu, that one might Que nous n'eussions pas eu, that we might Que vous n'eussiez pas eu, that you might Qu'ils n'eussent pas eu, that they might li had 330 AUXILIARY VERB8. 8 47. (3.) AVOIR.-INTERROQATIVELY. Indicative Mode. 6rMrLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. Ai-je? As-tu 7 A-t-il !(*) A-t-on ?(•) Avons-nous 1 Av.z-voubI Ont-ils 7 PAST INDEFINITE. hare I? | Ai-je cu 1 hare /^ hast- thou ? As-tu eu 7 hast thou has he ? A-t-il eu 7 has he \ has one ? A-t-on cu 7 has one \ have km ? Avons-nous en? have we I hare you ? Aw/.-vous eu 7 have you hare they 1 \ Ont-ils eu 7 hare then \ IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Avais-jc 7 tu? Avait-il 7 Avait-on 7 Avi.>ns-nous7 Aviez-voiis 7 Avaient-ils 7 FAST DEFINITE. Bos-Jt 7 Kiis-iu 7 Ktit il ] Kut..n ] Mam dom 7 Bnrenl I had /.' Avais-je eu, • ivais-tn cu, hatlhe ..' Avait-il eu. hail onr J had ice ? h.itl you J hatl they J Avait-on eu, Avions tioiis eu, Aviez-vous 8Q, Avaient-ils eu, had 71 hadst thou had he had one had ire had you had they 1 PAST ANTERIOR. had I ? Eusje eu) had I hadst th.'u ' Bui tu eu 7 hadst thou had h<-? Kut-il eu 7 luvl he had mu .' Bat-00 eu 7 had one hatl irr .' Kuines-nous eu 7 had ire had mm / Bates-row bo > had vou had thru : Kureut ils eu 7 had they 3 FITIRE ANTEniOR. Aurni je 7 Anras-tu 7 • il ? Aura ' Aurons nmis ? Auras-Tow I Aurunt-iK I shall I have? shall thou ha M ■' irilt shall r mill one ha re 1 shall 1 I Aurai.je eu ! Auras lu eu ! Aura til eu 7 Aura ton eu 7 Auroiis-ii.ius eu 7 us eu 7 Aunnit-ils cu ? shall n shall them shall he shall ire shall KM shall they) I "N.u. Mom:. Aurai- j.' 7 tU ! Atiraitil 7 Aurait-oii I AnrionMioaa 7 <*^rio7.-vous 1 / araient-ils 7 s toi shoitldst thou have > irouid they have? |fl eu7 Aurais-tu Bfl 7 Aurait-i! eu f Aurait ..n eu 7 would m- hetoet Aariow-now tm 7 should vou hovel Ami. / v.mis eu? shouLl they have.' Auraient ils eu 7 should I tCOilldst thiru Voiild he shnulil „>ir should ire should KM they (*) 8eo Lesson 4, Rule G. AUXILIARY VERBS. 8 4Y. 331 (4.) AVOIR,— NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. Indicative Mode. SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. N'ai-je pas 1 N'as-tu pas 1 N : a-t-il pas 1 N'a-t-on pas 1 N'avons-nous pas ? N'avez-vous pas ? N'ont-ils pas 1 have I not ? hast thou not ? has lie not ? has one not ? have we not ? have yon not ? have they not ? IMPERFECT. N'avais-je pas 1 N'avais-tu pas "? N'avait-il pas 1 N'avait-on pas 1 N'avions-nous pas 1 N'aviez-vous pas 1 N'avaienMls pas 1 had I not ? hadst thou not ? had lie not ? had one not ? had we not ? had you not ? had l/icy not ? PAST DEFINITE. N'eus-je pas'? N'eus-tn pas 1 N'eut-il pas 1 N'eut-on pas 1 N'eumes-nous pas ? N'eutes-vons pas? N'curent-ils pas 1 had I not ? hadst thou not ? Iiad he not ? had one not ? had we not ? had you not ? had they not ? PAST INDEFINITE. N'ai-je pas eu 1 have P N'as-tu pas eu 1 hast thou N'a-Ml pas eu 1 has he N'a-t>on pas eu 1 has one N'avons-nous pas eu 1 have we N'avez-vous pas eu 1 have you N'ont-ils pas cu 1 have tlicy __ PLUPERFECT. N'avais-je pas eu 1 had P\ N'avais-tu pas eu 1 hadst thou N'avait-il pas eu 1 had he N'avait-on pas eu 1 had one N'avions-nous pas eu 1 had we N'aviez-vous pas eu 1 had you N'avaient-il pas eu 1 had they ^ PAST ANTERIOR. N'eus-je pas eu 1 had I N'eus-tu pas eu 1 hadst thou N'eut-il pas eu 1 had k* N'eut-on pas eu 1 had one N'eumes-nous pas eu 1 liad we N'eutes-vous pas eu 1 had you N'eurent-ils pas eu 1 had they j U N'aurai-je pas 1 N'auras-tu pas 1 N'aura-t-il pas 1 N'aura-t^on pas 1 N'aurons-nous pas 1 N'aurez-vous pas 1 N'auront-ils pas 1 shall I shalt tlwu sliall he shall one shall we shall you sliall they _ FUTURE ANTERIOR. N'aurai-je pas eu 1 shall JT\ N'auras-tu pas eu 1 shall thou N'aura-t-il pas eul shall he N'aura-t-on pas eu 1 shall one N'aurons-nous pas eu 1 shall we N'aurez-vous pas eu 1 shall you N'auront-ils pas eu 1 shall they _ Conditional Mode. N'atirais-je pas 1 should I' N'aurais-tu pas 1 slwuldst thou N'aurait-il pas 1 should he N'aurait^on pas 1 should one N'aurions-nous pas "? should we ^ N'auriez-vous pas 1 should you N'auraient-ils pas 1 should they N'aurais-je pas eu 1 should r N'aurais-tu pas eu 1 shouldst thou N'aurait-il pas eu 1 slwuld he N'aurait-on pas eu 1 slwuld one . N'aurions-nous pas eul should we ' N'auriez -vous pas eul should you N'auraient-ils pas eu"? should they 332 AUXILIARY V ER § 47. (5.) etre, TO Z?£,-AFFIRMATIYELY. Indicative Mode. SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. PRESENT. PAST INDEFINITE. „L> suia, I am Pal etc, / lave been " thou art Tn as 6t6, thou hast been 11 est, he is 11 Sit*, he has been 1)11 est, one is On a 6t6, one has been nines, we are Nous avons ct&, toe hare been ye or you are Vous ares etc, you have been ihey arc lis out etc, they have been MPF.RFECT. PLUPERFECT. 1 was or I used to be J'avais 6t«\ I had been 'I'll ItSiS, thou wast Tu STSJ thou hajlsl been he was 11 avail he had been On . t:iit. one was on avail one hatl been N.'iis ItfoOS, we wrre Noils avions t'-tc, we had been • you were Vous avicz 6t6, you had been lis ctnioiit, they were lis anient etc, they had been PF.FISITE. TAST ANTERIOR. ] 1 iflsslj'eafl 6t6, I had been Tu (US, I.Wm w-i.t Tu i us 6t6, thou hatlst been 11 Ibt, tea* he had been r>n« i/a.5 On tut 6U5, one had been Nous fames, irv I we had been Vooi Mtus, you men v*ooi eol you had been lis fortiit, •i! 6t«S, they had been FTTLRK. FUTCRE ANTERIOR. / SUB ; J'anrai 6te, I shall' fctau will be Tu auras etc, thou shall i 'I he shall b>- 11 aura • heshaU 1 xall be one shall ' hull be Nous ani we shall v.nis teres, Vou shall be Vous aa MM will they shall be li.s aoront ita, ihry wiU j Conditional Mode. PRESENT. PUT. / 1 1 - III. I should' ' Tu aur.i: thOU Shouldst i 'J he would be II uurait £16, kt MMaM On Bcrsit, one should be On aurait dtd, one wmdd Nous sorions we wmiLl be ' we should Vous eerlea, you should be Voua am tou • DsssrsJsot, they would be lis aura ;■ thy should. AUXILIARY VB1 § 47. Imperative Mode. Sois, be thou Qu'il soit, let him be Qu'on soit, / let one be Soyons, let us be Soyez, Qu'ils soient, be ye or you let them be Subjunctive Mode, simple tenses. compounr tenses. Juo ja sois, i,VLQ ttt SOiS, Qu'il soit, Qu'on soit, Que uous soyons, Que vous soyez, Qu'ils soient, that I may be that thou mayest be that he may be ..■-, that one may be that we may be that you may be that they may be Quej'aieete, that I may Que tu aies ete, that thou mayest Qu'il ait ete, that he may Qu'on ait, ete, that one may Que nous ayons ete, that we may Que vous ayez ete, that you may Qu'ils aient ete, that they may IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT Que je fusse, Que tu fusses, that I might be that thou mightest be Qu'il fat, that he might be Qu'on fut, that one might be Que nous fussions, that we might be Que vous fussiez, that you might be Qu'ils fussent, that they might be W\ Que j'eusse etc, that 1 1 Que tu eusses 6te, that thou mightest Qu'il eut ete, that he might Qu'on eut ete, that one might Que nous eussions ete, that we Que vous eussiez ete, that you Qu'ils eussent ete, that they might Infinitive Mode. to be J Avoir ete, Participle. to have been fitant, being | Ayant ete, Past or Passive. fit* having been 334 BEGULAR VERBB, §48. g 48. — Regular Verbs. FIRST CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN ER. MODEL VERB. CHANTER, TO SING. Indicative Mode. SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES PRESENT. «« 1NDEFr Jo chante '**"* ! J ' ai cha° tf i Tnehantos, tarn tinge* ^aachant*. B chante, ** **«' H a chante. one sings On a chante, we ring Nona awna chant* \ iOB ave/. chante, Qa oat chante, I'M PERFECT On chant.', Nuns chantona Vona chantea. Us chantcut, JMrF.RFECT Jc chantais, / 001 I have sung iheu host sung he /ins sung one has sung tec have suns you have sung (key have sitng Tu chantais, II cliantait. On cliantait, Nona chantiona, VotU ehantie/., Pi chantaieiit, or J ' ringing singing re singing J'avais chante, / had' Tu avais chante, 1! avait chante, On avait chant.'-, NOUB avians chante Vona avlea chant*, lis avaient chante, TA8T DEFINITE. Ja chantaJL / mug or did ring Jena chante Tu .-us chant* 1! eat chante thou hadst he had one had ice had you had they had r-AST ANTERIOR. II i hanta, im cha Nous chantlmnw, Vona chantltRW] lb chantcrcnt, Ft TIRE. I had sung thou hadst sung he had sung , ,.„, ,.|ianh-. one hod sung Nous eomea chant*, wt had sung you son- Vona eotea chant*, you had sung lb curcnt Chant*, t'iry had Sting FLTLRE ANTERIOR. Jo ehantcrai, Tn chanteras, 11 ehanter.i. On chantera, Nous chantcrona Voiis chantorez, lb chanteront, / shall or mill sing I J'aurai chante, Ikou irilt ring Tn auras chante, ii aura chant*, one will ring <»n aura chant*, \ aa aurora chant*, \ . :,- aarea chant*, I aoront chant*, I id in thou shall hr vill ve shall you trill Conditional M uneovcr the thro X; t.i buy ; Bonrreler, to ft Oongeler, OoUeter, tor, 1 1 Degeler, Etiqueter, i<> tirkct ; Geter, to freeze; Haroeter, to tnizr ; Peter, to peel; Boraohi to over but/. In the above verbs, wlien the t or / eomes before e, es, cnt, or e (nor accented) followed by r and one or more vowels, a grave accent (*) is put over the r, which precedes the / or /: Je pale, /« rai, /«•<.'.' J'a. : 7£i/y; J'achet. 1 trill b%f. (6.) A grave accent is also need in verbs ending in ccer, emer, ener, L 3. 9. t This rule a] an.l m in verbs of the third conjugation, ending in etoir, Je ncoJl, / rwutvtf J'apcr;oia, / percziu. RBOULAR VERBS. S 50. 337 and the acute accent of the infinitive of those ending in Seer, egler, eler, erer, ebrer, egner, emer, eter, echer, egrer, ener, etrer, edcr, eguer, equer, fs changed into a grave one, when the consonant following the first e of these terminations, comes before e, es, ent, and e (not accented) followed by r and one or more vowels : Je serae, I sow ; Je mene, I lead; Je celebrerai, I will celebrate ; II regnera, he will reign. (7.) In the tables of peculiar, irregular, defective, and unipersonal verbs, we will place a model verb of each class embraced in the pre- ceding remarks, and also include in the same table the names of the principal verbs coming under these remarks, with references to the models. § 50.— Regular Verbs. — Continued. SECOND CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN IR. MODEL VERB. FINIK, TO FINISH. # Indicative Mode, simple tenses. compound tenses, present. past indefinite. Je finis, Tu finis, II finit, On finit, {IJ Nous finissons, Vous finissez, lis finissent, Ifinish thoufinishest he finishes one finishes we finish you finish theyfinish J'ai fini, Tu as fini, II a fini, On a fini, Nous avons fini, Vous avez fini, lis ont fini, ; I have finished thou hast finished he lias finished one has finished we have finished you have finished they have finished IMPERFECT. Je.finissais, I was finishing, or used to finish thou wast finishing he wasfinishin. Tu finissais, II finissait, On finissait, Nous finissions, Vous finissiez, lis finissaient, one was finishing we were finishing yon were finishing they were finishing PAST DEFINITE. Je finis, I finished, did finish Tu finis, thou didst finish II finit, he finished On finit, one did finish Nous finimes, we finished Vous finites, you finished Ds finirent, they finished PLUPERFECT. J'avaisfini, I had finished Tu avais fini, thou hadst finished II avait fini, .' he had finished On avait fini, one had finished Nous avions fini, we had finished Vous aviez fini, you had finished lis avaient fini, ihey had finished PAST ANTERIOR. J'eus fini, Tu eus fini, 11 eut fini, On eut fini, Nous eumes fini, Vous eutes fini, lis eurent fini, 15 / had finished thou hadst finished lie had finished one had finished we had finished you had finished they had finished 338 REGULAR VERBS . — 8 50. SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. FUTURE A>TTERIOE. Je finirai, I shall finish J'iiurai flni, Ta flniras, thou wilt finish Tu auras fiui, II tinira, he will finish 11 aura flni, On finira, one mil finish On aura flni. Nous finirons, we shall finish N.>us aurons tini. Vous flnin-z, you wi'J finish Vous sural flni, lis finiront, they iciltfinis.h lis auront flni, CONDITIONAL MoOE. J shall ha vc ~\ thou will have he shall have | 13 one will have Vg we shall hair ,£ you will have they shall have ) Jo finirais, / 'finish J'aurais fini. Tu flnirai.s, thou tkouldst finish Tu aurais fiui. II flnirait, he would finish II aurait flni. On flnirait, I to aurait tini. Nous finirions, N iOJ aurions flni. Ton Onirics, you night finish Voosmtmi BaL, lis flnirai'iit, tseysi Da aur-iirnt flat, • nva MODS. I tju'il li- (ju'oii flnisse, P I / should liou woulilst he might one should tot kmM 1/oh might thai should finish ' let him finish lit unejinish let us finish finish ve or Vov 'let thrtnfinifh Srajus'TivF. Mods. Quo ji- Hi that I may Qii-- tu BaiMM, thai t.hi'u mmfest Qu'il tiniH.se, that he may Qu'nn IsfaSO, that one may Qu<- D01M Bo lotions, / (Jw v.)iis BAMM8S, r:.it you may Qu'ils finissout. that they may J Qic j aic fiui, that I may' Quo in ai.vs fin!, thai thou mnytst (Ju'il ait lini, that he may Qu'OD ait flni. thai one may Que Dooisyoos flni, them wr may Que TOM SJSS fiui. /W t/oumay nt flni, M/j/ Mry m*y IMPKRKfXT. n.Lrr.RrKCT. Qu''.i<- fuii-v. / • / Qurtu fini Qu'il flnit. that he might Qu'on flnit. that Quo nous flnissiuns, the •' Que voui Bniisi Qu'ili finbsent, thai they might that I might QUO tu ruvM* fli.i, | ID Qu'il cut fini, fAa/ A* might Qu'on out fini, /Ao/ m ■ rontons fini nsi we might Quo toub eussloz flni. i might Quils ousseut flni/ W / ' RE OU L a: .—§ 51. 339 Infinitive Mode. SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. Finir io finish | Avoir fini, Participle. to have finished COMPOUND. Fini. finishing | Ayant fini, Past or Passive. finished having finished § 51. — Regular Verbs. — Continued. THIRD CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN OIR. MODEL VERB. RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. Indicative Mode, present. past indefinite. Je refois,* Tu re^ois, II refoit, On refoit, Nous recevons, "Vous recevez, lis reijoivent, I receive thou receivest he receives one receives we receive you receive they receive J'ai refu, Tu as re9U, II a refu, On a refU, Nous avons re9U, Vous avez re^u, lis ont re^u, I have received thou hast received lie has received one has received we have received you have received they have received IMPERFECT. Je recevais, / was receiving, or / used to receive Tu recevais, thou wast receiving II recevait, ., he was receiving On recevait, one was receiving Nous recevions, we were receiving Vous receviez, you were receiving Is recevaient, they were receiving PAST DEFINITE. Je refus, Tu re9us, II re9ut, On re9Ut, Nous re9umes, Vous refutes, lis re9urent, I received or did receive thou receivedst he received we received you received they received PLUPERFECT. J'avais re9U, J had received' Tu avals re9U, thou hadst received II avait re9U, f he had received On avait re9U, one had received Nous avions re9U, we had received Vous aviez re9U, you had received Us avaient re9U, they had received past anterior. J'eus re9U, J had received Tu eus re9U, thou hadst received II eut re9U, he had received On eut re9U, one had received Nous eumes re9U, we had received Vous eutes re9U, you had received Us eurent re9U, they had received * See note f ' (3.) Also, $62. REGULAR VERBS. § 51. SIMPLE TENSES. FUITRE. COMPOUND TEN8E8. FUTURE ANTERIO». Je recevrai, / shall receive , J'aurai re^u, / shall have Tu recevTas, thou wilt receive Tu auras re^u, thou wilt have 11 raeem, he shall receive II aura re^u, U trill have On rccevra, one m I aura reeu, one will have Wam n-cevrons, tee shall receive Nous aurons re$u, tee shall have Vi.iis n-o-vri.-/., you ir; VaOB aurez n\u, you will have lis ncevront, Miy tn// nccivc , lis aurout rc^u, *Afy jAo# Aanr j Conditional Mode. mil, Tu r-Tovrais, 11 n-'-'-vrait. ••rait, Nous reoernoos, I i talent) / should receive tlum would st receive he sho'. they should receive l.Mrr.KATi\. .Vaurais reeQ, Tu aurais rafU, 11 aurait ro.,u, On aurait ro<,u, HooSMtrioU n-ru, Vuus aurii'z n'cu, Dl auraicnt ro^u, B CJu il p Qu'i.n ri •tu, I Qu'ila n falMtfl / hou wouldst he might MM MPaU ire should vou might they should t Sou let him receive M one • ht us n recett>€ Que jo ro^oivo, that I man Qu>' (it r< ■■, "ivi-», that thou mai/rst yu il reeoifv, Qn'oo it CJur MM noviona, thai we may • i/ou may Qui!* n-.,<'iv.nt, that they may IMPF«rECT. Qu<- j." r. / Que tu re^usses, htest Qu'il r that he might Qu'on n- Que nous refusion* ;s roftissiez. Qu'ilsrerusaent, that they might r.-.-u, thai 1 may (Jur tu ;ib* n-cu^hat thou mayesl Qu il nit rveu, that he may Qq'oD ait recU, thai one may Quo nous ayona rc^u, that we may ■ -en, that you may Qui'.* ai.nt rc^u, that lAey may Kvmnor. •e refu, thut I um reev, 'Aa/ Mim« Qu'U cut reru, Odi .t r.-.u. thai one might mixht Qu'ila cus»ent rc^u, thai they might REGULAR VERBS. § 52,53. 341 Infinitive Mode, simple tenses. compound tentjes. present. past. Recevoir, f ^ to receive | Avoir refu, to have receited f<: Participle. compound. Recevant, having received receiving | Ayant refu, PAST OR PASSIVE. Re9U, received § 52. — Remarks. (1.) In the verbs of this conjugation, ending with cevoir, in order to preserve to the c its soft pronunciation, a cedilla (5) is put under it, when it comes before a, o, u : — Je re$ois, J receive ; J'aperfois, I perceive, (2.) There are only seven regular verbs in this conjugation. They are: — Percevoir, to collect duties, taxes ; Apercevoir. Concevoir, Decevoir, Devoir, to conceive ; to deceive; to owe; Recevoir, Redevoir, to receive; to owe again. § 53. — Regular Verbs. — Continued. FOURTH CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN RE. MODEL VERB. VENDRE, TO SELL. Indicative Mode. PRESENT. PAST INDEFINITE. Je vends, / sell J'ai vendu, I have sold Tu vends, thou sellest Tu as vendu, thou hast sold H vend, he sells 11 a vendu, he has sold On vend, one sells On a vendu, one has sold Nous vendons, we sell Nous avons vendu, we have sold Vous vendez, you sell Vous avez vendu, you have sold JJs vendent, they sell lis ont vendu, they have sold IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 7e vendais, / was selling, or used to J'avais vendu, J had sold or been sell- sell ing Tu vendais, thou wast selling Tu avais vendu, thou hadst sold II vendait, he was selling 11 avait vendu, he ho.d sold Qn vendait, one was selling On avait vendu, one had sold 2Ious vendions, we were selling Nous avions vend! a, we had sold Vous vendiez, you were selling Vous aviez vendu, you had sold Us vendaient, they were selling lis avaient vendu, they had sold 342 REGULAR VERBS . S 54. SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. PAST DEFINITE. PAST ANTERIOR. Je vendis, I sold or did sell J'eus vendu, / had sold Tu vendis, thou soldest Tu cus vendu, thou hadst sold 11 vendit. he sold 11 cut vendu, he had sold On vendit. one sold On eut vendu, one had sold Nous vendimes, trr ■ i | Nona oumes vendn, ice had sold •i dites, you sold V ma rates vendu, you had sold lis vendirent, ( :■!/ | U lb event vendu, they had sold future. FCTt'RE ANTERIOR. Jc vendral, /.< .7 'aura i vendn, / shall have sold Tu vendras, Tu mum vendn, thou vilt have sold Ira, he will sell 11 aura vendu, he shall have sold Ob ren one will sell On mini vendu. one will have sold Nous vend rons, nil sell . ma vendn, we shall have sold Yoll- VI ' i/ou irill sell You* aniea vendu. »/<** will have sold lis vondn.iit, they will sell Us auront vendu, / vv shall have sold CoHDITK'XAI. irais, Tu -••ndraia. 11 vendreft, lrait, •idrionji, n dri aa 1 lis vendraient, I should sell hem Minbtnl m might adl they would sell ■■< ndu, I should* Tu aur.iU vi-ndu, /A/>u wouldest II iiuniit vendu, he might On aurait vendu. one should Nona anriona vendn, ire should Vousauri On etait aime, Nous ctions aimes or aimees, Vous etiez aimes Us etaient aimes, m. Elles etaient aimees,/. I was loved, was being loved thou wast laved, wast being loved he was loved, was being loved she was loved, was being loved one was loved, was being loved we were loved, were being loved you were loved, were being loved tliey were loved, were being loved they were loved, were being loved PASSIVE VERBS. § 64. past definite. Je fus aime, m. aimee, /. I tf as Unri Tu fus aim6 or aimee, thou wast loved 1 1 fut aime, he was loved "Hie fut aimcc, sJie was loved On fut aime, one was loved Nous fumes aimes or aimees, * loved Vous fiites aim6s or aim6es, you were loved ] la fiirent ainv they were loved tiles fure:it aimOes,/. they were loved PAST INDEFINITE. J'ai £te aimd or aim.'-\ / hav been lovtd Tu as »te aiinu or aiinco, thou hast been loved 11 a etc- I he has been niee, she has been l e nd liim'-. one h/is been loved .limes or aim6es, we have been loved - aimees, you hnve t»rn loved they taw ten loved Ellcs out ( they hove been loved PAST ANTERIOR DEFINITE. • • aime, r;i. aii. I I he hf ha*! fxrn loved I /*v;i lored one ha,l bern loved loved you had been loved ■■■ aim6s, m. ' bttn loved they had been loved Kmmor, hnto, I toetd dm6 or aimee, rW tab! h II avail iti aim.', A/- h< I'.llr a\ .'A/- A/;..' !■■-, r\ UfVtd one ha,! b*M lovtd I m ainu'i'S, m \ad b*n loved OT aimers, i //wrf v m. M<->/ hod bren loved Biles an t hem loved + Je serai aime, M, ain / .7 or will be loved s aime or aio OT in'// i* /<»r«i' alm6, he loved ■ r will be loved ' .ill or will l- imiea, or - ,7 V /,»rW Jinrwilll I ktaeea, f. r iciflfc /or»'< PASSIVE VER] -§ 54. 345 FUTURE ANTERIOR. J'aurai ete aime, m. aimee, /. Tu auras ete aime or aimee, II aura ete aime, ( "Elle aura ete aimee, On aura ete aime, Nous aurons ete aimes or aimees, Vous aurez ete aimes or lis auront ete aimes, m. EUes auront ete aimees,/. I shall, will have been loved thou shall, wilt have been loved he shall, will have been loved she shall, vnll have been loved one shall, will have been loved we shall, will have been loved you shall, will have been loved they shall, will have been loved they shall, will have been loved Conditional Mode. Je serais aime, m. aimee,/. Tu serais aime or aimee, II serait aime, v Elle serait aimee, On serait aime, / Nous serions aimes or aimees, Vous seriez aimes or aimees, lis seraient aimes, m. ^Elles seraient aimees,/ PRESENT. J should, would, could, might be loved thou shouldst, couldst, migktest be wvea. he would or might be loved she might be loved one could be loved we should or would be loved you would or might be loved they might or should be loved they might, could, should be loved M J'aurais et6 aime, m. aimee, /. Tu aurais ete aime or aimee, II aurait ete aime, ^Elle aurait ete aimee, to On aurait ete aime, Nous aurions ete aimes or aimees, Vous auriez ete aimes or aimees, lis auraient ete aimes, m. -Elles auraient ete aimees, / I should, xoould have been loved thou wouldst have been loved • he would have been loved she would have been loved one would have been loved we might have been loved you would have been loved they might have been loved they should or might have been lived Sois aime, m. aimee,/ Qu'il soit aime, Qu'elle soit aimee, Qu'on soit aime, Soyons aimes or aimees, Soyez aimes or aimees, Qu'ils soient aimes, m. Qu'elles soient aimees, / Imperative Mode. be thou loved let him be loved let her be loved let one be loved let us be loved be ye or you loved let them be loved let them be loved Subjunctive Mode. y\^ Que je sois aime, m. aimee, / Que tu sois aime or aimee, Qu'il soit aime, \Qu'elle soit aimee, Qu'on soit aime, Que nous soyons aimes or aimees Que vous soyez aimes or aimees, Qu'ils soient aimes, N Qu'elles soient aimees, PRESENT. that I may be loved that thou mayest be loved that he may be loved thai she may be loved that one may be loved that we may be loved that you may be loved that they may be loved that they may be loved 15* S46 PASSIVE VERBS. §54,55. IMPERFECT. Que je fusse aiue, m. aimee,/. Que tu fusses aim6 or aimee', Qu'il fut aim6, vQa'elle tut aimee, Qu'on fut aime, Que nous fussions aimes or aimees, Qos voiis fussiez aimes or aimees, Qa'flfl fussent aimes, m. s Qu'elles fussent ainu thai I might be loved that thou mightest be lovi thai he might be laved that she might- be loved that one might be loved that voe might be loved that you might be loved that '.hcu might be loved that they might be loved aimee./ yu • to ilea ct<- aime or aimee, Qu'il ait etc ainu"-. imee, U 6tfl aime, Qui- DOOfl STOU (•!,• aimi's or aimers, that ir<- mail hare been QUA TOT - that von m in/ hare been loved Qu'flj 6a, m. v man have been loved !fl one's stif ire had flattered ourselves you hail flattered yourselves 'they had flattered 'themselves they had flattered themselves Jo mo flatteral, To t«- Bal 11 se flattcra, attera, Nona boob fl atte ro na. Us se tlatteront, / shall or will flatter myselj thou shalt or ir Ht flatter thyself I r Wtfl flatter himself one trill flatter 'hi mse If one's self .'Her ourselves r tktmmhm Fl'TURE ANTKRK'R. Jc mc serai flatto. ri. fiattcV./. 11 se sera tlatt*, atec, lit.'-. Nooi D tlattecs, m Battet «r : ; ■ Mront ilatt. - ■•■■- flattered myselj tve flattered thi/self ' ,ire flattered himself v./iv flattered herself i , flattered himself ■,: ourselves \ rilves red themselves red themselves CONDH : Jc mo flatterais, Tn t.' (!.itt.-r»is, •••rait. On so flalt<-rait. • us ihttrrions, ttariea, aient. / • ' ', could, might flatter "i uself ■ umse'lf Hotter himself, one's self ■ ttti r our, ■' Uter yourselves ".■r 'themselves Jc rue serais flatte, m. flattec,/. rail Hatt6 or flattec, ■ Nooi nuns wrions flattes m ■ !• | Halt, s M • Qattea, m. Elles se scraient flattees,/. jrauld, could, might M i-isclf ',/.;/ have flattered thyself ■are flattered himself ' herself : kave Mattered ire WUgkt have flattered ourselves vou irould have flattered ytnmeive* uld have flattered tkemsehsU aid have flattered \" REFLECTIVE VERBS. — § 56. 349 Flatte-toi, Qii'il se flatte, Qu'on se flatte, Flattons-nous, Flattes-vous, Qa'ils ee flattent, Imperative Mode. flatter thyself let him flatter himself let one flatter one's self, let us flatter ourselves flatter yourselves let them flatter themselves Subjunctive Mode. Que je me flatte, Que tu te flattes, Qu'il se flatte, Qu'on se flatte, Que nous nous flattions, Que vous vous flattiez, Qu'ils se flattent, Que je me flattasse, Que tu te flattasses, Qu'il se flattat, Qu'on se flattat, Que nous nous flattassions, Que vous vous flattassiez, Qu'ils se flattassent, that I may flatter myself that thou may est flatter thyself that he may flatter himself that one may flatter himself that we may flatter ourselves that you may flatter yourselves that they may flatter themselves IMPERFECT. that I might flatter myself that thou mightest flatter thyself that he might flatter himself that one might flatter himself that we might flatter ourselves that you might flatter yourselves that they might flatter themselves Que je me sois flatte, m. flattee, /. Que tu te sois flatte or flattee, Qu'il se soit flatte, Qu'elle se soit flattee, Qu'on se soit flatte, Que nous nous soyons flattes 01 flattees, that I may have flattered myself that thou mayest have flattered thyself that he may have flattered himself that she may have flattered herself that one may have flattered himself that we may have flattered ourselves Que vous vous soyez flattes or that you may have flattered yourselves that they may have flattered themselves that they may have flattered themselves Qu'ils se soient flattes, m. Qu'elles se soient flattees,/. PLUPERFECT. Que je me fusse flatte, m. flattee, /. that I might have flattered myself Que tu te fusses flatte or flattee, Qu'il se fut flatte, ^Qu'elle se fut flattee, Qu'on se fut flatte, Que nous nous fussions flattes or that thou mightest have flattered thy self that he might have flattered himself that she might have flattered herself that one might have flattered himself that we might have flattered ourselves fussiez flattes or that you might have flattered your- selves flattes, m. that they might have flattered thtm- selves Qu'elles se fussent flattens,/. that they might have flattered them- selves Que vous vous flattees, Qu'ils se 350 REFLECTIVE VERB S. § 57. IsFrarnvE Mode. •RESENT. PAST. 8e flatter, to flatter one's self | S'e-tre flatte, to have flattered one's selj Participle. present. compound. 8c flattant, flattering one's self | S'6tant flatW, having flattered one's stlj PAST. Flatt*. m. flattie,/. flatWs.ro. p. flatUSes, /. p. flattered § 57. — Neoative Form of TnE Reflective Verb. NE PAfl SE FLATTER, SOT TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF. Indicative M Je no me flatte pas, Tu u tfl Battel pas, Jl lit- M llatt'- ; On m m tiii.it-- Noui in- nun-- stations pas, VOM M fOOa Battel pas, ! Ill pas, Ac I do not flatter myself r' not flutter thyself he does not flatter hiv. one does not flatter hims»:lf ■■■t ft.iltrr our: wradMi they do not flalt> r themstlves ,11 add a compound tense and the imperative conjugated U this form. past is-m-.riMTK. >f DM flattl, m i 1 Til M ■Da in- i*es1 pas 1 1 .«. - • • in in- >'.-t pej tiatt6, Nmis in- in .us somnica pas flattis or tl.i! ■ tea pas flatted or you have not flattered yourselves flan. v.nt pas flattcs. m. EUcs ne sc soi.; I hare not flattered myself t'lou hast not ftatt he has I Uttrtd herself one has. not flattered himself we ha ourselvt tkey Kane not flattered themselves iKey hare not flattered themselves •f- Imperative ! ' DM, ll.'ltt. itte vjuil m m flatte Qa'an bb «e iatl il.itti.ns pas, I pAS, (ju'ili in- si- (lattcnt pas, Ac. Ac ,lo not flatter thyself Ul him not flatter JtSD let one nat flatter himself Ul us not flatter ourselves do not flatter yourselves let them not flatter themselves Y avoir. — § 6 1-2. 355 (8.) This formation m ist not prevent the change of y into i, ac- cording to Rule (2.) { 49. (9.) The participle past forms all the compound tenses of verbs with the aid of the auxiliaries avoir and ttre: &s,fai chante,je suis aimLf 'avals chante,fetais aime. § 61-2. Paradigm of the Unipersonal Verb Y Avoir, To BE THERE. Indicative Mode. present. past indefinite. II y a, there is; there are | H y a eu, tliere has been; tliere have been IMPERFECT, PLUPERFECT. II y avait, there was ; there were | II y avait eu, there had been PAST DEFINITE. ^A ANTERIOR. II y eut, there was ; there were | II y eut eu^T there had been FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. H y aura, there will be | II y aura eu, there will have been Conditional Mode. present. past. II y aurait, there would be | II y aurait eu, there would have been Imperative Mode. Qu'il y ait, Let there be. Subjunctive Mode. present. past. Qu'il v ait, that iliere may be | Qu'il y ait eu, that 'there may have been IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Qu'il y eut, that there might be | Qu'il y eut eu, that tliere might have been Infinitive Mode. present. past. Y avoir, to be there | T avoir eu, to have been there Participle.- present. compound. Y ayant, tliere being | Y ayant eu, there having been FAST OR PASSIVE. § 62 ALPHABET OF THE IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, SEE $ 44, RCLB (2.) The figures placed after the infinitive of the Terbt The tenses not given In lunmnvi. PARTICIPLES. INDICATIVE. IXPERrBCT. Part Definite Abatyre, 4. to abattant j'abats j'abattais j'abattia Mtfl dmcrx abattu. /. c. Ml BATTRE Ab-uidrk, 4. -A to absolve absolvant j'absous j'absolvais absons tu absous lvais MB. avoir absout il absout il absolvait defective. n. .ilisulvons v. absolve/, ils absolvent n al'solvions v. absolviez i. absolvaient Abstenir (s') s'abs tenant jo m'abstiens je m'abstenaia je m'abstina .;A5//!/<•, «f-C. adjoint./, c. v . iiRE. Admettrk, 4. aihn.-ttant J'admea j'admottaia j'adraU U xdmit adrois/. e. see METTRB ICAL TABLE PECULIAR AflD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 43, rule (7) and § 49, indicate the conjugations to which they belong this Table are not used. Future. Conditional. Imperative. Subjunctive. Imperfect j'abattrai j'abattrais j'absoudrais tu absoudrais abats j'abatte j'abattiese j'absoudrai tu absoudras j 'absolve absous tu absolves il absoudra il absoudrait q. absolve il absolve n. absoudrons n. absoudrions absolvons n. absolvions v. absoudrez v. absoudriez absolvez v. absolviez i. absoudront i. absoudraient q. absolvent i. absolvent je m'abstien- je m'abstien- je m'abstieniie jem'abstinsso [drai [drais j'abstrairais abstiens-toi ' j'abstrairai j'abstraie abstrais j'accourrai j'accourrais accours j'accoure j'accourusse j'accroitrai j'accroitrais accrois j'accroisse j'accrusse j'accueillerai j'accueillerais accueille j'accueille j'accueillisso j'acheterai j'acheterais j 'achete j'achetasse tu acheteras tu acheterais achete tu achetes like il achetera il acheterait q. achete il achete CHANTER n. acheterons n. acbdterions achetons n. achetions v. acheterez v. acheteriez achetez v. achetiez ils acheteront i. acheteraient q. achetent ils achetent j'acheverai j'acheverais j'acheve j'achevasqp tu acheveras tu acheverais acheve tu acheves like il achevera il acheverait q. acheve il acheve CHANTER n. acheverons n. acheverions achevons n. achevions r. acheverez v. acheveriez achevez v. acheviez ils acheveront i. acheveraient q. achevent i. achevent j'acquerrai *n acquerras j'acquerrais j'acquiere j'acquisse tu acquerrais acquiers tu acquieres tu acquisses il acquerra il acquerrait q. acquiere il acquiere il acquit n. acquerrons n. acquerrions acquerons n. acquerions n. acquissions i. acquerrez v. acquierriez acquerez v. acqueriez v. acquissiez ils acquerront i. acquerraient q. acquierent i. acquierent i. acquissent j'adjoindrai j'adjoindrais adjoins j'adjoigne j'adjoignisse j'admettrai j'admettrais admets j'admette j'admisse y 358 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, ftClUAR. Ihfihitive. J Participles. Indicative. Imperfect. Past. Definite, X Aller, 1. to allant je vais j'allais j'allai g° alld/. o. tu vaa tu alia is tu alias aux.dtre il va il allait il alia invgular. n. allons n. allions n. allaroes v. allez v. allicz v. allitea ils vont ils allaient i. allfcrent AMPWi 1. to amenant j'amfcnc j'ameoalB j'amenai bring aiiici ■ $ 49, m j amoncollo see achkvkr Amonocub, 1 Maonewirt j'amoDoelaia j'araoncela! unoBG (4) j apparais H.EK AppakaItrk,}. nppamlmnt I'apparaiflMfa j'apparus .-<> appear apparn f. .-. LlTEf ArPAUTKME, 2 appartonaot j'appartiena j'appartcnais j'appartins ]g appartnni f. c. me rare. Appklxb, 1. /- appelant j'appelk j'appdah j'appelai call appeU in appeDaa like aux. av<.ir il appelle ( iianter CHANTER n appelona peculiar v. appelei ils appellant ArrRKN-niiK.-l. appretumt j'appreoda j'apprt'iiais j'appris to learn apprtfl MiKK Applvhh, 1. to appnyant j'appuie j'appuyais j'appuyai support appoyi /. e. tu appui.s t. appnyaii like aux. avoir il appule il appnjaU CHANTER n appuv.iiis ii. appnykNM lliar. v. appuvc/. ils appakat v. appajhi 1 lj [ l!\ U.Ilt Absaiu.ir. 2. assalllant I'aeeaQle j issaill.iis U> assault a.vsailli f. o. , ; 'lrs I i->:iillais t. assaillis il aaaafllfl i. ;i-*aillait i. assaillit n. assaill-ms tOlkai n. aasaillirmt v. assail!.-/. iilii-z v. assailii.s ils assaillrnt latent i. assaillirent AsSEOIR. ft, jassla v* somrthi': me b'asseoir (town; to mat. y' A»»koir.(»'j :i. s'aawyant '•■■Is j.' m'aai j Ill'.lSMS to+Sit t t'antodi t. t'assis aux. Atre i a-s.yait t. I'aaU irrt-jjular. n. n. asseyions n. n. asstrae* yi./. v. v. asMl.'s i. s'asscii nt i. s'assryai.nt i. s'assin nt Astrkinpkk 1. astretgnant j'.istr.ins • to compel lastretl N !>RE ATTrisnru:, 4. att.-ignant j'att.'in-* j atkigrials jatttlgnia to attain. att.-int f. c. M>RE Attf.i.kr. 1. to attelairf i'att.'ll.- j'uttolais J'att:lai putto,harnr J attrait I.ER Attraire, 4. to attr.' j'attrayais attract attrait f. e. me trmiie AvrsiK. 2. /./avmaut il avicnt il avenait il avint happen avenu il happens il was happen- ing U happened Atoir, to hart see model $ 47 AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. G2 359 FUTURE. Conditional. Imperative. Subjunctive. Imperfect. j'irai j'irais j'aiile j'allasse tu iras tu irais va tu ailles tu allasses il ira il irait q. aille il aille il allat n. irons n. irions allons n. allions n. allassions V. irez v. iriez allez v. alliez v. allassiez ils iront i. iraient q. aillent i. aillent i. allassent j'amenerai j'amenerais amene j'amene j'amenasse j'amoncellerai j'amoncelle- [rai& amoncelle j'amoncelle j'amoncelasse j'apparaitrai j'appar&itrais apparais j'apparaisse j'apparusse j'appartien- j'appartien- j'appartienne j'appartinsse [drai [drais j'appellerais appartiens j'appellerai j 'appelle j'appelasse tu appelleras t. appellerais appelle tu appelles like il appellera i. appellerait q. appelle i. appelle CHANTER n. appellerons n. appellerions appelons n. appelions v. appellerez v. appelleriez appelez v. appeliez i. appelleront i.appelleraient q. appellent i. appellent j'apprendrai j'apprendrais apprends j'apprenne j'apprisse j'appuierai j'appuierais j 'appuie j'appuyasse t. appuieras t. appuierais appuie tu appuies like i. appuiera i. appuierait q. appuie il appuie CHANTER n. appuierons n. appuierions appuyons n. appuyions v. appuierez v. appuieriez appuyez v. appuyiez i. appuieront 1. appuieraient q. appuient ils appuient j'assaillirai j'assaillirais j 'assaille j'assaillisse t. assailliras t. assaillirais assaille t. assailles t. assaillisses i. assaillira i. assaillirait q. assaille i. assaille i. assailit n. assaillirons n. assaillirions assaillons n. assaillions n.assaillissions v. assaillirez v. assailliriez assaillez v. assailliez v. assaillissiez i. assailliront i. assailliraient q. assaillent i. assaillent i. assaillissent j'assierai j'assierais assieds j'asseie j'assisse je m'assierai j. m'assierais je m'asseie je m'assisse t. t'assieras t. t'assierais assieds toi t. t'asseies t. t'assisses i. s'assiera i. s'assierait q. s'asseie i. s'asseie i. s'assit n. n. assierons n. n. assierions asseyons n. n. n. asseyions n. n. assissiona v. v. assierez v. v. assieriez asseyez v. v. v. asseyiez v. v. assissiez i. s'assieront i. s'assieraient q. s'asseient i. s'asseient i. s'assissent j'astreindrai j'astreindrais astreins j'astreigne j'astreignisse j'atteindrai j'atteindrais j'atteigne j'atteignisse atteins j'attellerai j'attellerais attelle j'attelle j'attelasse j'attrairai j'attrairais attra's j'attraie U aviendra il aviendrait il avienne il avinfc it will happen it wld. haypen it ir.gi. happen U mgt. happen 360 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR Im-unTivr. Participles. LSDICiTIVE. IMPERFECT. Past Defihitk. Avois (r)lobc y ayant il y a il y avait il y eut there eu^unip.) there is, are there tens, vere there icas, veer* Battre, 4. to hattant je bats je battais je battis beat battu. /. e. tu bats tu battais tu battis aux. avoir il bat il battel! il battit irregular. n. battons n. battions n. battimes v. battel v. bat tie/. v. battites ils battent i. battah-nt ils battirent , Bcire, 4. to ^ drink buvaut je bois je buvais je bus bu, /. e. tu bois tu buvais tu bus aux. avoir il b.>it il buvait il but irregular. n. buvona n. buvions n. buraes v. biivr/. v. buvi v. butes ils boivent i. bavaleat ils burcnt Bodillir, 2. to bouillant, je bous je bouillais je bouillis bed buuilli. f. o. tu bous tu bouillais tu bouillis il bout il bouillait * il bouillit ii. bouillons u. bouillions n. bouillimes v. bouillez v. boilillk 1 /. v. bouillites i. bouilk-nt ils bouillaient ils bouillirent BoCRRKI.ER, 1. buiirrelant |e boarrBlfl je bourrelais je bourrelai to torment bourrcW,/. c. C*) Braik il brait bray iLs braient BtllNKK, 1. to bru'mant il bruino il bruinait il bruina driz bruino . ; Us it tras i it drizzled rsonal. 1 Bttll bnriHBl il bruit il bruyait, or il bruissait riMir. rustle •ive. ils briiyai. nt ils bruissaient CaCHETKR, 1. cachctant je cachflais je cacbetai ■■■./. e. HE, 4. to j< Ihs -nais je ceignis gird tu (-.•ins tu nelfneh aux. avoir il rvint il oeteMtt n. ccignions il ccignit ■ irregular. u oaJgnoni v. ceignr7: v. ceigtiic/. v. oeydtti ■linTit pent n.ii.Ttt Chan ■ lant noelle H-.-lais je chaDcelai to Sl< ObaBOl < see iffU je change*! change tu rhangoa tu changeaia tu changeaa aux. avoir il cbango il changeait il change* ' (1) n. iliangcons ii. cbangions n. changi'iraa* ;!iar. v. change* v. changies v. chau- ils cbaa ilschangcaicnt ils changorcnt CiacONscninE, circonsorivant je circonscrls je circonscri- j. circonacriTb) ircum- droumurtt, |vais [scribe [f.e. N V | MR, circonvi-iiant j circonvieus je circonve- je ctrconvine 2. to circum- circonveuu, see tenia [naifl [vent [/.•• 1 AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 S61 Future. Conditional. Imperative. Subjunctive. Imperfect. fly aura il y aurait il y ait il y eut there will he there would be there may be there might be je battisse je battrai je battrais je batte tu battras tu battrais bats tu battes tu battisses il battra il battrait q. batte il batte il battit n. battrons n. battrions battons n. battions n. battissions v. battrez v. battriez battez v. battiez v. battissiez i. battront i. battraient q. battent i. battent i. battissent je boirai j. boirais je boive je busse tu boiras tu boirais bois tu boives tu busses il boira il boirait q. boive il boive il but n. boirons n. boirions buvons n. buvions n. bussions v. boirez v. boiriez buvez v. buviez v. bussiez i. boiront i. boiraient q. boivent i. boivent ils bussent je bouillirai je bouillirais je bouille je bouillisse tu bouilliras tu bouillirais bous tu bouilles tu bouillisses il bouillira il bouillirait q. bouille il bouille il bouillit n. bouillirons n. bouillirions bouillons n. bouillions n. bouillissions v. bouillirez v. bouilliriez bouillez v. bouilliez v. bouillissiez 5 bouilliront i. bouilliraient q. bouillent il bouillent i. bouillissent je bourrelerai je bourrelerais bourrele je bourrele je bourrelasse il braira il brairait ils brairont ils brairaient il bruinera il bruinerait q. bruine q. bruine q. bruinat it will drizzle it wld drizzle let it drizzle it may drizzle it ingt. irizzle je cacbetterai je cachette- [rais cacbette je cacbette je cachetasse je ceindrai je ceindrais je ceigne je ceignisse tu ceindras tu ceindrais ceins tu ceignes tu ceignisses il ceindra il ceindrait q. ceigne il ceigne il ceignit n. ceindrons n. ceindrions ceignons n. ceignions n. ceignissions v. ceindrez v. ceindriez ceignez v. ceigniez v. ceignissiez ils ceindront ils ceindraient q. ceignent ils ceignent i. ceignissent je cbancellerai je chancelle- [rais cbancelle je cbancelle je chancelassa je cbangerai je changerais je change « je changeass« like change tu changes tu changeasses CHANTER q. change like il changelt changeons CHANTER changeassions cbangez v change assiez q. cbangent i.changeassent je cirsconcri- je circonscri- je circonscrive je circonscri- [rai [rais circonscris [visse )«} circonvien- je circonvien- je circonvi- je circonvinsae [drai [drais circonviens [enne 10 362 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR ijfFlMlTlN Clore, 4. to close defective COLLETER, 1. U> collar CDMBATTnE,4. •hat (TU,4. i ml CoMPARAITRF., 4. to appear Co.MPLAlRK, 4. to humor OOMFBCMOBS, itdcr- slaiut OoKPBOMrr- . pnniiU UOMCL to CO:; aux. avoir irregular. urn, - he. 4 aux. av<>ii irregular. OOKFtl ;• ivi.ir .!ar PARTICIPLES. Indicative. je clos clos tu clos il clot collctant je collate collet*./, e. (> 49, (5) combat taut Je combats combattu. f. e. see battre oommettaat je oommeta commii ;tre compai mparaifl compara an pahaItbi complai mplaia LilU je oomprenda M)RK compha compreoant oomptia,/ & compronnt- compromia /'.<• concluant jccom; mi je concilia tu concilia il CODOlnt In. ooDolaona v. coochiea i. oonclnent • ours oonoom . ■ iur i-.im itii-.uit je condnia con J nit IMPERFECT. pAtT. DzFlMTB. je coUetaia see ACHBTEB je combattais je commettaJa je comparais- [aak je compuuBsia je comprenaia jeoompromel [tais luais luais il conclualt d. coneluiona V. colicluicZ i concluaient •urais je conauiaaia tu oondalaaJa il conduiaait m: 1 Kill RE. 4 ■lisarit je oontredia je contrediaata je contrcdis contredit,/ e. tu contredia like dire like dire aux. avoir il contredit n.contrediaona v. contrediaea i. contrediaent CONTREFAIRE, jr contrefkla je controfai- je contrefia oontrerait,/ a. see kaire [aafa ikventr. iiant kreviena je contreve- je contrcvina CoIitH' Willi /..• aaa tenth Jnais ooovainqnant 1 a'mes je coiivain- j.' oonrainqoia to atn i-Miiv.ii: [qoaia ooDTenanl ' je oonvlena je convenaia je convins oonveno, f. e. tee TKviH ooqnetant je ooqnete j<" coquetats jo coquetai ;urt ooqnet6 BBTCH OOBSOMPBB, 1 oorrompanl je C"iT. .nips j.- corrompala je corrompia eorrompa / e, KPBI ooasant je oonda je conaaia je cotisis r e. in condi til <-..u-:iis Hi < ..it-is aux nvi.ir il oond il couaalt il cooait "liar. a. I'.nisona il .-(iii-; ii. <''>iisimca v oooaei v. couaiei v. oooa) Da ooiuwnl ila couaaient Da ooaalreat US, 2. fa coiirant j,- 0001 je conroa ooorn tu courala tu cooraa mix 1 il c.iirt il conrait il courut irngular. n. oooroaa ii ioiiri«.iis n. conr&maa v. conriea v. couruti'S ils c.nr.iit Qa ciiinai.iit ils cournrent Oovn couvrant Je convre j.' oouTrafa j.- OoavrJa • ■HlVi'lt./. 0. . Kill eralgnam jo croiguia cralnl .:>RE ^ i. oroyaal 111 (TUS anx avoir il IT.. it il croyall il rnit ular. n croyona n croyiona ii. crdjoea iN crofc nt ils croyaienl [la cninnt je 'T..is je crow m crobH tu crua • -. .>ir^ il in. it il lent J ■ decouda DBI oavre I I! Ill tee icBnug Bsomi jo dedaia WD! iltK il d6faille ii. dofalUcoa v. delaillei ils d6falllent je defkia m i'.uih: Imperfect. Past. Definite dejoibl demenl iii'iii'-nti. /'. e. demettaot lrllliv depebj d6pelnl depla, /'. b. lesap] ■ i is,/, e rant .1. /'. B. deteignanl devim. /. a Je dejoioa Je demem tee bsnto Je demeta rmi Je dapeioa Moaa [preoda Je deaaen m vanrou jw sneillaia tu cueillais il caeillait n. iiK'illious v. cuellliei ils cueillaient jc coisaia je debattata jedficacbetaia j.- d6cboyata tu decboyaia il decboyait ii. dechoyiaua v. decboyiea iIsd6cboyaient jr dec m je d6couvraia je decrivaia je il< dl je il.'.luisais •-illiiis C'tC. j.' tlcf.iKais •ignais Je ill inciitais j.' il.'-inctt.iis Je depeignaia j 1 ' ddplt Je daaappio [Dab jo cucillis tu cucillis il cucillit n. cueillimea v. cueillites ils cucillireat je cuisis je debattia je decacbetai je decbaa tu dechus il dccluit n. decbdnwa v. decbatea ils ilcchiirciit je decouala je ib'couvris je ddcrivis Je iledis je lU'duisLs bJDbbj etc. je defls ii degela je dejoiguis je ddmentis Je demis I je ddplua je dftaapprh j« dateignli *D UKIPERS01TAL VERBS. 367 je cueillerai tu cueilleras il cueillera n. cueillerons v. cueillerez ils cueilleront je cuirai je debattrai je decachet- " [terai je decherrai tu deeherras il decherra n. decherrons V. decherrez ils dechern je decoudrai •out je cueillerais tu cueillerais il cueillerait n. cueillerions v. cueilleriez i. cueilleraient je cuirais je debattrais je decachet- [terais je decherrais tu decherrais il decherrait n. decherrions v. decherriez i. decherraient je decoudrais decouvrirai je decouvrirais je decrirai je dedirai je deduirai see Bescherelle, Dictionnaire National. je deferai a degelera je dejoindrai je dementirai je demettrai je depeindrai je deplairai je desappren- [drai je desservirai Jed6teinlrai OoKr..TlONAL. je decrirais je dedirais je deduirais je deferai il degelerait je dejoindrais jedementirais je demettrais je dependrais je deplairais je desappren- [drais je desservirais *e deteindrais cueille q.. cueille cueillons cueillez q. cueillent cuis debats decachette dechois q. dechoie dechoj T ons dechoyez q. dechoient decouds decouvre cris dedis deduis defais q. degele dejoins demens demets depeins deplais desapprends deteins Subjunctive. je cueille tu cueilles il cueille n. cueillions v. cueilliez i. cueillent je cuise je debatte je decachette je dechoie tu dechoies il dechoie n. dechoj'ions v. dechoyiez ils dechoient je decouse je decouyre je decrive je dedise je deduise J6' il degele je dejoigne je demente je demette je depeigne je deplaise je desappren [ne je desserve je deteigne Imperfect. je cueillisse tu cueillisses il cueillit n. cueillissiona v. cueillissiez ils cueillissent je cuisisse je debattisso je decache- [tasse je dechusse tu dechusses il dechut n. dechussiona v. dechussiez ils dechussent je decousisse je decouvrissa je decrivisse . je dedisse je deduisisse je defisse il degelat je dejoignisse je dementisse je demisso je depeignissa je deplusse je desapprisse je desservissa je deteignisse IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR iNflNITIV*. Participles. Indicative. Impbrfect. Past Dkhsjti, DBTENIB, 2 /(' fie tenant je detiens je detcnais jc detins detain detenu,/, e. SCC TENIR DirniiRE, 4 detrui>ant jedfitruis je detruisaia je dfitruisis detruit,/ e. SCC CONDHRE Dktekib, 2. to devenant je devisBB je deveimis jo devins bccetmc develiu./. e. see TF.MR DavtTia, 2. to jo div, je devotais je dSvfltis divest 1 /. C. see vetik /^ DiRi: 1 ' di-ant je i»ris entrepi \i I'ttK rarra, oant Ueu tenala j'ctitrctins entretena. f. e. M TBNIR, j'cllti. . j'ontre jVnttvvis ji'iiv.ii.' i'.nv. .y.iis j'enroyaJ Ill «II\ III ■•IIYuVilis in cnvoyaa MX. avoir il enrojmH il eavoyi ;lur. 11. RK I.KR. 1. lie I'itinoelle j'etiiioclal I) j 6tiquetaJa ' 6tiqa J'ttlqoetal 1 TKR NDU, 4. iant -nais j'atrolgnU to j fexdttB j'oxcltu excla ■ I.IKH ExTBAiir, 4. ■ j\-xtr.iis j'extraj /. c. !RK AKD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 62 371 j'enclorai j'encourrai j'endormirai j'enduirai ^" j'enfreindrai je m'enfuirai j'enjoindrai jem'ennuierai jem'enquerrai je m'entre- [mettrai j'entrepren- [drai j'entretiendrai j'entreverrai j'enverrai tu enverras il enverra n. enverrons v. enverrez ils enverront je m'epren- [drai Conditional. j'enclorais j'encourrais j'endormirais j'enduirais j'enfreindrais je m'enfuirais j'enjoindrais je ni'ennuie- [rais je m'enquer- [rais je m'entre- [mettrais j'entrepren- [drais j'entretien- [drais j'entreverrais j'enverrais tu enverrais il enverrait n. enverrions v. enverriez ils enverraient je m'epren- [drais fessaierai j'eteindrai j'etincellerai j'etiqueterai j'etreindrai j'exclurai j 'extrairai encours endors enduis enfreins enfuis-toi enjoins ennuie-toi enquiers-toi entremets-toi entreprends entretiens entrevois envoie q. envoie envoyons envoyez q. envoient eprends-toi j'eteindrais j'etincellerais j'etiqueterais j'etreindrais j'exclurais j'extrairais Subjunctive. Imperfect eteins etincelle etiquete etreins exclus extrais j encoure j'endorme j'enduise j'enfreigne je m'enfuie j'enjoigne je m'ennuie je ru'enquiere je m'entre- [mette j'entreprenne j'entretiemie j'entrcvoie j 'envoie tu envoies il envoie n. envoyions j encourusse j'endormisse j'enduisisse j'enfreignissc je m'enfuisse j'enjoiguisse je m'ennuyas- [se je m'enquisse je m'entre- [misse j'entreprisse j'entretinsse j'entrevisse j'envoyasse tu envoyasses il envoyat nenvoyassions v. envoyiez v. envoyassiez ils envoient ils envoyasstnt je m eprenne j'essaie j'eteigne j'etincelle j 'etiquete j'etreigne j'exclue j'extraie je m epnsse j'essayasse j'eteignisse j'etincelasse j'etiquetasse j'etreignisse j'exclusse IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR bUlMllIB. PARTICIPLES. Indicative. I.MI-Kr.FECT. Past Delimit* Faii.lik, 2. to faillissant je faillis je faillissais jo faillis fall failli /totr regular SM F1NIB, 1) 50 ' ' . [B '■rclk) (Old form faillant je faux je faillais jo faillis still failli tu faux iu faillais tu faillis irregular. lie) il hut il faillait i! faillit n. billons n. faillioOfl n. faillimes v. failles v. failliez v. faillites ijfaillent RR }<• ficelle j.- flcelais je lieelais ■ f. c. I.ER (4) Fkirk, 1 frit./.e. tu fris ■ lil'trlivi 1 il frit fl IK S fuvant Je foil je fuis fui tu fuis in fayais tu fuis il fuit il fuit n. fuvions n. (olmet v. fnyics ils talent aient iis t'nireut 1 il gelo il gela f. c. tire il gH ■ Grass , yant jo gra- YKK OftaLKI Ci'i lant il grdlo il gr6 la hail. unip. Cr«L->illant ;!alt 11 gresilla . unip. je liais j.- nab m ball lu liais mix. avoir il I. ait .i ball Jar . talent • nt ■ •■*. 1. JO liarci-kis • tlaia f. c. AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 62 373 FUTURE. Conditional. Imperative. Subjunctive. Imperfect. je faillirai je faillirais faillis je faillisse je faillisse je faudrai je faudrais je faille je faillisse tu fandras tu faudrais etc. etc. il faudra il faudrait n, faudrons n. faudrions v. faudrez v. faudriez ils faudront ils faudraient je ferai je ferais je fasse je fisse tu feras tu ferais fais tu fasses tu fisses il fera il ferait q. fasse il fasse ilfit n. ferons n. ferions faisons n. fassions n. fissions v. ferez v. feriez faites v. fassiez v. fissiez ils feront ils feraient q. fassent ils fassent ils fissent il faudra il faudrait q. faille q. faille q. fallut je feindrai je feindrai feins je feigne je feignisse je ficellerai je flcellerais je ficelle je ficelasse ficelle je frirai je frirais tu friras tu frirais fris il irira, &c. il frirait, &c. je fuirai je fuirais je fuie je fuisse tu fuiras tu fuirais fuis tu fuies tu fuisses il fuira il fuirait q. fuie il fuie il fuit n. fuirons n. fuirions fuyons n. fuyions n. fuissions v. fnirez v. fuiriez fuyez v. fuyiez v. fuissiez ils fuiront ils fuiraient q. fuient ils fuient ils fuissent il gelera il gelerait qu'il gele qu'il gele q. gelat Je grasseierai je grasseierais grasseie je grasseie je grasseyasse il grelera il grelerait q. grele qu'il grele qu'il grelat Jl gresillera il gresillerait q. gresille q. gresille q. gresillat je hairai je hairais je haisse je haisse tu hairas tu hairais hais tu haisses tu haisses il haira il hairait q. haisse il haisse ilhait n. hairons n. hairions haissons is. haissions n. haissions v. hairez v. hairiez haissez v. haissiez v. haissiez ils hairont ils hairaient q. haissent ils haissent ils haissent. je harcelerai je harcelerais harcele je harcele je harcfilasse 8U IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR iKmmtvE. PARTICIPLES. ISDU-ATIVK. Imperfect. Past. DcriMlT* Importer, 1. important il Imports il importa it il importa to w, importe it matters unipcrsonal. I.vnLiiu:, 4. to [ndoiuot j'induis j'induisais j 'induisis induce induit. f. e. "CIBE Inscrire, 4. /o insorivant jlnscris j'inscrivais j'inscrivia kuc insmt,/. e. see bVrire I.V.STRI IRE. 4. instrnis'aiit j 'instruis j'instruisais j'instruisis instnr' mnnu Intf.roire, 4. interdi j'int.Tilis j'intordisais j'interdis intt-nli' KED1BE Interim iM pre. iiit'Tri'inp.uit jlnterrompa j'intcrroinpais j'interrompia 'rrmpt [nterrompu f.e MPBI 2 intenrenanl j'intervieofl j'intorvonais j'intervins iiiti-rvi-mi ._/'. r. see tknir L iddirc, 4. latrodnteant j intrcxluis j'introduisais j'introduiaia Introdolt, i. •-. KDOIBI Jf.teh. 1. to j'-taiit jeletab je >tai tn jettea m |l tais tajetM mix. avuir il t « - 1 1 * - ilj.-tait Djeta ;'iar. 1 i n. ji'tutis ii. jetiona ii. jHamos v. jetee v. ji'tirz v.'jct.ites ils jettent ils jetaient ils fetareoi :!:, 4. to jeJobM jejoigDala jo joignia y. Lou joint, /.e. j.- Ua Je llaala j.- Ins tn lis tn lisais tU Ins mix. ITOfr il lit il lisait il hit invgular. mats lisons 11. lisinlis n. 1 Times v. liaiea v. latea ils lisrllt ils li-ainit ils luront Liik jr luis j.. luisais In] -. DORl je inaintiiiis j.' liiiiiiti'tiais J e maintins srr TEMIB ICaIiFaiu, 1. mi' if* the i . )«• tiiainlis je man 1 j.- mandia IlKlllilit,/. c. tn maii'lis til mar, like mas mix. av..ir il man. lit il mai. alar. n maud v. mai:-'. iU in i ii. maii'li-siuns v. mai: i l.mand MlfAITRE, j ■ in. ■ nnais- jo m6connai Minn m6disant je lni'.i Je mddia iin*" lit KF.DIBE | iin'-fais-int Je in. ' jc mSfaisaia J« mi- lis nu'lait •M FA IKK nunaiit Je imiio Je monaia jo menai '". c. If or j.- Ill' IIS j>- nuntais jo mentis . moiiti . iir AKD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. § 375 Future. CONDITIO JfiL. Imperative. Subjunctive. Imperfect. il importera il importerait q. importe q. importe q. importat j'induirai j'induirais induis j'induise j'induisisse j'inscrirai j'inscrirais inscris j'inscrive j'inscrivisse j'instruirai j'instruirais instruis j'instruise j'instruisisse j'interdirai j'interdii'ais interdis j'interdise j 'inter disse j'interromprai j'interrom- j'interrompe j'interromp- [prais interromps fisse j'interviendrai j'intervien- [drais interviens j'intervienne j'intervinsse j'introduirai j'introduirais introduis j'introduise j'introduisisse je jetterai je jetterais je jette je jetasse tu jctteras tu jetterais jette tu jettes tu jetasses il jettera il jetterait q. jette il jette il jet*t n. jetterons n. jetterions jetons n. jetions n. jetassions v. jetterez v. jetteriez jetez v. jetiez v. jetassiez ils jetteront ils jetteraient q. jettent ils jettent ils jetassent je joindrai y\ joindrais joins je joigne je joignisse je lirai je lirais je lise je lusse tu liras tu lirais lis tu lises tu lusses il lira il lirait q. lise il lise il lut n. lirons n. lirions lisons n. lisions n. lussions v. lirez v. liriez lisez v. lisiez v. lussiez ils liront ils liraient q. lisent ils lisent ils lussent je luirai je luirais je luise je niaintien- je maintien- je maintienne je maintinsso [drai [drais maintiens tenses given here je maudirai je rnaudirai3 je maudisse je maudisse like dire Like dire maudis q. maudisse maudissons maudissez q. maudissent tu maudisses il maudisse n. maudissions v. maudissiez ils maudissent like dire je meconnai- je meconnai- jemeconnaisse je meconnussa [trai [trais meconnais je medhai je medirais medis je medise je medisses je meferai je msferais mefais je mefasse je mefisse je menerai je menerais raene je mene je menasse je mentirai }3 mentirais mens je mento je mentisss 370 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR Inhmtivb. Pi.RTIClPI.KS. Inpicativk. Imperfect. Past Definite MiP(IKNDRR,4 se mepreaant j.m. mejpre'ads j. me niepre- je me inSpris (se) i e£ LB, 4. to mepru SCC PBKKD&B [nais je meffl je mettats je mis put mis,/, e. til IlK'tS tu mettais tu mis mix. avoir il met il niottait il mit irn .- . n. mettnns n. mottinns n. mimes v. unttioz v. mitos ils nirtii'iit ils mettaient ils niiivnt M 1. / • moolairi je mouds je moolah je moulus niuulu./. c. in moods tu monlaia tu mooing avoir il mood il ui'Hilait il rnoolat .lar. n. iiiMiiions n. mouliooa u. tnuulumes v. mouloz v. moollei v. monlatee ils lllulll.'Ht ils rooulaient ils moolarent tu mean j<- mooraif je mourns • a, tu monrali in iiiourus il iiiciirt il mooraH il moarat Irregular. ii. moarooa ii moorloafl ii. moiirumes v. moil' v. moorlei v. mom i. ils meurent uralent ils mourarenl n,3. /<> mmivant j.' iiu us je moovaia je urns inn./, a tu meoa tu moOVBU in inns ivuir il iniMit il iimuvait il unit .lar. ii. mon ii. mooviom n. iin'iincs v. mon v. moil' v. mates ils in- a ils iiiiMiv.ti.-rit ilamaroat IB, (so) ;..mt j.- DM I j me moovaia je me mai j.' uai- j'- aaqaii ■ lu uais-.n's in oaqaia il halt il nals&ait il naqait MM Ion ii. naqotmef v. naimioa V n:ti] nitts ils Dauaenf ils u.ii ils naqolrenl Je in':: ■ nnip. j.- tiiv.-Ui* liui-ant LCI Ncibb, 4. to J6 mils j'~ uui.-is imi ' j'obtten j'obteoaJa j'obtui ibtenn W TSMTB 1 j'oflrah jCtlii.s m •>• vitiu ' 4. to tenant j olgnan j'"igTii§ .illt IfOU • nn.'ttant i < -in. ta j'uincttais jond* Dmia, /. o. mi ' i'miis 1 .-Ult hear. <1< T. jui,/. e. ' AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 62 37V FwTURB. Conditional. Imperative. SuBJUNCTIfB. Imperfect. je me mepren- je me mepren- j.memepren- je me mepris- [drai [drais meprends-toi [ne [se je mettrai je mettrais je mette je misse tu mettras tu mettrais mets tu mettes tu misses il mettra il mettrait q. mette il mette il mit . mettrons n. mettrions mettons n. mettiong n. missions . mettrez v. mettriez mettez v. mettiez v. missiez ils mettront ils mettraient q. mettent ils mettent ils missent je moudrai je moudrais je moule je moulusse tu moudras tu moudrais mouds tu moules tu moulussea il moudra il moudrait qu'il moule il moule il moulut n. moudrons n. moudrions moulons n. moulions n. moulussions v. moudrez v. moudriez moulez v. mouliez v. moulussiez ils moudront ils moudraient q. moulent ils moulent ils moulussent je mourrai je mourrais je meure je mourusse tu mourras tu mourrais meurs tu meures tu mourusses il mourra il mourrait q. uieure il meure il mourut n. mourrons n. mourrions mourons n. mourions n. mourussions v. mourrez v. mourriez mourez v. mouriez v. mourussiez ils mourront ils mourraient q. meurent ils meurent ils mourussent je mouvrai je mouvrais je meuve je musse tu mouvras tu mouvrais meus tu meuves tu musses il mouvra il mouvrait q. meuve il meuve il mut n. mouvrons n. mouvrions mouvons n. mouvions n. mussions v. mouvrez v. mouvriez mouvez v. mouviez v. mussiez ils mouvront ils mouvraient q. meuvent ils meuvent ils mussent je me mouvrai je me mouv- [rais meus-toi je me meuve je me musse je naitrai je naitrais je naisse je naquisse tu naitras tu naitrais nais tu naisses tu naquisses il naitra il naitrait q. naisse il naisse il naquit n. naitrons n. naitrions naissons n. naissions n. naquissions v. naitrez v. naitriez naissez v. naissiez v. naquissiez ils naitront ils naitraient q. naissent ils naissent ils naquissent je negligerai je negligerais neglige je neglige je negligeasse il neigera il neigerait q. neige qu'il neige q. neigeat je nivellerai je nivellerais nivelle je nivelle je nivelasse je nuirai je nuirais je nuise je nuisisse j'obtiendrai j'obtiendrais nuis obtiens j'obtienne j'obtinsse j'offrirai j'offrirais offre j'offre j'offrisse j'oindrai j'oindrais oins j'oigne j'oignisse j'omcttrai j'omettrais j'omette j'omisse omets j'ouisse il ouit 378 IRUEGULAR, DEFECTIVE, rECTLIAR IxriMirivi. PaRTICIPLBS. lNUli ATIVE. I.MPEJllKl T. Past. Deficits, V Ocvhir, 2. to ouvrant j'oavre j'cuvrais j'ouvris cpen ■ invert,/, e. tU OUVTCS tD mi via is tu ouvris aux. avoir il ouvre ilouvrait il ouvrit irregular n. onvrons. n. ouvrions n. ouvrimes ; V. OUVTCZ v. ouvriez v. ouvrites ils ouvrviit ils ouvraicnt ils ouvrirent Paithk, 4. xo 1 j." pah pa to pais tu pai.ssais avoir il pait il pateaatt :ive n. paissona ils paiM nt n. pai^sioiis v. patesi ils paiasatest P MRE, \.tO parlvJajnt je jwirfais j 1 ' i ,: " : je parfls >'rle par fait an pairs .ml Je paialnaaai Je pares ■>mr para • \ utrk. ■ KIR, 2. puoooml Je parooon j.- parcourah Je parcoure* par.. Mini /. 9 rata 1' part. mt j.' partais Je partis parti./, o. \ ria 1' l nib. 2. parvenant je pan j" p*n Je parvins parvenu aM TKMIl Je pate |e pavais Je payai pSlgnanf rn (2.; ]• ■ 1 ' rnais ^nla peinl ■ '. !>RK ] 1, 1. to Je pi-lais (8.) rriu:. 1 Je pern Je p«Tiii'ttnis mis mil pencil rrai ■■■■ Rr.. -1. je plains Je plaignaia ji- plaignis mwi nm, (se) Je DM plains Je me piai- je me plaignlt plaint [gnais r.-ii i V ri.AU: je plateati Je pins plu in plal tu ]«lus nux. avoir il plait il pl.ii-ait il pint irregular. n. plal ii. plaisions n. jplumes v. plaiatei V. pll'lti'S [la pi.ii-.iit Ua plal ils pliirciit il plut }■ rom, B. pl.uvant il pltut il pk-uvait . uni|). plu il point def V pi>tir>uivant Je pom Je pom Je poursulvie Ttm pomeoj HI TIVRK }' rom, 3. poanroj Je pourvuti j.- poor Je i>furvua p.iiirvu 111 pom in poorrovali tu poiinroe MIX. av..ir il pOQTTOtt il pmirviivait il pourvnt irregular. n. DOW n ponrvoyton n pourvAmea v. poorvoyea v ponrvoytei v poon I ils powvotesl i puiirvovaiviit ils pourrureni AND USTIPERSONAL VERBS. § 02 379 Future. j ouvnrai tu ouvriras il ouvrira n. ouvrirons V. ouvrirez ils ouvriront je paitrai tu paitras il paitra n. paitrons v. paitrez ils paitront je parferai je paraitrai je parcourrai je partirai jc parviendrai je paierai je peindrai je pelerai je permettrai je plaindrai je me plain- [drai je plairai tu plairas ii plaira n. plairons v. plairez ils plairont il pleuvra Conditional. j ouvrirais tu ouvrirais il ouvrirait n. ouvririons ouvririez ils ouvriraient je paitrais tu paitrais il paitrait n. paitrions v. paitriez ils paitraient je parferais je paraitrais je parcourrais je partirais je parviendrais je paierais je peindrai je pelerai je permettrais je plaindrais je me plain- [drais je plairais tu plairais il plairait n. plairions v. plairiez ils plairaient il pleuvrait ouvre q. ouvre ouvrons ouvrez q. ouvrent pais il poindra il poindrait jepoursuivrai je pourvoirai tu pourvoiras ii pourvoira C. pourvoirons! v. pourvoirez I Dspourvoirontj q. paissent parfais parais parcours pars parviens paie peins pele permets plains plains-toi plais q. plaise plaisons plaisez q. plaisent q. pleuve jepoursuivrais je pourvoirais tu pourvoirais il pourvoirait n.pourvoirions v. pourvoiriez i.pourvoiraient j ouvre tu ouvres il ouvre n. ouvrions ouvriez ils ouvrent je paisse tu paisses il paisse n. paissions paissiez ils- " Subjunctive. Imperfect. obsolete je paraisse je parcoure je parte je parvienne je paie je peigne je pele je permette je plaigne je me plaigne je plaise tu plaises il plaise n. plaisions v. plaisiez ils plaisent q. pleuve poursuis pourvois q. pourvoie pourvoyons pourvoyez q. pourvoient j ouvnsse tu ouvrisses il ouvrit n. ouvrissiona v. ouvrissiez ils ouvrissent je parfisse je parusso je parcourusse je partisse je parvinsso je payasse je peignisse je pelasse je permisse je plaignisse je me plai- «*., [gnisse je plusse tu plusses il pk\t n. plussions v. plussiez ils plussent q. plut je poursuive je pourvoie tu pourvoie il pourvoie n. pourvoyions v. pourvoyiez ils pourvoient je poursuivis- [se je pourvusse tu pourvusses il pourvut n.pourvussioni) v. pourvussiez ils pourvussent 380 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR IkPINITIVE. Participles. Indicative. Imperfect. Past Definite, j P0CRT0IR,(se) 8. to provide. se pourvoyant je me pour- je me pour- je n-e pourvua pourvu, /. e. [vois [voyais Pouvoir, 3. to be able pouvant* je puis je pouvaia je pus pu tu peux tu pouvais tu pus aux. avoir il peut il pouvait il put irregular. n. pouvons n. pouvions n. piimea v. pouvez v. pouviez v. putes ils peuvent ils pouvaient ils purent PniniRE, 4. to predisant je predis je prfdisais je prfidis priMlit. /. o. : REDIRE Pbbnsu, -1. t<> prenant Je prenda je prenaJa je pris pris, /. e. tu prenda tu prenais tu pris nux. avuir il prend il prenait il prit irregular. n. prenons ii. preniooi o. primes v. prenea v. preoiea v. pritea ils prensent ils prenaient ils priront ]' bibb, 4. ant je presi Je pnscrivais Je picsenvis ' ribe j rOM in f :\ S>r icKIBI V pirwHiiiilnnl je pronoona je preeaentaia Je pnaaeotia , iti./. o. pnvalant N TIR Yv.Lx ILOIB, ■">■ jo prevaox jo pre'valais je pn'valus Putv pivvalu ■ IK nant jfl pr. je prevenaJa je prcvitis Pniv.HH, 3. Ut ptVV.-tlU. f. 0. see TEN 111 v.. is je prevoyaJa je previa like voir 1 fua vuik \Ua roil i-r.xlu Lob Je pnxluiaais j.- produisis prodoil MRE Pa" j' 1 I' r "' j.- proJetela Je projetai U» JETER Paoiiarraa, 4. proTJDJ : j.' prometa Je proiinttaia jo promia nise promll FM P promo ■ j.' promeoj Je promonvaBi jo promus ; ir< mm 1 'MR 1 Je prooorli m teems jo proscrivais jo proscrivis proven Je proT je prov Je provins provenu,/ e. only used ft nil ire ' ta the romposition cj THE, 4. Je rabats ittais jo rabattis 'ttk rabattu VC BATTRE R ICHB1 1 rachetaot Je cool j.- raclii'tais jo rachetai t;i'-]i.-(. i rn (Ft.) LKR, 1. j.' rappelle je rappelaJa jo rappelal rappcl LBS <»•) Raitrknkrk 1 rapprenant Je rapprenda j'- rapprcnals pris rappris,/ o. Rattki\i.kk.4. ratteignant Je rattrins j • r.itt.ignais J« rattoignla ratteint, f. e. Rkh»ttrk. 4 rebal je n 1'ats Je rebel Ja r.battl» - rebattu, f. e. "HE 1. , indauant Je n rondola jo rccondnl- jo lecondolala 4. /, adult,/ e. N IQIBI [aaia AND UNIPEBSONAL VERBS. § 6 2 381 FUTURE. Conditional. Imperative. Subjunctive. Imperfect. je me pour- j« me pour- je me pour- je me pour- [vusso [voirai [voirais pourvois-toi [voie je pourrai je pourrais je puisse je pusse tu pourras tu pourrais iu puisses ;u pusses il pourra il p\ mrrait il puisse ilput n. pourrons n. pourrions n. puissions a. pussions v. pourrez v. pourriez v. puissiez v. pussiez ils jKmrront ils pourraient ils puissent ils pussent je predirai je predirais predis je predise je predisse je prendrai je prendrais je prenne je prisses tu prendras tu prendrais pregids tu prennes tu prissea il prendra il prendrait q. prenne il prenne il prit n. prendrons n. prendrions prenons n. prenions n. prissions v. prendrez v. prendriez prenez v. preniez v. prissiez ils prendront ils prendraient q. prennent ils prennent ils prissent je prescrirai je prescrirais prescris je prescrive je prescrivissa je pressentirai je pressenti- [rais je prevaudrais je pressente je pressentisso je prevaudrai prevaux je prevale je prevalusse je previendrai je previen- je previenne je previnsse [drais previens je prevoirai je prevoirais je prevoie je previsse like pouryoie like pourvoir prevoi3 like voir like voir je produirai je produirais produis je produise je produisisse je projetterai je projetterai projette je projette je projetasse je promettrai je promettrais promets je promette je promisse je promouvrai je promou- je promeuve je promusse 1 [vrais promeus je proscrirai je proscrirais proscria je proscrive je proscrivisse je proviendrai je provien- je provienne je provinsse [drais proviens ( other verbs je rabattrai je rabattrais rabats je rabatte je rabattisse je racbeterai je racbeterais racbete je racbete je racbetasse je rappellerai je rappellerais rappelle je rappelle je rappelassa je rapprendrai je rappren- [drais je ratteindrais rapprends je rapprenne je rapprisse je ratteindrai ratteins je ratteigne je ratteignisse je rebattrai je rebattrais je rebatte je rebattisse] rebats Je reconduira je recondui- je reconduise je recondui- j [rais reconduis [sisse IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECLLIA gnizt nooaaxi,/. e. BEcoNav^Kin. reconqaArant to conquer B --STRCIKE 4. to rccon- B ;>re, 4. to sci- B to A/? I.MPERFKCT. •una is nrilitts ,)•' reoaaaqnien SCC ACQl'iuiIt reconquis./". e. rcconstrnisant , jo reoo ost f u ia reoooetnut /.<■ ax GQNDUUU je recoads aaant rocoosu,/ e. reoomraat je reoonn recouru >irir B ruB,2 reoooTrul jerecoufre T'-.'. invert f. c. .<•-• ot'VRia B .:.iu. '1 recnefllani je recaeflle ' KII.I.IB Je r.-.lis Rehire. 4. fa rediaant i redit, f. e. RiDciKK, 4. fa rtduiaant rtdn Bbfairb, ; ■ c.iit t. e. B RcLIBC, I B reloi Remetti: ' liTRK rendormi,/ e. i •■ Doaana Rknti; renvoyatit SM MIRE j-- rtduia tee PAtki j.' rojoins Ml c VtNtMtE Je r.-Hs ■M LIRE j'- n-ltiis m i.t ire Je remeti M METTRE Je remooda i BcpaItbs, 4 B r.j.ii •i f. c te repentant wdbb, 4. reprenant ■ ; • '■ to reproduce |reprodolt, / e. tee coarotnai • : K e }•' reoTole •TBI 1 CUE N rm j'- ri-jM-ins SI'RE Je me repeat i • i nma j.> rep M'HE Je repi jo reeonnais- [sais je reeonque- [rais je reooDstra] [Bah Je rocousais je recourais uvrais je reomillais Je redlsali Je r6dul Je refaisais j«' r« -jnijnaia Je reUi jerehd j." nnicttais Je nuioulais je renal lormab |e reata |e r.ii\ ssais rtaia |e nv • [tali je ro['i Je ri'jrixlui- PiST. DKflNlT* je reconnua je reconquis >'e -jcconstrai [sia je rccousis je recounts je recouvria je roouoillis Je redis je r6duisis Je rt lis Je nji "ignis Je rulus ]<• tvlui.MS j.- roinis Je rcmoulus Je rtn.-upiis je rcndorniia Je ronvuyaia j-> n-pns ut'ta j'' rt'j" Je mo repaotki jo repi is Je trpiodnlab AND UNIPERSONAL VER: 62 Future. Conditional. Imperative Subjunctive. Imperfect, je recormai- [trai je reconquer- [rai je rcconstrui- [rai jo recoudrai je recourrai je recouvrirai je recueillerai je redirai je reduirai je referai je rejoindrai je relirai je reluirai je remettrai je remoudrai je renaitrai jerendormirai je rentrairai je renverrai je repaitrai je repartirai je lepeindrai je me repenti- [rai je reprendrai je reproduirai je reconnai- [trais je reconquer- [rais je reconstrui- [rais je recoudrais je recourrais e recouvrirais e recueille- [rais redirais reduirais e referais e rejoindrais je relirais e reluirais e remettrais e remoudrais e renaitrais e rerldormi- [rais e rentrairais e renverrais e repaitrais e repartirais e repeindrais e me repenti- [rais e reprendrais e reprodui- [rais reconnais reconquiers recouds recours recouvre recueille redis eduis refais rejoins relis reluis remets remouds rendors rentrais renvoie repais repars repeins repens-toi reprends reproduis je reconnaisse je reconquiere je reconstru- [ise je recouse je recoure je recouvre je recueille je redise je reduise je refasse je rejoigne je relise je reluise je remette je remoule je renaisse je rendorme je rentraie je renvoie je repaisse je reparte je repeigne je me repente je reprenne jtreproj'u'lse je reconnusse je reconquisse je veconstrui- [siaso je recousisso je recourusse je recouvrisse je recueillisse je redisse je reduisisse je refisse je rejoignisse je relusse je reluisisse je remisse je remoulusse je renaquisse je rendormisse je renvoyasse je repusse &c. je repartisse je iepeignissa je me repen- [tisse je reprisse je reproduis- [isse 384 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECCLIA INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. Ini.hativk. iMPERrECT. Past Dinmn Rnai:lRiR, 2. requerant je requiers je requerais je requis to require requia,/ c. . 6n\R Bd rteolvant je iv-olvais je resolus ■let IUDBE B ENTIE, 2. tant -ens -•■ntais je resscntis reeaenti, /. & •TIR. itTIR, 2. ssora je rcssortais je ressortia see sortir B reaaos- je me reaeou- Je me reaawB> [neat [vk-us [venais [vins Mf TVHU Je reatrema Je rcstn-i- je rcstreignia reetreii M'RK f-nais Je retieoa ji- reteoaJa je retina retenn •H T F.N in IRK, 4. jo rctrais je retmyaJa to r> retrail 1 see TRAIRF. je rei : ..lis je re vins return n-wini./. c. Ml VKVIK 'IR. 2. to Je r-v.'-ts jerevAtah Je rerAtta revttn tea vfcnR 1 ' rertront Je n-vis Je re viva is Je ruvecua revecn ' •yais Je r< vis Je ris |e ria ; s Je ris ri in ris tn ris nux avi.ir ilrit il riait il rit bm o'ular. n. riooa n. riicnis n. riraea v. riei V. riirz n. ritrs Da rfent ils ri.iii-iit ils rin-nt uK, 4. to Je rompi je rompaJa j<' rompfa roofm in rompa In r< >ni|>.iis in roinpis nux. avoir il rompf il rompa.11 il rompft ■ :'ar. n. roes] n. rompioaia n. ronq v. rompfei v. nun; iN rom] IU r. ■iiii'.iifTit ils piiupirent . (IK, 2. /" muvrnnt Je ronvTe Je n.uvrais Je nmvria rnuvi-rl. /. c. 1 RIB Baii.uu. 2 to snillant il Mflk il saillait BaTISFAIRF., 4. willi uis Je aatfafli > BiTOiB, :$. to en rami jeaua ■ iv..ir il viit il Silt ular. ii. s:»\ i<»HH Da S.'lVrllt ils aavaii-nt |]| Minnt IllR, 2. to sccnurant Jo aocour-t jo accouraia jo aecourua weooni aw coram Binuar. 4. It aJdnlaani Je mMiiU jc s6dulsaia jeridutoia teJucc a*duit,/. e. AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. §62 385 Future. Conditional. Imperative. Subjunctive. Imperfect. je requerrai je requerrais requiers je requiere je requisse je resoudrai je resoudrais je resolve je resolusse resous &c. je ressentirai je ressentirais ressens je ressente je ressentisse je ressortirai je ressortirais ressors je ressorte je ressortissa je me ressou- je me ressou- je me ressou- je me ressou- [viendrai [viendrais ressouviens-toi [vienne [vinsse je restreindrai je restrein- je restreigne je restrei- [drais restreins [gnisse je retiendrai je retiendrais retiens je retienne je retinsse je retrairai je retrairais retrais je retraie je reviendrai je reviendrais reviens je revienne je revinsse Je revdtirai je revetirais revets je revete je revetisse je revivrai je revivrais revis je revive je revecusBO je reverrai je reverrais revoia je revoie je revisse je rirai je rirais je rie je risse tu riras tu rirais ris tu ries tu risses il rira il rirait q. rie il rie ilrit n. rirons n. ririons rions n. riions n. rissions v. rirez y ririez riez v. riiez v. rissiez lis riront ils riraient q. rient ils rient ils rissent je romprai je romprais je rompe je rompisse tu rompras tu romprais romps tu rompes tu rompisses il rompra il romprait q. rompe il rompe il rompifc n. romprons n. romprions rompons n. rompions n. rompissions v. romprez v. rompriez rompez v. rompiez v. rompissiez ils rompront ils rompraient q. rompent ils rompent ils rompissent je rouvrirai je rouvrirais rouvre je rouvre je rouvrisse il saillera il saillerait q. saille q. saillit je satisferai je satisferais satisfais je satisfasse je satisfisse je saurai je saurais je sache je susse tu sauras tu saurais sache tu saches tu susses il saura il saurait q. sache il sache ilsut n. sar.ron3 n. saurions sachons n. sachions n. sussions v. saurez v. sauriez sachez v. sachiez v. sussiez ils sauront ils sauraient q. sachent ilssachent ils sussent je secourrai je secourrais secours je secoure je secourusBe je seduirai je seduirais s^duis je seduise josfiduisiase 17 386 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAB Ikfiottivi. Participles. INDICATIVE. Imperfect. Past. DinicrrB. Semer, 1. to semant je seme jo semais je semai 5*w. pec. seme,/, e. ■ Sentir, 2. to sentant je sens je scntais je sentis fxl senti,/. c. tu sens tu sentais tu sentis aux. avoir il sent il sentait il sentit irregular. n. sentons n. sentions n. sentimes v. Bootes v. sentiez v. sentites ils sentent ils sentaient ils sentirent BtfOIR, 3. to fit. savant il seyait became Servir, 2. t-> servant je sers je servais je scrvis serve •. a to servais tu servis irregular. il serf il servait il servit n. servons n. servions n. seivimcs V. serve/. v. servie/. v. servites ils servellt ils servaient ils servirent SORTII, ■ortant ►je s.ts je Sortais je sortis surti f o. see BENTIB BoirrRiR,2. to Boottfaot \>- Booflrfl jo souflYais je souflris sufrr soofffert, f. o. 1 II IR ru, 1. Boametuuri toeta ■■.lettais je soumis //) sii/nnir Si iim. :i»K ■ je s.-uris je Booriaii je solllLs «•,»(/<• M«uri tee HiitE BoUtCB vant je tOQI jo souscrivais je sous. fo 5u/>s<"riA« BOOSCrit m BCRIB1 SOUSTRAIRE, J BOOSt] je soiiMrais ju soustrayais /<> boJj LIU tot Je soot! je Booteoui je soutins SM TK.MR J6DM -"livielis j.- DM BOOT©- je in'' Mttftvj BM TKNIR funis '..h, 2. BODI je Bobrlem je slllivenais je subvin^ f<> rvtt 'in /". »>. ."■<" TKSIR BirriRE, 1. I j.' sullisais je suiiis ji/^<-«« til BOfflfl Ml sullis nux avoir il Sllh*it il raffll Milar. ii. BOffiaiOM n. sntl im.'s v. BOfflsCI v. BOffisieS v. sill! i ils sntliretit . BOITBJ suivant je suivis follitc ralvi ./. o. til snis in BoivsJa tu suivis nux. avoir il rail il Miivnit il BOivit ular. n. soli 1 n. siiiviine.M v. suive/. v. suivie/ V. Sllivites ils BoiTenl ils suivaieiit ils Hiilvirent SCRPAlRF., 4. o> surfaisant j.' SUlT.lis jo surf.. je surfls suiTait./. c. BM f'AIRK Blrpre.hdrk, ■orpreoaot j'- BOT] jo surprenaia je BurprU 4. to surprise f. C. M>HE AND UNIPERSONAL V 62 387 Future. Conditional. Imperative. Subjunctive. Imperfect. je semerai je semerais seme je seme je semasss je sentirai je sentirais je sente je sentisse fcu sentiras ;u sentirais sens ;u sentes tu sentisses il sentira il sentirait q. sente il sente il sentit n. sentirons a. sentirions sentons n. sentions n. sentissiona v. sentirez v". sentiriez sentez v. sentiez- v. sentissiez ils sentiront Is sentiraient q. sentent ils sentent ils sentissent il siera il sierait q. siee je servirai je servirais je serve je servisse tu serviras tu servirais sers tu serves tu servisses il servira il servirait q. serve il serve il servit n. servirons n. servirions servons n. servions n. servissions v. servirez v. serviriez servez v. serviez v. servissiez ils serviront ils serviraient q. servent ils servent ils servissent je sortirai je sortirais je sorte je sortisse je souffrirai je souffrirais sors souffre je ' souffre je souffrisse je soumettrai je soumettrais soumets je soumette je soumisse je sourirai je sourirais souris je sourie je sourisse je souscrirai je souscrirais souscris je souscrive je souscrivisse je soustrairai je soustrairais soustrais je soustraie jo soutiendrai jesoutiendrais soutiens je soutienne je soutinsse je me souvien- je me souvien- je me souvien- je me sou- [drai [drais souviens-toi [ne [vinsse je subviendrai je subvien- [drais subviens je subvienne je subvinsse je suffirai je suffirais je suffise je suffisse tu suffiras tu suffirais suffis tu suffises tu suffisses il suffira il suffirait q. suffise il suffise il suffit n. suffirons n. suffirions suffisons n. suffisions n. suffissions v. suffirez v. suffiriez suffisez v. suffisiez v. suffissiez ils suffiront ils suffiraient q. suffisent ils suffisent ils suffissent je suivrai je suivrais je suive je suivisse tu suivras tu suivrais suis tu suive s tu suivisses il suivra il suivrait q. suive il suive il suivit n. suivrons n. suivrions suivons n. suivions n. suivissions v. suivrez v. suivriez suivez v. suiviez v. suivissiez ils suivront ils suivraient q. suivent ils suivent ils suivissent je surferai je surferais surfais je surfasse je surfisse jo 3urprendrai je surpren- [drais surprends je surprenne je surprisse 388 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAK Ihfikitivr. Participles. Indicative. Imperfect. Past Definite- Schseoir, 3. sursoyant je sursois je sursoyais je sursia to supersede sursis,/. e. tu sursois tu sursoyais tu sursia aux. avoir il sursoit il sursoyait il sursit irregular. n. sursoyons n. sursoyions u. sursimea v. soraoyei v. Bonoyiea v. sursites ils sursoi.nt ils sursoyaieiit ils sursirent Scrvemr, 2. survcnant je sur\ je survenais je survins ■:»:n, etc. survi nu. /". a tee tknir StRVIVRK, 4. survival it Je Borvia je survivais je survecua to survive sun ecu sec vivrk T.virit: -.ait je me tais je mo taisais je me tua to be siUnt .IRE Tannma, 4. to teignant jc teiguais jo teignia J' je t.-int ./. <.-. '.ORE •1. to tenant je ti. ns je tonais je tin8 in tenaJa tu tins aux. avoir il tient il teiiait il tint invgular. 11. tlMl. 'IIS n. ti-nions n. tinmea v. tenea v. temea V. Illlt.S ils t"n'iiiK'nt ils tciiairnt ils tinivnt 1. /./ tonn.mt il tolltH' il toimait il tonna unip tolltir TRAD! t radii i- j.- traduis je traduisaia jc traduiaia to translate traduit./. c. ••tire Thaih. je trail milk trait tu tr.iis in travais aux. avoir il trait il tray ait •ivo >na ils traleot n. tra; v krajfea ils travaiont Teamcbibi I [rant je traaaorii je trail jo transcrivla 1 ssrioe tee i iimu: M.TTRK ..• -ttant je tnumeti j.- transmittals je transmia insmit tr.niMi, IRE l.LIK, in: je truce [Tin |e tres-aillais jo tressaillia - tr.ssailli U I.I.I R ' Vain. i. raJnqoant je v.iiins je vainquais je vainquis va n ■; vaincu,/. e. tu vaiiirs tu vainquais tu vain<|uis aux. avoir il faine il vainquait il vainquit irngular. n. Taiaqaooi ii vainquions n. vuiiii|uiinci v. vai!i.|in/. v. vainquiez v. vainquites ils vaiiK|UL-nt ils vainquaiont ilsvainquiren Vai.oir. ?,. to valant Je vaux je valus be icorth valu tu vaux tu valais tu valus aux. avoir il vaut il val.iit il ratal im-gular. n. valions n valumcs v. valioz ils valcnt ils valairnt ils valuront Ten-ir, 2. /« venanl j| vims jo venals jo rlna come renu,/. e. see TENi a and usip: 0NA1 VE § 62 389 Future. Conditional. Impbrativk. Subjunctive. Imperfect. je surseoirai je surseoirais je sursoie je sursisse tu surseoiras tu surseoirais sursois ;u sursoies ;u sursisses il surseoira il surseoirait q. sursoie d sursoie il sursit n. surseoirons n. surseoirions sursoyons a. sursoyions n. sursissions v. surseoirez v. surseoiriez sursoyez v. sursoyiez v. sursissiez ils surseoiront i.surseoiraient q. sursoient ds sursoient ils sursissent je surviendrai je surviendrais surviens je survienne je survinsse je survivrai je survivrais survis je survive je survecusse je me tairai je me tairais tais-toi je me taise je me tusse je teindrai je teindrais teins je teigne je teignisse je tiendrai je tiendrais je tienne je tinsse tu tiendras tu tiendrais tiens tu tiennes tu tinsses il tiendra il tiendrait q. tienne il tienne il tint n. tiendrons n. tiendrions tenons n. tenions n. tinssions v. tiendrez v. tiendriez tenez v. teniez v. tinssiez ils tiendront ils tiendraient q. tiennent ils tiennent ils tinssent il tonnera il tonnerait q. tonne q. tonne q. tonnat je traduirai je traduirais traduis je traduise je traduisisse je trairai je trairais je traie tu trairas tu trairais trais tu traies il traira il trairait q. traie il traie n. trairons n. trairions trayons n. trayions v. trairez v. trairiez trayez v. trayiez ils trairont ils trairaient q. traient ils traient je transcrirai je transcrirais transcris je transcrive je transcri- [visse je transmet- je transmet- je transmette je transmisse [trai [trais transmets je tressaillirai je tressaillirais tressaille je tressaille je tressaillisso je vaincrai je vaincrais je vainque je vainquisse tu varacras tu vaincrais vaincs tu vainqucs tu vainqnisses il vaincra il vaincrait q. vainque il vainque il vainquit n. vaincrons n. vaincrions vainquons n. vainquions vainquissions v. vaincrez v. vaincriez vainquez v. vainquiez v. vainquissiez ils vaincront ils vaincraient q. vainquent ils vainquent i. vainquissent je vaudrai je vaudrais je vaille je valusse tu vaudras tu vaudrais vaux tu vailles tu valusses il vaudra il vaudrait q. vaille il vaille il valut n. vaudrons n. vaudrions valons n. valions n. valussions v. vaudrez v. vaudriez valez v. valiez v. valussiez lis vaudront ils vaudraient q. vaillent ils vaillent ils valussent je viendrai je viendrais viens je vienne je vinsse 390 IBREGCLAR, DEFECTIVE, PSCULIAI I.SHNITIVK. Partk u-lks. IsPlfATIV*. lMPSRr>l T. Past. Dzrunri rVfeTIR, 2. tO vetant je vets je vetais je vetis v clothe vctu./. e. tu vets in vetais tu vfitis aux. avoir il vet il retail il vetit irregular. n. vttoas Q. vet ions n. vetimes v. vetiez v. vStites ils vet. 'lit i!s v.'taient ils vfitirent VrriR sc v6tant jo me rets je me vetais je me vetis "• one's veto,/ e. &c. \ . vivant j.' vivais je v6cus vecu iu vis in vivais tu v6eus aux. ." il vit il viva it il veeut Irregular. i). vivnns ii. ririona ii. veciimes v. riries v. vecutes ils vivent ils vivuient ils veenrent Von. B. to vnyant see in Vnis in vovais tn vis MX. avoir il roil il vuvait il vit irregular. m Mines v. vites ils roleut :i''llt ils virent vnnlant jerenx je roulaia je VnlllllS voulu til VcllX hi roulais tU VnlllllS mix. avoir il Vellt il vi.nlait il v.uilut Irregular. n. vi. ul, .us a. rouUooa n. votiliimes v. rouliei V. Vullll'l • nt ils v..ul:iiriit i ill voulurent iKD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 39J Future. CONDITIONAL. Imperative. Subjunctive. Imperfect.' je vetirai je vetirais je vete je vetis3e tu vetiras tu vetirais vets tu vetes tu vetisses il vetira il vetirait q. vete il vete il vetit n. vetirons n. vetirions vetons n. vctions n. vetissions v. vetirez v. vetiriez vetez v. vetiez v. vetissiez ils vetiront ils vetiraient q. vetent ils vetent ils vetissent je me vetiiai je me vetirais je me vete je me vetisso &c. &c. vets-toi &c. &c. je vivrai je vivrais' je vive je vecusse tu vivras tu vivrais vis tu vives tu vecusses il vivra il vivrai t q. vive il vive il vecut n. vivrons n. vivrions vivons n. vivions n. vecussions v. vivrez v. vivriez vivez v. viviez v. vecussiez ils vivront ils vivraient q. vivent ils vivent ils vecussent je verrai je verrais je voie je visse tu verras tu verrais vois tu voies hi visses il verra il verrait q. voie il voie il vit n. verrons n. verrions voyons n. voyions n. vissions v. verrez v. verriez voyez v. voyiez v. vissiez ils verront ils verraient q. voieiit ils voient ils vissent je voudrai* je voudrais je veuille je voulusse tu voodras tu voudrais tu veuilles tu voulusses il voudra il voudrait il veuille il voulut n. voudrons n. voudrions n. voulions n. voulussiona v. voudrez v. voudriez veuillez v. vouliez v. voulussiez ik roudront ils voudraient ils veuillent ils voulussent 392 the participle. — §63,64,65,66. § 63. — The Participle. (1.) The participle is so called, because it participates of the na- ture both of the verb and of the adjective. It partakes of the nature of the verb, in having its signification and regimen, and of the na- ture of the adjective in relating, like the latter, to nouns and pro' nouns. (2.; There arc two sorts of participles ; the present and the past v$ 64. — The Participle Present. (I.) The participle present, which denotes continuance of action answers to the English participle in ing. (2.) This participle is invariable J always terminating in ant; as, chantant, tinging; finimmnt, Jlnithing ; rccevant, receiving; vendant, selling. one dai a lady walking; dee hommee marchtmt, ■iking. J'ai vn lea vests grtmimi aor ccs Dttiaaone auperoes, IMraciinT lea Use, Be dlsputer lea gcrbes. I'-.i.ii.ix. I have teen the irinds roaring over those superb harvests, not up the grain, an>li grant tout le mondeesf generalement aimee. A too 'H>dy u general!*) loved. boa ■ mint dans ]'Afri.|Ue. '• iinris aimant la solitude. Une f.-uiTii : abate rlo i. mt !<• monde. An obliging woman is loved by •wry /• tribua trranUs dq 1' tfrique. 11 ny a qne lea natures qui aotent proprea a I'ttode de la nature. BBBNABDIM mate naturct IdispOSUionS) only, arc fi' for aim. nt genfiralament I'itude. V ' res (d it positions) lor tiide, arc in general fond of § 06.— Tin: PaRTIOIPLI PlW. (1.) The participle past denotea the completion of the action, (a.) It ii raeeeptible of variationa for gender and number. (3.) The participle past, used without an auxiliary, agr e es in gen- der and number with the noun which it qualifies, whether the noun THE ADVERB. — § 67, 68. 393 precedes or follows. In short, all that we have said of the agree- ment of the adjective with the noun, may be applied to this par- ticiple. des enfarrts cherts, beloved children ; des femmes estvme.es, esteemed women ; Like a golden lamp suspended in the azure vault, the moon balances herself in the confines of the horizon; Mr weakened rays sleep on Uie turf. Comme une lampe d'or dans l'azur suspendue, La lune se balance aux bords de 1'horizon ; Ses rayons affaiblis dorment sur le gazon. Lamaetine. (4.) For further rules on the participle past, see Syntax, $ 134, and following. § 67. — The Adverb. (1.) The adverb is an invariable word joined to verbs, adjectives, or to other adverbs, to modify their signification. (2.) Adverbs are divided into seven classes : — 1. Of manner ; doucement, softly ; sagement, wisely ; &c. 2. Of order ; premierement, first ; d'abord, at first ; ensuite, af- terwards; &c. 3. Of place ; ici, here ; ou, where ; la, there ; ailleurs, else- where; &c. 4. Of time ; hier, yesterday ; aujourd'hui, to-day ; demain, to- morrow; &c. 5. Of quantity ; peu, little ; trop, too much ; tant, so much ; &c. 6. Of comparison; plus, more; moins, less; tres, very. 7. Of affirmation, ne- oui, yes; certes, certainly; non, no; nullemont, gation and doubt ; by no means ; peut-etre, perhaps ; ne, pas, point, not ; &c. (3.) A few adjectives are sometimes used adverbially. They are then invariable : — chanter juste, to sing in tune ; couter cher, to cost dear ; parler haut, to speak loud. (4.) Several words united together, and having the force of an ad verb, are called an adverbial phrase : — tout-a-coup, suddenly ; peu-a-peu, by degrees ; tout-a-1'heure, immediately; de-temps en-temps, now and then, &c. § 68. — Formation of Adverbs from Adjectives. (1.) Adverbo ending in merit, may be formed from adjectives in the following manner : — (2.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with a vowel, merd is addsd to form the adverb : — 17* 394 THE ADVERB. — §69,70. Adjective. Adverb. utile, useful; utilement, usefuUy; poli, polite; polimcnt, politely ; aise, aisement, cosily. (3.) Exceptions. beau, beautiful; bellemcnt, beautifully; fou, focU&<, foOement, foolishly; man, soft; mollement, softly; nouveeu, nouvellemcnt, m'cv'hi ; traitr<\ treacherous; traitreusement, treacherously. 4.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with n consonant, the syllable meat is added to its feminine termination: as, rvtrsr. boo, bonne, pood ; boimomcnt, in a good manner; doux, donee, doucement, sofily; ln-uri'iix, henrense, happy; heureusement, happily, Adjectives ending in w, change thai termination intommm*:— . prudent, />/> prudemment, prudently; :nt; -,'.7 ;i ////". .r . plus, i __,, ) n • \ ' PREPOSITION S. — § 72. 395 better; De plus, Moins, Mieux, Pis, Tres, very; Ni plus ni moins, neither 'more xor less; Presque, Quasi, A-peu-pres, nearly ; Pour le plus, for the must ; Tout au plus, at most ; A qui mieux mieux, A l'envi, De mieux en ' better and, better. mieux, vying with one anotluer ; § 71. — The Preposition. (1.) The preposition is an invariable word used to express the re- lations of things. (2.) The preposition conveys by itself no distinct meaning. The preposition and the word which it governs, form what is called an indirect regimen. § 72. — Table of the Principal Prepositions. A, A cause de, to, at, in; on account of; Excepte, Hormis, > except, but; Apres, after; Hors, save; Attendu, vu, on account of; Jusqu'a, > until, as far as ; Aupres de, near ; Jusques a, Autour de, about, around; Loin de, far from; Avant, before (earlier} ; Le long de, along; Avec, with ; Malgre, in spite of; Chez, at the house of; Moyennant, by means of; Contre, against ; Nonobstant notvnthstanaling ; Dans, in, within ; Outre, besides ; D'apres, from, after ; Par, by, through; D'avec, from ; Pardevant, before, {law term); De, of, from, with; Parmi, among, amongst; Dela,au dela de ) beyond, on that J side of; since, for ; Pendant, during; Dedela.pardela Pour, for; Depuis, Pres de, near, close by ; Derriere, behind ; Proche, proche &e,near by; Des, from ; Quant a, as for, with respect; Devant, before, opposite; Sans, without ; Durant, during; Sauf, saving, except ; En, in, at, to ; Selon, according to; En defa de, 1 this side ; Sous, under; De de9a, par i on this side ; Suivant, according to; defa, Sur, upon, on; Entre, between ; Touchant, touching ; Envers, > towards ; Concernant, concerning; A l'egard de, Vers, towards, to; Environ, about; Vis-a-vis de, opposite. (2.) The prepositions are divided into several classes. (3.) Among those denoting place are — TCe n'est qu'autour de lui que vole la victoire. Autour, around; < Racine. {Around him alone hovers victory. S96 PREPOSITION S.— § 12. Chez, with; at the house of; among; (apudoftheLatin.) Pans, in; Parm:, among ; Fen, towards; Sous, under; 8ur, upon; Enfin, chcz les Chretiens les moeurs sont innocen teS. CORNEILLE. Among Christians, finally , the manners are innocent. Che: inon pare, «/ my father's house. Rome n'est plus *f(rrr ; (in fron ' i til en ami, avant de nous pmdr. Btammlab. Conscience war Je craina Di< d tins princlpale- ment celnl • 1 1 1 i ne li Sim. I / >:r principally the man ■ nhim. L*honune < st plac6 libre < ntre to flee et la rata, MlRMOltTKb. Man is ; I and virtue. 11 so met Ion, - eehd 'i"> parle. vfcRE. // himself always behind the tpeakw. rcher d< rant toi I'ange extermmatesr. Yol.TAIkC. Send before thee the exterminating angel. PREPOSITION s. — & 72. 397 (7 ) The prepositions marking union, are, f Je veuxvivre avec elle, avec elle expirer. Avec, with; < Corneille. [_Iwill live ivith her, die with her. (Outre l'estime de soi-meme, l'honnete homme j possede encore l'estime et la confiance univer- Outre, besides; \ selles. Marmontel. | Besides self-esteem, the honest man possesses universal [_ esteem and confidence. (8.) Those of separation, exception, are : — {II travaille toute la semaine, excepte le dimanche. L'Acad^mie. He works tlie whole week, except Sunday. Hormis, except ; \ H % mis **' *° ut le n ! onde est content - ' c * w 3e"'* ) All are pleased, except you. Nuln'aura de l'esprit, hors nous et nos amis. Hors, except; «( Moliere. No one shall have wit but ourselves and our friends. Point de vertu sans religion, point de bonheur , sans vertu. Diderot. , wi nou ; •< j^ virtue witlwut religion, no happiness without virtue. "On peut tout sacrifler a l'amitie, sauf l'honnetete Sauf save • extent • \ et la J ustice - Martmontel. ' ; p ; <. We may sacrifice all to friendship, except honesty and (9.) The prepositions of opposition are : — ("Le travail est une meilleureressourcect or in the leeond pari of a period: — que, A ni' S Transilive, rminat ive, J [ue, Alaal que, Attendo qae, -Atin . An n qae, nit quo. ate que, ,•• qrae, que, Dcpah que, in'-. I 01 f i at, /w . Of, .vwirr than ; although ; "■ lmi/n.t; for fear • I Sat ; so that ,- irhilf ; ' hat ; ■ ce qae, on Men, Oatre qae, I qne, Ponrvn 'iu>'. I ' Qoana, Bitol qae, Bolt qae, - ■ qae, T.int que, Tandli qae, Yu ■ i 1 !• -, v nlil that; if, when,' or, rlsr ; t'tat ; 'hat; if, xrhrn ; though; ,f: , v Mca t ' that; ■ lupfomnm that; thai; irhilf thai ; ' that. INTERJECTIONS.-— § 74. 2. The conjunctions and conjunctive phrases which usually come between two parts of a sentence, or at the commencement of a dis- course momentarily interrupted, are : — Aussi bien que, Aprcs tout, A condition que, Au surplus, C'est pourquoi, Cependant, C'est-a-dire, C'est^a-savoir, Car, Done, as well as; nevertheless; on condition that ; besides; therefore ; however ; that is to say ; that is ; for, because; therefore ; En effet, in fact; Et puis, and then; Mais. but; Partant, therefore; Par consequent, consequently; Pourtant, however ; \ Sans quoi, unless that; Savoir, to wit ; Sinon, unless ; Toutefois, nevertheless. See Lesson 100 — Examples on the different uses of conjunctions. § Y4. — Interjections. (1.) The interjections indicate some sudden affection or emotion of the mind. They are exclamations which seem to take the place of entire propositions. (2.) Some imply astonishment : — { Beaux arts, eh ! dans quels lieux n'avez-vous droit Ah ' eh I &c <■ de plaire " Delille. $ Fine arts, ah ! in what place have you not a right to \ please. (3.) Some express derision, irony, distrust, &c. : — Ouais ah > indeed > { 0uais ! ce maitre d'armes vous tient bien au cceur. ( Ah ! indeed ! this fencing master displeases you much. (4.) Others express contempt, aversion and disapprobation : — Foin ! away with, &c. } l° in dul ™S 6 * d % ™ IT ! , LA Fontaine ' J ' ( Away with the wolf and his race ! Tout beau l softly ! \ l™} 7 beau > monsieur ; tout beau ! Moliere. ■> J ( Softly, sir ; softly ! (5.) We shall carry no further this classification, but content our- selves with giving a list of the most usual interjections : — / so, so I Ah! ah! Oh! Ahi! eight Ouais ! Bah! bah! Ouf! Chut! silence ! hist ! Paf! Eh! eh! St! Fi! . Jyi Sus! Gare! take care ! Zest! Ha! ha ! . Fi done ! Helas alas ! Ho 9a! lieu! alas ! He bien ! Hola! holla ! Eh bien ! Ho! ho! Oui da ! Hem! hem! Or f a! Hein ! eh! Tout beau ! Hum! hum! Silence! Paix &c. &c. 400 SYNTAX.— § To, § ML § to— SYNTAX. ' (1.) Syntax treats of the agreement, government, and arrangement of words in sentences. (2.) One word is said to agree with another, when it takes the same modification of gender, number, and person. (3.) One word governs another, when by the influence of the former Chfl latter is made to assume a particular form or place. (4.) The proper arrangement of words consists in placing them in thf order aaaetioned by grammatical rules, deduced from the best tie custom. - adopted by the modern Trench grammarians, the student is referred to j 2. and j 43, (2.) (3.) (4.) (5.) § 70. — Tin: Noun. — l'i l< i (1.) Ill French, as well as in English, a noun used as the subject or nominative of an affirmative or negative sentence, generally pre- aedea the nth : — The must humble man lues liberty. I. UM le plus obSCOr nime la lil'itN-. « * 1 1 < i IA1 Dai HID. /. Hani lien dea nana quelle promet L // '■nefili (2.) In poetry and In < . the subject is sometimes placed after the verb: — \ vug vable can exist, vhere vir- tue it mini in?. It ■ ■ ', in is VM H f ti ng, for- tune is to be fen re d. II n ./ ttrtu. ' i La fortune eat ;i araladre on : !'. ui.t. thai la, in sentences which we, while repeating the words of a person, throw among other sentences, to indicata that person aa tl ; le subject, In French, must alwaj - follow the verb: — Qenret • aple I // Iftntor, the jxop]* qui est conduit par on sage roil rnedby avk* I | Interrogate . the noOU generally precedes the verb which must be immediately followed by a pronoun correspond* oder, nnmber and person with the noun: — /. iii/ / in Meal Cbabiixon. \ fit > Literally, Death, is 'it aw staff | &c. (5.) When the sentence commences with one of the following • >i, irhire ; que, what; rombien, hue much; quard, irhen , SYNTAX OF NOUNS. — §76. 401 the noun may be placed immediately after the verb, or in ac- conlance with the last rule : — Ou est vttre pere ? or ) -an,*** -•„ ™»,». t«t i^, o Ou votre pert Test-il ? J ^ rg u V ™ f* ™ ? Mais que sert un long regne, a I Of what use is a long reign, un~ moins qu'il ne soit beau 1 less it be glorious ? BOURSAULT. | (6.) The noun, used as a direct regimen, has the same place in the Bentence in French as in English : — La force fonde, etend et main- I Power founds, extends and main- tient un empire. Saurin. | tains an empire. (7.) When there are, in the same sentence, two nouns, one used as direct, the other as indirect regimen, and those nouns with the words qualifying or modifying them, are of equal length, the direct regimen should precede the indirect : — * Le malheur ajoute un nouveau lustre a la gloire des grands hom- ines. F^N^LON. Avez-vous donne les livres a mon frere 1 Girault Duvivier. Misfortunes add a new lustre to the glory of great men. Have you given the books to my brother ? (8.) When, however, the qualifying or explanatory words render the direct regimen longer than the indirect, the regime indirect is placed first : — Avez-vous donne a mon frere les livres que vous lui aviez promis ? Les hypocrites parent des dehors de la vertu les vices les plus honteux. Noel. Have you given my brother the books, which you had promised him ? Hypocrites adorn with the appear- ance of virtue, the most shameful vices. (9.) The indirect regimen precedes the direct regimen, when the meaning would otherwise be doubtful : — Tachez de ramener par la dou- ceur ces esprits egarts. Bescherelle. Try to bring back, by mildness, these erring spirits. Any other construction would render the sentence equivocal. (10.) In English, the name of the possessor frequently precedes the name of the object possessed; and the two are connected by means cf 's (the old Saxon genitive termination). In French the order is always different. The name of the object precedes that of the possessor, and the connecting link is a preposition : — Les livres de mon ami. I My friend's books. Vous avez vu la montre de ma You have seen my sister's watch. < Boeur. J * This must also he the case when the regime direct is shorter than the regime indirect. 402 I-f-K-f AX -Q -F THE AR-f-MIrE. § V7. (11.) The name of an object always precedes the name of th« substance of which it is formed, or which it contains. The preposi. tit in de comes between them : — Une table de marbre. La France a beaucoup dc car rierea de marbre. Un linutcille de vin. A marble tabic. France has many iflarbk quarries. A bottle of wine. (12.) The word representing an individual always precedes that describing his particular occupation, or the merchandise of which ho s: — [trade donee. I A dancing master. ■ languamn. Un nurohand de drap. j Adrap ,n cloth. (13.) The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, etc., always precedes the noun representing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose to which it i- adapted. The connecting preposition is generally <1 : — mSL A crist-miU. M • m ills. carriage. 1 riagc. me of an objeci precedes the noon representing its particular produce, nan, it append A generally eonneeti nouns : — iin-a-vetit. brine, : spear. I chevanx. I Tit flu fruit de Varhrr a pain ltd ile l'artieh.iut. PlBBBB, ■ arte dam la bonche lir conune \- pent d CR. • • p.is m nombn Da bois-&-brdler. Ull Veil.' A rail. The fas?.- of the fruit of the bread- mblettiat 'of the' artichoke. The name of virtue in the mouth 'tis makes one shu/i- UM of the rattle-snake. If "nils {neat rattle) are I as sheep (iwol ani- 'oom. A water glass, I. e. glass for water. 01 mi: Article. (l.) The article* most be need in French before every nova em- ployed i" ■ general sense, or denoting i whole spedea of objects; although in similar cases, the srtiole is not ased in English. * The itcdeut will recoiled thsi the Prencfa have only one article, la Ti"' word i"i befag by modern French grammarians, very property class- ed uith the muneral adjectives. SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. § Y7. 403 Les bicnfaits peuvent tout sur une ame bien nee. Voltaire. L'honneur, aux grands cceurs, est plus sher que la vie. Corneil^e. La boats suit toujours un lache desespoir. Crebillon. (2.) The article is used in French, as in English, before a noun denoting a particular object, or taken in a particular sense : — Benefits are all powerful with a well disposed mind. Honor is with magnanimous hearts more precious than life. Shame always follows a cowardly despair. Le bonheur des mechants comme un torrent s'ccoule. Racine. Z/arbrisseau le plus sain a be- soin de culture. Fabre d'Eglantine. Le moment du peril est celui du courage. La Harpe. Tlve happiness of the wicked runs aivay like a torrent. The healthiest shrub needs cultiva- tion. The time of peril is tlve time for courage. • (3.) The article is used before the names of countries, provinces, rivers, winds and mountains : — La France est bornee au midi par les Pyrenees et la Mediterranee ; a Z'est par la Suisse et la Savoie ; an nord par la Belgique et a Z'ouest par Z'Ocean. Ses principales rivieres sont la Meuse, le Rhin, la Seine, la Loire, la Garonne et le Rhone. France is bounded on the south by Uie Pyrenees and the Mediterra- nean; on the east by Suritzerland and Savoy ; on the north by Bel- gium, and on the west by the Ocean. Its principal rivers are tlie Meuse, the Rhine, the Seine, tlie Loire, the Garonne and the Rhone. (4.) Those countries which take their name from their capital, or some other city within their boundaries, take no article : — Naples est un pays delicieux. Vcnise etait un etat puissant. Ncio York est un etat sain. Naples is a delightful country. Venice was a powerful state. New York is a healthy state. (5.) The French use the article before titles prefixed to names : — General Cavaignac; President Bonaparte. Le general Cavaignac. Le president Bonaparte. (6.) The article is also used before the names of dignities, of cer- tain bodies, systems of doctrine, and with other words mentioned below : — La monarcbie, monarchy; Le parlement, parliament; Le gouvernement. government ; Le christianisme, Christianity; L'episcopat, episcopacy; A l'cglise, at church ; (7.) Bsfore the names of the seasons, and the following expres- sions : — last fall; last week; &c. A l'ecole, at school; Au college, at college ; Au marche, at, to market Au lit, in bed. &c. &c. L'annee prochaine, next year ; L'annee demiere, last spring; Le printemps prochain, next spring ; L'automne dernier, La semaine derniere, &c. 404 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICL E. § 18. (8.) The names of several cities tike the article. Those nouni have generally a meaning, and indicate often natural objects : — Le Havre, Havre; La Rochelle, Rochelle ; La Haic, The Hague ; | Le Detroit, Detroit ; (9.) In speaking* of the parts of the body or of the qualities of the mind, the French use the article in cases where the English use a possessive adjective, or the indefinite article : — Votre frcre a les cheveux noirs. Your brother has black hair. II s'est blessfi d la main. He has hurt his hand. Charles a la m6moire excellento. Charles has an excellent memory. § 78. — Use of the Article before Words taken in a Par- titive Sense. (1.) A word, when used to denote an entire object or class of ob- jects is sai.l to have a general sense ; when, however, it is employed to i n d ic ate a jmrt of any thing or class of things, considered in refer- ence to the whole, it is said to have a partitive sense. Before a word taken partitively, the word some or any, is, or may, in English, often be employed. If, for example, I use the words courage and wood, abstractedly, 1 take them in the general sense : but if I say, give me tnxxl, i/our brother has courage, 1 oae them iii the partitive sense, that is, I ask for a pari of thai substance called •/•'»*/, and attribute to your brother something of thai quality called courage. i The- article accompanied by, or in combination with the prep- osition .), as, ns ; des grands hom- I Young people; gtat nun (some). SYS TAX OF THE ARTICLE. — §79,80. 405 Fortunate would it have been, if in his time (Alexander's) Macedon had had lunatic asylums. Heureux si de son temps, pour de bonnes raisons, La Macedoine eut eu des petites maisons ! Boileau. (5.) The preposition alone is used before a noun, when it is pre- eeded by a collective word or by an adverb of quantity : — Une multitudo de peuples. Beaucoup de personnes. A quoi bon tant d'amis 1 Unseul nous suffit s'il nous aime. Flokian. A multitude of nations. Many persons. Of what use are so many friends A single one suffices if he loves us. (6.) The article, however, is used, when the noun preceded by a collective word, is limited by what follows. The words la plupart, the most ; bien, many ; and infiniment, infinitely, form also exceptions to the preceding rule : — Many of the persons whom I have I have few left, of the books which have been given me. The wicked have much trouble to Un grand nombre des personnes que j'ai vues. Noel. II me reste peu des livres qui m'ont ete donnes. Noel. Les mediants ont bien de la peine a demeurer unis. F&dsLON. remain ■ (7.) The preposition is used alone before a noun placed after a verb conjugated negatively, but not interrogatively at the same time : — Je ne vous ferai pas de reproches. L'on ne dit jamais que l'on n'a point ^'esprit. Boursault. On ne fait jamais de bien a Dieu en faisant du mal aux hommes. Voltaire. / shall cast upon you no reproaches. We never say, that we have no wit. We never can do good in respect to God, by doing evil to men. (8.) The commencement of rule (6.) will also apply to this sen- tence : — Ne donnez jamais des conseils qu'il I Never give advice which it is dan- soit dangereux de suivre. gerous to follow. Girault Duvivier. I § 19. — English Indefinite Article A or An. The French numeral adjective un, masc. une, fern, answers to th English article a or an [$ 13, (4.) (11.)]. The restrictions to its use are specified in the remarks on the ar- ticle. § 80. — Repetition of the Article. (1.) General rule. The article* is repeated before every noun and every word used as a noun, having a separate meaning : — * This rule applies to the determinative adjectives, mon, ton, son, ce, cet, &c. 406 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. -§81. Le coeur, /'esprit, la mceurs, tout | The heart, the mind, \he vmnner* jragne a la culture. even/ thing improves by cultivation. Le pere et la mere semblaient ex- 1 The father and mother seemed U citer leur petite compagne a sen excite their little companion to feea repaitre la premiere. BdfPOK. | upon it first. (2.) The article will, therefore, be repeated, when one of two ad- jectives united by tlie conjunction el, qualities a noun expressed, and the other a noun understood : — Lhistoireancieiiiieet lannxlerne. | Ancient and modern history. that i-, l'hi.-tuire ancienne et l'histoire modorne. Ancient and modern philosophers. The first and second stories. :>sophes anciens et les mo- Le premier et le second ctage. (3.) Should, however, the two adjectives qualify the same ex- pressed word, the article most not be repeated. ■ and pious Fcnelon has well Lc sage et pienx Fenelon b dee drou • rale. QlRAL'l.T 1)1 . VI VIKII. • iota ii lni tend le dons et tendi Bon (4.) When two Dovria are joined by the conjunction ov, end the second is merely ■ repetition c>r explanation of the first, the article hhoulil not l»- repeated. established rights to general cs- ii !s to hii:i the :' tender book. ■ «• I M- 'lull ilnvrt lioir. ■u'u.iit parml I dee pro- J. J. B The ch, ' the head of Ihi condor, are covered with bla . W among t ■ the palatines or governors of prov- § 81. — II - OM i iii; I Aktici.h. ,,; Deed before numbers placed after the names •.heir order of succ* . (•.)]. /. • . ■•• •(.'■',■ i i be French put no article before nouns placed in a; | with, or ■ of, other preceding nous : — /. Louis i. bten different de son pere. i prosa- telir ti.i is, vousotcsan.. tr\ .''■"■' Itt/Sr, a comedy of M » . Lamar! /' II' i Am'-; . (3.) If the explanatory word be itself qualified or r» "-tr'cted by other word?, the MM is then placed before it : — SYNTAX OF THE AR2ICLE. — § 31. 407 Cet Lommfi est un Fran^ais d'une famille illustre, mais malhea- reuse. Cos messieurs sont des marchands de Lycu. That man is a Frenchman, of an illustrious, but unfortunate family. Those gentlemen are merchants from Lyons. (4.) Under the second rule of this Section may also be placed the words mentioned in \ 76, Rules (11.) (12.) (13.) and (14.) :— une montre d'or, a gold watch ; un maitre de dessin, , a drawing-master ; I un moulin-a-vapeur, a steam mill ; une chanibre-a-coucher, a bed-room. (5.) Some exceptions to rule (2.) will be better explained by ex ainples than by precepts: — un inagasin a foin, a hay-loft ; une bouteille a vin, a wine-bottle, are a loft intended for hay, a bottle intended for wine, but not actu- ally containing hay or wine. un magasin au foin. a hay-loft ; la bouteille au vin,' the wine-bottle. That is, the loft actually used for hay, the bottle now used for wine. un magasin de foin, aloft \ r-,, , ihay ; une bouteille de vin, a bottle \J J \ wine. (6.) Proper names of persons do not receive the article, unless it forms a part of the name ; as, Lebrun, Lamartine, La Harpe, La Fontaine ; as also in some gallicised Italian names ; as, Le Tasse, Tasso, Le Dante, Dante, &c. An adjective, however, coming before proper names, is generally preceded by the article. Le bon et naif La Fontaine. I The good and candid La Fontaine. Le pieux Fenclon. | The pious Fenelon. (7.) It has been seen [§ 12, (1.) Examples] that the plural article is often placed in elevated style before the names of renowned indi- viduals : — Nous avons vu a la fois a la tete des escadrons imperiaux, les Murat, les Kellermann, les Lassalle, les Mon- torun, Le G£n£ral Foy. We have seen at once at the head of the imperial squadrons, Murat, Kellerman, Lassalle, Montorun. (8.) Names of kingdoms and provinces, when preceded by the preposition en, take no article : — En France, en Amerique. In France, in America. (9.) No article is placed after en preceding a noun used indeter- minately ; or after the word ni standing before a noun, which is the direct regimen of a verb, preceding the negative ;*— 408 6 Y K TAX OF THE ARTICLE. -§82. Nous irons en voiture. Vous etes en peine. Nous n'avony ni or ni argent. Wc shall go in a carriage. You are in trouble. Wc have neither gold nor silver. (10.) The article is omitted before plus and moins in comparative sentences, where, in English, it would, in the corresponding place, bo averted: — Plus uue action est utile, plus | The more useful an action is, the lie est loua'jle. | more praiseworthy it is. (11.) The article precedes plus and muins to express comparison in the highest degree, and agrees in gender with the noun : — Your sister did not icccp, although Voire soeur no pieman pas, quoi- quYlle fut la plus alllij;\ Avoir dbpntOj Avoir envii-. Avoir ap|K-tit, Avoir t'uim, Avoir froi.l. Avoir boats, Avoir inal. Avoir patter ce , Avoir p'lir. Avoir pitie, Avoir raison, Avoir .sommeil, Avoir lotfj Avoir soin. Avoir suj-t. Avoir I to give faith ; I to be warm ; to be accustomed \ to intend ; to have difficulties ; to Irish . | to have a r to be hu I to be e. to be ashamed % ■: pain ; to have p to be at to take pitt/ 1 to be i tf to be si to be thirsty ; to take care ; to have n to be wr I Citizens, strangers, friends, ene- mies, all reverence him. mi: Akikm.k is omitted. Pomander |>ardon,fo beg pardon; Donner avis, * . ■ r PairepartTI ***** Knii'ii'lro raillorio* to bear jokes, Pairs attention, to pay attention ; Paire bonne chsre,<0 Hot Pairs credit, to give credit ; i vie. to excite emy. Pairs lioiineur, to honor ; Cheroher fortune, to seek one's for- tune ; Courir risquo, to run t'o Demaoder justices Pairs horreni, Pairs pour, Pairs mention, Pairs naufrage, Pairs place. Pairs plaisir. Pairs pn ilexion, Pairs tort, Mettre tin, Mettro ordro. Perdra courage, Porter • Porter maJhanr, Prendre cong6, to inspire horror ; to frighten ; to mention i to s uffcr shipwreck ; to make room ; to obli to present ; to reflect ; to injure ; to put an end, to arrange ; to lose cow age ; to envy; to cause mis/or- tune; to take leave; • Lu lend re la ruilkrio is also said, but it means to understand yoking. IHTAXOF THE ADJECTIVE. §83,84. 409 Prendre feu, to catch fire ; Prendre garde, to take care ; Prendre haleine, to take breath ; Prendre medecinefo take medicine , Prendre racine, Rendre compte, Rendre justice, Rendre service, Rendre visite. to take root ; to account ; to render justice ; to oblige ; to visit, Tenir lieu, to take the place ; Tenir parole, to keep one's word ; Trouver moyen, to find means; Avec ardeur, &c, with ardor; Par depit, &c, through spite ; Pour recompense, as a reward ; Sans peine, without difficulty ; Sans souci, without sorroio or Tenir compagnie, to accompany ; § 83. — The Adjective. (1.) We have seen [5 18, Rule (3.)] that an adjective relating to two substantives of the same gender must agree with them in gender, and he put in the plural : (2.) And Rule (4.) that an adjective, relating to two or more nouns of different genders, must be put in the masculine plural. (3.) When, however, nouns, united or not by the conjunction et, are somewhat synonymous; when the writer wishes actually to qualify only the last ; or when the mind, more particularly occupied with the last noun, seems to forget the others; the adjective will assume the gender and number of the last noun only. Toute sa vie n'a ete qu'un travail, qu'une occupation continuelle. Massillon. Je ne connais point de roman, point de comedie esyagnok sans combats. Florjan. Le fer, le bandeau, la flamme est toute prete. Racine. (4.) Sometimes the adjective preceded by two or more substan- tives joined by the conjunction et, qualifies the last only. It must then, of course, agree with that noun only. Le bon gout des Egyptiens leur The g»od taste of the Egyptians fit aimer la soUdite et la regularite made tliem like solidity and un- toute nue. Bossuet. adorned regularity. T/ie smile is a mark of good-will, of applause, and of inward satisfacr- tion. His wlwle life has been nothing but continual labor and occupation. I know no romance, no Spanish comedy, without combats. the band, the flame is all Le sourire est une marque de bienveillance, d'applaudissement, et de satisfaction intiHeure. Buffon. § 84. — Remarks on the Peculiarities of several Adjectives. (1.) The adjective feu (late, deceased), is invariable, when placed before the article or adjective determining a noun, but varies when placed, after the determining word : — J'ai oui dire a feu ma soeur. que sa fille et moi naquimes la meme ann4e. Montesriiiit'\ . en recevrea doaae exem- plaires, /><;»<. < de port. TlIK I . / !i n ./ a n tiered the 000V of the letter which M. . . has written of that bird came to me from I | turn h' I unit Jind inclosed, a copy of i:iy litte,. I I to you the fee letters I oed, pottage free, an anony- mous / V I ■ ' is join ten', and you of postage. (5.) An adjective used adverbially, that is, tnodifying ■ verb, m of course invariable [\ *i7, (3.)] : — En Lapoole, one peau d'hermine In Lapland the skin of the hcrmtn ooftte qnatre <-u cinq boi four or five sous , the fUsh of Ohalrdecet animal sen! tri s bad. wait, >ki>. De gat vie to n'ai eatendu des voii Never in my life have I heard de fcuinie DBBflSBT a! . women's voices sound so hud. M'»c. Dt Mvioial I syntax of the adjective. § 85. 411 § 85. — Place of the Qualifying Adjective. (1.) No invariable rule can be given for the place of the adjective in French, although it follows the noun much more frequently than it precedes it : — (2.) The adjectives which are generally placed after the noun are :— 1. All participles present and past used adjectively; une personne reconnaissante, a grateful person ; une histoire amusante, an amusing history ; un enfant cheri, a beloved child; de la viande rbtie, roast meat ; 2. All adjectives expressing the form, the shape ; une table ronde, a round table ; une chambre ; carree, a square room ; (3.) Adjectives explaining the matter of which an object is com- posed ; — acide sulfurique, sulphuric acid ; corps aerie?i, aerial body; (4.) Those expressing color, taste, or relating to hearing and touch tog; un habit noir, a black coat ; du fruit amer, bitter fruit ; des sons harmonieux, harmonious sounds ; de la cire r,wlle, soft wax; (5.) Adjectives which may be used substantively; un homme riche, a rich man; une fenime aveugle, a blind woman ; (6.) Adjectives representing nation ;* une grammaire franfaise, a French grammar; une dictionnaire allemand, a German dictionary; (7.) Adjectives expressing the defects of the body and mind ; un homme boiteux, a lame man ; un esprit aliene, an unsound mind ; (8.) Almost all adjectives ending in al, able, ible, ique and if, un homme liberal, a liberal man ; une nation paisible, a peaceful nation ; \ un esprit fanatique, a fanatical spirit; un soldat fugitif, a fugitive soldier. * The French often use the name of the country instead of the ad- jective of nation ; particularly when speaking of the produce of the country :— De la laine d'Esp&gne, Spanish wool. Du fromage d'Angleterre, English cheese. 412 ISTAX OF THE ADJECT IV E. i} 86. (9.) It must not be inferred from the rules above that the adjective always comes after the noun. The deviations are quite frequent; and no other reason than taste can be assigned for them. We give a few examples, in which the same adjective is, by different authors, placed before and after the noun : — Before Vie Noun. i After the Noun. Jamais nous ne goutons de par- Qu'a-t-il (lit, qu'a-t-il fait, taik allegresse. CSBMBILLB. iKn.i;i;\T Mkam.no, aoooRDora as thxy b follow the No l)n bon homme, a simple, artless Un homme boo, 1 f via n ; Un brave homme, a worthy man \ itaine histoire, a story ; Un chcr enfunt, a dear child ,- Uno commune voix, a unanimous voice; i homme de men) ; Un homme brave, ,t heme man ; l ne histoire OSrtalns, a reliable story; Une rohe chsro, an expensive dress* Une voix commune, an ore voice ; SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIV E. § 87. 413 Un cruel hommo, a tiresome man ; La derniere annee, the last year (of a scries) ; Une fausse clef, a false key ; an imi- tation key ; Un furieux menteur, an excessive liar; Un galant homme, a gentleman; Un grand homme, a great man ; Le grand air, the air of good society ; Le haut ton, a haughty tone ; Un honnete homme, an honest man; Le jeune Pline, young Pliny Un malhonnete homme, man ; Mauvais air, awkward appearance; Un mediant livre, a poor book ; Morte eau, lowest tides ; Un nouveau livre, a new book, (ano- ther book) ; Un pauvre historien, a wretched his- torian ; Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous man; Un petit homme, a man of small size ; Mes propres mains, my own hands ; Un seui enfant, a single child ; Un simple soldat, a private soldier; Un triste homme. a pitiful man; Un unique tableau, a single 'pic- ture; Un vilain homme, an ugly, unplea- sa/nt man; Une vraie histoire, a mere story; Un homme cruel, a cruel man; L'annee derniere, last year ; Une clef fausse, a key belonging to another lock, (the wrong key) ; Un lion furieux, a furious lion; Un homme galant, a man attentive to the ladies ; Un homme grand, a tall man ; L'air grand, a noble appearance; Le ton haut, a Mid tone ; Un homme honnete, a polite man ; Pline le jeune, Pliny the younger; Un homme malhonnete, an unpoliie man; L'air mauvais, malicious appear- ance; Un livre mechant, a biting, caustic book ; Eau morte, stagnant water; Un livre nouveau, a book recently published ; Un historien pauvre, a historian without pecuniary means; Un homme plaisant, an agreeable man ; Un homme petit, a mean man ; Mes mains propres, my clean hands; Un enfant seul, a child alone ; Un soldat simple, a foolish soldier ; Un homme triste, a' sorrowful man; Un tableau unique, a matchless pic- 81.- Un homme vilain, a sordid, miserly man ; Une histoire vraie, a true history. Regimen of Adjectives. S'\-*' (gjj The regimen or complement of adjectives is a noun or a verb completing or defining their sense. Between the noun and the ad- jective comes one of the prepositions, a, de, dans, en, sur, &c. : — Cet homme est digne de louange. I This man is worthy of praise. Ce general est digne de commander. \ That general is worthy to command. In the first phrase, louange, in the second, commander, is the regi- men of the adjective digne. (2.) The regimen is not always necessary to the adjective. It is added to it only to give it a particular limitation : — i Without a regimen. With a regimen. Cet homme n'est pas content. Cet homme n'est pas content de That man is not pleased. That man is not pleased ieith his son. 414 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — § 83. (3.) As may be seen in the last sentence, an adjective is not al- ways, in French, followed by the same preposition as the correspond- ing adjective in English. Thus, after the adjective content, the French use the preposition de (of), while after its English represen- tative (pleased), the preposition with must be employed. M. Bes- cherelle and several other French grammarians, while acknowledging the difficulty, give us the consoling assurance, that "L'usage et lea dictionnaires lea tenrnt eonnaitre" (use and dictionaries will make us acquainted with them) ; that is, with the prepositions required after the adjectives. As the student will scarcely be satis/ait de cela, we give a rule or two on this difficult subject, and add lists of adjectives with their proper accompanying prepositions. When an adjective follows the verb t'trr, used unipersonally, the preposition itl'.ivnt de, de, Bnvicui de, Eloign from) \ Exempt de, ambitious of in hrve with. F.itigll6 dc, easrer for de, Port da capable SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — §89,90. 415 Plein da, full of Ravi de, glad to, of Rassasie de, satiated with Eeconnaissant de, grateful for Rempli de, filled with Redevable de, indebted for Qui vit content de rien, possede toute chose. Boileau. II n'est pas de Romain, Qui ne soit desireux de vous donner la main. Corneille. Soigneux de, careful of to Sur de, sure of Surpris de, surprised of Tributaire de, tributary to Victime de, victim to t of Vide de, void of He who lives content wit r i a httie, possesses all. There is no Roman that is not desir' ous to reach you his hand. § 89. — List of Adjectives Requiring the Preposition A. to Accessible a, accessible to Accoutume a, accustomed to Adherent a, adhering to Agrcable a, agreeable to Ajuste a, fitted for Anterieur a, prior to Aise a, easy to Ardent a, zealous for Assidu a, assiduous to Attentif a, attentive to Bona, good for Cher a, dear to Conforme a, similar to Contraire a, contrary to Cruel a, cruel towards Difficile a ; difficult to Enclin a, prone to Etranger a, a stranger to Exact a, exact in Facile a, easy to Favorable a, favorable to L'ignorance toujours, est prete d s'admirer. Boileau. Insensible a, la vie, insensible a, la mort, 11 ne sait quand il veille, il ne sait quand il dort. Racine. Formidable a, Fatal a, Importun a, Impenetrable a, Indispensable a, Interesse a, Invisible a, Insensible a, Naturel a, Necessaire a, Nuisible a, Odieux a, Posterieur a, Preferable a, Propice a, Propre a, Rebelle a, Redoutable a, Semblable a, Sujet a, fatal to importunate to impenetrable to indispensable to interested in invisible to insensible to natural to necessary to hurtful to odious to posterior to preferable to propitious to fit for rebellious \ formidable to similar to subject to Ignorance is always ready to ad- mire itself. Insensible to life, insensible toC he does not know when lie is < or when he sleeps. 90. — Adjectives requiring a Different Preposition in French and in English, not included in the above List, with the following signification. Bon pour, de- kind towards, voted to Celsbre pour, par, celebrated for Civil envers, polite to - Quand on est bon pour tout le monde, on ne Test pour personne. C. Delavigne. E fut celebre par sa doctrine, au- tant que par sa naissance. Bosscet. Ignorant en, not versed in Indulgent pour, indulgent towards Insolent avec, insolent to Poli envers, polite to When one is devoted to every body one is so towards nobody. He was celebrated for his doctrine, as well as for his birth. 416 BYKTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — §91,92,93. § 91. — Remark. It must not be forgotten, that when the verb the is used uniper- sonally before the adjectives contained in the two preceding sections these adjectives become subject to rule (4.) } 87. II est indispensable d'etudier I 11 is indispensable to study much,U beaucoup pour devenir savant. | become learned. § 92. — Important Riles. (1.) A noun may be followed by two or more adjectives, having one and the same regimen, provided those adjectives require the same prepositions after them ; thus we may say : — Oe pen eel utile et cher ii ss fa- mine. GlRAlI.T DlVIVIKR. La religion i e et na- turelle (i Phomme. Ashwmocs. 7' ' father is useful and dear to his fn mil y. ■i is necessary and natural to num. These two sentences are eorrect, because the adjectives, utile, and cher, in the first, and lu'crssaire and natunl, in the second, require the tame preposition, <"'. (•J.) We could DOt in the iir-t of these two sentences, substitute for the word cAer, and Bay as in English, Thatfathrr is useful to, end beloved r.v his family. Bach ■ constrac- tion in French, it never admissible. We must say, That father isuse- fitl t<> h&sfasnil ved by them ; because the adjective chin, the prepOSitioD kti.i;minin(; Ai>ji:ctivi:s. — DsHONBTBATZVl Adjec- The demonstrative adjective, which must not be confounded with the demonstrative pronoun [; 38.], always preeedei the noun, and must be repeated before every substantive. It assumes the gender nd number of the word whieli it determines [} 20, (1.)]: — C't air pur, ea gazoos, eeile voote mobile : Id t<>ut plait auca-ur. toutenchantc l' s veas. CASTKr.. ■ air. that turf, that chang- t every tk ins; pleases the heart and charms the i j * The rule witli regard to the regimen of v. rbs is equally imperative. We COUld !i"t say in l'r.ii.li. as i:, English I / vnlr l.ltrrs TO, emd rscstvs letters nou my bri / tents my brother, and fscetvt some from Tout) s lf it) arc without num- ber. Those la nguagts arc rich , J a dm ire ties of them). (6.) Exception. The possession may be expressed by son, sa, ics, kurs, although the possessor be not the nominative of the same proposition, when the object possessed is the regimen of a prepo- sition : — Paris est one villi- remsrquable; uogera admirenl la beauts' de scs c'li::. Paris is a remarkable city, foreign* cr: admire the ticauty of its edifices. 6. — Nl MKKAI. Ah.ii:i II (1.) The cardinal number used simply to indicate number, not Order, | noon. a ben need to indicate order [\ '2fi, (3.)], the cardinal number generall] pi when indicating the day of the month) ; 26, I. |a— /. | 'Irrtcn. (3.) The ordinal number la planed before the noun: — La dixicme Bl TV (4.) It follows the worda ehapUrt, page, &c. in division of a book. Livre sixiemc, cliapitrc dixicme. Sixth book, tenth chapter. , . — 1\hi:ki\iii: A (1.) Quthjuc is written in thr«-<- wmya: — 1. Followed by a verb, it ia written in two words, quel que j . which ia an adja in gender and number with, the subject of the verb, and the second, ■ ;iees commencing with au vuiins. a peine, encore, du mains, combien, dec, the pronoun may elegantly be placed after the verb, although this con- struction is nut Imperative: — IVut-vtn- DMU i :itreii'inliai_/- aussi de I'aetronomle, Aim<-Mahtin\ Combii-n (l'lu-inn e pai ' [a Fontaine. ■ -jht. a- ilk you on astronomy. 1! ■ many wishes he hses, hw many steps he t (3.) In exclamation*, the DOminative pronoun [a often placed after the verb in French, as will as in English : — i I yenx y voir torn- May 1 own i/m Mi the rndre ! ills. | ■"• (4.) In interrogativi anoun la placed Immediately after tic verb in the bu i] le I naea, and between the auxiliary and the participle, in the compound: — on miis ;• .' qn'al ' fall Iqvedoii R I it have I done 1 jt (aire 1 1 | what ham I yet m do ? (5.) In interrogative Bentencei with verba having only one* sylla- ble, in the first person singular of the indicative present, and with come verhs having more than one syllable, hut in which tint panaa ends with an • preceded by a consonant, the pronounce is not placed * We may say, however luhvjel an /.' ai-je? hove I? fai> | wiaie I dole-Jet should I.' ought I? role-Jel do I sec? vaU-jo/ do I go? DUtcnds Jo 1 do I hear ? SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 99. 421 after the verb. In such case another construction must be given to the sentence . — Est-ce-que je cours 1 Esi-ce-que je dors ? Est-ce-que je comprends 1 Do I run? literally, k it. that I run? Do I sleep ? Do I understand ? (6.) The same construction is admissible, though not desirable with all the persons and tenses which may be used interrogatively. § 99. — Repetition and Omission of the Nominative Pronoun. (1.) It is proper to repeat the personal pronouns je, ;<& il, nous. Us, before every verb : — Je lis, j'ecvis, je me promene. | / read, write, and walk. (2.) The omission of the pronouns je, tu, il, nous, vous, Us, before the second or third verb of a sentence, is a matter of choice and subject to the following restrictions :— Those pronouns must be repeated : 1. When the verbs are not in the same tense : — Je pretends et je pretendrai ton- I J maintain and will always matn- jours. I tain. 2. When the first verb is in the negative and the second in the affirmative : — Je ne plie pas et je romps. | I do not bend and I break. 3. When the propositions are connected by conjunctions other than et, and ; ou, or ; ni, nor ; mais, hut : — Nous detestons les mechants, par- 1 We detest the vncked because we ceque nous les craignons. | fear them. (3.) Although we would advise the student fo follow the 1st rule of this §, particularly with regard to the pronouns je, tu, nous, vous, and thereby avoid all uncertainty, we give a few examples, where the pronouns after the first are — Omitted : 11 s'arrache les cheveux, se roule sur le sable, reproche aux Dieux leur rigueur, appelle en vain a son secours la cruelle mort. F£n£lon. He (Telemachus) tears his hair, rolls on the sand, reproaches the Gods with their rigor, and calls in vain, cruel Death fa his aid. Je veux qu'on dise un jour aux peuples effrayes, H fut des Juifs, il fut une insolente race. Racine. I wish that they may one day say to the frightened nations, there were Jews, there was an insolent race. 422 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. S 100. II s'ocoute, il se plait, il s'adonise U s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. He listen s to himself, he adorns him- self, he laves himself. Nous avons dit, ct nous allons p.-ouvcr, qa'il n'y a pas de bonheur sansverta. Basesis. Wi have said, and ve arc going to prove, that there is no happiness without virtue. L'Etcrncl est son nom, le monde est son ouvrage, II entend les soupirs de l'humble qa'on outrage Juge tons les mortels avec d'egales lois, Et du hast de son trono interroge tea rois. Racine. The Eternal is his name, the wtHi is his work ; he Ustcns to the sighs of the humble oppressed, judges all mankind with equal lair's, and in- terrogates the mightjf from his lofty 100. — Place of Personal Pronouns Verbs. used as Regimens of (1.) The personal pronoun used as rigitne direct, (direct object or accusative) [ j -«2. | -4.) |, and the pronoun used as regime indirect, (indi- ct) with the preposition to, expressed or understood, in Eng- Ban, (dative of the L 3.)] are in French placed before the verb : — /' • /,' 'men, 1 ■ an !-• del 1 • lie. M Un til faiTStfl balaa, rtnmmfl le moat J »n boa Jen be Fentsfne. i MaKTIV. P the gnat of the good J (•2.) 1st Exception: When tin- v.-rl. is in the second person singu- lar, or in thfl Bj person plural of the imperative used af- firmatively, these pronouns must be pissed after it: — Renda moi chretienne e( libra, a id. • sonmeta Voltaiss. aillons-iuwjaussid'une rains / /.' I ii/irn. I I iiiii sjxak to them. ]>rix je leur ]M-rincts do vivr.-. Ku-ini:. 1 allow Hum to II faul compter but llngratttnde dea bommea 1 pas de re -in bfen. PsjotLON. h aula expect ingratitude from tpeak to 'hem. ■1 and free, 1 ■• I from a vain pride. ' • lo the next room. I bra procbaine, Ra- : But it* the verb in those persons of the impcrativi be used negatively, the pronouns will be placed according to Hule ,1.):— •ye/ ras. do not uc them. | Nc/rurparlezpas, ,-.••/// lend it to him. not hud it to them. ■ U write it to them. The surest support of man is Goa, and you wish to deprive him of it. (3.) Re m ar k : stive pronoun st, need aa an indin men, makea an ezceptiorj to the above rule, as it takes precedence of : regimen: — / n think ill of each other, at .. do )0'! say it to each other. si lei hommea penaent mal lea ! - antres, (l.) The Rules (l.) ami (2.)i also the Exception (3.), apply to the Imperativi lively; but Rule (1.) cannot apply to the impera- tive used affirmatively. Examples of the Impcralii- \ :fively. I ) I to US, rates paa [ Hole (2, >j L»u s.ui^ .irtagc. Voltaibk. (5.) When the imperative used affirmative^ baa two regimena, / ' lot lend it to thrm. I . n say it to themselves. Oftht blood of to many tittgt, uu my only inheritance ; do nut • (to me), leave me my ft SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 102,103. 425 the pronoun regime direct precedes the regime indirect in all the persons : — Envoyez-Ze-wwi. • Domiez-k-nous. Qu'ils k lui donnent. Montrez-fe-moi, ce mortel privi- .egie. Ballanche. Mets-k-toi dans l'esprit ; qui fait mal, trouve mal. Anonymous. Send it to me. Give it to us. Let them give it to him. Show him to me, that privileged mortal. Put this into thy mind; he who does evil, finds evil. § 102.— Rule. When two pronouns in different cases, representing rational be- ings, occur, and the pronoun in the regime direct is in the first, or in the second person, this pronoun must be placed according to the general rules ; and the pronoun in the regime indirect must follow the verb, and be preceded by the proper preposition : — H nous a recomniandes a eux. II vous a presents a elk. Nul ne peut se comparer a lui, pour faire en peu de temps, un travail fort inutile. La Bruyere. He has recommended us to them. He has presented you to her. No one can compare himself to him, for doing in a short time, a ver% useless piece of work. § 103.— Rule. (1.) The personal pronouns lui, die, eux, elles, used as indirect re- gimens of verbs and preceded by a preposition, can only relate to persons, and not to things. The expressions of or from it; q/*o? from them, when relating to things, should be rendered by en [§ 39, (17.)]:- I speak of it, of them; I give of it {some). I prize valor too highly to be jealous of it. He who is in prosperity should feat J'en parle ; j'en donne. J'aime trop la valeur, pour en etre jalous. La Harpe. Celui qui est dans la prosperite, doit craindre d'en abuser. Fen£lon. (2.) The relative pronoun y [§ 39, (18.) 5 111], is used in French in relation to things, for the indirect regimen, expressed in English by at or to (dative). It means at or to it ; or to them ; thereto, &c : — ■ J'y songerai, I will think of it. | Faites-y attention, Pay attention to it. C'estlorsque nous sommes eloignes de notre pays, que nous sentons surtout l'instinct qui nous y at- tache. Chateaubriand. Tous nos jours vont a la mort, le dernier y arrive. Montaigne. Les choses de la terre ne valent pas qu'on h'y attache. Nicole. It is when we are far from our coun- try that we feel, above all, the in- stinct which attaches us to it. All our days travel towards death, the last one arrives at it {reaches it). The things of the earth ai e not worth our attachment to them. 426 SYNTAX OF THE PEOKOUN. §104,105,106. § 10t.— Place of En and T. (J.) Th) place of en and y is the same as that prescribed by Rule (1.) \ 100, for the personal pronouns. They are also subject to Ex. ception (2.) and Remark (3.) of the same \. See examples above. (2.) En and y are always placed after the other pronouns r6« gimes : — II nous en a parle. II lui en a dit quelque chose. Parlez- /uz'-cn. Ne nous en jmrlez pas. Je l'y ai remove. Renvoyes-noue-y. Ne none y ronvoyez pas. He has spokc7i to us of it. He has toll/ him something ofxt. Speak to him of it. Do not speak to us of it. I hare referred him to it. Refer, or send us baek to it. Do net refr us to it. §10,5. — Rkfjritiov or rai Prokouot, Regimes. These pronouns must, in French, be repeated before every verb: — Ah! moo enfant, oueje roudraia Hen oous ?cir on pen, oout enten- • • >ir pas- Ifme, DbSAVignb. Je vcux It voir, It prier, U presser, /'importiiiicr, b llechir. KELI.K. Ah! my child, how J would like to rt tan*, to hear you, embrace you, ttt unit jxiss. I will $te him. entreat him, press him, importune him, bend him. § 100. — The Podwiijivi Pbovous. (1.) Th«' poeneeaive pronoun, in French, is always preceded by the article ['; 34, (2.) (3.)] which, as well as (he pronoun itself, agrees in gender and number with the noun represented [j 35, (1.)] : — [•'ambition ni la fames ne ton- n ambition nor smoke have Such a heart as mine. Instead of bevoMimg the death of I nth to I' arn from you haw .nj own holy. client point anooBurconuneltttsmk .1. .1. Bosaesao. Au lieu de deplorer U mod dea Je veux apprendre de roni a rendre la mie n nt Minte. BOSSCF.T. (2.) The pronouns le nutre, le v6tre [\ 34, (3.)], etc., unlike the adjectives notre, votre, dec, always take the circumflex accent: — La muaique deb andena Orccs I The music of the amcutui Greeks ■ \ , s ditli rente de 1 1 n,,trc. v,; 1 1 from ours. Vol.TAlRF.. I (3) When the English pronouns, mine, thine, dtc^ MOM after the verb/" be, thej are often rendered into French by the indirect pronouns ii BIOS, n I'd: — Ce livre t st d v m. That hook is mine. Ces plumes »«>nt elles d rous ? Are these pens yours? SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUN. — § 107. 427 § 107. — The Demonstrative Pkonoon. (1.) Tli3 demonstrative pronouns [} 36] can never be placed be- fore nouns. They merely represent them ; — La meilleure le^on est celle des exemples. La Harpe. N'oublie jamais les bienfaits que tu as re9us; oublie promptement ceux que tu as accordes. BOISTE. The best lesson is that of examples. Never forget the benefits which thou hast received; forget quickly those which thou hast conferred. (2.) The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, as has been said [§ 37, (2.)], are often used absolutely, not only in the nominative, but also in the regimes, direct and indirect. They have then the sense of he who, him whom, of whom ; that which, of which. They apply, in this 3, as well to things as to persons : — He who reckons ten friends, has not one. We cannot compel him who will not. Celui qui compte dix amis, n'en a pas un. Malesherbes. On ne saurait forcer celui qui ne veut pas. L'harmonie la plus douce est la voix de celle qu'on aime. La Bruyere. The sioeetest harmony is the voice of her whom we love. (3.) The French use celui, celle, ceux, celles, indifferently for this, that. When they institute a contrast or a comparison, they suffix the adverbs* ci (ir.i) and la to the pronouns [§ 37, (3.)] : — Corneille nous assujettit a. ses caracteres et a ses idees ; Racine se conforme aux notres. Celui-la peint les hommes, comme ils dev- raient etre, celui-ci les peint tels qu'ils sont. La Bruyere. Corneille subjects us to his charac- ters and to his ideas; Racine con- forms himself to ours. That one {the former) paints men as tlvey should be, this one (the latter) paints them as (4.) Celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci, may be used absolutely in French in the sense of this one, that one, &c. : — On la vit, toutes les semaines, es- suyer les larmes de celui-ci, pour- voir aux besoins de celui-la. Fl£chier. Every week, she xoas seen wiping the tears of this one, providing for tte wants of that one. (5.) Ceci and cela are always used absolutely. They serve to point out things only. They can, of course, never be prefixed to a noun [$ 37, (5.)] :— * The same adverbs produce the same difference in meaning with the demonstrative adjectives ce, cct, &c. They are not placed immediately after those adjectives, but after the nouns which they determine : cet homme-ci, this man, cet homme-la, that man. The commencement of Remark (3.) applies also to the adjectives ce, cet, cette, ces, &c. 428 STSTAX OF THE PRO SOU N. § 108. Tant que le jour est long, il gronde entre ses dents, Fais ceci, fais ccla, va, viens, monte, descends , Regnard. Je suis un peu surpris de tout ceci. Massillon. Vous n'avez pu dSsavouer cela. Pascal. The livelong day he mutters i his teeth, do this, do that, go, come, go up, come down. I am a Utile surprised, at all this. You have not been able to disavow that. § 108. — Remarks ox the Demonstrative Pronolw Cb. (1.) Ce, when used as a demonstrative pronoun, is almost always construed with the verb ttre, or followed by a relative pronoun : — C'est un i«>iils Men pownl qu'un gTand nom a soutenir. MoNTEMkmSD. Ce qui me plait c'est sa modestie. LiviZAC. A great name is a very heavy weight to sustain. That which pleases me is her mod- esty. (2.) Ce is used for he, she, thnj, preceding any part of the verb to be, When that verb is followed by a mum, or an adjective used sub- stantively and preceded by the, a or arc, or a possessive or demonstra- tive adjeetive. . that the verb rtrr following the pronoun ce, is put in the plural, when the noun following that verb is plural. The pro- noun oSfhowereri remains unchanged. He is a deceitful man. S irnmtin whom I seek. an trompear. ie r« - 1 1 1 1 1 1 f qneje eherehe. tri met unto. perotoeexqnbes. • :.iit un pend qui parlit. M'M.lEKK. N'*t.i ■ memea bom I'hiTKACDUUNH. irouU be exquisite words. If a emit man were to speak then. II' [fay not the same RM ? All those sentences are elliptieal ; a noun being understood after : — • ■iiinie ett un trempew. That man is a deceitful one mme eel la (emme que je That woman islhcwoman whom 1 eherehe. (4.) This is, that is, these are, those are, may also be rendered by £est ici, ce sunt ici : — I to place. ' Id mea enfknts. This is the place. ■ ■ my children. Void, xoilii, are, however, to be preferred to cesl ici, &e: — I place. I / to place. ■Mi enfants. Those au my children. (5.) O answers to the English pronoun it, when this totter word i the nominative of the verb to be, without def.nite n to an antecedent • — SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. §109. 429 Ce n'est que par les sens que l'ame pout s'instruhe. Fontanes. Ce fat d'une retraite de patres et d'aventuriers, que sortirent les con- querants de l'univers. Rollin. C'est un defaut capital qu'il faut eviter dans quelque sujet que ce soit. Voltaire. It is only through the senses that the mind can receive instruction. It was from a refuge for shepherds and adventurers, that emerged the conquerors of the world. This is a capital defect which should be avoided in whatever subject it may be. (6.) When the verb etre, however, is used unipersonally, and fol lowed hy an adjective [§ 87, (3.)], the pronoun it is not rendered by ce, but by the pronoun used with all unipersonal verbs (il) : — II est necessaire d'etudier. It is necessary to study. II est plus difficile pour les na- tions que pour les individus, de re- couvrer l'estime de leurs voisins quand elles l'ont perdue. Boiste. It is more difficult fornations than for individuals to recover the esteem of their neighbors, when they have lost it. § 109. — The Relative Pronoun. (1.) 1 He relative pronoun que, whom, which, can in French never be supp^sssed like the corresponding English pronouns :* — The praises (which) we give, have always in some way a relation to our- Les Jaoanges que nous donnons, se rap^ortent toujours par quelque chose 4 nous-memes. Massillon. (2.) The pronouns quel, que, quoi, lequel, represent the English pronouns which or what used interrogatively. ^ 1. Quel is used before a noun in a determinative sense : — Quel livre lirons-nous 1 | What or which book shall we read? Quel est done votre mal 1 What then is your ailment 1 Moliere. I 2. Que is used before a verb :— Que dites-vous 1 \ What do you say? 3. Quoi is used as an exclamation : — Quoi ! est-ce vous 1 \ What ! is it you ? 4. Lequel, used interrogatively, means which one : — Voici deux plumes ; laquelle vou- I Here are two pens ; which (whicA Wz-vous 1 I one) will you have ? (3.) Qui is also used interrogatively for the regime direct, an preceded by a preposition, for the regime indirect. It then means whom, of whom, to whom, whose, &c. : — Qui avez-vous vu 1 Whom have you seen ? De qui tenez-vous cette nouvelle 1 From whom have you this news ? A qui est ce livre 1 Whose book is this ? * The conjunction, that, is often omitted in English ; its equivalent que, must always be expressed in French. Je crois qu' il est ici. I believe (that) he is here. 430 8YSTAX OF THE PROKOC N. § 110-113. § 110.— The Tkoxoux En. (1.) We have already [j 39, (17.) J 95, (6.) { 103, Rule (1.)] several remarks on this pronoun. (2.) En signifies of it, from it, icish it, about it, of them, from them &.O., expressed or understood. Though en is by some French v> riters oi'Un Med in relation to persons, their example should be imitated n raeh eases only as that presented by the example ['; 92, (2.)]. (3.) En, u-ed as an equivalent tor the English sojne or any, ex- preSBSd or anderstood, preserves its nature of an indirect regimen, and baa, in the same manner as the French article placed before a noun used partitively, the - \ of (ki m ; the word partie being understood: — | Hnvt you apples? That is. some, or rather, ir Poasftder |>ar un autre un Men qn'on fur.. un a sa MOLltHK. II i» rum in possession • irhieh ire hare failed in ob- M nhout this, every one has his own opinion. § 111.— li. Y. id] been made on this pronoun [J39, (18.) } 103, (2.)]. >' : it, to them, at them. It is seldom used in relation to persons or animal-, but frequently in relation to things: — I Tircr raniM de qnelqn< e'esf pronver, qn'on eccaal B tll'aire ; BoMVAea. / *f child, anil answer it {make ansiccr thereto) in haste. ' vanity on account of any proving, thai ve are not I to it. ihs affair vpim yourself ; give all your care to it. g 112. — 1'lai-k oi mi: Pbohouvs Ba am. Y. See } 104, (1.) (2.) • ( 4 -)l- (1.) On. which is very extensively need in the French language, IS »aid only of persons. The verb, of which it is always U e nomine- SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. § 113. 431 live, must be in the singular. This pronoun is of the masculine gender. [See (2.)] On is used in French for people, one, some one, we, (hey, whenever these words have a general and indefinite meaning, and do not refer to any particular word : — On pardonne aisement le mal involontaire. De la Boutraye. On cherche les rieurs, et moi je es evite. La Fontaine. Another translation of the above sentences, will show us that the pronoun on often enables the French to make use of the active voice, which they always prefer to the passive.* Thus the two examples last given, may be rendered as follows: — We, (people, they, :. femme infortunec I utchir. Waii.lv. Savcz rous, si domain, 8a liberie, ses jours, seront en votre main? The sweetness, the sighs of thai un- fortunate woman could not move him. Do vou know, if to-morrow, will I Ml liberty, his life, be in your (4.) On the forms of the verbs when connected by ou, See L. St\ SYNTAX OF THE VERB. — § 115, 116. 433 § 115.- -Number of the Verb after a Collective Noux. (1.) Every verb having, as its subject, a general collective noun [§ 3, (6.)], preceded by the article, such as la totalite, V infinite, &c, takes the number of that noun : — L'armee des infldeles/wi entiere- ment detruite. L'Academie. La multitude des bonnes choses ue Ton trouve dans un ouvrage, c ait perdre de vue la multiplicity mauvaises. Caminade. The army of the infidels was en- tirely destroyed. The multitude of the good things which we find in a work, makes us lose sight of the multiplicity of the bad ones. (2.) When a partitive collective noun [§ 3, (6.)] occurs as the sub- ject of a proposition, the verb agrees with that noun, if it occupies the first rank in the thought of the speaker or writer. The verb agrees, on the contrary, with the plural noun following the collective word, if the collective acts only a secondary part, or if it is employed only to add an accessory idea of number : — Agreement with the following Noun, Une troupe de nymphes couron- nees de fleurs, nageaient autour da son char. Fene" lon. A troop of young nymphs, crowned with flowers, were swimming around her chariot. Une nuee de barbares desolerent la pays. L'Acade'mie. A cloud of barbarians desolated the country. Cette espece de chiens qu'on ap- pelle chiens de Laconie, ne vivent que dix ans. Boileau. That species of dogs which they call Laconian dogs, live only ten years. Agreement with the Collective. Une troupe d'assassins entra dans la chambre de Coligny. Voltaire. A gang of assassins entered Co- ligny 's chamber. Une nuee de traits obscurcit l'air. A cloud of arrows darkened the air. Cette espece de paons parait avoir eprouve les memes effets par la meme cause. Buffon. That species of peacocks seems to have experienced the same effects through the same cause. § 116. — Number of the Verb Etre after the Pronoun Ce. (1.) The verb etre preceded or followed by ce, as the grammatical subject, takes the number of the noun placed in apposition with tiai pronoun [$ 108, (3.)] :— Ce sont les moeurs qui font la 1 It is morals which form good com- bonne compagnie. La Chaussee. pany. Sont-ce des religieux et des pre- | Are they monks and priests who tres qui parlent aind'? sont-ce des speak so? are they Christians? Chretiens ? Pascal. | (2.) The verb etre may also be put in the plural, when the pro- nouns eux and elles are put in apposition with the pronoun ce. This rule, however, is optional, as the examples will show. Before turns 19 434 8TNTAX OF THE VERB. §117,118. andious similarly placed, the verb is always in the singular: e'ert nous ; e'est vous : — Plural. Cc sont eux qm viennont. Bescherelle. It u they who come. C'est eux qui ont bati ce snperbe labyrinthe. Bossuet. // is they who have built thai su- perb labyrinth. r in, The Verb relating to several Nouns in Different A vert liaving several robjeets in different persons, is put in the plural, ana assumes the termination of the first person in preference to that of the neeond, end that of the aecond in preferenee to that of the third. It may then be preceded by the plural pronoun of the jMrr-on preferred, recapitulating, as it were, all the other subjects:— \ Your J and I have long been oemia inn de I'antn ****. FtM All. '■ M J""* arenot to bt transp, anted. Kom m it § 118.— Use ok »■ Ptisni of the Indica- (i.) This tenee denotes what asjsta, or ie taking place at the time we speak : — Jc lis, roca paries, I 1 ; - Si Titus a pari*, ■ pars. (5.) i'he present is frequently nsed for the peat, to awoken atten- tion.and pfef fee event, sa it vrere, before fee reader:— J'ai vu, Bsknrnr, J*al vn votre I taw, my lord, I saw your un- Balbourealula dm^cd by the horses Traini- | OJL M» e sumain a nooirii ; D veui les rappelcr, niais sa volx ■ \nrf,aie. Racine. which his mm hand has fed; he ■ < recall Iher.i, b%U his voice Jr^hlcns than. syntax of the verb. — §119,120. 435 § 119. — The Imperfect. (1.) The mperfect, or simultaneous past, is used to express some- thing which was in progress, while another thing was taking place. It leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undeter- mined : — . 4 J'ecrivais, quand je re9US votre I / was writing, when I received lettre. | your letter. | (2.) The French imperfect, as may be seen in the above example, represents the English past tense formed of the auxiliary to be, and the participle present of a principal verb. (3.) The imperfect is also used to express repeated or customary action. It may then often be rendered in English by the infinitive of the verb preceded by " used to" : — Lorsque j'etoz's a Londres, j'allais me promener le matin, ensuite je dinais, et je passais le reste de la journee a lire et a ecrire. Wlien I was in London, I walked {used to walk) in the morning, after- wards dined {usually dined), and spent {usually) the remainder of the day in reading and writing. (4.) The use of this tense will be further explained in the next Section. § 120. — The Past Definite. (1.) The past definite indicates an action performed at a time en- tirely past : — / went to London, where I saw your father ; I finished my business in that city, and returned hither Mr. such-a-one wrote last evening six verses to Miss such-a-one. J'al^ii a Londres, ou je vis votre pere ; je finis mes affaires dans cette ville, et revins aussitot ici. M. un tel ecrivit hier au soir un sixain a Mademoiselle une telle. MOLIERE. (2.) The past definite can only be used, as we have seen above, when the time at which an action took place is entirely elapsed. We cannot, therefore, use it in connection with the words to-day, this morning, this week, this month, this year, &c. [See § 121, Past Indefi- nite.] We may use it in speaking of yesterday, last week, last year t &c. : — Je vous envoie, mon cher frere, I send you, my dear brother, a let- une lettre que j'ecrivis hier pour ter which I wrote yesterday for Ma- Madame de Laval. F£n£lon. dame de Laval. (3.) The imperfect may almost always be rendered in English by Hie participle present of the verb and the auxiliary to le ; or by pre- fixing " used to" to the infinitive mood. The preterite definite can never be so rendered. 436 6 Y X T A X OF THE V IB B. § 120. (4.) The imperfect might he called the descriptive tense of tne French. (5.) The past definite might he called the narrative tense. It ex- presses that which took place at some time fully past. We will endeavor to illustrate this difference between those two tenses.— A traveller lias entered a wood and discovered a retired cottage; ho - to describe what lie saw there, and makes use of the imper- fect Of descriptive tense j lie says : — Uu vieiUard se promcnalt BOOS lea An old man was walking vndcr the ■rbrei ■ fl tenon nn livre a la main ; trees; he \dd {\ras holding) a book m ,1,- temps en temps, D - ""•'•• from time to time he raised v.ux vera I.- del on lea - - ' d '- :rJs "•"•aa, or concealed j u „, , B'abimer dans them with his hand, and sea: une i ' .„„.,,.',. door of the hut. sat (teas sitting) U mine qui bercail un enfant Mir Bee I ■'•'"> »SU rocking} a wot Man aw [was w«Jfl at tne couiai , i temdi laan/twM (wx found the raven, hut in relating the action of Fontaine uses the narrative tense of the same ran* SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 121. 437 The commencement of the first book of Telemaque, offers an ex- cellent illustration of what we have here advanced on the use of the anperfect and the past definite. § 121. — The Past Indefinite. (1.) The past indefinite expresses an action entirely completed, but performed at a time of which some part is not yet elapsed, as to- day, this month, this year, &c. Le roi m'a nomme aujourd'hui archeveque de Cambray. F£n£lon. Ce matin j'ai trouve le pave si glis- sant, que j'ai pense que si je venais a tomber sur le bras droit, je serais tout a fait desempare. Bernardin de St. Pierre. Je t'ai defendu {see (2.) below) cent fois de racier ton mecbant violon ; cependant, je t'ai entendu ce matin — Ce matin 1 Ne vous souvient- il pas que vous me le mites [§ 120 (2.)] bier en pieces % Palaprat. The king appointed me to-day archbishop of Cambray. This morning I found the street so slippery, that I thought in case 1 happened to fall on my right arm, 1 should then be completely helpless. " / liave forbidden thee a hundred times to scrape thy wretched violin ; ne- vertheless, I heard thee this morning." " This morning! Do you not re- collect that you broke it to pieces yes- terday ?" (2.) The past indefinite is, also, used with regard to a time en tirely past, but not specified : — Les fruits de la terre ont ete la premiere nourriture des bommes. Girault Duvivier. Les Franjais ont gagne la bataille de Marengo. The fruits of the earth were the first aliments of mankind. The French gained the battle of Marengo. (3.) When the time is specified and entirely elapsed, the past in- definite is by many of the best French writers, used indifferently with the past definite : — Past Definite: Huit jours apres son depart, il vcHecrivit une lettre. Bernardin de St. Pierre. A week after his departure, he wrote me a letter. Je fus bien fache bier, ma cbere cousine, de vous avoir quittee avec tant de precipitation. F£n£lon. I was very sorry yesterday, my dear cousin, for having left you in so much haste. Past Indefinite. Je vous ai ecrit, il y a quinze jours. The Same. J wrote to you a fortnight ago. Hier en travaillant a. mon qua- trieme dialogue, j'ai eprouve un vrai plaisir. Mirabeau. Yesterday, while working at my fourth dialogue, I experienced real pleasure. (4.) When the first verb of a sentence is put in the past indefinite, every other verb of that sentence, and of the sentences referring to it, should be in the same tense : — Ou a-ye^r-vous eie ? I Where have you been ? J'ai d'abord ete a. l'egbse, ensuite J first went to church; and then fe suis venu diner, came home U dinner. 438 erxTAX of iiie verb. § 122.— The Past Axterior. The pasl anterior expresses what took place immediately before another event which is also past: the latter event being usually the result of, or dependent upon the former : — Quaml feus reamnu tnon erreur, When I had perceived my error, I te fns bootanz de mauvais proctdes j mu ashamed of my bad conduct it q Ifl j avais eus pour lui. wards nim. GlRAUI.T DlVIVlEB. | Sec (3.i of the | boJOW. § 123. — Tin: PfcunUKMf. (1.) The pluperfect marks an event not only past in itself, but aa p:>st with regard 10 MOthl I : — 1 vow I / had break fasted, when you came ladar. \to inquire for me. Girallt Di vivikr. ! (2.) The pluperfect having as its auxiliary the imperfect of the :iti'Mi of that tense. It may. therefore) often be need t<> denote customary action s — D&s que j 'amis lu quelnues psgi I us I had reatl a few pages, y- me promenala. I / si 'ilk. In such cases, it generally PTOOedoa or follow! another verb in the Imperl (3.) When the nction is not ■ one, and the sentence ci.uiiiin-iii is with one of the adverbs quoad, Inrsijue, aussitot que, dis que, &lc, the just interior is generally need : — - pages je I At MM as I had read a few pages, \ I tr> ■ § 124. — Tit!: Tu (1.) The future simple is used to signify what will he, or will take | et come : — i main. | Your brother will go to-morrow. Phe future is ued, hi Preneb, alter an adverb of time, incases Ingush use the preeenl of the indicative: — II app..r- I Wit | i/ou come, you will bring my ■ livre. | book. (3.) It has sometimes the sense of the imperative in sentences like the following: — Croira qui M*aVfl lliisfori.-n C.i- j . trill the historian Ce- pitolin et.pielcpics I and several other wtilers, qui Ihnl deOBBf les llephaota mr la I wh<> make tlephants dance on a rapt. FtRACD. SYNTAX OF THE VERB. — § 125, 126, 127. 439 (4.) The future anterior is used to signify what will have "been at ft future period ; it is also used after an adverb of time in cases where the past indefinite is used in English : — Qua,ndfauraifini mes affaires, je I When I have finished my affairs, I vous irai von. Girault Duvivier. \ will go and see you. § 125. — The Two Conditionals. (1.) The conditional present denotes what would take place under a certain condition : — * Nous gouterio?is bien des jouis- Bances, si nous savions faire un bon usage du temps. Girault Duvivier. We should have many enjoyments, if we knew how to make a good use of time. (2.) The conditional past denotes what would have taken place, at a time past, if the condition on which it depended, had been ful- filled:— H serait alle a la campagne, si le I He would have gone into the coun- temps le lui avait permis. | try, if the weather had alloioed him. (3.) The two futures, and the two conditionals, cannot, in French, follow the conjunction si, meaning in ease that. The indicative pres- ent is then used instead of the future, and the imperfect instead of the conditional. This rule is often violated by the French, but sel- dom by the Americans or English who have acquired a good knowl edge of the French language. § 126. — The Imperative. (1.) The imperative is used to express a command, exhortation, permission, or entreaty : — Connais-moi tout entiere. CORNEILLE. Ah ! demeurez, seigneur, etdaignez m'ecouter. Racine. Ne tardons plus, marchons et s'il faut que je meure, Mourons. Racine. Know me entirely. Ah! remain, my lord, and deign to listen to me. Let us tarry no longer ; let us pro- ceed ; and, if I must die, let us die. § 127. — The Subjunctive. (1.) The subjunctive is the mode of doubt or indecision : — Obeis si tu veux qu'on t'obeisse I Obey, if thou wishest that one day %n jour. Voltaire. | others may obey thee. (2.) A vsrb, which is governed by the conjunction que, must be 440 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. §127. put in the subjunctive mode in French, though it may be ir the in dicative or conditional in English :* — 1. When the part of the sentence, which precedes qie, beiig inter- rogative or negative, expresses a doubt: — Peosez-vom que v.. us reussissiez 1 A' you think that youiciil succeed lite ] in this affair? mdraifl pas assurer, qfe'on | / imad «<>< <7#r;», /A*>/ 1/ i^>i*M | rir.'. JEAU. be written. ■ nnc } \ Do you believe he will come 7 2. When the verb preceding qu 1 1 sen/, command, doubt ■rprise, icarii, duty. '. apprehension : — • •nets, jo s"u ; . - Tu v ux. qn'en ta f.»v< ur nous NULLS. root, qne d / II ,!oubt, I desire, 1 I am surprised, that you may or shout a i may Apart Mil rrry moment, r i-ishest that for thy sake ice nponibiKtiti, I ire happen te> a. When the Bret verb i r or apprehension, the verb preeeded by q\ •, must also be preceded by w: — [U j.- trembl J M ' v . I apprehend, 1 ii pear, <|ti i " HSf 09SU. . VIM. I the word m/, moaning . ihooid be followed by the ■ubjanctive, when that part of - them, expreasee an interrogation, <»r inv- I They mnat also !><• followed re, when they are preeeded i>y a super- V a til qnelqa'nn . le inalK' /. '.y.r rooajntu- I tranquille. / any one trho iocs not re- m da. • -,:/ m which you may i A rerb preceded bj e of the nnfperaona] verbs faiioir, h '"■ by the rerb Un, um-d l ud personslly in with the adja ux^usie. nd is put In the bdicatrre, b?th< On m*aaflore que vow am rc^u I nm- letl 'ither. YNT AX OF THE VE! ■§ 128. 441 'njuste, suprenant, possible, or with & propos, temps, & desirer, souhaiter, &c, must be put in the subjunctive [seeL.73, R. 1.] : — Ufaut que vous veniez. H est temp3 que vous partiez pour Rome. II ne me plait pas, que vous alliez la. I/Acad£mie. II n'est pas certain, que vous ayez raison. You must come, or it is necessary that you should come. It is time that you should go to Rome. It does not please me that you should go there. It is not certain, that you are right. (5.) After the expressions quelque . . . que, quel que, si . . . fiie, quoique, the verb is always put in the subjunctive : — Quelqu'effort que f assent les horn- Wliatever effort men may make, aaes, lear ncant parait partout. their nothingness appears everywhere. Bossuet. Qui que ce fofi, parlez et ne le Whoever he may be, speak, and do «raignez pas. Racine. not fear him. Si mince qu'il puisse etre, un che- However thin it may be, a hair has veu fait de l'onibro. Villefr£. a shadow. (6.) For the other conjunctions which must be followed by the subjunctive, see \ 143. § 128. — The Infinitive. ^1.) The infinitive represents the being, action or passion in an indefinite manner and without number or person : — Vouloir tromper le ciel, c'est folie a la terre. La Fontaine. L'ardeur de vaincre, cMe a la peur de mourir. Coeneille. Hair est un tourment. BfGDR. To wish to deceive Heaven, is folly in men. The ardor of conquest (to conquer), yields to the fear of death {to die). To hate is a torment. (2.) The infinitive is often used substantively : — Ou plutot, que ne puis-je au doux tomber du jour 1 Lamartine. Or rather, why can I sweet close of the day ? at the (3.) The infinitive present is used in French after certain verbs, which are, in English, joined to other verbs by the conjunction and : — Allez chercher mon pere. | Go and fetch my father. (4.) We might give as a general rule, that a verb immediately pre- ceded and governed by another verb (avoir and etre excepted) or by a preposition (en excepted) is put in the present of the infinitive : — All that ike fancied that she held, escaped her suddenly. Tout ce qu'elle s'imaginait tenir, lui echappait toufr-a-coup. F£n£lon. Vos raisons sont trop bonnes d'elles-memes, sans etre appuyees de ces secours etrangers. Racine. Your recsons are too good in them* Ives to need that foreign asrlstance. 19* 442 87KIAX OF THE VERB. § 129, 130. Voufl pensez tout savoir. PlETRE. Croit il \cpouvoir romprc? Th. Corneili-e. You think that you fauna every thin::. I > i he eelicve he can break it ? (5.) The French language preferring the active to the passive requires the use of the active verb in the following and \ herein the English use the passive voice : — id plaindre. La eboea Ml •!>' tree pea da aaa> ■SgTMDCe ]">ur In / mctit. AIRE. lady is much to be pitied. I0NM is to be sold. The matter is of too little 1M sequence to be treated seriously. ..■rl»- in ii; ! rned by prepoaitiona ilifle rent from tlio-f which eooneel <>r govern the aame verbs in French. Some, np;un, which arc in Engliah, joined by prepoaitiona, require none between tben in French. We i r 'i\<- below, liata of verbs with the appropriate pn oording to the bes1 Prench authorities. § 130.- I 'HI TuMlloS BEFORE ANOTHER [HI imiivk. Aim- i Aller, 1 Courir, ( "r<»irc, I I I Ire, I Fallotr, nor(a*), I ' Nicr, to run ■ to beliere I to hear to hope to imagmt ■ suffer to lead to deny ■ P ire, I Proteater, Bappefc Bapportar, .Htre, rner, K-v.nir, Savoir. Benblar, Bench', Iter, Bo utenir, Temolgner, Val..ir niieux, Venir. Vouk.ir, to notice, to observ* to i/nrc to srem to think, tofancf U> be able to prctnxd to jirrfrr to remember to report to ack notrledge to look at to return back : i | mm to scent to wish to maintain to testify to be better to come to fee U be trilling ctrnds Tons trailer comma tn'-n proprc flls. R*< / intend to treat you at my mm SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 8 131 443 Et le Rhin de ses fiots ira grossir I And the Rhine will go and swell la Loire, the Loire with its waves, before the Avant que tes faveurs sortent de J remembrance of thy goodness leaves ma memoire. Boileau. | my memory. § 131, -Verbs requiring- the Preposition A befohe an Infinitive. The (s') placed after the verb shows it to be reflective. r(B'), Aboutir, Accorder (s'), Accoutumer, Acharner (s'), Adm^ttre, Aguerrir (s'), Aider, Aimer, Appliquer (s'), Apprendre, Appreter (s'), Aspirer, Assujettir (s'), Attacher (s'), Attendre (s'), Attendre, Augmenter (s'), Autoriser, Avilir (s'), Avoir, Avoir peine, Balancer, Borner (se), Chercher, Complaire, Concourir, Condamner (se). Condescendre, Consentir, Consister, Conspirer, Consumer, Contribuer, Convier, Codter Determiner, Determiner (se), Disposer (se), Divertir (se), Employer, Encourager. Engager, Enhardir, Enseigner, to stoop to end in to accustom to strive to admit, to permit to become inured to help in to like to endeavor, to apply to learn to prepare to aspire to summon to subject one's self to apply to expect to put off to increase to authorize to debase one's self to have to have difficulty in to hesitate to confine one's self to endeavor to delight in to co-operate to condemn one's self to condescend to consent to consist to conspire to destroy to contribute to invite to cost to induce to resolve to prepare one's self to amuse one's self to employ, to devote to encourage to induce to encourage to teach Etre, etre a. lire aecrire, &c. Entendre (s'), Evertuer (s'), Exceller, Exciter, Exhorter, Exposer (s'), Fatiguer (se), Habituer (s'), Hasarder (se), Hesiter, Instruire, Interesser, Inviter, Mettre, Mettre (se), Montrer, Obstiner (s)', Offrir (s'), Pencher, Penser, „ Perseverer, Persister, Plaire (se), Prendre plaisir, Preparer (se) Porter, Provoquer, Pousser, Reduire, Reduire (se), Renoncer, Repugner, Resigner (se), Rester, Risquer, Servir, Songer, Sumre (not unip. Tarder, Tendre, Tenir, Travailler, Viser, Vouer, I to be reading, I writing, $>c. to be expert in to strive to excel to excite to exhort to expose one's self to weary one's self to become used to to venture to hesitate to instruct to interest to invite to set, to put to commence to show, to teach to persist in to offer to incline to think, to intend to persevere to persist to delight in to take pleasure to prepare to induce, to exctie, to urge to urge to constrain to tend, to end to renounce to be repugnant to be reconciled to tarry too long to succeed to risk to serve to think, to intend .yto suffice to tarry to tend to intend, to aim to labor to aim to devote 444 TNTAX OF THE VERB. § 132. L'homme n'aime point d s'occu- per de son neant, et de sa bassesse. LLON. Avi>z-vous jamais petui a offrir a Diea Urates cos soutlrances 1 The same. Man does not like to contemplate his nothingness and his vileness. Have you ever tJunight of offering all these sufferings to God .' !o UttVt off £j 182. — Vekus BBOOXBora tiie Treposition De before ax Infinitive. to abstain Dteaccoutamw M 0n<:'j sr// | tofimuk Dfishal.ituer pirer, /<> Af the question IV- lei -'). irikT, /o <7/>/>r< PiilVnT, /<> bethink one's st '•' Disoonvenir, :r (s'), .\ COMT (8*), A'hiV.T, Affiiger Applea I Apprthi Av.rtir. Avoir 1 ■turns, Avoir il<>>-.iii. Avoir riivii-, Avoir noo&e. Avoir intention, Avoir I. ' • • courage, to Avoir peur, to trant to be aecustomed to intend ' to be ashamed I /<> lam ' Avoir :• Av-.ir I loin, Braler, 1 1 i Charger, r (se), Ohoinr, Commander, Conjurer, ■ ler, Content ncre, air, 1 ! Ii^rmiragor, r(§e), to be ' to hare to blame I ■ Discontinuer, Discnlper Dissnader, Douter, Bflbroer {%'), Bffiraver («'), fipouvai Bntreprendre, ! ( S ')l Bzcuser vftHdter, Platter I •find I , suit ■ tochalU '.•:. to hasten Glorifl. • Imputer, [naplrer, Juror, ftfanquer, so), Moqoor (to), to despair tn dissuade tO put off to toy, fell to dtwjf to diseontinu* to disp- to former to diss i/. to doubt ■lined to hasten dened to avoid ■ ne's S'iJ iiulaie to flutter one's Stlj to shudder to take rare to l.nnent •■u's vlf t.i venture to impute to bt indignant to inspire to twmt '■< intend ■ to laugh et SYN1AX OF THE VERB. § 133. 445 Mourir (figu ), Negliger, Nier, Pardonncr, Parler, Passer (se), Permettre, Persuader, Piquer (se), Plaindre, Plaindre (se), Prendre garde. Prendre soin Prescrire, Presser, Presser (se), Presumer, Prier, PromettrQ, Proposer, Proposer (se), Protester, Punir, Rebuter (se), Recommander, II vaut mieux hasarder de sauver un coupable que de condamner un innocent. Voltaire. Le monde se vante de faire des heureux. Massillon. to long Refuser, to refuse to neglect Regretter, Rejouir (se), to regret to deny to rejoice to excuse Remercier, to thank to speak Repentir (se), to repent to do without Reprendre, to censure to permit Reprimander, to reprimand to persuade Reprocher (se), to reproach one^t to take pride in self to pity Resoudre, to resolve to complain Ressouvenir (se) , io remember to take care, heed Rire. to laugh to take care Rougir, to blush to prescribe Scandaliser (se) to take o fence to urge Seoir (unip.), to become, suit to Iiasten Sommer, to summon to presume Soupfonner, to suspect to desire Souvenir (se), to remember to promise Suffire (unip.), to suffice to propose Suggerer, to suggest to intend Supplier, to beseech to protest Tenter, to attempt to punish Trembler, to tremble to be weary Vanter (se), to boast to recommend It is better to run the risk of sparing a guilty person, than to condemn an innocent one. Tlie world boasts that it can rendet men happy. § 133.— Rule. (1.) Two or more verbs may govern the same object, provided they require the same regimen : — Nous aimons, nous instruisons, et nous louons nos enfants. We love, we instruct, and we praise our children. This sentence is correct, because aimer, instruire, and louer, being active verbs, govern one and the same case, the direct regimen. (2.) But when the verbs require different regimens, they cannot govern one and the same noun; and therefore another form must be given to the sentence. We could not say in French, — Un gran nombre de vaisseaux entrent et sortent de ce port tous les mois, — A great number of vessels enter and go out of this port every month, be- cause the verb entrer reaches its regimen by means of the preposition dans, and sortir by means of the preposition de. We should say : — "On grand nombre de vaisseaux en- I A large number of vessels enter thii trent dans ce port et en sortent tous port and lea ve it every month. Icb mois. | See 5 92, (1.) (2.), also note, and \ 140. 446 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 134. § 134. — The Participle Past. (1.) We have seen [} 66, (3.)] that the participle past, not accom panied by an auxiliary, assumes the gender and number of the noua which it qualifies : — Les inimities sourdes et cachces | Quiet and concealed enmity it Bout plus a craindrc que k-s balnea more to be feared than open and de- ouvertcs ct declarers. \ | (2.) The participle past accompanied by the auxiliary itre, agrees in gender ami Dumber with the subject Of the verb, whether the sub- ject be planed before or after it. S ] 135, (1.)] The sirord is blunted ; the piles are extinguished. Emmble virtue is often despised. The Greeks icere persuaded, that the soul is immortal. H tived the urn in irhirh were enclosed the ashes of Hip- pias, he ski I tears. Lo fer est emoussc ,• 1« s bachera sont eteints. TUB*. rerta obfcare ' i" vis, ||ine, 1 1 Q have icritten. hast thou done lrit.i our horf s .' Mil lord, I have fast- ened them to thr . ^ addrtrtt are tkose which thr heart has dictated. I - sought them in every corner, id them. (5.) But, if the direct regimen ia placed after the participle, thai participL remain! Invariable: — / td your Utter. J'ai rr^v rotre lettre. la reritl eUe-meme qui lui ■ f I • \\rg pir Irs. BORBUET. // il truth itself wkieh to him those fine words. S TNT AX OF THE PARTICIPLE. — § 135. 447 Les dieux ont attache presque »utant de malheurs a la liberte, qu'a la servitude. Montesquieu. The gods have attached almost as many misfortunes to liberty, as to ser- vitude. § 135. — Remarks on the Foregoing Rules. (1.) Although the compound tenses of the reflective or pronominal verbs [§ 43, (6,), § 46, (2.), § 56] take tire as an auxiliary, the past participle of those verbs does not follow the rule (2.) of the preceding section ; but comes under the same rules with those conjugated with avoir. It agrees with the direct regimen, when that regimen comes before it, and is invariable when that regimen succeeds : — Votre soeur s'est de belles Cette femme s'est rendue mal- heureuse. Your sister has bought {herself) handsome dresses, i. e.,for herself. That woman has rendered herself unhappy. Achele in the first example does not vary, because se, placed before it, is an indirect regimen or dative, while the direct regimen or accu- sative, robes, is placed after the participle. Rendue in the second ex- ample varies, because the word se, representing femme, is a direct regimen, and precedes the participle. We will add a few extracts as examples : — REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS Used as direct Objects. Elles se sont proposees comme des modeles de douceur. Quoted by Bescher. They have proposed, themselves as patterns of gentleness. La langue latine et la langue grecque se sont longtemps parlies. Lemare. The Latin and Greek languages were long spoken. La vie pastorale qui s'est conser- vee dans l'Asie, n'est pas sans opu- lence. Voltaire. The pastoral life vihich has been preserved in Asia, is not without opu- lence. (2.) When pronominal or reflective verbs, of which the second pronoun is an indirect regimen, are accompanied by another pronoun, or by a noun, used as a direct regimen, the participle agrees with this latter pronoun or noun when it is preceded by it, and remains inva- riable, when the regime direct follows. See Rules (4.) (5.) of the preceding section •■ — Used as indirect Objects. Us ne se sont propose, pour exem- ple, que la constitution la plus sim- ple des anciens. Voltaire. They have proposed to tliemselves, as an example, only the most simple constitution of the ancients. II est vrai, qu'elle et moi nous nous sommes parte des yeux. Moliere. It is true, that she and I have spo- ken to each other vnth our eyes. Neanmoins, il s'etait conserve l'autorite principals Bossuet. Nevertheless, he had limself the principal authority, 448 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. §135. V I Invariable. L 'indiscretion que nous nous Nous nous sommes rcprocbS ltn. *©inmes rcproclite. discretion. The indiscretion with which we II proached ourselves with have reproached ours | the indiscretion. Or to render in English the relations the same as in French : r "* irhieh t« have \ We have reproached to ourselves reproach | the indiscretion. (3.) The participle past conjugated with avoir, and preceded ly a . is sometimes followed by an infinitive. In such ten the direct regimen is under the government of the in.ini- :• thaa of the participle, the latter of coarse remains tU- ed: — Lex- 1 v I i The verb in the infinitive is sometimes understood; yet the participle mast follow the same rule, aa if it were expressed The participle //iV, followed by an infinitive, and iatss*, followed by the Lnfinitiv) rerb, are always invariable : — tit fkvon irhich La d 1 Ham). \icA J have had built, u n h,ivr shJ (5.) In soiii' difficult to ascertain whether the ■ ri. in. nt of the participle or of the infui> If til-' • ; ., rforming tl i . the infinitive, the participle is made to agree with that I !'-r and nnmlxr : — / In this example it will }„■ - grime ,l,r,rt) is repre- •.\ hat is expressed by the infinitive, and that the infinitive itself is translated by the prttent participle. Hi how represented aa sufTeiing the actios expressed by the infinitive, then tin' participle will remain •m- sd, and the infinitive will be trai Thus:— •Urir par lenn I / gy fkdf rv- wroemta, bat examples : — I .aide. /„,-,; ■ater lesenno- Je tu ni vu repowasar par lea raia. r i j i s. . / M thrm repel (repellint;) the / mm them repelled by the en* enemies. w„.<. SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. — § 135. 449 Je les ai vus prendre la fuite. I saw them taking flight Je les ai vus frapper. / saw them striking. Les personnes que j'ai entendues «hanter. The persons whom I heard sing- le les ai vu prendre sur le fait. / saw them taken in the deed. Je les ai vu frapper/ I saw them struck. Les chansons que j'ai entendu chanter. The songs which I heard sung. (6.) The participles past of neuter verbs, conjugated with avoir and those of unipersonal verbs, are always invariable : — How much good has slie not done, during the few days that she reigned! The excessive heat which we have had, has caused much sickness. Que de bien n'a-t-elle pas fait, pendant le peu de jours qu'elle a regne! Fl£chier. Les chaleurs excessives qu'il a fait, ont cause beaucoup de mala- dies. Condillac. (7.) The past participle never agrees with en, because en can have no other relation to the participle than that of an indirect regimen.* The presence of en does not of course prevent the agreement of the participle with a direct regimen preceding the verb : — Have you eaten of the fruits ? I Avez-vous mange des fruits ? J'en ai mange. Tout le monde m'a oiFert des services, et personne ne m'en a rendu. Mme. DE Maintenon. have eaten of them. Every body tendered me services, and no person rendered me any. En, -preceded by the direct Regimen of the Participle. Cassius naturellement fier et im- perieux, ne cherchait dans la perte de Cesar que la vengeance de quel- ques injures qu'il en avait rec-ues. Vertot. Rendez graces au ciel qui nous en a venges. Corneille. (8.) Le peu has in French two meanings : quantity, or the want of. When it signifies a small quantity, the participle agrees with the noun which follows le peu : — Le peu d'affection que vous lui avez temoignee, lui a rendu le cou- rage. | * Noel and Chapsal, page 165. Several grammarians call en at times a regime direct. We think with Bescherelle {Dictionnaire national, page 1114), that en does not represent the entire direct regimen, but only a part of it, or rather merely refers to it ; the direct regimen being itself understood. Ex. Avez-vous des livres 1 J'en ai. Have you books ? I have some. In the latter sentence, the word quelques-uns, the direct object is understood after the verb. J'en ai quelques uns, and en is :'ather a re- ference to it, than a substitute for it. The literal translation of the sen- tence will show this : / have of them a few. Cassius naturally proud and im- perious, sought in the death of Cesar only revenge for some injuries which he had received from him. Render thanks to Heaven which has revenged us for it. it signifies a small The little affection which you hav shown him, has restored his courage. 450 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. § 136, 137. When le peu is u?ed in the sense of the icant of the participle re. mains unaltered. Le pru d'affection que rous lui I The icant of affection which yon avez temaigne, l'a deco irage. | have shown him, has discouraged him. § 13G. — The Adverb. — Rules. — Place of the Adverb. (1.) In French the adverb used to modify a verb in a simple tens* Is generally placed after the verb: — Qae dfl pens prennent hardiment I Hotr mam/ people assume boU2y Ifl iii;i-iji:i de Li vt-rtu ! the mask of virtue ! Borate. (2.) Adverbs of place, and those used in interrogations, have the iee in French u in FqglMi i — Ou eat fQtra I 1 Where is your brother? He is here. i'i.) In compound teii-es the adverb is placed between the auxi- iiary and the participle: — Tan toe* done wmtg. 11 nous iMni \ II HI veil. mut Boding in mmt, may, in compound tenses, ■ I hi fore the participle Or after it, when they are nut very (bUowed by other modifying words, When, however, they j moat be placed after the par- : — ureusement cxprimd. \ „,. . . .. .. . ... , \ofpOjftsprm ■ Vena hrurcusement a Unipf. | He came fortunately in time. r ,<• adverbe anjonrd'hai, today; domain, to mo rr ou >; hier, . may be placed before or after the verb, but never between ary and the participle. The adverb davnntage, more, muat alwaya follow • ; — Nous Bonuncfl arrives aujounCkui. i I temps ; demam il pleuvra. Qirault Dovmn. H' • ,l,zy. I hrothrr hurt himself yesteriay. v, U is fine weather; to* rain. g I :;7.- i ' (1.) Tie adverbs of e >mpariaon l pfva, mein$, muat be repeated be- fore every adjective which they modify: — Tl eft Metal parcssnux ?t moms I He It less idle and otMtioe que son | his brother. 8TNTAX OP THE ADVER] 138. 451 (2.) These adveibs and the adverbs of quantity, need not be re- peated before every noun ; but the preposition de, which must always rome between pen, trop, beaucoup, tant,plus, mains, and a noun or an adjective, used substantively, must be repeated in every case :— II n'y aurait pas tant de peine et de misere dans ce monde. . . . Ce libraire a beaucoup de bons et de mauvais ouvrages dans son There would not be so much trou- ble and misery in the world. . . . This bookseller has many good and bad works in his establishment. (3.) The adverbs mieux, better ; pis, worse, must not be confounded with the adjectives meilleur and pire. See note § 14, (7). § 138. — Adverbs of Negation. (1.) The negation is composed of ne placed before the verb, and pas or point, after it in the simple tenses. The second negative comes between the auxiliary and the verb, in the compound tenses : — Heaven does not regulate things according to our wishes. Rome does not by any means con- fine offices to the nobility. Esteem is the true principle of con- sideration, which is not always at- tached to offices. Kings are by no means protected by laws. Le ciel sur nos souhaits ne regie pas les choses. Corneille. Rome ?j'attache point le grade a, la noblesse. Corneille. L'estime est le vrai principe de la cousideration, qui w'est pas tou- jours attache aux dignites. Fontenelle. Les rois ne sont point proteges par les lois. Chenier. It will be seen in the above examples, that the negative, point, is stronger than pas. The meaning of these two words, which are in fact substantives used adverbially to strengthen the negative ne, wil. sufficiently explain this : N'allez pas means n'allez un pas, do not go or move one pace or step. N'allez point means rtallez un point, do not go, or move a point or dot. (2.) The second negative may be suppressed after the verbs pou~ voir, oser, savoir and cesser : — Non, deesse ; je ne puis souffrir, qu'un de leurs vaisseaux fasse nau- frage. Fenelon. _ Dans son appartement, elle ?i'osait rentrer. Voltaire. Qui vit ha'i de tous, ne saurait longtcmps vivre. Corneille. La liberte ne cesse d'etre aima- fole. Corneille. No, goddess; I cannot suffer that single one of their vessels perish. She dared not re-enter her apart- ment. He who lives hated by all, cannet exist long. Liberty cannot cease to be worthy of love. (3.) Pas or point is suppressed, when the verb is modified by an. other negative word, such as jamais, guere, nul, nullement, aucun, 452 TKTAX OP THE ADVERB. § 138. personm, ni, ne, or followed by que, meaning only, and phis used negatively : — L'ambition, seigneur, n'a cut re de limites. Boursault. Nut n'est heurcux, s'il ne jouit de 8a propre estime. J. J. Rousseau. Personne n'aime a recevoir de eoroefla. De S*gur. Un mechant ne sait jamais par- donncr. NoiL. Ambition, my lord, has scaiccly any limits. No one is happy, unless he can esteem himself. No one likes to receive advice. A wicked man never knows how to forgive. (4.) Ne used Idiomatically. The negative ne is used without any negative sense after the conjunction* a raoins que, unless ; de pcur que, de crainte que; for frar (lint : — A in. 'ins gne tots m lui parties. De penr gn'on m rem trompe, L'Acaii^.mix. / B you speak to him. /' or (V.vV yu eMJpM f/e dc- (5.) Ne is need in the tame manner after autre, different ; w ire- mr-nt, otherwise; plus, inuins, lnicux. forming a comparison, and after .rain. if, avoir penr, trembler, apprehender, empeeher: — 11 est tout antra anU a'emtfc n parte antremenf qu'ii • plus modi's to qu'il n- lc :•• >r.iina,qu'un '•,-.■. Bacura. I'i.ii penr the regimen or government of verbs and adjec- pry also to prepositions. When two prepositions require tin- sa regimen, it is useless to repeal this regimen after each one, but, if they require ■ different regimen, it is neeesaary to give to each its proper object It would, therefore, be incorrect to say, — l T n magistral doit tonjonrs jngei eaivant et conformement aux lota: — A magistrate snmiU uhraysjv-i; ■, y prescribe. NTKt.. § 141. — Kkkkiiiios- i.k PbBPOSXOOVS. 1. The pupi r j ■ ted before \.rv reL'imeti. be it a noun, a pronoun or a verb: — : if ei n'est qn'nne 1« 't.-ri-- Tail world is but a lutkij of de rangs, <".'.<, of ranks, of dign est un art / ■ y important art, d^riiux destml >i Instrnlre, mstnei, t" repress pas- primer 1 ' ' tomct manners, to support A- lit. TeDe est Is multitude el smut Back is tfm multitude, without n- (Vein et sans lois. La Uabpk. | strand and without lawt. SYNTAX OF THE FREFOSITIO N. § 142, 143. 455 2. The other prepositions must also be repeated before avery noun, pronoun, or verb, unless the words used as regimens, have a similarity of meaning; in which case the prepositions may be placed before the first regimen only, or tefore all, at the option of the speaker: — Je vous donne ceci pour vous et I give you this for you and for vow votre frere. your brother. II perd sa jeunesse dans la mol- He wastes his youth vn, effeminacy esse et (dans) la volupte. and voluptuousness. § 142. — Observations on several Prepositions. (1.) Avant marks a priority of time and place: simply opposite, in front of: — -Devant mean* Je marche avant vous. Je marche devant vous. I walk before you, i. e. J walk earlier than you, or / have the prece- dence of you in walking. I walk in front of you. (2.) En, d, dans. — The sense of en is more indefinite, more exten- sive than that of dans. En is generally used before the name of a division of the earth, a kingdom, &c. ; a before the name of a town, and dans before a word restricted by an article or a determinative adjective : — En Europe, en France, a Paris, dans ma chambre. En Amerique, ce sont les bisons qui ont une bosse sur le dos. Bupfon. Dans 1' Amerique meridionale le bceuf etait absolument inconnu. BUFFON. In Europe, in France, in Paris, in my room. In America the bisons have a bunch on their back. In South America the ox was en- tirely unknown. (3.) Chez might be rendered in English by at the house of, with, among, &c. : — Chez votre pere ; chez vous. La condition des comediens etait infame chez les Romains, et hono- rable chez les Grecs. La Bruyere. At your father's ; at your house. The condition of comedians wr^s infamous among the Romans, and honorable with the Greeks. § 143, -The Conjunction — [See ■Government of Conjunctions. § 127.] (1 ) Conjunctions govern the verbs following them, in the infinitive, the indicative, and the subjunctive modes. 1. The infinitive must be put after every conjunction which is followed by the preposition de, and after all those which dilTer from 456 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. — §143. prepositions, only because they are followed by a verb instead of a noun: — Etii'Iiez diligemment afin dc sur- I Study diligently that you may (in passer vos conipagnons. | order to) surpass your companions. We think with M. Bescherelle that the words described in the pre- ceding rule, belong more properly to the prepositions than to the onjunctions. (2.) The following conjunctions always require the subjunctive after them in French, whatever mode they may take in English. Those marked with an asterisk require n-: before the verb [} 138, (4.)] :- in order that unless before that akktmgk qiie, alt-hough •riihstanding Nod que, Nod pas qua, Post que, Poor que, I'oiirvu que, Qnoique, Sans que, S. >i t qtlf. Bupposi que, not that supposing that that, in order that provided that although, though without that irhclh'T suppose that 1 / can srarrely misfortunes, I would rather suffer M them. I m V"U persist, I must men- 'irnlth to the prince to the king. Afin que, •A humus que, que, Av.mi in-. ♦De erainte que, for fear •De peni que, incase que, a' 1 Joaqu'S OS que, till, until that Loin que. far from, I Q I B DM ! DMI maux je iter, J atone mi" ux wt Nuflrtr, que d.- HI imiiti-r. nrs. u i/i//" vou.s persisties, il t'.iu- Finl (3.) The following conjunctions: — De aumiere qne, de sotte que, . tallemenl regimens of equal length, or nearly so, the direit precedes the indirect : — 1. \ JL 1 8. Direct Regim n. 4. Indirect Regimen. Jean a 00086' le livre a mOD ]><"re. John has - '">ok to my father. (10.) Should the direct regimen be followed by a relative pronoun, or by attributes rendering it longer than the indirect regimen, the latter i> placed Bret: — 1. Suhj. -1. Verb. 3. Ind. Regimen. \. Direct Regimen. Jean adonnc a mon pflre le Tlvre qn'U lnl avait promis. Jnhn haigivtM to my father the book which he had promised him. (11.) The pronouns representing the direct regimen, and those mpifiewiHlig the indirect regimen, preceded by to, expressed or un- derstood in English, are placed before the verb in French: — 1. Subject. 2. Direct Reg. 3. Vt rb. i 1. Subject. 'J. Ind. Reg. 3. Verb. les royons, Nona lenr parlous. II them see. M" totktm speak. (12.) In the imperative used affirmatively, those pionouns follow the verb : — 1. Verb. 2. Direct Rrg. , |. Verb. 2. Ind. Reg. Vojez- les. Parlez- lour. &" them. Speak to them COLLOC illON OF WORDS. — §144. 459 (13.) When two personal pronouns are used as regimens in a sen- tence, the indirect, if in the first or second person, precedes the direct: — 1. Subject. 2. Ind. Reg. 3. Direct Reg. 4. Verb. Paul nous le donne. Paul to us it gives. Paul vous le donne. Paul to you it gives. (14.) Should, however, the indirect regimen be in the third person, it is placed after the direct :— 1. Subject. 2. Direct Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 4. Verb. Paul le lui donne. Paul it to him gives. (15.) In the imperative used affirmatively, the direct regimen pre- cedes always the indirect : — 1 . Verb. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. i 1. Verb. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. Donnez- les nous. Donnez- les- lui. Give them to us. \ Give them to him. (16.) The pronoun representing a noun in the oblique cases, gen- erally preceded in English by a preposition other than to, is, in French, placed after the verb : — 1. SubJ. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Reg. i 1. SubJ. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Reg. Je parle de lui. Je parle avec lui. I speak of him. | J speak with him. (17.) To render a sentence negative, ne is placed immediately be- fore the verb, and pas, jamais, rien, &c. after it: — 1. SubJ. 2. Negat. 3. Verb. 4. NegaL Je ne vois pas. I not see not. Je ne lis jamais. / not read never. (18.) When the verb is in a compound tense, the first negative is placed before the auxiliary, and the second between that auxiliary and the participle : — 1. Subject. 2. Negat. Z.Reg. 4. Aux. 5. Negat. 6. Participle. Je ne 1' ai pas vu. I not him have not seen. Je ne leur ai jamais parle. J not to them have never Je ne leur ai rien donne. / not to them have nothing given. (19.) The pronouns used as direct regimens, and as indirect regi- 460 COLLOCATION OF WOKDS. §144. mens, are placed before the imperative, used negati>ely. They aro subject to the rules of precedence, (13.) and (14.) 1. Negat. 2. Reg. 3. Reg. 4. Verb. 5. Negat. [Rule (13.)] Ne nous lo donnez pas. Not to us it give not. [Rule (14.)] Ne le lui donnez pas. Not it to him give not. (20.) The construction of an interrogative sentence, which has e noun for its subject, differs in the two languages. The following examples will show the order of the words in French : — 1. The Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Duplicate Subj. 4. Regimen. Lo march and re^oit- il son argent! The merchant receives he his money? t'rerc ecrit- II des lettres 1 My brother writes he letters? (21.) When the sentence commences with oh, where; que, what; quel, irluit, tchich ; combien, how much, haw many ; the noun may be plaoed ■iter the rarb; — rotreamil Wim* it your fiintd? QQ0 dit v..tr. What rays your father? (22.) The construction of Interrogative sentence*, in which the Mihjcot of the verb li ■ prononn, la very simple. The pronoun is iftev tin- verb in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in fieiliponiMl tenses: — 1. BajemmJM r*. 3. Subject. A. Direct Reg. Nous onvoyrz- vous notre Ifgeol f To us snui you our money ? 1. Reg. Ind. 2. Aux. 3. Subj. 4. Part. 6. Direct Reg. Lt-ur aw/.- vous dniiiic cct argent 1 Tb them have you given that money? (23.) The order of the words in a sentence, at once negative az4 nterrogative, is as follows: — 1. 1st Sfg. 2. Reg. Prn. 3. \ .-'. 5. 2d Neg. 6. Direct Reg. Ne nous envoyes- vous pss del'srgcntl to us tend you not money? (24.) In a compound tense: — 1. 1st Neg. 2. Reg. Prn. 3. Verb. 4. Subj. 6. 2d Neg. 6. Part. 7. />«>. Reg No nous svez- vous pss envoy* do rargent? Not to us have you not sent money ? (25.) The first person singular of the present of the indicative of most verbs, wluoh have in that person only one syllable, and of s feW USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. § 145. 461 ethers having more than one syllable, but ending in s, car not admit of the construction mentioned in the 22d rule of this Section. To render the sentence interrogative, est-ce-que is prefixed to the affir- mative form of the verb :— ■ Est-ce-que vous parlez'? Is it that you speak? Do you speak? Est-ce-que je pretends lui parler 1 Is it that I pretend to speak to him ? Do I pretend to speak to him ? (26.) Every person of a tense susceptible of being conjugated in- terrogatively, may be rendered so by prefixing est-ce-que to the affirmative form : — Est-ce-que vous lisez 1 I Do you read? Est-ce-que votre frere est arrive ? | Is your brother arrived ? (27.) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject of an affirmative sentence is sometimes placed after the verb : — Tout-a-coup au jour vif et bril- lant de la zone torride, succede une nuit universelle et profonde ; a la parure d'un printemps cternel, la nudite des plus tristes hivers. Raynal. Suddenly to the vivid and brilliant before words commencing with a vowel or an h mute : — a is only elided in la, ariiele or pronoun — L'ime, the soul, instead of la ame ; l'linuiilite, humility, instead of la humilite ; je l'admire, je riionore, I admire her, I honor her, instead of je la admire, je la honure. E is elided in le, article or pronoun, in je, te, me, se, ce (meaning it, dem. prn.), de, ne, que, pareeque, quidque, puisque,jusque, quelqw:, — l'ami, the friend ; 1'hoiniiR', the man. I is only elided in tj coming before il, lie ; ils, they. U is never elided. (±) Although the words ( ,;i;^ and oitci&M commonce with a vowel, the article is not elided before them, fa furt BSt fuit. Jc Boldat n a jamais vu le feu. .lire. mmea an foil de l'hiver. VJu'allait-il faire ilai^ eattfl .tin- il l.iut. prix. II BQ lit j"tir a traven. le- | tmeiuis. : m- mi autre j.mr. II me la r beao- oonp. I »ur de BOO metier. pied da mm*. ;i \a le mieUX da :.. .•••us. OH ii.iiuri'l. ned'cefl. •iil. 11 a rendu *-a mantra poor an mor- iloiine la monnaie de . lor. i Je lui ai COmpi la \>.i ■ i ehandalla, \ . .i i i II met la eh. in ue d< rani l< - \ • ,i . ,i oomble de I i into. ooater. La ■entioelk I Ce molade n'eo rerlaad Nona «/ I* ■fore the horse. ■ nrrffn m Ust i ■me you to reproach II .he frying pan into the >■'■ you. II long arquainlo 11 Ttr. jpiainUd with m IDIOMATIC PHRASES. — § 148. 465 Cela fait dresser les cheveux. lis chantent sur une autre note. Ce vers est frappe au bon coin. Je lui ai donne le clef des champs. II ne sait ou donner de la tete. Vous vous donnez toujours raison. II a donne dans le piege. Cela lui donne de l'buineur. Je n'entre point la dedans. H entre dans vos interets. Je m'embarrasse fort peu de cela. Son amitie est a toute epreuve. Vos propos m'echauflfent les oreilles. Finissez ce badinage. Reposez-vous-en sur moi. Cette marcbandise n'a point de de- bit. II est toujours sur le qui-vive. Cette maison est a vendre au plus offrant et dernier encberisseur. De quelle part ce domestique vient- ill Doublons le pas ; il se fait tard. J'y vais de ce pas. Passe pour ceci. II faut en passer par la. Vous m'avez peint avec de beaux traits. Pour moi, je m'y perds. Peu s'en fallut qu'il ne me frappat. Dites-moi un peu ce que vous en pensez. II nous jette de la poudre aux yeux. Vous seriez bien embarrasse, si on vous prenait au mot. Ne vous en prenez pas a moi. Le malade n'en pouvait plus. Je l'ai envoye promener. Le bon homme que c'est ! Brisons la dessus. II en fut quitte pour la peur. Vous en etes quitte a bon marche. Cela n'est pas de refus. Je l'ai entrevu ce matin. Je ne m'en soucie guere. H a des affaires par dessus la tete. Qu'a cela ne tienne. A. la bonne beure. Tout fin qu'il est, il s'est trcmpe. Ce n'est pas la un trait d'ami. Treve de compliments. Je vous vois venir, monsieur. Voila comme vous etes. Tout cela va le mieux du monde. Vous n'y etes pas. Vous voila bien avance. That makes one's hair stand on end. They have changed their tone. That verse bears the right stamp.' I sent him about his business. He does not know which way to turn. You pretend to be always in the right. He fell into the snare. That puts him out of temper. That is no business of mine. He interests himself for you. I care very little about that. His friendship ■mill stand any test. Your expressions provoke my ange Put an end, to this trifling. Trust to me about this matter. This article has no sale. He is always on the voatch. That house is to be sold to the hi^Jtest bidder. Who sent that servant ? Let us mend our pace ; it is g- owing late. I am going thither this mom nt. Let this pass. We must submit to tlwse tenns. Yon have given a fine account of me. As for me, I cannot see into it. He came very near striking me. Just tell me what you think of it. He casts a mist before our eyes. You would be at a great loss, if vou were taken at your word. Do not blame me about this. The patient was quite exhausted. I told him to mind his business. Wliat a simple man he is ! No more of this. He escaped, though frightened. You came off c/ieaply. That is not to be reftcsed. I had a glimpse of him this morning. I care but little about it. He is over head and ears in business. That shall not make us disagree. Well and good. Cunning as he is, he made a mistake. Tliat is not acting like a friend. No more compliments. I see what you are about, sir. That is the loay with you. All goes on as well as possible. That is not it. You are much the better for it. 0* READING LESSONS. I.— FABLES. l. LE ciiF-NT. H LI BYOQMOIEH. Uk cli£nc t'tait plant.- prea .run aycomore. Le dernier poussadea 19. B.] feaQlea dea le commencement da printemps, ct m6- I lensibUite tin [l» 5. ].] premier. Yi>i>in, dit (din, iV.) le trop Bar l<-^ careeaea de cbiqae zephyr incona- fr-iiii peal enir. Poor moi, je m suis de poaeeer dea feailles; j'attandi que la oha> leur soit mte. II avail raisoa: [L.8. l.] am gelee dcV traisit ' ' - naieaantea [I* 18.] do syeomore. Efa l>i - [j 184, (-. | et coupes en milk moreeaex tout : quand je suis vieQle, et que je ne lui donne plus de lair, lMngral m'aeeomme ami pitie; ma peas memo n'ost p de aon ingratitude ; il la tanne et en But deabottea at dee sou- li.r>. !)-• I... Je eoneraa que l'homme eal le mi aymbole de l'ingra- titade. Adieu \ j'ai dit ee que je penae, L'homme, tout etonne, dit aa reptile: je ne croie paa ee quo ootte ue a dit ; elle :i per.lu I'eepril : rapportona-uoua en a la deeU le eet arbro . D e tout mon eosur. — L'arbre etant pris pour juge, ee tut bieo pia encore. — Je meta fhomme a I'abri [1*08. I. -. de la eheleur, et de la pluie. Bn eta, il troure aoui bwoehea one embre agieeble; je produia dea Boon et de i'mit ; ee* .,t, aprea mil in mananl me (ait tomber a coups de heebe i il eoupe toutee mea branch a, en fait da feu, el reaerve mon planebee. L'homme ae voyant ainej eee> vaioea :je suis Uea eot, dit-il. d'ecouter L 21. %] one radotei un jaeeur. AuaaiUM il inula La e i pieda el l\ ta La plus fed ■ kOBJoura reiaoa, il opprim< le plua bible. La t'..rce et le nenetnn aont aourdea i le troii de la juatic< et de la v.'ritc. Pf.ruin. a u bo n etant mort, aon ombre deaeendit dans la *om neaeede Pluton, oo. elle < etouTnerpanaiieetfraiiau, Pluton voulait [{ 119.] la renvoyer dans le corpa d'un ana peaeoJ ot atupide, pow lui i I -• 1 aoupleaae, aa viva.it.', et aa ma - .lie tit taut de tours plaiaanta el badina, r la quelque re*- eainblanee area los homi &tuA sin R« READING LESSONS. 469 je faisaia des gestes tomme eux ; et, etant perroquet, je parlerai avec eux dans les plus agreables conversations. A peine l'ombre du singe fut introduite dans ce nouveau metier, qu'une vieille femme causeuse l'acheta. II fit (faire, 4. ir.) ses de- liaes; elle le mit dans une belle [L. 13. 6.] cage. II faisait bonne chere, et discourait toute la journee avec la vieille radoteuse, qui ne parlait pas plus sensement que lui. II joignit (joindre, 4. ir.) a son nouveau talent d'etourdir tout le monde je ne sais (savoir, 3. ir.) quoi de son ancienne profession. II remuait sa tete ridiculement, il fai- sait craquer son bee, il agitait ses ailes de cent facons, et faisait de ses pattes plusieurs tours qui sentaient encore les grimaces de Fago- tin. La vieille prenait a toute heure ses lunettes pour l'admirer ; elle etait bien fachee d'etre un peu sourde, et de perdre quelquefois des paroles de son perroquet, auquel elle trouvait plus d'esprit qu'a per. sonne. Ce perroquet gate, devint bavard, importun, et fou. II se tourmenta si fort dans sa cage, et but (boire, 4. ir.) tant de vin avec la vieille, qu'il en mourut. Le voila revenu devant Pluton, qui voulut (vouloir, 3. ir.) cette fois le faire passer dans le corps d'un poisson. Mais il fit (faire, 4. ir.) encore une farce devant le roi des ombres; et les princes ne resistent guere [L. 17. 5.] aux demandes des mauvais plaisants qui les flattent. Pluton accorda done a. celui-ci, qu'il irait (atter, 1. ir.) dans le corps d'un homme; mais comme le dieu eut honte [L. 21, (4.)] de l'envoyer dans le corps d'un homme sage et vertueux, il le destina au corps d'un harangueur ennuyeux et importun, qui mentait, qui se vantait sans cesse, qui faisait des gestes ridicules, qui se moquait de tout le monde, qui interrompait toutes les conversations les plus polies et les plus solides, pour dire rien, ou les sottises les plus gros- sieres. Mercure qui le reconnut [L. 51.] dans ce nouvel etat, lui dit en riant. — Ho ! ho ! je te reeonnais ; tu n'es qu'un compose du singe et du perroquet que j'ai vus [L. 42. 7.] autrefois. Qui [§ 39, (5.)] t'6terait tes gestes et tes paroles apprises par coeur sans jugement, ne laisserait rien de toi. D'un joli singe et d'un bon perroquet o nVn fait qu'un sot homme. Fenelon. 4Y0 READING LESSONS. H.— APOLOGUES ET ALLEGORIES. 6. LE BERGER ET LE TROUPEAU. Quand * ous voyez. quelquefoia an nombreux troupeau qui, repandu Bur une colline vers le d, olin d'un bean jour, patt (jmitre. 4. ■>.) rsnqoiUemenl le tfaym et le Berpolet, on qui bronte dans use prairie urn- harbe menu.- et t.-ndre qui I 6chapp6 ft la fiuw du moissonnour, •■ ntit. rM debout auprea de sea brebia; il no lea ponl pae de vnr. il lee suit (aware, 4 ir.) il lea conduit, il lee [L 87. 7.] ohaage de paturage : si ellea ae diapereent, il leeraaeemblej n mi loop avide paratt, il lache bod chien qui le me1 en fttite; il lee nourrit [L 87.] il Irs defend : I'aurore le brouve deja en pieina oanv I n, »e retire qu'avec le BoleiL Qnela [{ 30, (10.)] aoinel quelle servitude! Quelle condition voua paratt la plus debeieuaeel la plua libre, on dn berger, on dee brebia 1 fa m eat-D (ail pour le berger, on le berger pour le troupeau 1 Image naive [L 18. •'».; dea peuplea, el dn prince qui lea gov, ne, La BaOTtBS. I LEfl PABVBNl Zteobie.qui agitenl votre empire, nl la guerre qua , m .-nt eontre une nation puiaaante, depnii la mort iminnent rien de votre magnincenee: roua . aatrecontree leariveade I'EuphnU . r on anperbe edifice : I'air y eal aain el tempera, la artu- , re I'ombrage dn eotA du qui habitenl quelquefoli la tern-, n'y ohoiatr nne p i belle demeure : la campagne antonr, eat - qui laillenl e1 quicoupent, qaj rout ' qui roulenl on qui charrient l .:t,an. rairain el le porphyre ; lee gruea el lea machn u I'air, et fonl eeperer a ceux qui voyaged vera !' \ral.ie, laia acheve, et dans settt porter, avanl de Cbabiter, voua et les rien, granda n . Pot el ti>u1 1'ari dea plua excellent ouvriera; que lea Lxig de votre ni< cle dcploient [{ V.\ (2.)] toute lev ,r voa lambris: tr rdina,dont 1'enchantemenl soil tel, qu'ils ne paraiasent paa fait* de la main dea hommea. I • votre Industrie READING LESSONS. 4Vl sur cet ouvrage incomparable ; et, apres que vous y aurez [L. 61. 5.] mis, Zenobie, la derniere main, quelqu'un de ces patres qui habitent les sables voisins de Palmyre, devenu riche par les peages de vos ri- vieres, achetera [§ 49, (5.)] un jour a deniers comptants cette royale maison, pour l'embellir et la rendre plus digne de lui et de sa for- tune. La Bruyere. 3. LE PALAIS DE LA RENOMMEE. Aux extremites du monde, sous le pole, dont [L. 31. 8.] Pintrepide C'Cok mesura la circonference a travers les vents et les temples ; au milieu desterres australes qu'une barriere de glace derobe a la curio- site des hommes, s'eleve [§ 49, (6.)] une montagne qui surpasse en hauteur les sommets les plus eleves des Andes dans le Nouveau- Monde, ou du Thibet dans l'antique Asie. Sur cette montagne est bati un palais, ouvrage des puissances in- fernales. Ce palais a mille portiques d'airain ; les moindres bruits viennent (yenir. 2. ir.) frapper les domes de cet edifice, dont le silence n'a jamais franchi le seuil. Au centre du monument est une voute tournee en spirale comme une conque, et faite de sorte que tous les sons qui penetrent dans le palais, y aboutissent ; mais, par un effet du genie de Parchitecte des mensonges, la plupart de ces sons se trouvent [L. 36. 2.] fausse- ment reproduits; souvent une legere rumeur s'enfle et gronde en entrant par la voie preparee aux eclats du tonnerre, tandis que les roulements de la foudre expirent en passant par les routes sinueuses [L. 13. 5.] destinees aux faibles bruits. C'est la que, l'oreille placee a l'ouverture de cet immense echo, est assis sur un trone retentissant, un demon, la renommee. Cette puissante fille de Satan et de l'orgueil, naquit (nailre, 4. ir.) autrefois pour annoncer le mal. Avant le jour ou Lucifer leva l'etendard contre le Tout-Puissant, la renommee etait inconnue. Si un mondo venait a s'animer ou a s'eteindre ; si l'Eternel avait tire un univers du neant, ou replonge un de ses ouvrages dans le chaos ; s'il avait jete un soleil dans l'espace, cree un nouvel ordre de seraphins, essaye [5 49, 2.] la bonte d'une lumiere, toutes ces choses etaient aussitot connues [L. 42. 6.] dans le ciel par un sentiment intime d'admiration et d'amour, par le chant mysterieux de la celeste Jerusalem. Mais, apres la rebellion des mauvais anges, la renommee usurpa la place de cette intention divine. Bientot, precipitee [5 06, (3.)] aux enters, ce[L.81. 1.] fut elle qui publia dans l'abyme la naissance de notre globe, et qui porta l'ennomi de Dieu a tenter k chute de l'homme. 472 READING LESSONS. Elle vint sur la terre avec la mort, et des ce moment elle e'tablit sa demeure sur la montagne, ou elle entend et repete confusement ce qui se passe Mir la tern, iu enters, et dans !es cieux. CHATEAUBRIAND. 4.-LACADKMIK BILENC1EUSE OU LES EMBLEMES. 11 y avail [! 61, 'J. ] .'i Amadan nne e.'li'bre academic, dont le premiei tatut etait 00000 (cMKCVOtr, 3.) 60 CSS termes : hn acad< miciena penseront beaucoup, icrinml /» u, rl w [L. 19. 2.] parhront que le moins !. (4.)] I'appslait f \ . et il nV'tait point ■ vrai savant <[iii n'sftl l'ambition d'y i-tre admis. item* .) vnquaif DM | II part au-situt ; il arrive a -.• pr lentant a la ports de la aalle <"'i lea acadiiniciens lea, il prie riiuissi.-r lie remettre an president ce billet . /.ib demands bnmblement la place Tacante. I/huN-iei litta BnrJs-ehamp de la ootnmisaion ; maia le dootsnr et son bil- let arri\.i ■ • ' 119.] trnp tard. la place •'•tait deja rrinj)lie. Dtre-tsmps; elle avait re<;n OH pen -prit. iit | I dmiration de la eour, et elle m royaft (voir, 3. t>.) reds .'. Is doetsnr Zsb, le fleaa dea bavarda, une U bien (aits, si bill) meublec ! Le pn uident charge d'annonen an 8:irm.'- et reconnaissant son general, il sWrie : Je suis perdu! — Ras- sure toi, lui dit Bonaparte avec douceur, aprea tant de fatigues, U pout < tre pemia ;i U brave kel que toi de sueeomber au sommeil mail une autre foil ehoiau niieux ton temps. 3. BIKNF .USANCE. Le Sim de Ifontmorenei, qui fat deca p i t e a Toulouse, aimait a re- pandre dea bienfaita, Ce aeigneor, voyageant [.} 49, (l.)] en Lan- rcnt dam on champ, qnatre laboorenn qui dtnunri I PombfC *l*un Iniisson. ApprOOhona DOM de OM bonnes gens, dit-il a qui le siiivaicnt, et «!<> ni.u ul < > ns leur s'ils se eroient heureux. repondirent, qm bornant lent fetiche' i> nertainea oonunoditea de l-ur condition, que Dim Iciir a\ail donnr.-, { \,. 1J. 7. | il- iu- -.ui- liailaieiit rien dlU le inonde. I ,e quatrieine avoiia l'ranehenient «;u'une ehoaa manqnait a aon bonhenr : e'etait da ponvoir aoqnerif a heritage qm lient — Et si tu I'araia, | L Hi If, de Ifontmorenei, aeraia-ta content? — Autant (jue je li- | L 4& ). .v ] poia etre, r< pondil le payaan. — Combkai vaut- -, 3. ir.) il ? demanda to due — Deux milla francs, ropon di t le i. — Qn'on [ L. 88.] les lui (lunue. reprit le due, et qu'il soit dit que j'ni rendu un lioinine lieunux 60 ma vie. Lk Vassor. iv.— maximks i;t REFLEXIONS. i.l Li religion donne a la rerta les plna doni -. n vice [ 78, (3.)] jnatea alarmea, et an vrai repontir les plus m eonaolationa ; maia elle tache anrtont d*inapirer aux hommea de l'amour ('; 78, fS).],de la doneenr, et de b prtff pour lea MnNTESQUIEU. t Tiiin extraot and aarera] <>f the following, fornlsb excellcnl illustra- te of the article. READING LESSONS. 4^5 2. Aimez et observez la religion, le reste nseurt, elle ne meurt ja- maio. Fenelon. 3. Les vertus nees de la religion, se cachent dans la religion meme. Lacretellk. 4. La religion est encore plus necessaire a ceux qui commandent, qu'a. ceux qui obeiesent. Bossuet. 5. Prier ensemble, dans quelque langue, dans quelque rite que ce soit, c'est la plus touchante fraternite d'esperance et de sympathie que les hommes puissent contracter sur cette terre. Mme. de Stael. 6. La conscience est un juge plac6 dans 1'interieur de notre etre. Segur. 7. La conscience est la voix de 1'ame, les passions sont la voix du corps. J. J. Rousseau. 8. La vertu obscure est souvent meprisee, parceque rien ne la re- leve a. nos yeux. - Massillon. 9. La vertu est un eftbrt fait sur nous-memes, pour le bien d'au- trui, dans l'intention de plaire a Dieu seul. Bernardin de St. Pierre. 10. II y a une amitie chretienne que la philosophie humaine ne comprend guere; c'est l'association de deux ames qui mettent en commun leur foi et leurs prieres, et s'elevent ensemble vers Dieu. Laurentie. 11. La modestie est au merite, ce que les ombres sont dans un tableau ; elle lui donne de la force et du relief. La Bruyere. 12. La verite n'a jamais besoin de l'erreur, et les ombres n'ajoutent rien a la lumiere. Lamartine. 13. On n'est pas digne d'aimer la verite, quand on peut aimer quelque chose plus qu'elle. MASsn-LON. 14. La flatterie est une fausse monnaie qui n'a de cours que par notre vanite. La Rochefoucauld. 15. On ne triompbe de la calomnie qu'en la dedaignant. Mme. de Maintenon. 16. Ce n'est que pour l'innocence, que la solitude peut avoir des charmes. Leczinska. 17. Les conseils agreables sont rarement des conseils utiies- Massillon. 18. Ceux qui donnent des conseils sans les accompagner d'exem- ples, ressemblent a ces poteaux de la campagne, qui indiquent lea ihemins sans les parcourir. Rivakol. 476 READING LESSOKB. V.— POESIE. HYMNE DE L'ENFANT A SON RfiVEIL. O Pere qu'adore mon pere ! Toi qu'on ne nomme qu'a genoux, Toi dont le nom terrible et doux Fait courber le front de ma mere ; On dit que ce brillant soleil N'est qu'un jouet de ta puissance, Que sous tes pieds il se balance Comme une larape do vermeil. On dit que c'c9t toi qui Ada naitre Lea pt- tits oiseaux dam Im rhHmp*, Et qui donnes auv prtits enfanta Une ftme aus.-i pour to eonnaftre. On dit que 0*6*1 tui lt ui j.ro.luis Lea flcurs font le jiidJn *o pare ; Et <)ue MM t « » i , t.Mijour- avare, Le verger n'aurait poinl dfl fruits. Aux dons que ta bonAf mesure, Tout l'tinncrs i-t coiivir ; N" til I ul. lie'- A ce lV-tin (If la nature. L'agncau broute le Berpolet ; La chrvre s'attaclie an eytiae ; I.i inouclie, an bord du vase, putM Les bland M '•• mon lait* I/aloiiette a la (jraine UBI Que lalflM BDTOleV le flaneur, Le passereau suit le v.mneur, Et 1'eiifant s'.ittache ;\ sa mere. Et, pour obtenir ehaque don Que ehaque jour tu fa is »' c ore, A miili. le soir, .. I'rarora, Que faut-il .' — prononoer ton nom. READING LESSONS. 477 O Dieu, ma bouche balbutie, Ce nom, des anges redoute, Un enfant meme est ecoute Dans ie chceur qui te glorifie ! Ah f puisqu'il entend de si loin Les vo3ux que notre bouche adressa , Je veux lui demander sans cesse Ce dont les autres ont besoin. Mon Dieu ! donne l'onde aux fontames Donne la plume aux passereaux, Et la laine aux petits agneaux, fit l'ombre et la rosee aux plaines. Donne aux malades la sante Au mendiant Je pain qu'il pleure, A l'orphelin une demeure, Au prisonnier la liberte. Donne une famille nombreuse Au pere qui craint le Seigneur, Donne a* moi sagesse et bonheur Pour que ma mere soit heureuse. Lamartine. 2. LA FEUILLE. De ta tige detachee Pauvre feuille dessechee, Oil vas tu ? — Je n'en sais rien. L'orage a brise le chene Qui seul etait mon soutien. - De son inconstante haleine Le zephyr ou l'aquilon, Depuis ce jour me promene De la foret a la plaine, De la montagne au vallon. Je vais ou le vent me mene, Sans me plaindre ou m'effrayer, Je vais ou va toute chose, Ou va la feuille de rose Et la feuille de laurier. Arnault * The d in this line is a poetical license. 478 READING LESSONS. 8. LE MONTAGNARD fiMIGRfi. Combien j'ai douce souvcnance Du joli lieu de ma naissance ! Ma soeur, qu'ils etaient beaux cos jour* L}e France ! O mon pays, sois mes amours ! To uj ours. Te souvient-il que notre mere Au foyer ile notre chaumiere Nous pressait sur son scin joyeux, Ma ill.' re ! Et nous baisions ses blonds cheveu Tous deux. Ma soMir, te souvirnt-il encoro Du chateau que baignait la Dore Et de oettfl tant vieille tour Du Hove, Oil l'airain sonnait le rctour Du jour .' - iviiMit-il du lac tranquille Qu'etiK-urait l'hirondrlle agile, Du VVOt qui courbait le roseau Mobile, VA du soldi eoiu-liant, sur l'eau, Si beau ? • >uvicnt-il de cette amie, Douce compagne de ma Du . -ueillant la fleur Jolic, Helens appojatt sur mon iour Son cuur. Oh! qui me rendra m<»n !!• Kne, Et la montagne et le grand chene ? Leur souvenir fait tous les jours Ma peine : Mon pays sera mes amour* Toujours. CHATKAUBMura READING LESS OH 8. 470 4. STANCES. Et j'ai dit dans mon cceur ; que faire de la vie ? Irai-je encor, suivant ceux qui m'ont devance, Comme l'agneau qui passe ou sa mere a passe, Imiter des mortels, 1'immortelle folie ? L un cherche sur les mers les tresors de Memnon Et la vague engloutit ses voeux et son navire ; Dans le sein de la gloire ou son genie aspire, L'autre meurt, enivre par l'echo d'un vain nom. Avec nos passions, formant sa vaste trame, Celui-la fonde un trdne, et monte pour tomber ; Dans des pieges plus doux aimant a succomber, Celui-ci lit son sort dans les yeux d'une femme. Le paresseux s'endort dans les bras de la faim ; Le laboureur conduit sa fertile charrue ; Le savant pense et lit ; le guerrier frappe et tue ; Le mendiant s'assied sur le bord du chemin. Ou vont-ils cependant ? — lis vont ou va la feuille Que chasse devant lui le souffle des hivers. Ainsi vont se fletrir dans leurs travaux divers Ces generations que le temps seme et cueille. lis luttaient contre lui, mais le temps a vaincu; Comme un fleuve engloutit le sable de ses rives, Je l'ai vu devorer leurs ombres fugitives. Us sont nes, ils sont morts : Seigneur, ont-ils vecu ! Pour moi, je chanterai le maitre que j'adore, Dans le bruit des cites, dans la paix des deserts, Couche sur le rivage, ou flottant sur les mers, Au deelin du soleil, au lever de l'aurore. La terre m'a crie : Qui done est le Seigneur ? — Celui dont I'ame immense est partout repandue, Celui dont un seul pas mesure Petendue, Celui dont le soleil emprunte sa splendeur; Celui qui du neant a tire la matiere, Celui qui sur le vide a fonde l'univers, 480 READING LESSON 8. Celui qui sans rivage a renfernie les mere, Celui qui d'un regard a lance la lumiere ; Celui qui ne connait ni jour, ni lcndemain, Celui qui de tout temps de soi-meme s'enfante, Qui vit duns l'avenir eomme -a l'heure present©, Et rappelle les temps Oehappes de sa main. Cest lui, c'est le Seigneur ! Que ma langue rediae Les cent noms de sa gloire aux enfants des morsels! Comme la harpe 4*OI pendue I Ml autels, Je chanterai pour lui, Juqu'i M qu'il me brise! . .. L MiRiwm. 6. LAFAYETTE EN AMfcRIQUE HftpobUeaina, quel eortege ■'avium ? — Un vieux gnerrier debarqne parmJ nous. 1 d'un roi vmis jurer 1'alliauce .' — II a vrndes L'opprobrv d Tr.iiil.l. ■/. ... \..s projttl parricide* Vi.ut eafia raetvoir law pais. Ti.ut eat aoldal pow v.. us couibattra liatoay an prodoil da Bonn Contr.- rot uittre. Aux Francais; en giierrit-rs magnaniux* 1'ortez on r .ups : Kpargaai laaj Ifiataa riillmm A regret a'annant contre vous ; — Mais lea oompUoaa :ui oil 1, je rends grAce a genon*. Jc I'tiiiliras-c, A tern- clu'-no ! Dieu ! <;u'un 6tiU doit soufirir ! lloi, dr-nrmai-, }>• puis mourir. Salut I ma pal/io ! Ber ajiueh VOCABULARY FOR THE READING LESSONS. ABBREVIATIONS. adj. adjective. adj. v. verbal adjective. adv. adverb. art. article. conj. conjunction. f. feminine gender. ind. p present of indicative. int. interjection. m. masculine gender. n. noun. p. d. past definite. S. pre. prn. v. a. participle, plural, preposition, pronoun, active verb. v. a. & n. active and neuter verb, v. aux. auxiliary verb, v. unip. unipersonal verb, v. ir. or ir. irregular verb, v. n. neuter verb, v. r. reflective verb. The numbers after the verbs indicate the conjugation. A-AD. A, a {with a grave accent), pre. at or to. Abondance, n. f. abundance, plenty. Aboutir, v. n. 2. to end in, to come to. Abreuver, v. a. 1. to water, to Jill. Abyme, n. m. abyss, depth. Abri, n. m. shelter. Academicien, n. m. Academician. Academie, n. f. academy. Accent, n. m. accent, pi. voice. Acclamation, n. f. acclamation. Accompagner, v. a. 1. w accompany. Accorder, v. a. 1. to grant, (s') v. r. to agree. Accourir, v. n. ir. 2. to run, to has- ten to. Accueillir, v. a. ir. 2. to welcome. Acheter, v. a. 1. to buy. Achever, v. a. 1. to achieve, com- plete. Acquerir, v. a. ir. 2. to acquire. Acquitter (s'), v. r. to acquit one's self of, to discharge. Adieu, int. & n. m. adieu, farewell, leave. Admettre, v. a. ir. 4. to admit. Admiration, n. f. admiration. Admirer, v. a. 1. to admire. Adopter, v. a. 1. to adopt. Adorer, v. a. 1. to adore. ?, v. a. 1. to address, (»') ref. to apply. Affectation, n. f. affectation. Afflige, p. & adj. v. grieved, af- flicted. Agacer, v. a. to entice, to tease. Agile, adj. nimble-, light. Agiter, v. a. to agitate. Agneau, n. m. lamb. Ah ! int. Ah. Aigle, n. m. eagle. Aile, n. f. wing. Aimer, v. a. 1. to love, to like. Ainsi, adv. thus, so. Air, n. m. air. Airain, n. m. brass. Aisement, adv. easily. Ajouter, v. a. 1. to add. Alarm, n. f. alarm. Allegorie, n. f. allegory. Aller, v. n. ir. 1. (ind. p. je vais,} to go. Alliance, n. f. alliance. Allumer, v. a. 1. to light, kindle. Alouette, n. f. lark. Ambassadeur, n. m. ambassador. Ambition, n. f. ambition. Ame, n. f. soul. Amer, e, adj. bitter. Amertume, n. f. bitterness, Ami, e, n. m. &. f. friend. 486 AU-BU Amour, n. m. lave. An, n. m. anne-e, f. year. Ancien, m. adj. ancient, old. Ange, n. m. angel. Animal, (pi. aux,) n. m. animal. Aniiner, v. a. 1. to animate, to excite. Ainu nicer, v. a. 1. to announce. Antique, adj. ancient, antique. A peine, adv. scarcely, hardly. •■■ pcxivc. Apologue, n. m. apologue. Appetence, n. f. appearance. Apparleiiir. v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. j'ap- pertiene), /" belong. Appeler. v. a. 1. to call. Ire, v. a. 4. (p. appris), to learn. .it, v. a. 1. to bring near, (»') v. r. to approach. Appnyi hav, pre. afler. Aqnllon, n. m. north i, I tree. Architects, n. m. architect. Aimer, r. a. l. to ar»i,(»') v. r. to am I self. Arraeher. v. a. 1. to tear. Arriver, v. n. 1. to arri'rc. i:l. a//. D. m. article. n. m. artifice, cunning, v. n. 1. to ajpt'/r. r v. a. 1 to assemble. r. ir. .'}. (tnd. p. je ma-isieda, p. aasu), to jii /tojr/i. Association, n. f. association, com- pany. A&sommer, t. a. 1 . to strike dawn, to i. ir. 4. (p. d. jat- 'ach. to Ait. •rait, to expect. % "ieved. Attentif. ve. adj Attrajwr, v. a. 1. to catch. Au. art. at, or to the. AnjoonThni, adv. to-day. Auparavant. adv. before. ■ id?, near. Anrote, n. f. ennm, <* Au^si r,,|ij. A adv. as so, also. It, adv. immediately. Autre ' al. Autant. adv. as much, as many Antel, n. ni. altar. Anteur, n. m. author. Autour, pre. & adv. round, around* Autre, adj. other. Autrefois, adv. formerly. Autrui, prn. other, others. Avancer (s') F v. r. 1. to advance, approach. Avant, pre. before. Avare. n. & adj. miser, avaricious. Avec. pre. with. Avenir, n. m.futwe. Aveugle. adj.' blind. A vide adj. anxious, eager. Aviser (a ') v. r. 1. to think, to talc* into ours it Avoir, v. aux. & a. ir. (p. d. j'ena), v. a. 1. to confess. B. Harlin. e. a<^j. playful. v u 1. to bathe. IUiillon. s. in ■■> ias>. v. u 1. to Balbatier, v. a. & n. 1. to stammer. Berqne, n. f. bark, boat. Barnere, n r llataille. a f. battle. n. n. m. battalion. Bitir. v. a 2. to build. . a ir 4. (n. battu,) to beat Baodet, n. in. donkey. ft adj. talkative, prat- • 1 f belle, adj. fine, hand- some. :■■ adv. much, many. ii. f beauty. Beo, ii m. taut. rlt, n. ni. tn'/. B6nir, v. a. 2. to Ma*. Berger, n. m. shepherd. n in n/r «»'/, ictte. 1 ' 1 1 I fl-U-, //' request. Demean ->Mng. I', in.. ii n in. drmnn. MM, means. I 'lay. Depute, pre. ft I 1. f<>
  • desctnd, to risk, desirt. It, hence fortk. ,i. 1. "/. rf»e «f, «• /. cLJe ]). j":' '. to add. adj. pretty. Joii-t, n. in. pUtijIhiiti.- Joor, ii. i Journ o o, a f <'«.•;/. ■'.///'.< m>ri. J C mrnt. decision. . promise. ' tar as. ■ Justice, ii. (.justice. La, 1'. ar i7. ■ ' Lobounur. n m. tmm Lm. ii. i 1. (o l-Mise h. I ■ !k. j-^t. Lamp t , to send forth language. ■ • tan. vi/rmw. plU Mow. Lear, adj. pL Li'iir i V, (t») v. r. to ■ arur. Lever, n. m. t iling . Liberte. n. f. liberty, freedom. Libre. adj. //re. Lieu, n. in. place, spot. Li. hi. n. in. //"/i. Liqueur, n. f. liquor, liquid. Livre, n. in. i Loi, n. f. ///;:, /<>/»»• U. LOOP, 11. In Lugubre, adj. mournful, sad. I.ui. prn. to wak '<» A contend tcdh, U It ime adj. wqgnwi i iwg m ■ v, a ir. 2. (ind. p. jo p d j.- mnlnttni), /* ■ M.il n in I // adv. I ./. 5/Vrlr. i ificd. ■ i |.<0 7iianife.fi, totes, L. to nte, fc>/atf, li f. 7/1// r A'. ■ tUaise kymn. Mo, prn iw, '" hm. n. in. beggar. ME-MY. 493 Mener, v. a. to lead, to take. Mensonge, n. m. falsehood. Mentir, v. n. ir. 2. to lie, to tell Menu, e, adj. small, short. Mepris, n. m. cmtempt. Mepriser, v. a. 1. to despise. Mer. n. f. sea. Mercenaire, adj. mercenary, Mere, n. f. mother. Merite, n. m. merit. Meriter, v. a. 1. to merit, to Mes, adj. pos. pi. my. Mesurer, v. a. 1. to measure. Metier, n. m. trade, occupation. Mettre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je mets, p. d. je mis, p. mis), to put, to set. Meubler, v. a. 1. to furnish. Midi, n. m, south, noon. Mignon, ne, adj. delicate, pretty. Milieu, n. m. middle. Mille, adj. num. thousand. Ministre, n. m. minister. Mobile, adj. movable, light. Modeste, adj. modest. Moeurs, n. f. pi. morals, manners. Moi, prn. me. Moindre, adj. lesser, less. Moins, adv. less, (au) at least. Mois, n. m. month. Moissonneur, n. m. harvest-man, reaper. Moment, n. m. moment. Monde, n. m. world, people, (tout le) every body. Monnaie, n. f. money, change. Monstre, n. m. monster. Montagnard, n. m. mountaineer. Montagne, n. f. mountain. Monter, v. a. & n. 1. to ascend, to mount. Montrer, v. a. 1. to show, to point out. Monument, n. m. monument. Moquer (se), v. r. 1. to laugh at, to mock. Morceau, n. m. piece, morsel. Mort, n. f. death, n. m. dead. Mosquee, n. f. mosque. Mot, n. m. word. Mouche, n. tfiy. Mourir, v. n. ir. 2. to die. Mouton, c. m. sheep. Mugir, v. n. 2. to roar. Mysterieux, adj. mysterious. N. Naif, ve, adj. arilesi unaffected, simple, innocent. Naissance, n. f. birth. Naissant, e, adj. v. rising, growing. Naitre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je nais, p. d. je naquis, p, ne), to be bom Nation, n. f. nation. Navire, n. m. ship, vessel. Ne, adv. not. Ne, p. born. Ne — pas, adv. not. Ne — que, adv. only, but. Neant, n. m. nothingness. Ni, conj. nor, neither. Nocturne, adj. nocturnal, nightly. Noisette, n. f. hazel-nut. Nombre, n. m. number. Nommer, v. a. 1. to name, to call. Non, adv. no. Nourrir, v. a. 2. to feed, to nourish. Nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, adj. new. Nouvelle, n. f. news. O. Obeir, v. n. 2. to obey. Obscur, e, adj. dark, obscure. Observer, v. a. 1. to observe, to take notice of. Obtenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. j'ob- tiens, p. d. j'obtins), to obtain. Odieux, se, adj. odious, Oeil, n. m. (pi. yeux), eyes. Oiseau, n. m. bird. Ombrage, n. m. shade. Ombrager, v. a. 1. to shade, to shelter. Ombre, n. f. shade, shadow. On, prn. indefinite, one, they, we, people ; on dit, it is said (one says). Onde, n. f. wave, water. Opprime, adj. v. oppressed. Opprobre, n. m. opprobrium, shame Opulent, e, adj. rich, loealthy. Or, n. m. gold. Orage, n. m. storm. Ordinairement, adv. commonly. Ordre, n. m. order. Oreille, n. f. ear. Orgueil, n. m. pride. Orphelin, e. n. m. & f. orphan. Oter, v. a. 1. to take away, to de- prive of, 494 PK-PO. On, conj. or. Ou. adv. where, in which, wherein Oublier, v. a. 1. to forget, to ncglca. Outrage, n. m. outrage, offence, shame. Ouverture. n. f. op> Ouvrage. n. m. work. Ouvrier. n. m. icorkman. r:iitrc. v. a. A n. 4. to graze. I'ai.v n. {.peace. ;i. m. palace. e. by. ir. 1. (p. paru), to op- pear. : to travel over, ■■ P.in-il. 1<\ iulj '■pial, similar. Parer (so I. v. r. 1. to adorn one's Paresacux, se, adj. idle, lazy, indo- v. n. 1. to speak. Panni. pie, among, amongst . parricidal. Parti ii m. jMirt, party, resolution. Partir v. n. ir . >trt. I u i noun), Uf$t Pa», adr. not, n. m. step, pace. !■' pass. ■ Passion, n. f. passion. rdsman, shepherd, ntry, native country. I c, pasturage, ntry. trynan. a. m toll. I I describe. 1' P P I a lion. I a 1. to penetrate. J I a*. Pere, n. m. father. Perflde, adj. perfidious, treacherous. Perdre, v. a. 4. ?<> &w. Permettre, v. a. ir. 4. to permit, ai Perroquct, n. m. parrot. Personno. prn. ind. nobody. IYrvers. adj. jvrvcrse. Petit, e, adj. iMft Huh IVsant adj. v Pen, adv. Ktffc, People, n. bdl people. Penpler, v. a. 1. to people. Phalange, n. m. phalanx. Philosophic, n. f. philosophy. Phrase, n. f. rhrase, sentence. ii. £ piaet. Pled, ii d ii. in. //77/>, .•mrtrr. • ■•■. tant pis, jo wu^i ti« Place, n Plafond, n. in. i beach. Platndre (ee), v. r. ir. (ind. p. je me I je me plaignis), to I ; <1. je plus, p. <>ker. v. a'. Si, n. 1. to weep, to Plier, v. bend. P Plomi /vn. Plnparl wrf, mo*. 'i/, adr. wo<. ii. n\ fish. shed. tst. Porphyre n. m. pmykyrf. Porter '-y, toktmr. Portique, d. in i 1 to lot/, to set, to pUat : sstss. I pott. l'ciir, p* PO-QTJ. QCT-RE. 495 Pousser, T.aU push, to hasten. Pouvoir, v. n. ir. (ind. p. je puis, p. d. je pus, p. pu), to be able. Prairie, n. f. meadow. Prealablement, adv. previously. Precipiter, v. a. 1. to hasten, precipi- tate. Preferer, v. a. 1. to prefer. Preliminaire, n. & ^.preliminary. Premier, e, adj. first. Prendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je pris, p. pris), to take, (s'y) ref. to go about it, to open the matter. Preparer, v. a. 1. to prepare. Pies de, pre. near, nearly. President, n. m. president. Presence, n. f. presence. Present, n. m. present. Presenter (se), v. r. 1. to pi-esent one's self. Presque, adv. almost. Presser, v. a. & r. (se) to hasten, to press. Pret, e, adj. ready, prepared. Prier, v. a. & n. 1. to pray, to entreat. Priere, n. f. prayer. Prince, n. m. pri.xe. Printemps, n. m. spring. Prisonnier, n. m. prisoner. Prix, n. m. price, prize. Produire, v. a. ir. 4". to produce. Proferer, v. a. 1. to utter, to speak. Profession, n. f. profession. Projet, n. m. project. Promener, v. a. 1. to carry about. Prononcer, v. a. 1. to pronounce. Protestation, n. f. protest, protesta- tion. Province, n. f. province, district. Publier, v. a. 1. to publish. Puis, adv. then. Puiser, v. a. 1. to dip, to find. Puisque, conj. since. Puissance, n. f. power. Puissanfc^e_ adj. powerful. Quand, adv. when. Quatre, adj. num. four. Qu', que, conj. that, prn. which, whom. Quel. adj. what, which. Quelque, adj. some, adv. however. Quelque chose, n. m. something. Quelquefois, adv. Qui, prn. who, which. Quoi, prn. which, what. Quoi ! int. what ! Quoique, conj. although, though. R. Radoteur, se, n. m. & f. dotard. Raison, n. f. reason, right. Ramasser, V. a. 1. to pick up, to coU led. Rameau, n. m. branch. Rappeler, v. a. 1. to recall, to re- mind, (se) v. r. to remember, to recollect. Rapporter, v. a. 1. to bring back, to relate. Rapprocher, v. a. 1. to bring near or together. Rarement, adv. rarely, seldom. Rassembler, v. a. 1. to collect, to bring together. Rassurer (se), v. r. 1. to take cour- age, to cheer up, to settle. Recevoir, v. a. 3. to receive. Rechigne, adj. gruff, awkward, re- pulsive. Recipiendaire, n. m. candidate, one chosen to a post. Reconnaitre, v. a. ir. 4. to recognize, know again. Redire, v. a. ir. to say again, re- peat. Redoute, adj. v. dreaded, feared. Reduire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je redui- sis), to reduce, to compel. Reellement, adv. really. Refuge, n. m. refuge, asylum. Refuser, v. a. 1. to refuse. Regard, n. m. look. Registre, n. m. register, book. Regner, v. n. 1. to reign, to prevail. Regret, n. m. regret. Reine, n. f. queen. Religion, n. f. religion. Relever, v. a. 1. to raise again. Relief, n. m. en relief, raised, em- Remerciment, n. m. thank. Remettre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je re- mis, p. remis), to replace, to give, to hand, to deliver. Remplir, v. a. 2. to fill, to fulfil. Remuer, v. a. 1. to move, to tfir. RE-RI. RI-8K. Renccntrer, v. a. 1. to meet. Bendre, v. a. 4. to render, to return, ■■■ back. tner, v. a. to inclose, to con- mmee, n. f. fame, report. yer, v. a. ir. 1. to send back. ■ i spread, spill, ' iked. vital. ; ■ply. . or cast 'tnsicer, reply. produce. B I r, v. n. 1. t« : ■'■ d. jo emnant. I . i : i »i to go ! I ir. 2. /« refw B ir. | p. rcvu), to see I ;j. ridicu- ■ adv. ridiculously. Rfcn, adv. nothing. Bite, n. m. ri/*. Rivage, n. m. *a»Jt. stow*. Rive, n. f. bunk, shore. Hire. v. n. ir. 4. (md. p. je ria, a ri), to laugh. n. in. root. Roi, n. in. Mag; : n. in. reed. Route, n. f. r.»ff in, D v M A m» i i »- 1. to »m, ft apjrar. (far. Sentiment, n n houghi Scntinclle, n. f. a , «. ; 1. ^<» tremble, shud- . m. treasure. Trfbu, n. f. fnAf. Triomphe. n. m. triumph. '. sorrowful. '•} num. three. :i ni. throne. Trap, adv. /«.> r;iw<^, /<*> many. Trouble, n. m. trouble, vexation, een asked which was the best method of . earning German, and was therefore fTnatlT itniigtllwl wlion Mr. Woodbury's New Method fell into my hand*. 1 m "ii the point of describing its merits, when the following review in the New York Tribune met my eye, which expresses fully what I wished to have said myself." From the A'eie York Tribune. "This work is distinguished for the extent and comprehensiveness of its plan. The form* Of the la n g M J gW . which are of the Amplest and BOM familiar character, are first i the sluileiil, without any frightful array of grninmatical combination', fT which he ll not yet prepared, A faithful study of the exercises, of whirl, there is a great variety In the flr«l portion of the work, planet the student in possession of a practical knowledge of Die language; while the synthetic summary aplaa tbt latter part Of the volume, presents the subject In new relations, (Jiving a view of the elements of the language as a comprehensive whole," II. WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE WITH German ; embracing a brief and comprehensive course of study, recognizing throughout, the laws that govern the language, ami by clear statement*, and appropriate exercises, rendering them thoroughly practical. By W. II. Woodbury. 76 cents. From Jotrph fV. Jrnke, Profettor of Language in the I'rbana L'nivrriity, Ohio. "I know of no I,.. iter Intn-l : I - mun language than Woodbury's IIM, Tb« more I examine and use It, the bolter am I satisfied with it. To the inimrroiis lastimonlali the book ha* - i, permit mo to add mine In respect lo the clearness of lla arrangement, and the ren Interesting manner In which It presents and treats its ml iblnlng simplicity with oomp r ehe na lyeneei ana depth. These merits are enbanri-d — and it Is no trilling praise for a school-book— by great excellence in paper, Ijrpography. and bludlng." From the Wkliotkfta. Saer* and Bibtitai Repository. "Mr. Woodhurj's fundamental Idea Is to unite the practical and IheorcUcal, to blend the principle sad the application, the doctrine ami the illustration. In (-.inclu- sion, we can confidently commend this grammar as one of the best wo havo seen on anv in. ■.)• rn language. It bean the marks of intelligent and conscientious labor on every page," HI. KEY TO WOODBURY'S SHORTER COURSE. fiO cent*. IV. WOODBURY'S ELEMENTARY GERMAN ii.l Poetry, ehietlj from Staiir beginners, and a copious and authentic work of reference for more advanced pupils. It has already been extensively adopted by judicious teachers " From the New York Commercial Advertiser. "This volume will be very useful to those who have begun to acquire a knowledge of the German. The selections have been taken from Goethe, Fichte, Klopstock, Heine, Richter, Lessing, and others, among the most celebrated German authors, and mostly relate to subjects which will interest the student, and repay him for the drudgery of translation." From the Literary Advertiser. "Woodbury's Grammars are highly esteemed for the manner in which the old- i fashioned analytic method of studying a language, and the synthetic way have been I happily combined. The peculiar advantage of this Reader, which contains copious selections from standard German writers, is its frequent references to the Author's Grammars. A full Vocabulary is added to the volume. The book is worthy of general adoption." From the New York Daily Times. "It is a most useful compend, and will do excellent service." From H. S. Noyes, A.M., Principal of Newberry Collegiate Institute, Vt. "Mr. Woodbury's text-books in German are so decidedly superior to those which we are at present using, that I shall adopt them forthwith, to be used in my German classes. Nothing could better suit my ideas of a proper system for teaching that lan- guage." 64 PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. Y » WOODBURY'S COMPLETE GERMAN SERIES. VI. WOODBURY'S GERMAN-ENGLISH AND English-German Rentier, for the use of German and English Sunday-Schools, Families and Private Learners. Containing complete B i the " Shorter Course" and "Neue Me- thout appears to us iiii-nt fur its j.urp •-.-. Tin- Author it :i practical teacher, whos. .he study of this best and most useful of I'.MCUi--." VH. WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD FOR GER- tiuhis to Learn English; or, Naiia Mothnde sur Erlernung der Engliachen Sprache, is ou the same plan as the corresponding ka for those who desire to learn German. By W. EL ;l.ury. $1. Fr*m .1. Shurat, Principal of Rapptknnoek .IcnJemy, Carolina Ofc, I i admirable work; clear in statements of prln- ;l : and m«sl happy In I - -laljrtle of (German with such a guide mast become rather n rawnllon Una ■ lott." From Pre/. P. II. Hermann, Troy Female Seminary. "Mr. Woodbury la entitled to the warm ■ r ~ and pupils for Uda work, and to U ■ ■■ GraauaattcV whloh I hare used with good success In teaching English to my countrymen." From Anton J. Vpwon. .1 M.. Vr ofentor of Rhetoric and Oratory, and formerly German in Hamilton College. he Gcrmnn language In this country, which Mr. WiMHlburv, a-> I think, li method.. ! ■• and which, I think, la WtB ( I VIII. ELWELL'S GERMAN DICTIONARY. A and complete Am nary >>f the English and Gen i the Pronunciation and .Ventilation method of Webster and Hcinsius. By Wm. n.lell r.hvell ' Motion. |1 50. "* ~"%V" riM l w rt MM Bapl • V)06 PreservationTech UBRARYOFCONCRESS : ' -111111 INGRESS 003 116 7516 :' -V, ■